1012 command line interface

795
T7000 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE MANUAL www.taqua.com 990-1012-001, Rev. B — Release 6.0.1

Upload: anon263153185

Post on 24-Apr-2015

527 views

Category:

Documents


13 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE MANUAL

www.taqua.com

990-1012-001, Rev. B — Release 6.0.1

Page 2: 1012 Command Line Interface

Taqua740 East Campbell Road, Suite 200Richardson, TX 75081Main Phone: (972) 692-1800TAC Support: 1-866-792-0198For software licensing information, e-mail Taqua Marketing at [email protected].

2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Taqua

All rights reserved.

T7000, dryIse, ISE, ISEHouse, OpenManager, and OM Server are trademarks of Taqua.

All products, names and services are trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Disclaimer of Taqua:

Material contained in this document is subject to change without notice. The material herein is solely forinformation purposes and does not represent a commitment by Taqua, or its representatives. Taqua has preparedthe information contained in this document solely for use by its employees, agents, and customers. Disseminationof this information and/or concepts to other parties is prohibited without the prior written consent of Taqua. In noevent will Taqua be liable for any incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing,performance or use of this material.

Taqua reserves the right to revise this publication in accordance with formal change control procedures defined byTaqua.

990-1012-001

Page 3: 1012 Command Line Interface

Table of Contents i

• • • • • •Table of Contents

Using CLI

CLI Commands Modified in Release 6.0.1 ...............................................1

CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1 ..................................................2

Using CLI through the OM .........................................................................5

Using Generic CLI Commands ..................................................................6

CLI Examples ..................................................................................................... 13

Command Syntax .....................................................................................26

Using CLI Security ....................................................................................27

Using CLI Remote Card Access ..............................................................28

Application Entities ..................................................................................29

Application Domain Object .................................................................................. 29

OID ...................................................................................................................... 30

Using Scripts ............................................................................................31

Viewing Scripts.................................................................................................... 31

Loading Scripts.................................................................................................... 31

Loading a Script on the Switch............................................................................ 32

Using dryISE .............................................................................................33

dryISE Commands .............................................................................................. 35

Using ISE ...................................................................................................46

ISE Commands ................................................................................................... 46

Alarms

Acknowledging Alarms ............................................................................51

Provisioning Alarms .................................................................................53

Querying Alarms .......................................................................................54

Events

Managing Events ......................................................................................57

Logging Events .........................................................................................58

Querying Events .......................................................................................60

Page 4: 1012 Command Line Interface

ii Table of Contents

Queries

Generic CLI Queries .................................................................................63

General Switch Queries ...........................................................................65

Database Queries .....................................................................................83

CDRs ..........................................................................................................89

Substitution ...............................................................................................92

Central Office ............................................................................................94

Protocols ...................................................................................................96

MGCP.................................................................................................................. 96

SIP....................................................................................................................... 98

SS7.................................................................................................................... 105

GR-303/PRI....................................................................................................... 113

FTRS ........................................................................................................120

Routing ....................................................................................................122

In-Service Upgrades ...............................................................................124

CALEA .....................................................................................................127

Provisioning

911 ............................................................................................................136

AIN ...........................................................................................................138

Before Provisioning AIN .................................................................................... 138

Provisioning AIN................................................................................................ 139

Account Codes .......................................................................................154

Account Code Overview.................................................................................... 154

Provisioning Account Codes ............................................................................. 155

BearerGroup ...........................................................................................163

CardConfiguration ..................................................................................165

CALEA .....................................................................................................174

Order of Provisioning......................................................................................... 175

Carriers ....................................................................................................196

Change Number Announcement ...........................................................211

Equipment Provisioning ........................................................................213

FTRS ........................................................................................................223

Trunk Groups ..........................................................................................233

Page 5: 1012 Command Line Interface

Table of Contents iii

CAS Trunk Groups ............................................................................................ 235

Clear Channel Trunk Groups ............................................................................ 252

Interface Groups................................................................................................ 258

Hunt Groups ...................................................................................................... 273

PRI Trunk Groups ............................................................................................. 286

IP Trunk Groups ................................................................................................ 307

SS7 Trunk Groups............................................................................................. 324

Outgoing Signaling Customization .......................................................345

Customization Provisioning Process ................................................................. 350

GR-303 .....................................................................................................351

MGCP .......................................................................................................358

MGCP Trunk Group .......................................................................................... 359

MediaGatewayProfile ........................................................................................ 364

MediaGateway .................................................................................................. 371

MGTerminationProfile ....................................................................................... 374

MGTermination.................................................................................................. 376

Digit Maps ......................................................................................................... 378

OfficeParams ..........................................................................................382

OutPulseProfile ................................................................................................. 397

Prefixes ....................................................................................................403

7-Digit Dialing Across NPA Boundaries ............................................................ 408

Rate Centers ...........................................................................................410

Screen Lists ............................................................................................415

SIP ............................................................................................................418

Setting up an IP Network Interface.................................................................... 419

Setting up a Subscriber Access SIP Endpoint .................................................. 420

Setting up a Network Gateway SIP Endpoint .................................................... 421

Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names ......................................................... 465

Shelf .........................................................................................................467

SS7 ...........................................................................................................470

General SS7 Order of Provisioning and Removing........................................... 473

SS7 Order of Provisioning for an Adjacent Node .............................................. 474

Tandem ANI Subscribers .......................................................................511

Route Lists ..............................................................................................514

Subscribers .............................................................................................530

RcfInfo ............................................................................................................... 570

Substitution .............................................................................................577

Voice Mail ................................................................................................586

Page 6: 1012 Command Line Interface

iv Table of Contents

Maintenance

General Maintenance .............................................................................597

Call Processing Maintenance ................................................................610

Substitution Maintenance ......................................................................626

Trunk Group Maintenance .....................................................................627

Device Maintenance ...............................................................................628

SS7 Maintenance ....................................................................................638

ISUP Maintenance ..................................................................................643

GR-303 Maintenance ..............................................................................649

AIN Maintenance .....................................................................................654

Test Panel Maintenance .........................................................................656

In Service Upgrades ...............................................................................658

Test Tone Maintenance ..........................................................................663

Automatic Number Announcement ......................................................665

SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance ................................................................666

Performance Monitoring

Active Call Measurements .....................................................................669

DS1 Monitoring.................................................................................................. 671

Performance Monitoring Maintenance .............................................................. 672

DS3 Monitoring .......................................................................................689

Performance Monitoring Maintenance .............................................................. 691

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals ...........................................................708

Using Counters.................................................................................................. 708

Well Known Peg and Usage Counter Process IDs ........................................... 709

MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters............................................................. 709

MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters............................................................. 710

MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters............................................................. 711

SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters ............................................................ 712

Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters ........................................................ 713

Clock Cards

CC2 ..........................................................................................................721

Page 7: 1012 Command Line Interface

Table of Contents v

Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

Span and Trunk Numbering (Decimal) .................................................739

Span and Trunk Numbering (Hexadecimal) .........................................740

Using Hexadecimal .................................................................................741

Appendix B: Protocols

Trunk Protocols ................................................................................................. 745

Other Protocols ................................................................................................. 748

Appendix C: Accessing the Switch

Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch .........................750

ISEHouse BOOTP Table................................................................................... 750

OM Client Switch Properties ............................................................................. 751

Terra Term Professional ........................................................................752

Local Access ..................................................................................................... 752

Remote Access ................................................................................................. 757

Procomm Plus ........................................................................................760

Local Access ..................................................................................................... 760

Remote Access ................................................................................................. 763

Open Manager Telnet ............................................................................767

Remote Access ................................................................................................. 767

HyperTerminal ........................................................................................768

Local Access ..................................................................................................... 768

Page 8: 1012 Command Line Interface

vi Table of Contents

Page 9: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 1990-1012-001

1Using CLI

TipPrint out pages in this chapter to use as cheat sheets/memory aids.

You can use the commands in this guide by connecting to a T7000 using Telnet through the OM or ProComm. See “Appendix C: Accessing the Switch” on page 749, and “Appendix D: Using Hyper-Terminal” on page 815.

CLI Commands Modified in Release 6.0.1

The following 6.0.1 commands have changed, relative to their 6.0 counterparts. In most cases, new mandatory parameters have been added to the command, which will break any scripts using them.

W A R N I N G

Before running an existing script on a switch running a 6.0.1 load, the script should be inspected for the presence of these CLI commands and/or objects. If a modified command and/or object is found, be sure to edit the script and test any changes made.

NOTE: If you are upgrading from Release 5.0 or earlier, the CardConfiguration object must be the 1st object created in your script. See “CardConfiguration” on page 165 for details.

create MediaGateway now requires a bearerGrpKey parameter, see “MediaGateway” on page 371.

SipEsgwEndpoint now requires a bearerGrpKey parameter, see “SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint” on page 449.

SipNgwEndpoint now requires a bearerGrpKey parameter, see “SIP Network Gateway Endpoint” on page 459.

RcfInfo now requires a remoteDN parameter, see “RcfInfo” on page 570.

Page 10: 1012 Command Line Interface

CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1

2 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1

The following 6.0 commands are no longer supported.

In most cases, the objects affected by these commands have moved into Generic CLI (see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.).

W A R N I N G

Before running an existing 6.0 script on a 6.0.1 switch, the script should be inspected for the presence of the following CLI commands. Please delete any command found in the following list and replace it with its Release 6.0.1 equivalent before running the script.

Deleted CLI Commands in Release 6.0.1

If you used this command in 6.0… Use this command in 6.0.1

addRDTSpan insertInto InterfaceGroup

addScreenList create ScreenList

addToScreenList insertInto ScreenList

changeAuditList insertInto ShelfdeleteFrom Shelf

createCodecProfileList create CodecProfileList

createProfile create FTRSProfile

createRDT create InterfaceGroup

createSCCPNode create SCCPNode

createSCCPSubsys insertInto SCCPNode

createTCAPService create TCAP ServiceGTTcreate TCAPServicePCSSN

deleteProfile destroy FTRSProfile

deleteCodecProfileList destroy CodecProfileList

deleteRDT destroy InterfaceGroup

deleteSCCPNode destroy SCCPNode

deleteSCCPSubsys deleteFrom SCCPNode

deleteTCAPService destroy TCAP ServiceGTTdestroy TCAPServicePCSSN

disableAudits modify Shelf

dispSCCPNode query SCCPNode

dispSCCPSubsys query SCCPNode

dispTCAPService query TCAPServiceGTTquery TCAPServicePCSSN

enableAudits modify Shelf

insertCodecProfileToList insertInto CodecProfileList

Page 11: 1012 Command Line Interface

CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 3990-1012-001

insertInto MediaGateway insertInto BearerGroup

modifyProfile modify FTRSProfile

nailUp create NailedUpCircuit

queryCfbInfo query CFBInfo

queryCfdInfo query CFDInfo

queryCffInfo query CFFInfo

queryCfvInfo query CFVInfo

queryDbMgrs queryDb

queryIGMiscOptions query InterfaceGroup

queryIGs query InterfaceGroup

queryOfcMiscOptions query OfficeParms

queryProfile query FTRSProfile

queryRDTObject query InterfaceGroup

querySCFInfo query SCFInfo

queryScreenList query ScreenList

querySdInfo query SdInfo

queryShelfInfo query Shelf

querySCCPNode query SCCPNode

querySCCPSubsys query SCCPNode

queryTrkGrpMiscOptions query CASTrunkGroupquery CLRTrunkGroupquery HuntGroupquery IPTrunkGroupquery MGCPTrunkGroupquery PRITrunkGroupquery SS7TrunkGroup

remAllFromScreenList deleteFrom Screen List

remFromScreenList deleteFrom Screen List

removeCodecProfileFromList deleteFrom CodecProfileList

removeRDTSpan deleteFrom InterfaceGroup

setAuditPeriod modify Shelf

setCommFailureShelfIds no replacement

setCmtsMiscOption setMisc PacketCableCmts

setEOCFlowThru modify InterfaceGroup

setIGHdlcOption modify InterfaceGroup

setIGMiscOption setMisc InterfaceGroup

setInterfaceGroupTimer modify InterfaceGroup

setNetRef modify Shelf netref1OIDmodify Shelf netref2OID

setNextRDTSpan setNextRDTRoute

setOfcMiscOption setMisc OfficeParms

setTCAPServiceTimer modify TCAPServiceGTTmodify TCAPServicePCSSN

Deleted CLI Commands in Release 6.0.1

If you used this command in 6.0… Use this command in 6.0.1

Page 12: 1012 Command Line Interface

CLI Commands Retired in Release 6.0.1

4 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setTdmSpeed modify Shelf tdmSpeed

setTrunkGroupMiscOptions setMisc CASTrunkGroupsetMisc CLRTrunkGroupsetMisc HuntGroupsetMisc IPTrunkGroupsetMisc MGCPTrunkGroupsetMisc PRITrunkGroupsetMisc SS7TrunkGroup

unnail destroy NailedUpCircuit

Deleted CLI Commands in Release 6.0.1

If you used this command in 6.0… Use this command in 6.0.1

Page 13: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using CLI through the OM

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 5990-1012-001

Using CLI through the OM

The T7000 OpenManager (OM) accesses the command line interface for the system using Telnet. Use Telnet to enter commands that perform advanced maintenance functions on a card on the T7000.

For other ways of establishing a remote CLI connection, see “Appendix C: Accessing the Switch” on page 749, and “Appendix D: Using Hyper-Terminal” on page 815.

Step Action

1 From the Network View of the OM click Network View.

2 Right-click a T7000 graphic to which you want to connect.

A pop-up menu appears.

3 Select Telnet. The Telnet client program appears. Telnet defaults to the last card with which it had a session.

To connect to a new card:

• Select Connect > Remote System.

• In the Host Name field, enter the IP address of the new card to which to connect or select it from the drop-list.

• Click Connect.

Page 14: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

6 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Using Generic CLI Commands

Generic CLI commands work with a set of database objects. Generic CLI commands have the general form:

command <dbObject> <key> [optional parameters]

To view:

• a list of the Generic CLI commands, enter helpCLI

• a list of the database objects that a Generic CLI command operates on, as well as the general syntax for that command, enter the command name

• a command’s parameters, enter the command and the dbObject

• help on a specific parameter, enter a question mark (?)in place of that parameter

command action usage

create creates an object create <dbObject> <key> <required parms> [optional parms]

destroy destroys an object destroy <dbObject> <key>

modify modifies an attribute of an object

modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <value>modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <bitName> <value>

setMisc sets a miscellaneous option for an object. Use this command to set options added by In Service Upgrades (ISUs)

setMisc <objectType> <key> <miscOptionAttr> <value>

query displays an object query <dbObject> <key> [attribute]

insertInto inserts an object into another object’s nested collection

insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subVal>insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subObjType> <requiredParms>

TipUse a subkey of 1 to insert an object at the start of a collection. Use a subkey of -1 to insert an object at the end of a collection.

deleteFrom deletes an object from another object’s nested collection

deleteFrom <dbObject> <key> <attribute> <subKey>

Page 15: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 7990-1012-001

lock places an object (device) in an out-of-service administrative state.

lock <dbObject> <key>

TipLock a Trunk Group before destroying it, and lock a Trunk Group facility before deleting it from a Trunk Group.

unlock places an object (device) in an in-service administrative state

unlock <dbObject> <key>

shutdown places an object (device) in an administrative state where it does not accept new service requests, but keeps performing current activities until done

shutdown <dbObject> <key>

status displays current activity on that object

status <dbObject> <key>

command action usage

Page 16: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

8 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Entering String Values

When the attribute definition calls for a string, a single word can be simply entered, as the following example demonstrates:

create Carrier Sprint 0033<done>

However, when a string consists of two or more words, you must enclose the words in double quotes:

create Carrier "Sprint Canada" 6677<done>

There are also times when you do not want to assign a string to an attribute. This is different from assigning an empty string (e.g., “”) to the attribute. To show that you do not want a string assigned to the attribute, enter a period “.”, as the following example demonstrates:

create SubscriberYou did not provide enough parameters to complete the commandUsage: create Subscriber <key> <lastName> <firstName> [restrict] [subscribedServices] [interLATACarrier] [intraLATACarrier] [rateCenter] [facility]facility:[TDMFacility] [facilityOID][GR303Facility] [RDTName] [crv][MGCPFacility] [MGTermination][SIPFacility] [IPTrunkGroup] [username] [password]

create Subscriber 8176809148 Rufus Leaking 0 0 . . rc1 TDMFacility line-23<done>

In the previous example, we did not assign an interLATACarrier or an intraLATACarrier to the subscriber.

Entering Numeric Values

Generic CLI inspects the attribute definition of each attribute in order to determine if the value entered for a particular attribute is legal.

For example, consider the Carrier object. Each Carrier has a code associated with it that must be 4 digits long. The following example fails because the Carrier code is entered not long enough:

create Carrier "Stickdog Telecom" 613 ************************ERROR*****************************************************************************************************ClassName+AttrName: Carriercode Value: 613 - String length must be between 4 and 4.****************************************************************** ****************************************************************

The command succeeds with a Carrier code of the correct length:

create Carrier "Stickdog Telecom" 5613<done>

Page 17: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 9990-1012-001

Optional Parameters

Starting in Release 6.0, the create command supports optional parameters.

If, after entering the last required parameter for an object, the remaining parameters are all optional, you can simply press the Enter key to complete the command.

You may also enter one or more optional parameters, then press the Enter key to skip the remaining optional parameters.

You can not, however, “skip” over one or more optional parameters.

You can quickly identify the optional parameters of any object by entering

create object

where object is the name of the object to be created. The required parameters are enclosed in angle brackets, e.g., <requiredParameter>, and the optional parameters are enclosed in square brackets, e.g., [optionalParameter].

For example, to see which parameters are optional in the Subscriber object, enter the following command:

create Subscriber

You did not provide enough parameters to complete the commandUsage: create Subscriber <key> <lastName> <firstName> [restrict][subscribedServices] [interLATACarrier] [intraLATACarrier] [rateCenter][facility]facility:[TDMFacility] [facilityOID][GR303Facility] [RDTName] [crv][MGCPFacility] [MGTermination][SIPFacility] [IPTrunkGroup] [username] [password]

Note that restrict, subscribedServices, interLATACarrier, intraLATACarrier, rateCenter and facility are all optional parameters.

The following command creates a new Subscriber, and does not enter any of the optional parameters:

create Subscriber 9726921800 Support Taqua

Assume in this version of the command that we want to assign a rateCenter to the subscriber, but not the optional facility:

create Subscriber 9726921800 Support Taqua 0 0 . . rc1

Note that we had to enter a value for restrict, subscribed services, interLATACarrier, and intraLATACarrier, even though those attributes are optional.

Page 18: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

10 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Limitiations

Generic CLI is unable to modify nested bitfields. A bitfield is an attribute where each binary digit (bit) is a separate attribute in its own right. A nested bitfield is a bitfield contained in one object that is itself contained in another object.

The following examples illustrates the problem, but may make more sense after reading the “Modify Example” on page 14.

The Carrier Object (see“Carriers” on page 196) has a restrictions attribute that is a bitfield. The restrictions attribute is not nested, so it can be manipulated directly by Generic CLI. The following example:

• queries the restrictions attribute. The NO_DA bit is set

• modifies the restrictions attribute, turning the NO_DA bit off

• modifies the restrictions attribute, turning the NO_PRE_SUB bit on

• query the restrictions attribute. The NO_PRE_SUB bit is set.

query Carrier WorldComm restrictions<52e4a34>restrictions........(BITFIELD) -> 40 .NO_DA

modify Carrier WorldComm restrictions NO_DA 0

modify Carrier WorldComm restrictions NO_PRE_SUB 1

query Carrier WorldComm restrictions<52e4a34>restrictions........(BITFIELD) -> 8 .NO_PRE_SUB

Note that in the foregoing example, the modify command was able to refer to the attribute in the bitfield directly by name.

Now consider the IP Trunk Group object (see “IP Trunk Groups” on page 307). The IP Trunk Group object contains an options attribute, which itself is a SipNgwEndpointOptions object. The options object contains a supportEarlyCutThrough attribute, which is a bitfield.

query IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options<52e57cc>options....................<52d3180>

<52d3180> SIPOptions plusOnePrepend....................FALSE doCallingNameDip..................FALSE screenDNChoice....................SCREEN_DN routeAdvance......................FALSE supportEarlyCutThrough............(BITFIELD) -> 0 sendCPN...........................CPN_DEFAULTDN sendUserForNoANI..................SEND_ANONYMOUS sendCarrierId.....................OFF routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER callingPartyPresentationDisplay...SEND_ANONYMOUS revertToPrimaryFE.................TRUE bypassVmNotifyDeliveryCheck.......OFF

Page 19: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 11990-1012-001

Because the supportEarlyCutThrough bitfield is contained in the options object, which is contained in the IP Trunk Group object, it is a nested bitfield. Generic CLI is unable to modify nested bitfield attributes by name, as the following example shows.

First we use the modify command to tell us the names of the bitfield attributes:

modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThroughYou did not provide enough parameters to complete the command

<supportEarlyCutThrough> : Type is Bitfield. These options can be turned on or off

Possible values: 1(1) = SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru 2(2) = SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru

Next we attempt to modify supportEarlyCutThrough attribute

modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough SIPtoSS7EarlyCutThruSIPtoSS7EarlyCutThru is not a proper hex value for this nested bitfield

We can not refer to the attribute by name, as the previous example just demonstrated. We can, however, refer to it by value:

From the 1st modify example, the value of SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru is 1 Generic CLI will accept that value, as the following two commands demonstrates:

modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough 1

query IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options<52e57cc>options....................<52d3180>

<52d3180> SIPOptions plusOnePrepend....................FALSE doCallingNameDip..................FALSE screenDNChoice....................SCREEN_DN routeAdvance......................FALSE supportEarlyCutThrough............(BITFIELD) -> 1 .SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru sendCPN...........................CPN_DEFAULTDN sendUserForNoANI..................SEND_ANONYMOUS sendCarrierId.....................OFF routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER callingPartyPresentationDisplay...SEND_ANONYMOUS revertToPrimaryFE.................TRUE bypassVmNotifyDeliveryCheck.......OFF

Note, however, when we modify a bitfield in this manner, we update the value of all of the bitfield attributes. The following example sets the SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru bit, but it also clears the SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru bit

Page 20: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

12 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough 2

query IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options<52e57cc>options....................<52d3180>

<52d3180> SIPOptions plusOnePrepend....................FALSE doCallingNameDip..................FALSE screenDNChoice....................SCREEN_DN routeAdvance......................FALSE supportEarlyCutThrough............(BITFIELD) -> 2 .SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru sendCPN...........................CPN_DEFAULTDN sendUserForNoANI..................SEND_ANONYMOUS sendCarrierId.....................OFF routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER callingPartyPresentationDisplay...SEND_ANONYMOUS revertToPrimaryFE.................TRUE bypassVmNotifyDeliveryCheck.......OFF

In order to set both bits, we have to add the values (1 + 2) together, and set the result:

modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough 3query IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options<52e57cc>options....................<52d3180>

<52d3180> SIPOptions plusOnePrepend....................FALSE doCallingNameDip..................FALSE screenDNChoice....................SCREEN_DN routeAdvance......................FALSE supportEarlyCutThrough............(BITFIELD) -> 3 .SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru .SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru sendCPN...........................CPN_DEFAULTDN sendUserForNoANI..................SEND_ANONYMOUS sendCarrierId.....................OFF routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER callingPartyPresentationDisplay...SEND_ANONYMOUS revertToPrimaryFE.................TRUE bypassVmNotifyDeliveryCheck.......OFF

Page 21: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 13990-1012-001

CLI Examples

Most of the CLI commands are self-explanatory, but the syntax for some of them can be a little complicated. Let’s take a look at a few example commands to see how they work:

Create Example

Suppose we want to add a MediaGateway object. The first thing we can do is query the system to see what other MediaGateway objects already exist.

835> create MediaGateway Existing keys: mg1 mg2

If we continue the current naming convention, we will create mg3. We do not know at this point what the required parameters are, but Generic CLI knows, and will prompt us as we go along. Let’s get started:

836> create MediaGateway mg3 You did not provide enough parameters to complete the commandUsage: create MediaGateway <key> <profileName> <domain> <nearEndNiOid> <profileName> : Available keys in tMGCPProfileDbMgr: mgp

Let’s try the command again, this time adding the key (mg3) and the profileName. Note that Generic CLI helpfully provided us with a list of all existing profileName keys:

839> create MediaGateway mg3 mgp You did not provide enough parameters to complete the commandUsage: create MediaGateway <key> <profileName> <domain> <nearEndNiOid> <domain> : Type is String with length 1 to 64

Assume, for this example, that we know the domain (which will be “dm5”), but don’t know the format of the nearEndOid parameter. Adding a question mark after the domain provides additional information about this variable:

842> create MediaGateway mg3 mgp dm5 ? Usage: create MediaGateway <key> <profileName> <domain> <nearEndNiOid> <nearEndNiOid> : Type is Valid OID

Now that we know the type of the newEndNiOid parameter, we can finish the command:

843> create MediaGateway mg3 mgp dm5 fe-0 <done>

Page 22: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

14 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Modify Example

For this example, we want to modify one of our MediaGatewayProfiles.

We start by querying the system to see which profiles have already been created:

160> query MediaGatewayProfile ? <key> Existing keys: ac mgp

We see the mgp profile key from the create example, so let’s work with that one.

161> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp You did not provide enough parameters to complete the commandUsage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <value>Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <bitName> <value>

<attrName> : Available parameters:

terminationPrefix requestedInfo quarantineHandling supportedPackages signalSupport DLCXOptions encodeDigitMap THIST retransmitTime keepAliveTime MAX1 MAX2 TMAX minRTOThresh maxRTOThresh responseAckParam enablePiggyback piggybackTime transLowWaterMark transHighWaterMark provRespTime responseRetransEnabled

Generic CLI returns a list of modifiable attributes. Let’s assume we want to modify the DLCXOptions attribute. First, we would like to see the current value:

163> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp

<2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfilekey......................"mgp"terminationPrefix........"BWgw"requestedInfo............(BITFIELD) -> 400 .EVENT_STATESquarantineHandling.......LOOPsupportedPackages........(BITFIELD) -> 7 .LINE .GENERIC .DTMFsignalSupport............(BITFIELD) -> 0DLCXOptions..............PREFIX_TERM_IDencodeDigitMap...........LOWERCASETHIST....................7530 (30000)retransmitTime...........c8 (200)keepAliveTime............ea60 (60000)

Page 23: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 15990-1012-001

MAX1.....................7 (7)MAX2.....................b (11)TMAX.....................4e20 (20000)minRTOThresh.............3e8 (1000)164> maxRTOThresh.............fa0 (4000)responseAckParam.........INCLUDEresponseAckNum...........a (10)enablePiggyback..........DISABLEpiggybackTime............c8 (200)transLowWaterMark........19 (25)transHighWaterMark.......32 (50)provRespTime.............c8 (200)responseRetransEnabled...YES

Generic CLI can tell us what other values the DLCXOption attribute can assume:

166> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions167> Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <value>

<DLCXOptions> : Type is Integer

Possible values: 0 = NO_DLCX 1 = PREFIX_TERM_ID 2 = PREFIX_STAR 3 = STAR_ONLY

We can change an Integer attribute by either value or by name. First, modify the attribute by value:

167> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions 2 <done>

Note that, as in the next command, we can query a particular attribute directly:

168> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOPtions

<2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfilekey......................"mgp"

DLCXOptions..............PREFIX_STAR

Next, let’s modify the attribute by name:

169> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions STAR_ONLY <done>

170> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOPtions

<2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfilekey......................"mgp"DLCXOptions..............STAR_ONLY

Page 24: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

16 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Generic CLI “knows” the permissible values for each attribute, and will not allow an invalid value to be entered, as the following examples illustrate:

171> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions 5*******************ERROR************************************************************************************ClassName+AttrName: MediaGatewayProfileDLCXOptions Value 5 - Attribute not in value list.**************************************************************************************************************

172> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp DLCXOptions STAR_ONEUsage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <value>

<DLCXOptions> : Type is Integer

Possible values: 0 = NO_DLCX 1 = PREFIX_TERM_ID 2 = PREFIX_STAR 3 = STAR_ONLY

The preceding commands worked with integer attributes, but not all attributes are integers. Some attributes are bitfields. A bitfield is a collection of up to 32 flags. Since a flag is either “on” or “off”, a bitfield is a way to store a lot of information in the switch without taking up a lot of memory.

You can set or reset the value of one flag in a bitfield without disturbing the values of the other flags. Let’s see how that works with our MediaGatewayProfile object.

Recall that the requestedInfo attribute of the MediaGatewayProfile object is a bitfield:

63> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp

<2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfilekey......................"mgp"terminationPrefix........"BWgw"requestedInfo............(BITFIELD) -> 400 .EVENT_STATES

The current status of the requestedInfo bitfield is that one flag (the EVENT_STATUS flag) is “on”. The other flags in the bitfield are “off”.

Page 25: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 17990-1012-001

Let’s see what the other flags in the requestedInfo attribute are:

175> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp requestedInfo Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <bitName> <value>

<requestedInfo> : Type is Bitfield. These options can be turned on or off

Possible values: 1 = REQUESTED_EVENTS 2 = DIGIT_MAP 4 = SIGNAL_REQUESTS 8 = REQUEST_IDENTIFIER 16 = NOTIFIED_ENTITY 32 = CONNECTION_IDENTIFIER 64 = DETECT_EVENTS 128 = OBSERVED_EVENTS 256 = VERSION_SUPPORTED 512 = REASON_CODE 1024 = EVENT_STATES 2048 = MAX_MGCP_DATAGRAM 4096 = CAPABILITIES

Since at this point we don’t know the valid values to turn a bitmap attribute ‘on’ or ‘off’, we can ask Generic CLI:

186> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp requestedInfo DIGIT_MAP 4096 Valid values for bitfield specifiers are 0 and 1Usage: modify <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <bitName> <value>

We can only modify a bitfield attribute by name:

188> modify MediaGatewayProfile mgp requestedInfo DIGIT_MAP 1 <done>

189> query MediaGatewayProfile mgp

<2d2f488> MediaGatewayProfilekey......................"mgp"terminationPrefix........"BWgw"requestedInfo............(BITFIELD) -> 402 .DIGIT_MAP .EVENT_STATESquarantineHandling.......LOOP

Page 26: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

18 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

insertInto Example

The insertInto command is used to add an object or a value into a collection (such as a list object) that is part of another object.

Consider the OfficeParms object. When it is created, it contains an list of countryCodes, as the following command shows:

query OfficeParms 123 countryCodes<69cd7fc>countryCodes..................<69d8e98>

<69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39)[output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 101 (257) 58 (88): 102 (258) 59 (89): 103 (259) 5a (90): 104 (260) 5b (91): 105 (261)[rest of output snipped to conserve space]

Page 27: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 19990-1012-001

Suppose we want to add the country code for Uganda (256) to the countryCodes list, but we are unsure how to go about it. Generic CLI “knows” the parameters, and will prompt us if we ask:

insertInto OfficeParmsYou did not provide enough parameters to complete the commandUsage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subVal>Usage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subObjType> <requiredPams>

Existing keys: 123

There is only one OfficeParms object in our switch, and it’s name is “123”, so let’s add that to our command:

insertInto OfficeParms 123Usage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subVal>Usage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <subObjType> <requiredPams>

<attrName> : Available parameters:

OSSInfoDigits countryCodes

OfficeParms has two collections, but we are dealing with countryCodes, so let’s add that to our command:

insertInto OfficeParms 123 countryCodesUsage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKUsage: insertInto <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey> <ms>

<subKey> : Type is Integer

<69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39)[output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 101 (257) 58 (88): 102 (258) 59 (89): 103 (259) 5a (90): 104 (260) 5b (91): 105 (261)[rest of output snipped to conserve space]

Page 28: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

20 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

We need two additional parameters, subKey and subObjType. The first required parameter is subKey, and it is an integer. A list is keyed by the index of the item that is being added. We can add our item to the start of the list with a subKey of 1, or to the end of the list with a subkey of -1, or anywhere in the middle of the list with the appropriate value1.

In this case, the countryCodes are already sorted, so maintenance will be easier if we insert the country code for Uganda (256) with a subkey of 87.

insertInto OfficeParms 123 countryCodes 87 256

Now, let’s check our work:

query OfficeParms 123 countryCodes<69cd7fc>countryCodes..................<69d8e98>

<69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39)[output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 100 (256) 58 (88): 101 (257) 59 (89): 102 (258) 5a (90): 103 (259) 5b (91): 104 (260) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]

Note that the CountryCodeList now has a new entry at index 87, which corresponds to country code for Uganda that we added.

1.The subKey for a list is the index where you want to add the subValue. If you add a subValue to the middle of a list, the existing subValue at that index is not replaced, but simply moved back one position in the list.

Page 29: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 21990-1012-001

deleteFrom example

This example continues from the previous example. Let’s say want to delete country code 259:

query OfficeParms 123 countryCodes<69cd7fc>countryCodes..................<69d8e98>

<69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39)[output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 100 (256) 58 (88): 101 (257) 59 (89): 102 (258) 5a (90): 103 (259) 5b (91): 104 (260) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]

Let’s start with the basic command:

deleteFrom OfficeParms 123Usage: deleteFrom <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey>

<attrName> : Available parameters:

OSSInfoDigits countryCodes

It should come as no surprise that we will be deleting from the countryCodes list, so let’s add that to our command:

Page 30: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

22 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

deleteFrom OfficeParms 123 countryCodesUsage: deleteFrom <dbObject> <key> <attrName> <subKey>

<subKey> : Type is Integer

<69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1) 2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39)[output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 100 (256) 58 (88): 101 (257) 59 (89): 102 (258) 5a (90): 103 (259) 5b (91): 104 (260) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]

Note that Generic CLI shows us the entries in the countryCodes list.

Since we are dealing with a list, the subKey is the index of the item to be deleted. We want to delete country code 259, which is at index position 90 in the list, so the subKey is 90.

deleteFrom OfficeParms 123 countryCodes 103

Let’s check our work:

query OfficeParms 123 countryCodes<69cd7fc>countryCodes..................<69d8e98>

<69d8e98> CountryCodeList (3661836 items) -> 1 (1): 1 (1)

Page 31: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 23990-1012-001

2 (2): 7 (7) 3 (3): 14 (20) 4 (4): 1b (27) 5 (5): 1e (30) 6 (6): 1f (31) 7 (7): 20 (32) 8 (8): 21 (33) 9 (9): 22 (34) a (10): 24 (36) b (11): 27 (39)[output snipped to conserve space] 51 (81): fa (250) 52 (82): fb (251) 53 (83): fc (252) 54 (84): fd (253) 55 (85): fe (254) 56 (86): ff (255) 57 (87): 100 (256) 58 (88): 101 (257) 59 (89): 102 (258) 5a (90): 104 (260) 5b (91): 105 (261) [rest of output snipped to conserve space]

Note that deleting the item at index 90 in the list resulted in the remaining entries in the list moving up one position.

Page 32: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

24 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

query example

This example illustrates how to query a particular attribute of an object. This can be useful when you are only interested in viewing a small part of a large object.

Consider, for example, the OfficeParms object. Because it has a large CountryCodeList, a simple query will result in hundreds of lines of information. But if you were only interested in the ServiceCodes attribute, you could instruct Generic CLI to display only that portion of the of the OfficeParms object:

query OfficeParms taquaTexas serviceCodes<4fc7808>serviceCodes..................<4fc8c00>

<4fc8c00> ServiceCodes Cfwd_On............."*72" Cfwd_Off............"*73" CfBusy_On..........."*90" CfBusy_Off.........."*91" CfNoAns_On.........."*92" CfNoAns_Off........."*93" Creject_On.........."*77" Creject_Off........."*87" Cblock_On..........."*60" Cblock_Off.........."*80" Caccept_On.........."*64" Caccept_Off........."*84" Ctrace.............."*57" CidBlock............"*67" CancelCw............"*70" CidUnBlock.........."*82" Creturn_On.........."*69" MsgRetrieve........."*83" Cffixed_On.........."*94" Cffixed_Off........."*95" PriorityCall_On....."*61" PriorityCall_Off...."*81" SpeedDial8.........."*74" SpeedDial30........."*75" SpeedDial8Review...."*78" SpeedDial30Review..."*79" SCFwd_On............"*63" SCFwd_Off..........."*85" Cback_On............"*66" Creturn_Off........."*89" Cback_Off..........."*86"

Page 33: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Generic CLI Commands

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 25990-1012-001

setMisc example

Previous to Release 6.0.1, different objects had individual commands to perform this function. However, all objects that support miscellaneous parameters have been enhanced to use this CLI command.

Invoke this command without any parameters to get a usage string and a list of object that support the command:

setMiscUsage: setmisc <dbObject> <key> <miscOption> <value>

This action can be performed on the following:

CASTrunkGroup OfficeParmsCLRTrunkGroup PacketCableCmtsInterfaceGroup PCMMCmtsIPTrunkGroup PRITrunkGroupMGCPTrunkGroup SS7TrunkGroup

The following example shows how to use the setMisc command for the OfficeParms object to discover what miscOption(s) can be set, and the permissible values for the option.

setMisc OfficeParmsYou did not provide enough parameters to complete the commandUsage: setmisc <dbObject> <key> <miscOption> <value>

Existing keys: taquaTexas

setMisc OfficeParms taquaTexasYou did not provide enough parameters to complete the commandUsage: setmisc <dbObject> <key> <miscOption> <value>

Available miscOptions: TestAttribute

setMisc OfficeParms taquaTexas TestAttributeUsage: setmisc <dbObject> <key> <miscOption> <value>

<TestAttribute> : Type is Integer

Possible values: 0 = NO 1 = YES

setMisc OfficeParms taquaTexas TestAttribute YES<done>

Page 34: 1012 Command Line Interface

Command Syntax

26 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Command Syntax

• Commands are case-sensitive.

• Do not use symbols. For example, do not enter AT&T as a carrier name. Instead, enter ATT.

Syntax Description

< > required parameter, must be entered at the command line

[ ] optional parameter, may be entered at the command line

“ ” text string parameters that include spaces. For example, to enter a trunk group that is named Trunk Group 1, enter “Trunk Group 1” in the command line

# comments made by the script writer. The T7000 does not process any text following #

%c Typically, each command creates, runs, and terminates as a separate process. When %c appears at the end of a command, the command is called as a function in the same process as the shell.

NOTE: %c is not recommended for Generic CLI commands. See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

prompt prompting text printed by the system when you need to enter additional information to complete a command

Page 35: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using CLI Security

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 27990-1012-001

Tip

Using CLI Security

When the T7000 returns SYSERR for a command that should complete successfully, the user account does not have permission to perform that task.

Use levels to define permission for T7000 users.

Login Process

Switch files have the permissions level of the user that created them. To modify a file you must have the same or higher permission level as the file’s creator.

Level Name Description

Level 0 Super user This level is the highest permission level. There is only one super user account in the system. This user can perform any task on the switch and create and remove the other levels of users. This is the only user who can remove files from flash memory.

Reserve this user for adding and removing other users.

Level 1 Administrator Accounts with this permission level can perform any system task other than creating Super user account, or accessing files created by the Super user.

Taqua recommends this level for switch engineers.

Level 2 User Accounts with this permission level can only invoke CLI commands. A user account cannot invoke low-level system functions.

Taqua recommends this level for crafts people.

Step Action

1 Modify the super user password. See “passwd” on page 47.

2 Create level 1 administrator(s). See “adduser” on page 48.

3 Create level 2 user(s). See “adduser” on page 48.

4 Log off from the super user account. See “<Ctrl> + D” on page 46.

5 Log in again as an Administrator. See “_login” on page 46.

Page 36: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using CLI Remote Card Access

28 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Using CLI Remote Card Access

Use CLI remote card access to run the command line console for a particular card from any other card within a T7000. For example, you could be physically connected to card 5, issue the remote access command and access card 3 without moving the connection. This feature allows diagnosis of crashed or malfunctioning cards and can be run from any type of connection (CRAFT port or Telnet). The target card does not have to be fully booted to connect; you can connect to cards running the ThinISE boot monitor.

The remote diagnostic device starts a shell on the target card. The standard input and output for the target card are rerouted to the host card. All communications between the cards is through the message bus. All output from the target card will be displayed on the host card.

A Telnet session in ThinISE automatically reconnects if the card is reset. The session does not re-establish if power is removed from the card.

To start a remote card access session:

Command Description

<Ctrl> + <X> Reset the host card. Use this command to force a disconnect when <Ctrl> + <D> does not work.

<Ctrl> + <D> forces disconnect from a remote access session

NOTE: a second <Ctrl> + <D> will log you out of the session on the local card!

Step Action

1 Connect to the T7000 host card.

2 At the T7000 CLI prompt, type rsh <cardID> (cardID needs to be in hexadecimal format) to connect to the target card.

3 Complete any diagnostics.

4 Enter <Ctrl> + <D> to exit remote card access.

Page 37: 1012 Command Line Interface

Application Entities

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 29990-1012-001

Application Entities

The T7000 application software makes heavy use of Application Domain Objects and Object Identifiers, both of which are explained in the following sections.

Application Domain Object

A query interface is provided so that Application Domain Object (ADO) data from any card is accessible to both the user interface, and to other programs from any other card. Example ADOs are:

• Line — subscriber line interface circuit (SLIC), only available on LTCs

• Span — T1 terminated to a Dallas Semiconductor DS2152 framer

• Trunk — individual DS0 timeslot (1 of 24) on a T1 span

• DSP — Digital Signal Processor

• Card — T7000 front card

• TDM — Time Division Multiplexed switch

• HDLC — High-level Data Link Control, the OM186 communications controller or transwitch

• DS3 — 28 T1s, only available on BICs

Each ADO type has configurable attributes that are unique to that particular device type. If no prior configuration has taken place when a card is initially powered up, an ADO is created with a set of reasonable default values for each configurable device. Once modifications have been made to the default values, the new values reside in flash memory and subsequent power-up cycles do not require reconfiguration.

Page 38: 1012 Command Line Interface

Application Entities

30 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

OID

An object identifier (OID) is an encoded 32-bit value that uniquely identifies each ADO in a T7000 network.

View the actual value of an OID using dispOID.

The CLI uses readable forms of the OID, specified by the dash-separated string "Device-Instance-Card-Shelf" where:

• Device — Card, Line, Trunk, Span, DSP, TDM, HDLC, DS3, FE

• Instance — 0-based instance number of the device. For trunks instance is the timeslot.

• Card — card number on which the device resides. Card numbers are 1-based (1-20).

• Shelf — T7000 number (1-255)

If you leave out OID fields, the T7000 uses a “local” default. If you do not enter a card OID, the default is the local card; unless the command is a card OID, the default is the instance value and the shelf defaults to local.

card device values example/explanation

LTC line

trunk

span

0-31

0-47

0-1

Line-2-1-22 is the 3rd line on card 1 shelf 22

24 timeslots x 2 DS1s, Trunk-33-2-1 is the 33rd trunk on the 2nd card in shelf 1

Span-0-1-4 is the 1st span on card 1 shelf 4

TIC trunk

span

0-383

0-15

24 timeslots x 16 DS1s

Span-2-1-8 is the 3rd span on card 1 shelf 8

TIC2 trunk

span

0-479

0-19

24 timeslots x 20 DS1s

Span-19-6-1 is the 20th span on card 6 shelf 1

BIC DS3 0-2 ds3-0-15-12 is the first DS3 on card 15 shelf 12

PIC FE 0-1 fe-1-7-9 is the second Fast Ethernet Interface (FE) on card 7 shelf 9

PIC2 FE 0-2 fe-2-7-9 is the third Fast Ethernet Interface (FE) on card 7 shelf 9

Page 39: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Scripts

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 31990-1012-001

Using Scripts

Scripts are groups of related commands, put in order according to command dependencies.

C A U T I O N

To minimize provisioning and configuration errors Taqua recommends the following:

1.Use provisioning scripts instead of entering individual provisioning commands.

2. Test scripts using dryISE. dryISE simulates the operations of a real T7000, so you can test your scripts without affecting the call traffic on a T7000.

3. Test scripts using a non-production T7000 with the same software image, and preferably the same configuration.

Viewing Scripts

To view scripts in the software release, from Windows Explorer select the applicable hard drive, then Program Files > Taqua > OpenManager x.x.x > ocxapp > scripts (where x.x.x is the version of the OM).

To view a script’s full text, double-click it.

Loading Scripts

To load a script from its location on the hard drive of the OM, enter its name from dryISE.

Page 40: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Scripts

32 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Loading a Script on the Switch

A configuration script is:

• a text file

• a list of commands

• executed at the command prompt when run by a shell process

• used to provision a switch

Complete the following steps for the DB Master card to run a configuration script on the switch.

Step Action

1 Enter queryDbMaster to determine which card on the switch is assigned the role of Database Master.

2 Do the following on the DB Master card:

• Enter tftp to start tftp on the DB Master card.

• Enter device 6 to assign the local ramdisk device (6) for download storage.

• Enter get <filename> where <filename> is the script in the current working directory of the card used by ISEhouse.

• Enter quit to exit tftp.

• Enter ls 6 to display the contents of the ramdisk device and verify the script downloaded.

• Enter sh -e < 6/<filename> where <filename> is the name of the script to execute.

3 If the switch is not in an in-service state after executing the script, restore each card with restore card-<number> where <number> is the card’s slot number.

4 After each card has been restored, enter dbFlash ALL

This saves the current switch configuration to a database file in flash memory.

Page 41: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 33990-1012-001

Using dryISE

dryISE (Imbedded System Engine) simulates operational switch situations and lets you to test your scripts before using them on a real T7000. The basis for dryISE is the T7000 operating system, ISE. dryISE provides the core functionality for process control (creating ISE tasks).

NOTE: The T7000 supports a subset of commands for its dryISE switch simulator.

This functionality includes the following:

• Memory management

• Flash memory management

• IPC message services

• Timer services

• Object services

• Circular buffer services

• Global Map

• Command line shell

The dryISE environment has the following components:

• Command Line Interface (CLI)

• Call Simulator

dryISE’s CLI ISE’s CLI

x-commands x-commands

program symbols use “$” program symbols use “$”

command modifiers use “%” command modifiers use “%”

environment variables environment variables

If the command interpreter cannot find a matching x-command, it looks for a script in the working directory. The default file extension for scripts is .ocx.

TipIf the script file uses .ocx, omit .ocx when specifying.

executes C functions

up and down arrow keys recall commands

commands can be edited once recalled

F1 — re-displays the current line

ESC — clears the current line

“rrun” on page 44 — executes script files or shell commands on other cards

Page 42: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

34 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

%Rx — executes script files or shell commands on other cards, use on any shell command line (x = another card’s number).

dryISE’s CLI ISE’s CLI

Page 43: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 35990-1012-001

dryISE Commands

The following are simulation commands specific to dryISE:

Address

Address <hexAddr>This command returns the memory address of an object in dryISE, in both decimal and

hexadecimal format. If a non-object address is entered, it is simply echoed back

Address 80001234(37280)<91a0>Address 1234(4660)<1234>

auditTimersauditTimers

This command displays a list of active timers.

auditTimersCurrent Time 91088763

Timer expiration time 91088903 (in 140 mSec)<2894a70> executeMemoryAudit (smrouting)0: 40000 1: 2945d48 2: 9dfeb0 3: 1388

Timer expiration time 91089091 (in 141 mSec)<2d82d90> executeUtime (smrouting)0: 40000 1: 2945d4c 2: 9dfeb0 3: 3e8

Timer expiration time 91089341 (in 391 mSec)<2d76570> updateLEDStatus (smrouting)0: 50000 (dispLEDStatus)1: 0 (broadcast)2:0 3: 0 4: 7d0

3 Timer(s) active

Syntax Description

<hexAddr> The hexadecimal address of an object in memory.

Page 44: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

36 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

CALL

CALL <fileName>

This command executes a script in the current instance.

CALL LTC1.ocx

NOTE: This command can only be executed from within a script.

NOTE: Do not confuse this command with the “call” command. The “call” command works on both dryISE and the switch, and should only be used by Taqua support.

cmdfileEchoOff

cmdfileEchoOff

This command turns off command line echo of script files.

cmdfileEchoOn

cmdfileEchoOn

This command turns on command line echo of script files.

Syntax Description

<fileName> name of the file to run in dryISE, typically located on the hard drive of

the OM, in Program Files > Taqua > OpenManager x.x.x (where x.x.x is the version of the OM) > ocxapp > scripts.

Page 45: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 37990-1012-001

ConvertAddr

ConvertAddr <objptrOrReal>

This command computes the actual address of an object pointer in the PC simulator memory. Due to space constraints, object pointers are handled differently in the simulator and on the switch.

ConvertAddr 441d2e8Real 441d2e8 is objPtr 80883a5dConvertAddr 80883a5dObjPtr 80883a5d is real 441d2e8

cs_config

cs_config <line> [ORIG|TERM] [digits]

This command configures a line for call simulation as originator or terminator. The digits are required only for origination.

cs_config Line-1-1-1 ORIG 9724800000

Syntax Description

<objptrOrReal> An object pointer, or a real number.

If an object pointer is input, the function returns the corresponding address.

If a real address is input, the function returns the corresponding object pointer.

Syntax Description

<line> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

[ORIG|TERM] • ORIG — call originator

• TERM — call terminator

[digits] dialed digits, required only if you enter ORIG

Page 46: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

38 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

cs_dispstats

cs_dispstats [line]

This commands displays the statistics for a line or all lines on the card.

cs_dispstats Line-1-1-1

cs_finish

cs_finish [line|ORIG|TERM]

This command stops the call simulator on a line or for all originators or terminators on a card. If no parameter is specified all call simulators on the card are stopped. The difference between cs_finish and cs_stop is that the current call in progress is finished prior to stopping.

cs_finish Line-1-1-1

cs_reset

cs_reset [line|ORIG|TERM]

This command resets the statistics for a call simulator state machine for a line or for all originators or terminators on a card. If no parameter is specified all call simulators statistics on the card are reset.

cs_reset Line-1-1-1

Syntax Description

[line] • Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

• Skip this parameter to set the value for all lines on the card.

Syntax Description

[line|ORIG|TERM] • Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

• ORIG — call originator

• TERM — call terminator

Syntax Description

[line|ORIG|TERM] • Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

• ORIG — call originator

• TERM — call terminator

Page 47: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 39990-1012-001

cs_settimer

cs_settimer <TimerId> <msec> [line]

This command sets the value of a timer for a line or all lines on a card.

cs_setTimer DialTone 1000 Line-1-1-1

cs_start

cs_start [line|ORIG|TERM] [digits]

This command starts the call simulator on a line or for all originators or terminators on a card. If no parameter is specified all call simulators on the card are started.

cs_start ORIG 9724800000

Syntax Description

<TimerId> TimerId values are as follows:• DialTone — originator timer, waiting for dial tone after off hook.

• StartDigit — originator timer, how long to wait after dial tone before sending first digit.

• RingBack — originator timer, waiting for ring back after dialing.

• Ring — terminator timer, waiting for ring at start of call.

• OrigVoice — originator timer, waiting for voice after ring back.

• TermVoice — terminator timer, waiting for voice after sending voice.

• TermOffHook — terminator timer, how long to wait after off hook before sending voice.

• EndCall — originator timer, how long to wait after sending voice before ending call.

• InterCall — originator timer, how long to wait after ending call to start a new call.

<msec> value (in millieseconds) to assign the timer

[line] Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30. Skip this parameter to set the value for all lines on the card.

Syntax Description

[line|ORIG|TERM] • Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

• ORIG — call originator

• TERM — call terminator

[digits] dialed digits, required only if you enter ORIG

Page 48: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

40 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

cs_stop

cs_stop [line]

This command stops the call simulator on a line. If no parameter is specified all call simulators on the card are stopped.

cs_stop Line-1-1-1

dial

dial <line> <digits>

This command dials digits on a line or trunk.

dial Line-0-1-22 9724800000

dispLocTS

dispLocTS <OID>

This command converts an ASCII object ID to a local timeslot (port).

dispLocTS Line-2-1-22Local timeslot for Line-2-1-22 is 202

Syntax Description

[line] Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<line> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

<digits> Digits to be dialed. Digits can be the numbers 0 through 9, pound (“#”), asterisk (“*), or comma (“,”). A comma causes the command to pause for 1 second before the next digit is processed.

Syntax Description

OID Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 49: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 41990-1012-001

Tip

dispMidTS

dispMidTS <OID>

This command converts an ASCII object ID to a midplane timeslot (port).

dispMidTS Line-2-1-22Midplane Timeslot for Line-2-1-22 is 10000032

dumpTDM

dumpTDM

This command displays the current TDM connections in the TDM connection database.

NOTE: The example for this command assumes a call is in progress on an LTC between the subscriber on facility 0 and the subscriber on facility 1.

dumpTDM

Line - 0x200 connections: Line - 0x201,Line - 0x201 connections: Line - 0x200,

env

env should be the 1st command in any dryISE session.

env <cardnum> [shelfnum] [cardtype] [hostdport]

This command sets up an instance of dryISE with a card number, shelf number, card type, and the hostd port.

Syntax Description

<OID> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<cardnum> The number of the card that this instance of dryISE represents in the OM, from 1 - 20.

[shelfnum] The shelf number of the T7000 in which the card resides. This number must be unique for each T7000 that you set up.

[cardtype] The type of card you want the dryISE instance to represent, ltc, tic, etic, bic, pic, clk, ltcsub, ticsub, eticsub, bicsub, or picsub.

Page 50: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

42 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The following command sets up a TIC on card 1, shelf 10, with a port number 3333:

env 1 10 TIC 3333

hu

hu <line/trunk>

This command signals on-hook on a line or trunk.

hu Line-1-1-1

NOTE: See “oh” on page 43, and also see “pcall” on page 43.

linkSpan

linkSpan <span> <farCard> <farSpan>

This command creates a simulated T1 connection from a span on the local card to a span on the far card, respectively. Use the linkSpan command to link spans between to dryISE sessions. Link the spans while the spans are out of service.

linkSpan span-0-2-3 5 span-1-5-1

[hostdport] The port number of the “channel” of the IP address (16-bit number from 0-65535). The default port number is 3333. Also called the primaryPort.

Syntax Description

Syntax Description

<line/trunk> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<span> The Object Identifier of the span on the local card (unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.)

<farCard> number of card (1-20)

<farSpan> The Object Identifier of the far span (unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.)

Page 51: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 43990-1012-001

querySpans

This command is a debug tool for use in dryISE. It identifies which spans (if any) have been configured on the local card, and shows the remote cards and spans to which they connect.

querySpansConfigured spans:Span 0 is configured for remote card 2, span 0Span 1 is configured for remote card 2, span 1

oh

oh <lineOID>

This command signals off-hook on a line or trunk.

oh Line-1-1-1

NOTE: Also See “oh” on page 43, and also see “pcall” on page 43.

pcall

pcall <lineOID> <digits>

This command places a call on a line or trunk going off-hook and then dialing digits.

pcall 1 9724800000pcall t35 9724801234

NOTE: See “oh” on page 43, and also see “hu” on page 42.

Syntax Description

<lineOID> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<lineOID> line — the line number on an LTC from 0-31.

trunk — the trunk number on a card t0 - t2015

<digits> dialed digits

Page 52: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

44 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

pingT1

pingT1 <span>

This command returns information on the specified span.

pingT1 span-0-2-3

rrun

rrun <fileName> <cardAddr>

This command executes a script on a different card. The remote run command takes as input a script file name and a card number. It sends a tCommand message containing the input file name to the input card number.

rrun LTC1.ocx 3

run

run <fileName>

This command executes a script in a separate thread.

run LTC1.ocx

Syntax Description

<span> Object Identifier-a unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<fileName> name of the file to run in dryISE, typically located on the hard drive of

the OM, in Program Files > Taqua > OpenManager x.x.x (where x.x.x is the version of the OM) > ocxapp > scripts.

<cardAddr> number of card (1-20)

Syntax Description

<fileName> name of the file to run in dryISE, typically located on the hard drive of

the OM, in Program Files > Taqua > OpenManager x.x.x (where x.x.x is the version of the OM) > ocxapp > scripts.

Page 53: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using dryISE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 45990-1012-001

Tip

sleep

This command is useful in scripts, to insure a delay between commands.

sleep <msec>

This command temporarily suspends execution.

sleep 1000

slicd

slicd

This command starts the simulated SLIC driver.

tdmd

tdmd

This command starts the TDM controller.

release921

release921 <inst>

This command releases GR-303 EOC or TMC link connections on links using Link Access Protocol-D (LAPD).

release921 1

To reconnect the link connections, see “resync921” on page 651.

Syntax Description

<msec> number of milliseconds to suspend execution

Syntax Description

inst the instance of the link.

Range: 1 - maximum number.

The maximum number varies by card type:

• BIC 338

• ETIC 32

• LTC 32

• TIC 32

• PIC 0

Page 54: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using ISE

46 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Using ISE

The T7000 Operating System is called ISE (Imbedded System Engine). ISE has a command shell, similar to UNIX™, that processes system level commands. If the command shell does not recognize a command, it passes it on to the applications system.

ISE Commands

The following are simulation commands specific to dryISE:

_login

_login: <name>

This command logs into the shell to access the T7000. Enter the user name, press <Enter>, and the password prompt appears. Enter the password and press <Enter> to log on to the switch.

NOTE: The switch automatically creates three accounts:the superuser account is named root. This account is for use by Taqua TAC supportthe supervisor account is named admin. This account has a default password of adminthe craft user account is named user. This account has a default password of user.

_login: adminpassword: *****

<Ctrl> + D

The key sequence <Ctrl> + D logs the user out of the T7000. To continue, you must login to the switch again.

Syntax Description

<name> user name

Page 55: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using ISE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 47990-1012-001

passwd

passwd

This command changes the password of the active user. Type the old password, press <Enter>, and the new password prompt appears. Type the new password, press <Enter>, and the repeat password prompt appears. Re-type the new password, and press <Enter> to change the password.

NOTE: The password is only changed on the local card. Be sure to repeat this command on each card of the shelf!

passwdEnter old password: *****Enter password: *****Enter it again: *****

Syntax Description

Enter old password: Type the current password of the user and press <Enter>.

Enter password: Type the new password for the user and press <Enter>.

Enter it again: Type the new password a second time and press <Enter> to confirm the change.

Page 56: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using ISE

48 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

adduser

adduser <name> [permission] [passwd] [shell]

This command adds a user to the T7000. You can only add users with the same or a lower permission level

NOTE: The user is only added on the local card. Be sure to repeat this command on each card of the shelf!.

adduser kdugas 1 kd423

whoami

whoami

This command shows the user name for the active user. The data returned is the user name of the active user.

whoamiadmin

Syntax Description

<name> unique user name, without spaces

[permission] permission level of the user:

• 0 — Superuser, this level is the highest permission level. This user can perform any task on the switch and create and remove other levels of users.

• 1 — Administrator, this level can perform any task that does not require access to level 0 files. This level is recommend for use by service engineers.

• 2 — User, this level can only invoke CLI commands. Level 2 is recommend for use by craft technicians. This is an optional parameter.

If left blank, the default value is 2 / User.

[passwd] user password

If left blank, “adduser” prompts for the account password.

[shell] internal value, leave this field blank

Page 57: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using ISE

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Using CLI 49990-1012-001

users

users

This command shows a list of users on the T7000. To use this command, you must be logged in as a level 1 or level 0 user. Enter users and press <Enter>. The data returned is the user name and permission level of all users defined on the T7000.

usersusername perm shellroot 0 xsh "-proot:%d.%d> "admin 1 xshuser 2 xsh

rmuser

rmuser <name>

This command removes a user from the user list. This command can only be performed by a level 0 superuser.

NOTE: The user is only removed on the local card. Be sure to repeat this command on each card of the shelf!

rmuser kdugas

dl

dl <address> <count>

This command displays T7000 memory, one 32 bit word at a time The left most number is the starting address in memory. The next four sets of numbers are four 32 bit words of memory. To the right, enclosed in curly braces, is the ASCII representation of memory.

dl 8b0320 20008b0320: 29232840 632f3a76 6c2f7376 662f6374 {@(#)v:/cvs/ltc/f}008b0330: 662f6d73 682e6d73 3120762c 3220362e {sm/fsm.h,v 1.6 2}(9110336)<8b0340>

Syntax Description

<name> enter the user name

Syntax Description

<address> starting address to display.

<count> the number of bytes to display.

Page 58: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using ISE

50 Using CLI T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

db

db <address> <count>

This command displays T7000 memory, one 8 bit byte at a time. The left most number is the starting address in memory. The next sixteen sets of numbers are sixteen 8 bit bytes of memory. To the right is the ASCII representation of memory.

db 8b0320 20008b0320: 40 28 23 29 76 3a 2f 63 76 73 2f 6c 74 63 2f 66 @(#)v:/cvs/ltc/f008b0330: 73 6d 2f 66 73 6d 2e 68 2c 76 20 31 2e 36 20 32 sm/fsm.h,v 1.6 2(9110336)<8b0340>

now

now

This command displays the current system date and time.

now

Tuesday, 30 September 2008 14:35:26.315 [-360, STD]

Syntax Description

<address> starting address to display.

<count> the number of bytes to display.

Page 59: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Alarms 51990-1012-001

2Alarms

Alarms tell you if there is a software or hardware problem on the T7000.

Alarm definitions apply to all of the cards on the shelf. Each alarm trigger is a subset of all the T7000 events that can occur on the switch. For a full list of events, see the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

Acknowledging Alarms

The following commands do not resolve the problem causing the alarm, but do acknowledge the alarm. For information on how to resolve alarms, see the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

ackAlarm

ackAlarm <Alarm Type> <CauseObjectID> <login> (card)

This command acknowledges an alarm. The command turns off the sound of audible alarms. Acknowledge an alarm to indicate that you know the alarm exists.

ackAlarm CardTypeFrontInvalid Trunk-2-1-0 Username 2

Syntax Description

<Alarm Type> The name of the activated alarm. See the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

<CauseObjectID> The object ID of the equipment causing the alarm. Object Identifier—unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

<login> The user name to be associated with acknowledging the alarm.

(card) optional

The card number that has the alarm condition.

Page 60: 1012 Command Line Interface

Acknowledging Alarms

52 Alarms T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

decommission

decommission <card>

This command indicates the card is out of service in the slot it is currently in and will not become active again unless rebooted or replaced. This command removes all outstanding alarms with an OID specifying that slot and removes the cardStatus alarm from the db master who is maintaining the list of system alarms.

decommission 3

manualClear

manualClear <alarmType> <OID>

This command clears the specified alarm on the specified object.

manualClear NoHostIDForCDRCollection Card-1-1-1

Syntax Description

<card> card number (1-20)

Syntax Description

<alarmType> The type of alarm to clear

<OID> The Object ID that currently has the alarm.

Page 61: 1012 Command Line Interface

Provisioning Alarms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Alarms 53990-1012-001

Provisioning Alarms

changeAlarmDefAttr

changeAlarmDefAttr <TriggeringEvent> <attrIndex> <newValue>

This command modifies alarms on the T7000.

changeAlarmDefAttr SpanLOS 4 LED_RED

Syntax Description

<TriggeringEvent> The alarm category or type. See the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

<attrIndex> The attribute value that you want to change, including:

• 2—Alarm text

• 3—Severity

• 4—LED

• 5—Audible Alarm

<newValue> Use the corresponding value for the attrIndex selected, including:

• For attrIndex 2 use any text string that describes the alarm

• For attrIndex 3 use: INFORMATIONAL_ALARM, MINOR_ALARM, MAJOR_ALARM, or CRITICAL_ALARM)

• For attrIndex 4 use: LED_OFF, LED_RED, LED_YELLOW, LED_GREEN)

• For attrIndex 4 use: 0 for No audible alarm or 1 for Yes audible alarm

Page 62: 1012 Command Line Interface

Querying Alarms

54 Alarms T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Querying Alarms

alarmHistory

alarmHistory [[-v] <size> (card)]

If the OM is disconnected from the T7000, this command shows the alarms in the alarm history list on the T7000. When the OM is connected to the T7000, this list is empty because the alarm history is sent directly to the OM.

alarmHistory

C STimestamp ObjectID l y Alarm Type r s-------------------------------------------------------------------------04.15-10:17:43 Card-7-7-24 - - AuditCorrection04.15-10:14:36 Span-19-7-24 - - SpanAIS04.15-10:14:36 Span-18-7-24 - - SpanAIS04.15-10:14:36 Span-17-7-24 - - SpanAIS04.15-10:14:36 Span-16-7-24 - - SpanAIS04.15-10:14:36 Span-15-7-24 - - SpanAIS

Syntax Description

[-v] optional verbose flag, displays detailed alarm information if present

<size> number of alarm records to show

(card) optional card to query

Page 63: 1012 Command Line Interface

Querying Alarms

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Alarms 55990-1012-001

queryAlarmDef

queryAlarmDef <TriggeringEvent/ALL>

This command shows information pertaining to the specified alarm or all of the alarms.

queryAlarmDef CardStatus******* Alarm Definition *******TriggeringEvent = CardStatusAlarm Text = Card is offlineSeverity = MAJOR_ALARMLED = CARD_LEDTurns on audible alarmThis is a system-wide alarm

Syntax Description

<TriggeringEvent/ALL> The name of any alarm trigger or ALL to show all of the alarm definitions. See the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

Page 64: 1012 Command Line Interface

Querying Alarms

56 Alarms T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryAlarms

queryAlarms [[-v] [QueryType] [QueryItem] [card]]

This command queries current alarm status. If you only enter queryAlarms the T7000 shows all currently active alarms for the card that originated the CLI command.

queryAlarms SEVERITY MINOR_ALARM 19 S A A STimestamp ObjectID e u c y Alarm Type v d k s---------------------------------------------------------03.30-11:18:28 ClkCard-0-0-1 CR * - * TDM_No_Valid_Ref03.30-11:18:28 ClkCard-0-0-1 MJ * - * PowerA_Undervolt03.30-11:26:40 SS7Link-0-2-1 MJ * - * SS7LinkStatus03.30-11:27:02 SS7Link-1-3-1 MJ * - * SS7LinkStatus04.04-12:08:11 Shelf-0-0-1 MJ * - * OMDiskThreshold04.04-13:25:02 Card-17-17-1 MJ * - * CardStatus04.05-09:56:10 Card-2-2-1 MN * - * AuditsManuallyDisabled04.13-10:22:25 FE-1-11-1 IN * - * FEIfPaused

NOTE: Sev is the severity (MN=minor, MJ=major, CT=critical, IN=informational) Aud is whether or not the alarms is audible alarm (*=yes, -=no) Ack is whether or not the alarm been acknowledged (*=yes, -=no) Sys is whether or not this is a system-wide alarm (*=yes, -=no) Clr is whether or not the alarm been cleared (M=manually cleared, A=automatically cleared, -=not cleared)

Syntax Description

[-v] optional verbose flag, displays detailed alarm information if present

[QueryType] optional parameter, only processed if -v flag is entered

• ALARM

• SEVERITY

[QueryItem] optional parameter, only processed if -v flag is entered

• If the first parameter is ALARM, this parameter is any valid alarm or alarm category name. See the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

• If the first parameter is SEVERITY, this parameter is INFORMATIONAL_ALARM, MINOR_ALARM, MAJOR_ALARM, or CRITICAL_ALARM.

[card] optional parameter, only processed if -v flag is entered

Indicates the card number (1-20) on which the alarm resides.

Page 65: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Events 57990-1012-001

3Events

As actions take place on the T7000 they produce events. For a complete list of events, see the T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

Managing Events

enableEvent

enableEvent <eventType>

This command allows disabled events to be processed by the system. By default, all events are enabled and processed

NOTE: The event is only enabled on the card where the enableEvent command was entered.

enableEvent AdoAttributeChanged****** Event Notification ******(eventName): EventEnabled (senderID): <718d120> (objectID): 0 (timestamp): 3b3a4 5bf (enabledEVID): 20606f

getMaxEventTransmit

getMaxEventTransmit [card]

This command displays the maximum number of events that are sent to a host by a

card. If card is omitted, the number of events sent by all cards is displayed.

getMaxEventTransmit

Card - 1: MaxEventTransmitPerInterval=80

Syntax Description

<eventType> name of any valid event type

Syntax Description

[card] Card number to get value from. Range is 1 - 20. Default is all cards

Page 66: 1012 Command Line Interface

Logging Events

58 Events T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Logging Events

eventLogSize

eventLogSize <size>

NOTE: The initial size of the event log is 100.

This command limits the number of events buffered in the event log to size.

eventLogSize 150

postEvent

postEvent <eventType> <oid> <parm1 <parm2 <...>>> cardNumber

This command generates an event on a specific oid on a specific card.

postEvent Warning trunk-1-5-1 “Exceeded number” 5

purgeEventLog

purgeEventLog

This command cleans the Event Log of all event records.

Syntax Description

<size> number of events to record

Syntax Description

<eventType> name of any valid event type

<oid> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Note: oid may be zero.

<parm1 <parm2 <...>>> the text that describes the event (If there are spaces, use double quotes.)

<cardNumber> number of card (1-20)

Page 67: 1012 Command Line Interface

Logging Events

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Events 59990-1012-001

stopEventLog

stopEventLog <eventName> [<shelf, card, pid, cat, inst>]

This command stops the logging of a specific event or of all events.

stopEventLog Warning

Syntax Description

<eventName> optional--skip this parameter to log all events

name of specific event to log

(<shelf, card, pid, cat, inst>)

Page 68: 1012 Command Line Interface

Querying Events

60 Events T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Querying Events

queryEventLog

queryEventLog <numEvents>

This command queries the most recent events

queryEventLog 2

****************************

******** Event report *********

*******************************

Event #(1)

****** Event Notification ******

(eventName): Warning (senderID): <1431890> (objectID): "ohDelay" (timestamp): 8695 (refdate): 7d710c (reftime): 111208 (rawreftime): 82e2 (reserved): 0 (text): "Local SCCP PC/SSN does not exist. Cannot configure TCAP Service"

Event #(2)

****** Event Notification ******

(eventName): Warning (senderID): <1120b30> (objectID): "ohDelay" (timestamp): 8756 (refdate): 7d710c (reftime): 111208 (rawreftime): 82e2 (reserved): 0 (text): "Local SCCP PC/SSN does not exist. Cannot configure TCAP Service"

Syntax Description

<numEvents> The number of events to display from the event log

Page 69: 1012 Command Line Interface

Querying Events

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Events 61990-1012-001

queryEventRegs

queryEventRegs <eventName> or <eventNumber> or <shelf=x>

This command returns a list of processes that have registered to be notified upon the occurrence of the specified event.

queryEventRegs Fuse_Failure

**************************************

******** Event Registrations *********

**************************************

EventRegistration #(0x1)

This registration is for: Fuse_Failure

Destination ID = shelf (0x5) card (0xa), pid (0x35), category (0x0), instance (0x0)

Sender #0 = shelf (0x5) card (0xa), pid (0x7fffffff), category (0x7fffffff), instance (0x7fffffff) Stop FLag Set = FALSE

Syntax Description

<eventName> The name of the event that one or more processes have registered for.

<eventNumber>

<shelf=x> All events registered on shelf x.

Note: “shelf=” must be typed in exactly as it appears.

Page 70: 1012 Command Line Interface

Querying Events

62 Events T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Page 71: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 63990-1012-001

4Queries

Generic CLI Queries

Use the query command to query a Generic CLI object. When entered without a dbObject, the query command returns a list of Generic CLI objects that can be queried.

queryTo query facilities, use 'queryFacility'

Usage: query <dbObject> <key> [attribute]

This action can be performed on the following:

AccountCodeProfile OffHookDelayProfileAcctCodePatternProfile OffHookImmediateProfileAniSubscriber OfficeParms OutPulseProfileBearerGroup PacketCableCmtsCalltypeProfile PCMMCmtsCardConfiguration PFCPatternProfileCardProperties PrefixCarrier PRITrunkGroupCarrierRouteList PublicFeatureCodeProfileCASTrunkGroup RateCenterCFBInfo RcfInfoCFDInfo SCCPNodeCFFInfo SCFInfoCFVInfo ScreenListCLRTrunkGroup SdInfoCodecProfile SDSPatternProfileCodecProfileList ServiceProfileDigitMap ShelfDS3Properties SipAgwEndpointEscapeCodePatternProfile SipAgwEndpointProfileFEIProperties SipEsgwEndpointFTRSProfile SipEsgwEndpointProfileHostIPAddrPair SipNgwEndpointHuntGroup SipNgwEndpointProfileInterfaceGroup sipVMSIPTrunkGroup SMDIParmsLineProperties SpanPropertiesLNPRouteList SpecificDigitStrProfileMediaGateway SS7TrunkGroupMediaGatewayProfile Subscriber

Page 72: 1012 Command Line Interface

Generic CLI Queries

64 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

MediaParam SubstitutionGroupMGCPTrunkGroup TandemAniRouteListMGTermination TandemCarrierRouteListMGTerminationProfile TandemTGRouteListN11PatternProfile TcapMwiParmsN11Profile TCAPServiceNailedUpCircuit TermAttemptProfileNANPRouteList TrunkProperties

Some Generic CLI object queries have been documented in this manual, see:

• “query AniSubscriber” on page 513

• “query Card” on page 167

• “query Carrier” on page 208

• “query CFVInfo” on page 553

• “query SCFInfo” on page 553

• “query CFBInfo” on page 554

• “query CFDInfo” on page 554

• “query CFFInfo” on page 555

• “query OfficeParms” on page 388

• “query Prefix” on page 407

• “Querying a RateCenter” on page 414

• “query SdInfo” on page 556

• “query SCCPNode” on page 486

• “query sipVMS” on page 594

• “query SMDIParms” on page 590

• “query Subscriber” on page 552

• “TcapMwiParms” on page 497

Any object not explicitly documented follows the Generic CLI “Create Example” on page 13.

Page 73: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 65990-1012-001

General Switch Queries

Active call measurements determine call traffic patterns on the switch. This statistical data supports configuration decisions regarding facility assignment. The active call measurements feature:

• View a snapshot of all active calls on an switch at a point in time.

• Log calls for a specific period.

• View the call log.

You can determine the interval in seconds to log calls on the switch. View active calls or a recorded call log on the following:

• A card

• A trunk group

• A span

• All of the cards in a switch

• All of the spans in a switch

• All of the trunk groups on a switch

Page 74: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

66 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryActiveCallsqueryActiveCalls <spanOID | feifOID | cardOID | TrunkGroupName>queryActiveCalls <perSpan | perFeif | perTrunkGroup>queryActiveCalls <perCard [lines | trunks]>

This command displays a current active call snapshot.

queryActiveCalls Span-1-12-2

queryActiveCalls perSpan

Output:

Active Channels per span:Span-0-2-11: 3Span-1-2-11: 2Span-2-2-11: 18Span-3-2-11: 0Span-4-2-11: 12Span-5-2-11: 16Span-6-2-11: 2Span-7-2-11: 3Span-8-2-11: 20Span-9-2-11: 19

Syntax Description

<spanOID | feifOID | cardOID | TrunkGroupName>

<perSpan | perFeif | perTrunkGroup>

<perCard[lines | trunks]

• spanOID — display for a single span

• feifOID — display for a single Fast Ethernet Interface (FEIF), valid for PICs only

• cardOID — display for a single card

• TrunkGroupName — display for a single trunk group

• perSpan — display for all spans

• perFeif — display for all FEIFs

• perTrunkGroup — display for all trunk groups

• perCard — display for all cards, both lines and trunks

• perCard lines — display for all cards, lines only

• perCard trunks — display for all cards, spans only

Page 75: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 67990-1012-001

queryCallHistqueryCallHist <spanOID | feifOID | cardOID | TrunkGroupName>queryCallHist <perSpan | perFeif | perTrunkGroup>queryCallHist <perCard [lines | trunks]>

This command displays the history of active call log.s

queryCallHist Span-1-12-2

queryCallHist perSpan

Output:

Active Channels per span:Span-0-2-11: 304Span-1-2-11: 225Span-2-2-11: 180Span-3-2-11: 10Span-4-2-11: 128Span-5-2-11: 169Span-6-2-11: 208Span-7-2-11: 388Span-8-2-11: 203Span-9-2-11: 197

Syntax Description

<spanOID | feifOID | cardOID | TrunkGroupName>

<perSpan | perFeif | perTrunkGroup>

<perCard[lines | trunks ]

• spanOID — display for a single span

• feifOID — display for a single Fast Ethernet Interface (FEIF), valid for PICs only

• cardOID — display for a single card

• TrunkGroupName — display for a single trunk group

• perSpan — display for all spans

• perFeif — display for all FEIFs

• perTrunkGroup — display for all trunk groups

• perCard — display for all cards, both lines and trunks

• perCard lines — display for all cards, lines only

• perCard trunks — display for all cards, spans only

Page 76: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

68 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

availableFacilityavailableFacility <oid> [bySpan]

This command shows which facilities on the switch are not:

• assigned to a trunk group

• assigned to a GR-303 interface group

• acting as an SS7 link

• acting as a nailed up circuit

• assigned to a subscriber (for lines)

NOTE: This command does not return information for PIC facilities. PIC facilities are dynamically assigned.)

availableFacility Card-1 bySpanSpan-0-1-1: 24 trunks available

Syntax Description

<oid> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

[bySpan] returns span-specific facilities

Page 77: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 69990-1012-001

queryFacilityqueryFacility <oid>

This command show information about a facility

NOTE: This command does not return information for PIC facilities. PIC facilities are dynamically assigned.)

queryFacility Line-0

(OID: 4a18000)

<3f409a0> Linekey.........................<>objectID....................Line-0-1-10dependentOIDs...............<>containerOID................Card-1-1-10operationalState............BUSYadministrativeState.........UNLOCKEDmasterOperationalState......ACTIVEmasterAdministrativeState...UNLOCKEDcurrentActivityCount........1 (1)maximumActivityCount........1 (1)inTest......................NOcpState.....................ACTIVEsReservedKey................<>protocol....................FXOsignalingType...............LOOPSTART_Asuspended...................NOT_SUSPENDEDtimers......................<3f41350>

<3f41350> SubscriberFacilityTimers GuardTime...................4b0 (1200) ChargeDelay.................0 (0) TimedDisconnectTime.........1388 (5000) ForwardDisconnectTime.......c8 (200) RingCadenceOnTime...........7d0 (2000) RingCadenceOffTime..........fa0 (4000) MinFlashHookTime............12c (300) FlashInterval...............384 (900) MinWinkDuration.............64 (100) MaxWinkDuration.............15e (350) WinkDuration................c8 (200) DebounceTime................1e (30) FlashDuration...............384 (900) OffHookDigMax...............46 (70) OffHookDigMin...............0 (0) OnHookDigMax................46 (70) OnHookDigMin................0 (0) TerminatorDisconnectDelay...7d0 (2000) LCFO_Duration...............2bc (700) DialtoneDelay...............96 (150)

channel.....................30 (48)activeService...............0 (0)subscriberKey..............."9724800000"conferenceInfo..............0 (0)

Syntax Description

<oid> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 78: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

70 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

origChannelList.............0 (0)restrictedDigitPattern......0 (0)ropDigits...................0 - No Attribute DefinitionropResultInfo...............0 - No Attribute DefinitionropResultFlag...............0 - No Attribute DefinitionringingType.................0 (0)activeCCBKey................"00a1600H4y0jq02"passiveCCBKey...............0 - No Attribute DefinitionactiveCCBlock...............<3f40a78>

<3f40a78> CCBlock key.................................0 objectID............................0 dependentOIDs.......................0 - No Attribute Definition origOID.............................Line-0-1-10 contextKey.........................."00a1600H4y0jq02" role................................ORIGINATOR ani................................."9724800000" destinationAddress.................."9724800001" termOID.............................Line-1-1-10 patternMatched......................3 (3) callingPartyNumPres.................1 (1) callingPartyName...................."Crutcher Mark" callingPartyNamePres................1 (1) callingPartyNameAvail...............0 (0) portedToLRN.........................0 (0) translatedIndicator.................0 (0) useLnpRoute.........................0 (0) carrier.............................0 (0) carrierSelectionInfo................0 (0) facilityInfoElem....................0 (0) infoDigits..........................0 (0) chargeNumber........................"" callType............................0 (0) originalAddress.....................0 (0) serviceIndicator....................0 (0) hopCounter..........................7f (127) redirectionCount....................0 (0) redirectionReason...................0 (0) redirectingNumber...................0 (0) networkServices.....................0 (0) msgType.............................1 (1) backwardProgressDescription.........1 (1) causeCode...........................10 (16) lata................................"123" dialToneType........................0 (0) forwardProgressDescription..........3 (3) changeBackwardProgressDescription...1 (1) changeForwardProgressDescription....0 (0) transferCapability..................0 (0) callingPartySubaddress..............0 (0) calledPartySubaddress...............0 (0) tandemRoutingCode...................0 (0) jurisdictionInfo...................."972480" routeFailedReason...................0 (0) restrictInfoAnalTrigger.............0 (0) restrictInfoCollTrigger.............0 (0) circuitCode.........................0 (0) uniqueNatureOfAddress...............1 (1) termChannelList.....................0 (0) dialedDigits........................"9724800001" genericInfoForEmergency.............<> locationIDNumber....................<> redirectSession.....................0 (0) redirectSessionType.................0 (0) currentSession......................0 (0) carrierUsed.........................0 (0) disposition.........................64 (100) dispositionTime....................."20071018001929000" offHkTime..........................."20071018001926000" onHkTime............................0 (0) termTrunkGroup......................""

Page 79: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 71990-1012-001

carrierConnectTime.................."" carrierDisconnectTime..............."" tcapReqd............................0 (0) origRateCenter......................"rc1" termRateCenter......................"rc1" billingFlag.........................1 (1) partialCdrHandle....................0 (0) longDurationCdrHandle...............<419aa78>

<419aa78> cmSendLongDurationCdr smrouting...10030 - No Attribute Definition key........."00a1600H4y0jq02"

replacementDigits..................."" replacementMode.....................0 - No Attribute Definition PCAC................................"" prefixMatchedLen....................6 - No Attribute Definition SCPDipForAINDone....................0 - No Attribute Definition replacementAni......................"" replacementInfoDigits...............0 - No Attribute Definition remoteOperations....................0 (0) ainResourceType.....................0 - No Attribute Definition strParamBlock.......................0 - No Attribute Definition matchedPtnStr.......................0 - No Attribute Definition destName............................0 - No Attribute Definition accessCode..........................0 - No Attribute Definition countryCode.........................0 - No Attribute Definition InterOperAssiCode...................0 - No Attribute Definition tandemRouteDigit....................0 - No Attribute Definition featureInteraction..................0 - No Attribute Definition ftrsUseLnp..........................0 - No Attribute Definition ftrsPCAC............................0 - No Attribute Definition ftrsFwdingProfile...................0 - No Attribute Definition origDialedDigits...................."" origOutBoundCarrier................."" incCarrierId........................0 - No Attribute Definition replacementCSI......................100 - No Attribute Definition session.............................2 (2) NXCode..............................0 - No Attribute Definition regionCode..........................7fffffff - No Attribute Definition billingCalledParty..................0 (0) abridgedCDR.........................0 (0) origDestDigits......................"9724800001" origBearerOID.......................Line-0-1-10 termBearerOID.......................Line-1-1-10 originalAddressNOA..................fe (254) redirectingNumberNOA................fe (254) callingPartyNOA.....................0 (0) tandemBciInterworking...............0 (0) answerInd...........................0 (0) userNetworkInteraction..............0 (0) authStatus..........................0 (0) tandemFciInterworking...............0 (0) billingOrigOID......................Line-0-1-10 billingTermOID......................0 origInfoDigits......................0 (0) origChargeNumber....................0 (0) ccbspare1...........................0 (0) ccbspare2...........................0 (0) ccbspare3...........................0 (0) cfNumberFromLocalSipPhone...........0 (0) serviceActivationParm...............0 (0) escapeFtrsProfile...................0 (0) cadenceProfile......................0 (0) calledPtyStaType....................0 (0) voiceMailIndicator..................0 - No Attribute Definition callingPartyCategory................7fffffff - No Attribute Definition infoCollectedPattern................13 - No Attribute Definition ccbBitField.........................0 (0) origNumberPres......................3 (3) redNumberPres.......................3 (3) routeAttempts.......................0 (0)

Page 80: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

72 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

cidBuffer...........................0 (0) termMGTermination...................0 (0) origIpCallid........................0 (0) esaIpTg.............................0 (0) esaReason...........................0 (0) origTGName..........................0 (0) secondaryDNInfo.....................0 (0)

callContextBlocks...........Dictionary (0 items) ->cblock......................<3f41158>

<3f41158> CommonCCBlock key.....................<> objectID................Line-0-1-10 dependentOIDs...........<> trunkGroupName..........<> crv.....................0 (0) serviceFlag.............0 (0) onDemandServices........(BITFIELD) -> 0 serviceInProgress.......0 (0) reservedCodecTypeList...<> IPTrunkReserved.........0 (0) mediaGateway............<>

Page 81: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 73990-1012-001

queryGrpqueryGrp [name] [<attributeName> [LOCAL] [TRACE]]

This command shows information about any trunk or hunt group. To convert hexadecimal output from this query command to decimal, see “Using Hexadecimal” on page 741.

queryGrp AmerC1

******* Facility Group Trace *******

CASTrunkGroupkey........................"AmerC1"facilities.................<1d8c670>

FacilityList (1 items) -> 1 (1): TGFacility facility...Span-6-8-18 cic........0 (0)

timers.....................<25aabc0>

CasTimers GuardTime...................4b0 (1200) ChargeDelay.................0 (0) TimedDisconnectTime.........1388 (5000) ForwardDisconnectTime.......c8 (200) RingCadenceOnTime...........7d0 (2000) RingCadenceOffTime..........fa0 (4000) MinFlashHookTime............12c (300) FlashInterval...............384 (900) MinWinkDuration.............64 (100) MaxWinkDuration.............15e (350) WinkDuration................c8 (200)

Syntax Description

[name] name of group. Omit for a list of all Trunk or Hunt Groups.

<attributeName> to return only a single attribute from the query

[LOCAL] optional

requests that data is retrieved from the card where the command is entered, instead of from the dBMaster

[TRACE] optional

data is displayed in as an object trace.

Page 82: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

74 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

DebounceTime................1e (30) FlashDuration...............384 (900) OffHookDigMax...............46 (70) OffHookDigMin...............0 (0) OnHookDigMax................46 (70) OnHookDigMin................0 (0) TerminatorDisconnectDelay...7d0 (2000) LCFO_Duration...............2bc (700)

options....................<25aa180>

CASOptions glareControl......................ODD outpulseAsDialed..................FALSE numOfDIDDigits....................a (10) networkServices...................NONE skipMinDigitsRestriction..........FALSE fgc911MakeFirstSecond.............OFF useANIDNIS........................NO routeOnRcvdCarrier................OUTBCRRIER_INBCARRIER diddtmfProvideDialtoneAfterWink...OFF

selectionMethod............ROUND_ROBINsendOAssistCalls...........FALSEsendDAssistCalls...........FALSEtandemRoutingType..........NO_ROUTINGdefaultDN..................0restrictions...............(BITFIELD) -> 0

defaultNPA.................0replaceDestinationDigits...FALSEreplaceCarrier.............FALSEreplaceAniDigits...........FALSEreplaceInfoDigits..........FALSEftrsProfile................0replaceCSI.................FALSElocalTermination...........ALLOWEDtandemDefaultRoutingType...USE_CARRIER_NANPmiscOptions................Dictionary (0 items) ->denyAniList................0direction..................BI_DIRECTIONALtandemCustomReplacement....NOtrunkProtocol..............FXOsignalingType..............LOOPSTART_DreceivingProtocol..........NO_SUB_PROTOCOLoutpulsingProtocol.........NO_SUB_PROTOCOLnumDestDigits..............DEFAULTnumAniDigits...............DEFAULTnumInfoDigits..............DEFAULToutPulseProfileKey.........0E911DefaultANI.............0

Page 83: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 75990-1012-001

querySysMgrquerySysMgr

If you perform this command on the card that is not the System Manager (SM), it returns the following:

• Information about the card’s role, for example, if this card is the Primary Management Interface (PMI) or Alternate Management Interface (AMI)

• Address of ISEhouse, if present

• Pointer to the active SM in the switch

querySysMgrSystem Manager status=====================Current role is AMISM Server (ISEhouse) shelf address is 210000.SM Server (ISEhouse) IP address is 172.19.161.20

The currently active SM is shelf 23/card 21 (0x17/0x15).

If you perform this command on the card that is the SM, it returns

• Information about the card’s role, showing it is the active SM

• Address of ISEhouse, if present

• States of all cards in the switch

• Outstanding timers against cards in the switch

querySysMgrSystem Manager status=====================Current role is PMISM Server (ISEhouse) shelf address is 210000.SM Server (ISEhouse) IP address is 172.19.161.20Shelf numbers in this OCX system: 23The currently active SM is this card, shelf 23/card 21 (0x17/0x15).S H E L F 23===================================Chassis = READYSlot 01 = READY Slot 02 = READY Slot 03 = READY Slot 04 = NULL Slot 05 = DISABLED Slot 06 = READY Slot 07 = READY Slot 08 = READY Slot 09 = NULL Slot 10 = READY Slot 11 = NULL Slot 12 = READY Slot 13 = NULL Slot 14 = NULL Slot 15 = READY Slot 16 = NULL Slot 17 = READY Slot 18 = NULL Slot 19 = READY Slot 20 = NULL Clk A = READY Clk B = NULL

Page 84: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

76 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryConnectionsqueryConnections

This command sends a HOSTD query event to all cards. It collects and reports the responses. It shows each network connection, and the connected shelf number in hexadecimal, the IP address, and the amount of time that the shelf has been connected to the switch. To convert hexadecimal output from this query command to decimal, see “Using Hexadecimal” on page 741. Also, see “queryHostdProxyDb” on page 81

queryConnections Card 17: Shelf:0xfd IP:172.19.168.5 Uptime:0 days 06:33:44 Card 21: Shelf:0x21 IP:172.19.161.20 Uptime:3 days 07:06:002 connections to shelf

queryFaultStatusqueryFaultStatus <cardNumber>

This command shows the mode (automatic or manual) of the fault manager and the card on which it is running.

queryFaultStatusFault Manager is running in Auto mode in card 1.

setQueryWait setQueryWait <waitTime>

NOTE: This command has no effect, and is being deprecated

This command sets the wait time before performing a query command.

setQueryWait 1200

Syntax Description

<waitTime> number of milliseconds

Page 85: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 77990-1012-001

queryCardStatusqueryCardStatus

This command shows card status for all of the cards in a switch, including the type of card and if it is in service or not.

queryCardStatus

*********************************************** System Card Status ***********************************************SLOT ( 1):TICSUB MgrSLOT ( 2):TICSLOT ( 3):TICSLOT ( 4):OUT-OF-SERVICESLOT ( 5):OUT-OF-SERVICESLOT ( 6):LTCSLOT ( 7):OUT-OF-SERVICESLOT ( 8):PICSLOT ( 9):SLOT (10):PICSUB MgrSLOT (11):SLOT (12):PICSLOT (13):SLOT (14):OUT-OF-SERVICESLOT (15):BICSLOT (16):SLOT (17):BICSUB MgrSLOT (18):SLOT (19):BICSLOT (20):CLCK (01):CLKCLCK (02):OUT-OF-SERVICE

Page 86: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

78 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryShelfLEDsqueryShelfLEDs

This command shows shelf light emitting diodes (LEDS) on all the cards in a switch and their severity.

queryShelfLEDsSlot: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22Crit: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Majr: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A - - - -Minr: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A - A AAdbl: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A A - A A

shelf_invshelf_inv

This command shows which slots have in-service cards logged onto inventory (marked by asterisks) and which cards currently have Ethernet connections (marked by brackets around asterisks).

shelf_inv

S C CL l lO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 k kT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B==============================================================< - - - [*] - - - - - * * * - - - - - * * - - *

Page 87: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 79990-1012-001

dispOIDdispOID <OID>

This command displays the constituent parts of an OID.

dispOID FE-0-1-1

OID: 4144000

Card = 1Shelf = 1Type = 17Inst = 0

dispOID 4144000

OID: FE-0-1-1

Card = 1Shelf = 1Type = 17Inst = 0

Syntax Description

<OID> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30. The OID can be entered in either hexidecimal or ASCII form.

Page 88: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

80 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

statusstatus <oid> | (<object>) <key>)

This is the Generic CLI status command. For details, see “status” on page 7.

It can also show command the Operational State, Master Operational State, Administrative State, Master Administrative State, Resource Status, and Resource Available status for an OID.

However, this usage is being phased out. Use statusFacility instead.

status span-0***** Status for Span-0-1-10 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: UNLOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: ISVResource Available?: YES

statusFacility

statusFacility <oid>

This command shows the Operational State, Master Operational State, Administrative State, Master Administrative State, Resource Status, and Resource Available status for an OID.

934> statusFacility span-0935> ***** Status for Span-0-1-10 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: UNLOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: ISVResource Available?: YES

Syntax Description

[oid] Object Identifier — unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<oid> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 89: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 81990-1012-001

Tip

spanStatusspanStatus

This command show the Operational State, Master Operational State, Administrative State, Master Administrative State, Resource Status, and Resource Available for all spans on the local card.

spanStatus Mastr Mastr Oper Oper Admin Admin Resrc ResrcOID State State State State Status Avail---------------------------------------------------------Span-0-6-23 ena ena unlk unlk isv yesSpan-1-6-23 dis ena unlk unlk oos no

querySchedulequerySchedule

This command shows the current task schedule. See “addTask” on page 597.

Although tasks can control alternate routing, they can also be used to automatically schedule any task that the switch should run periodically, such as backing up (flashing) the switch databases.

queryScheduleCurrent Time: 2004.09.05-10:34:39.Current Schedule:

Task Name Start Time Card Period Command-------------------------------------------------------------------- taskName yyyy.mo.dd-hh:mm:ss ## xxxxxxx x-command backup 2004.09.05-23:55:00 0 daily sh<6/backup

queryHostdProxyDbqueryHostdProxyDb

This command lists all HOSTD connections to the switch. It shows OM, ISEhouse, and TOPI shelf connections in hexadecimal, and which card in the shelf terminates the connection. To convert hexadecimal output from this query command to decimal, see “Using Hexadecimal” on page 741. Also, see “queryConnections” on page 76.

queryHostdProxyDbhost shelf:0x21 connected to proxy card 1

Page 90: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Switch Queries

82 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

nownow

This command returns the system time.

nowTuesday, 30 October 2007 20:17:22.982 [0, STD]

Page 91: 1012 Command Line Interface

Database Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 83990-1012-001

Tip

Database Queries

queryDbMasterqueryDbMaster

This command shows the card number of the database master card. The dB master contains the provisioning database. All cards in the system know which card is the dB master. If the card running the dB master fails, another running card automatically becomes the dB master.

queryDbMasterDbMaster: 1

queryDbqueryDb [dbManagerID [key [attribute]]]

If you do not enter a dbManagerID, all database managers are returned

This command shows the list of databases and can also show the database being managed by a certain database manager. If you enter a key, only the database item referring to the key appears.

queryDb tNailDbMgr

Current Database...

* * * * *

Syntax Description

dbManagerID optional

the name of the db manager

key optional

the specific name (key) of the object that you want to query, for example the name of a rate center or the DN of a subscriber

attribute optional

the attribute in the object of the database that you want to query

Page 92: 1012 Command Line Interface

Database Queries

84 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryDbKeysqueryDbKeys dbManagerID [card]

This command returns all of the database keys associated with the specified database manager.

queryDbKeys tRateCenterDbMgr1.rc12.rc2

queryMemAuditqueryMemAudit

This command displays memory audit information, including information about db Flash.

Related Commands

See “setDbFlashPadSize” on page 600.

See “setServiceSaveInterval” on page 601.

queryMemAudit

******* Memory Audit Information *******ShelfNumber = 10

Low memory threshold: 15% of 190.734MB (28.609MB)Memory Test Sample Period = 5000 millisecsMemory Test Sample Threshold = 3 timesRequired memory pad for dbFlash = 500000Service database autosave interval = 180000000 millisecsSufficient memory condition for 32 audit cycles

Syntax Description

dbManagerID the name of the db manager

[card] optional card number (1-20). If no card number is specified, the database on the current card is queried

Page 93: 1012 Command Line Interface

Database Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 85990-1012-001

queryAttrDefsqueryAttrDefs classThis command shows all attribute definitions for a given ADO.

queryAttrDefs IPAddrPair***** Attribute Definition For Class (IPAddrPair), Attribute (sIPAddr) *****INDEX: 0ACCESS: ReadWriteREQUIRED: NODISPLAYED ON GUI: YESPERSISTENT: YESDATA TYPE: tStringDEFAULT VALUE: 0VALID VALUES: Any String between 7 and 15 charactersMIN/MAX: 7 15

***** Attribute Definition For Class (IPAddrPair), Attribute (Port) *****INDEX: 1ACCESS: ReadWriteREQUIRED: NODISPLAYED ON GUI: YESPERSISTENT: YESDATA TYPE: IntegerDEFAULT VALUE: 1VALID VALUES: Any Integer between 1 and 65535MIN/MAX: 1 65535

Syntax Description

<class> any Application Domain Object (e.g., Line, Trunk, Span, Card, Alarm, Subscriber, etc.

for a list of database types, see “queryDb” on page 83.

Page 94: 1012 Command Line Interface

Database Queries

86 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryAttrDefqueryAttrDef <class> <attribute> [<attribute> <attribute>...>]

This command shows a definition for a specific attribute. The attribute definition specifies weather or not the attribute can be modified. It also shows the valid input values for the attributes.

queryAttrDef Ds3Line operationalState***** Attribute Definition For Class (Ds3Line), Attribute (operationalState) ***** INDEX : 4 ACCESS : ReadOnly REQUIRED : NO DISPLAYED ON GUI : YES PERSISTENT : NO DATA TYPE : Integer DEFAULT VALUE : 1 INPUT TYPE : String or Integer VALID VALUES : (DISABLED or 0), (ENABLED or 1), (ACTIVE or 2), (BUSY or 3),

Syntax Description

<class> any Application Domain Object (e.g., Line, Trunk, Span, Card, Alarm, Subscriber, etc.

for a list of database types, see “queryDb” on page 83.

<attribute> any valid attribute name seen from the query command

[<attribute>, <attribute>...>]

optional

any valid attribute name seen from the query command, more than one way may be specified

Page 95: 1012 Command Line Interface

Database Queries

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 87990-1012-001

Tip

queryModifiedAttrsqueryModifiedAttrs

This command lists the object attributes that have been modified. This is usually the result of applying a patch to a trunk group.

xqueryModifiedAttrsIPTrunkGroup:sendCPN-OCX5.0.0-0042HuntGroup:sendPilotDNasANI-OCX5.0.0-0078InterfaceGroup:discardSETUP-OCX5.0.0-0087OfficeParms:pingPeriod-OCX5.0.0-0096SS7TrunkGroup:passFacilityMessage-OCX5.0.0-0099PRITrunkGroup:errIntervalInMils-OCX5.0.0-0123PRITrunkGroup:lowWaterPerSec-OCX5.0.0-0123PRITrunkGroup:highWaterPerSec-OCX5.0.0-0123InterfaceGroup:lowWaterPerSec-OCX5.0.0-0123

queryIGqueryIG <RDTName>

An asterisk next to the Trunk OID shows which card is running the call control logic.

When the path is “Active”, the asterisk will be on that trunk.

When the path is “Forwarding”, the asterisk will be on the mate’s trunk.

This command shows the trunks that are assigned to the primary and secondary EOCs and TMCs for an RDT interface group, as well as their corresponding spans.

NOTE: A status of “Forwarding” is the same as “Active”.

queryIG entrisphere

EOC Primary Path Status : Active Lapd: In_service Trunk-83-11-9*EOC Secondary Path Status : Standby Lapd: In_service Trunk-107-11-9TMC Primary Path Status : Standby Lapd: In_service Trunk-95-11-9TMC Secondary Path Status : Active Lapd: In_service Trunk-119-11-9*

Spans: 1 Span-3-11-9 Primary 2 Span-4-11-9 Secondary

Syntax Description

RDTName name of Interface Group

Page 96: 1012 Command Line Interface

Database Queries

88 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

whoDependsOnwhoDependsOn <dbMgrCatName> <key>

This command shows inter database dependencies. Some database objects reference other database objects. The referenced object cannot be deleted as long other objects contain references to them.

In this example, rate center rc1 is referenced by several subscribers. Until these subscribers are deleted, or their rate center changed, rate center rc1 cannot be deleted.

whoDependsOn tRateCenterDbMgr rc1 Dependencies on this database entry... Dependencies in database tSubscriberDbMgr... Key: 9724800020 Key: 9724800021 Key: 9724800022 Key: 9724800023 Key: 9724800024 Key: 9724800025 Key: 9724800026 Key: 9724800027 Key: 9724800028 Key: 9724800029

Syntax Description

<dbMgrCatName> name of the database manager to be queried

<key> name of the object to check for dependencies

Page 97: 1012 Command Line Interface

CDRs

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 89990-1012-001

CDRs

queryCdrStatus

queryCdrStatus

This command displays Call Detail Record (CDR) counters and whether or not a billing collection host (for example, the OM) is connected.

Syntax Description

maTotalTransmittedCdrCount The total number of CDRs transmitted from the card.

maTotalRecordCdrCount The total number of CDRs created on this card since last boot.

maBufferedCdrCount The total number of CDRs buffered on the card.

If this value exceeds the maMaxCdrBuffer amount the system deletes the oldest CDRs to protect the card’s memory.

maTotalLostCdrCount The total number of CDRs that were lost due to the CDR buffer being full.

maMaxCdrBuffer The maximum number of CDRs that can be stored on the card when the billing collector is not connected.

maMaxCdrPerTransmit The number of CDRs (default 30) sent to the billing collection system for every CDR transmission.

maCdrTransmitInterval The number of milliseconds between CDR transfers. The transfer rate for CDRs can be determined by using the following formula:

(maMaxCdrPerTransmit (CDR) / maCdrTransmitInterval (ms)) * 1000 = CDR/second

NOTE: The default CDR transfer rate is (30 / 2000) * 1000 = 15 CDR/second. If this rate is too slow, further analysis is required.

maSessionNumber The last session number used.

maSequenceNumber The last sequence number used.

Page 98: 1012 Command Line Interface

CDRs

90 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryCdrStatus************************************************************ CDR Status ************************************************************maTotalTransmittedCdrCount.............8maTotalRecordCdrCount..................8maBufferedCdrCount.....................0maMaxCdrBuffer.........................5000maMaxCdrPerTransmit....................104maCdrTransmitInterval..................1400maSessionNumber........................8maSequenceNumber.......................8

maHostID The destination id of the registered billing collection system. This value is only valid when the isHostConnected variable shows Yes — connected.

isCardBuffering Indicates if CDRs are being held on the card (Yes), or being collected off the card, (No)

Syntax Description

Page 99: 1012 Command Line Interface

CDRs

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 91990-1012-001

showCDRshowCDR <maxRecords> [maPrintCdrDetail]

This command displays uncollected CDR records from the card.

NOTE: When CDR collection is running properly, there will be no (or very few) CDRs to display on the card.

showCDR 3[BEGIN]--------------OCX Message Accounting-------------------[00001] 1;11;01;01;0000001;000001;;cardInit;20061221191644001;;;;;;;;;;

[00002] 0;11;01;01;0000;0;0000002;000002;9724800000;;20061222222028000;20061222222112000;104;20061222222112000;0;;;;;;;;0000;9724800000;15;00;;;;;;;;;;0000;;;0;0;;;00;;;16;;;0

[00003] 0;11;01;01;0001;0;0000003;000003;9724800001;;20061222222031000;20061222222113000;104;20061222222113000;0;;;;;;;;0000;9724800001;15;00;;;;;;;;;;0000;;;0;0;;;00;;;16;;;0

[END ]--------------OCX Message Accounting-------------------

Syntax Description

<maxRecords> the maximum number of CDR records to display.

[maPrintCdrDetail] optional

specifies that besides the raw CDR data, a formatted trace of the CDR show also be printed.

• 0f -- detailed print of primary CDRs

• f0 -- detailed print of secondary (service) CDRs

• ff -- detailed print of primary and secondary CDRs

• 0 -- (default) do not print detailed information for any type of CDRs

Page 100: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

92 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Substitution

querySubstitutionquerySubstitution

This command shows the substitution manager, group members, and status of substitution for the specific card.

****** Substitution Status Check ******Substitution Manager Card: 10Substitution Group Member Cards: (8) (9)Substitution is active for NONE

Substitution Manager Card: 14Substitution Group Member Cards: (12)Substitution is active for NONE

Substitution Manager Card: 20Substitution Group Member Cards: (17) (18) (19)Substitution is active for NONE

querySubBusquerySubBus

This platform command validates the substitution bus configuration in the rear of the midplane.

querySubBusReads and displays *current* sub bus configurationWarning: Lack of rear cards on ends of group appear as breaksWarning: With 2 rear sub cards on same bus, data is unreliable

querySubBus: (myslot=15) is not currently setup as a subCardquerySubBus: can only be run on a SubCard

I2C: Rear card config: I/OI2C: Sub Bus Config: ON Sub BusF

Page 101: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 93990-1012-001

displaySubBusGrpsdisplaySubBusGrps

This platform command displays the saved substitution bus configuration from each substitution manager card.

displaySubBusGrpsDisplays *saved* sub bus configuration from each subCardSaved data is updated on power up and s/w subCard config*Warning: Lack of rear cards on ends of group appear as breaksWarning: With 2 rear sub cards on same bus, data is unreliable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 - S X x x X - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Page 102: 1012 Command Line Interface

Central Office

94 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

Central Office

queryCACqueryCAC <code>

This command shows the Carrier Access code and carrier attributes.

queryCAC 0333Carrier: WorldComm, Code: 0333, Carrier Attributes: InterLata OS Capable DA Capable International

queryAudioqueryAudio [<name> | <ALL>]

Use this command to see which recorded announcements are provisioned on the switch: queryDbKeys tAudioDbMgr

This command shows a list of the recorded announcements on the switch. For a complete list of announcements on the T7000, see the T7000 Product Description Manual.

queryAudio offHookAnnouncement: offHook Bytes: 54084

queryAudio ALL

Current Announcement list

---Announcement: ScrNumToDel Bytes: 149130---Announcement: Announcement18 Bytes: 12364---Announcement: DelEntry Bytes: 80248---Announcement: Announcement19 Bytes: 68262---

Syntax Description

<code> 4-digit carrier access code

Syntax Description

[name] announcement name

[ALL] Keyword that acts as the key for all announcements.

Page 103: 1012 Command Line Interface

Central Office

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 95990-1012-001

Announcement: allCircuitsBusy Bytes: 46799---Announcement: SCAoff Bytes: 23640---Announcement: ARLast Bytes: 15686---Announcement: SCRAnnouncement Bytes: 42546---

[subsequent output trimmed]

Page 104: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

96 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Protocols

Commands in this section are grouped by protocol, such as MGCP, VoIP, SS7, etc. For most MGCP commands, use the Generic CLI query command.

MGCP

queryGWYqueryGWY <associationId | all> [debug]

This command returns the Local and Remote addressing information for the requested Association ID(s). It queries the MGCP Stack Interface to get the association table information and dumps it for debugging purposes.

An association can be thought of as a pairing between one FE's IP/port (either fe-0 or fe-1 for the PIC) and the Gateway's IP/port (or the Gateway's Domain Name, if the IP is not yet known).

queryGWY all

172.19.160.111/2727 169.254.175.7/2427/hxt2.taqua.com hNXT2172.19.160.111/2727 169.254.175.6/2427/hxt1.taqua.com hNXT172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.177.240/2427/arris.taqua.com Aris172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.138/2427acgw.taqua.com gw3172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.128/2427/atagw2.taqua.com gw1

5 Gateway Associations are defined.

In the above example, the local IP Address of the 1st Association ID is 172.19.160.111, and the local Port number is 2727. The remote IP address of the same Association ID is 169.254.175.7, the Port Number is 2427, the Domain Name is hxt2.taqua.com,and the Gateway Instance is hNXT2.

queryGWY all debuug

Assoc. Table entry size = 608 bytes.

Id Prev NxtF Local IP/Port Remote IP/Port/Name Gateway Instance1 8197 4 172.19.160.111/2727 0.0.0.0/0/[1] No Gateway Instance.3 4 7 172.19.160.111/2727 169.254.175.7/2427/hxt2.taqua.com hNXT24 1 3 172.19.160.111/2727 169.254.175.6/2427/hxt1.taqua.com hNXT15 6 8197 172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.177.240/2427/arris.taqua.com Aris6 7 5 172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.138/2427/acgw.taqua.com gw37 3 6 172.19.160.111/2727 172.19.160.128/2427/atagw2.taqua.com gw1

6 Gateway Associations are defined.

Syntax Description

<associationId | all> Association ID, or the keyword “all” to query all Association IDs

[debug] Optional keyword that provides additional information, mostly of interest to Taqua TAC personnel.

Page 105: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 97990-1012-001

Tip

queryGWYCounts

Use this command to ensure your Gateways are provisioned in a "balanced" manner among the available PIC or PIC2 card.

queryGWYCounts

This command searches the Media Gateway database and prints how many Gateways are provisioned on each PIC or PIC2 card. It also provides a count of the number of Gateways that were locked at the time the command ran.

The 1st example shows 2 Gateways provisioned on a single PIC:

queryGWYCounts

Card: Gwy Count:PIC17 2 Total Gwys = 2 Total Locked = 0

The next example shows multiple Gateways provisioned across multiple PICs:

queryGWYCountsqueryGWYCounts

Card: Gwy Count:PIC 6 3000PIC 8 1PIC 9 3000PIC13 2000PIC17 2000

Total Gwys = 10001 Total Locked = 0

Page 106: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

98 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SIP

statusstatus <oid>

This is the Generic CLI command, used to show information about a PIC card’s Fast Ethernet (FE) interfaces.

status fe-0***** Status for FE-0-7-9 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: UNLOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: ISVResource Available?: YESBearer Activity?: 0Bearer Resource Available?: YESIP Dialogue Activity? : 0IP Dialogue Resource Available? : YES

Syntax Description

<oid> Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF).

Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit of the near end network interface OID provisioned on the T7000. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 107: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 99990-1012-001

Tip

queryListByCodecProfilequeryListByCodecProfile <codecProfileName>

Use this command to see which codec profiles have been provisioned: query CodecProfile

This command shows the codec list or lists to which the codec profile belongs.

queryListByCodecProfile prf10

CodecProfileName:prf10Key(codecProfileLstName): prflist3AMember in CodecProfileLst:codecProfile...: prf10 codecProfile...: prf30 codecProfile...: prf20 Key(codecProfileLstName): prflist3BMember in CodecProfileLst:codecProfile...: prf10 codecProfile...: prf20 codecProfile...: prf30

queryIPTrunkReservation queryIPTrunkReservation [IPTrunkGroupName]

This command shows which IP trunks in an IP trunk group are currently reserved.

queryIPTrunkReservationReservation By Trunk Group

Reservation By Card

Syntax Description

<codecProfileName> name of the codec profile to query

Syntax Description

[IPTrunkGroupName] name of the IP trunk group to query

Page 108: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

100 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

querySipEndpointByName

querySipEndpointByName [[ALL] | [sipEndpointName]]

Without a parameter, this command returns a list of all SIP endpoints with names.

With a parameter of SIP endpoint name, this command returns the entry in the Sip Endpoint Database that corresponds to that name.

With a parameter of “ALL”, this command returns all entries in the Sip Endpoint Database with a name.

NOTE: Since ‘Name’ is not a mandatory field for SIP endpoints, this command may not return as much data as “querySipEndpoint” on page 101.

querySipEndpointByName

SIP Endpoint Name SIP Endpoint DN============================== ===============

querySipEndpointByName ALL0 item(s) found using 'ALL')

Syntax Description

[sipEndpointName] name of SIP endpoint

[ALL] Keyword that acts as the key for all SIP endpoints with a name.

Page 109: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 101990-1012-001

querySipEndpoint

querySipEndpoint [[ALL] | [SipEndpointDN]]

Without a parameter, this command returns a list of all SIP endpoint keys.

With a parameter of a SIP endpoint key, this command returns the entry in the Sip Endpoint Database that corresponds to that key.

With a parameter of “ALL”, this command returns all entries in the Sip Endpoint Database.

querySipEndpoint

Key(SipEndpointDN): 9724691000Usage: querySipEndpoint [SipEndpointDN or 'ALL']

querySipEndpoint 9724691000

<60c6bd0> SipAgwEndpointkey......................."9724691000"endpointName..............<>profileName..............."agwP1"bearerGrpKey.............."bg_agw"priHostIPAddrPair.........0 (0)altHostIPAddrPairs........0 (0)actHostIndex..............PRIMARY_HOST_ACTIVEtransportType.............UDPsignalingType.............SIPcmtsName..................<>FQDN......................<>outboundProxyIPAddrPair...0 (0)

Syntax Description

[sipEndpointKey] 10-digit directory number that acts as a key for SIP endpoint

[ALL] Keyword that acts as the key for all SIP endpoints.

Page 110: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

102 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

querySipEndpointByAddr querySipEndpointByAddr [[ipAddrPair] | [ALL]]

Without a parameter, this command returns a list of all SIP endpoint IP Addresses and Port numbers.

With a parameter of a IP Address and Port number, this command returns the entry in the Sip Endpoint Database that corresponds to that IP Address and Port number.

With a parameter of “ALL”, this command returns all entries in the Sip Endpoint Database.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods for example: 10.2.86.195

querySipEndpointByAddr

Key=IP Address Pair SIP Endpoint DN===================== =========================10.1.130.251:5060 9726921979 10.1.164.191:5060 9726921847 10.1.164.34:6200 9723847905 172.19.160.104:6060 9723847705

querySipEndpointByAddr 10.1.130.251:50601 item(s) found using '10.1.130.251:5060'

<3907860> SipNgwEndpointkey......................."9726921979"endpointName..............<>priHostIPAddrPair.........<3907920>

<3907920> IPAddrPair sIPAddr..."10.1.130.251" Port......13c4 (5060)

lSecHostIPAddrPair........<>actHostIndex..............PRIMARY_HOST_ACTIVEbearerCards...............<39079c0>

<39079c0> BearerCardList keyType......Integer

Syntax Description

[ipAddrPair] IP address and port

[ALL] Keyword that acts as the key for all SIP endpoints.

Page 111: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 103990-1012-001

valType......Integer collection...List (1 items) -> (1) IntegerValue: 8 (8)

transportType.............UDPsignalingType.............SIPprofileName..............."ngwProfile1"cmtsName..................<>outboundProxyIPAddrPair...0 (0)

* * * * *

Page 112: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

104 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

printGateInfoprintGateInfo <cmtsName>

This command dumps the active gate IDs for the specified CMTS. A Gate ID is associated with each DQoS call (similar to a call reference) and is released after the call is over. GateIDs are allocated and maintained by the CMTS. The switch requests a new GateID when it is about to make a call for an endpoint that has enabled DQoS service.

If the CMTS has not allocated any Gate IDs, the command returns a prompt.

printGateInfo cmts2 ****** Current Gate IDs ********12346***********************************

Syntax Description

<cmtsName> Name of the CMTS to query.

Page 113: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 105990-1012-001

SS7

The following commands query the status of SS7 objects

SS7RouteStatusSS7RouteStatus [routeName]

This command returns the status of an SS7 Route. if routeName is omitted, it returns the status of all SS7 Routes is returned

SS7RouteStatus R1_MIN

SS7Route: R1_MINObject ID: SS7Route-0-0-23DPC: 229-123-100 Priority: 1 Congestion: 0Status: Available LinkSet LinkSet1 is Available

routeLB1 Object ID: 0x92c000DPC: 200-200-200 Priority: 1 Congestion: 0,Status: AvailableLinkSet LinkSetLB1 is Available

Syntax Description

[routeName] name of the SS7 Route to query

Page 114: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

106 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

getSLSMapgetSLSMap [linksetName]

This command shows the Signaling Link Selection (SLS) mapping for the SS7 links in the specified lank set. If no link set is specified, the SLS maps for all link sets are showed.

LinkSet: LinkSetLB1 (PC: 200-200-200) : Active, In Service

Members:LinkLB1, Available==================== SLSMAP for linkset 'LinkSetLB1' ====================SLS Current Link Defined Link Alternate Link flag Link Set___ ____________ ____________ ______________ ____ ________ 0 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 1 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 2 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 3 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 4 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 5 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 6 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 7 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 8 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 9 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 10 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 11 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 12 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 13 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 14 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 15 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 16 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 17 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 18 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 19 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 20 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 21 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 22 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 23 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 24 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 25 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 26 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 27 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 28 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 29 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 30 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0 31 LinkLB1 LinkLB1 0......

route on link: LinkLB1 total: 128 percent: 100

Syntax Description

linksetName name of the link set to display

Page 115: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 107990-1012-001

linkSetStatuslinkSetStatus [linkSetName]

This command shows the status of an SS7 link set. If no link set is specified, the command shows the status for all link sets

linkSetStatus

LinkSetLB1 LinkSetError Correction Method: Basic Error Correction MethodType: F LinkSetObject ID: 0x928000PC: 200-200-200Status: Active In ServiceMembers:LinkLB1

linkStatuslinkStatus [linkName]

This command shows the status of a SS7 link within a link set. If no link is specified, the command shows the status for all links

linkStatusLinkset: LinkSetLB1, Error Correction Method: Basic Error Correction Method

Link: LinkLB1Error Correction Method: Basic Error Correction MethodType: F LinkObject ID: 0x4c924000, Channel: Trunk-23-19-9SLC: 00, PC: 200-200-200, Instance: 0Status: Available

Syntax Description

[linkSetName] link set name

Syntax Description

[linkName] link name

Page 116: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

108 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

nodeStatusnodeStatus [nodeName]

This command reports the status of SS7 nodes. If no node is specified, the command shows the status for all nodes

nodeStatus

CXautoNode Object ID: 0x930000 PC: 100-100-100Local, No Transfer Capability, ( Local)Not RestartingLBautoNode Object ID: 0x930001 PC: 200-200-200Remote, No Transfer Capability, Adjacent NodeNot Restarting, Accessible

SS7NetworkStatusSS7NetworkStatus [networkName]

This command reports the status of the objects contained in an SS7 network. If no network is specified, the command shows the status for all networks

SS7NetworkStatus

ss7LBnet Object ID: 0x934000, Not BCC Network, Local Network. Not RestartingMembers:OCXautoNodeLBautoNode

Syntax Description

[nodeName] node name

Syntax Description

[networkName] network name

Page 117: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 109990-1012-001

queryCICqueryCIC pointCode

This command shows all CICs for a specified point code.

C A U T I O N

This command could return a very large number of CICs.

queryCIC 2-2-2******* CIC Trace for 2-2-2 *******CIC = 15, OID=Trunk-14-2-5CIC = 1, OID=Trunk-0-2-5CIC = 16, OID=Trunk-15-2-5CIC = 2, OID=Trunk-1-2-5CIC = 17, OID=Trunk-16-2-5CIC = 3, OID=Trunk-2-2-5CIC = 18, OID=Trunk-17-2-5CIC = 4, OID=Trunk-3-2-5CIC = 19, OID=Trunk-18-2-5CIC = 5, OID=Trunk-4-2-5CIC = 20, OID=Trunk-19-2-5CIC = 6, OID=Trunk-5-2-5CIC = 21, OID=Trunk-20-2-5CIC = 7, OID=Trunk-6-2-5CIC = 22, OID=Trunk-21-2-5CIC = 8, OID=Trunk-7-2-5CIC = 23, OID=Trunk-22-2-5CIC = 9, OID=Trunk-8-2-5CIC = 10, OID=Trunk-9-2-5CIC = 11, OID=Trunk-10-2-5CIC = 12, OID=Trunk-11-2-5CIC = 13, OID=Trunk-12-2-5CIC = 14, OID=Trunk-13-2-5

Syntax Description

pointCode point code of a switch in an SS7 network

Page 118: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

110 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

dispPCMap

dispPCMap [nodeName]

This command displays the PC (Point Code) map for a given Alias node. The PC map routes ISUP messages by CIC to the Alias node.

dispPCMap Garland

AliasPCName AliasPC DestinationPC CICrange Garland 229-100-102 230-100-011 0044-0056

queryLinkTimersqueryLinkTimers [linkName]

This command shows link timer values. If no linkName is specified, the command shows the status for all SS7 links.

queryLinkTimers link1

Link: link1 Object ID: SS7Link-0-8-20L2Tie: 1L2Tin: 4L2T1: 13002L2T2: 12000L2T3: 11800L2T4e: 593L2T4n: 2300L2T5: 100L2T6: 3500L2T7: 1000

Link uses BASIC Error Correction MethodL3T1: 800L3T2: 1400L3T3: 800L3T4: 800L3T5: 800L3T7: 1000L3T12: 800L3T13: 800L3T14: 2000L3T17: 1500L3T19: 480000L3T20: 90000L3T21: 90000L3T31: 10000L3T33: 60000L3T34: 5000

Syntax Description

[nodeName] Optional SS7 node name.Omit to display the PC map for all Alias nodes.

Syntax Description

[linkName] link name

Page 119: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 111990-1012-001

SLTC T1: 10000SLTC T2: 30000

TXCongestionAbatementL1:30TXCongestionOnsetL1:40TXCongestionDiscardL1:60TXCongestionAbatementL2:50TXCongestionOnsetL2:70TXCongestionDiscardL2:90TXCongestionAbatementL3:80TXCongestionOnsetL3:100TXCongestionDiscardL3:110

TXCongestionTimer:30

queryNodeTimersqueryNodeTimers [nodeName]

This command shows SS7 node timer values. If no node is specified, the command shows the status for all nodes.

queryNodeTimers Houston

Houston Object ID: SS7Node-2-0-20L3T25: 30000L3T28: 3000L3T29: 60000

queryNWTimersqueryNWTimers [networkName]

This command shows the network timers for local and remote SS7 networks. If no network is specified, the command shows the status for all networks

queryNWTimers

ss7LBnet Object ID: 0x934000L3T22: 8000L3T23: 16000L3T24: 15000L3T26: 12000L3T27: 3000

Syntax Description

[nodeName] node name

Syntax Description

[networkName] network name

Page 120: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

112 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryRouteTimersqueryRouteTimers [routeName]

This command shows SS7 route timer values. If noSS7 Route is specified, the command shows the status for all SS7 Routes.

queryRouteTimers toHou

toHou Object ID: SS7Route-0-0-20L3T6: 800L3T8: 1000L3T10: 30000L3T15: 2000L3T16: 1400

Syntax Description

[routeName] route name

Page 121: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 113990-1012-001

GR-303/PRI

queryDS1s queryDS1s <rdtName>

This command shows the status of DS1s that connect the switch to an RDT.

queryDS1s Etres

1 InServ Provisioned NotInLoopback {} 2 InServ Provisioned NotInLoopback {}

query921Statusquery921Status [instance]

This command shows the status of EOC and TMC links that use Link Access Protocol D (LAPD) for GR-303 or the status of a d-channel for links using PRI.

NOTE: This command only returns information about the card to which it is directly connected. For the status of all d-channels on the switch, see “queryDchStatus” on page 114.

query921Status

Inst LAPD State DLCI OID Port 1 TEI_Assigned 104 Trunk-299 (012b) 1 2 TEI_Assigned 904 Trunk-299 (012b) 1 3 TEI_Assigned 104 Trunk-311 (0137) 2 4 TEI_Assigned 100 Trunk-311 (0137) 2 5 Multiple_frame_established 100 Trunk-335 (014f) 3 6 Multiple_frame_established 104 Trunk-299 (012b) 1 7 Multiple_frame_established 904 Trunk-299 (012b) 1 8 Multiple_frame_established 104 Trunk-311 (0137) 2 9 Multiple_frame_established 100 Trunk-311 (0137) 2

Syntax Description

rdtName name of Interface Group

Syntax Description

[instance] LAPD instance

Page 122: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

114 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryDchStatusqueryDchStatus <TrkGrpName>

This command shows status for d-channels for PRI trunk groups.

NOTE: A path status of “Forwarding” is the same as “Active”.

queryDchStatus toHoustonPRI

PRI/NFAS Group: toHoustonPRID-ch Primary (Trunk-263-10-20) Path Status : FailedLapd: Out_of_service

Primary Trunk-263-10-20 Signaling Status:ISDND: lapdActive Channel: Failed Path: Failed

Path Protection Status:PPS: waitingPathAvai Primary: Failed

Syntax Description

<TrkGrpName> PRI trunk group name

Page 123: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 115990-1012-001

queryRDTClasses queryRDTClasses

This command shows all the long and short names of the RDT classes.

queryRDTClasses*******RDT CLASS NAMES FOR COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE*******

Long Name: (NetworkElement) --- Abbreviated Name: (ne) --- Integer Value: (6)Long Name: (Equipment) --- Abbreviated Name: (eq) --- Integer Value: (7)Long Name: (Memory) --- Abbreviated Name: (mem) --- Integer Value: (8)Long Name: (IdlcCPProfile) --- Abbreviated Name: (icpp) --- Integer Value: (25)Long Name: (IdlcDLProfile) --- Abbreviated Name: (idlp) --- Integer Value: (26)Long Name: (AnalogLineTerm) --- Abbreviated Name: (alt) --- Integer Value: (10)Long Name: (DS1LineTerm) --- Abbreviated Name: (ds1) --- Integer Value: (17)Long Name: (ProtectionGroupUnit) --- Abbreviated Name: (pgu) --- Integer Value: (5)Long Name: (AlarmCountList) --- Abbreviated Name: (acl) --- Integer Value: (9)

Page 124: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

116 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryRDTLinesqueryRDTLines rdtName [startTermId] [endTermId]

This command shows the analog lines attached to an RDT.

queryRDTLines Etres

1 InServ Provisioned NotRemoved {} 2 InServ Provisioned NotRemoved {} 3 InServ Provisioned NotRemoved {} 4 InServ Provisioned NotRemoved {} 5 InServ Provisioned NotRemoved {} 6 InServ Provisioned NotRemoved {}

Syntax Description

rdtName name of RDT

[startTermId] optional

the number associated with the first analog line (1-2048) on the RDT

[endTermId] optional

the number associated with the last analog line (1-2048) on the RDT

Page 125: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 117990-1012-001

queryRDTObjectqueryRDTObject <rdtName> <objectClass> <instNum>

This command shows RDT object classes.

queryRDTObject Etres mem 1

******** RDT Object Trace ********ObjectClass - MemoryObjectId - 1PrimarySrvcState - InServSecondarySrvcState - {}

******** End Object Trace ********

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

<objectClass> Enter one of the following for the corresponding element:

• ne — to query the network element

• eq — to query equipment (cards, circuits, etc.) on the RDT

• mem — to query CPU and software memory on the RDT

• icpp — to query the attributes and timers of the TMC

• idlp — to query the data link between the switch and the RDT that contains the attributes and timers of the EOC, EOC PPS, and TMC PPS

• alt — to query analog lines on the RDT

• ds1 — to query DS1 links on the switch

• pgu — to query DS1s that backup the EOC and TMC

• acl — to query the RDT alarms on the switch and how many times each alarm has occurred

<instNum> The number of instances of the query you want to appear:

• ne is 1

• mem is 1

• icpp is 1

• idlp is from 1-4

• alt is from 1-2048

• ds1 is from 1-28

• pgu is from 1-4

• acl is 1

Page 126: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

118 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

querySubCRVsquerySubCRVs <RDT/GW>

This command returns either:

• for GR-303 subscribers — the subscriber DNs on an RDT and the unique call reference value (CRV) assigned to each subscriber DN

• for MGCP subscribers — the subscriber DNs on an MGCP gateway and the unique termination ID assigned to each subscriber DN

querySubCRVs Etres

Subscribers for IG Etres:CRV/MgTermID: 1Subscriber: 9724800001CRV/MgTermID: 2Subscriber: 9724800002CRV/MgTermID: 3Subscriber: 9724800003

queryCRVsqueryCRVs <RDTName|PRIGroupName> [p|r]

This command shows which CRVs are reserved or assigned to trunks for that RDT or PRI interface group.

queryCRVs AFC_NW_TARRANT

Syntax Description

<RDT/GW> name of the GR-303 RDT/name of the MGCP GW

Syntax Description

RDTName|PRIGroupName

name of the GR-303 RDT

name of the PRI interface group

[p|r] p — permanent signal, returns only CRVs in which the phone has been off-hook for over 2.5 minutes

r — reserved, returns only CRVs reserved (unavailable while the switch allocates a trunk for the call).

Page 127: 1012 Command Line Interface

Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 119990-1012-001

viewRDTCmdsviewRDTCmds <rdtName>

This command shows the RDT commands in the command queue.

viewRDTCmds Etres

RDT EOC queue empty.

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

Page 128: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

120 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

FTRS

queryPretranslationqueryPretranslation <PreTransKey> | <ALL>

This command shows all patterns of a pretranslation table.

Prerequisites

Create an FTRS profile, see “FTRSProfile” on page 231

Create an FTRS pretranslation table, see “createPretranslation” on page 223

Add an FTRS pretranslation, see “addPretranslation” on page 224

queryPretranslation E911_Service_T

Pre-Translation Table : 'E911_Service_T'----------------------------------------------------------- 1: 911T /REM 1,3 /INS 1,2124800005 =CARRIER /CAC 0999 /REM 1,10 /INS 1,911 /CT 10===========================================================

Syntax Description

<PreTransKey the name of the pretranslation table

<ALL> a keyword that acts as the key for all pretranslation tables

Page 129: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 121990-1012-001

queryPretransByDigitPtnqueryPretransByDigitPtn <PreTransKey> <digitPtnStr>

This command shows the patterns digit string of a pretranslation table.

Prerequisites

Create an FTRS profile, see “FTRSProfile” on page 231

Create an FTRS pretranslation table, see “createPretranslation” on page 223

Add an FTRS pretranslation, see “addPretranslation” on page 224

queryPretransByDigitPtn pretrantest 9*4600000

Pre-Translation Table : 'pretrantest'-----------------------------------------------------------9*4600000 = SUBSCRIBER===========================================================

Syntax Description

<PreTransKey> the name of the pretranslation table

<digitPtnStr> A digit pattern string in the pretranslation table. A pattern is the called number, dialed by the subscriber or received on a trunk group.

Page 130: 1012 Command Line Interface

Routing

122 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

Routing

queryRoutingqueryRouting <NANP | LNP | CARR | TANDEMCARR | TANDEMANI>

Use “query TandemTGRouteList” to query Tandem Trunk Group routing.

This command returns the auxiliary routing tree for all route lists of the specified type, along with their minimum and maximum digits.

Syntax Description

NANP

LNP

CARR

TANDEMCARR

TANDEMANI]

• NANP — North American Numbering Plan, routes calls when the destination is in the same carrier's network as the switch.

• LNP — Local Number Portability, routes to telephone numbers that are moved between or within Local Exchange Carriers (LECs).

• CARR — Carrier routes a four-digit number that identifies any company that provides circuit communications.

• TANDEMCARR — Tandem Carrier routes from a subtending switch to an AT or ICX using the carrier code or a combination of the carrier code and the route code.

• TANDEMANI — Tandem Automatic Number Identification, routes from a subtending switch to a AT or IXC using the ANI of the call.

Page 131: 1012 Command Line Interface

Routing

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 123990-1012-001

queryRouting NANP***** 1-DIGIT ROUTE LISTS *****ROUTE LIST NAMED: RappServMIN_DIGITS: (0) MAX_DIGITS: (0)ROUTE #0: ipngwaz1***** 3-DIGIT ROUTE LISTS *****ROUTE LIST NAMED: ANA_T6000MIN_DIGITS: (685) MAX_DIGITS: (685)ROUTE #0: ipngwVDngwROUTE LIST NAMED: PSAP1MIN_DIGITS: (911) MAX_DIGITS: (911)***** 10-DIGIT ROUTE LISTS *****ROUTE LIST NAMED: IAD1_MGCPMIN_DIGITS: (2124605000) MAX_DIGITS: (2124605000)ROUTE #0: ipngwVDngwROUTE LIST NAMED: 2124605002MIN_DIGITS: (2124605002) MAX_DIGITS: (2124605002)ROUTE #0: ipngwVDngwROUTE LIST NAMED: skinneyROUTE #0: ipngwaz1

Page 132: 1012 Command Line Interface

In-Service Upgrades

124 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

In-Service Upgrades

Taqua Technical Assistance Center (TAC) uses in-service upgrades (ISUs) to modify T7000 software while the switch is carrying call traffic. ISUs can either be applied to one card or all cards on a T7000. An ISU can be applied individually or as part of a Service Pack.

Service Packs bundle ISUs in groups. This bundling reduces ISU dependencies and improves ISU interaction testing. ISUs in Service Packages are built, tested, and released together on the last General Availability (GA) software release and all previously-released Service Packages.

Once an ISU is applied, it installs and re-applies itself automatically on every successive reboot of the cards. If an ISU is unapplied, but not unloaded, it re-applies itself on successive reboots.

W A R N I N G

ISUs should always be applied on a T7000-wide basis, unless directed by Taqua. ISUs applied to a single-card should only be performed by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances. If misused, single-card ISUs can cause the T7000 state to get out of sync and negatively affect call processing.

Page 133: 1012 Command Line Interface

In-Service Upgrades

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 125990-1012-001

queryPatchqueryPatch [-v] [-s] <patchID | applied | catalyst | functional | all>

This command shows the ISU number, patch status, active status, and timestamp for one or more ISUs on a particular card.

queryPatch allPatch ID Status Act. Flags Timestamp ======== ====== ==== ===== ========= OCX5.0.0-0004 Applied Yes 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:38 OCX5.0.0-0007 Applied Yes 00000005 11/13/2006 11:20:40 OCX5.0.0-0015 Applied Yes 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:38 OCX5.0.0-0014 Applied Yes 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:39 OCX5.0.0-0017 Applied Yes 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:39 OCX5.0.0-0018 Applied Yes 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:39 OCX5.0.0-0010 Applied Yes 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:40 OCX5.0.0-0001 Applied No/C 00000005 11/13/2006 11:20:43 OCX5.0.0-0006 Applied No/C 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:41 OCX5.0.0-0011 Applied Yes 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:41 OCX5.0.0-0012 Applied Yes 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:41 OCX5.0.0-0013 Applied Yes 00000015 11/13/2006 11:07:4

Syntax Description

[-v] The verbose parameter displays all ISU information. The default is to display brief ISU information.

[-s] The sort parameter displays ISUs in numerical order. The default is to display ISUs in the order which they were applied.

<patchIDappliedcatalyst

functional

all>

• patchID — Returns information for a particular ISU.

• applied — Returns information on all applied (i.e. ‘active’) ISUs.

• catalyst — Returns information on ISUs classified as catalysts. A catalyst ISUs does nothing when applied, but its presence or absence causes other ISUs to behave differently.

• functional — Returns information on ISUs classified as functional. Functional ISUs take action when applied.

• all — Returns information on all ISUs.

Page 134: 1012 Command Line Interface

In-Service Upgrades

126 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

sysQueryPatchsysQueryPatch [-g]|[[-v][-s]] [-c[<shelf>:][<card>]] <patchID>|applied|catalyst|functional|all

This command can only be used on the active System Manager card. It queries ISU data from any card in the switch.

sysQueryPatch -g OCX5.0.0-0004

***************** Shelf: 20 ***************** C C l l 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 k kPatchID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B------------------------------------------------------------- OCX5.0.0-0004 A A A A Aa a

A: applied,active U: unapplied,active blank: not loadeda: applied,inert u: unapplied,inert dash: not loaded on mother/daughter

Syntax Description

[-g] The grid printout parameter displays all ISUs on the switch in a grid. The cards are represented by columns, and the status of each ISU on each card is shown by a character.

NOTE: Do not use this parameter with the -v or -s parameter.

[-v] The verbose parameter displays all ISU information. The default is to display brief ISU information

[-s] The sort parameter displays ISUs in numerical order. The default is to display ISUs in the order which they were applied.

-c[<shelf>:][<card>]

• shelf — switch shelf number

• card — switch card number

<patchIDapplied

catalyst

functional

all>

• patchID — Returns data for that particular ISU.

• applied — Returns information on all applied (i.e. ‘active’) ISUs.

• catalyst — Returns ISUs classified as catalysts. Catalyst ISUs do nothing when applied, but its presence or absence causes other ISUs to behave differently.

• functional — Returns ISUs classified as functional. Functional ISUs take action when applied.

• all — Returns information on all ISUs.

Page 135: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 127990-1012-001

CALEA

queryPenCommandsqueryPenCommands <admPW>

This shows all of the Pengroup commands.

Prerequisites

Create a pen group, “createPenGrp” on page 176

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

queryPenCommands pw

System Level Commands: createPenGrp, deletePenGrp, queryPenGrp, startPenMonitor, stopPenMonitor, setPenAttr, changePenPW, queryPenTarget, queryPenData, queryPenCommands, setPenGroupTimer

Lea Level Commands: addLea, removeLea, queryLeas, queryLea, addLeaSpan, removeLeaSpan, startLeaMonitor,stopLeaMonitor, setLeaAttr

Case Level Commands: addLeaCase, removeLeaCase, queryLeaCase, startCaseMonitor, stopCaseMonit or, addVoiceChnl, removeVoiceChnl, setCaseAttr

Other Commands: queryPenLog, resizePenLog, purgePenLog

Syntax Description

<admPW> administrator password.

Page 136: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

128 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryPenGrpqueryPenGrp <admPW>

This command shows information about the Pen Group. To convert hexadecimal output from this query command to decimal, see “Using Hexadecimal” on page 741.

Prerequisites

Create a pen group, “createPenGrp” on page 176

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

queryPenGrp pw******* PenGroup Trace *******<<2bc6c68>> PenGroup (key)0: <2b3ee68> (leaDict)1: <2b3da88> (targetDict)2: <2b3d098> (defaultPW)3: <2deff60> (adminPW)4: <1a98028> (ocxSystemID)5: <29e99a8> (ocxCardOID)6: 4a00001 (ocxMonitoringState)7: 1 (callDataCount)8: 0 (callContentCount)9: 0 (penClient_T1_period)a: 4b (penClient_T2_period)b: ea60 (penClient_T3_period)c: a (dialedDigitExtraction)d: 1 <2b3ee68> tString {pengrp} <2b3da88> Dictionary (numItems)0: 0 (dataItems)1: <2b3e478> <2b3e478> tArray 0: 0 1: 0 2: 0 <2b3d098> Dictionary (numItems)0: 0 (dataItems)1: <2de6240> <2de6240> tArray 0: 0 1: 0 2: 0 3: 0 4: 0 <2deff60> tArray 0: 51 1: d0 2: f0 3: 59 4: 10 <1a98028> tArray 0: 4e 1: b3 <29e99a8> tString {PlanoT7000}

Syntax Description

<admPW> administrator password

Page 137: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 129990-1012-001

queryPenTargetqueryPenTarget <targetDirn> <admPW>

This command shows the surveillance data related to a subject's directory number.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

Add a case, see “addLeaCase” on page 187

queryPenTarget 9724800031 pw

Target Dirn: 9724800031 LeaName: NTTA CaseID: TollRunner1001 Case Monitoring State: DISABLED Lea Monitoring State: ENABLED InterceptType: Call Data Start Date: Stop Date:

Syntax Description

<targetDirn> subject's directory number

<admPW> administrator password

Page 138: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

130 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryPenDataqueryPenData admPW

This command shows the ocxSystemID, ocxCardOID, the ocxMonitoringState, and the value of the CALEA timers.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “setPenGroupTimer” on page 180

Create the Pen group database, see “createPenGrp” on page 176

queryPenData pw

PenGroup Data:

ocxSystemID = testT7000 ocxCardOID = Card-1-1-10 penClientT1 = 75 penClientT2 = 60000 penClientT3 = 10 dialedDigitExtraction = ENABLED ocxMonitoringState = ENABLED

Syntax Description

<admPW> administrator password

Page 139: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 131990-1012-001

queryLeaqueryLea <leaName> <admPW>

This command shows a LEA's attributes, its optionally assigned T1 spans, and a list of its cases. View individual cases using queryLeaCase, see “queryLeaCase” on page 132.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

Add a LEA, see “addLea” on page 181

queryLea NTTA pw

LeaName: NTTA LEA ipAddr: 10.1.2.3 LEA Port: 5060 LEA Client Instance: 1 LEA Monitoring State: ENABLED LEA leaTrunkProtocol: NO_PROTOCOL

Spans:

logicalSpan - spanOID ----------------------------------

Cases:

CaseIDs - TargetDirns291> ---------------------------------- TollRunner1001 - 9724800031

Syntax Description

<leaName> Law Enforcement Agency name

<admPW> administrator password

Page 140: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

132 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryLeaCasequeryLeaCase <leaName> <caseID> <admPW>

This command shows case.data: the Target Directory Number, the LEA, the Case ID, the LEA’s monitoring state, the Intercept Type (Call Data, or Call Data plus Call Content), and the Surveillance Start and Stop dates.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

queryLeaCase NTTA TollRunner1001 pw

Target Dirn: 9724800031 LeaName: NTTA CaseID: TollRunner1001 Case Monitoring State: DISABLED Lea Monitoring State: ENABLED InterceptType: Call Data Start Date: Stop Date:

Syntax Description

<leaName> Law Enforcement Agency name

<caseID> name assigned to the case

<admPW> administrator password

Page 141: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Queries 133990-1012-001

queryPenLogqueryPenLog <admPW> [numRecords]

This command shows the Pen log.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

queryPenLog pw 15

---------------------OCX Pen-Link (Calea) Event Log-------------------[01/25/07-16:24:48]: (Unknown) Informational - ADM password changed.[01/25/07-16:31:30]: (NTTA) Informational - LEA NTTA was added.[01/25/07-16:32:53]: (NTTA) Informational - Case was added.

Syntax Description

<admPW> administrator password

[numRecords] optional

the number of records you would like returned

Page 142: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

134 Queries T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Page 143: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 135990-1012-001

5Provisioning

Use the commands in this chapter to set up the switch.

W A R N I N G

The procedures in this guide are recommended by Taqua. Taqua does not assume responsibility for loss of data and in no event will Taqua be liable for any incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material.

The CLI provides low-level system access to users. This access has the potential to cause disruption of service, rendering the switch unusable and requiring intervention from Taqua’s field service personnel.

To minimize provisioning and configuration errors Taqua recommends the following:1. Use provisioning scripts instead of entering individual provisioning commands. Scripts are a group of dependent or related commands.2. Test scripts using dryISE. dryISE simulates the operations of a real switch and provides a place to test scripts without affecting the call traffic on a switch.3. Test scripts using a non-production switch with the same software image, and preferably the same configuration.

Page 144: 1012 Command Line Interface

911

136 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

911

911 over CAS

CAS trunks using the FGC protocol route 911 calls. For information on Basic 911 and E911, see the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

911 over CAS Process

To provision 911 over CAS on the switch:

E911 over SS7 Process

To provision E911 over SS7 on the switch do the following:

Step Action

1 Provision a CAS trunk group with FGC protocol (7-digit ANI) or FGCOS protocol (10-digit ANI) connecting the switch to the 911 tandem. For Basic 911, set the following trunk group timers (see “CAS Trunk Group Timers” on page 244):

• MinFlashHookTime — 70 ms

• FlashInterval — 60 ms

• FlashDuration — 100 ms

2 Provision the prefixes (NPANXXs) on the switch.See “Prefixes” on page 403.

3 Provision a 9-digit route list with the format 911NPANXX for each prefix with associated subscribers on the switch. See “NANP Route List” on page 519.

4 Add the CAS trunk group that connects to the 911 tandem to each 9-digit route list. See “CAS Trunk Groups” on page 235.

Step Action

1 Provision the SS7 network.

2 Provision the dedicated SS7 trunk group connecting the switch to the E911 tandem and a shared SS7 trunk group to take over if the dedicated SS7 trunk group fails. See “SS7 Trunk Groups” on page 324.

3 Provision the prefixes (NPANXXs) on the switch. See “Prefixes” on page 403.

4 Provision a 9-digit route list with the format 911NPANXX for each prefix with associated subscribers for each prefix on a switch. See “NANP Route List” on page 519.

Page 145: 1012 Command Line Interface

911

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 137990-1012-001

5 Associate the SS7 trunk groups connecting to the E911 tandem with each 9-digit route list. See “Adding Facilities to a SS7 Trunk Group” on page 344.

Step Action

Page 146: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

138 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

AIN

Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) triggers are events that specify when the switch suspends call processing and queries the AIN database on a Service Control Part (SCP). The SCP, rather than the switch, stores calling services logic, leaving more storage room on the switch.

Before Provisioning AIN

Before provisioning AIN, ensure the following SS7 and TCAP elements are built.

Step Action

1 Add an SCCP node to the local node, if one does not already exist.

2 Add an SCCP Subsystem to the SCCP node of the local node, with the SSNs of the TCAP service. The SS7 service provider gives you the SSN value.

3 Add an SCCP node to the Remote SCP or STP Alias node, if one does not

already exist.

4 Add an SCCP Subsystem to the Remote SCCP node of the SCP or STP Alias node. Use the same SSN for the remote Subsystem as was used for the local Subsystem in step 2.

5 Add a generic AIN TCAP service with the applicable attributes including:

• svcType — AINSVC

• remotePC — point code of the remote node with the AIN database used by this service. See “Point Codes” on page 470.

Page 147: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 139990-1012-001

Provisioning AIN

The following figure shows the order of provisioning for AIN:

Step Action

1 Create service pattern profile(s) for each of the following AIN trigger profile types:

• N11

• Public Feature Code

• Specific Digit String

Service pattern profiles contain services patterns

2 Add AIN service pattern(s) to each of the service pattern profiles created in step 1, The service pattern associates a digit pattern or code pattern with a TCAP service.

3 Create AIN trigger profile(s) for each AIN trigger type. An AIN trigger profile contains an AIN trigger type, which is either a digit pattern or a feature code. An AIN trigger profile tells the switch which SCP to route to or when to use escape codes and digit patterns.

4 Create a Service Profile for each set of AIN trigger profiles. A Service Profile contains AIN trigger profiles.

5 Add a Service Profile to a subscriber or the Central Office.

Page 148: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

140 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles

create N11PatternProfile <key>create PFCPatternProfile <key>create SDSPatternProfile <key>

Use the Generic CLI create command to create the following types of AINservice pattern profiles:

create N11PatternProfile N11Pat

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

pattern profile name description

N11PatternProfile An N11 pattern profile stores N11 service patterns. The switch sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials an N11 number (where N=2-9).

Use N11 service pattern profiles to assign numbers such as 711 or 511 to provide services to subscribers.

W A R N I N G

Do not use the N11 Pattern Profile to assign 911 service.

PFCPatternProfile A Public Feature Code pattern profile stores PFC patterns. The switch sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials a Public Feature Code *XX (where X=0-9).

Use Public Feature Code service pattern profiles to assign codes such as *09 to provide services to subscribers.

SDSPatternProfile A Specific Digit String pattern profiles stores SDS patterns. The switch sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials a Specific Digit String NXXXXXXXXX (where N=2-9 and X=0-9).

Use Specific Digit String service pattern profiles to assign lists of digits (such as DNs) to provide services to subscribers.

Syntax Description

<key> required service pattern profile name

Page 149: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 141990-1012-001

Related Commandsdestroy N11PatternProfile <key>destroy PFCPatternProfile <key>destroy SDSPatternProfile <key

query N11PatternProfile <key>query PFCPatternProfile <key>query SDSPatternProfile <key

Page 150: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

142 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

Adding Service Patterns to a Service Pattern Profile

insertInto <dbObject> <key> patterns <subKey> <subValue>

The same service pattern profile can have multiple service patterns.

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a service pattern to a service pattern profile’s patterns list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

insertInto N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 311 HOST3insertInto N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 411 HOST4insertInto N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 511 HOST5

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

Prerequisites

Create each service pattern profile before adding a service pattern to it (see “Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles” on page 140).

Create a TCAP service before adding a service pattern that invokes it. See “TCAPServiceGTT” on page 488 and “TCAPServicePCSSN” on page 492.

Related Commandsquery N11PatternProfile <key>query PFCPatternProfile <key>query SDSPatternProfile <key

Syntax Description

<dbObject> name of the database object. One of:

• N11PatternProfile

• PFCPatternProfile

• SDSPatternProfile

<key> name of a service pattern profile previously created

<subKey> the digits comprising the pattern to be added

<subValue> the TCAP service previously defined that will be invoked when this pattern is recognized

Page 151: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 143990-1012-001

Removing Service Patterns from Service Pattern Profiles

deleteFrom <dbObject> <key> patterns <subKey>

Use the Generic deleteFrom CLI command to remove service patterns from a service pattern profile’s patterns list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

deleteFrom N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 311deleteFrom N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 411deleteFrom N11PatternProfile N11Pat patterns 511

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

Prerequisites

Create each service pattern profile before adding a service pattern to it (see “Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles” on page 140).

Create a TCAP service before adding a service pattern that invokes it. See “TCAPServiceGTT” on page 488 and “TCAPServicePCSSN” on page 492.

Related Commandsquery N11PatternProfile <key>query PFCPatternProfile <key>query SDSPatternProfile <key>

Syntax Description

<dbObject> name of the database object. One of:

• N11PatternProfile

• PFCPatternProfile

• SDSPatternProfile

<key> name of a service pattern profile previously created

<subKey> the digits comprising the pattern to be removed.

Page 152: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

144 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles

create EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

Escape code pattern profiles hold digit patterns which do not invoke an AIN Service Trigger.

An escape code pattern profile may be optionally added to an Off Hook Delay Trigger, Public Feature Code, or to a Specific Digit String Trigger profile.

In addition, an escape code pattern profile holds DNs that can be dialed without entering an Account Code. See “Account Codes” on page 154.

create EscapeCodePatternProfile OHDEscapeCodes

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

Related Commandsquery EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

Deleting Escape Code Pattern Profiles

destroy EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

Remove an escape code patterns profile from all Off Hook Delay Trigger, Public Feature Code, or a Specific Digit String Trigger profiles before attempting to delete it.

destroy EscapeCodePatternProfile OHDEscapeCodes

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

Related Commandsquery EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

Syntax Description

<key> name of the escape code pattern

Syntax Description

<key> name of the escape code pattern profile previously created

Page 153: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 145990-1012-001

Adding Escape Code Patterns to an EscapeCodePatternProfile

insertInto EscapeCodePatternProfile <key> escapeCodes <index> <value>

Use this command to add an escape code to an escape code profile’s escapeCodes list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

insertInto EscapeCodeProfile esc escapeCodes 1 111

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

Prerequisites

Create an Escape Code Pattern before adding an escape code pattern to it (see “Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles” on page 144).

Related Commandsquery EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

Syntax Description

EscapeCodePatternProfile

keyword which specifies the EscapeCode object class

<key> name of the escape code pattern profile previously created

<index> the position in the list where <value> is to be inserted

TipUse a index of 1 to insert an escape code at the start of the escape code profile. Use a index of -1 to insert an escape code at the end of the escape code profile.

<value> a string of digits

Page 154: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

146 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Removing Escape Code Patterns from an EscapeCodePatternProfile

deleteFrom EscapeCodePatternProfile <key> escapeCodes <index>

Use this command to remove an escape code from an escape code profile from an EscapeCodePatternProfile’s escapeCodes list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

deleteFrom EscapeCodePatternProfile OHDEscapeCodes escapeCodes 333

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

Prerequisites

Create an Escape Code Pattern Profile and add an Escape Code to it before deleting an Escape Code Pattern from it (see “Adding Escape Code Patterns to an EscapeCodePatternProfile” on page 145).

Related Commandsquery EscapeCodePatternProfile <key>

Syntax Description

EscapeCodePatternProfile

keyword which specifies the EscapeCode object class

<key> name of the escape code pattern profile previously created

<index> the index number of the digit string to be removed from the escape code pattern profile

Page 155: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 147990-1012-001

Creating AIN Trigger Profilescreate N11Profile <key> <serviceName> <servicePatternKey>create OffHookDelayProfile <key> <serviceName> <serviceRouteID>create OffHookImmediateProfile <key> <serviceName> <serviceRouteID>create PublicFeatureCodeProfile <key> <serviceName> <servicePatternKey>create SpecificDigitStrProfile <key> <serviceName> <servicePatternKey>create TermAttemptProfile <key> <serviceName> <serviceRouteID>

Use the Generic CLI create command to create the following types of AIN Trigger Profiles. Required parameters are underlined.

name description parameters

N11Profile N11 (where N=2-9) This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials an assigned N11 number. Use service pattern profiles to assign numbers like 711 or 511 to provide services to subscribers.

TipTaqua recommends assigning this profile to the office service profile, not a subscriber service profile

key — name of trigger profile

serviceName — name of service this trigger profile provides

servicePatternKey — name of previously-created service pattern profile associated with this trigger profile

OffHookDelay-Profile

This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials digits not in the escape code profile.

TipTaqua recommends assigning this profile to a subscriber service profile, not the office service profile.

key — name of trigger profile

serviceName — name of service this trigger profile provides

serviceRouteID — the TCAP service previously defined that contains the routing to the SCP

escapeProfileKey — name of escape code pattern profile

OffHook-Immediate-Profile

This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when it receives an off-hook indication from a non-ISDN subscriber or a SETUP message from an ISDN interface.

TipTaqua recommends assigning this profile to a subscriber service profile, not the office service profile.

key — name of trigger profile

serviceName — name of service this trigger profile provides

serviceRouteID — the TCAP service previously defined that contains the routing to the SCP

Page 156: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

148 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

AccountCode-Profile

The Account Code Profile determines which call types require account code digits, and how account code digits are collected. An Account Code Profile can be assigned to multiple Service Profiles.

NOTE: If OffHookImmediateProfile and AccountCodeProfile are both assigned to the same subscriber, OffHookImmediateProfile takes precedence over AccountCodeProfile.

key — name of trigger profile

allowRetries — the number of times a subscriber can attempt to enter a valid account codeRange: 0 - 2Default: 0

acctCodePrompt — determines the type of prompt used:• PlayAnnAndDialTone (default) — Play

announcement and provide dial tone• PlayAnnAndStutterTone — Play

announcement and provide stutter dial tone• DialToneOnlyDial — Tone only• StutterToneOnly — Stutter Tone only• PlayAnnOnly— Play announcement only

servicesCalltypeProfileKey — name of a previously created Call Type profile for the following call types:• Call Forwarding Variable• Call Forwarding Fixed• Call Forwarding Do Not Answer• Call Forwarding Busy• Selective Call Forwarding• Calls to a remote call forwarding subscriber • Automatic callback• Speed dial• Automatic Call Return• Warmline• Revertive Call

LDCalltypeProfileKey — name of a previously created Call Type profile for toll call types 2, 4, 6.

calltypeProfileKeyAssignment — name of a previously created Call Type profile for call types 0 - 15

Pubic-Feature-CodeProile

Public Feature Code — XX (where X=0-9) This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials the assigned service code (e.g., *XX). Use service pattern profiles to assign codes like *09 to provide services to subscribers.

TipTaqua recommends assigning this profile to a subscriber service profile, not the office service profile.

key — name of trigger profile

serviceName — name of service this trigger profile provides

servicePatternKey — name of previously created service pattern profile associated with this trigger profile

name description parameters

Page 157: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 149990-1012-001

create N11Profile N11Prof1 SilverN11 N11Pat

Prerequisites

For N11, Public Feature Code, and Specific Digit String AIN trigger profiles

• create one or more service pattern profiles (see “Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles” on page 140).

• add one or more service patterns to each service pattern profile (see “Adding Service Patterns to a Service Pattern Profile” on page 142).

For Off Hook Delay and Specific Digit String profiles,

• Create a TCAP service before adding a service pattern that invokes it. See “TCAPServiceGTT” on page 488 and “TCAPServicePCSSN” on page 492.

• ‘Create an escape code pattern profile (see “Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles” on page 144).

NOTE: Escape code pattern profiles are optional for Specific Digit String profiles.

Specific-DigitStr-Profile

Specific Digit String — NXXXXXXXXX (N=2-9 and X=0-9) This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when a subscriber dials a series of assigned digits. Use service pattern profiles to assign a list of digits (such as a DN) to provide services to subscribers.

TipTaqua recommends assigning this profile to the office service profile, not a subscriber service profile

key — name of trigger profile

serviceName — name of service this trigger profile provides

servicePatternKey — name of previously created service pattern profile associated with this trigger profile

Term-Attempt-Profile

This AIN trigger sends a query to the SCP when the call directed to the Directory Number (DN) reaches the Termination Attempt Trigger Detection Point (TDP). This occurs when the call terminates to a subscriber on the T7000 (with or without facility).

TipTaqua recommends assigning this profile to a subscriber service profile, not the office service profile.

key — name of trigger profile

serviceName — name of service this trigger profile provides

serviceRouteID — the TCAP service previously defined that contains the routing to the SCP

name description parameters

Page 158: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

150 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

For Off Hook Delay, Off Hook Immediate and Termination Attempt trigger profiles

• Create a TCAP service before adding a service pattern that invokes it. See “TCAPServiceGTT” on page 488 and “TCAPServicePCSSN” on page 492.

For AcountCodeProfile

• Create one or more call type profiles,

Related Commandsquery N11Profile <key>query OffHookDelayProfile <key>query OffHookImmediateProfile <key>query PublicFeaureCodeProile <key>query SpecificDigitStrProile <key>query TermAttemptProfile <key>

Page 159: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 151990-1012-001

Deleting AIN Trigger Profiles

destroy N11Profile <key>destroy OffHookDelayProfile <key>destroy OffHookImmediateProfile <key>destroy PublicFeatureCodeProfile <key>destroy SpecificDigitStrProfile <key>destroy TermAttemptProfile <key>

Use this command to remove an AIN trigger profile.

destroy N11Profile N11

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

Prerequisites

Before deleting an AIN trigger profile:

• Remove the AIN trigger profile from the Service Profile to which it is assigned.

Related Commandsquery N11Profile <key>query OffHookDelayProfile <key>query OffHookImmediateProfile <key>query PublicFeatureCodeProile <key>query SpecificDigitStrProfile <key>query TermAttemptProfile <key>

Syntax Description

N11Profile

OffHook-Delay-Profile

OffHookImmediate-Profile

PublicFeatureCodeProfile

SpecificDigit-StrProfile

TermAttempt-Profile

keyword which specifies the N11 Profile object class

keyword which specifies the Off Hook Delay Profile object class

keyword which specifies the Off Hook Immediate Profile object class

keyword which specifies the Public Feature Code Profile object class

keyword which specifies the Specific Digit String Profile object class

keyword which specifies the Termination Attempt Profile object class

<key> name of the AIN Trigger Profile previously created

Page 160: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

152 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Service Profile

A Service Profile contains one or more AIN trigger profiles. The Service Profile can have many AIN trigger profiles, as long as each is of a different trigger type. An AIN trigger profile specifies calls that require AIN processing.

Assign a Service Profile to:

• individual subscribers

• all subscribers on the switch

• both individual subscribers and all subscribers

NOTE: Taqua recommends assigning these Trigger Profiles only to subscribers: Off Hook Delay, Off Hook Immediate, Public Feature Code, Termination Attempt.

NOTE: Taqua recommends assigning these Trigger Profiles only to the Office:N11, Specific Digit String

AIN triggers are first checked against an individual subscriber’s Service Profile. If there is no match, the trigger is then checked against the officeService Profile.

A Service Profile has the following attributes. Each AIN Trigger Profile key is the name of an AIN Trigger Profile. See “Creating AIN Trigger Profiles” on page 147.

Attribute Description

key Service Profile name

OffHookImmediateProfileKey Off Hook Immediate AIN Trigger Profile key

OffHookDelayProfileKey Off Hook Delay AIN Trigger Profile key

TermAttemptTriggerProfileKey Termination Attempt AIN Trigger Profile key

PublicFeatureCodeProfileKey Public Feature Code AIN Trigger Profile key

SpecificDigitStringProfileKey Specific Digit String AIN Trigger Profile key

N11ProfileKey N11 AIN Trigger Profile key

AccountCodeProfileKey Account Code AIN Trigger Profile key

Page 161: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 153990-1012-001

The the Generic CLI is used for all Service Profile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• OffHookImmediateProfileKey

• OffHookDelayProfileKey

• TermAttemptTriggerProfileKey

• PublicFeatureCodeProfileKey

• SpecificDigitStringProfileKey

• N11ProfileKey

• AccountCodeProfileKey

NOTE: A newly created Service Profile does not have any AIN Trigger Profiles associated with it. Use the Generic CLI modify command to add one or more AIN Trigger Profiles to a Service Profile.

create ServiceProfile SP1modify ServiceProfile SP1 N11ProfileKey N11Prof1

Deleting Service Profiles

Use the destroy command to delete a Service Profile.

You can delete a Service Profile without first deleting its contents. The AIN trigger profiles assigned to that Service Profile will remain available to other Service Profile.

However, before removing a Service Profile, remove it from the office and/or subscribers to which it is assigned.

destroy ServiceProfile SP1

Page 162: 1012 Command Line Interface

Account Codes

154 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

Account Codes

The Account Codes feature, first introduced in Release 6.0, shares many of the same concepts as AIN Triggers (See “AIN” on page 138.)

Account Code Overview

Account Codes are used to place restrictions on the types of calls a subscriber can make. For example, you can restrict a subscriber’s ability to make toll calls.

When a subscriber dials one of the call types controlled by an Account Code, additional digits (the account code) must be entered before the switch will complete the call.

Other vendors may refer to non-verified account codes as “account codes” or "project codes", and to verified account codes as “authorization codes”.

The switch may verify the account code digits against a provisioned digit length. Taqua calls this case a non-verified account code.

Or, the switch may verify the account code digits against a list of allowed digit strings. Taqua calls this case a verified account code.

The collected digits appear in the CDR record for Taqua customer billing purposes.

Page 163: 1012 Command Line Interface

Account Codes

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 155990-1012-001

Provisioning Account Codes

The following figure shows the order of provisioning for Account Codes:

Step Action

1 (Optional) Create an Escape Code Pattern Profile. An Escape Code Pattern Profile contains numbers that can be called without an Account Code. See “Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles” on page 144.

2 (Optional) Create an Account Code Pattern Profile. An Account Code Pattern Profile contains a list of Account Codes that a subscriber dials to complete a call. See “AcctCodePatternProfile” on page 157.

NOTE: An Account Code Pattern Profile is not required if you are provisioning non-verified account codes. In this case, the subscriber may enter any combination of digits that matches the digitsLength attribute in the Call Type Profile. See “CalltypeProfile” on page 160.

3 Create a Call Type Profile. A Call Type Profile determines the length of the Account Code. It also determines whether or not an Escape Code Pattern Profile, or an Account Code Pattern Profile, or both, are used. See “CalltypeProfile” on page 160.

Page 164: 1012 Command Line Interface

Account Codes

156 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

4 Create an Account Code Profile. An Account Code Profile specifies which call types require Account Code digits and the account code collection requirements. These collection requirements determine the user prompt when an Account Code is required, and the number of retries allowed when an invalid Account Code is entered.

An Account Code Profile also specifies which call types require Account Code digits. See “AccountCodeProfile” on page 161.

5 Create a Service Profile. The Service Profile associates the Account Code Profile with the Subscriber to which the account code requirements apply. See “Service Profile” on page 152.

NOTE: You may also assign the Account Code Profile to an existing Service Profile. Such a Service Profile will also contain AIN trigger profiles, which allow AIN-based features for the subscriber.

6 Assign the Service Profile to a subscriber. See “serviceProfile” on page 538.

Step Action

Page 165: 1012 Command Line Interface

Account Codes

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 157990-1012-001

AcctCodePatternProfile

An Account Code Pattern Profile contains a list of Account Codes that a subscriber dials to complete a call.

An AcctCodePatternProfile has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all Account Code Pattern Profile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The insertInto and insertInto commands apply to the following parameters:

• patterns

See “Adding Account Codes to an AccountCodePatternProfile” on page 158 and “Removing Account Codes from an AccountCodePatternProfile” on page 159

create AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitListquery AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitListdestroy AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitList

Attribute Description

key name of the Account Code Pattern Profile

patterns a list of Account Codes.

Page 166: 1012 Command Line Interface

Account Codes

158 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding Account Codes to an AccountCodePatternProfile

insertInto AcctCodePatternProfile <key> patterns <index> <value>

Use this command to add an Account Code to an AccountCodePatternProfile’s patterns list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

insertInto AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitList patterns -1 234

Prerequisites

Create an Account Code Pattern Profile before adding an Account Code pattern to it (see “AcctCodePatternProfile” on page 157).

Syntax Description

AcctCodePatternProfile

keyword which specifies the Account Code Pattern Profile object class

<key> name of a previously created Account Code Pattern Profile

<index> the position in the list where <value> is to be inserted

TipUse a index of 1 to insert an escape code at the start of the Account Code Patter Profile. Use a index of -1 to insert an escape code at the end of the Account Code Patter Profile.

<value> a string of digits representing a Directory Number.

Page 167: 1012 Command Line Interface

Account Codes

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 159990-1012-001

Removing Account Codes from an AccountCodePatternProfile

deleteFrom AcctCodePatternProfile <key> patterns <index>

Use this command to remove an Account Code from an AccountCodePatternProfile’s patterns list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

deleteFrom AcctCodePatternProfile threeDigitList patterns 2

Prerequisites

Create an Account Code Pattern Profile and add an Account Code to it before deleting an Account Code from it (see “Adding Account Codes to an AccountCodePatternProfile” on page 158).

Syntax Description

AcctCodePatternProfile

keyword which specifies the Account Code Pattern Profile object class

<key> name of the Account Code Pattern Profile previously created

<index> the index number of the digit string to be removed from the Account Code Pattern Profile

Page 168: 1012 Command Line Interface

Account Codes

160 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

CalltypeProfile

Different Call Type Profiles with different values in the digitsLength field can use the same Account Code Pattern Profile. Each Call Type Profile will only match on the number of Account Code digits specified in the digitsLength field.

A Call Type Profile determines the length of the Account Code. It also determines whether or not an Escape Code Pattern Profile, or an Account Code Pattern Profile, or both, are used.

A Call Type Profile has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all Call Type Profile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• digitsLength

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• acctCodePatternProfileKey

• escCodePatternProfileKey

The modify command applies to the following parameters:

• digitsLength

• acctCodePatternProfile

• escCodePatternProfile

create CalltypeProfile threeDigitVerified 3 threeDigitListquery CalltypeProfile threeDigitVerified

Attribute Description

key name of the Call Type Profile

digitsLength the number of Account Code digits in the Account Code Pattern Profile to verify

acctCodePatternProfileKey

optional name of the Account Code Pattern Profile associated with this Call Type Profile. Do no data fill this attribute if you are provisioning non-verified account codes.

escCodePatternProfileKey

optional name of the Escape Code Pattern Profile associated with this Call Type Profile. Do no data fill this attribute if you are provisioning non-verified account codes.

Page 169: 1012 Command Line Interface

Account Codes

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 161990-1012-001

AccountCodeProfile

An Account Code Profile specifies which call types require Account Code digits and the account code collection requirements. These collection requirements determine the user prompt when an Account Code is required, and the number of retries allowed when an invalid Account Code is entered.

An Account Code Profile has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key name of the Call Type Profile

allowRetries the number of times a subscriber may reenter an Account Code.

Range: 0 - 2.

Default: 0

acctCodePrompt the type of prompt the switch will provide when a call is attempted that requires an Account Code.

Values are:

• PlayAnnAndDialTone (default) — Prompt announcement followed by dial tone.

• PlayAnnAndStutterTone — Prompt announcement followed by stutter tone.

• DialToneOnly — Dial tone only.

• StutterToneOnly — Stutter tone only.

• PlayAnnOnly — Prompt announcement only.

servicesCalltypeProfileKey

the name of a previously provisioned Call Type Profile to be used for the following types of services calls:

• Call Forwarding Variable

• Call Forwarding Fixed

• Call Forwarding Do Not Answer

• Call Forwarding Busy

• Selective Call Forwarding

• Calls to a remote call forwarding subscriber

• Automatic callback

• Speed dial

• Automatic Call Return

• Warmline

• Revertive Call

If a Call Type Profile is not assigned to this attribute, account codes are not required for these services.

Page 170: 1012 Command Line Interface

Account Codes

162 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all Account Code Profile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The optional parameters for the create command are

• allowRetries

• acctCodePrompt

• servicesCalltypeProfileKey

• LDCalltypeProfileKey

The modify command applies to the following parameters:

• allowRetries

• acctCodePrompt

• servicesCalltypeProfileKey

• LDCalltypeProfileKey

• calltypeProfileKeyAssignment

create AccountCodeProfile LD_3_digit_verified

modify AccountCodeProfile LD_3_digit_verified calltypeProfileKeyAssignment OAInterlata_3 threeDigitVerified

LDCalltype-ProfileKey

the name of a previously provisioned Call Type Profile to be used for intralata, interlata and international calls. These are the typical call types for which the user requests account code service (toll restriction with PIN).

If a Call Type Profile is not assigned to this attribute, account codes are not required for these types of calls.

NOTE: You may alternately provision one or more specific call types in the calltypeProfileKeyAssignment list.

calltypeProfile-KeyAssignment

a list of call types, each with an associated Call Type Profile.

NOTE: If you provision an LDCallTypeProfile key, and also provision a CallType Profile for Call Types 2, 4 or 6, the CallType Profiles provisioned here take priority over the LDCallTypeProfile.

Attribute Description

Page 171: 1012 Command Line Interface

BearerGroup

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 163990-1012-001

BearerGroup

A BearerGroup is a set of one or more Fast Ethernet Interfaces (FEIs).

A BearerGroup object simplifies bearer management for IP Endpoints. Prior to Release 6.0.1, each MediaGateway and SIP Endpoint had its own separate list of Fast Ethernet Interfaces to be used as bearer resources for IP calls. Frequently, these lists were identical.

With a BearerGroup, the list of Fast Ethernet Interfaces is centralized. This simplifies maintenance: whenever the list of Fast Ethernet Interfaces needs to be changed, instead of updating several IP Endpoints, only a single BearerGroup need be updated.

A BearerGroup object has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all BearerGroup commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• bearerFEs

See “Adding a Fast Ethernet Interface to a BearerGroup” on page 164 and “Removing a Fast Ethernet Interface From a BearerGroup” on page 164.

create BearerGroup bg1query BearerGroup bg1destroy BearerGroup bg1

Dependent Commands

After creating a BearerGroup, assign it to one or more IP Endpoints. See “MediaGateway” on page 371, “Setting up a Subscriber Access SIP Endpoint” on page 420, and “Setting up a Network Gateway SIP Endpoint” on page 421.

Attribute Description

key Name of the BearerGroup object

bearerFEs A list containing Fast Ethernet Interface OIDs.

Page 172: 1012 Command Line Interface

BearerGroup

164 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding a Fast Ethernet Interface to a BearerGroup

insertInto BearerGroup <key> bearerFEs <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a Fast Ethernet Interface to a BearerGroup’s bearerFE list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds Fast Ethernet Interface 1 to the start of the bearerFE list for BearerGroup bg1:

insertInto BearerGroup bg1 bearerFEs 1 fe-1

Removing a Fast Ethernet Interface From a BearerGroup

deleteFrom BearerGroup <key> bearerFEs <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a Fast Ethernet Interface from a BearerGroup’s bearerFE list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command removes the Fast Ethernet Interface at the start of the bearerFE list for BearerGroup bg1

deleteFrom BearerGroup bg1 bearerFEs 1

Syntax Description

<key> BearerGroup name

<subkey> This is the index in the bearerFE list where you want to enter the Fast Ethernet Interface OID.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert the Fast Ethernet Interface OID at the start of a BearerGroup’s bearerFEs list. Use a index of -1 to insert Fast Ethernet Interface OID at the end of a BearerGroup’s bearerFEs list.

<subvalue> This attribute specifies the Fast Ethernet Interface Object ID. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<key> carrier name

<subkey> The index in the bearerFE list of the Fast Ethernet interface that is being removed. Note that the FE to be removed is specified by its position in the bearerFE List, not by it’s instance!

Page 173: 1012 Command Line Interface

CardConfiguration

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 165990-1012-001

Tip

CardConfiguration

You must create a CardConfiguration object before any provisioning can be done to the card.

This is a major change from previous releases, one that is sure to break every existing script!

New in Release 6.0 is the CardConfiguration object. CardConfiguration lets you define a card on the shelf before the card is physically booted. This enables you to pre-provision a card before it is installed on the shelf, and protects the integrity of the provisioning database when a card type other than what has been provisioned is inserted into the shelf.

Whenever a card boots, its card type is checked against the corresponding entry in the CardConfiguration object. If the card types do not match, there is a mis-match between what is provisioned in the database and what is present on the shelf. In such a case, the switch will not unlock the card, and the card can not be used for processing calls.

When faced with such a mismatch, you must either replace the front card to agree with the database, or modify the CardConfiguration object to change its card type. You may change the card type as long as the new card type has more facilities than the old type. Only the following changes are allowed, all other combinations will fail:

• TIC to TIC2_16SPAN

• TIC to a TIC2

• TIC2_16SPAN to a TIC2

• PIC to a PIC2_2

• PIC2 to a PIC2_3

If you can not change the CardConfiguration card type, you must first destroy the old CardConfiguration object for that slot and then create a new CardConfiguration object.

NOTE: The old card will have to be deprovisioned before Generic CLI will let you destroy it’s corresponding CardConfiguration object.

Page 174: 1012 Command Line Interface

CardConfiguration

166 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

A CardConfiguration object has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all CardConfiguration commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• type

• slot

create CardConfiguration PIC17 PIC 17

Attribute Description

key Name of the CardConfiguration object

type Type of Card. Values are:

• LTC — a Line Termination Card

• TIC — a T1 Interface Card (16 T1s)

• TIC2 — a T1 Interface Card 2 (20 T1s)

• TIC2_16Span — a T1 Interface Card 2, paired with a TII rear card (16 T1s)

• BIC — a Broadband Interface Card

• PIC — a Packet Interface Card (2 FEs)

• PIC2_3 — a Packet Interface Card 2 (3 FEs)

• PIC2_2 — a Packet Interface Card 2, paired with a FEI (2FEs)

slot Slot in the shelf where the card resides.

Range: 1 - 20

Page 175: 1012 Command Line Interface

CardConfiguration

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 167990-1012-001

query Cardquery Card

This command displays information about card objects. Since the output from this command is both long and varies by card type, this section is organized a little differently than the rest of the document.

For whatever type of card the command is run on, the following information is displayed:

query card

(OID: 5b00001)

<48e6400> LTCardkey.........................<>objectID....................Card-1-1-27dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) ->

Attribute Description

<oid> Object Identifier of the Card, in hex.

Object Identifier — unique identifier that the T7000 uses to address each object or circuit of the near end network interface OID provisioned on the T7000. See “OID” on page 30.

cardType The type of card being queried. Values are:

• LTCard — Line Termination Card

• TICard — T1 Interface Card

• ETICard — TI Interface Card 2

• DS3Card — Broadband Interface Car

• VPCard — Packet Interface Card

• PIC2Card — Packet Interface Card 2

objectID Object Identifier of the Card, in the form of Card-Slot-Slot-Shelf

dependentOIDs A list of the Lines (LTC), T-1 Spans (LTC, TIC, TIC2), DS-3s (BIC), or Fast Ethernet Interfaces (PIC, PIC2) that the card contains.

Page 176: 1012 Command Line Interface

CardConfiguration

168 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The following is a sample output from an LTC Card:

dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) -> [0] <48e6290> tArray Array Size: 2 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: Span-0-1-27 [1] IntegerValue: Span-1-1-27

[1] <4900500> tArray Array Size: 32 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: Line-0-1-27 [1] IntegerValue: Line-1-1-27 [2] IntegerValue: Line-2-1-27 [rest of output trimed to save space]

This is the corresponding sample output from a TIC Card:

dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) -> [0] <48f86c0> tArray Array Size: 16 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: Span-0-1-1 [1] IntegerValue: Span-1-1-1 [2] IntegerValue: Span-2-1-1 [rest of output trimed to save space]

This is the corresponding sample output from a BIC Card:

dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) -> [3] <4cc2130> tArray Array Size: 3 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: Ds3-0-1-1 [1] IntegerValue: Ds3-1-1-1 [2] IntegerValue: Ds3-2-1-1

This is the corresponding sample output from a PIC2 Card

dependentOIDs...............Array (7 items, zero items suppressed) -> [4] <48aebf0> tArray Array Size: 3 (zero elements supressed) [0] IntegerValue: FE-0-1-1 [1] IntegerValue: FE-1-1-1 [2] IntegerValue: FE-2-1-1

Attribute Description

containerOID Object Identifier of the shelf containing the card, in the form of Shelf-<shelfNumber>-0-<shelfNumber>

operationalState Status of the card for processing call traffic. For more detail, see The T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide

masterOperationalState Status of the controlling device for processing call traffic. For more detail, see The T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide

Page 177: 1012 Command Line Interface

CardConfiguration

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 169990-1012-001

administrativeState Status of the card for making changes. For more detail, see The T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide

masterAdministrativeState

Status of the controlling device for processing call traffic. For more detail, see The T7000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide

currentActivityCount LTC, PIC and PIC2: Total number of active calls on this card in hex (decimal)

maximumActivityCount LTC, PIC and PIC2: Maximum possible number of active calls on this card in hex (decimal).

inTest The DS-3/span/trunk/line is currently in Test mode (i.e., diagnostics are being run.

spansPerCard Number of T-1 Spans on this card in hex (decimal)

spanType Internal value.

linesPerCard Number of Lines on this card in hex (decimal)

dspsPerCard Number of Digital Signal Processors on this card in hex (decimal).

ds3sPerCard Number of DS-3s on this card in hex (decimal).

feifsPerCard Number of Fast Ethernet Interfaces on this card in hex (decimal).

operatingMode Internal Value.

systemMode Controls the local Fault Manager. For details, consult The T70000Maintenance and Troubleshooting Guide.

rateControlHighDrop Internal, read-only value.

When flow control is disabled on an ingress port (i.e. FE0, FE1, FE2) frames are subject to Weighted Random Early Drop (WRED) whenever the average rate for that port has been exceeded. During this time frames are differentiated based upon their drop precedence. During Level 1 dropping only rateControlHighDrop percent of High-Drop frames will be dropped.

If Level 1 dropping is insufficient to reduce the incoming rate, then Level 2 dropping will become active. When this occurs all High-Drop frames are dropped and rateControlLowDrop percent of Low-Drop frames are also dropped.

rateControlLowDrop See “rateControlHighDrop” on page 169.

Attribute Description

Page 178: 1012 Command Line Interface

CardConfiguration

170 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

qosFixedPriority_CPU Internal, read-only value.

The fixed values for the FE ports use a value of 0 for low priority and 1 for high priority.

qosFixedPriority_GigE Internal, read-only value.

The fixed values for the FE ports use a value of 0 for low priority and 1, 2, or 3 for higher priority.

qosVlanTransmitPriority Internal, read-only value.

Sets the transmit priority level based upon the vlan tag priority bits. qosVlanTransmitPriority, qosFixedPriority_CPU and qosFixedPriority_GigE controls are mutually exclusive (i.e., only one them should be set).

qosVlanDropPriority Internal, read-only value.

When ports are configured to use VLAN Tag based Transmit priority one should also setup the VLAN Drop Priority. This control is used when congestion occurs to map the vlan tag priority bits to a drop level, and to decide which packets to drop first. The High Drop Priority packets are dropped first. A value of 0 = Low drop priority, 1 = High Drop Priority

qosBufferReservations Internal, read-only value.

This value adjusts the size of the ZL50410 internal buffers, which are used to store ingress packets.

qosBufferThresholds Internal, read-only value.

This value adjusts the ZL50410 internal buffer pool thresholds. When buffer usage in a pool exceeds its threshold the ZL50410 may either flow control or drop the incoming packet.

ipFlowControlThresholds Internal, read-only value.

Attribute Description

Page 179: 1012 Command Line Interface

CardConfiguration

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 171990-1012-001

PIC 2 Cards show the following additional information. These are internal objects used by the system software.

• qosFixedPriority_GigE

• qosVlanTransmitPriority

• qosVlanDropPriority

• qosBufferReservations

• qosBufferThreshold

incomingCallQueueMode Low-level software incoming rate limiting. This value changes how the switch arrives at a time interval to wait between handling MGCP:RsIP, SIP:REGISTER, and SIP:INVITE messages.

Values are:

• Fixed. Uses incomingCallQueueIntervals

• Dynamic. The software will do it’s best to arrive at a good interval value based on processor usage.

C A U T I O N

Contact Taqua TAC Support before changing this value!

incomingCallQueue-Intervals

Millisecond interval for low-level software incoming rate limiting. There is one interval for each supported protocol.

C A U T I O N

Contact Taqua TAC Support before changing any of these values!

outgoingCallQueue-Intervals

Millisecond interval for low-level software outgoing rate limiting. There is one interval for each supported protocol.

C A U T I O N

Contact Taqua TAC Support before changing any of these values!

Attribute Description

Page 180: 1012 Command Line Interface

CardConfiguration

172 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

PIC and PIC 2 Cards show the following additional information. This is an internal object used by the system software.

• ipFlowControlThreshold

PIC and PIC 2 Cards show the information about their codecs. Sample output is displayed below:

codecList...................List (3 items) -> (1) <48aed10> Codec key..............Codec-0-1-1 codecType........G711 codecWeight......64 (100) maximumSession...32 (50) activeSessions...0 (0)

(2) <48aecb0> Codec key..............Codec-0-1-1 codecType........G726 codecWeight......c8 (200) maximumSession...2e (46) activeSessions...0 (0)

Page 181: 1012 Command Line Interface

CardConfiguration

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 173990-1012-001

(3) <48aec50> Codec key..............Codec-0-1-1 codecType........G729 codecWeight......c8 (200) maximumSession...30 (48) activeSessions...0 (0)

PIC and PIC 2 Cards show the following additional information.

Attribute Description

key Default name for a codec

codecType Type of codec.

codecWeight A measure of the processing load placed on a DSP when using this codec

maximumSession Maximum number of sessions this codec can handle

activeSessions Count of the number of sessions this codec is currently handling.

Attribute Description

maximumDialogueCount

Maximum Number of incoming/outgoing IP signaling call legs in hex (decimal)

currentDialogueCount

Count of the current number of IP signaling call legs in hex (decimal)

maximumBearerCount Maximum number of allowed bearer sessions going through this card in hex (decimal)

currentBearerCount Current number of allowed bearer sessions going through this card in hex (decimal)

maximumBearerUsage Weighted total of all the codec's maximum sessions.

currentBearerUsage Weighted total of all the codec's active sessions

Page 182: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

174 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

CALEA

CALEA is an acronym for Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act of 1994. CALEA requires that the switch support legal surveillance by remote Law Enforcement Agencies (LEAs) of subscribers in real time. The surveillance includes call-detail information and may also include call-content (voice) information for a surveillance.

The following table describes the types of surveillances.

Table 1: CALEA Surveillance

Surveillance Connection Description

Call Data (CD) Surveillance

TCP/IP Contains the following: Start Time, Stop Time, Calling Party, and Called Party of each call. Call Data Channels (CDCs) deliver this data.

This is also called a Pen-Register, or Trap-and-Trace surveillance.

Call Content (CC) Surveillance

TCP/IP and trunks in a T1

Contains the following:

• The voice content of the telephone call and the Call Content Channels (CCCs) for the call

• The CD surveillance data

This is also called a Title III surveillance.

W A R N I N G

Information about Law Enforcement A surveillance activities is confidential. If non-authorized personnel access this information, they could alert the subjects of the surveillance and interfere with lawful investigations. To maintain confidentiality, all CALEA commands (except the createPenGrp command) require a password (.

Page 183: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 175990-1012-001

Order of Provisioning

Order of provisioning for CALEA: l

By default, the Pen level and LEA level monitoring are enabled, but individual cases default to disabled. This allows the carrier to provision surveillance in advance of the surveillance start date. When the court order takes effect, all that need be done is to manually enable the cases individually.

C A U T I O N

Do not use the switch scheduler software to activate or deactivate cases automatically. The scheduler does not currently have password protection, which is required to ensure the confidentiality.

Step Action

1 Create the Pen group database, see “createPenGrp” on page 176

2 Change the administrator password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

3 Add a LEA, see “addLea” on page 181

4 Add a subject:

• If the case requires Call Content, add T1 span(s) to the LEA, see “addLeaSpan” on page 183

• Add a case, see “addLeaCase” on page 187

• If the case requires Call Content, add voice channels to the case, see “addVoiceChnl” on page 189

• Enable surveillance on the case, see “startCaseMonitor” on page 192

Monitor Control Description

Pen MonitoringControl

• system level

• allows all monitoring on the switch

• does not disable LEA monitoring

• default value is enabled

LEA MonitoringControl

• LEA level

• allows the monitoring of cases on the LEA

• disables the monitoring of all cases for a LEA

• default value is enabled

Case Monitoring Control

• case level

• controls monitoring for individual cases

• default value is disabled

Page 184: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

176 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

createPenGrp

createPenGrp <cardOID> <ocxSystemID>

This creates the Pen Group database. Only one Pen Group is provisioned. The Pen Group contains all CALEA data. A Pen Group is an object that contains provisioning data, including the connecting LEAs. The Pen Group object identifies the TCP\IP interface between the switch and the LEAs’ data collection device.

The Pen Group database identifies which card on the switch is used to make the TCP/IP connection for surveillances. The TCP/IP connection sends call-data information to the LEAs using binary messages in BER/ASN.1 format.

Dependent Commands

After creating the Pen Group, change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

All other CALEA commands. Run this command before any other CALEA commands.

createPenGrp card-3 OCX-1_PLANO_TX

Syntax Description

<cardOID> The switch card that interfaces (TCP/IP) to the data collection device. See “OID” on page 30.

<ocxSystemID> The Intercept Access Point (IAP) system identification text string. The LEA uses the IAP to distinguish messages sent to it from various switches.

Page 185: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 177990-1012-001

deletePenGrp

deletePenGrp <admPW>

This deletes the Pen group database. When you delete the database, the Pen Log is also deleted.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

Remove all related cases and LEAs.

Remove case data, see “removeLeaCase” on page 188

Remove LEA data, see “removeLea” on page 182

deletePenGrp pw

Syntax Description

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 186: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

178 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setPenAttr

setPenAttr <attrType> <value> <admPW>

This command modifies Pen group attributes.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179

Create the Pen group database, see “createPenGrp” on page 176

Stop Pen group database monitoring, see “stopPenMonitor” on page 191

setPenAttr CARDOID Card-1 pwsetPenAttr OCXSYSTEMID Danville pwsetPenAttr DDEXTRACT 1 pw

Syntax Description

<attrType> The name of the attribute to set. AttrName is one of the following (case sensitive):

• CARDOID — The object identifier for the card that provides the TCP/IP connection to the LEAs.

• OCXSYSTEMID — The Intercept Access Point (IAP) system identification tag, which is a text string that the connecting LEA references. The first LEA that you connect to provides you with the system ID, this ID remains the same for other LEAs that connect to the switch.

• DDEXTRACT

– ENABLED — the switch sends a dialed digit extraction message with any digits that the subject enters after the call is set up, for example, a calling card number.

– DISABLED — the switch does not send a dialed digit extraction message.

<value> The new value of the attribute.

For DDEXTRACT, 1=Enabled and 0=Disabled

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 187: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 179990-1012-001

changePenPW

changePenPW <oldPW> <newPW> [ADM:DEF]

This command changes the default or administrator password. You must first change the password before running any other CALEA commands.

There are two types of CALEA passwords:

• Default password - initially set by Taqua

• Administrator password - set by you and used with all CALEA commands

When you provision the Pen group database, both passwords are set to the same value — oldpw. At that time, you can reset the default password to another value, which causes the administrator password to be set to the same value.

After you change the administrator password, you cannot change the default password. You can change the administrator password at any time, but not back to the default value.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

See “createPenGrp” on page 176.

changePenPW oldpw pw ADM

Dependent Commands

All CALEA commands other than createPenGrp require a password.

Syntax Description

<oldPW> The current password (case sensitive).

<newPW> The new password (case sensitive).

[ADM:DEF] This specifies which password to change. If pwType is omitted, it is assumed to be ADM. If specified, pwType must be one of the following (case sensitive):

• DEF - default

• ADM - administrator

Page 188: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

180 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setPenGroupTimer

setPenGroupTimer <timer> <value> <admPW>

This command modifies a TCP/IP CALEA client timer value.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

See “createPenGrp” on page 176.

setPenGroupTimer CL_T1 100000 pw

Syntax Description

<timer> The timer to set.

TimerType is one of the following (case sensitive):

• CL_T1 — The timer that sets the interval between messages sent to the connecting LEA server in milliseconds. Range is from 10 to 1000.

• CL_T2 — The timer for the card with the TCP/IP connection that determines the period, in milliseconds, between attempts to open a closed socket. Range is from 15000 to 3200000.

• CL_T3 — The timer that sets the interval between connection test messages sent to the LEA. This time ranges between 60,000 and 3200000 minutes. If set to 0, the switch does not send connection test messages.

<value> The new integer value of the specified timer (measured in milliseconds).

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 189: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 181990-1012-001

Tip

addLea

If a single LEA has multiple data collection systems, each system will have its own IP Address and port. In this case, create a separate LEA for each data collection system.

addLea <leaName> <leaIPAddr> <leaPort> [FXO] <admPW>

This command adds a new LEA to the Pen group database. The LEA gathers data on the subject when authorized by a court order. The switch supports up to 25 LEAs.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Create the Pen group database, see “createPenGrp” on page 176.

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Dependent Commands

After defining a LEA, you may add one or more T1 spans to deliver call-content information to the LEA's data collection device. In this situation, assign logical span numbers to the T1 spans to be dedicated to the LEA. Later, when the you add voice channels to the LEA's cases, the appropriate logical span number is used along with the T1 channels assigned for call-content delivery.

• See “addLeaSpan” on page 183.• See “addLeaCase” on page 187.• See “addVoiceChnl” on page 189.

addLea fbi 10.1.165.13 6050 pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The name of the Law Enforcement Agency. This name identifies with the connecting data collection device. Create a LEA for each data collection device to which you connect.

<leaIPAddr> The LEA's IP address.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

<leaPort> The IP port the LEA is using.

[FXO] Internal value

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 190: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

182 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

removeLea

removeLea <leaName> <admPW>

This command deletes a LEA from the Pen group database.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Remove all cases in the LEA, see “removeLeaCase” on page 188.

Stop LEA monitoring, see “stopLeaMonitor” on page 185.

removeLea fbi pw

Syntax Description

<leaName > The name of the Law Enforcement Agency.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 191: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 183990-1012-001

addLeaSpan

addLeaSpan <leaName> <spanOID> <logicalSpan> <admPW>

This command assigns a T1 span to a LEA for use in Call Content surveillances. Using a logical span number to identify a switch T1 span provides a way for the switch operator and the and the LEA to identify the LEA's T1 spans.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Add the LEA, see “addLea” on page 181.

Dependent Commands

See “addLeaCase” on page 187.

See “addVoiceChnl” on page 189.

See “startCaseMonitor” on page 192.

addLeaSpan fbi span-0-3-2 1 pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The name of the Law Enforcement Agency.

<spanOID> The switch span OID that connects to the LEA. See “OID” on page 30.

<logicalSpan> A number (001 - 999) that identifies the switch span. Logical span numbers must be unique for a given LEA, although different LEAs can use the same numbers.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 192: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

184 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

removeLeaSpan

removeLeaSpan <leaName> <spanOID> <admPW>

This command removes a switch T1 span from a LEA.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Add the LEA span, see “addLeaSpan” on page 183.

Remove the voice channels, see “removeVoiceChnl” on page 190.

Dependent Commands

See “removeVoiceChnl” on page 190.

removeLeaSpan fbi 1 pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The name of the Law Enforcement Agency.

<spanOID> The switch T1 span OID. See “OID” on page 30.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 193: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 185990-1012-001

Tip

startLeaMonitor

startLeaMonitor <leaName> <admPW>

This command starts the delivery of call-detail and call-content information for cases enabled on a particular LEA.

NOTE: You cannot enable case-level monitoring without first enabling LEA-level monitoring.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Define the LEA, see “addLea” on page 181.

Add case data, “addLeaCase” on page 187.

startLeaMonitor fbi pw

stopLeaMonitor

Disabling LEA-level monitoring disables all of the LEA’s cases. When re-enabling LEA-level monitoring, the cases remain disabled. You must manually re-enable the cases

stopLeaMonitor <leaName> <admPW>

This command stops the delivery of current and subsequent call originations and terminations, of call-detail and call-content for all directory numbers targeted by this LEA. All of the LEA's Case monitoring states are automatically forced to disabled.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Start the LEA monitoring, see “startLeaMonitor” on page 185.

stopLeaMonitor fbi pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The name of the Law Enforcement Agency.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Syntax Explanation

leaName The name of the Law Enforcement Agency.

admPW The administrator password.

Page 194: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

186 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setLeaAttr

setLeaAttr <leaName> <attrType> <value> <admPW>

This command modifies LEA attributes. Use this to change the name or IP data for a LEA.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Define the LEA, see “addLea” on page 181.

Stop LEA monitoring, see “stopLeaMonitor” on page 185.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

setLeaAttr fbi LEAIPADDR 10.1.165.15 pwsetLeaAttr fbi LEAPORT 6050 pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The Law Enforcement Agency name.

<attrType> The name of the attribute to set. AttrName is one of the following (case sensitive):

• LEAIPADDR — The IP address for the data collection device of the connecting LEA

• LEAPORT — The port number for the data collection device of the connecting LEA

<value> The new value of the attribute.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 195: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 187990-1012-001

addLeaCase

addLeaCase <leaName> <leaCaseID> <targetDirn> <interceptType> <admPW>

This command adds a case to a LEA. To set up the surveillance of a directory number (subject) on the switch, add a LEA case to the database. The case identifies the leaCaseID, subject directory number, and surveillance type.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Define the LEA, see “addLea” on page 181.

Dependent Commands

If Call Content is authorized, assign logical spans and trunks for the call content surveillance. See “addVoiceChnl” on page 189.

See “startCaseMonitor” on page 192.

addLeaCase fbi 3 9726920003 CC pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The Law Enforcement Agency name.

<lealeaCaseID> The name assigned to the case. This value is usually provided by the LEA.

<targetDirn> The subject’s directory number.

<interceptType> The type of surveillance authorized for this subject. One of the following (case sensitive):

• CD — Call Data

• CC — Call Content + Call Data

NOTE: The switch allows a subject to be added to all provisioned LEAs, but only a maximum of 5 LEAs can monitor a subject at the same time (J-STD-25 requirement/limitation)

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 196: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

188 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

removeLeaCase

removeLeaCase <leaName> <lealeaCaseID <admPW>

This command removes a case from a LEA.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Stop the case monitoring, see “stopCaseMonitor” on page 193.

Remove voice channels, see “removeVoiceChnl” on page 190.

Dependent Commands

See “stopCaseMonitor” on page 193.

See “removeVoiceChnl” on page 190.

removeLeaCase fbi case3 pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The Law Enforcement Agency name.

<lealeaCaseID> The Case ID assigned to the case.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 197: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 189990-1012-001

addVoiceChnl

addVoiceChnl <leaName> <lealeaCaseID> <logicalSpan> <chan> <admPW>

This command assigns a voice channel to a case. Voice channels are trunks in the LEA Span that provide call-content data to the LEA. Call-content surveillances require a minimum of one pair of voice channels. Additional channels may be necessary to handle call-forwarding scenarios.

Coordinate which logical span and trunks to use with the LEA, and use an even number of voice channels. The switch supports any number of voice channels per case. limited only by the number of spans assigned to the LEA, ensuring that there are enough voice channels to capture call content when a call is forwarded, once or multiple times.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Define the LEA, see “addLea” on page 181.

Add T1 span(s) to the LEA, see “addLeaSpan” on page 183.

Add a case, “addLeaCase” on page 187.

Dependent Commands

See “startCaseMonitor” on page 192.

addVoiceChnl fbi case3 1 5 6 7 8 pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The Law Enforcement Agency name.

<lealeaCaseID> The name assigned to the case.

<logicalSpan> The logical span number of the T1 span that corresponds with the voice channel

<chan> The voice channel (1 - 24) for one leg of the subject's call.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 198: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

190 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

removeVoiceChnl

removeVoiceChnl <leaName> <lealeaCaseID> <logicalSpan> <chan> <admPW>

This command removes a voice channel from a case.

Prerequisites

Add a voice channel, see “addVoiceChnl” on page 189.

removeVoiceChnl fbi case3 pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The Law Enforcement Agency name.

<lealeaCaseID > The name assigned to the case.

<logicalSpan> The logical span number of the T1 span that corresponds with the voice channel

<chan> The voice channel (1 - 24) for one leg of the subject's call.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 199: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 191990-1012-001

startPenMonitor

startPenMonitor <admPW>

This command controls monitoring at the switch level, allowing the delivery of call-detail and call-content for all cases whose LEA and case monitoring states are enabled.

Dependent Commands

See “createPenGrp” on page 176.

startPenMonitor pw

stopPenMonitor

stopPenMonitor <admPW>

This command controls monitoring at the switch level. When switch level monitoring is disabled, the card OID that provides the TCP/IP connection may be changed (see “setPenAttr” on page 178).

NOTE: To stop pen monitoring first disable the LEA monitoring.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

See “startPenMonitor” on page 191.

stopPenMonitor pw

Syntax Description

<admPW> The administrator password.

Syntax Description

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 200: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

192 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

startCaseMonitor

startCaseMonitor <leaName> <leaCaseID> <admPW>

This command enables the delivery of call-detail and call-content info for a specific case (subject directory number). When a case is first added, monitoring is disabled. This command starts delivery of call-detail and call-content to the LEA. Surveillance takes effect for subsequent calls after enabling monitoring — calls that are already in progress when monitoring is enabled are not affected.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

If a case's surveillance type requires call-content delivery, you cannot enable monitoring until the voice channels are provisioned. See “addVoiceChnl” on page 189.

Define the LEA, see “addLea” on page 181.

Add T1 span(s) to the LEA if required, see “addLeaSpan” on page 183.

Add case data, “addLeaCase” on page 187.

Add voice channels to the case, if required, “addVoiceChnl” on page 189.

startCaseMonitor fbi case3 pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The Law Enforcement Agency name.

<leaCaseID> The name assigned to the case.

<admPW> This is the administrator password.

Page 201: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 193990-1012-001

stopCaseMonitor

stopCaseMonitor <leaName> <leaCaseID> <admPW>

This command disables the delivery of call-detail and call-content info for a specific case (subject directory number). If a call is currently being monitored, that monitoring is terminated.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Start case monitoring, see “startCaseMonitor” on page 192.

stopCaseMonitor fbi case3 pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The Law Enforcement Agency name.

<leaCaseID> The name assigned to the case.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 202: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

194 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setCaseAttr

setCaseAttr <leaName> <leaCaseID> <attrType> <value> <admPW>

This command modifies the attributes of a case.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

Add case data, see “addLeaCase” on page 187.

Stop case level monitoring, see “stopCaseMonitor” on page 193.

To change intercept type from CC to CD, see “removeVoiceChnl” on page 190.

To change intercept type from CD to CC, see “addVoiceChnl” on page 189.

NOTE: The STARTDATE and STOPDATE attributes do not control the enabling and disabling of a case.

Changing the INTERCEPTTYPE from call-content to call-detail does note remove the voice channels assigned to the case. You need to remove these voice channels, see “removeVoiceChnl” on page 190.

Add voice channels before changing INTERCEPTTYPE from call-detail only to call-detail plus voice.

setCaseAttr fbi case3 INTERCEPTTYPE CD pw

Syntax Description

<leaName> The Law Enforcement Agency name.

<leaCaseID> The name assigned to the case.

<attrType> The name of the attribute to set. AttrType is one of the following (case sensitive):

• COURTORDER — The alphanumeric characters that represent the court order. This field is for reference only.

• INTERCEPTTYPE — The type of surveillance the case requires:

- 1 — for call-content surveillances (includes call-data)- 0 — for call-data only surveillances

• STARTDATE — date/time string (for reference only)

• STOPDATE — date/time string (for reference only)

<value> The new value of the attribute.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Page 203: 1012 Command Line Interface

CALEA

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 195990-1012-001

resizePenLog

resizePenLog <newSize> <admPW>

This command changes the size of the Pen group event notification log. The Pen log holds messages generated as a result of Pen group activities. This log is useful to troubleshoot problems while working with LEAs.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

See “createPenGrp” on page 176.

resizePenLog 700 pw

purgePenLog

purgePenLog <admPW>

This command empties the Pen log.

Prerequisites

Change the Pen group password, see “changePenPW” on page 179.

See “createPenGrp” on page 176.

purgePenLog pw

Syntax Description

<newSize> The size of the Pen Group log is between 1 and 1,000 events. The log size is limited to the available memory on the switch. The default size is 300 events.

<admPW> The administrator password.

Syntax Description

admPW The administrator password.

Page 204: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

196 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Carriers

A carrier is a company that provides communication circuits. Each carrier attached to the switch has a Carrier Access Code (CAC), a list of capabilities, and routing information. Carriers assigned to a subscriber are chosen automatically, or the subscriber can over ride the carrier assignments by dialing 101 followed by the CAC.

A Carrier has the following attributes:

attribute value

key name of carrier, for example ATT

code 4-digit carrier access code, for example 4321 for AT&T

intraLata This attribute specifies the toll services that originate and terminate in the same Local Access and Transport Area (LATA).

Possible values:

• NO — The carrier does not offer toll services that originate and terminate in the same LATA, calls route to treatment.

• CarrierRoute — If this carrier offers toll services that terminate in the same LATA, using a Carrier Route List route.

• NanpRoute — The carrier offers toll services that terminate in the same LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– NANP Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• AniRoute — The carrier offers toll services that terminate in the LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_CarrierRoute — The carrier offers toll services that terminate in the same LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_AniRoute — The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order:

– Subscriber route

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

Page 205: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 197990-1012-001

interLata This attribute specifies the services that terminate in another LATA

Possible values:

• NO — The carrier does not offer toll services that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to treatment.

• CarrierRoute — If this carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route.

• NanpRoute — The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– NANP Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• AniRoute — The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_CarrierRoute — The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_AniRoute — The carrier offers toll services that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order:

– Subscriber route

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

attribute value

Page 206: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

198 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

international This attribute specifies the toll services that terminate in a different country.

Possible values:

• NO — The carrier does not offer international call service that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to treatment.

• CarrierRoute — If this carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route.

• NanpRoute — The carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– NANP Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• AniRoute — The carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_CarrierRoute — The carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_AniRoute — The carrier offers international call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order:

– Subscriber route

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

attribute value

Page 207: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 199990-1012-001

worldZone1 This attribute specifies the services to countries identified by the single-digit country code of “1” (Canada, and most Caribbean countries), not the U.S.

Possible values:

• NO — The carrier does not offer worldzone1 call service that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to treatment.

• CarrierRoute — If this carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route.

• NanpRoute — The carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– NANP Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• AniRoute — The carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_CarrierRoute — The carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_AniRoute — The carrier offers worldzone1 call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order:

– Subscriber route

– ANI Route List route

• Carrier Route List route

attribute value

Page 208: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

200 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

OSCapable This attribute specifies Operator Services.

Possible values:

• NO — The carrier does not offer operator services call service that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to default OS provider.

• CarrierRoute — If this carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route.

• NanpRoute — The carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– NANP Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• AniRoute — The carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_CarrierRoute — The carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_AniRoute — The carrier offers operator services call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order:

– Subscriber route

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

attribute value

Page 209: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 201990-1012-001

DACapable This attribute specifies Directory Assistance services.

Possible values:

• 0 NO — The carrier does not offer directory assistance call service that originate and terminate in another LATA, calls route to default DA provider.

• CarrierRoute — If this carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA, using a Carrier Route List route.

• NanpRoute — The carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– NANP Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• AniRoute — The carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_CarrierRoute — The carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in order of priority:

– Subscriber route

– Carrier Route List route

• Nonlocal_AniRoute — The carrier offers directory assistance call service that terminate in another LATA using the following routes in priority order:

– Subscriber route

– ANI Route List route

– Carrier Route List route

OS01NXCode The 1NX code that is sent to this carrier for 01+ operator-assisted calls. The default value is 158.

OS011NXCode The 1NX code that is sent to this carrier for 011+ operator-assisted calls originating from pay stations (for example, pay telephones, hotels). The default value is 138.

attribute value

Page 210: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

202 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

routeCodesMapNOTE: routeCodesMap is an object with its own

attributes. See the examples at the end of this command for usage.

The 2-digit route code for each type of call that the switch sends when routing to this carrier over FGD. This is also called an OZZ code and the switch sends a 0 before the code. These codes need to match the code that the connecting switch is expecting. The connecting switch only uses this code if it routes calls using the carrier access code and the route code. As a default, the switch sends 00 for the route code.

Attributes:

• local

• extendedArea — calls to an extended area

• interLATA

• OAInterLATA — Operator Assisted InterLATA calls

• intraLATA

• OAIntraLATA — Operator Assisted IntraLATA calls

• international

• OAInternational — Operator Assisted international calls

• worldZone1

• OAWorldZone1 — Operator Assisted World Zone 1 calls

• e911 — Enhanced 911 calls

• DAIntraLATA — Directory Assisted IntraLATA calls

• DAInterLATA — Directory Assisted InterLATA calls

• OAZeroMinus — Operator Assisted calls to 0

• SAC — Special Access Code (SAC) calls, typically 800 toll free numbers. A SAC query supplies one of the following:

– Telephone number where the call can be routed

– Carrier name that handles calls for that toll free number

Range: 0 - 99

deniedInfoDigitsNOTE: deniedInfoDigits is a list object. See the examples

at the end of this command for usage.

This attribute specifies which information digits that you want to block from an IC or OSS and send the default 00 digits instead. By default none of the digits are denied from routing to an OSS.

attribute value

Page 211: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 203990-1012-001

ANIKPType This attribute specifies the outpulsed tones on trunks using the FGCOS protocol to none so the KP tone (start of pulsing signal) is sent.

Possible values:

• NONE — KP tone (start of pulsing signal) is sent

• SIGNALING — KP’’ is sent if DTMF is used

• PRE_SUB — KP is sent if the subscriber is pre-subscribed (CAC not dialed), KP’ is sent if the subscriber is not pre-subscribed (CAC dialed).

• BOTH — KP’’ is sent if DTMF is used and the subscriber is presubscribed (CAC not dialed), KP’’’ is sent if DTMF is used and the subscriber is not pre-subscribed (CAC dialed).

restrictions This attribute specifies the restrictions assigned

Type is Bitfield. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example.

Possible values:

• DA_ONLY — Allow directory assistance calls only

• NO_CAC — Do not allow CAC calls (101XXXX)

• NO_DA — Do not allow directory assistance calls

• NO_OSDIALED — Do not allow operator services (0+, 00, 0) calls

• NO_OSSTATION — Do not allow operator service station (hotel, motel, etc.) calls

• NO_PRE_SUB — Do not allow calls without a pre-subscribed carrier

• OS_ONLY — Allow operator services calls only

• PRE_SUB_ONLY — Allow calls with a pre-subscribed carrier only

attribute value

Page 212: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

204 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

circuitCodeForTNSNOTE: circuitCodeForTNS is an object with its own attributes.

See the examples at the end of this command for usage

This attribute specifies the circuit code in the optional Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter that includes the associated CAC or PCAC. The TNS is sent when using SS7 trunks. This circuit code is sent to the AT and the AT uses it to determine the call type and where to send the call.

Attributes:

• local

• extendedArea

• interLATA

• OAInterLATA

• intraLATA

• OAIntraLATA

• international

• OAInternational

• worldZone1

• OAWorldZone1

• e911

• DAIntraLATA

• DAInterLATA

• OAZeroMinus

• SAC

Follow the call type attribute with the circuit code sent in the optional Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter, which includes the associated CAC or PCAC. The TNS is sent when using SS7 trunks. This circuit code is sent to the AT and the AT uses it to determine the call type and where to send the call.

Range: 0 - 15

attribute value

Page 213: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 205990-1012-001

PCAC This attribute specifies the 4-digit PCAC of the carrier that is sent in the outgoing call setup signal. In standard call processing, the CAC in the outgoing signaling message is the same as the CAC used for routing. Use this field to send a different CAC in the signaling message than the switch uses to route the call.

NOTE: The switch uses the PCAC of the carrier if there is not a PCAC assigned to the associated prefix.

When the switch uses a carrier with an assigned PCAC then:

• For CAS signaling, the switch sends the PCAC in the outgoing signaling message.

• If the switch uses SS7, it sends the PCAC in the optional TNS and CIP parameters of the IAM. To set the TNS, see “circuitCodeForTNS” on page 204.

• If the switch uses PRI signaling, it sends the PCAC in the SETUP message.

attribute value

Page 214: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

206 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all Carrier commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• code

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• code

• intraLata

• interLata

• international

• worldZone1

• OSCapable

• DACapable

• OS01NXCode

• OS011NXCode

• routeCodesMap

• ANIKPType

• restrictions

• circuitCodeForTNS

• PCAC

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• deniedInfoDigits

See “Adding deniedInfoDigits to a Carrier” on page 210 and “Removing deniedInfoDigits from a Carrier” on page 210.

create Carrier MCI 1234

modify Carrier MCI restrictions OS_ONLY 0modify Carrier MCI circuitCodeForTNS extendedArea 1modify Carrier ATT routeCodesMap interLATA 23modify Carrier ATT PCAC 1212

destroy Carrier MCI

Page 215: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 207990-1012-001

Dependent Commands

After creating a carrier modify its attributes, see “modify” on page 6.

After creating a carrier assign it to:

• A route list, see “Carrier Route List” on page 515.

NOTE: A tandem carrier route list uses the route codes assigned to a carrier, see “Tandem Carrier RouteList” on page 523.

• A subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530.

• The directory assistance and operator services fields of the Office Parameter, see “OS Provider” on page 382 and “DA Provider” on page 382.

NOTE: A carrier must be OS or DA capable to be assigned as the default carrier in the office parameter, see “OfficeParams” on page 382.

Deleting a carrier potentially disassociates it from:

• A route list, see “Carrier Route List” on page 515.

• A subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530.

• The directory assistance and operator services fields of the Office Parameter, see “OfficeParams” on page 382.

C A U T I O N

Deleting a carrier may negatively affect operations.

Page 216: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

208 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

query Carrier

Use this command without a key to see which carriers have been provisioned on the switch.

query Carrier <key>

This Generic CLI command shows the carrier access code (4-digit number) and the attributes assigned to a specified carrier.

query Carrier MCI

<52c6120> Carrierkey................."MCI"code................"1234"intraLata...........NOinterLata...........NOinternational.......NOworldZone1..........NOOSCapable...........NODACapable...........NOOS01NXCode..........9e (158)OS011NXCode.........8a (138)routeCodesMap.......<52c7840>

<52c7840> CarrierRouteCodes local.............0 (0) extendedArea......0 (0) interLATA.........0 (0) OAInterLATA.......0 (0) intraLATA.........0 (0) OAIntraLATA.......0 (0) international.....0 (0) OAInternational...0 (0) worldZone1........0 (0) OAWorldZone1......0 (0) e911..............0 (0) DAIntraLATA.......0 (0) DAInterLATA.......0 (0) OAZeroMinus.......0 (0) SAC...............0 (0)

deniedInfoDigits....<52c76c0>

<52c76c0> InfoDigitsList valType......Integer collection...List (0 items) ->

Syntax Description

<key> carrier name

Page 217: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 209990-1012-001

ANIKPType...........NONErestrictions........(BITFIELD) -> 0circuitCodeForTNS...<52c7910>

<52c7910> CircuitCode local.............0 (0) extendedArea......0 (0) interLATA.........0 (0) OAInterLATA.......0 (0) intraLATA.........0 (0) OAIntraLATA.......0 (0) international.....0 (0) OAInternational...0 (0) worldZone1........0 (0) OAWorldZone1......0 (0) e911..............0 (0) DAIntraLATA.......0 (0) DAInterLATA.......0 (0) OAZeroMinus.......0 (0) SAC...............0 (0)

PCAC................<>

Page 218: 1012 Command Line Interface

Carriers

210 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding deniedInfoDigits to a Carrier

insertInto Carrier <key> deniedInfoDigits <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a value to a Carrier’s deniedInfoDigits list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds info digits "11" to the start of the deniedInfoDigits list for carrier ATT:

insertInto Carrier ATT deniedInfoDigits 1 11

Removing deniedInfoDigits from a Carrier

deleteFrom Carrier <key> deniedInfoDigits <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a value to a Carrier’s deniedInforDigits list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command removes the info digits at the start of the deniedInfoDigits list for carrier ATT:

deleteFrom Carrier ATT deniedInfoDigits 1

Syntax Description

<key> carrier name

<subkey> This is the index in the denied Info Digits list where you want to enter the information digits.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert deniedInforDigits at the start of a carrier’s deniedInfoDigits list. Use a index of -1 to insert deniedInforDigits at the end of a carrier’s deniedInfoDigits list.

<subvalue> This attribute specifies which information digits that you want to block from an IC or OSS and send the default 00 digits instead. By default none of the digits are denied from routing to an OSS.

Syntax Description

<key> carrier name

subkey This attribute specifies which information digits you want to remove from the deniedInfoDigits list

Page 219: 1012 Command Line Interface

Change Number Announcement

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 211990-1012-001

Change Number Announcement

Use Change Number Announcement (CNA) when a single directory number or a range of directory numbers is changed, and you wish to provide an announcement to inform callers of the new number(s). When the old number is dialed, the switch generates a custom announcement informing the caller of the old and new directory numbers.

CNA may be pre-provisioned, and placed in an inactive state. This allows the service to be deployed when it is needed.

To provision Change Number Announcement for a single directory number:

Step Action

1 Create a NANP route list for the number that will trigger the Change Number Announcement (see “NANP Route List” on page 519 for more information about route lists).

The following example creates a route list for subscriber 9724800013.

We will call this Change Number Announcement route list CNA_9724800013, to help us remember which subscriber the announcement is for. In this example, we are going to pre-provision the CNA route list, so we want it to be intially inactive.

create NANPRouteList CNA_9724800013 9724800013 9724800013 NO

2 Add the service to the route list (see “Route Lists” on page 514, and “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527 for more information).

insertInto NANPRouteList CNA_9724800013 routes 1 CNASvc:2145301945

Note that the type of route list and the name of the route list were determined in step 1, and that “routes” is a keyword that must be used when inserting route into a route list. "1" is the positiion in the route list where we want to enter the service. Also, note that “CNASvc:” is a keyword that identifies the Change Number Announcement service, and "2145301945" is the changed number for the subscriber.

NOTE: If you omit the final ":" in "CNASvc" the announcement will omit the 1st digit of the new number!

3 At some later time, we will want to activate the Change Number Announcement for the subscriber. This is done with the Generic CLI modify command:

modify NANPRouteList CNA_9724800013 active YES

Page 220: 1012 Command Line Interface

Change Number Announcement

212 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

TipUse CNA with a range of directory numbers to provision NPA overlays.

To provision Change Number Announcement for a range of directory numbers:

Step Action

1 Create a NANP route list for the range of directory numbers that will trigger the Change Number Announcement (see “NANP Route List” on page 519 for more information about route lists).

The following example creates a route list for the range of directory numbers 9724800000 to 9724809999.

We will call this Change Number Announcement route list CNA_97248, to help us remember the range of directory numbers in this route list. In this example, we are not going to pre-provision the CNA route list, because we want the changes to take place immediately.

create NANPRouteList CNA_972480 9724800000 9724809999

2 Add the service to the route list (see “Route Lists” on page 514, and “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527 for more information).

insertInto NANPRouteList CNA_972480 routes 1 CNASvc:214575XXXX

See step 2 in the previous example for a discussion about the type and name of the route list. In this step, we want to concentrate on the format of the CNA number.

In this example, "214575" replaces "972480". Each "X" in the string "XXXX" is a wildcard that allows the corresponding digit in the original dialed number to be used in the Changed Number Announcement.

To illustrate: if a caller dials "9724800021", the announcement would be,

The number you are calling, 9724800021, has been changed. Please make a note of the new number, 2145750021

Page 221: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 213990-1012-001

Equipment Provisioning

lockFacility

lockFacility <facilityOID>

This command places a facility (device) in an out-of-service administrative state.

statusFacility line-1***** Status for Line-1-1-10 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: UNLOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: ISVResource Available?: YES

lock line-1

statusFacility line-1***** Status for Line-1-1-10 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: LOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: OOSResource Available?: NO

Syntax Description

<facilityOID> facilityOID — the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 222: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

214 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

unlockFacility

unlockFacility <facilityOID>

This command places a facility (device) in an in-service administrative state.

statusFacility line-1***** Status for Line-1-1-10 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: LOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: OOSResource Available?: NO

unlockFacility line-1

statusFacility line-1***** Status for Line-1-1-10 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: UNLOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: ISVResource Available?: YES

Syntax Description

<facilityOID> facilityOID — the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 223: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 215990-1012-001

Tip

shutdownFacility

shutdownFacility <facilityOID>

Once a facility has been shut down, use “unlockFacility” on page 214 to return it to service.

This command places a facility (device) in an administrative state where it does not accept new service requests, but keeps performing current activities until done.

statusFacility line-1***** Status for Line-1-1-10 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: UNLOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: ISVResource Available?: YES

shutdownFacility line-1

statusFacility line-1***** Status for Line-1-1-10 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: LOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: OOSResource Available?: NO

Syntax Description

<facilityOID> facilityOID — the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 224: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

216 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

statusFacility

statusFacility <facilityOID>

This command displays the operational and administrative status of a facility (device).

statusFacility line-1***** Status for Line-1-1-10 *****Operational State: ENABLEDMaster Operational State: ENABLEDAdministrative State: LOCKEDMaster Administrative State: UNLOCKEDResource Status: OOSResource Available?: NO

Syntax Description

<facilityOID> facilityOID — the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 225: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 217990-1012-001

Tip

modifyFacility

modifyFacility <facilityOID>

Tip: use “queryAttrDefs” on page 85 to see the list of facility attributes and their valid values, and “queryFacility” on page 69 to see the current attribute values of a specific facility.

This command modifies one or more facility (device) attributes.

The following example changes the ringingType attribute of a Line.

queryFacility line-1(OID: 4a18001)

<3f25020> Linekey.........................<>objectID....................Line-1-1-10dependentOIDs...............<>containerOID................Card-1-1-10

ringingType.................0 (0)

modifyFacility line-1 ringingType 1<done>

queryFacility line-1

(OID: 4a18001)

<3f25020> Linekey.........................<>objectID....................Line-1-1-10dependentOIDs...............<>containerOID................Card-1-1-10

ringingType.................1 (1)

Syntax Description

<facilityOID> facilityOID — the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 226: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

218 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The following example provisions a Primary and Secondary DNS on a Fast Ethernet Interface.

query fe-0(OID: 4544000) <2a0dba0> FEIfkey.........................<>objectID....................FE-0-1-5dependentOIDs...............Array (25 items, zero items suppressed) -> [0] IntegerValue: IPTrunk-0-1-5output trimmed to conserve space [24] IntegerValue: IPTrunk-24-1-5 primaryDns..................<>secondaryDns................<>inimumDnsTTL...............5 (5)

modifyFacility fe-0 primaryDns 172.19.160.110modifyFacility fe-0 secondaryDns 172.19.160.210

query fe-0(OID: 4544000) <2a0dba0> FEIfkey.........................<>objectID....................FE-0-1-5dependentOIDs...............Array (25 items, zero items suppressed) -> [0] IntegerValue: IPTrunk-0-1-5output trimmed to conserve space [24] IntegerValue: IPTrunk-24-1-5 primaryDns.................."172.19.160.110"secondaryDns................"172.19.160.210"minimumDnsTTL...............5 (5)

Page 227: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 219990-1012-001

modifyFacilityNestedObject

modifyFacilityNestedObject <oid> <attrName> <subAttrName> <subAttrValue> [...<subAttrName> <subAttrValue>]

This command is used to modify nested object attributes for objects not yet under Generic CLI.

modifyFacilityNestedObject Card-17 qosBufferReservations rmac 5

Syntax Description

<facilityOID> facilityOID — the Object Identifier of a trunk, line, span, fe, or ds3. See “OID” on page 30.

<attrName> Name of attribute within the object, typically this is itself another object.

<subAttrrName> Name of nested attribute.

<subAttrValue> New value for subAttrName

... subAttrName, subAttrValue may repeat to change additional attributes of attrName.

Page 228: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

220 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

NailedUpCircuit

A NailedUpCircuit creates a nailed-up path between two trunks or spans and initiates a TDM connection between them. Nailed-up trunks/spans allow the switch to have a dedicated, non-switched path from an input DS0 port on a T1 to an output DS0 port on a T1. The nailed-up path through the switch does the following:

• Guarantees transmission

• Prevents information on the path from being subject to call processing

• Provides a clear-channel (no signaling data) 64 Kbps connection between two trunks

• Provides a DS0 cross-connect function within the switch, eliminating external equipment for separating switched and non-switched circuits

A NailedUpCircuit has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all NailedUpCircuit commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• circuit_A

• circuit_B

The modify command does not apply to the NailedUpCircuit object.

create NailedUpCircuit nailup-1 Trunk-4 Trunk-8

query NailedUpCircuit nailup-1<5ee11f0> NailedUpCircuitkey........."nailup-1"circuit_A...Trunk-4-1-27circuit_B...Trunk-8-1-27

destroy NailedUpCircuit nailup-1

attribute value

key name of the nailed-up circuit

circuit_A The Object Identifier of the first trunk or a span. Trunks are nailed to trunks and spans are nailed to spans. See “OID” on page 30.

circuit_B The Object Identifier of the second trunk or a span. Trunks are nailed to trunks and spans are nailed to spans. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 229: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 221990-1012-001

Tip

setLineTimer

setLineTimer <lineOid> <TimerName> <TimerValue>

This command sets the timers on a facility or lines on an RDT.

C A U T I O N

Use caution when setting timers on an RDT’s facilities.

Prerequisites

Use this command to see a complete list of line timer names and attributes:queryAttrDefs SubscriberFacilityTimers

RDT, see “createRDT” on page 351.

setLineTimer Line-1 ChargeDelay 2500

Syntax Description

<lineOid • Object Identifier of a line. Command will not work on Trunks or Spans. See “OID” on page 30.

<TimerName> timer name.

<TimerValue number of milliseconds

Page 230: 1012 Command Line Interface

Equipment Provisioning

222 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modifyProtocol

modifyProtocol <LineOID> <Protocol> [signalingType]

This command sets the trunk protocol for a line.

modifyProtocol line-4 NONE LOOPSTART

Syntax Description

<LineOID> Object Identifier of a line

See “OID” on page 30.

<Protocol> FXO — See “FXO” on page 746.

NONE — no protocol on the line.

[signalingType] Optional signaling type. Values are:

• GROUNDSTART

• LOOPSTART

Page 231: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 223990-1012-001

FTRS

The Flexible Translation, Routing and Signaling (FTRS) option alters the switch’s call processing and customize digits. For more information on FTRS, see the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

Provision FTRS by adding pretranslation tables, patterns and route, then adding the profile:

createPretranslation

createPretranslation <PreTransKey>

This command creates a pretranslation table. A pretranslation table is a container that contains one or more patterns.

createPretranslation PreTrans972

Dependent Commands

Adding an FTRS pretranslation, “addPretranslation” on page 224.

Step Action

1 Create the pretranslation table (see “createPretranslation” on page 223.)

2 Add a pretranslation to the pretranslation table. (see “addPretranslation” on page 224.)

3 Create a profile and associate a pretranslation table and/or a common route table with the profile (see “FTRSProfile” on page 231.).

4 Assign the profile to a subscriber, trunk group, or the office parameters. (see “Subscribers” on page 530, “Trunk Groups” on page 233 or “OfficeParams” on page 382).

Syntax Description

PreTransKey The name of the pretranslation table

Page 232: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

224 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

addPretranslation

addPretranslation <PreTransKey> <Str1> [Str1...]

A pattern includes:

• A set of incoming digits that trigger FTRS. When the switch matches a pattern to the incoming digits, it applies FTRS.

• Inbound actions: Inbound actions change the digits, CAC, ANI II information digits, or ANI. This is done after digit collection is complete, but before screening and routing.

• Outbound digits: Outbound digits change to the outpulsed digits, CAC, ANI II information digits, or ANI, after the route is defined.

• Optional common routes. A common route changes the following outbound actions after screening:

• Route type — specifies the route that the call uses including: Carrier route, Route List or Subscriber.

• Outbound digits — change to the outpulsed digits, CAC, ANI II information digits, or ANI, after the route is defined

.

Syntax Description

<PreTransKey> The name of the pretranslation table

<Str1> This field defines the string you attach to the pretranslations table. Strings include a pattern, an inbound action and an outbound action. Enclose the string in quotation marks.

Page 233: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 225990-1012-001

pattern

TipWhen entering digit sequences, X matches any digit 0 - 9, and N matches any digit 2 - 9.

To match a range of digits enter the first values of the range followed by a series of Xs.

For example, to include all numbers from 9724800000 to 9724809999, type 972480XXXX.

Pattern — Use a pattern to set incoming digits that the switch matches, then applies FTRS inbound actions.

• Digits from Subscribers1 to 30 digits including, * and #.

• Digits from Trunks0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. For CAS trunks, specify KP (Key Pulse signal) and ST (STart signal) values as follows:

– K — KP

– B — KP' (KP prime)

– C — KP' '(KP double prime)

– A — KP'' (KP triple prime)

– [ — Any of the KP values (KP, KP’, KP’’, or KP’’’).

– S —ST

– B — ST' (ST prime)

– C — ST'' (ST double prime)

– A — ST''' (ST triple prime)

– ] Any of the ST values (ST, ST’, ST’’, or ST’’’).

• T Perform critical timing on a digit collection for a digit pattern. See “CriticalDigitTimeout” on page 391. After the critical timer expires, the switch declares the collected set of digits is complete and processes the call.

• T(n) The number of milliseconds the switch waits before indicating the collected set of digits is complete and processes the call, where n=0-30. Use T(n) after a specific digit string to lengthen or shorten the critical timer. For example, 0111504T2 shortens the critical timer to 2 seconds after collecting the specified digits. The default critical timer setting is 4 seconds, see “OfficeParms Timers” on page 391

Syntax Description

Page 234: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

226 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Inbound- Actions

Inbound Actions — change the digits, CAC, ANI II information digits, or ANI, after digit collection is complete but before screening and routing.

• /REM n, n — removes from position n, n number of digits. For example, /REM 1, 3, removes 3 digits from position 1 (the first digit).

• /INS n, "digit string" — inserts a digit string (parameter n, n - position, digit string). For example, /INS 1,972480 inserts 972480 before the digit string.

• /VAR n — collects one or more digits from the end of the pattern. Used for international numbers after the 7th digit. For example, /VAR 3, collects up to 3 more digits.

• /ANI n — stores n digits from position 1 as the Automatic Number Identifier. For example, /ANI 10, store the next 10 digits as the ANI.

• /CAC n — stores n digits from position 1 as the Carrier Access Code. For example, /CAC 4, stores the first four digits as the CAC.

• x/ESC “profile name” — when the digit x is received FTRS escapes to another profile. This is used for IAD subscribers in a business group that press a number to get an outside line.

• /CLGDB X— specifies a list of ANIs to match in addition to the called number before actions are applied. The ANIs themselves are in pretranslation table X.

Syntax Description

Page 235: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 227990-1012-001

Outbound- Actions

Outbound Actions (these actions are triggered by the “=”)

• = CARRIER — to modify the routing of a call by PIC or CAC and modify the outbound digits of the call. This is for calls that are routed by carrier.

• = “routeListname” — to modify the outbound digits by the route list name, using the following route list type: NANP, LNP, Carrier, Tandem Carrier, Tandem Trunk Group, Tandem ANI using the route list name. If the exact name is not found, the switch searches for a matching pattern in the order of the route lists above.

• = SUBSCRIBER — to send the call to the subscriber, you use the REM or INS option with this type of routing.

• /CAC — for the CARRIER option, uses the Carrier Access Code to route the call. For example= CARRIER /CAC, routes the call to the CAC.

• /CAC XXXX — for the CARRIER option, reroutes the call using the CAC that you enter. For example:= CARRIER /CAC 0333, reroutes the call using the 0333 CAC.

• /PIC 1 or /PIC 2 — for the CARRIER option, uses the subscriber’s PIC1 (interLATA) or PIC2 (intraLATA) to reroute the call.

• /REM n, n—(performed before a route is selected) removes from position n, n number of digits. For example, /REM 1, 3, removes 3 digits from position 1 (the first digit).

• /INS n, "digit string” — (performed before a route is selected) inserts a digit string (parameter n, n - position, digit string). For example, /INS 1,972480 inserts 972480 at position 1.

• /ANI XXXXXXXXXX — outpulses digits as the ANI.

NOTE: Effective with Release 6.0, the /ANI outbound action has been enhanced. See examples.

• /II XX — outpulses specified digits as Information Digits

• /PCAC XXXX — outpulse a Pseudo Carrier Access Code instead of the CAC.

• /DEST “name” — sends the call to a common route table using the name you enter.

• /LNP — overrides an FTRS outbound route action if an LNP route exists

• /CT — alters the call type for a given digit pattern prior to outpulsing, resulting in modification of the outpulsed called number, ST digit, and digit sequences dependent on the outgoing trunk group protocol (0-17) see the T7000 Provisioning Guide for more information.

Syntax Description

Page 236: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

228 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Prerequisites

Create an FTRS profile, see “FTRSProfile” on page 231.

Add an FTRS pretranslation table, see “createPretranslation” on page 223

Use the following models with the addPretranslation command:

• addPretranslation <preTransKey> "pattern, inbound actions, = routeList routeListName, outbound actions"

• addPretranslation < preTransKey > "pattern, inbound actions, = CARRIER (/CAC, /CAC XXXX or /PIC)

• addPretranslation < preTransKey > "pattern, inbound actions, = SUBSCRIBER (/REM or /INS)

• addPretranslation < preTransKey > "pattern, inbound actions, /DEST destinationName

addPretranslation pretran972 "972480XXXX =SUBSCRIBER /REM 1,3"

addPretranslation pretran972 "469480XXXX /REM 1, 3 /INS 1, 214 /DEST Local"

addPretranslation pretran972 "972999XXXX /REM 4,3"

addPretranslation pretran972 "972T /INS 4, 4801002"

addPretranslation pretran972 "2144801031 /DEST Route1_214"

addPretranslation pretran972 "8174801032 /REM 1,10 /INS 1, 2144801002 = CARRIER /CAC 0333"

addPretranslation pretran972 "1002 /INS 1,214480 /DEST TenDigitIntraLata"

addPretranslation pretran972 "469467X0XX = CARRIER /CAC 0333 /ANI 9724801001 /REM 1,6 /INS 1, 214480"

addPretranslation pretran972 "469467000X = R2144801001 /REM 1, 10 /INS 1,2144801001"

addPretranslation pretran972 "569480XXXX /REM 1, 3 /INS 1 214 = R2144801001"

The following examples demonstrate the new outbound ANI feature as of Release 6.0:

addPretranslation "972XXXXXXX = SUBSCRIBER /ANI 8174800000" # outpulse fixed ANI 8174800000

addPretranslation "XXXXXXXXXX = SUBSCRIBER /ANI 972XXXXXXX" # outpulse variable ANI 972XXXXXXX, only replace NPA

If Subscriber A (2144800000) calls 8174800000, the outpulse ANI will be 9724800000 using FTRS

if Subscriber B (2144800001) calls 8174800000, the outpulse ANI will be 9724800001 using FTRS

if Subscriber A or B calls 9724800000, the outpulse ANI will be 8174800000.

Page 237: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 229990-1012-001

modifyPretranslation

modifyPretranslation <PreTransKey> <PtnStr>

This command changes the digit pattern string on a pretranslation table.

Prerequisites

Create an FTRS profile, see “FTRSProfile” on page 231.

Add an FTRS pretranslation table, see “createPretranslation” on page 223.

Add a pretranslation to the pretranslation table, see “addPretranslation” on page 224.

modifyPretranslation preTran972 “972T /INS 4, 4801002”

removePretranslation

removePretranslation <PreTransKey> <lineNum>

This command removes a line from a pretranslation.

Prerequisites

Create an FTRS profile, see “FTRSProfile” on page 231.

Add an FTRS pretranslation table, see “createPretranslation” on page 223.

Add an FTRS pretranslation, see “addPretranslation” on page 224.

removePretranslation PreTrans972 1

Syntax Description

<PreTransKey> The name of the pretranslation table.

<PtnStr> A digit pattern string in the pretranslation table. A pattern is the set of incoming digits that the switch matches.

Syntax Description

<PreTransKey> The name of the pretranslation table

<lineNum> The line number that you want to remove. Use “queryPretranslation” on page 120 to find the line number of an action.

Page 238: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

230 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

deletePretranslation

deletePretranslation <PreTransKey>

This command deletes a pretranslation table.

Prerequisites

Create an FTRS profile, see “FTRSProfile” on page 231.

Create an FTRS pretranslation table, see “addPretranslation” on page 224.

deletePretranslation PreTrans972

Syntax Description

PreTransKey The name of the pretranslation table

Page 239: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Provisioning 231990-1012-001

FTRSProfile

An FTRSProfile is a container for a rule pattern that applies to a specific subscriber, originating trunk group, or the entire office. A rule pattern is a pretranslation table and an optional common route table. After you build a profile, assign it to a subscriber, trunk group, or the office parameters.

An FTRSProfile object has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all FTRSProfile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• PretransKey

• RouteKey

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• PretransKey

• RouteKey

Prerequisites

Create the pretranslation table, see “createPretranslation” on page 223.

NOTE: If a route list is provisioned for the modified FTRS digit string, a common route is not needed.

createPretranslation res_DP1addPretranslation res_DP1 "0T"create FTRSProfile IAD_Basic_Res res_DP1

Attribute Description

key The name of the FTRS profile

PretransKey Optional name of the pretranslation table associated with the profile.

RouteKey Optional name of route table associated with the profile. Note: This is the name defined by using the /DEST syntax for the pretranslation. See “createPretranslation” on page 223.

Page 240: 1012 Command Line Interface

FTRS

232 Provisioning T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Dependent Commands

Add the profile to a subscriber, trunk group or the office parameters, see “Subscribers” on page 530,“Trunk Groups” on page 233 and “OfficeParams” on page 382.

Page 241: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 233990-1012-001

Tip

Trunk Groups

The trunk group name is used during CDR conversion. The AMA/EMI record is populated with the last four characters.

Taqua recommends the trunk group names have 4 digit trunk group numbers.

For example:

CAS Trunk Groups start from 0000

PRI Trunk Groups start from 1000

ISUP Trunk Groups start from 2000

Hunt Groups start from 3000

IP Trunk Groups start from 4000

MGCP Trunk Groups start from 5000.

A trunk is a communication line between two switches. For example, a trunk could connect the T7000 to a Private Branch Exchange (PBX), or to another T7000.Trunk groups bundle one or more trunks that perform a similar function. The function is defined by the trunk group.

Customer demand or call traffic determines when and where trunk groups are deployed.

The switch supports the following types of trunk groups:

• CAS, see “CAS Trunk Groups” on page 235

• Clear Channel, see “Clear Channel Trunk Groups” on page 252

• Interface Groups, “Interface Groups” on page 258

• IP, see “IP Trunk Groups” on page 307

• MGCP, see “MGCP Trunk Group” on page 359

• Multi-Line Hunt Group, see “Hunt Groups” on page 273

• PRI, see “PRI Trunk Groups” on page 286

• SS7, see “SS7 Trunk Groups” on page 324

Page 242: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

234 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute

The tandemRoutingType attribute controls the type of tandem routing for the trunk group. The switch typically routes calls on the dialed number, the LRN, or the subscriber’s carrier when making a toll call. However, the switch has additional routing methods for other switching applications. The switch can act as:

• End Office (EO) — routes calls to an Access Tandem (AT) with special routing information, for example: a Carrier Identification code and a route code.

• Access Tandem (AT) — routes calls to Inter-exchange Carriers (ICs) using the incoming Carrier Identification code/route code, the incoming trunk group, or ANI from the EO.

NOTE: The software does not currently support Tandem Screening (SCP dips for N00 routing, 8xx service, LNP, and AIN triggers). The T7000 performs LNP screening and routing if the tandem routing type is set to NO_ROUTING and an LRN is received. T7000 performs an SCP dip and routing (as if the call were a subscriber origination) if an LRN is not received, but the prefix is set to ported. For all other tandem routing types, the T7000 routes based on called number.

Dependent Commands

If you selected the CARRIER tandem routing type, provision the Carrier Identification code and route codes for each carrier, see “Carriers” on page 196.

If you selecting the TRUNKGROUP or AIN routing type, ensure the trunk protocol matches the protocol on the other end, see “modifyProtocol” on page 222. Provision tandem route lists and add routes, see “Route Lists” on page 514.

Attribute Values

<tandemRoutingType> Tandem Routing Type attribute

• NONE — Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscriber’s carrier, or the LNP code

• CARRIER — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists

• TRUNKGROUP — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists

• ANI — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

Page 243: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 235990-1012-001

CAS Trunk Groups

Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) is a form of in-band circuit state signaling. CAS indicates circuit state by repetitively sending one or more bits of signaling status associated with a specific circuit.

Trunks in CAS trunk groups are voice trunks and are DS0 full duplex circuits. CAS trunk groups are directional trunk groups that connect a switch to other switches or to subscribers.

Use a CAS trunk group for any in-band signaling and for DID (Direct Inbound Dialed) numbers. Create CAS trunk groups to connect to any switch that does not have SS7 capability.

A CAS Trunk Group has the following attributes

Attribute Description

key trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (“;”), nor can it consist of either the word “ALL” or the word “all”

facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See “Adding Facilities to a CAS Trunk Group” on page 251, and “Removing Facilities from a CAS Trunk Group” on page 251.

timers The timers for this trunk group. See “CAS Trunk Group Timers” on page 244.

options The options for this trunk group. See “CAS Trunk Group Options” on page 247.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE — always select the first trunk available

• ROUND_ROBIN (default) — sequentially rotate the use of trunks

sendOAssistCalls • TRUE — allow operator assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow operator assisted calls

sendDAssistCalls • TRUE — allow directory assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow directory assisted calls

Page 244: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

236 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

tandemRoutingType Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group.

For a discussion of this attribute, see “The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute” on page 234.

• NO_ROUTING — Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscriber’s carrier, or the LNP code. Note: when custom tandem TG outpulsing is required, choose this option for the inbound tandem TG, and set the tandemCustomReplacement attribute to YES.

• CARRIER_ROUTING (default) — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists

• TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists

• ANI_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

defaultDN The default directory number when the trunk group connects to a PBX that needs to have default Primary IntraLATA or InterLATA Carrier (PIC). Also, add a default subscriber with this number to set the specific IntraLATA or InterLATA Carrier to bill the number correctly. see “Subscribers” on page 530

Length: 10

C A U T I O N

Only use a defaultDN for CAS trunk groups with a DIDMF or a DIDDTMF protocol.

NOTE: If assigned, the defaultDN becomes the default ANI for 911 calls made without a 10 digit ANI. See “E911DefaultANI” on page 242

restrictions The restrictions on this trunk group. See “CAS Trunk Group Restrictions” on page 250.

Attribute Description

Page 245: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 237990-1012-001

defaultNPA The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

Length: 3

NOTE: For DIDMF or DIDDTMF CAS trunks, the homeNPA of the defaultDN is added to the 7-digits, if available. If a defaultDN is not available, then the defaultNPA is used.

For CAS trunks using FXO protocol, the homeNPA of the subscriber is added on the 7-digits

replaceDestinationDigits • TRUE — allow the use of replacement destination digits (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see “Subscribers” on page 530, “Destination Digit Replacement” on page 346, and “replacementMode” on page 405.

• FALSE — do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a non-T7000 LRN associated with it

replaceCarrier This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See “Prefixes” on page 403, “replacementMode” on page 405, and “Carriers” on page 196.

• FALSE — do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC.

Attribute Description

Page 246: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

238 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

replaceAniDigits This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see “Subscribers” on page 530.

• FALSE — do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits • • TRUE — allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,See “Subscribers” on page 530.

• • FALSE — do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility.

• • REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See “FTRS” on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

replaceCSI This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See “Subscribers” on page 530

• FALSE — do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

Attribute Description

Page 247: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 239990-1012-001

localTermination The localTermination attribute controls if incoming trunk group allows for local terminations or not. If it does not allow for local terminations then use the trunk group in a tandem routing application. If you allow local terminations in a tandem routing trunk group, then if the DN terminates on the switch the calls for that DN will not be tandemed out of the switch.

• ALLOW (default) — allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch.

• NOT_ALLOWED — only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRouting-Type

The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned:

• USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) — Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list.

• USE_NANP_CARRIER — Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list.

• USE_CARRIER_ONLY — Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

• USE_NANP_ONLY — Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions • The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs).

denyAniList An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see “Screen Lists” on page 415 and “Prefixes” on page 403.

Attribute Description

Page 248: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

240 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

direction • ONE_WAY_IN — One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

• ONE_WAY_OUT — One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

• BI_DIRECTIONAL — Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

tandemCustom-Replacement

Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls.

• NO (default) — no special outpulsing is performed.

• YES — outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See “7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing” on page 409

Attribute Description

Page 249: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 241990-1012-001

trunkProtocol One of the following:

DIDMF — See “DIDMF” on page 747.

DIDDTMF — See “DIDDTMF” on page 747.

FGC— See “FGC” on page 745.

FGCB2— See “FGCB2” on page 745.

FGCOF — See “FGCOF” on page 745.

FGCOS— See “FGCOS” on page 745.

FGDAT— See “FGDAT” on page 746.

FGDATOS— See “FGDATOS” on page 746.

FGCVZOS— See “FGCVZOS” on page 745.

FGD (default) — See “FGD” on page 745.

FGDEOIC— See “FGDEOIC” on page 746.

FGDICEO— See “FGDICEO” on page 746.

FGDEOAT— See “FGDEOAT” on page 746.

FGDATEO— See “FGDATEO” on page 746.

DIDMF— See “DIDMF” on page 747.

DIDDTMF— See “DIDDTMF” on page 747.

WSMF2WAY— See “WSMF2WAY” on page 747.

FGDINC— See “FGDINC” on page 746.

FXO — See “FXO” on page 746.

WSMF2WAY — See “WSMF2WAY” on page 747.

signalingType This parameter is optional for all protocols except FXO and FXS. For these protocols, the signaling type must be either LOOPSTART or GROUNDSTART.

For all other protocols, the signalingType defaults to EM

numDestDigits the number of digits outpulsed.

• DEFAULT — sets the number of destination digits to be outpulsed to ten

• 7 — sets the number of destination digits to be outpulsed to seven

• 10 — sets the number of destination digits to be outpulsed to ten

numAniDigits the number of ANI digits outpulsed.

• DEFAULT — sets the number of ANI digits to be outpulsed to ten

• 7 — sets the number of ANI digits to be outpulsed to seven

• 10 — sets the number of ANI digits to be outpulsed to ten

Attribute Description

Page 250: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

242 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for CAS Trunk Group commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• trunkProtolcol

• signalingType

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• timers

• options

• selectionMethod

• sendOAssistCalls

• sendDAssistCalls

• tandemRoutingType

• defaultDN

• restrictions

• defaultNPA

• replaceDestinationDigits

• replaceCarrier

• replaceAniDigits

• replaceInfoDigits

• ftrsProfile

• replaceCSI

• localTermination

numInfoDigits the number of informational digits OUTPULSED.

• DEFAULT — sets the number of Information digits to be outpulsed to two

• 1 — sets the number of Information digits to be outpulsed to one

• 2 — sets the number of Information digits to be outpulsed to two

outPulseProfileKey Used with the FGCOF protocol to customize outpulsing sequences. See See “OutPulseProfile” on page 397

E911DefaultANI This attribute is used to specify a 10 digit ANI when a 911 call is made and a 10 digit ANI is not received, and a defaultDN is not assigned to the Trunk Group.

Attribute Description

Page 251: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 243990-1012-001

• tandemDefaultRoutingType

• denyAniList

• direction

• trunkProtocol

• signalingType

• numDestDigits

• numAniDigits

• numInfoDigits

• outPulseProfileKey

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• facilities

See “Adding Facilities to a CAS Trunk Group” on page 251, and “Removing Facilities from a CAS Trunk Group” on page 251.

create CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Planomodify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano sendOAssistCalls FALSEquery CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Planodestroy CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano

Page 252: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

244 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

CAS Trunk Group Timers

A CAS Trunk Group Timer object contains the timers that control the behavior of a CAS Trunk Group. The CAS timers’ default settings meet the industry standard.

CAS Trunk Group Timers have the following attributes

Timer Description

GuardTime The time after the release of a circuit that prevents a new connection signal before the other end is released.

Range: 700 - 1,200 ms

Default: 1,200 ms

ChargeDelay The amount of time a terminating trunk waits before generating answer supervision toward the originator.

Range: 0 - 5,000 ms

Default: 0 ms

TimedDisconnectTime TimedDisconnectTime The amount of time a called party can go back onHook and remain onHook before switch declares disconnect. Also called calling party control, which allows a subscriber to answer a call and put the telephone onHook for a short period of time.

2.000 - 10,000 ms

Default: 5,000 ms

ForwardDisconnectTime The amount of time the calling party can go back onHook and remain onHook before the switch declares disconnect.

200 - 800 ms

Default: 200 ms

MinFlashHookTime Sets the lower boundary for a flash hook of which a shorter flash hook is ignored. Flash hook is the button that hangs up the telephone that is also called a switch hook. For example, Call Waiting or Three-Way Calling requires using flash hook. Set this time for 70 ms in a Basic 911 configuration. See “911 over CAS” on page 136.

Default: 300 ms

FlashInterval Sets the limit for a flash hook. The maximum time for a flash hook is the MinFlashHookTime plus the FlashInterval. (TimedDisconnectTime). Set this time for 60 ms in a Basic 911 configuration. See “911 over CAS” on page 136.

Default: 900 ms

Page 253: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 245990-1012-001

NOTE: A wink is used to signal acknowledge of a facility seizure and readiness to accept digits

MinWinkDuration MinWinkDuration: the minimum duration which will qualify a brief incoming off hook signal as a wink.

Default: 100 ms

MaxWinkDuration MaxWinkDuration: the maximum duration which will be allowed when attempting to qualify an incoming off hook signal as a wink. If this duration is exceeded, the off hook will be declared as a sustained off hook. This may be interpreted by an E&M protocol as either an origination or an answer signal.

Default: 350 ms

WinkDuration WinkDuration is the duration of a wink signal that the T7000 will transmit outbound for E&M protocols.

Default: 100 ms

FlashDuration Limit for the duration that the switch sends a flash signal. Set this time for 100 ms in a Basic 911 configuration. See “911 over CAS” on page 136.

Default: 900 ms

C A U T I O N

Changing any of OffHook or OnHook T1 driver timers could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see “options” on page 543

OffHookDigMax The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing.

Default: 70 ms

OffHookDigMin The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing.

Default: 0 ms

OnHookDigMax The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing.

Default: 70 ms

OnHookDigMin The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing.

Default: 0 ms

TerminatorDisconnectDelay The time for the terminating telephone to receive dial tone after the originating telephone hangs up.

Range: 1,500 - 10,000 ms

Default: 2,000

Timer Description

Page 254: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

246 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano timers LCFO_Duration 900

LCFO_Duration This is the duration of the Loop Current Feed Open (LCFO) signal. This forward disconnect signaling is required by some answering machines and voice mail systems to be longer than normal.

150 - 7,500 ms

Default: 700

Timer Description

Page 255: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 247990-1012-001

CAS Trunk Group Options

A CAS Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a CAS Trunk Group.

CAS Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:

Attribute Description

glareControl Glare control identifies the trunks on which the switch processes seizure when there is glare and those from which the switch backs down. Coordinate these values with the other side of the trunk group, for example, if the switch is all then the other end is none.

• ODD — To process seizure on the odd trunks in the trunk group and back down on the even trunks

• EVEN — To process seizure on the even trunks in the trunk group and back down on the odd trunks

• ALL — To process seizure of all the trunks in the trunk group

• NONE — To back down on all of the trunks in the trunk group

outpulseAsDialedNOTE: Only available for DIDMF and DIDDTMF protocols

Outpulse as Dialed allows a switch acting as a local End Office (EO) to provide long distance service without having an InterLATA carrier provisioned. The local EO outpulses the dialed digits to the local tandem office. Then, the local tandem office, not the local EO, performs screening and translation on the dialed digits. For more information, see The T7000 Provisioning Guide.

TRUE — routes by and outpulses the exact digits the subscriber dials

FALSE — the switch translates the digits, chooses a call type and routes based on the call type (local, extended, intraLATA, interLATA, worldZone1, International, etc.).

numOfDIDDigits Sets the number of direct inward dialing digits allowed (0-10) for trunk groups with DIDMF or DIDDTMF protocols.

Range: 1 - 30

Default: 10

Page 256: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

248 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

networkServices Set BLV/BLI only on trunk groups coming from an operator station. You need one trunk group for each service.

Allow for one of the following operator services:

• NONE (Default) — Neither BLV or BLI.

• BLV — Busy Line Verification allows an external operator to verify if a subscriber line is busy. An operator calling over a BLV trunk receives a busy signal if the line is busy or a ring-back if the line is idle.

• BLI — Busy Line Interrupt allows an external operator to interrupt a busy line. An operator calling over a BLI trunk interrupts the busy subscriber who can either drop the existing conversation and accept the operator call or continue with the existing conversation.

skipMinDigitsRestriction TRUE — If a subscriber enters less than the minimum number of digits required by a protocol, the switch collects the digits entered and tries to process the call. Use TRUE if the trunk group has an FTRS profile, which adds digits to meet the requirements.

FALSE — If a subscriber enters less than the minimum number of digits required by the protocol, the call does not complete.

fgc911MakeFirstSecond ON — changes the FGCVZOS protocol for 911 calls, outpulsing the second stage for the first stage and nothing for the second stage

OFF — no change to the outpulsing

useANIDNIS For DIDDTMF and DIDMF trunk groups:

• USE_ANI

– If ANI is received T7000 outpulses *ANI**

– If ANI not received and home NPA is stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses *HNPA**

– If ANI is not received and home NPA is not stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses ***

• USE_DNIS — T7000 outpulses **DNIS*

• USE_BOTH

– If ANI is received and home NPA is stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses *ANI*DNIS*

– If ANI not received and home NPA is stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses *HNPA*DNIS*

– If ANI not received and home NPA is not stored with trunk group T7000 outpulses **DNIS*

• NO — (default)

Attribute Description

Page 257: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 249990-1012-001

modify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano options skipMinDigitsRestriction TRUEmodify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano options glareControl ODD

routeOnRcvdCarrier • InbCarrier_OutbCarrier — route on the Incoming Carrier if available, otherwise, route on the Outbound Carrier.

• InbCarrier_only — route on the Incoming Carrier only.

• OutbCarrier_InbCarrier (default)— route on the Outbound Carrier, if available, otherwise, route on the Incoming Carrier.

• OutbCarrier_only — route on the Outbound Carrier only.

NOTE: The incoming carrier is the outpulsed carrier value received on CAS trunk groups

diddtmfProvideDialtoneAfterWink

Enables the T7000 to provide dial tone directly after sending a wink. Two situations where this could be useful:

1. When the T7000 is connected to a PBX: here, a PBX subscriber could dial 9 for an outside line. After the PBX seizes an E&M circuit and the T7000 acks the seizure with the standard wink supervision, the T7000 would then provide dial tone and collect digits. From the point of view of the PBX subscriber, it would seem as though he were connected directly to the T7000.

2. When the T7000 is connected to an IVR system, the IVR can redirect calls back out to the network. Contact Taqua Technical support for configuration details. The feature is only for DTMF E&M, not MF E&M. Most users do not have an MF capable phone.

• ON — The switch provides dial tone after a wink.

• OFF (default) — The switch does nothing special after a wink.

Attribute Description

Page 258: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

250 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

CAS Trunk Group Restrictions

CAS Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. A CAS Trunk Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section.

CAS Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes

The CAS Trunk Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

• 1 — turns the restriction on

• 0 — turns the restriction off.

modify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano restrictions NO_DA 1modify CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano restrictions OS_ONLY 0

Attribute Description

NO_OSSTATION Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls.

NO_OSDIALED Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls.

NO_DA Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group.

OS_ONLY Restrict all calls except operator services calls.

Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List.

DA_ONLY Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls.

Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List

NO_INTRALATA Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2).

NO_INTERLATA Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1).

NO_OS_INTRALATA Restrict OS intraLATA calls.

NO_OS_INTERLATA Restrict OS interLATA calls.

NO_DA_INTRALATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2).

NO_DA_INTERLATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1).

NO_INTERNATIONAL Restrict international calls.

NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL Restrict OS international calls.

NO_INBOUND_PAYSTATION

Does not allow a non-subscriber-initiated call if the information digit/OLI is 7, 29 or 70.

NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT_ANI

Does not allow calls that do not include the ANI.

Page 259: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 251990-1012-001

Adding Facilities to a CAS Trunk GroupinsertInto CASTrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a trunk to a CAS Trunk Group’s facilities list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds trunk 0 on the local card to CAS Trunk Group SWBELL-Plano:

insertInto CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano facilities 1 TGFacility trunk-0

Removing Facilities from a CAS Trunk GroupdeleteFrom CASTrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a trunk to a CAS Trunk Group’s facilities list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

NOTE: You must first lock the Trunk before you can remove it from the Trunk Group.

The following example locks trunk 0 on the local card and then removes it from CAS Trunk Group SWBELL-Plano:

lock trunk-0deleteFrom CASTrunkGroup SWBELL-Plano facilities 1

Syntax Description

<key> CAS Trunk Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<subvalue> This attribute specifies which trunk you want to add to the Trunk Group.

Syntax Description

<key> CAS Trunk Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

Page 260: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

252 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Clear Channel Trunk Groups

Clear Channel Trunk Groups have no attributes, such as signaling type or protocol. Clear Channel Trunk Groups do have features such as the following:

• error-checking to ensure the trunks added are not in another trunk group

• different modes of route selection (first available, round robin)

• automatic deletion of routes upon trunk group deletion

A clear channel trunk group has the following attributes

Attribute Description

key trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (“;”), nor can it consist of either the word “ALL” or the word “all”

facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See “Adding Facilities to a Clear ChannelTrunk Group” on page 257, and “Removing Facilities from a Clear ChannelTrunk Group” on page 257.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE — always select the first trunk available

• ROUND_ROBIN (default) — sequentially rotate the use of trunks

defaultNPA The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

Length: 3

replaceDestinationDigits

• TRUE — allow the use of replacement destination digits (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See “Subscribers” on page 530, “Destination Digit Replacement” on page 346, and “replacementMode” on page 405.

• FALSE — do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a non-T7000 LRN associated with it

Page 261: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 253990-1012-001

replaceCarrier This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See “Prefixes” on page 403, “replacementMode” on page 405, and “Carriers” on page 196.

• FALSE — do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC.

replaceAniDigits This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see “Subscribers” on page 530.

• FALSE — do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits • • TRUE — allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,See “Subscribers” on page 530.

• • FALSE — do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility.

• • REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See “FTRS” on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

Attribute Description

Page 262: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

254 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

replaceCSI This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see “Subscribers” on page 530

• FALSE — do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

localTermination The localTermination attribute controls if incoming trunk group allows for local terminations or not. If it does not allow for local terminations then use the trunk group in a tandem routing application. If you allow local terminations in a tandem routing trunk group, then if the DN terminates on the switch the calls for that DN will not be tandemed out of the switch.

• ALLOW (default) — allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch.

• NOT_ALLOWED — only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRoutingType

The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned:

• USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) — Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list.

• USE_NANP_CARRIER — Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list.

• USE_CARRIER_ONLY — Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

• USE_NANP_ONLY — Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions • The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs).

denyAniList An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see “Screen Lists” on page 415 and “Prefixes” on page 403.

Attribute Description

Page 263: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 255990-1012-001

All Clear Channel Trunk Group commands use the Generic CLI, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

There are no optional parameters for the create command.

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• selectionMethod

• defaultNPA

• replaceDestinationDigits

• replaceCarrier

• replaceAniDigits

• replaceInfoDigits

• ftrsProfile

• replaceCSI

• localTermination

• tandemDefaultRoutingType

• denyAniList

• direction

direction • ONE_WAY_IN — One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

• ONE_WAY_OUT — One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

• BI_DIRECTIONAL — Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

Attribute Description

Page 264: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

256 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• facilities

See “Adding Facilities to a Clear ChannelTrunk Group” on page 257, and “Removing Facilities from a Clear ChannelTrunk Group” on page 257.

create CLRTrunkGroup SWB2modify CLRTrunkGroup SWB2 direction ONE_WAY_IN query CLRTrunkGroup SWB2destroy CLRTrunkGroup SWB2

Page 265: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 257990-1012-001

Adding Facilities to a Clear ChannelTrunk GroupinsertInto CLRTrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey> TGFacility <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a trunk to a Clear Channel Trunk Group’s facilities list. See the“insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds trunk 0 on the local card to Clear Channel Trunk Group SWB2:

insertInto CLRTrunkGroup SWB2 facilities 1 TGFacility trunk-0

Removing Facilities from a Clear ChannelTrunk GroupdeleteFrom CLRTrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a trunk to a Clear Channel Trunk Group’s facilities list. See the“deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

NOTE: You must first lock the Trunk before you can remove it from the Trunk Group.

The following example locks trunk 0 on the local card and then removes it from Clear Channel Trunk Group SWB2:

lock trunk-0deleteFrom CLRTrunkGroup SWB2 facilities 1

Syntax Description

<key> Clear Channel Trunk Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<subvalue> This attribute specifies which trunk you want to add to the Trunk Group.

Syntax Description

<key> Clear Channel Trunk Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

Page 266: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

258 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

Interface Groups

See the T7000 Provisioning Guide for an in-depth discussion of Interface Groups.

Use an Interface Group to connect the switch to an RDT using GR-303. An Interface Group consists of at least two, and as many as 28 T1 spans. These spans connect the T7000 to an RDT. The primary T1 span carries the primary Embedded Operations Channel (EOC) and the Timeslot Management Channel (TMC). The secondary T1 span contains carries the secondary EOC and TMC, which provide redundancy when the primary EOC and TMC are unusable. The remaining trunks in the spans are used to carry voice traffic between the switch and the RDT. Additional spans may be added to the Interface Group to provide even more capacity.

A Interface Group has the following attributes.

Attribute Description

key trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (“;”), nor can it consist of either the word “ALL” or the word “all”

facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See “Adding Facilities to an Interface Group” on page 272, and “Removing Facilities from an Interface Group” on page 272.

timers The timers for this trunk group. See “Interface Group Timers” on page 263.

options The options for this trunk group. See “Interface Group Options” on page 269.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE — always select the first trunk available

• ROUND_ROBIN (default) — sequentially rotate the use of trunks

sendOAssistCalls • TRUE — allow operator assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow operator assisted calls

sendDAssistCalls • TRUE — allow directory assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow directory assisted calls

Page 267: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 259990-1012-001

tandemRoutingType Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group.

For a discussion of this attribute, see “The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute” on page 234.

• NO_ROUTING (default) — Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscriber’s carrier, or the LNP code

• CARRIER_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists

• TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists

• ANI_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

restrictions The restrictions on this trunk group. See “Interface Group Restrictions” on page 271.

defaultNPA The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

Length: 3

localTermination • ALLOW (default) — allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch.

• NOT_ALLOWED — only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned:

• USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) — Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list.

• USE_NANP_CARRIER — Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list.

• USE_CARRIER_ONLY — Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

• USE_NANP_ONLY — Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions • The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs).

Attribute Description

Page 268: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

260 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

denyAniList An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see “Screen Lists” on page 415, and “Prefixes” on page 403.

direction • ONE_WAY_IN — One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

• ONE_WAY_OUT — One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

• BI_DIRECTIONAL — Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

vendor the company that manufactured the RDT connected to this trunk group. Values are:

• If you are connecting to a Nortel RDT, you must enter "nortel" (without the quotes")

• If you are connecting to a Tollbridge RDT, you must enter "tollbridge" (without the quotes")

location the location of the RDT. This is an informational field, and does not affect the operation of the switch

primarySpanOID Object ID of the Primary T1 Span for this Interface Group. This span is used for the Primary Embedded Operations Channel (EOC), EOC Path Protection Switch (PPS), Timeslot Management Channel (TMC), and the TMC PPS. See “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: The switch automatically assigns the 12th timeslot (trunk 11) to the EOC and the 24th timeslot to the TMC (trunk

primarySpanLogicalID Logical value the Primary T1 Span for this Interface Group. Range: 1 - 28.

Attribute Description

Page 269: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 261990-1012-001

secondarySpanOID Object identifier of the span the EOC backup and TMC backup use after PPS has occurred. See “OID” on page 30.

The switch automatically assigns the 12th timeslot (trunk11) to the EOC and the 24th timeslot to the TMC (trunk23).

secondarySpanLogicalID Logical value the Secondary T1 Span for this Interface Group. Range: 1 - 28.

primaryEOCTrunk Shows the OID, service state and path status of the Primary EOC.

secondaryEOCTrunk Shows the OID, service state and path status of the Secondary EOC.

primaryTMCTrunk Shows the OID, service state and path status of the Primary TMC.

secondaryTMCTrunk Shows the OID, service state and path status of the Secondary TMC.

isdnMsgTrace This debug attribute controls how the switch shows ISDN Call Establishment, Call Clearing, Maintenance and Miscellaneous messages. The messages are displayed when running a CLI session on the card that has the active TMC.

Values are:

• MSG_TRACE_NONE (default) — The message trace for this trunk group is off.

• MSG_ONLY— Shows the ISDN messages

• MSG_WITH_INBOUND_DUMP— Shows ISDN messages and a dump of inbound IEs.

• MSG_WITH_OUTBOUND_DUMP— Shows ISDN messages and a dump of outbound IEs.

• MSG_WITH_BOTH_DUMP— Shows ISDN messages and a dump of both inbound and outbound IEs.

C A U T I O N

Contact Taqua TAC Support before using this option.

flowThroughProvisioning • NO_EOC — the RDT does not support messaging over the EOC interface

• NO — the RDT supports messaging over the EOC interface, but does not allow flow-through provisioning

• YES— the RDT allows for flow-through provisioning using the OM GUI or T7000 CLI

Attribute Description

Page 270: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

262 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all Interface Group commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• vendor

• location

• primarySpanOID

• primarySpanLogicalID

• secondarySpanOID

• secondarySpanLogicalID

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• flowThroughProvisioning

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• timers

• options

• selectionMethod

• sendOAssistCalls

• sendDAssistCalls

• tandemRoutingType

• restrictions

• defaultNPA

• localTermination

• tandemDefaultRoutingType

• denyAniList

• direction

• isdnMsgTrace

• flowThroughProvisioning

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• facilities

See “Adding Facilities to an Interface Group” on page 272, and See “Removing Facilities from an Interface Group” on page 272.

create InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 Richardson AFC span-0-2 1 span-1-3 2 1modify InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 sendOAssistCalls FALSEquery InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 timersdestroy InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1

Page 271: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 263990-1012-001

Interface Group Timers

An Interface Group contains the following timers:

Timer Description

GuardTime The time after the release of a circuit to ensure that a minimum time interval is used between calls. Network side timer.

Default: 1,200 ms

ChargeDelay The amount of time a terminating trunk waits before generating answer supervision toward the originator. Network side timer.

Default: 0

TimedDisconnectTime The amount of time a called party can go back onHook and remain onHook before switch declares disconnect. Also called calling party control, which allows a subscriber to answer a call and put the telephone onHook for a short period of time.

Range: 2,000 - 10,000 ms

Default: 5,000

ForwardDisconnectTime The amount of time the calling party can go back onHook and remain onHook before the switch declares disconnect.

Range: 150 - 500 ms

Default: 200

RingCadenceOnTime The period that a telephone rings.

Default: 2,000

RingCadenceOffTime The period between rings.

Default: 4,000 ms

MinFlashHookTime Sets the lower boundary for a flash hook of which a shorter flash hook is ignored. Flash hook is the button that hangs up the telephone that is also called a switch hook. For example, Call Waiting or Three-Way Calling requires using flash hook.

Default: 300 ms

FlashInterval Sets the limit for a flash hook. The maximum time for a flash hook is the MinFlashHookTime plus the FlashInterval. (TimedDisconnectTime).

Default: 900 ms

MinWinkDuration MinWinkDuration is the minimum duration which will qualify a brief incoming off hook signal as a wink.

Default: 100 ms

Page 272: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

264 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

MaxWinkDuration

NOTE: A wink is used to signal acknowledg-ment of a facility seizure and readiness to accept digits.

MaxWinkDuration is the maximum duration which will be allowed when attempting to qualify an incoming off hook signal as a wink. If this duration is exceeded, the off hook will be declared as a sustained off hook. This may be interpreted by an E&M protocol as either an origination or an answer signal.

Default: 350 ms

WinkDuration WinkDuration is the duration of a wink signal that the T7000 will transmit outbound for E&M protocols

Default: 200 ms

FlashDuration Limit for the duration that the switch sends a flash signal.

Default: 900 ms

OffHookDigMax The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Changing this T1 driver timer could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see “options” on page 543.

Default: 70 ms

OffHookDigMin The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Changing this T1 driver timer could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see “options” on page 543.

Default: 0 ms.

OnHookDigMax The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Changing this T1 driver timer could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see “options” on page 543.

Default: 70 ms

OnHookDigMin The timer that allows the T1 driver to detect dial pulse, for rotary dialing. Changing this T1 driver timer could adversely effect subscribers with dial pulse, see “options” on page 543.

Default: 0 ms.

TerminatorDisconnectDelay The time for the terminating telephone to receive dial tone after the originating telephone hangs up.

Range: 1,500 - 10,000 ms

Default: 2,000 ms

LCFO_Duration This is the duration of the Loop Current Feed Open (LCFO) signal. This forward disconnect signaling is required by some answering machines and voice mail systems to be longer than normal.

Range: 150 - 7,500 ms

Default: 700 ms

Timer Description

Page 273: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 265990-1012-001

T301 The time between receiving an ALERT message and receiving a CONNECT message. Clears the call when the timer expires, not used with a network supervision call control. Network side timer.

Default: 180,000 ms

T303 The time between sending SETUP and receiving a CONNECT from the IDT.

Sends a SETUP message when the timer expires. Network side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

T305 The time between sending a disconnect without progress indicator and receiving the same or a REL (release) message. The network sends a REL message when the timer expires. Clears the call when a REL COMPLETE message is received.

Network side timer.

Default: 30,000 ms

T306 Started instead of T305 when the toneOption is set in the PRI group (see “toneOption” on page 296). In this case, the switch will to play the tone or announcement (whatever is appropriate) instead of the device handling that itself. Network side timer.

Default: 30,000 ms

T307 The time between sending a SUSPEND ACK message and sending a RES (resume) ACK message. Clears the network connection when the timer expires. Network side timer.

Default: 180,000 ms

T308 The time between sending and receiving a REL message. Resends a REL message and resets when the timer expires.

Network side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

T309 The time between data link disconnection and data link reconnection. The network channel clears and the B channel releases when the timer expires. Network side timer.

Default: 90,000 ms

Timer Description

Page 274: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

266 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

T310 The time between receipt of Call Proceeding and the next message (Alert, Connect, or Disconnect) is received. Network side timer.

Default: 10,000 ms

NOTE: The switch supports this timer, but IDTs do not send Call Proceeding.

T313 The time between sending a RESUME request and receiving a RESUME ACK message. Sends a DISC (disconnect) messages when the timer expires.

User side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

T316 The time between sending a RESTART message and receiving a RESTART ACK message. RESTART message may be sent several times after the timer expires. Network and user side timer.

Default: 30,000 ms

T317 The time between receiving a RESTART message and the internal clearing of call reference. The switch sends a maintenance notification when the timer expires. Set at less than the value of T316. Network and user side timer.

Default 20,000 ms

T318 The time between sending a RESUME request and receiving a RESUME ACK or RESUME REJ (reject) message. The switch sends a release message when the timer expires. User side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

T319 The time between sending a SUSPEND message and receiving a SUSPEND ACK or SUSP (suspend) REJ message. The device enters an active state when the timer expires. User side timer.

Default: 4,000 m

T321 The time between a D-channel failure and receiving a response to a layer 3 message. The switch sends a DL-ESTABLISHMENT message request on both channels when the timer expires. Network and user side timer.

Default: 40,000 ms

T322 The time between sending a STATUS ENQ message and receiving a STATUS DISC, REL, or REL COMPLETE message. Sends STATUS ENQ when the timer expires. Network and user side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

Timer Description

Page 275: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 267990-1012-001

RotaryDialingGuardTimer Allows for pulse dialing by ignoring all messages until the timer times out. This rejects messages from RDTs that send immediate off-hook and keeps the switch from interpreting the off-hook as a digit.

Default 400 ms

EOCMessageDelay The amount of delay between messages sent over the EOC. Do not set this timer to less than 500 ms. Any value less could lead to system instability.

Default: 500 ms

SignalBitAuditDelay The delay between the time the switch receives "Connect Ack" and the time it checks for offhook or onhook on the signaling bits on the trunk. The delay is needed to account for timing sensitivities in the driver.

Range: 500 - 2,000 ms

Default: 700 ms

CRVReserveTime The amount of time between reserving a CRV and assigning a trunk to that CRV. If this timer expires before the CRV has a trunk assigned, the CRV is removed from the reserved state and made available.

Range: 1,000 - 20,000 ms

Default: 10,000 ms

hdlcErrorInterval

TipThe flexibility of being able to set both the interval and the water marks let you react to either error spikes (a burst of errors in a short period of time) or a "trickle" of errors over a longer period of time.

The Error Interval is used with the "high" and "low" water marks to determine how tolerant the switch will be with respect to detected errors. See “hdlcErrorLowWaterMark” on page 302 and “hdlcErrorHighWaterMark” on page 303. The switch counts errors on the link for the duration of the hdlcErrorInterval. If the low water mark is "10", and 10 errors occur during the 10 second interval, the switch issues a warning. If the high water mark is reached during the interval, the switch takes the link down. After the interval expires, the timer and the error counts are reset and the switch starts counting again from zero.

Range: 1,000 60,000 ms

Default: 10,000 ms

Timer Description

Page 276: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

268 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 timers hdlcErrorInterval 30000

sendResponseTime The number of milliseconds the bearer circuit waits after sending a circuit status update for an acknowledgement from the signaling circuit. If no acknowledgement is received, the timer expires and the status is retransmitted.

Range: 1,000 60,000 ms

Default: 5,000 ms

C A U T I O N

Contact Taqua TAC Support before changing this timer.

Timer Description

Page 277: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 269990-1012-001

Interface Group Options

A Interface Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a GR-303 Interface Group.

Interface Group Options have the following attributes:

Option Name Values

statusEnqOption Sends a Status Enquiry or a Status message if an unrecognized or unexpected message is received. Values are:

• ON — Send a Status Enquiry message

• OFF — Send a Status message

noFlowThroughAutoLine-Provision

• NOT_ALLOWED — the RDT supports flow through provisioning or it automatically reports line provisioning to the switch. When you add a subscriber to the switch with a CRV, the subscriber does not automatically go in service. Instead, the switch sends an Analog Line Termination query to sync RDT Line status.

• ALLOWED — the RDT does not support flow through provisioning and it does not automatically report the line provisioning to the switch. When you add a subscriber to the switch with a CRV, the switch sets the Analog Line Termination to “provisioned” queries the RDT for the line's service state (inservice or out-of-service).

discardSETUP • OFF — to accept all SETUP messages from the RDT.

• CRV_NOT_PROVISIONED — to discard all SETUP messages from the RDT if the CRV line state is not provisioned.

• CRV_NO_SUBSCRIBER — to discard all SETUP messages from the RDT if the CRV line state is not provisioned or there is no subscriber

• CRV_NOT_INSERVICE — to discard all SETUP messages from the RDT if the CRV line state is not provisioned or there is no subscriber or the CRV is Out Of Service

hdlcErrorLowWaterMark The number of errors that can occur on the link during the hdlc Error Interval before the switch issues an hdlcWarning event. This is for informational purposes only. No action is taken by the system, although a tech should probably investigate the cause of the alarm

If the value is zero, the switch will never issue a warning, no matter how many errors occur on the link. See “hdlcErrorInterval” on page 295.

Default: 5

Page 278: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

270 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 options reoriginateWithoutRelease ON

hdlcErrorHighWaterMark The number of errors that can occur on the link during the hdlc Error Interval before the switch takes the link out of service. Once the errors reach the high water mark, the link is immediately removed from service. It will not come back into service until someone acknowledges (clears) the alarm - which requires manual intervention.

If the value is zero, the switch will never take the link out of service, no matter how many errors occur on the link. See “hdlcErrorInterval” on page 295.

Default: 0

NOTE: For backward compatibility, the default value (zero) disables this feature. Values greater than zero enable the feature.

Also note, the switch does not mind if the High Water Mark is actually lower than the Low Water Mark (in this case, the warning is never issued, but the alarm is issued and the link is taken out of service when the number of errors exceeds the High Water Mark).

reoriginateWithoutRelease ON — when the terminator leaves the phone off hook (after the originator hangs up), the line will remain connected to the original trunk as it proceeds with call reorigination (playing dial tone, etc). If no digits are entered, and the phone is left off hook long enough, the line will enter the Permanent Signal state, and the T7000 sends a Disconnect with Cause Code = 27.

OFF — send Disconnect with Normal Clearing after the timer expires.

Page 279: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 271990-1012-001

Interface Group Restrictions

Interface Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. An Interface Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section

PRI Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes

The Interface Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

• 1 — turns the restriction on

• 0 — turns the restriction off.

modify InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 restrictions NO_DA 1modify InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 restrictions OS_ONLY 0

Attribute Description

NO_OSSTATION Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls.

NO_OSDIALED Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls.

NO_DA Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group.

OS_ONLY Restrict all calls except operator services calls.

Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List.

DA_ONLY Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls.

Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List

NO_INTRALATA Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2).

NO_INTERLATA Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1).

NO_OS_INTRALATA Restrict OS intraLATA calls.

NO_OS_INTERLATA Restrict OS interLATA calls.

NO_DA_INTRALATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2).

NO_DA_INTERLATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1).

NO_INTERNATIONAL Restrict international calls.

NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL Restrict OS international calls.

Page 280: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

272 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding Facilities to an Interface GroupinsertInto InterfaceGroup <key> facilities <subkey> RdtLogicalSpan <oid> <cic>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a span to a Interface Group’s facilities list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds Span 1 in Card 2 as Logical Span number 3 to Interface Group AFCUMC1:

insertInto InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 facilities 3 RdtLogicalSpan Span-1-2-27 3

Removing Facilities from an Interface GroupdeleteFrom InterfaceGroup <key> facilities <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a span from an Interface Group’s facilities list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

NOTE: You must first lock the Span before you can remove it from the Interface Group.

The following example locks Span 1 on the local card and then removes it from PRI Trunk Group SWB1:

lock Span-1-2-27deleteFrom InterfaceGroup AFCUMC1 facilities 3

Syntax Description

<key> Interface Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

Range: 1 - 28

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<oid> This attribute specifies which span you want to add to the Interface Group.

<logicalSpanNumber>

This attribute specifies the Logical Span Number of the inserted Span.

Syntax Description

<key> Interface Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

Page 281: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 273990-1012-001

Hunt Groups

The following types of hunts are associated with a multi-line hunt group:

1. Regular hunting — this type of hunt begins with the terminal dialed and ends with the last terminal in the hunt group

2. Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) — this is the default type of hunt group3. Circular hunting — this type of hunt beings with the terminal following the

most-recently-used terminal and ends with the terminal immediately preceding the starting terminal. Any start hunt information is ignored, since it chooses the start hunt point based on the last terminal dialed.

NOTE: Use the Generic CLI modify command to change the type of hunt used, see “selectionMethod” on page 274.

To create a hunt group, follow this procedure:

Step Action

1 Create or select a subscriber for the pilotLDN. see “Subscribers” on page 530 Make sure the subscriber has a facility. The subscriber chosen for the PilotLDN cannot have any of the following services:

• Call Waiting Caller ID

• Hot Line

• Revertive Call

• Warm Line

In addition, the pilotLDN subscriber can not be an Enhanced Voice Services subscriber.

2 Create the Hunt Group using the subscriber from step 1 as the pilotLDN. You may also specify an optional overflowDN at this time. This is usually the DN of a Voice Mail System. Note that the subscriber chosen for the overflowDN can not have the Revertive Call service, or be an Enhanced Voice Services subscriber.

See “Creating a Hunt Group” on page 279.

3 Add the pilotLDN facility to the Hunt Group. See “Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group” on page 281.This subscriber’s facility is Terminal 0, or the first terminal.

4 Add additional facilities to the Hunt Group. See “Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group” on page 281.

Page 282: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

274 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

A Hunt Group has the following attributes:

attribute value

key hunt group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (“;”), nor can it consist of either the word “ALL” or the word “all”.

facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the Hunt Group. See “Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group” on page 281, and “Removing Facilities from a Hunt Group” on page 283.

timers The timers for this Hunt Group. Hunt Groups use CAS Trunk Group Timers, see “CAS Trunk Group Timers” on page 244.

options The options for this trunk group. Hunt Groups use CAS Trunk Group options. See “CAS Trunk Group Options” on page 247.

selectionMethod • REGULAR_HUNT— This type of hunt begins with the terminal dialed and ends with the last terminal in the hunt group.

• CIRCULAR_HUNT— This type of hunt begins with the terminal dialed and ends with the terminal immediately preceding the starting terminal.

• UNIFORM_CALL_DISTRIBUTION_HUNT— This type of hunt beings with the terminal following the most recently-used terminal and ends with the terminal immediately preceding the starting terminal. Any start hunt information is ignored, since it chooses the start hunt point based on the last terminal dialed.

sendOAssistCalls • TRUE — allow operator assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow operator assisted calls

sendDAssistCalls • TRUE — allow directory assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow directory assisted calls

Page 283: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 275990-1012-001

tandemRoutingType Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group.

For a discussion of this attribute, see “The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute” on page 234.

• NO_ROUTING — Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscriber’s carrier, or the LNP code

• CARRIER_ROUTING (default) — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists

• TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists

• ANI_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

restrictions The restrictions on this Hunt Group. See “Hunt Group Restrictions” on page 280.

localTermination This attribute is not meaningful for Hunt Groups. Please ignore it.

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned:

• USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) — Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list.

• USE_NANP_CARRIER — Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list.

• USE_CARRIER_ONLY — Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

• USE_NANP_ONLY — Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs).

denyAniList An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see “Screen Lists” on page 415, and “Prefixes” on page 403.

direction The Hunt Group direction attribute is inherited from Trunk Groups, where it is used to set up pairs of incoming an outgoing trunk groups. For a Hunt Group, however, direction should always be set to BI_DIRECTIONAL.

attribute value

Page 284: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

276 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

pilotLDN A pilot listed directory number (LDN) is a number assigned to the first line of a group of lines that forms the multi-line hunt group. The pilotLDN is the number dialed to reach the group. There must be at least one pilotLDN per hunt group, but there can be multiple pilotLDNs per multi-line group for nested sets.

Note: this field is read-only.

overflowDN Optional, the number to which the call routes if all terminals in a hunt group are busy. If no number is specified, then all terminals busy results in the busy tone. The overflow DN of one hunt group can be the pilotLDN of another hunt group.

associatedDNs Used to associate an optional start hunt number with a terminal in the Hunt Group. One or more additional start hunt numbers may be added to a hunt group. Once additional start hunt numbers are added to the hunt group, either a start hunt number or the pilotLDN can be dialed to start the hunt.

Used only for regular or circular hunt type Hunt Groups. Hunt groups using the UCD hunt type do not require start hunt points.

NOTE: After adding a Start Hunt number, the switch adds a route list using the associatedDN and adds the hunt group as the route.

trunkProtocol One of the following:

FXO — See “FXO” on page 746.

trunkSignalingType • LOOPSTART— A supervisory signal from a telephone or PBX that completes the signaling loop path

• GROUNDSTART— A method of analog signaling from a terminal or subscriber loop to a switch, where one side of a cable pair is temporarily grounded

memberOrigination The memberOrigination allows a terminal without a subscriber associated with it to originate calls. Values are

• TRUE — to allow terminals without a subscriber associated to them to originate calls. The terminal uses the pilotLDN as the ANI.

• FALSE — to restrict terminals without a subscriber associated to them from making calls.

This attribute has a complex relationship with the gr303UsePilotND and sendPilotDNasANI attributes. See “ANI Sent and Services Used” on page 278.

attribute value

Page 285: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 277990-1012-001

gr303UsePilotDN This attribute allows GR-303 members to originate calls using the Pilot DN instead of their own. This does not apply to any kind of transfer, forward, etc. This attribute has a complex relationship with the memberOrigination ad sendPilotDNasANI attributes. See “ANI Sent and Services Used” on page 278.

• TRUE — to allow GR-303 members to originate using the pilot ANI instead of their own if member origination is enabled. This does not apply to any kind of transfer, forward, etc.

• FALSE (default) — to restrict GR-303 members from using the pilot ANI

sendPilotDNasANI This attribute sends the Pilot DN as the ANI when a member of a Hunt Group makes a call. This attribute has a complex relationship with the memberOrigination and gr303UsePilotDN attributes. See “ANI Sent and Services Used” on page 278.

• TRUE — members send the Pilot DN as ANI.

• FALSE (default) — members do not send the Pilot DN as ANI.

attribute value

Page 286: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

278 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

ANI Sent and Services Used

Members of a Hunt Group who do not have Subscriber records of their own use the services of the Pilot DN. However, things become complicated when the Hunt Group members are also subscribers, and are provisioned with their own services.

The following table summarizes the feature interaction between the memberOrigination, gr303UsePilotDN and sendPilotDNasANI attributes. Note that GR-303 members may receive special treatment.

AttributesMember Has Subscriber

Member Has No Subscriber

sendPilotDNasANI

gr303UsePilotDN

member-Origination

ANI Sent Services ANI Sent Services

FALSE FALSE FALSE member member can not make calls

FALSE FALSE TRUE member member pilot pilot

FALSE TRUE FALSE member member can not make calls

FALSE TRUE TRUE

GR303: pilot,

others: member

GR303: pilot,

others: member

pilot pilot

TRUE FALSE FALSE pilot member can not make calls

TRUE FALSE TRUE pilot member pilot pilot

TRUE TRUE FALSE pilot

GR303: pilot,

others: member

can not make calls

TRUE TRUE TRUE pilot

GR303: pilot,

others: member

pilot pilot

Page 287: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 279990-1012-001

Creating a Hunt Group

The Generic CLI is used for all Hunt Group commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• pilotLDN

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• overflowDN

create HuntGroup WeekdayOffice 9724801111

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• timers

• options

• selectionMethod

• sendOAssistCalls

• sendDAssistCalls

• restrictions

• localTermination

• tandemDefaultRoutingType

• denyAniList

• direction

• overflowDN

• trunkProtocol

• trunkSignalingType

• memberOrigination

• gr303UsePilotDN

• sendPilotDNasANI

modify HuntGroup WeekdayOffice timers ChargeDelay 4000modify HuntGroup WeekdayOffice overflowDN 9734800010

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• facilities

• associatedDNs

See “Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group” on page 281, “Removing Facilities from a Hunt Group” on page 283, “Adding associatedDNs to a Hunt Group” on page 284, and “Removing associatedDNs from a Hunt Group” on page 285

Page 288: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

280 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Hunt Group Restrictions

Hunt Group Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. A Hunt Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section

Hunt Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes

The Hunt Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

• 1 — turns the restriction on

• 0 — turns the restriction off.

modify HuntGroup HG12 restrictions NO_DA 1modify HuntGroup HG12 restrictions OS_ONLY 0

Attribute Description

NO_OSSTATION Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls.

NO_OSDIALED Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls.

NO_DA Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group.

OS_ONLY Restrict all calls except operator services calls.

Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List.

DA_ONLY Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls.

Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List

NO_INTRALATA Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2).

NO_INTERLATA Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1).

NO_OS_INTRALATA Restrict OS intraLATA calls.

NO_OS_INTERLATA Restrict OS interLATA calls.

NO_DA_INTRALATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2).

NO_DA_INTERLATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1).

NO_INTERNATIONAL Restrict international calls.

NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL

Restrict OS international calls.

Page 289: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 281990-1012-001

Adding Facilities to a Hunt GroupinsertInto HuntGroup <key> facilities <subkey> <facilityType> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a facility to a Hunt Group’s facilities list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Add the pilotLDN's facility to the Hunt Group as the first facility in the Hunt Group. This subscriber’s facility is Terminal 0, or the first terminal. See “insertInto” on page 6.

The following command adds a pilot DN facility to a Hunt Group:

insertInto HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities 1 TDMFacility Line-0-1-27

The following example adds additional facilities to a Hunt Group. The query command verifies the ordering of the facilities in the Hunt Group.

NOTE: When adding additional facilities into the Hunt Group, make sure the subkey is greater than 1, as the Pilot DN must be the 1st facility in the Hunt Group!

insertInto HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities 2 TDMFacility Line-2-1-27insertInto HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities 3 TDMFacility Line-3-1-27

Syntax Description

<key> Hunt Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

TipYou can add a facility to the front of the list by entering a "1" here, but only do so when entering the Pilot DN. Use a -1 to add a facility to the end of the list.

<facilityType> Valid values are:

• TDMFacility

• GR303Facility

• MGCPFacility

• SIPFacility.

NOTE: Hunt Groups do not support SIP Access Subscribers.

<subvalue> This attribute specifies which facility you want to add to the Trunk Group.

Page 290: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

282 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

query HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities

<48fe374>facilities.................<48f9890>

<48f9890> HGFacilityList collection...List (3 items) -> (1) <4906d40> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-0-1-27

(2) <4907f60> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-2-1-27

(3) <4903030> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-3-1-27

Page 291: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 283990-1012-001

Removing Facilities from a Hunt GroupdeleteFrom HuntGroup <key> facilities <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a facility from a Hunt Group’s facilities list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

NOTE: You must first lock the facility before you can remove it from the Hunt Group.

This example builds on the configuration set up in Adding Facilities to a Hunt Group. The following example locks Line-3-1-27 on the local card and then removes it from Hunt Group WeekdayOffice. The query command verifies that the desired facility was removed from the Hunt Group.

lock Line-3-1-27

deleteFrom HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities 3

query HuntGroup WeekdayOffice facilities

<48fe374>facilities.................<48f9890>

<48f9890> HGFacilityList collection...List (2 items) -> (1) <4906d40> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-0-1-27

(2) <4907f60> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-2-1-27

Syntax Description

<key> CAS Trunk Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

Page 292: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

284 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding associatedDNs to a Hunt GroupinsertInto HuntGroup <key> associatedDNs <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add an associated DN to a Hunt Group’s associatedDNs dictionary. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

NOTE: After adding a Start Hunt number, the switch adds a route list using the associated DN and adds the hunt group as the route.

The following command adds a new associated DN to a Hunt Group, and associates it with terminal 2. The query command verifies the ordering of the associated DNs in the Hunt Group. Note that the switch automatically created a new route to the associated DN.

insertInto HuntGroup WeekdayOffice associatedDNs 9724801000 2

****** Event Notification ******(eventName): Configuration (senderID): <49035d0> (objectID): "Src S:0 C:0 Pid:3f" (timestamp): 47e1a4dd (refdate): 7d8313 (reftime): f341a (rawreftime): 47e1992a (reserved): 0 (text): "MGR: tNANPRoutingDbMgr CREATED: WeekdayOffice_startHunt_2_9724801000"

query HuntGroup WeekdayOffice associatedDNs

<490db90>associatedDNs...............<490f7d0>

<490f7d0> StartHuntDict collection...Dictionary (2 items) -> StringKey: 9724800000 IntegerValue: 1 (1) StringKey: 9724801000 IntegerValue: 2 (2)

Syntax Description

<key> Hunt Group name

<subkey> This attribute is the DN that you wish to add to the Hunt Group. The DN must not exist.

<subvalue> This is the terminal number which you wish to assign the DN to. When the DN is dialed, hunting will commence from this terminal.

Page 293: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 285990-1012-001

Removing associatedDNs from a Hunt GroupdeleteFrom HuntGroup <key> associatedDNs <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove an associated DN from a Hunt Group’s facilities dictionary. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

NOTE: After deleting a Start Hunt number, the switch removes the route list using the associated DN.

This example builds on the configuration set up in Adding associatedDNs to a Hunt Group. The following command removes associated DN 9724801000 from Hunt Group WeekdayOffice. The query command verifies that the desired associated DN was removed from the Hunt Group.

deleteFrom HuntGroup WeekdayOffice associatedDNs 9724801000

****** Event Notification ******(eventName): Configuration (senderID): <490e100> (objectID): "Src S:0 C:0 Pid:3f" (timestamp): 47e19f0a (refdate): 7d8313 (reftime): f341a (rawreftime): 47e1992a (reserved): 0 (text): "MGR: tNANPRoutingDbMgr DELETED: WeekdayOffice_startHunt_2_9724801000"

query HuntGroup WeekdayOffice associatedDNs

<490db90>associatedDNs...............<490f7d0>

<490f7d0> StartHuntDict collection...Dictionary (1 items) -> StringKey: 9724800000 IntegerValue: 1 (1)

Syntax Description

<key> Hunt Group name

<subkey> This is the DN in the associatedDNs dictionary that you want to delete.

Page 294: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

286 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

PRI Trunk Groups

See the T7000 Provisioning Guide for an in-depth discussion of PRI Trunk Groups.

ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) can transmit up to 1.544 megabytes per second of data or up to 24 telephone calls at one time.

ISDN PRI 23B+D consists of:

• 23 Bearer (B) channels available to transfer information, at 64 kilobytes per second each.

• One Data (D) channel used for signaling to control the status of a connection, at 64 kilobytes per second.

NOTE: PRI trunk groups can have a total of 20 spans

A PRI Trunk Group has the following attributes.

Attribute Description

key trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (“;”), nor can it consist of either the word “ALL” or the word “all”

facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See “Adding Facilities to a PRI Trunk Group” on page 306, and “Removing Facilities from a PRI Trunk Group” on page 306.

timers The timers for this trunk group. See “PRI Trunk Group Timers” on page 293.

options The options for this trunk group. See “PRI Trunk Group Options” on page 296.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE — always select the first trunk available

• ROUND_ROBIN (default) — sequentially rotate the use of trunks

sendOAssistCalls • TRUE — allow operator assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow operator assisted calls

sendDAssistCalls • TRUE — allow directory assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow directory assisted calls

Page 295: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 287990-1012-001

tandemRoutingType Leave this attribute set to the default value of NO_ROUTING. ISDN PRI routes calls based on either the calling number or default DN subscriber record. Refer to “screenDN” on page 300 to determine which subscriber record is used.

defaultDN optional default directory number. Used when the trunk group connects to a PBX that needs to have default Primary IntraLATA or InterLATA Carrier (PIC).

Make sure you add a default subscriber with this number to set the specific IntraLATA or InterLATA Carrier to bill the number correctly, as well as to allow for allowed/denied lists and an NANP route list for the range of DNs that the PBX handles.

NOTE: If assigned, the defaultDN becomes the default ANI for 911 calls made without a 10 digit ANI. See “E911DefaultANI” on page 314

restrictions The restrictions on this trunk group. See “PRI Trunk Group Restrictions” on page 305.

defaultNPA The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

Length: 3

replaceDestinationDigits • TRUE — allow the use of replacement destination digits (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See “Subscribers” on page 530, “Destination Digit Replacement” on page 346, and “replacementMode” on page 405

• FALSE — do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a non-T7000 LRN associated with it

Attribute Description

Page 296: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

288 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

replaceCarrier This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See “Prefixes” on page 403, “replacementMode” on page 405, and “Carriers” on page 196.

• FALSE — do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC.

replaceAniDigits This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See “Subscribers” on page 530.

• FALSE — do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits • • TRUE — allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,See “Subscribers” on page 530.

• • FALSE — do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility.

• • REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See “FTRS” on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

Attribute Description

Page 297: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 289990-1012-001

replaceCSI This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See “Subscribers” on page 530

• FALSE — do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

localTermination • ALLOW (default) — allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch.

• NOT_ALLOWED — only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned:

• USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) — Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list.

• USE_NANP_CARRIER — Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list.

• USE_CARRIER_ONLY — Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

• USE_NANP_ONLY — Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions • The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs).

denyAniList An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked. See “Prefixes” on page 403, and “Prefixes” on page 403

Attribute Description

Page 298: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

290 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

direction • ONE_WAY_IN — One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

• ONE_WAY_OUT — One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

• BI_DIRECTIONAL — Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

tandemCustomReplacement Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls.

• NO (default) — no special outpulsing is performed.

• YES — outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See “7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing” on page 409.

dChannelOIDprimary object identifier of the OOS trunk acting as the data channel for the PRI trunk group

side switch role:

• USER — If the PRI interface is a PBX or other configuration that receives PRI service.

• NET — If the switch is positioned in the network as a Class 5 End Office or other configuration that provides PRI service.

primaryLogicalSpan optional logical identifier of the D-channel; for example, 1

dChannelOIDSecondary optional object identifier of the trunk acting as the data channel backup for the PRI trunk group

secondaryLogicalSpan optional logical identifier of the D-channel backup; for example, 2

Attribute Description

Page 299: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 291990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all PRI Trunk Group commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• dChannelOIDPrimary

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• side

• primaryLogicalSpan

• dChannelOIDSecondary

• secondaryLogicalSpan

• terminalEndpointId

isdnMsgTrace This debug attribute controls how the switch shows ISDN Call Establishment, Call Clearing, Maintenance and Miscellaneous messages. The messages are displayed when running a CLI session on the card that has the PRI span.

Values are:

• MSG_TRACE_NONE (default) — The message trace for this trunk group is off.

• MSG_ONLY— Shows the ISDN messages

• MSG_WITH_INBOUND_DUMP— Shows ISDN messages and a dump of inbound IEs.

• MSG_WITH_OUTBOUND_DUMP— Shows ISDN messages and a dump of outbound IEs.

• MSG_WITH_BOTH_DUMP— Shows ISDN messages and a dump of both inbound and outbound IEs.

C A U T I O N

Contact Taqua TAC Support before using this option.

terminalEndpointID optional Terminal Endpoint Identifier.

Range: 0 - 63, default: 0

E911DefaultANI This attribute is used to specify a 10 digit ANI when a 911 call is made and ANI does not contain a 10 digit number, and a defaultDN is not assigned to the Trunk Group.

Attribute Description

Page 300: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

292 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• timers

• options

• selectionMethod

• sendOAssistCalls

• sendDAssistCalls

• tandemRoutingType

• defaultDN

• restrictions

• defaultNPA

• replaceDestinationDigits

• replaceCarrier

• replaceAniDigits

• replaceInfoDigits

• ftrsProfile

• replaceCSI

• localTermination

• tandemDefaultRoutingType

• denyAniList

• direction

• isdnMsgTrace

• terminalEndpointId

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• facilities

See “Adding Facilities to a PRI Trunk Group” on page 306, and “Removing Facilities from a PRI Trunk Group” on page 306.

create PRITrunkGroup SWB1 Trunk-23-1-27 modify PRITrunkGroup SWB1 sendOAssistCalls FALSEquery PRITrunkGroup SWB1 timersdestroy PRITrunkGroup SWB1

Page 301: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 293990-1012-001

PRI Trunk Group Timers

A PRI Trunk Group Timer object contains the timers that control the behavior of a PRI Trunk Group. The PRI timers’ default settings meet the industry standard.

PRI Trunk Group Timers have the following attributes

Timer Description

GuardTime The time after the release of a circuit to ensure that a minimum time interval is used between calls.

Network side timer.

Range: 700 - 1,000 ms

ChargeDelay The amount of time a terminating trunk waits before generating answer supervision toward the originator.

Network side timer.

Range: 2,000 - 5,000 ms

T301 The time between receiving an ALERT message and receiving a CONNECT message. Clears the call when the timer expires, not used with a network supervision call control.

Network side timer.

Minimum of 180,000 ms

T303 The time between sending a SETUP message and receiving an ALERT, CONNECT, CALL PROC (processing), or SETUP ACK (acknowledge) message. Sends a SETUP message when the timer expires.

Network side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

T305 The time between sending a disconnect without progress indicator and receiving the same or a REL (release) message. The network sends a REL message when the timer expires. Clears the call when a REL COMPLETE message is received.

Network side timer.

Default: 30,000 ms

T306 The time between sending a disconnect with progress indicator and receiving the same or a REL message. The tone stops and sends a REL message when the timer expires.

Network side timer.

Default: 30,000 ms

T307 The time between sending a SUSPEND ACK message and sending a RES (resume) ACK message. Clears the network connection when the timer expires.

Network side timer.

Default: 180,000 ms

Page 302: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

294 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

T308 The time between sending and receiving a REL message. Resends a REL message and resets when the timer expires.

Network side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

T309 The time between data link disconnection and data link reconnection. The network channel clears and the B channel releases when the timer expires.

Network side timer.

Default: 90,000 ms

T310 The time between data link disconnection and data link reconnection. The call clears when the timer expires.

Network side timer.

Default: 10,000 ms

T313 The time between sending a RESUME request and receiving a RESUME ACK message. Sends a DISC (disconnect) messages when the timer expires.

User side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

T316 The time between sending a RESTART message and receiving a RESTART ACK message. RESTART message may be sent several times after the timer expires.

Network and user side timer.

Default: 30,000 ms

T317 The time between receiving a RESTART message and the internal clearing of call reference. Sends a maintenance notification when the timer expires. Set at less than the value of T316.

Network and user side timer.

Default: 20,000 ms

T318 The time between sending a RESUME request and receiving a RESUME ACK or RESUME REJ (reject) message. Sends a release message when the timer expires.

User side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

T319 The time between sending a SUSPEND message and receiving a SUSPEND ACK or SUSP (suspend) REJ message. The device enters an active state when the timer expires.

User side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

Timer Description

Page 303: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 295990-1012-001

modify PRITrunkGroup SWB1 timers hdlcErrorInterval 30000

T321 The time between a D-channel failure and receiving a response to a layer 3 message. Sends a DL-ESTABLISHMENT message request on both channels when the timer expires.

Network and user side timer.

Default: 40,000 ms

T322 The time between sending a STATUS ENQ message and receiving a STATUS DISC, REL, or REL COMPLETE message. Sends STATUS ENQ when the timer expires.

Network and user side timer.

Default: 4,000 ms

T3M1 The time between sending a SERVICE message and receiving a SERVICE ACKNOWLEDGE message. The SERVICE status of the B-Channels should be unchanged as a result of a temporary D-Channel failure. The CPE should use a SERVICE message to notify the Network of the state change once the D-Channel comes back into service.

For AT&T B-Channel availability procedure only.

Default: 120,000 ms

hdlcErrorInterval

TipThe flexibility of being able to set both the interval and the water marks let you react to either error spikes (a burst of errors in a short period of time) or a "trickle" of errors over a longer period of time.

The Error Interval is used with the "high" and "low" water marks to determine how tolerant the switch will be with respect to detected errors. See “hdlcErrorLowWaterMark” on page 302 and “hdlcErrorHighWaterMark” on page 303.

The switch counts errors on the link for the duration of the hdlcErrorInterval. If the low water mark is "10", and 10 errors occur during the 10 second interval, the switch issues a warning.

If the high water mark is reached during the interval, the switch takes the link down.

After the interval expires, the timer and the error counts are reset and the switch starts counting again from zero.

Range: 10,000 - 60,000 milliseconds

Default: 10,000

Timer Description

Page 304: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

296 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

PRI Trunk Group Options

A PRI Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a PRI Trunk Group.

PRI Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:

Option Name Values

releaseOption Sends a RELEASE COMPLETE or RELEASE with Cause Value 81 if an unrecognized, unexpected, or status message is received. Values are:

• Off

• On

responseToStatusEnquiry Controls what type of message to send as a response when a Status Enquiry message is received, Values are:

• 0 — Send a Status message

• 1 — Send a Release Complete message

rejectOption Sets the call reject option to refuse the call rejected calls by sending a RELEASE COMPLETE message with cause No. 21, call rejected, and the user returns to the Null state. Values are:

• Off

• On

statusEnqOption Sends a Status Enquiry or a Status message if an unrecognized or unexpected message is received. Values are:

• Send a Status Enquiry message

• Send a Status message

toneOption Provides a tone for the network side when there is a disconnect message. Values are:

• Off

• On

callingNameDisplayOption • NO — does not display the calling name of the caller

• DISPLAY_IE —use this value to display calling name on Nortel PBXs

• FACILITY_IE — use this value to display calling name on Lucent PBXs or PBXs that are Nation ISDN standard PBXs. This is the Bellcore standard.

transferSubadressAllow-Option

Allows the transfer of a subaddress to another PRI subscriber. Values are:

• Off

• On

Page 305: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 297990-1012-001

autoRestartOnBoot Automatically sends a RESTART message after booting the D-channel. A restart message drops all calls on the B-channels. Values are:

• Off

• On

autoRestartOnLinkBounce Automatically sends a RESTART message when a link bounces. A restart message drops all calls on the B-channels. Values are:

• Off

• On

allowNX64 Allows the trunk group to originate NX64 calls, a multirate call that uses multiple B channels. Currently the switch supports 2X64. Values are:

• Off

• On

contiguousNX6 Uses contiguous B-channels for NX64 calls. Values are:

• Off

• On

networkServices Set BLV/BLI only on trunk groups coming from an operator station. You need one trunk group for each service.

Allow for one of the following operator services: Values are:

• BLV —Busy Line Verification allows an external operator to verify if a subscriber line is busy. An operator calling over a BLV trunk receives a busy signal if the line is busy or a ring-back if the line is idle.

• BLI —Busy Line Interrupt allows an external operator to interrupt a busy line. An operator calling over a BLI trunk interrupts the busy subscriber who can either drop the existing conversation and accept the operator call or continue with the existing conversation.

sendCarrierId Sends the CAC in the call set up messaging. This option allows the switch to send the CAC to another switch in the network and only works when the trunk group is set to USER_SIDE. The CAC is sent in the optional Translation Network Selection information element. Values are:

• NO

• YES — includes all call types

• SOME_CALL_TYPES — includes: INTER_LATA, OA_INTER_LATA, INTRA_LATA, OA_INTRA_LATA, INTERNATIONAL, OA_INTERNATIONAL, WORLDZONE1, OA_WORLDZONE1, DA_INTRA_LATA, DA_INTER_LATA, OA_ZERO_MINUS, and TANDEM_CALL

Page 306: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

298 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

sendCalledNumberAsPBX Sends the called number as dialed to the terminator, including: 7-digit dialing, 0-, 0+, 1+ and carrier dialing (101XXXX+1+NPANXXXXXX). This allows the switch to play the role of a PBX between subscribers and an end office. The switch also sends the CAC for IntraLATA and InterLATA calls.

This attribute only applies to USER role.

Values are:

• NO

• YES

NOTE: If set, this attribute overrides both “outPulseAsDialed” on page 298 and “numOfDIDDigits” on page 299 attributes.

bChannelAvailability-Procedure

• NO — the switch only responds to SERVICE messages.

• ATT —indicates the status change on a B-channel for Call Processing. Use this when connecting to PBXs that use the ATT procedure. The switch sends and responds to SERVICE messages

outPulseAsDialed NOTE: This attributre is ignored in USER mode if

“sendCalledNumberAsPBX” on page 298 is set.

For calls terminating to the PRI group, this attribute allows the switch to act as a local End Office (EO), providing long distance service without having an InterLATA carrier provisioned. The switch, acting as a local EO, outpulses the dialed digits to the local tandem office. Then, the local tandem office, not the local EO, performs screening and translation on the dialed digits. Values are:

• False — the switch translates the digits, chooses a call type and routes based on the call type (local, extended, intraLATA, interLATA, worldZone1, International, etc.).

• True — routes by and outpulses the exact digits the subscriber dials and does not send the CAC for the call.

NOTE: If set, this attribute overrides “numOfDIDDigits” on page 299 in either USER or NETWORK mode.

Page 307: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 299990-1012-001

numOfDIDDigits NOTE: This attributre is ignored in USER mode if

“sendCalledNumberAsPBX” on page 298 is set. This attributre is ignored in USER or NETWORK mode if “outPulseAsDialed” on page 298 is set.

Set the number of direct inward dialing digits allowed from two to ten. Values are:

• ALL — the switch sends (outpulses) all of the digits that it receives.

• 1-10 —the switch only sends (outpulses) the last number of digits that you select.

redirectingNumberOption Redirecting a calling number is used when connecting to a voice mail system using PRI. In a scenario where A calls B and B forwards to voice mail, C is the redirecting number. This setting determines which Information Element (IE) is used to send the redirecting DN. Values are:

• NO — does not send the redirecting number, even if it is present, to a voice mail system.

• REDIRECTING_NUMBER_IE — inserts the redirecting DN (B) in the setup message as the redirecting number IE. Use for Lucent PBXs.

• ORIGINAL_CALLED_NUMBER_IE —sends the redirecting DN (B) as the original called number IE, in the setup message. Use for a Nortel PBX.

• CALLING_NUMBER_IE — sends the redirecting DN (B) as the calling number IE in the setup message. Use for Taqua Courier voice mail.

• CALLED_NUMBER_IE — sends the redirecting DN (B) as the called number IE in the setup message. Use for TNS voice mail systems Zeus.

implicitChannelId This setting is for PRI FAS groups (only 1 span in the group): Values are:

• Off — sends the Channel Id formatted in the explicit or long form.

• On—sends the Channel Id (sent with the Service or Service Ack message) formatted in the implicit or short form that some vendors require. Note: the implicit or short formatting is rarely required.

useImplicitChannelIdForPPS This setting is for PRI NFAS groups. Values are:

• Off —sends the Channel Id formatted in the explicit or long form.

• On —sends the Channel Id (sent with the Service or Service Ack message) formatted in the implicit or short form that some vendors require. The implicit or short formatting is rarely required

Page 308: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

300 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

releaseCompleteAtSetup for GR-303 only. Values are:

• Off

• On

screenDN This setting is for PRI calls that originate on the T7000. Values are:

• DEFAULTDN — if a default DN exists and has a subscriber, it becomes the subscriber key in the facility

• CPN — if a calling party number is known and the subscriber is on the T7000, the calling party number replaces the subscriber key in the facility.

• DEFAULTDN_CPN — DEFAULTDN is performed, if there is no default DN or no subscriber for that DN, CPN is performed.

• CPN_DEFAULTDN — CPN is performed, if the calling party number is unknown or the subscriber is not on the T7000, DEFAULTDN is rarely required.

sendCPN This setting works with screenDN. It sets which digits are sent for calling party number. Values are:

• CPN_DEFAULTDN — if no CPN, use default DN

• DEFAULTDN — use default DN as the calling party number

• CPN — use CPN as the calling party number

• DEFAULTDN_CPN —use default DN, if there is no default DN, use CPN.

• NONE — the T7000 does not provide calling party

sendChargeNumber Values are:

• DEFAULTDN —(default) The default DN will be sent in the charge number.

• CPN — If the calling party Number is received then CPN will be sent in the charge number. If calling party number is not received and there is a default DN for the trunk group then default DN will be sent in the charge number.

• BILLING_NUM — If the Billing number is present for the subscriber used for screening it will be sent in charge number, otherwise the screened DN number will be sent in the charge number. Note: The screen DN option affects the choice of screenDN and therefore this option.

blockCPN This setting prevents the Calling Party Number from being sent unless the CPN presentation is Allowed. It is useful when connecting to a PBX that is does not honor a restricted CPN presentation. Values are:

• Off — Send CPN according to CPN presentation.

• On — No not send CPN unless CPN presentation is allowed.

Page 309: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 301990-1012-001

backwardProgressIndication This setting is for PRI trunks connecting to a PBX that terminates to subscribers using CAS trunks. Values are:

• USE_NOT_END_TO_END_ISDN ISDN — ensures the switch connecting to the T7000 does not use inband

• USE_INBAND_AVAILABLE —ensures the switch connecting to the T7000 uses inband

mplicitInterfaceIdi This setting is for PRI trunk groups with one d-channel. It controls the formatting of the "channel Id Interface Element" field. Values are:

• FALSE ——the switch does not send a message

• TRUE — the switch sends a message saying the bearer channel is in the same span as the d-channel

sendLocalCallasSubscriber This setting allows the switch to take an incoming PRI call and use the Remote Call Forwarding service to send the call over an outgoing PRI trunk group yet treat the call as local:

• FALSE — adds a 1 to the called party number

• TRUE — If a call is LOCAL or EXTENDED_AREA the switch flags every called party number as an ISDN subscriber number

releaseTreatment Values are:

• RELEASE_CALL — the access equipment provides treatment

• PROVIDE_TREATMENT — the switch plays an announcement when there is a problem with the digits received

originalNumberOption This option is used to populate various elements of the PRI Setup message. It can be useful when dealing with the interactions between multiple call forwardings and a persnickety voice mail system. Values are:

• NO — No special processing is done (default)

• REDIRECTING_NUMBER_IE — The Original Called Number parameter populates the Redirecting Number parameter.

• ORIGINAL_CALLED_NUMBER_IE — The Original Called Number parameter populates the Redirecting Number parameter.

• CALLING_NUMBER_IE — The Original Called Number parameter populates the Calling Number Information Element parameter.

• CALLED_NUMBER_IE — The Original Called Number parameter populates the Called Number Information Element parameter.

Page 310: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

302 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

networkSendDisconnectOn-Busy

This option is used when dealing with equipment that cannot handle a Release message when a call is placed to a busy subscriber. Values are:

• SEND_RELEASE_ON_BUSY — the switch sends Release when a subscriber on the PBX places a call to the switch for a busy subscriber (default)

• SEND_DISCONNECT_ON_BUSY— the switch sends Disconnect when a subscriber on the PBX places a call to the switch for a busy subscriber

passExtCharForCallingName This option controls how the Calling Name is presented. The Calling Name is conveyed using ASCII characters.

Normally, only the lower half of the 256 ASCII character set are sent.

However, sometimes characters from the upper half are sent as well. Although the upper half of the ASCII character set contains mostly graphics characters, it also contains some characters used in European languages, such as Å, É, and ü.

Unfortunately, some switches will interpret a character from the upper half of the ASCII character set as being the end of the Calling Name (technically, this is called the Extension Bit, and it indicates the last octet in the field). In such a case, you will need to set this attribute to TRUE to prevent the T7000 from confusing the switch at the other end.

Values are:

• FALSE (default) — limits the value of characters in the Calling Name to the lower half of the ASCII character set.

• TRUE — does not limit the values of characters in the Calling Name.

hdlcErrorLowWaterMark The number of errors that can occur on the link during the hdlc Error Interval before the switch issues an hdlcWarning event. This is for informational purposes only. No action is taken by the system, although a tech should probably investigate the cause of the alarm

If the value is zero, the switch will never issue a warning, no matter how many errors occur on the link. See “hdlcErrorInterval” on page 295.

Default: 5

Page 311: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 303990-1012-001

hdlcErrorHighWaterMark The number of errors that can occur on the link during the hdlc Error Interval before the switch takes the link out of service. Once the errors reach the high water mark, the link is immediately removed from service. It will not come back into service until someone acknowledges (clears) the alarm - which requires manual intervention.

If the value is zero, the switch will never take the link out of service, no matter how many errors occur on the link. See “hdlcErrorInterval” on page 295.

Default: 0

sendUnknownCalledPtyFor-NumOfDIDDigits

This setting controls how the switch builds a SETUP message when “outPulseAsDialed” (see page 298) is set to FALSE and the called party number is less than 7 digits long. Values are:

• FALSE (default) — set the numberingPlanId field in the SETUP message to ISDN_NUMBERING_PLAN and the typeOfNumber field in the SETUP message to ISDN_SUBSCRIBER_NUMBER.

• TRUE — set the numberingPlanId field in the SETUP message to UNKNOWN_NUMBERING_PLAN, and the typeOfNumber field in the SETUP message to ISDN_UNKNOWN_NUMBER,

routeOnRcvdCarrier • InbCarrier_OutbCarrier — route on the Incoming Carrier if available, otherwise, route on the Outbound Carrier.

• InbCarrier_only — route on the Incoming Carrier only.

• OutbCarrier_InbCarrier (default)— route on the Outbound Carrier, if available, otherwise, route on the Incoming Carrier.

• OutbCarrier_only — route on the Outbound Carrier only.

NOTE: The outbound carrier ID is the carrier value received in the TNS parameter for PRI trunk groups

playBusyToneOnNetworkSide

This setting allows the switch to play a busy tone on the Network side of a PRI Trunk when the Far End indicates a busy condition after requesting cut-through. Values are:

• FALSE (default) — switch does not play busy tone (PBX supplies busy tone).

• TRUE — switch plays busy tone.

Page 312: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

304 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify PRITrunkGroup SWBPRI options responseToStatusEnquiry 1

defaultCnameDelivery This setting controls the default behavior for calling name delivery when no calling name is available on the incoming trunk. Values are:

• All_Subscribers (default) — Uses the name associated with the DefaultDN of the trunk group for all calls.

• Local_Subscribers_Only — Uses the name associated with the DefaultDN of the trunk group only for local terminations.

• No_Delivery — No delivery of the name associated with the DefaultDN.

delaySIPInviteForCalling-PartyName

This setting affects PRI to SIP calls. It instructs the switch to wait for a ISDN PRI FACILITY message (which contains the Calling Party Name) before sending out the INVITE to the terminating endpoint. A value of 0 means no delay.

Range: 0 - 1000 ms

Page 313: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 305990-1012-001

PRI Trunk Group Restrictions

PRI Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. A PRI Trunk Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section

PRI Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes

The PRI Trunk Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

• 1 — turns the restriction on

• 0 — turns the restriction off.

modify PRITrunkGroup SWB1 restrictions NO_DA 1modify PRITrunkGroup SWB1 restrictions OS_ONLY 0

Attribute Description

NO_OSSTATION Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls.

NO_OSDIALED Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls.

NO_DA Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group.

OS_ONLY Restrict all calls except operator services calls.

Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List.

DA_ONLY Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls.

Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List

NO_INTRALATA Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2).

NO_INTERLATA Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1).

NO_OS_INTRALATA Restrict OS intraLATA calls.

NO_OS_INTERLATA Restrict OS interLATA calls.

NO_DA_INTRALATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2).

NO_DA_INTERLATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1).

NO_INTERNATIONAL Restrict international calls.

NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL Restrict OS international calls.

NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT_ANI

Does not allow calls that do not include the ANI.

Page 314: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

306 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding Facilities to a PRI Trunk GroupinsertInto PRITrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey> PRIFacility <oid> <cic>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a trunk to a PRI Trunk Group’s facilities list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds trunk 26 on the local card to PRI Trunk Group SWB1:

insertInto PRITrunkGroup SWB1 facilities -1 PRIFacility Trunk-26-1-27 1

Removing Facilities from a PRI Trunk GroupdeleteFrom PRITrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a trunk to a PRI Trunk Group’s facilities list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

NOTE: You must first lock the Trunk before you can remove it from the Trunk Group.

The following example locks trunk 26 on the local card and then removes it from PRI Trunk Group SWB1:

lock Trunk-26-1-27deleteFrom PRITrunkGroup SWB1 facilities 1

Syntax Description

<key> PRI Trunk Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<oid> This attribute specifies which trunk you want to add to the Trunk Group.

<cic> This attribute specifies the Circuit Identification Code of the inserted Trunk.

Syntax Description

<key> PRI Trunk Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

Page 315: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 307990-1012-001

IP Trunk Groups

An IP trunk group connects a SIP endpoint to a PIC card’s Fast Ethernet Interface.

More than one IP trunk group can be assigned to a SIP endpoint, as long as the directory number (DN) ranges assigned to each trunk group are different.

Trunk Group has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (“;”), nor can it consist of either the word “ALL” or the word “all”

options The options for this trunk group. See “IP Trunk Group Options” on page 317.

selectionMethod Note: this field is read-only.

• ROUND_ROBIN — sequentially rotate the use of trunks

sendOAssistCalls • TRUE — allow operator assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow operator assisted calls

sendDAssistCalls • TRUE — allow directory assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow directory assisted calls

tandemRoutingType Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group.

NOTE: This attribute should be set to NO_ROUTING for IP trunk groups.

• NO_ROUTING (default) — Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscriber’s carrier, or the LNP code.

• CARRIER_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists

• TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists

• ANI_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

Page 316: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

308 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

defaultDN Optional field for NetworkGateway endpoints.

This is the pseudo subscriber DN for a Network Gateway. The default directory number (DN) is used for screening incoming IP calls on this trunk group.

If provisioned, add a default subscriber with this number. see “Subscribers” on page 530

NOTE: If assigned, the defaultDN becomes the default ANI for 911 calls made without a 10 digit ANI. See “E911DefaultANI” on page 314

restrictions The restrictions on this trunk group. See “IP Trunk Group Restrictions” on page 322.

defaultNPA The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

Length: 3

replaceDestinationDigits • TRUE — allow the use of replacement destination digits (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see “Subscribers” on page 530, “Destination Digit Replacement” on page 346, and “replacementMode” on page 405.

• FALSE — do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a non-T7000 LRN associated with it

replaceCarrier This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See “Prefixes” on page 403, “replacementMode” on page 405, and “Carriers” on page 196.

• FALSE — do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC.

Attribute Description

Page 317: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 309990-1012-001

replaceAniDigits This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See “Subscribers” on page 530.

• FALSE — do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits • TRUE — allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,See “Subscribers” on page 530.

• FALSE — do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See “FTRS” on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

replaceCSI This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See “Subscribers” on page 530

• FALSE — do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

Attribute Description

Page 318: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

310 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

localTermination The localTermination attribute controls if incoming trunk group allows for local terminations or not. If it does not allow for local terminations then use the trunk group in a tandem routing application. If you allow local terminations in a tandem routing trunk group, then if the DN terminates on the switch the calls for that DN will not be tandemed out of the switch.

• ALLOW (default) — allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch.

• NOT_ALLOWED — only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned:

• USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) — Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list.

• USE_NANP_CARRIER — Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list.

• USE_CARRIER_ONLY — Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

• USE_NANP_ONLY — Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions • The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs).

denyAniList • An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see “Screen Lists” on page 415,and “Prefixes” on page 403.

Attribute Description

Page 319: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 311990-1012-001

direction • ONE_WAY_IN — One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

• ONE_WAY_OUT — One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

• BI_DIRECTIONAL — Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

tandemCustom-Replacement

Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls.

• NO (default) — no special outpulsing is performed.

• YES — outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See “7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing” on page 409.

codecListName The name of the codec list for this trunk group. A codec list is a container for codec profiles that are associated with one or more IP or MGCP trunk groups. See “CodecProfileList” on page 425.

mediaParamName The name of the media stream parameter for this trunk group. Media stream parameters control the characteristics of the bearer or RTP portion of a VoIP call. See “MediaParam” on page 431

Attribute Description

Page 320: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

312 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

maximumCalls The number of maximum calls (sessions) based on the number of cards in the system or protection group and codec types used from 0-5376. The number of calls is based on the use of virtual IP trunks from the pool of 1,344 possible trunks per PIC. Since an IP trunk group has no physical facilities, there would otherwise be no limit to the number of calls that a subscriber or a group of subscribers could originate or terminate.

This is where the IP Trunk Group concentration ratio is defined.

For example, if you had 800 subscribers using a trunk group you could assign 200 as the maximum calls for a 4:1 ratio. Also, you could over assign the maximum calls per group, since the trunks get assigned as they are requested from the pool.

• 24=default

• 0-5376=range

priNearEndNiOid Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF). This is the interface and associated IP address used for signalling. See “OID” on page 30.

secNearEndNiOid The secondary Fast Ethernet (FE) interface and associated IP address the PIC uses to provide redundancy.

NOTE: If you do not provision a secNearEndNiOid (secondary near end network interface object identifier) FE, the primary is always active and you do not have redundancy. If you do provision a secondary FE, the first FE to come into service is active.

actNearEndNiOid Note: This field is read-only.

This field shows which FEIF is active.

activeCalls Note: This field is read-only.

This dynamic field shows the number of calls the trunk group is currently carrying.

operationalState Note: This field is read-only.

• UNREACHABLE — Network problems are preventing the switch from communicating with the IP endpoint at the other end of the IP Trunk Group.

• REACHABLE— the switch can communicate with the IP endpoint at the other end of the IP Trunk Group

Attribute Description

Page 321: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 313990-1012-001

administrativeState Note: This field is read-only.

• LOCKED — The IP Trunk Group is administratively prohibited from providing services. See “lock” on page 7.

• UNLOCKED — The IP Trunk Group is administratively allowed to provide services. See “unlock” on page 7..

• SHUTTING_DOWN — The IP Trunk Group is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the last service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See “shutdown” on page 7.

bearerAuditTimer1 The time, in milliseconds, after the IP call is established to initiate a check for received RTP packets. The default is 3600000 milliseconds (3600 seconds, or one hour). See “auditBearerResources” in this section.

bearerAuditTimer2 The time, in milliseconds, after bearerAuditTimer1 has expired to check for received RTP packets. The default is 600000 milliseconds (600 seconds, or ten minutes). See “auditBearerResources” in this section.

auditBearerResources This flag enables or disables bearer audits. Bearer audits timers prevent a hung IP call from using bandwidth. Bearer resource audits prevent a hung IP call from using bandwidth.

The switch compares RTP packet counts from bearerAuditTimer1 and bearerAuditTimer2. If the count is the same, indicating no RTP packets have been exchanged, the switch tears down the call. If the count is different, indicating RTP packets have been exchanged, auditing restarts.

TRUE — the switch compares RTP packet counts from bearerAuditTimer1 and bearerAuditTimer2. If the count is the same, indicating that no RTP packets have been exchanged, the switch tears down the call. If the count is different, indicating RTP packets have been exchanged, auditing restarts (default).

FALSE — no bearer audit is performed.

signalingAuditTimer Future feature. Note: This field is read-only.

signalingAuditMethod Future feature. Note: This field is read-only.

screenDN a optional DN on which to screen calls. See “screenDNChoice” on page 317.

Attribute Description

Page 322: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

314 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

useINFOMethod TaquaWorks: Use of this option causes all routing and call control to be done by the BroadWorks platform

NOTE: BroadWorks uses a propitiatory extension to the INFO method. This INFO method should only be sent to a BroadWorks application server.

If set, the T7000 uses the INFO method to send hook flash events to BroadWorks, and receives Call Waiting Caller ID infromation from BroadWorks.

FALSE (default) — do not use the BroadWorks proprietary extension to the INFO method

True — use the BroadWorks proprietary extension to the INFO method.

sigFQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name of the signaling Network Interface. If populated, this string can be used in place of the IP address and port number of the FEIF. See “useSigFQDN” on page 314.

useSigFQDN This attribute controls if the sigFQDN is used instead of the IP Address and Port Number of the Fast Ethernet Interface associated with this IP Trunk Group. Note that sigFQDN must be provisioned, or this field has no effect. Values are:

• FQDN_FOR_FROM_HDR — use the sigFQDN to construct the FROM header.

• FQDN_FOR_CONTACT_HDR — use the sigFQDN to construct the CONTACT header.

• FQDN_FOR_RPARTY_ID — use the sigFQDN to construct the REMOTE PARTY ID header.

• FQDN_FOR_DIVERSION — use the sigFQDN to construct the DIVERSION header.

bearerFreeGrpKey future feature

E911DefaultANI This attribute is used to specify a 10 digit ANI when a 911 call is made and the From: header does not contain a 10 digit number and a defaultDN is not assigned to the Trunk Group.

Attribute Description

Page 323: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 315990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all IP Trunk Group commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• priNearEndNiOid

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• defaultDN

Page 324: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

316 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• options

• sendOAssistCalls

• sendDAssistCalls

• tandemRoutingType

• defaultDN

• restrictions

• defaultNPA

• replaceDestinationDigits

• replaceCarrier

• replaceAniDigits

• replaceInfoDigits

• ftrsProfile

• replaceCSI

• localTermination

• tandemDefaultRoutingType

• denyAniList

• direction

• codecListName

• mediaParamName

• maximumCalls

• priNearEndNiOid

• secNearEndNiOid

• bearerAuditTimer1

• bearerAuditTimer2

• auditBearerResources

• screenDN

• useINFOMethod

• sigFQDN

• useSigFQDN

create IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp fe-0-10modify IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp options sendCPN CPNmodify IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp useINFOMethod TRUElock IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrpdestroy IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp

Page 325: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 317990-1012-001

IP Trunk Group Options

An IP Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a IP Trunk Group.

IP Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:

Option Name Values

plusOnePrepend • TRUE—sends the 1 with the 10-digit DN dialed in the INVITE message. This is required by Level3 for SIP network trunking

• FALSE—no +1 is prepended

doCallingNameDip • TRUE— a TCAP Calling Name database dip on incoming calls may be performed.

– If the Incoming Calling Name Presentation received = ‘No Indication’, then the Calling Name dip is done based on the Calling Number. The name received in the CName response is sent in the From header.

– If the Incoming Calling Name Presentation received = ‘Toggle’, then the Calling Name dip is done based on the Calling Number. The name received in the CName response is sent in the From header.

– If the Incoming Calling Name Presentation received = ‘Available’, then the Calling Name dip is not done for the Calling Number. The name received is sent in the From header.

– If the Incoming Calling Name Presentation received = ‘Restricted’, then the Calling Name dip is not done for the Calling Number. The Name presentation in the RPID or Privacy header is set to restricted.

• FALSE— Calling Name database dip is never performed

screenDNChoice Specifies how screening is performed for calls placed from IP trunk groups. By setting this attribute, you are instructing the switch to use different DNs to screen the call. Most values list more than one DN. If the first choice is not present, the switch looks for the second, and so on.

NOTE: Calls are billed the using “chargeNumberChoice” (see page 321).

• SCREEN_DN (default) — use this option when multiple IP Trunk Groups provisioned off the same Network Gateway require different screening treatments. Provision a screenDN in the IP Trunk Group and a pseudo-subscriber for the screenDN.

1. IP Trunk Group Screen DN

IP Trunk Group Default DN

Page 326: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

318 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

screenDNChoice(continued)

• CALLING_DN — use this option for residential EVS subscribers or businesses. Provision a pseudo-subscriber on the T7000 for the calling DN.

1. Calling Party DN

2. IP Trunk Group Screen DN

IP Trunk Group Default DN

• DEFAULT_DN — use this option for businesses and for IP Trunk Groups. Provision a defaultDN for the IP Trunk Group and a pseudo-subscriber for the defaultDN.

IP Trunk Group Default DN

• DIVERSION_THEN_SCREEN — use this option when the Network Gateway supplies a Diversion Header to indicate call forwarding and when multiple IP Trunk Groups provisioned off the same Network Gateway require different screening treatments. Provision a pseudo-subscriber for the diversion (redirecting) party on the T7000. Provision a screenDN in the IP Trunk Group and a pseudo-subscriber for the screenDN.

1. Diversion Header party

2. IP Trunk Group Screen DN

IP Trunk Group Default DN

• DIVERSION_THEN_CALLING — use this option when the Network Gateway supplies a Diversion Header to indicate call forwarding. Provision a pseudo-subscriber for the diversion (redirecting) party on the T7000.

1. Diversion header party

2. Calling Party DN

3. IP Trunk Group Screen DN

IP Trunk Group Default DN

• DIVERSION_THEN_DEFAULT — use this option when the Network Gateway supplies a Diversion Header to indicate call forwarding.. Provision a pseudo-subscriber for the diversion (redirecting) party on the T7000.

1. Diversion header party

IP Trunk Group Default DN

routeAdvance • CALLING_DN — use this option for residential EVS subscribers or businesses. Provision a pseudo-subscriber on the T7000 for the calling DN.

1. Calling Party DN

2. IP Trunk Group Screen DN

3. IP Trunk Group Default DN

Option Name Values

Page 327: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 319990-1012-001

supportEarlyCutThrough for devices (typically IVRs) that need to cut through the two-way SIP voice path before the call is answered. Do not set these values for devices that support cutting through the two-way SIP voice path after the call is answered

Type is Bitfield. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example.

• SIPtoSS7_EarlyCutThru — Support early cut through for SIP to SS7 and SIP to PRI calls.

• SIPtoTDM_EarlyCutThru— Support early cut through for SIP to TDM calls.

sendCPN This option affects how the switch determines the Calling Party Number for SIP originations from a Network Gateway endpoint.

NOTE: The Preferred Privacy Option and the Privacy information received in incoming RPID or Privacy Header still continue to determine the Name and Number presentation.

Values are:

• CPN_DEFAULTDN (default) — the T7000 sends the User Portion of the From Header as the Calling Party Number. If the From header does not have a User Portion then the DefaultDN from the Network gateway IP Trunk Group will be sent.

• DEFAULTDN — The T7000 sends the defaultDN of the IPTrunkGroup as the Calling Party Number.

• DEFAULTDN_CPN — The T7000 sends the defaultDN of the IPTrunkGroup as the Calling Party Number if it is provisioned on the IP Trunk group and datafilled in the Subscriber database. If no default DN is provisioned, the T7000 sends the User Portion of the From Header as the Calling Party Number (since DefaultDN is mandatory for a Network gateway IP Trunk Group, this option is the same as DEFAULTDN).

• NONE — The T7000 does not send the Calling Party Number.

• CPN — The T7000 sends the User Portion of the From Header as the Calling Party Number.

sendUserForNoANI This option controls what to display on a SIP phone when a call originating from a CAS trunk has no ANI.

• • SEND_UNAVAILABLE — "Unavailable"

• • SEND_ANONYMOUS — "Anonymous"

• • SEND_PRIVATE — "Private"

• SEND_OUT_OF_AREA — "Out-Of-Area"

Option Name Values

Page 328: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

320 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

sendCarrierId This option controls which carrier ID to send.

Values are:

• Off (default) — Do not send a carrier ID.

• InbCarrier_OutbCarrier— Send the inbound carrier ID, if it is present, otherwise, send the outbound carrier ID, if it is present.

• InbCarrier_only— send the Inbound carrier ID, if it is present.

• OutbCarrier_InbCarrier— Send the outbound carrier ID, if it is present, otherwise, send the inbound carrier ID, if it is present.

• OutbCarrier_only— send the outbound carrier ID if it is present.

routeOnRcvdCarrier • InbCarrier_OutbCarrier — route on the Incoming Carrier if available, otherwise, route on the Outbound Carrier.

• InbCarrier_only — route on the Incoming Carrier only.

• OutbCarrier_InbCarrier (default)— route on the Outbound Carrier, if available, otherwise, route on the Incoming Carrier.

• OutbCarrier_only — route on the Outbound Carrier only.

callingParty-PresentationDisplay

This option affects how the switch builds the From header of an INVITE request when the endpoint’s preferredPrivacyMethod option is set to NO_PRIVACY_METHOD and the calling name or number is restricted.

• SEND_UNAVAILABLE — "Unavailable"

• SEND_ANONYMOUS (default) — "Anonymous"

• SEND_PRIVATE — "Private"

• SEND_OUT_OF_AREA — “Out-Of-Area"

See:

• “preferredPrivacyMethod” on page 437 (SIP Access Gateway Options)

• “preferredPrivacyMethod” on page 445 (SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options)

• “preferredPrivacyMethod” on page 455 (SIP Network Gateway Options)

revertToPrimaryFE This option controls how the switch behaves after a failed primary FE recovers. Values are:

• FALSE (default) — the switch continues to use the secondary FE.

• TRUE — the switch reverts to using the primary FE.

Option Name Values

Page 329: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 321990-1012-001

modify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options screenDNChoice DEFAULT_DNmodify IPTrunkGroup IPTG1 options supportEarlyCutThrough 1

NOTE: The supportEarlyCutThrough attribute is a nested bitfield, and must be handled differently from a normal bitfield. See “Limitiations” on page 10.

bypassVmNotify-DeliveryCheck

This option allows a subscriber who is not assigned to a Voice Mail Service to use call forwarding to forward a call to an M6 VMS. Values are:

• FALSE (default) — the switch checks that a subscriber has voice mail service assigned before processing an incoming NOTIFY message.

• TRUE — the switch processes the incoming NOTIFY message from the voice mail system without checking to see if the subscriber has voice mail service assigned.

chargeNumberChoice This option selects the Charge Number for the call from one of the following choices:

• SCREEN_DN — set the Charge Number to the screen DN if it exists, otherwise use the default DN of the Trunk Group

• CALLING_DN — set the Charge Number to Calling Party Number if it exists, otherwise use the default DN of the Trunk Group

• DEFAULT_DN — set the Charge Number to the default DN of the Trunk Group

• DIVERSION_THEN_SCREEN — set the Charge Number to the diversion header number if it exists, otherwise use the screen DN if it exists, otherwise use the original address if it exists, otherwise use the Default DN of the Trunk Group.

• DIVERSION_THEN_CALLING — set the Charge Number to the diversion header number if it exists, otherwise use the then original address if it exists, otherwise se the Calling Party number if it exists, otherwise use the Default DN of the Trunk Group

• DIVERSION_THEN_DEFAULT — set Charge Number to the diversion header number if it exists, otherwise use the original address if it exists, otherwise use the Default DN

• SCREEN_CHOICE (default)— set the charge number to the subscriber key

Option Name Values

Page 330: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

322 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

IP Trunk Group Restrictions

IP Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. An IP Trunk Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section

IP Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes

Attribute Description

NO_OSSTATION Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls.

NO_OSDIALED Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls.

NO_DA Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group.

OS_ONLY Restrict all calls except operator services calls.

Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List.

DA_ONLY Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls.

Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List

NO_INTRALATA Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2).

NO_INTERLATA Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1).

NO_OS_INTRALATA Restrict OS intraLATA calls.

NO_OS_INTERLATA Restrict OS interLATA calls.

NO_DA_INTRALATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2).

NO_DA_INTERLATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1).

NO_INTERNATIONAL Restrict international calls.

NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL Restrict OS international calls.

NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT_ANI

Does not allow calls that do not include the ANI.

Page 331: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 323990-1012-001

The IP Trunk Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

• 1 — turns the restriction on

• 0 — turns the restriction off.

modify IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp restrictions NO_DA 1modify IPTrunkGroup agwTrkGrp restrictions OS_ONLY 0

Page 332: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

324 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SS7 Trunk Groups

A Signaling System 7 (SS7) trunk group connects a switch to one of the following SS7 capable nodes:

• Service Switching Point (SSP) — a switch that recognizes Intelligent Network (IN) calls and can route and connect those calls

• Access Tandem (AT) — a Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) switching system that provides access between a local exchange network and the interexchange networks

• Interexchange Carrier (IC) — a long distance carrier that includes all facilities-based interLATA

An SS7 Trunk Group has the following attributes.

Attribute Description

key trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

NOTE: The trunk group name cannot contain a semi-colon (“;”), nor can it consist of either the word “ALL” or the word “all”

facilities A list of the facilities (trunks) in the trunk group. See “Adding Facilities to a SS7 Trunk Group” on page 344, and See “Removing Facilities from a SS7 Trunk Group” on page 344.

timers The timers for this trunk group. See “SS7 Trunk Group Timers” on page 332.

options The options for this trunk group. See “SS7 Trunk Group Options” on page 336.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE — always select the first trunk available

• ROUND_ROBIN (default) — sequentially rotate the use of trunks

sendOAssistCalls • TRUE — allow operator assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow operator assisted calls

sendDAssistCalls • TRUE — allow directory assisted calls

• FALSE (default) — do not allow directory assisted calls

Page 333: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 325990-1012-001

tandemRoutingType Sets the type of routing for calls received on the trunk group.

For a discussion of this attribute, see “The tandemRoutingType Trunk Group attribute” on page 234.

• NO_ROUTING (default) — Uses routing based on the dialed number, the subscriber’s carrier, or the LNP code.

• CARRIER_ROUTING (default) — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Carrier route lists

• TRUNKGROUP_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem Trunk Group route lists

• ANI_ROUTING — Forces the calls received on this trunk group to use incoming Tandem ANI route lists

restrictions The restrictions on this trunk group. See “CAS Trunk Group Restrictions” on page 250.

defaultNPA The NPA to be added when 7-digits are received on an incoming trunk group. The switch adds the defaultNPA to the 7-digits and then routes on 10-digits. This defaultNPA must be a provisioned prefix, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

Length: 3

NOTE: For DIDMF or DIDDTMF CAS trunks, the homeNPA of the defaultDN is added to the 7-digits, if available. If a defaultDN is not available, then the defaultNPA is used.

For CAS trunks using FXO protocol, the homeNPA of the subscriber is added on the 7-digits

replaceDestinationDigits • TRUE — allow the use of replacement destination digits (called number) on the trunk group. The switch replaces part or all of the destination digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned, See “Subscribers” on page 530, “Destination Digit Replacement” on page 346, and “replacementMode” on page 405.

• FALSE — do not replace Destination Digits and send the dialed digits.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not replace Destination Digits in the outgoing signaling messages if the called DN has a non-T7000 LRN associated with it

Attribute Description

Page 334: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

326 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

replaceCarrier This attribute controls the use of a PCAC on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of PCAC on the trunk group. The switch replaces the CAC depending on how the prefix or carrier is provisioned. See “Prefixes” on page 403, “replacementMode” on page 405, and “Carriers” on page 196.

• FALSE — do not use a PCAC on the trunk group and send the CAC.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PCAC if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CAC.

replaceAniDigits This attribute controls the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a Pseudo ANI (PANI) on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI (calling number) depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see “Subscribers” on page 530.

• FALSE — do not use a PANI on the trunk group and send the ANI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use a PANI if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI.

replaceInfoDigits • • TRUE — allow the use of a PANI II digits on the trunk group. The switch replaces the ANI II digits depending on how the prefix is provisioned,see “Subscribers” on page 530.

• • FALSE — do not use PANI II digits on the trunk group and send the ANI II digits on the facility.

• • REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PANI II digits if the called number has an non-T7000 LRN associated with it and send the ANI II digits on the facility

ftrsProfile The profile assigned to the incoming trunk group. This profile determines how the switch manipulates digits and routing. See “FTRS” on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a FXO trunk group with a profile, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

Attribute Description

Page 335: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 327990-1012-001

replaceCSI This controls the use of the Carrier Selection Information parameter in outgoing messages on the trunk group.

• TRUE — allow the use of a PCSI on the trunk group. The switch replaces the outpulse of the CSI parameter depending on how the prefix is provisioned, see “Subscribers” on page 530

• FALSE — do not send a PCSI on the trunk group and send the CSI.

• REPLACE_IfNotPorted — do not use PCSI if the called number has an non- T7000 LRN associated with it and send the CSI.

localTermination The localTermination attribute controls if incoming trunk group allows for local terminations or not. If it does not allow for local terminations then use the trunk group in a tandem routing application. If you allow local terminations in a tandem routing trunk group, then if the DN terminates on the switch the calls for that DN will not be tandemed out of the switch.

• ALLOW (default) — allow incoming calls on the trunk group to terminate on the switch.

• NOT_ALLOWED — only allow incoming calls to tandem through the switch.

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned:

• USE_CARRIER_NANP(default) — Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list.

• USE_NANP_CARRIER — Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list.

• USE_CARRIER_ONLY — Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

• USE_NANP_ONLY — Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions • The miscellaneous options to add to the trunk group. Miscellaneous options are added using In Service Upgrades (ISUs).

denyAniList An ANI deny list name from the screen list database. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked.See “Screen Lists” on page 415, and “Prefixes” on page 403.

Attribute Description

Page 336: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

328 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

direction • ONE_WAY_IN — One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

• ONE_WAY_OUT — One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

• BI_DIRECTIONAL — Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

tandemCustom-Replacement

Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls.

• NO (default) — no special outpulsing is performed.

• YES — outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See “7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing” on page 409.

pointCode point code of non-adjacent node to which trunk group connects. See “Point Codes” on page 470.

type The signaling type that matches the connection at the other end:

• ANSI — for American National Standards Institute signaling type primarily used in North America

• ITU — Internal value, not available in current release

Attribute Description

Page 337: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 329990-1012-001

isdnMsgTrace This debug attribute controls how the switch shows ISDN Call Establishment, Call Clearing, Maintenance and Miscellaneous messages. The messages are displayed when running a CLI session on the card that has the SS7 Trunk Group.

• MSG_TRACE_NONE — The message trace for this trunk group is off.

• MSG_ONLY — Shows ISDN Call Establishment, Call Clearing, Maintenance, and Miscellaneous messages in a Procomm window that connects to the card that contains the span.

• MSG_WITH_INBOUND_DUMP — Shows ISDN messages and a dump of inbound IEs.

• MSG_WITH_OUTBOUND_DUMP — Shows ISDN messages and a dump of outbound IEs.

MSG_WITH_BOTH_DUMP — Shows ISDN messages and a dump of inbound and outbound IEs.

C A U T I O N

Contact Taqua TAC Support before using this option.

defaultJIP This optional attribute is used to specify a default Jurisdiction Information Parameter (JIP) when the JIP is not included in an incoming IAM message. JIP is an optional parameter in the IAM message, but it should always be included when feasible.

If an IAM message is received without a JIP, the defaultJIP will be used to determine the Rate Center and recorded in the CDR.

If the call is forwarded through the switch, the defaultJIP will be sent if the incoming IAM did not include a JIP.

The defaultJIP should reflect the LATA or MSC of the originating switch, and be in the form of NPA-NXX.

E911DefaultANI This attribute is used to specify a 10 digit ANI when a 911 call is made and neither the Calling Number nor the Charge Number contains a 10 digit ANI.

Attribute Description

Page 338: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

330 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all SS7 Trunk Group commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• pointCode

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• type

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• timers

• options

• selectionMethod

• sendOAssistCalls

• sendDAssistCalls

• tandemRoutingType

• restrictions

• defaultNPA

• replaceDestinationDigits

• replaceCarrier

• replaceAniDigits

• replaceInfoDigits

• ftrsProfile

• replaceCSI

• localTermination

• tandemDefaultRoutingType

• denyAniList

• direction

• type

• isupMsgTrace

Page 339: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 331990-1012-001

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• facilities

See “Adding Facilities to a SS7 Trunk Group” on page 344, and “Removing Facilities from a SS7 Trunk Group” on page 344.

Prerequisites

Provision the SS7 network before provisioning SS7 trunk groups, see “createSS7Network” on page 475.

Provision a non-adjacent SS7 node with the same point code as the SS7 trunk group before provisioning an SS7 trunk group, see “createNode” on page 476.

createSS7Network net y ncreateNode remote 229-101-000 net Y n ncreate SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 229-101-000 ANSImodify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 sendOAssistCalls FALSEquery SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 optionsdestroy SS7TrunkGroup SSP1

Page 340: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

332 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SS7 Trunk Group Timers

An SS7 Trunk Group Timer object contains the timers that control the behavior of an SS7 Trunk Group. The SS7 timers’ default settings meet the industry standard.

SS7 Trunk Group Timers have the following attributes

Timer Description

GuardTime The time after the release of a circuit to ensure that a minimum time interval is used between calls

Range: 700 - 1,200 ms

Default: 1,200 ms

ChargeDelay The amount of time a terminating trunk waits before generating answer supervision toward the originator.

Range: 0 - 5,000 ms

Default: 0 ms

T1 The time between sending a Release message and receiving a Release Complete message. Resends a Release message and restarts the T1 timer when the timer expires.

Range: 4,000 - 15,000 ms

Default: 10,000 ms

T5 The time between sending the initial Release message and receiving the Release Complete message. Sends a Reset Circuit Message, starts the T17 timer, and stops the T1 timer when the timer expires.

Default: 60,000 ms

T6 The time between the Network Suspend message and receiving a Resume message. This message has dual significance, local and remote and starts the release procedure.

Default: 30,000 ms

T7 The time between the Initial Address message and the address and routing information for normal release. This message has dual significance, local and remote. Releases all equipment and connections when the timer expires.

Default: 25m000 ms

T8 The time between receiving the Initial Address message of previous or incoming continuity check and receiving the Continuity message. Releases all equipment and connections when the timer expires.

Default: 12,000 ms

Page 341: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 333990-1012-001

T12 The time between the Blocking message and the Blocking Acknowledge message. Resends a Blocking message and restarts T12 when the timer expires.

Default: 10,000 ms

T13 The time between the initial Blocking message and the Blocking Acknowledge message. Resends a Blocking message, starts T13 timer, and stops the T12 timer when the timer expires.

Default: 60,000 ms

T14 The time between the initial Blocking message and the Blocking Acknowledge message. Resends Unblocking message and restarts T14 when the timer expires.

Default: 10,000 ms

T15 The time between the initial Unblocking message and the Unblocking Acknowledge message. Resends Unblocking message, starts T15 timer, and stops T14 when the timer expires.

Default: 60,000 ms

T16 The time between the sending of a Reset Circuit message not due to a T5 timer ending and the receipt of Release Complete message. Resends Reset Circuit message and restarts T16 when the timer expires.

Default: 10,000 ms

T17 The time between sending an initial Reset Circuit message not due to the expiration of T5 and receiving a Release Complete message. Resends the Reset Circuit message, restarts T17, and stops T16 when the timer expires.

Default: 60,000 ms

T18 The time between a Circuit Group Blocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Blocking acknowledgement. Resends the Circuit Group Blocking message and restarts T18 when the timer expires.

Default: 10,000 ms

T19 The time between the initial Circuit Group Blocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Blocking acknowledgement. Resends the Circuit Group Blocking message, restarts T19, and stops T18 when the timer expires.

Default: 60,000 ms

Timer Description

Page 342: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

334 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

T20 The time between the initial Circuit Group Unblocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Unblocking acknowledgement. Resends Circuit Group Unblocking message and restarts T20 when the timer expires.

Default: 10,000 ms

T21 The time between the initial Circuit Group Unblocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Unblocking acknowledgement. Resends Circuit Group Unblocking message, restarts T21, and stops T20 when the timer expires.

Default: 60,000 ms

T22 The time between the Circuit Group Reset message and the receipt of an acknowledgement. Resends Circuit Group Reset message and restarts T22 when the timer expires.

Default; 10,000 ms

T23 The time between the initial Circuit Group Reset message and the receipt of an acknowledgement. Resends Circuit Group Reset message, restarts T23, and stops T22 when the timer expires.

Default: 60,000 ms

T24 The time between sending a check tone and the receipt of the backward check tone. Sends Continuity message indicating failure and starts T25 when the timer expires.

Default: 1,900 ms

T25 The time between the first Continuity Check failure and when continuity is detected. Sends a Continuity Check Request message and repeats Continuity Check when the timer expires.

Default: 5,000 ms

T26 The time between a second Continuity Check failure and continuity is detected. Sends a Continuity Check Request message, restarts T26, and checks continuity when the timer expires.

Default: 60,000 ms

T27 The time between the receipt of a Continuity message indicating failure of repeat continuity check and the receipt of Continuity Check Request message. Sends Reset Circuit message, starts T16, and stops T17 when the timer expires.

180,000 ms

T28 The time between a Circuit Query message and the receipt of Circuit Query Response message.

10,000 ms

Timer Description

Page 343: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 335990-1012-001

modify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 timers T1 4750

T34 The time between sending a Loop-Back Acknowledge message in response to the receipt of Continuity Check Request message and a Continuity or Release message. Releases all equipment, sends a Reset Circuit message, starts T16, and stops T17 when the timer expires.

Default: 10,000 ms

TCRA The time between a Circuit Reservation Acknowledge message and the receipt of Initial Address message or Release message. Initiates the release procedure when the timer expires.

Default: 20,000 ms

TCVT The time between a Circuit Validation Test message and the receipt of Circuit Validation Response message. Resends the Circuit Validation Test message and restarts TCVT when the timer expires.

Default: 10,000 ms

TCCR The time between a Continuity Check Request message and the receipt of Loop-Back Acknowledgement message. Sends a Reset Circuit message, starts T16, and starts T17 when the timer expires.

Default: 20,000 ms

THGA The Hardware Carrier Group Alarm is the time between carrier loss and carrier restore.

Default: 120,000 ms

TACC The time between receiving an ACC indicator and expiration of the alarm. Removes the ACC controls in the exchange when the timer expires.

Default: 5,000 ms

TCGB The time between a Circuit Group Blocking message and the receipt of Circuit Group Blocking or Circuit Group Unblocking message. Accepts the subsequent Circuit Blocking message as a new message when the timer expires.

Default: 5,000 ms

TGRS The time between a Circuit Group Reset Message and the receipt of Circuit Group Reset Message. Accepts the subsequent Circuit Group Reset Message as a new message when the timer expires.

Default: 5,000 ms

Timer Description

Page 344: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

336 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SS7 Trunk Group Options

An SS7 Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a SS7 Trunk Group.

SS7 Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:

Option Name Values

chargingOffice Defines if the switch

• records the outboundCarrierConnectTime and the outboundCarrierDisconnectTime in the CDR

• generates partial CDRs for originating calls in the trunk group.

0=False — outboundCarrierConnectTime and outboundCarrierDisconnectTime are not stored, and that the partial CDR is not generated.

1=True— CarrierConnectTime and outboundCarrierDisconnectTime are stored, and that the partial CDR is generated

continuityTestFrequency Determines how often the switch tests availability by sending a signal from the sending party that is looped back by the receiving party. The value specifies the number of calls completed per termination per port before a test is made. The switch sends the COT test at 2010 Hz for 4-wire and 1780 Hz for 2-wire circuits

• 0=Never

• Range: 1-16, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100

glareControl Glare control identifies the trunks on which the switch processes seizure when there is glare and those from which the switch backs down. Coordinate these values with the other side of the trunk group, for example, if the switch is all then the other end is none.

• 0=Odd — To process seizure on the odd trunks in the trunk group and back down on the even trunks

• 1=Even — To process seizure on the even trunks in the trunk group and back down on the odd trunks

• 2=All —To process seizure of all the trunks in the trunk group

• 3=None —To back down on all of the trunks in the trunk group

Page 345: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 337990-1012-001

sendCallingName Determines how the calling name, if available, will be sent in the Initial Address Messages.

• 0=FALSE — do not send calling name

• 1=sendGenericName — include calling name in the generic name parameter

• 2=sendPartyInfo — include calling name in party info parameter if the calling name is not restricted

• 3=sendPartyInfoThenGn — include the calling name in party info parameter if the calling name is not restricted, otherwise include calling name in the generic name parameter

sendCallingNumber Indicates if the number of the calling party is included in signaling for the trunk group.

• 0=False

• 1=True

sendCarrierId Indicates if the carrier identification of the service provider is included in signaling for the trunk group.

• 0=False

• 1=True

sendJurisdictionInformation Indicates if the information about the geographic boundary of the service provider is included in signaling for the trunk group. This is the LRN value assigned to the originating rate center of the calling party.

– 0=False

– 1=True

sendChargeNumber The charge number is one of the following: Billing number for subscribers located on the switch, the ANI for calls received on CAS trunk groups, or the charge number received on PRI and SS7 trunk groups. If a charge number is not received, the switch uses the Calling Party Number. The options for charge number are:

• 0=IF_NOT_CALLING— sends the Charge Number parameter only when the value is different from the Calling Party Number parameter value for the call

• 1=ALWAYS_CPN_CHARGE_NUM — always sends the Calling Number as the Charge Number.

• 2=NEVER — never sends a Charge Number parameter

• 3=ALWAYS_CHARGE_NUM — always sends the Charge Number parameter\.

Option Name Values

Page 346: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

338 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

sendCallProgress Indicates if the status of the telephone line (including: ringing, busy ring, voicemail answering, intercept) is included in signaling for the trunk group.

0=False

1=True

terminationType Indicates the type of SS7 termination switch:

• 0=SSP — Switch Signaling Point for terminations to another End Office

• 1=AT — Access Tandem for terminations to a Class 4 switch

2=IXC — Inter Exchange Carrier for terminations to a carrier switch

continuityProcedure Indicates the type of wire, either 2 wire (2w) if the terminating switch is analog or 4 wire (4w) if it is digital.

• 2=2w—sends COT at 1780Hz and receives COT at 1780Hz

• 4=4w—sends COT at 2010Hz and receives COT at 2010Hz

sendHopCounter Sends the hop parameter (the number of nodes between a source and a destination) in the Initial Address message.

• 0=False

• 1=True

OLIRequired Allows the switch to accept an inbound call without the Originating Line Information (OLI) parameter in an Initial Address Message (IAM).

• 0—allow the switch to accept these calls

• 1—not allow the switch to accept these calls.

sendGenericDigits Allows the switch to send digits in the outgoing IAM message that identify supplementary service, for example the Calling Name Delivery is allowed or restricted

• 0=False

• 1=True

Option Name Values

Page 347: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 339990-1012-001

networkServices Set BLV/BLI only on trunk groups coming from an operator station. One trunk group is required for each service.

• 0=NONE

• 1=BLV—Busy Line Verification allows an external operator to verify if a subscriber line is busy. An operator calling over a BLV trunk receives a busy signal if the line is busy or a ring-back if the line is idle.

• 2=BLI—Busy Line Interrupt allows an external operator to interrupt a busy line. An operator calling over a BLI trunk interrupts the busy subscriber who can either drop the existing conversation and accept the operator call or continue with the existing conversation.

sendTNS Options for sending the Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter in the IAM for non-SAC calls (for AT and IXC terminationType trunk groups):

• 0=STANDARD—sends the TNS according to the definitions in GR-394-CORE:

– For a terminationType of AT, the switch always sends the TNS if the carrier is not 0110

– For a terminationType of IXC, the switch only sends the TNS for international calls

• 1=ALWAYS—always send TNS regardless of terminationType or carrier

• 2=NEVER—never send TNS regardless of terminationType or carrier

• 3=CARRIER_NOT_0110—send TNS only if the carrier value for the call is not 0110, for AT terminationType trunk groups only (Note: 0110 is the CAC for SAC calls.)

• 4=CARRIER_0110—send TNS only if the carrier value for the call is 0110, for AT terminationType trunk groups only

NOTE: The sendTNS field does not apply to trunk groups with an SSP terminationType, the switch never sends the TNS for this type.

Option Name Values

Page 348: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

340 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

sendSACTNS Options for sending the Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter in the IAM for SAC calls (for AT terminationType trunk groups):

• 0=STANDARD—if switch does not perform the SCP dip for the SAC number, the switch always sends a TNS parameter with carrier value 0110

• 1=SAC_CARRIER_0110—the switch sends the TNS parameter only if the carrier value for the call is 0110

• 2=NEVER—the switch never sends the TNS parameter

releaseOption • RELEASE_CALL — sends a release with cause (rejects the call) to the far end when a call cannot be completed, use in tandem applications

• RELEASE_TREATMENT — releases the call and send it to treatment

send00asOLI In the Initial Address Message (IAM), the T7000 includes the Originating Line Identifier (OLI) parameter. OLI is populated using the provisioned originatingLineType for subscriber originations, and the received OLI/facility information digits value for trunk group originations.

• 1=TRUE—If an OLI parameter is sent in the outgoing IAM, the T7000 sets the OLI value to 00 for all calls routed on the SS7 trunk group.

• 0=FALSE—If an OLI parameter is sent in the outgoing IAM, the T7000 sends the originating OLI/Information digit value in the outgoing IAM.

keepIncoming7dNOA When the NPA is added, this option checks the nature of address (NOA) for the called number included in the outbound IAM:

• 0=TRANSLATE_NOA—NOA changes from SUBSCRIBER_NUMBER to NATIONAL_NUMBER

• 1=KEEP_NOA—NOA stays the same

routeAdvance • 1=TRUE—if a specific cause value is returned, attempt to route the call on the next trunk group in the route list.

• 0=FALSE—if a specific cause value is returned, the call routes to treatment

Option Name Values

Page 349: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 341990-1012-001

passExtCharForCallingName This option controls how the Calling Name is presented. The Calling Name is conveyed using ASCII characters.

Normally, the Calling Name is composed of characters from the lower half of the 256 ASCII character set.

However, sometimes characters from the upper half are sent as well. Although the upper half of the ASCII character set contains mostly graphics characters, it also contains some characters used in European languages, such as Å, É, and ü.

Unfortunately, some switches will interpret a character from the upper half of the ASCII character set as being the end of the Calling Name (technically, this is called the Extension Bit, and it indicates the last octet in the field). In such a case, you will need to set this attribute to FALSE to prevent the T7000 from confusing the switch at the other end.

Values are:

• FALSE (default) — limits the value of characters in the Calling Name to the lower half of the ASCII character set.

• TRUE — does not limit the values of characters in the Calling Name.

sendCPCategoryAsEmergencyForESGW

Overrides the call type of calls sent from an Emergency Services Gateway. Such calls are translated by the gateway into a 10 digit DN, which may be recognized by the PSAP as a 911 call.

• TRUE — forces the ESGW call type to be e911

• FALSE (default) — sends the default call type for the call.

doNotUseJipForCallingNumber Determines if the call type is determined by JIP (the Jurisdiction information parameter, which is optionally sent by the originating exchange in the IAM message).

Only affects calls which have the JIP available.

• TRUE — do not use the jurisdiction Info number to determine the call type.

• FALSE (default) — use the jurisdiction Info number to determine the call type.

Option Name Values

Page 350: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

342 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 options sendCPCategoryAsEmergencyForESGW TRUEmodify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 options sendSACTNS SAC_CARRIER_0110

recTNSinOutbCarrier This option determines the handling of Carrier Code information in the CDR of a call that was routed using carrier routing.

• TRUE — populate the CDR with the outbound Carrier Code, regardless of how the call is routed.

• FALSE (default) — only populate the CDR with the outbound Carrier Code when the call is routed using Carrier Routing.

passFacilityMessage Determines if the switch passes any received ISUP FACILITY message from an inbound SS7 trunk to the outbound SS7 Trunk Group.

• TRUE — pass any received ISUP FACILITY message on to the outgoing SS7 trunk group.

• FALSE (default) — do not pass the received ISUP FACILITY message on to the outgoing trunk group.

routeOnRcvdCarrier • InbCarrier_OutbCarrier — route on the Incoming Carrier if available, otherwise, route on the Outbound Carrier.

• InbCarrier_only — route on the Incoming Carrier only.

• OutbCarrier_InbCarrier (default)— route on the Outbound Carrier, if available, otherwise, route on the Incoming Carrier.

• OutbCarrier_only — route on the Outbound Carrier only.

NOTE: The incoming carrier is the CARRIER ID parameter received on SS7 trunk groups. The outbound carrier ID is the carrier value received in the TNS parameter for SS7 trunk groups

sendToneOnE911TrunkAt-OnHook

Determines if the switch sends a tone to the PSAP if an E911 caller goes on hook

• TRUE — switch sends dial tone to the PSAP if an E911 caller goes on hook.

• FALSE (default) — no tone is sent

ignore1stFacilityMessage This option determines the handling of the ISUP Facility message. It was added for Canadian 911 service.

• TRUE — ignore the Facility message.

• FALSE (default) — do not ignore the Facility message.

Option Name Values

Page 351: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 343990-1012-001

SS7 Trunk Group Restrictions

SS7 Trunk Group restrictions limits calls to specific areas or NPAs. An SS7 Trunk Group can have zero, one, or more restrictions.

SS7 Trunk Group restrictions have the following attributes

The SS7 Trunk Group restrictions attribute is a bit field, so individual values are:

• 1 — turns the restriction on

• 0 — turns the restriction off.

modify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 restrictions NO_DA 1modify SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 restrictions OS_ONLY 0

Attribute Description

NO_OSSTATION Restrict OS Stations (hotel, motel etc.) calls.

NO_OSDIALED Restrict dialed OS (0+, 00, 0) calls, which allows only OS Station calls.

NO_DA Does not allow directory assistance on the trunk group.

OS_ONLY Restrict all calls except operator services calls.

Add OS trunk groups in a Carrier Route List.

DA_ONLY Restrict all calls except directory assistance calls.

Add DA trunk groups first in a Carrier Route List

NO_INTRALATA Does not allow intraLATA calls (PIC2).

NO_INTERLATA Does not allow interLATA calls (PIC1).

NO_OS_INTRALATA Restrict OS intraLATA calls.

NO_OS_INTERLATA Restrict OS interLATA calls.

NO_DA_INTRALATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the intraLATA carrier (PIC2).

NO_DA_INTERLATA Does not allow directory assistance calls to the interlata carrier (PIC1).

NO_INTERNATIONAL Restrict international calls.

NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL Restrict OS international calls.

NO_INBOUND_PAYSTATION

Does not allow a non-subscriber-initiated call if the information digit/OLI is 7, 29 or 70.

NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT_ANI

Does not allow calls that do not include the ANI.

Page 352: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Groups

344 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding Facilities to a SS7 Trunk GroupinsertInto SS7TrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey> TGFacility <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a trunk to an SS7 Trunk Group’s facilities list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds trunk 0 on the local card to SS7 Trunk Group SSP1:

insertInto SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 facilities 1 SS7Facility Trunk-0-1-27 1

Removing Facilities from a SS7 Trunk GroupdeleteFrom SS7TrunkGroup <key> facilities <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a trunk to an SS7 Trunk Group’s facilities list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

NOTE: You must first lock the Trunk before you can remove it from the Trunk Group.

The following example locks trunk 0 on the local card and then removes it from SS7 Trunk Group SSP1:

lock trunk-0deleteFrom SS7TrunkGroup SSP1 facilities 1

Syntax Description

<key> SS7 Trunk Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to enter the facility.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a facility at the start of the facilities list. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of the facilities list.

<subvalue> This attribute specifies which trunk you want to add to the Trunk Group.

Syntax Description

<key> SS7 Trunk Group name

<subkey> This is the index in the facilities list where you want to remove the facility.

Page 353: 1012 Command Line Interface

Outgoing Signaling Customization

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 345990-1012-001

Outgoing Signaling Customization

Outgoing Signal Customization customizes outgoing signaling information for in-band and out-of-band signaling. This feature alters the outgoing signaling message content and format, without changes to the switch software. Outgoing Signal Customizing changes the following content of signaling messages:

• “CAC Substitution” — uses a Pseudo Carrier Access Code (PCAC) that replaces the original pre-subscribed or dialed CAC in the signaling message.See “CAC Substitution” on page 346.

• “Destination Digit Replacement” — uses a replacement string of digits that replace or overlay digits in an original destination number. The new number is sent as the called number in the signaling message.See “Destination Digit Replacement” on page 346.

• “ANI Replacement” — uses Pseudo ANI (PANI) digits that replace the original ANI (calling number). The PANI is sent out in the outgoing signaling message.See “ANI Replacement” on page 347.

• “ANI II Digit Replacement” — uses PANI II digits that replace the original ANI II digits. The PANI II digits are sent out in the outgoing signaling message. See “ANI II Digit Replacement” on page 347.

• “CSI Replacement” — uses a Pseudo Carrier Selection Information (PCSI) value that defines if a subscriber is presubscribed to a carrier or not. CSI replacement applies only to calls originating on the switch. See “CSI Replacement” on page 348.

NOTE: The Flexible Translation, Routing, and Signaling (FTRS, see “FTRS” on page 223) feature also customizes outgoing signaling information for in-band and out-of-band signaling. If FTRS and Outgoing Signal Customization are provisioned on a switch, FTRS takes priority over Outgoing Signal Customization.

Outgoing Signal Customization only applies to calls originating on the switch, as well as to calls tandemed through the switch on CAS, PRI, IP and SS7 Trunk Groups. This feature applies to all subscriber originations on the switch, including: analog lines, GR-303, a PBX with a default DN, and hunt groups. However, outgoing Signal Customization does not affect:

• E911 calls

CDR

The callType of the CDR is the call type of the call before outgoing signaling customization occurs. Each of the pseudo replacements have their own unique CDR field.

Page 354: 1012 Command Line Interface

Outgoing Signaling Customization

346 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

CAC Substitution

CAC Substitution provisions a PCAC that is sent in the outgoing call setup signal. In standard call processing, the CAC in the outgoing signaling message is the same as the CAC used for routing. When the leading digits of an Original Destination Number match a terminating prefix with a PCAC, this feature sends a different CAC (the PCAC) in the signaling message in place of the one the switch uses to route the call.

• For CAS signaling the switch sends the PCAC in the outgoing signaling message.

• For SS7 signaling the switch sends the PCAC in the optional Transit Network Selection (TNS) and Carrier Identification Parameter (CIP) parameters of the Initial Address Message (IAM). To set the TNS, use the Generic CLI modify command on the Carrier to set the circuit code. See “Carriers” on page 196.

• For PRI signaling, if the TNS Information Element (IE) is sent in the SETUP, the switch sends the PCAC in the TNS IE.

The following objects determine the CAC the switch uses to route the call:

• The pre-subscribed carrier for the subscriber (PIC1/PIC2)

• The carrier from the 101XXXX CAC dialed by the subscriber

• The switch’s default OS and DA carriers

• The switch’s default PIC2 carrier

Destination Digit Replacement

Destination Digit Replacement provisions replacement destination digits sent in outgoing call setup messages. In standard call processing, the destination digits in the outgoing signaling message are the same as the digits dialed by the subscriber or derived by translation in the switch. This feature sends different destination digits in the signaling message than the switch uses to route the call. When the leading digits of an Original Destination Number match a terminating prefix that has replacement digits assigned:

• For CAS signaling the switch sends the modified destination digits in the outgoing signaling message.

• For SS7 signaling the switch sends the modified destination digits in the Called Party parameter of the IAM.

• For PRI signaling the switch sends the modified destination digits in the Called Party Number of the SETUP message.

Page 355: 1012 Command Line Interface

Outgoing Signaling Customization

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 347990-1012-001

ANI Replacement

ANI (calling number) Replacement provisions a Pseudo ANI (PANI) sent in outgoing call setup messages. In standard call processing, the ANI sent in the outgoing signaling message is the same as the ANI of the subscriber. This feature sends a different ANI (the PANI) in the signaling message in place of the subscriber's ANI. When leading digits of an Original Destination Number match a terminating prefix with a PANI assigned:

• For CAS signaling the switch sends the replacement ANI in the outgoing signaling message. (Except for FGC.)

• For SS7 signaling the switch sends the replacement ANI in the Calling Party parameter in the IAM.

• For PRI signaling the switch sends the replacement ANI in the Calling Party Number of the SETUP message.

The following table contains examples of replacing the ANI.

ANI II Digit Replacement

ANI II Digit Replacement provisions Pseudo ANI II (PANI II) digits sent in outgoing call setup messages. In standard call processing, the ANI II digits sent in the outgoing signaling message are the same as the ANI II digits associated with the facility. This feature sends different ANI II digits (the PANI II digits) in the signaling message in place of the ANI II digits associated with a facility. When leading digits of a Original Destination Number match a terminating prefix with PANI II digits assigned:

• For CAS signaling the switch sends the PANI II digits in the outgoing signaling message.

• For SS7 signaling the switch sends the PANI II digits in the IAM.

Original No. Dialed

Original ANI(Dialing)

PANIANI in Outgoing

Signal

972 692 1909 214 597 1234 817 817

972 692 1909 214 597 1234 817 540 817 540

972 692 1909 214 597 1234 817 540 5575 817 540 5575

972 692 1909 214 597 1234 817 540 5575 817 540 5575

Page 356: 1012 Command Line Interface

Outgoing Signaling Customization

348 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

CSI Replacement

Replaces the Carrier Selection Information (PCSI) value, which defines if a subscriber is presubscribed to a carrier or not. CSI replacement applies only to calls originating on the switch. The CSI is an optional parameter in the SS7 Initial Addressing Message (IAM). For CAS, the CSI is the KP digit in the ANI sequence. The CSI value overrides the ANI KP type in the CAS protocol.Outgoing Signal

CSI Value Outpulse

SS7

Selected CAC presubscribed and not input by calling party 0000 0001

Selected CAC presubscribed and input by calling party 0000 0010

Selected CAC presubscribed, no indication of whether input by calling party

0000 0011

Selected CAC not presubscribed and input by calling party 0000 0100

CAS

Selected CAC presubscribed and not input by calling party • FGCOS — DP=KPDTMF=KP'’

• FGDAT/OS — DP=KP DTMF=KP’’

Selected CAC presubscribed and input by calling party • FGCOS — DP=KP’DTMF=KP’’

• FGDAT/OS — DP=KP’DTMF=KP’’’

Selected CAC presubscribed, no indication of whether input by calling party

• FGCOS — DP=KPDTMF=KP’’

• FGDAT/OS — DP=KPDTMF=KP’’

Selected CAC not presubscribed and input by calling party • FGCOS — DP=KP’DTMF=KP’’’

• FGDAT/OS — DP=KP’DTMF=KP’’’

Page 357: 1012 Command Line Interface

Outgoing Signaling Customization

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 349990-1012-001

Replacement Mode

Controls what is or is not replaced on a Prefix, i.e., sets the replacement mode for a prefix on the switch. For details, see “Prefixes” on page 403, and “replacementMode” on page 405.

The following table contains examples of digit replacement.

Original No. PrefixReplacement

DigitsDigits in

Outgoing SignalDescription

Replace Prefix

972 692 1909 972 692 817 540 817 540 1909 Same length replacement of the prefix

972 692 1909 972 692 540 540 1909 Shorter replacement of the prefix

972 692 1909 972 692 817 540 4 817 540 4 1909 Longer replacement of the prefix

Overlay Original Destination Digits

972 692 1909 972 692 817 540 817 540 1909 Same length overlay of digits

972 692 1909 972 692 817 817 692 1909 Shorter overlay of digits

972 692 1909 972 692 817 540 4 817 540 4909 Longer overlay of digits

Replace Original Destination Digits

972 692 1909 972 692 817540 817540 Same length replacement of digits

972 692 1909 972 692 817 817 Shorter replacement of digits

972 692 1909 972 692 817 5 404 817 5 404 Longer replacement of digits

972 692 1909 972 692 1909 817 540 5575 817 540 5575 Same length replacement of digits

555 1212 972 555 1212 004 555 1212 004 555 1212 972 is the home NPA of the caller

1411, 411 or 0411 214 411 005 555 1212 005 555 1212 214 is the home NPA of the caller

Page 358: 1012 Command Line Interface

Outgoing Signaling Customization

350 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Customization Provisioning Process

Outgoing Signal Customization is provisioned on the prefix and carrier and controlled on trunk groups. Use the following steps to provision outgoing signal customization on the switch:

1. Use these commands to provision the outgoing signal customization on the prefix:

• Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see “Prefixes” on page 403) “PCAC” attribute to set the Pseudo CAC (PCAC) for a prefix sent in the outgoing call setup signal.

• Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see “Prefixes” on page 403) “replacementDigits” attribute to set replacement destination digits (called number) for the original destination number in the outgoing call setup message.

• Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see “Prefixes” on page 403) and the replacementMode attribute (see “replacementMode” on page 405) to set the replacement mode for a prefix.

• Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see “Prefixes” on page 403) “replacementCSI” attribute to set the replacement CSI for subscriber.

• Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see “Prefixes” on page 403) “replacementAniDigits” attribute to set the replacement digits for the ANI (calling number) of a call.

• Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Prefix object (see “Prefixes” on page 403) “replacementInfoDigits” attribute to set Pseudo ANI II (PANI II) digits sent in outgoing call setup messages.

2. Use the Generic CLI modify command to set the PCAC for a carrier object that is sent in the outgoing call setup signal. See “Carriers” on page 196.

3. Use the Generic CLI modify command on the Carrier to set the circuit code in the optional Transit Network Selection (TNS) parameter sent with the associ-ated CAC or PCAC, when using SS7 trunks. See “Carriers” on page 196.

4. Use the Generic CLI modify command to control the use of digit, PCAC, ANI, and ANI II digit replacement on a trunk group. This enables the outgoing signal customization feature on the applicable trunk groups. See “Trunk Groups” on page 233.

Page 359: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 351990-1012-001

GR-303

General Requirements (GR)-303 is a group of specifications. The switch uses GR-303 to be part of an Integrated Digital Loop Carrier (IDLC) system. The GR-303 option configures and connects the switch to a Remote Digital Terminal (RDT). The RDT, in turn, connects to subscribers’ telephones.

createRDTThis command was replaced in Release 6.0.1 with the Generic CLI create command. See “Interface Groups” on page 258

replaceRDTreplaceRDT <name> <location> <vendor> <primarySpanOID> <primarySpanLogicalID> <secondarySpanOID> <secondarySpanLogicalID> [flow-thru provisioning]

This command changes the attributes of an existing RDT. See “createRDT” on page 351 for information on each attribute.

C A U T I O N

Replacing an RDT may negatively affect operations.

replaceeRDT RDT1

Dependent Commands

Add analog lines and spans:

• see “provisionRDTLine” on page 353

Page 360: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303

352 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

reprovisionRDTreprovisionRDT rdtName

This command reprovisions an RDT. Use this command if you are replacing an RDT. This command works whether or not flow-through provisioning (FTP) is enabled. With FTP enabled, you can reprovision the RDT using CLI. Without FTP enabled, this command just cycles through the initialization phase without provisioning.

Prerequisites

RDT, see “createRDT” on page 351

reprovisionRDT RDT1

Dependent Commands

After reprovisioning the RDT, you can:

• Provision analog lines on the RDT, if it allows FTP, “provisionRDTLine” on page 353.

• Resynchronize the EOC and TMC, “syncRDTLine” on page 356.

Syntax Description

rdtName RDT name

Page 361: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 353990-1012-001

provisionRDTLineprovisionRDTLine <rdtName> <startTermId> [endTermId] [loop | ground] [2wire | 4wire] [setOOS]

This command provisions one or more RDT analog lines connecting the RDT to subscribers.

Prerequisites

RDT, see “createRDT” on page 351.

provisionRDTLine RDT1 1 100 loop 2wire

Dependent Commands

After you add analog lines you can:

• add GR-303 subscribers, see “Subscribers” on page 530.

• bring the line into service, “restoreRDTLine” on page 355.

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

<startTermId> the number of the first analog line on the RDT to add (1-2048)

[endTermId] number of the last analog line on the RDT to add. If adding only one analog line, do not enter this value.

[loop

ground]

• loopstart — if the RDT provides battery on the ring and ground on the tip

• groundstart — if the RDT provides battery on the ring and open (0 VDC) on the tip.

NOTE: The RDT must have a line card that can recognize groundstart

[2wire 4wire]

• 2wire — terminating switch is analog

• 4wire — terminating switch is digital

[setOOS] sets the line(s) out of service

NOTE: To put the line in the in-service state, ensure the physical connection has been made and skip this parameter.

Page 362: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303

354 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

deprovisionRDTLinedeprovisionRDTLine <rdtName> <termId> [endTermId]

This command deprovisions one or more RDT analog lines connecting the RDT to subscribers.

NOTE: Deprovisioning does not remove an analog line from service, but removes the attributes set when provisioning the analog lines. To remove an analog line from service, see “removeRDTLine” on page 355.

Prerequisites

RDT lines, see “provisionRDTLine” on page 353.

deprovisionRDTLine RDT1 1 100

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

<termId> number of the first analog line on the RDT you want to deprovision (1-2048)

[endTermId] number of the last analog line on the RDT to deprovision

if deprovisioning only one analog line, do not enter this parameter

Page 363: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 355990-1012-001

restoreRDTLinerestoreRDTLine <rdtName> <termId>

This command restores an RDT analog line connecting an RDT to a subscriber. Restoring an RDT analog line places a provisioned RDT analog line back in service.

Prerequisites

RDT lines, see “provisionRDTLine” on page 353.

RDT lines, see “removeRDTLine” on page 355.

restoreRDTLine RDT1 515

removeRDTLineremoveRDTLine <rdtName> <termId> [normal | forced]

This command removes an RDT analog line connecting an RDT to a subscriber. Removing an RDT analog line does not deprovision the line (i.e. remove the line’s attributes). Removing an RDT analog line actually removes that line from service.

Prerequisites

RDT lines, see “provisionRDTLine” on page 353.

removeRDTLine RDT1 515 normal

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

<termld> number of the RDT analog line on the RDT to restore (1-2048)

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

<termld> number of the RDT analog line on the RDT to remove (1-2048)

[normal

forced]

• normal — removes the RDT analog line from service after all calls currently in progress have been completed

• forced — removes the RDT analog line from service regardless of whether or not calls are in progress. Calls in progress on that line are dropped

Page 364: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303

356 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

syncDS1LinesyncDS1Line <rdtName> <startLineId> [endLineId]

This command retrieves the status of a DS1 spans connecting a switch to an RDT. When a RDT is physically disconnected, but not deprovisioned, use syncDS1Line after a new RDT is connected. The DS1 should automatically resync, but this command ensures that they are resynced..

syncDS1Line RDT1 1 28

syncRDTLinesyncRDTLine <rdtName> <startTermId> [endTermId]

This command retrieves the status of an RDT analog line connecting an RDT to a subscriber.

Prerequisites.

RDT lines, see “provisionRDTLine” on page 353.

syncRDTLine RDT1 1 2048

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

<startLineId> first DS1 to sync (1-28)

[endLineId] last DS1 to sync (1-28)

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

<startTermId> first RDT analog line on the RDT to sync (1-2048)

[endTermId] last RDT analog line on the RDT to sync (1-2048)

Page 365: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 357990-1012-001

syncRDTClock syncRDTClock <rdtName>

This command synchronizes the RDT clock to the T7000 clock.

NOTE: Not all RDT’s support this command. Consult your equipment documentation.

Prerequisites

RDT with EOC or TMC, see “createRDT” on page 351..

syncRDTClock RDT1

setEOCTaskssetEOCTasks <rdtName> <on | off>

This command turns background tasks on/off. These tasks are audits between the switch and the RDT.

Prerequisites

RDT with EOC or TMC, see “createRDT” on page 351..

setEOCTasks RDT1 off

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

Syntax Description

<rdtName> name of RDT

<onoff>

• on — turns EOC audits on

• off — turns EOC audits off

Page 366: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

358 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

MGCP

Order of Provisioning

For information on the commands included in the above provisioning flow, refer to the following topics in the VoIP section:

• “setFeifIPAddr” on page 422

• “setFeifOptions” on page 424

• “CodecProfile” on page 427

• “CodecProfileList” on page 425

• “MediaParam” on page 431

The Generic CLI is used for all MGCP commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

Page 367: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 359990-1012-001

MGCP Trunk Group

An MGCP trunk group has the following attributes:

attribute value

key MGCP trunk group name. See the suggested naming convention for Trunk Groups on page 233.

options The options for this trunk group. See “MGCPTrunk Group Options” on page 363.

selectionMethod Note: This field is read-only.

• FIRST_AVAILABLE — always select the first available route

• ROUND_ROBIN (default) — use the available routes sequentially

defaultDN In the defaultDN field, enter the default directory number (DN) for a trunk group used for screening incoming IP calls on this trunk group. Also, add a default subscriber with this number. See See “Subscribers” on page 530..

tandemDefaultRoutingType The order route lists are used if the T7000 has a tandem trunk group route list provisioned, but this route list does not have trunks assigned:

• USE_CARRIER_NANP — Calls default to a carrier route list. If a carrier is not assigned, calls default to a NANP route list

• USE_NANP_CARRIER — Calls default to a NANP route list. If a NANP route list is not assigned, calls default to a carrier route list

• USE_CARRIER_ONLY — Calls default to a carrier route list. If the carrier is assigned, but the carrier route list is does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

• USE_NANP_ONLY — Calls default to a NANP route list. If the a NANP route list is assigned, but the NANP route list does not have trunks assigned to it, route to treatment.

miscOptions Miscellaneous options are added using ISUs. These appear at the trunk group level.

denyAniList The name of a previously created screening list. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see “Screen Lists” on page 415.

Page 368: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

360 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

direction • ONE_WAY_IN — One-way incoming trunk groups allow incoming calls, but not outgoing calls. The facilities are dedicated to receiving calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

• ONE_WAY_OUT — One-way outgoing trunk groups allow outgoing calls, but not incoming calls. The facilities are dedicated to sending calls. When the connection is made, however, data or voice can travel in both directions.

NOTE: ONE_WAY_IN and ONE_WAY_OUT trunk groups work together to allow two-way communication. A ONE_WAY_OUT trunk group from one switch connects to a ONE_WAY_IN trunk group at another switch.

• BI_DIRECTIONAL — Bi-directional trunk groups allow both incoming and outgoing calls. In a bi-directional trunk group, a trunk can be an incoming trunk on one call and an outgoing trunk on the next call

tandemCustomReplacement

Used to outpulse 7 digits for tandem calls.

• NO (default) — no special outpulsing is performed.

• YES — outpulse 7 digits for non-ported subscribers. See “7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing” on page 409

codecListName The name of the codec list for this trunk group. A codec list is a container for codec profiles that are associated with one or more IP or MGCP trunk groups. See “CodecProfileList” on page 425.

mediaParamName The name of the media stream parameter for this trunk group. Media stream parameters control the characteristics of the bearer or RTP portion of a VoIP call. See “MediaParam” on page 431.

maximumCalls The maximum number of active calls this trunk group can handle. Since an MGCP trunk group has no physical facilities, there would otherwise be no limit to the number of calls that a subscriber or a group of subscribers could originate or terminate.

activeCalls Note: This field is read-only.

This dynamic field shows the number of calls the trunk group is currently carrying.

operationalState Note: This field is read-only.

• UNREACHABLE — Network problems are preventing the switch from communicating with the IP endpoint at the other end of the MGCP Trunk Group.

• REACHABLE— the switch can communicate with the IP endpoint at the other end of the MGCP Trunk Group

attribute value

Page 369: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 361990-1012-001

administrativeState Note: This field is read-only.

• LOCKED — The MGCP Trunk Group is administratively prohibited from providing services. See “lock” on page 7.

• UNLOCKED — The MGCP Trunk Group is administratively allowed to provide services. See “unlock” on page 7.

• SHUTTING_DOWN — The MGCP Trunk Group is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the last service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See “shutdown” on page 7.

bearerAuditTimer1 The time, in milliseconds, after the IP call is established to initiate a check for received RTP packets. The default is 3600000 milliseconds (3600 seconds, or one hour).

bearerAuditTimer2 The time, in milliseconds, after bearerAuditTimer1 has expired to check for received RTP packets.

The default. is 600000 milliseconds (600 seconds, or ten minutes)

auditBearerResources This flag enables or disables bearer audits. Bearer audits timers prevent a hung IP call from using bandwidth. When bearer audits are enabled, the switch compares RTP packet counts from bearerAuditTimer1 and bearerAuditTimer2. If the count is the same, indicating that no RTP packets have been exchanged, the switch tears down the call. If the count is different, indicating RTP packets have been exchanged, auditing restarts. The default is TRUE.

digitMapKey Assigned key string for customized Digit Map. See “Digit Maps” on page 378.

attribute value

Page 370: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

362 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Creating an MGCP Trunk Group

The Generic CLI is used for all MGCP Trunk Group commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• defaultDN

Modifying an MGCP Trunk Group

The modify command applies only to the following attributes:

• options

• defaultDN

• tandemDefaultRoutingType

• denyAniList

• direction

• codecListName

• mediaParamName

• maximumCalls

• bearerAuditTimer1

• bearerAuditTimer2

• auditBearerResources

• digitMapKey

create CardConfiguration pic1 PIC 10create MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1modify MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1 maximumCalls 250lock MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1destroy MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1

Page 371: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 363990-1012-001

MGCPTrunk Group Options

An MGCP Trunk Group Options object contains the options that control the behavior of a MGCP Trunk Group.

MGCP Trunk Group Options have the following attributes:

modify MGCPTrunkGroup ipgrp1 options supportEarlyCutThrough ON

Option Name Values

supportEarlyCutThrough For devices (typically IVRs) that need to cut through the two-way voice path before the call is answered. Do not set this option for devices that support cutting through the two-way voice path after the call is answered.

Values are:

• ON — support early cut through of the two-way voice path before the call is answered.

• OFF — (default) do not support early cut through of the two-way voice path before the call is answered.

Page 372: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

364 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

MediaGatewayProfile

A MediaGatewayProfile defines different types of media gateways. Associate one or more MediaGateways with a media MediaGatewayProfile.

A MediaGatewayProfile has the following attributes:

attribute values

key name of MediaGatewyaProfile

terminationPrefix the prefix portion of the analog access line local termination names:

aaln/# — analog access lines, for example: aaln/1, aaln/2

phone — phones, for example: phone1, phone2

requestedInfo a bitfield of information the T7000 can audit. These options are individually turned on or off by name.

• REQUESTED_EVENTS

• DIGIT_MAP

• SIGNAL_REQUESTS

• REQUEST_IDENTIFIER

• NOTIFIED_ENTITY

• CONNECTION_IDENTIFIER

• DETECT_EVENTS

• OBSERVED_EVENTS

• VERSION_SUPPORTED

• REASON_CODE

• EVENT_STATES (default)

• MAX_MGCP_DATAGRAM

• CAPABILITIES

quarantineHandling • NONE — If the MediaGateway cannot process the MGCP command CRCX’s Q parameter, set this to NONE

• STEP — one notification per NotificationRequest is allowed

• LOOP — (default) multiple notifications per NotificationRequest are allowed

supportedPackages a bitfield of packages supported by the T7000. These options are individually turned on or off by name.

• LINE — (default)

• GENERIC — (default)

• DTMF — (default)

• MEDIA_FORMAT

Page 373: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 365990-1012-001

signalSupport a bitfield that describes the behavior of a signal sent to the MediaGateway. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example.

NOTE: Gateways from different vendors require different sets of attributes. Before setting these attributes, Read Your Friendly Manual to see which attributes your Gateway requires!

• CRCXorRQNTwithTO — when sending a CRCX or RQNT, include a "t" with the digit map parameter. Some MTAs won't work without the "t"

• CRCXwoSDP — send offering CRCX without SDP. Send MDCX with SDP after call been established

• DetectEvt4EmbedRQNT — send Detect Events in embedded RQNT

• IgnoreOffOnHookEvts — when the PostEmbeddedRQNT option is selected, the NOTIFY received may contain OffHook and OnHook events without any digits. This option allows the switch to ignore the OffHook/OnHook event and not send a CRCX/DLCX... when Media Terminations is in the idle (OnHook) state

• LCFOSupport — select if the MTA/CM supports the ability to send the Loop Current Feed Open (LCFO) signal when the termination disconnects, required by some terminations (default is on)

• MDCXonConnect — if enabled the T7000 sends MDCX when the call has been answered (default is off)

• MDCXonTransient — after the subscriber has dialed all of their digits, some MTAs require the Call Agent to send a MDCX indicating a media direction of "sendRecevie". Otherwise, when the called party answers, they get a one way voice path

• PostEmbeddedRQNT— send an embedded RQNT when the MGCP phone goes onhook. This RQNT contains a digitMap (D: field). The next time the MGCP phone goes offhook, it plays dial tone and collects digits, based on the digitMap. When the phone matches a dialing pattern from the digitmap, or detects an inter-digit timeout, it sends a NOTIFY containing both the offhook event and collected digits.

TipIf the MGCP phone supports an embedded RQNT, Taqua recommends using this option, since it results in significantly fewer messages passed between the phone and the switch.

attribute values

Page 374: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

366 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

signalSupport(continued)

• ROHToggle — if S:ot(-) is sent to MTA/CM to turn off ROH at ROH timeout (default is off)

• RQNTonHookEvent — if enabled the T7000 sends RQNT when it receives NOTIFY hook event (off hook, on hook or flash hook). Set this flag to support Motorola and Scientific Atlanta EMTA's, and other devices that require an RQNT after a hook event

• RQNTorCRCXwSpecialDfield — if enabled the T7000 sends a RQNT with a special string in the D: field. This option can be used to customize communication with certain gateways. See “specialDfieldStr” on page 369

• SendAUEPatTO — with this attribute set and upon receiving a timeout response from an AUEP or RQNT, the Call Agent will send an AUEP. Without that setting, the switch will assume the phone is idle and on hook. Leaving this attribute unset can keep the switch from flooding the ethernet with messages (on large scale failures).

• bracketType — controls the type of bracketing added by the T7000 if the bracketedIP attribute is enabled. Has no effect if the bracketedIP attribue is disabled.

– disabled - [ip]:port

– enabled - [ip:port]

• bracketedIP — if enabled, the T7000 adds brackets to the notified entity field of MGCP messages that are sent from the PIC. The type of brackets is controlled by the bracketType attribute

• cidCWaitSupport — if MTA/CM supports S:rg,ci() signal for caller id call waiting (default is on)

• digitMapForMidCall — use the digit map specified for this gateway when collecting digits in the middle of a call (for example, after hook flash). This attribue is not set by default, which means that the call agent will request the MTA to send one digit at a time.

• keepAlive — if enabled, the T7000 sends an AUEP every <keepAliveTime> interval to keep firewall hole open for signaling path between T7000 and MTA/CM

• mwiToggle — if turning off MWI stutter dial tone is indicated as S:L/mwi(-) or S:L/dl on the next call after voice mail indicator transition from YES to NO (default is off)

• reorderForROH — certain gateways do not accept the ROH signal S:L/ot. If enabled S:L/ro is sent instead of ROH

• resendAUEP — resend AUEP if bit set using 'auditInterval' in MGTerminationProfile

attribute values

Page 375: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 367990-1012-001

DLCXOptions mechanism to delete a residual connection on the media gateway when it administratively transitions from locked to unlocked

• NO_DLCX(default) — no DLCX is sent

• PREFIX_TERM_ID — one DLCX is sent for every termination on the gateway (default)

• PREFIX_STAR — one DLCX (with the terminationPrefix *) is sent to the gateway

• STAR_ONLY — one DLCX (with the *) as the endpoint to the gateway

encodeDigitMap • UPPERCASE — where D: x is uppercase

• LOWERCASE — where D: x is lowercase (default)

THIST the time, in milliseconds, that the T7000 waits before resending to the media gateway the last MGCP command the media gateway sent

• range 10,000-60,000

• 30,000 (default)

retransmitTime initial timer value, in milliseconds, for the T7000 to retransmit the MGCP command it sent, if a response is not received by the T7000

• range 100-2,000

• 200 (default)

keepAliveTime If mgKeepAliveToggle is set to ON (in the signalSupport parameter), then this is the value of the interval

• range 1,000-180,000

• 60,000 (default)

MAX1 number of retransmits before trying another IP address of a media gateway, must be less than MAX2

• range 5-25

• 7 (default)

MAX2 number of retransmits before disconnecting the association with a media gateway, must be greater than MAX1

• range 5-25

• 11 (default)

TMAX maximum time to continue retransmitting commands to the media gateway

• range 0-20000

• 20000 (default)

minRTOThresh lower threshold for which the retransmission timer starts

• 200-2,000

• 1,000 (default)

attribute values

Page 376: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

368 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

maxRTOThresh upper threshold for which the retransmission timer starts

• 2,000-10,000

• 4,000 (default)

responseAckParam whether or not to send the transaction IDs included in the K line of the MGCP command (ResponseAck — manages the facility with a list of “confirmed transaction-id ranges”), this adds previously unacknowledged transaction IDs to a new transaction (see responseAckNum to set the number of transaction IDs added)

• INCLUDE (default)

• NOT_INCLUDE

responseAckNum

TipYou cannot modify this attribute after setting it. To change the value, delete and re-create the MediaGatewayProfile.

number of transaction IDs included in the K line of the MGCP command (see responseAckParam)

• 1-50

• 10 (default)

enablePiggyback Internal value

allows the T7000 to send several MGCP messages at the same time to one or more terminations on a media gateway and vice versa

For example, after getting NOTIFY from a termination operating in lockstep mode, the T7000 sends the response and a new NotificationRequest command together to ensure message delivery fate-sharing of the two.

• ENABLE

• DISABLE (default)

piggybackTime time to wait before sending a list of commands together using piggyback

• 0-200

• 200 (default)

transLowWaterMark maximum pending transactions before the T7000 stops sending 101 Provisional Responses

• 0-100

• 25 (default)

transHighWaterMark minimum pending transactions from the media gateway when the T7000 starts to send 101 Provisional Responses

• 0-100

• 50 (default)

attribute values

Page 377: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 369990-1012-001

provRespTime time to wait for a media gateway retransmission, after which the T7000 sends a Provisional Response

• 100-1,000

• 200 (default)

responseRetransEnabled enables retransmission of a response when the media gateway sends a Provisional Response

• YES (default)

• NO

keepIPAddrFromSTATICtoRSIP

• YES (default) — if the address Mode changes from STATIC, do not reset the IP address.

• NO — reset the IP address when the address Mode changes from STATIC

specialDfieldStr A custom digit map sent when RQNTorCRCXwSpecialDfield is set in “signalSupport” on page 365.

TipSupport for Occum ([0-9#*]) is build into the switch software, and is automatically sent when RQNTorCRCXwSpecialDfield is set. Populate this field only for equipment requiring a different custom digit map.

attribute values

Page 378: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

370 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for All MediaGatewayProfile command, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• terminationPrefix

The modify command applies only to the following parameters:

• terminationPrefix

• requestedInfo

• quarantineHandling

• supportedPackages

• signalSupport

• DLCXOptions

• encodeDigitMap

• THIST

• retransmitTime

• keepAliveTime

• MAX1

• MAX2

• TMAX

• minRTOThresh

• maxRTOThresh

• responseAckParam

• enablePiggyback

• piggybackTime

• transLowWaterMark

• transHighWaterMark

• provRespTime

• responseRetransEnabled

• keepIPAddrFromSTATICtoRSIP

• spedialDfieldStr

create MediaGatewayProfile p "aaln/"modify MediaGatewayProfile p requestedInfo DIGIT_MAP 1modify MediaGatewayProfile p signalSupport CRCXorRQNTwithTimeout 1

Page 379: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 371990-1012-001

MediaGateway

A MediaGateway has the following attributes:

attribute value

key name of the MTA/CM

endpointName a more descriptive or intuitive name for the MTA/CM

profileName name of MediaGatewayProfile associated with this MediaGateway. See “MediaGatewayProfile” on page 364.

bearerGrpKey name of the BearerGroup associated with this MediaGateway. See “BearerGroup” on page 163.

priHostIPAddrPair If using STATIC as the addressMode this is the primary IP address and port of the MTA/CM.

If using RSIP as the addressMode, this attribute should be left blank

actHostIndex • HOST_NOT_USED

• OUTBOUND_PROXY_ACTIVE

• PRIMARY_HOST_ACTIVE

• SECONDARY_HOST_ACTIVE

transportType The IP protocol used for signaling

• UDP (default)

• TCP

signalingType signaling to use when communicating with the MGCP gateway:

• MGCP 1.0 (default)

• MGCP_NCS — MGCP 1.0 NCS 1.0

cmtsName Name of the CMTS of this endpoint

FQDN If the IP address mode for the gateway is DNS, this is the full-qualified domain name of the MTA/CM.

administrativeState • LOCKED — The MediaGateway is administratively prohibited from providing services. See “lock” on page 7.

• UNLOCKED — The MediaGateway is administratively allowed to provide services. See “unlock” on page 7.

• SHUTTING_DOWN — The MediaGateway is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the last service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See “shutdown” on page 7

domain the domain portion of the termination identifier in MGCP messages. For example, in: [email protected], “taqua.com” is the domain name

Page 380: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

372 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

addressMode how the T7000 initiates communication with the media gateway

• STATIC — The T7000 specifies the IP address. If the MTA/CM tries to communicate with a different address the T7000 rejects it.

• RSIP — (default) the MTA/CM dynamically specifies the IP address

nearEndNiOid Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF). See “OID” on page 30.

This is the interface and associated IP address on the T7000 used to communicate with the MTA/CM.

terminations a list of MGCP terminations associated with this MediaGateway.

attribute value

Page 381: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 373990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all MediaGateway commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• profileName

• bearerGrpKey

• domain

• nearEndNiOid

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• endpointName

• profileName

• priHostIPAddrPair

• signalingType

• cmtsName

• FQDN

• domain

• addressMode

• nearEndNiOid

Use the lock and unlock commands before modifying a MediaGateway.

create MediaGateway gw1 p bg_mg1 "gw1.taqua.com" fe-0lock MediaGateway gw1modify MediaGateway gw1 priHostIPAddrPair $IP_ADDR:2400modify MediaGateway gw1 addressMode STATIC

Page 382: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

374 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

MGTerminationProfile

A MGTerminationProfile defines different types of MediaGateway terminations. Associate MediaGateway terminations with these profiles.

A MGTerminationProfile has the following attributes:

attribute value

key name of MGTerminationProfile

auditInterval rate, in milliseconds, at which AuditEndpoint (AUEP) messages are sent to the termination to synchronize it with the T7000.

AUEP messages determines the status of a termination and aids in debugging. Also used by NCS.

• 60,000-1800000

• 60,000 (default)

timedDisconnectTime for terminating calls, the time to wait (in milliseconds) after the called party has gone on hook before initiating disconnect procedures

• 2,000-10,000

• 5,000 (default)

reoriginateTime time to wait (in milliseconds) after call completes before reorigination is started

• 1,000-10,000

• 2,000 (default)

LCFODuration the duration (in milliseconds) of the Loop Current Feed Open (LCFO) signal. This signaling is required by some terminations.

• 0-7500 — If set to 0, then no LCFO is signaled to the termination.

• 700 (default)

sendLCFO • ENABLE — send LCFO to the termination (default)

• DISABLE — do not send LCFO to the termination

priorityCallRingPattern ring pattern to send for priority call

• rg — mgcpRingDefault

• r0 — mgcpRing0

• r1 — mgcpRing1

• r2 — mgcpRing2

• r3 — mgcpRing3

• r4 — mgcpRing4

• r5 — mgcpRing5 (default)

Page 383: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 375990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all MG Termination Profile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The modify command applies only to the following parameters:

• auditInterval

• timedDisconnectTime

• reoriginateTime

• LCFODuration

• sendLCFO

• priorityCallRingPattern

• acarRingPattern

• revertiveRingPattern

acarRingPattern ring pattern to send for automatic callback/automatic call return alerting

• rg — mgcpRingDefault

• r0 — mgcpRing0

• r1 — mgcpRing1

• r2 — mgcpRing2

• r3 — mgcpRing3 (default)

• r4 — mgcpRing4

• r5 — mgcpRing5

revertiveRingPattern ring pattern to send for revertive ringing

• rg — mgcpRingDefault

• r0 — mgcpRing0

• r1 — mgcpRing1 (default)

• r2 — mgcpRing2

• r3 — mgcpRing3

• r4 — mgcpRing4

• r5 — mgcpRing5

attribute value

Page 384: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

376 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

MGTermination

A MGTrmination (MediaGateway) has some of the characteristics of lines or trunks. But MGTerminations are like GR-303 CRVs in that they must always belong to an MGCP trunk group. You cannot remove an MGTermination from an MGCP trunk group, but you can move it from one MGCP trunk group to another.

NOTE: Lock MG terminations to move them from one MGCP trunk group to another. See “lock” on page 7

An MGTermination has the following attributes:

attribute value

key name of the MGTermination

mediaGatewayName name of MediaGateway.

termID number of MGTermination (similar to GR-303’s CRV)

profileName name of MGTerminationProfile associated with this MGTermination is. See “MGTerminationProfile” on page 374.

mgcpTrunkGroupName name of MGCP trunk group associated with this MGTermination.

administrativeState The Administrative state of the MGTermination.

• LOCKED — The MGTermination is administratively prohibited from providing services. See “lock” on page 7.

• UNLOCKED — The MGTermination is administratively allowed to provide services. See “lock” on page 7.

• SHUTTING_DOWN — The MGTermination is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the current service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See “shutdown” on page 7.

masterAdministrativeState The Administrative state of the MGCP Trunk Group that contains this MGTermination. If the masterAdminstrative state is UNLOCKED, call processing uses the administrative state attribute, otherwise, it uses the masterAdministrative state.

• LOCKED — The MGCP Trunk Group is administratively prohibited from providing services. See “lock” on page 7.

• UNLOCKED — The MGCP Trunk Group is administratively allowed to provide services. See “unlock” on page 7.

• SHUTTING_DOWN — The MGCP Trunk Group is currently providing services, but no new services are allowed to start. As soon as the last service completes, the administrativeState will automatically transition to LOCKED. See “shutdown” on page 7.

Page 385: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 377990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all MG Termination commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• mediaGatewayName

• termID

• profileName

• mgcpTrunkGroupName

The modify command applies only to the following parameters:

• profileName

• mgcpTrunkGroupName

NOTE: Use the lock and lock commands before modifying a MediaGateway.

Page 386: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

378 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Digit Maps

A Digit Map specifies one or more Digit Map patterns. A Digit Map is used to streamline call processing between the switch and an MGCP endpoint. Once a Digit Map is sent to an MGCP endpoint, the MTA uses the Digit Map patterns to collect the digits in a call, which it sends to the switch in one NTFY message. This is much more efficient than sending one digit at a time in a series of NTFY messages - all of which have to be acknowledged with a 200 OK reply.

Consider the dialing plan in use at the CO when building up a Digit Map. In some cases, a single generic Digit Map pattern will suffice. In others cases, you may need to define several specific Digit Map patterns.

Use the following characters to construct a Digit Map pattern.

A Digit Map pattern can be short and simple, or it can be a long, complex string of characters. Here are some example Digit Map patterns, ranging from simple to complex:

Character Description

0, 1, 2, 3...9 Digits 0 through 9, specified explicitly

X Any digit 0 through 9

[ ] Specifies a grouping of digits. Any one digit from the group satisfies the digitpattern.

[ - ] Specifies a range of digits. Any one digit from the range satisfies the digit pattern.

* Specifies the star key

# Specifies the pound key

T Specifies a timeout. Used to terminate a pattern.

Digit Map Meaning

"00" Dial 0, 0

"*XX" Dial any two digits, 0 through 9

"[2-9]11" Dial any single digit, 2 through 9,

then 1, 1.

The resultant patterns are: 211, 311, 411 … 911

"[01][2-9]11" Dial either 0 or 1,

then any single digit, 2 through 9,

then 1, 1

The resultant patterns are:

0211, 0311, 0411 … 0911, and

1211, 1311, 1411 … 1911

"0[T#]" Dial 0,

then either the pound key or a timeout specifies the end of the dialing pattern.

Page 387: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 379990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all Digit Map commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• patterns

See “Adding a Pattern to a Digit Map” on page 380, and “Removing a Pattern from a Digit Map” on page 381.

create DigitMap n11

"101XXXX[2-9]XXXXXX[T#]"

Dial 1, 0, 1,

then any 4 digits from 0 through 9,

then any single digit 2 through 9,

then any six digits 0 through 9

then either the pound key or a timeout specifies the end of the dialing pattern.

(The resultant patterns are too numerous to list!)

Digit Map Meaning

Page 388: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

380 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding a Pattern to a Digit MapinsertInto DigitMap <key> patterns <subkey> DigitMapPattern <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a Digit Map pattern into a Digit Map’s patterns list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

insertInto DigitMap n11 patterns 1 DigitMapPattern "[2-9]11"

query DigitMap n11<490a140> DigitMapkey........"n11"patterns...<490af60>

<490af60> DigitMapList collection...List (1 items) -> (1) <490cc50> DigitMapPattern pattern..."[2-9]11"

Syntax Description

<key> Digit Map name

<subkey> This is the index in the pattern list where you want to enter the Digit Map pattern.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a DigitMap pattern at the start of the patterns list. Use a index of -1 to insert a DigitMap pattern at the end of the patterns list.

<subvalue> This attribute specifies the Digit Map Pattern

Page 389: 1012 Command Line Interface

MGCP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 381990-1012-001

Removing a Pattern from a Digit MapdeleteFrom DigitMap <key> patterns <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a Digit Map pattern from a Digit Map’s patterns list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

deleteFrom DigitMap n11 patterns 1

query DigitMap n11

<490a140> DigitMapkey........"n11"patterns...<490af60>

<490af60> DigitMapList collection...List (0 items) ->

Syntax Description

<key> Digit Map name

subkey This is the index in the pattern list where you want to remove the Digit Map Pattern.

Page 390: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

382 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

OfficeParams

The OfficeParms object contains parameters that affect the entire switch

An OfficeParms object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key name of the switch

CLLICode signed CLLI (Common Language Location ID) code

Lata three digit Local access and transport area identifier

options The options for this Officeparms object. See “OfficeParms Options” on page 389.

OS Provider name of the office-default carrier providing Operator Services (OS)

If present, restrict must also be present

DA Provider name of the office-default carrier providing Directory Assistance (DA)

If present, restrict and OS Provider must also be present

rateCenter name of the local rate center

If present, restrict, OS Provider and DA Provider must also be present

timers The timers for this Officeparms object. See “OfficeParms Timers” on page 391.

OSSInfoDigits The information digits (ANI digits) that force calls to route to an Operator Service System (OSS) instead of normal routing. By default, calls with information digits of 6, 7, and 29 are routed to an OSS

serviceProfile The Service Profile to associate with this Central Office See “Service Profile” on page 152.

serviceCodes Vertical Service Codes that specify the dialing patterns for CLASSSM and Custom Calling services such as Call Forwarding. For a complete list of services, and their default service codes, see the T7000 Product Description Manual.

countryCodes The countryCodes list specifies country codes of the countries that can be dialed. Country codes determine the proper country code of international OSS calls over CAS protocols.

TipTo find a specific country code, go tohttp://www.the-acr.com/codes/cntrycd.htm

transFlag Yes — outpulses the translated number for local digit translation routing on the switch.

No (default) — does not outpulse the translated number for local digit translation routing.

Page 391: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 383990-1012-001

LLControl

TipTo see the Line Load class of a particular subscriber, see “query Subscriber” on page 552.

Line load control level. When a line load class is suspended, subscribers with that line load class cannot make calls.

Line load control relieves congestion by cutting off classes of subscriber lines to the switch. This provides better service to the remaining subscribers and reduces the chance of CO failure.

Line load control divides subscribers into three separate groups:

• A — the highest priority group, and requires communications during emergencies. Subscribers in this group include: law enforcement, fire, and rescue personnel.

• B — secondary priority, typically businesses and some individuals

• C — tertiary priority, typically individuals

Typically, group A contains 10% of the subscribers with the B and C groups containing the remaining 90%. During an emergency, use line load control on C or on B and C to reduce congestion and allow subscribers in group A to communicate.

This attribute is a bitfield. The line load classes are individually turned on or off by name. See example

• CLASS_A

• CLASS_B

• CLASS_C

vmwiTimerA The number of hours that the switch attempts to send an Visual Message Waiting Indicator (VMWI) message to a subscriber line that is off-hook. If the timer expires, then the switch stops trying to send the Indicator message. This timer is only used when a subscriber is off-hook and receives a new voice mail message.

Values are: 2hr 2.5hr 3hr 3.5hr 4hr

Default: 2.5hr

vmwiTimerB The interval that the switch sends a refresh message to subscribers with voicemail service. The refresh message updates the subscribers CPEs with VMWI. This ensures the correct status of a CPE, if the VMWI is lost for any reason. The switch does not send a refresh message if the setting is 0 minutes.

Values are: none 15min 30min 45min 60min

Default: 30min

redirectingNumberAsCallerID

No (default)) — to send the calling party’s DN as the caller ID when a call is forwarded from a base stationYes — to send the DN of the base station as the caller ID (instead of that of the original caller) when a call is forwarded.

NOTE: The default value for this field is No, and should not be changed unless you want to change the Caller ID DN that is forwarded for all calls on the switch

Attribute Description

Page 392: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

384 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

callingName-DisplayOption

LastNameFirst (default) — to display the last name of the subscriber first on a subscriber’s caller ID device. For example Lisenby, Jeremy.

FirstNameFirst — to display the last name of the subscriber first on a subscriber’s caller ID device. For example Jeremy Lisenby.

useVMWIOSITimer This field controls which timer is used when sending MWI to a subscriber’s phone:

TRUE — the switch uses the VMWIOSITimeout timer, see “useVMWIOSITimer” on page 384.

FALSE (default) — the switch uses the LCFO_Duration timer, see “LCFO_Duration” on page 246.

ftrsProfile The FTRS profile assigned to all originations on the switch. The T7000 checks subscriber or trunk group FTRS profiles first; if the dialed pattern does not match a pattern in that FTRS profile the switch checks this profile.

denyAniList The name of a previously created screening list. The screen list contains one or more prefixes or DNs. Any call originating from a prefix or DN in the denyAniList will be blocked, see “Screen Lists” on page 415.

mgcpDynamicIP-Updates

FALSE (default) — Media Gateway IP addresses can not dynamically change.

TRUE — Media Gateway IP addresses can dynamically change automatically (i.e., without human intervention), as with a DNS, for example.

sipUserAgentName This is the string sent in the User-Agent Header of SIP request messages. As per RFC 3261, the sting is configurable, and can be changed if required.

ANA_announcement-Pause

The delay between first and second Automatic Number Announcement. See “Automatic Number Announcement” on page 665. Values are in seconds

Range: 1 - 10

Default: 5

NOTE: This timer also controls the delay between the first and second Changed Number Announcement.

sendRespForREG-SatOverFlow

Determines the switch's response to a SIP REGISTER request when the maxREGScps threshold is exceeded.

ResponseNone — Do not send any response.

Response403 (default)— Send a 403 Forbidden response.

Response503 — Send a 503 Service unavailable response.

Attribute Description

Page 393: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 385990-1012-001

sendRespForRSIPatOverFlow

Determines the switch's response when the maxRSIPScps threshold is exceeded

ResponseNone — Do not send any response.

Response200 — Send a 200 OK responseS

tmsDigit Specifies the digit a caller needs to enter to interrupt the announcement and terminate the call when the Telemarketer Screening announcement is played.

tmsOptions Type is Bitfield. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example.

• DISCONNECT_WITHOUT_DIGIT— it the tmsDelay timer expires without the caller entering a digit. If this option is selected, the switch disconnects the call.If this option is not selected (default), the switch terminates the call normally

• TRIGGER_ON_RESTRICTED — triggered for callers with a presentation of restricted, private or anonymous.If this option is selected, the Telemarketer Screening service is triggered for these call types.If this option is not selected (default), the Telemarketer Screening service is not triggered for these call types.

NOTE: The Telemarketer Screening service is always triggered for callers with a presentation of Unavailable, Unknown or Out of Area.

• DISC_ON_RESOURCE_FAIL — Determines if the caller should be disconnected due to insufficient resources to play the Telemarketer Screening announcement.If this option is selected, the switch disconnects the call.If this option is not selected (default), the switch terminates the call normally.

sipAllowToUseTopVia Determines if the switch looks in the top VIA header to determine the originating endpoint of an INVITE request when the address is not found in the bottom VIA header. Normally the switch only uses the bottom VIA header. However, some SIP Devices send INVITEs with a private IP address in the bottom VIA. Such calls fail because the switch can not find the device’s public IP address in the message. Select:

• TRUE — Look in the bottom VIA, and, if necessary, the Top VIA, to determine the sender’s IP address.

• FALSE (default)— Look only in the bottom VIA to determine the sender’s IP address.

Attribute Description

Page 394: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

386 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all OfficeParms commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• CLLICode

• Lata

• options

• OSProvider

• DAProvider

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• CLLICode

• Lata

• options

• OSProvider

• DAProvider

• rateCenter

• timers

• serviceProfile

• serviceCodes

• transFlag

• LLControl

• vmwiTimerA

• vmwiTimerB

• redirectingNumberAsCallerID

• callingNameDisplayOption

• useVMWIOSITimer

• ftrsProfile

• denyAniList

• mgcpDynamicIPUpdates

• sipUserAgentName

• ANA_announcementPause

Page 395: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 387990-1012-001

The insertInto and the deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• OSSInfoDigits

• countryCodes

See: • “Adding a Country Code to OfficeParms” on page 396

• “Removing a Country Code from Office Parms” on page 396

• “Adding OSS Information Digits to OfficeParms” on page 393

• “Removing OSS Information Digits from Office Parms” on page 395

create OfficeParms taquaTexas RICHTXCODS0modify OfficeParms taquaTexas serviceCodes Cfwd_On "*55"modify OfficeParms taquaTexas LLControl CLASS_C 0modify OfficeParms taquaTexas vmwiTimerA 3.5hrmodify OfficeParms taquaTexas tmsOptions DISCONNECT_WITHOUT_DIGIT 1modify OfficeParms taquaTexas tmsOptions DISC_ON_RESOURCE_FAIL 0

Prerequisites

Carriers, see “Carriers” on page 196

Rate Centers, see “Rate Centers” on page 410

Dependent Commands

After setting the Office Parameters, you can set the following:

• AIN services, “AIN” on page 138

Page 396: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

388 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

query OfficeParmsquery OfficeParms

This Generic CLI command shows general information about the switch.

The following examples queries the officeparm timers for switch 123.

query OfficeParms 123 timers

timers........................<2beef98><2beef98> OfficeTimers ExcessiveAlerting........3a98 (15000) ExceptionRecoveryTime....ea60 (60000) ROHToneDuration..........ea60 (60000) FirstDigitTimeout........4e20 (20000) InterDigitTimeout........2710 (10000) CriticalDigitTimeout.....fa0 (4000) PartialCdrTimeout........ea60 (60000) SpeedDialTimeout.........fa0 (4000) TermScanningDuration.....1b7740 (1800000) LongDurationCdrTimeout...24_HRS VMWIOSITimeout...........1388 (5000) pingPeriod...............bb8 (3000)f

Page 397: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 389990-1012-001

OfficeParms Options

The Officeparms options are a bitfield, individually turned on or off by name. See example.

Name Description

PIC2_REQUIRED_FOR_INTRALATA

Routes non-CAC calls for subscribers with no intraLATA carrier presubscribed to an announcement.

INTRALATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC

Applies intraLATA toll subscriber restrictions to a dialed CAC and presubscribed PIC2.

INTERLATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC

Applies interLATA toll subscriber restrictions to a dialed CAC and presubscribed PIC1.

INTERNATIONAL_RESTRIC-TIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC

Applies international subscriber restrictions to a dialed CAC (for example, 1010288) and presubscribed PIC1.

ROUTE_ZERO_MINUS_TO_PIC2

Operator services calls are routed to PIC2.

PREFIX_RATE_CENTER_OVER-RIDES_SUBSCRIBER_RATE_CENTER

Uses the rate center associated with the prefix instead of the rate center associated with the subscriber.

FAIL_UNKNOWN_DIGIT_PATTERN

Routes call to announcement if dialing pattern is not recognized.

ENABLE_877_SAC Enables 877 calls for toll free database lookup.

ENABLE_866_SAC Enables 866 calls for toll free database lookup

ENABLE_866_SAC Enables 866 calls for toll free database lookup.

ENABLE_855_SAC Enables 855 calls for toll free database lookup.

ENABLE_844_SAC Enables 844 calls for toll free database lookup.

ENABLE_833_SAC Enables 833 calls for toll free database lookup.

ENABLE_822_SAC Enables 822 calls for toll free database lookup

CALLING_NAME_QUERY_REQUIRED

Requires the switch to send a calling name query for local calls on the switch. By default the switch uses the subscriber database for local calling name. This option requires a query for all calls

INBOUND_ANI_REQUIRED Rejects incoming calls with no calling number.

CUSTOM_REPLACE_AIN Enables custom replacement of the carrier, ani, etc. even if calls use AIN to route.

PCAC_FROM_CARRIER On intraLATA calls, the switch selects the PCAC from the Prefix database. If set, when the prefix is not defined in the Prefix database, the switch selects the PCAC from the Carrier

CAC_FROM_CARRIER On intraLATA calls, the switch selects the PCAC from the Prefix database. If set, when the prefix is not defined in the Prefix database, the switch selects the PCAC from the Carrier.

Page 398: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

390 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

query OfficeParms taquaTexas options<2b89cec>options.......................(BITFIELD) -> 1c

.INTRALATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC

.INTERLATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC

.INTERNATIONAL_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC

modify OfficeParms taquaTexas options PCAC_FROM_CARRIER 1

modify OfficeParms taquaTexas options INTERNATIONAL_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC 0

query OfficeParms taquaTexas options<2b89cec>options.......................(BITFIELD) -> 2000c

.INTRALATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC

.INTERLATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC

.PCAC_FROM_CARRIER

USE_AIN_CALLING_NAME If set, use the Name Presentation and Name from the AIN Termination Attempt response and not preform the Calling Name TCAP dip for Intraswitch calls, even if the CALLING_NAME_QUERY_REQUIRED option is turned on

Name Description

Page 399: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 391990-1012-001

OfficeParms Timers

The Officeparms timers are a nested object of timers. All numerical timer values are in milliseconds, except for LongDurationCdrTimeout, which is in hours.

C A U T I O N

Setting office timers to values other than their defaults could negatively affect operations.

Timer Name Description

ExcessiveAlerting Internal value.

ExceptionRecoveryTime

The number of milliseconds the switch sends the reorder tone after an announcement that follows a failure on the switch.

ROHToneDuration The number of milliseconds the switch waits in an off-hook state before playing a receiver off-hook tone (howler tone).

FirstDigitTimeout The number of milliseconds the switch waits for the caller to dial the first digit after going off-hook. Sends a loud tone that alerts the calling party when the timer expires.

InterDigitTimeout The number of milliseconds between digits dialed when placing a call when the collected set of digits are not subject to critical timing. Sends a message or tone to the caller when the timer expires.

CriticalDigitTimeout The number of milliseconds the switch waits before indicating the collected set of digits has matched a collection pattern. This is used when a matched pattern is a subset of a longer pattern and for 7-digit dialing.

PartialCdrTimeout The number of milliseconds before a partial CDR is created. The timer starts when a call is made on a SIP, SS7 or PRI Trunk, after the terminating circuit is seizing and alerting has begun, and the call is not completed. The timer is canceled if the originator hangs up. This is recordType 2 in the CDR.

SpeedDialTimeout The number of milliseconds (configurable between 3 and 5 seconds) before a speed dial entry is triggered.

TermScanning-Duration

Internal Value-This timer determines the length of time that the terminating switch will do terminating scanning for an Automatic Callback attempt. It is initialized when the terminating switch receives a terminating scanning request query message

LongDurationCdr-Timeout

The number of hours between printing long duration CDRs. The range is 0-24hrs, with 24hrs being the default. For example, if this timer is 2hrs, a long duration CDR prints every two hours from when the call begins until it ends.

VMWIOSITimeout The number of milliseconds (500-7500) the switch waits to turn on the Message Waiting Indication lamp at the CPE. The default is 5,000.

Page 400: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

392 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify OfficeParms taquaTexas timers FirstDigitTimeout 15000

pingPeriod This versatile timer is used to ping the default gateway, as well as failed Network Gateways (NGWs) and Emergency Service Gateways (ESGWs).

If the timer is non-zero, the switch pings the default gateways to detect failures.

If the timer is zero, default gateways are not pinged.

For ESGs and NSGWs, this timer works in conjugation with the Emergency Stand Alone feature.

If enabled, the switch pings failed NGWs and ESGWs to detect when the gateway is once again reachable.

If the timer is zero, failed NGWs and ESGWs are pinged at a default value.

if the timer is non-zero, the interval that the switch pings the failed NGW or ESGW at default gateway is 10 times the provisioned value.

The response time-out to the ping is determined by the pingRespTimerValue (see “pingRespTimerValue” on page 447).

A response to the ping causes the switch to stop sending the ping to the failed NGW or ESGW.

See “ESAOption” on page 464

Range: 0 - 600000 (600 seconds, or 10 minutes).

The default is 3,000 ms.

tmsDelay Telemarketer Screening timer. Works with the tmsOptions DISCONNECT_WITHOUT_DIGIT option.

Range: 1000 - 30000 ms.

The default is 10000 ms

Timer Name Description

Page 401: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 393990-1012-001

Adding OSS Information Digits to OfficeParmsinsertInto OfficeParms <key> OSSInfoDigits <subKey> <val>

The Generic CLI insertInto command adds Information Digits to the OfficeParms’s OSSInfoDigits list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

This example stores info digits 06 to the OSSInfoDigits list at position 6. If there are fewer than 6 entries in the list, the digits are added to the end of the list.

insertInto OfficeParms taquaTexas OSSInfoDigits 6 6

By default each line is provisioned as POTS line (code 0). Use the following command when changing the line type to values between 00 and 99.

Syntax Description

<key> the name of the switch, which was created with the create OfficeParms command

<subKey> the index of the list where you want to add the new Info Digits.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert Information Digits at the start of the OSSInforDigits list. Use a index of -1 to insert Information Digits at the end of the OSSInforDigits list.

<val> Info Digits to route to Operator Service System (OSS)

Page 402: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

394 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Flex ANI Out-Pulsed Information Digits

Originating Line Type

Conditions for ANI II Out-pulsed DigitsANI II Digits Sent

by the switchRouting based on

ANI II Digits

00 POTS line 00 Normal

01 Multiple line feature 01 Normal

Any ANI is not available 02 Normal

10, 12-19, and 95 Not assignable or conflicting originating line type 00 Normal

02, 23-25 Invalid originating line type 00 Normal

06 Hotel/Motel real time billing featureNote: You can configure this line type for normal routing instead of OSS by removing it from the OSS Information Digits list in Office Parameters.

06 Routed to OSS

07 Call requiring special operator handling 07 Routed to OSS

20 AOID feature—not currently available 00 Normal

00 SAC translated call with previously determined information digits of 00 or 02 (only applicable if no information digits are received on SAC response)

23 Normal

Any station except 27, 29, 70

A non-pay station with toll free SAC translated call and ANI II digits are not 23 (only applicable if information digits are not received on SAC response)

24 Normal

27,29,70 Pay station with toll free SAC call (only applicable if information digits are not received on SAC response)

25 Normal

27 Pay station with network provided coin signaling (non SAC calls only)

27 Normal

29 Call from inmate/detention type stations (non SAC calls only)

29 Routed to OS

30-32 Intercept call—not currently available 00 Normal

34 Telco OSS 00 Normal

40-49 Unrestricted use that is locally determined by the carrier

40-49 Normal

52 OUTWATTS calls— not currently available 00 Normal

60 A call delivered to a transport carrier from Traffic Routing Administration (TRA) provider, which originated from an unrestricted line

60 Normal

61-63, 66, 67 A call from cellular/wireless carrier that is forwarded to an IXC over type 1or 2 trunks

61-63, 66, 67 Normal

70 Pay Station call that does not use network provided coin signaling (no SAC calls)

70 Normal

80-89 Reserved for future expansion 80-89 Normal

93 A call originating from Virtual Private Network (VPN)

93 Normal

All Others Unassigned All Others Normal

Page 403: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 395990-1012-001

Removing OSS Information Digits from Office ParmsdeleteFrom OfficeParms <key> OSSInfoDigits <subKey>

The Generic CLI deleteFrom command removes Information Digits from the OfficeParms’s OSSInfoDigits list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

This example deletes the 3rd entry from the OSSInfoDigits list (Info Digits 29)

query OfficeParms taquaTexas OSSInfoDigits<2b89a20>OSSInfoDigits.................<29a5168>

<29a5168> InfoDigitsList valType......Integer collection...List (3 items) -> (1) IntegerValue: 6 (6) (2) IntegerValue: 7 (7) (3) IntegerValue: 1d (29)

deleteFrom OfficeParms taquaTexas OSSInfoDigits 3

query OfficeParms taquaTexas OSSInfoDigits<2b89a20>OSSInfoDigits.................<29a5168>

<29a5168> InfoDigitsList valType......Integer collection...List (2 items) -> (1) IntegerValue: 6 (6) (2) IntegerValue: 7 (7)

Syntax Description

<key> the name of the switch, which was created with the create OfficeParms command

<subKey> The index in the OSSInfoDigits list of the Info Digits that are being removed.

Page 404: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

396 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding a Country Code to OfficeParmsinsertInto OfficeParms <key> countryCodes <pos> <val>

The Generic CLI insertInto command adds an international country code for countries subscribers can call to an OfficeParms’s countryCode list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

This example stores Country Code 217 at position 222 in the country codes list.

insertInto OfficeParms taquaTexas countryCodes 222 217

Removing a Country Code from Office Parms

C A U T I O N

Deleting a country code may negatively affect operations.

deleteFrom OfficeParms <key> countryCodes <subKey>

The Generic CLI deleteFrom command removes a Country Code from an OfficeParms’s countryCode list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

This example deletes the Country Code at position 222 in the country codes list.

deleteFrom OfficeParms taquaTexas countryCodes 222

Syntax Description

<key> the name of the switch, which was created with the create OfficeParms command

<pos> the index of the list where you want to add the new country code value. An item added to the middle of the list will not delete any existing entry, but simply increase the length of the list.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a Country Code at the start of the countryCodes list. Use a index of -1 to insert a Country Code at the end of the countryCodes list.

<val> new country code

Syntax Description

<key> the name of the switch, which was created with the create OfficeParms command

<subKey> The index in the countryCode list of the country code that is being removed.

Page 405: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 397990-1012-001

OutPulseProfile

An OutPulseProfile defines a set of outpulsing sequences for an FGCOF Trunk Group. Both Stage 1 and Stage 2 out pulsing can be independently modified by call type. The custom out pulsing overrides the default out pulsing for each call type and is stored in the OutPulseProfile pattern’s dictionary. See "FGCOF Outpulsing" in The T7000 Provisioning Manual.

A OutPulseProfile has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all OutPulseProfile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• patterns

See “Adding a Pattern to an OutPulseProfile” on page 398, and “Removing a Pattern from an OutPulseProfile” on page 401.

create OutPulseProfile OPP1

Dependent Commands

An FGCOF Trunk Group, see “CAS Trunk Groups” on page 235

Associate the outPulseProfileKey with the FGCOF Trunk Group. See “outPulseProfileKey” on page 242.

For example, to associate OutPulseProfile OPP1 with FGCOS Trunk Group TG1:

modify CASTrunkGroup TG1 outPulseProfileKey OPP1

attribute value

key name of OutPulseProfile

patterns A dictionary of type OutPulsePatternDict, used to store the custom outpulse patterns. The dictionary is keyed by call type.

Page 406: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

398 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding a Pattern to an OutPulseProfileinsertInto OutPulseProfile <key> patterns <subkey> FGCOPPattern <Stage1St1> <Stage1St2> <Stage2St1> <Stage2St2>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a FGCOP pattern into an OutPulsePattern’s patterns dictionary. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Syntax Description

<key> OutPulsePattern name

<subkey>

TipEither the decimal value or the call type string can be entered for the subkey, (e.g., instead of entering "OA_WORLDZONE1", you could simply enter "9".

This is the key to the patterns dictionary. The dictionary is keyed by call type. Values are:

• 0 = LOCAL

• 1 = EXTENDED_AREA

• 2 = INTER_LATA

• 3 = OA_INTER_LATA

• 4 = INTRA_LATA

• 5 = OA_INTRA_LATA

• 6 = INTERNATIONAL

• 7 = OA_INTERNATIONAL

• 8 = WORLDZONE1

• 9 = OA_WORLDZONE1

• 10 = E911

• 11 = DA_INTRA_LATA

• 12 = DA_INTER_LATA

• 13 = OA_ZERO_MINUS

• 14 = SAC

• 15 = UNKNOWN_CALL_TYPE

• 16 = TERMINATING_CALL

• 17 = TANDEM_CALL

• 18 = TERMINATING_LOCAL

• 19 = TERMINATING_EXTENDED

• 20 = TERMINATING_INTRATOLL

• 21 = SIP_IAD

• 22 = INTER_LATA_COIN

• 23 = INTRA_LATA_COIN

Page 407: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 399990-1012-001

<subkey>, continued

• 50 = TANDEM_INTRALATA

• 51 = TANDEM_E911

• 52 = TANDEM_DA

• 53 = TANDEM_INTERLATA

• 54 = TANDEM_WORLDZONE1

• 55 = TANDEM_SAC

• 56 = TANDEM_INTERNATIONAL

• 61 = TANDEM_OA_INTRALATA

• 62 = TANDEM_OA_INTERLATA

• 63 = TANDEM_OA_WORLDZONE1

• 64 = TANDEM_OA_INTERNATIONAL

• 65 = TANDEM_ZEROMINUS

<Stage1St1> FGCOF can send one or two ST tones per stage. This is the value for the first ST in Stage 1. Values are:

• None — Do not send a signal

• ST — Send an ST signal

• STP — Send an ST Prime signal

• ST2P — Send an ST Double Prime signal

• ST3P — Send an ST Triple Prime signal

<Stage1St2> FGCOF can send one or two ST tones per stage. This is the value for the second ST in Stage 1. Values are:

• None — Do not send a signal

• ST — Send an ST signal

• STP — Send an ST Prime signal

• ST2P — Send an ST Double Prime signal

• ST3P — Send an ST Triple Prime signal

<Stage2St1> FGCOF can send one or two ST tones per stage. This is the value for the first ST in Stage 2. Values are:

• None — Do not send a signal

• ST — Send an ST signal

• STP — Send an ST Prime signal

• ST2P — Send an ST Double Prime signal

• ST3P — Send an ST Triple Prime signal

<Stage2St2> FGCOF can send one or two ST tones per stage. This is the value for the second ST in Stage 2. Values are:

• None — Do not send a signal

• ST — Send an ST signal

• STP — Send an ST Prime signal

• ST2P — Send an ST Double Prime signal

• ST3P — Send an ST Triple Prime signal

Syntax Description

Page 408: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

400 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

insertInto OutPulseProfile OPP1 patterns OA_INTRA_LATA FGCOPPattern STP STP ST ST3P

insertInto OutPulseProfile OPP1 patterns 3 FGCOPPattern ST2P None ST ST

query OutPulseProfile OPP1

<5f1c760> OutPulseProfilekey........"OPP1"patterns...<5f1c970>

<5f1c970> OutPulsePatternDict (2 items) -> OA_INTRA_LATA: <5f2dfd8> FGCOPPattern Stage1ST1...STP Stage1ST2...STP Stage2ST1...ST Stage2ST2...ST3P

OA_INTER_LATA: <6055b18> FGCOPPattern Stage1ST1...ST2P Stage1ST2...None Stage2ST1...ST Stage2ST2...ST

Page 409: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 401990-1012-001

Removing a Pattern from an OutPulseProfileOutPulseProfile <key> patterns <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove an FGCOP pattern from an OutPulsePattern’s patterns dictionary. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Syntax Description

<key> OutPulsePattern name

<subkey> This is the key to the patterns dictionary. The dictionary is keyed by call type. Values are:

• LOCAL

• EXTENDED_AREA

• INTER_LATA

• OA_INTER_LATA

• INTRA_LATA

• OA_INTRA_LATA

• INTERNATIONAL

• OA_INTERNATIONAL

• WORLDZONE1

• OA_WORLDZONE1

• E911

• DA_INTRA_LATA

• DA_INTER_LATA

• OA_ZERO_MINUS

• SAC

• UNKNOWN_CALL_TYPE

• TERMINATING_CALL

• TANDEM_CALL

• TERMINATING_LOCAL

• TERMINATING_EXTENDED

• TERMINATING_INTRATOLL

• SIP_IAD

• INTER_LATA_COIN

• INTRA_LATA_COIN

Page 410: 1012 Command Line Interface

OfficeParams

402 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

deleteFrom OutPulseProfile OPP1 patterns OA_INTER_LATA

query OutPulseProfile OPP1

<5f1c760> OutPulseProfilekey........"OPP1"patterns...<5f1c970>

<5f1c970> OutPulsePatternDict (1 items) -> OA_INTRA_LATA: <5f2dfd8> FGCOPPattern Stage1ST1...STP Stage1ST2...STP Stage2ST1...ST Stage2ST2...ST3P

Page 411: 1012 Command Line Interface

Prefixes

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 403990-1012-001

Tip

Prefixes

A prefixes specifies 3-digits (NPA), 6-digits (NPA-Nxx), or 7-10 digit numbers.

Prefixes provides information used to determine the call type

For subscriber originations, a prefix identifies the Rate Center for the called number. It also denotes 7 digit dialing for local calls originated from the prefix.

For incoming trunk groups, a prefix determines the Rate Center for the calling and called number.

Since a prefix can be 10 digits long, adding the DNs of subscriber who have been ported off the switch can avoid LNP DIPs on the entire prefix

A prefix can be marked as ported (that is, at least one number from the prefix has moved to another switch). When a prefix is ported, the switch must query an SCP to determine the ported location of all numbers in the prefix.

NOTE: By default, all prefixes that are not defined map to InterLATA toll call type.

A Prefix has the following attributes:

attribute value

key 3-10 digit prefix. The switch uses the closest match to a dialed number as the prefix.

For example, if you add 972480 and 972 as Prefixes, and a subscriber calls 9724801234, the switch uses the 6-digit prefix. If the subscriber dials 9724814545, then the switch uses the 972 prefix

nature The type of prefix. Values are:

• INTRALATA — Calls to this prefix are intraLATA calls.

• INTERLATA — Calls to this prefix are interLATA calls.

• WORLDZONE1 — Calls to this prefix are countries identified by the single-digit country code of 1 (Canada and most Caribbean countries), other than the 48 contiguous United States.

rateCenter The applicable rate center to which you want to apply this prefix. Valid only for INTRALATA prefixes. This is the terminating rate center on a call, the subscriber rate center is the originating rate center. When a subscriber makes a call to a prefix on the switch, this rate center is compared to the subscriber’s rate center to determine the call type.

Page 412: 1012 Command Line Interface

Prefixes

404 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

ported Used only used for intraLATA prefixes:

• YES — the prefix is a portable prefix, that is at least one number from the prefix moved to another switch, and a switch must query an SCP for the ported location of that number

• NO — the prefix is not a portable prefix

allowedDialing A bitfield of prefix dialing options. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example

• SEVEN_DIGIT_LD — to allow 7-digit long distance dialing (0+7D, 1+7D).

• SEVEN_DIGIT_LOCAL — to allow 7-digit local dialing. If the first digit is not 1 or 0 then local calling is assumed and local calls route immediately after seven digits are dialed and the 4 second CriticalDigitTimeout expires.

locallyAmbiguous Controls how the switch behaves if 7-digit dialing is active and there are prefixes with NPAs that match prefixes with office codes (NXXs) on the switch:

• YES — after dialing 7 digits the switch inserts a critical digit timeout (default 4 seconds) allowing the subscriber to continue dialing a 10-digit number

• NO — after dialing 7 digits the call connects not allowing the subscriber to dial a 10-digit number

internationalCode Valid only for WORLDZONE1 prefixes. For interLATA and intraLATA prefixes leave this field at its default setting.

The code required to make calls to worldZone 1 areas (Canada and the Caribbean). The code should be 01 plus the region code of the worldZone 1 area.

For example, 013 for calls the worldZone 1 area 450, or 011 for calls to counties except Canada and most countries in the Caribbean.

Npa The NPA of an NXX prefix provisioned to support 7-digit dialing across NPA boundaries. See “7-Digit Dialing Across NPA Boundaries” on page 408.

replacementDigits The digits that you want to replace the destination digits (called number) for the original destination number in the outgoing call setup message. The switch replaces digits for numbers associated with a specific terminating prefix, See “Outgoing Signaling Customization” on page 345..

PCAC The PCAC is the 4-digit Pseudo CAC (PCAC) that is sent in the outgoing call setup signal. In standard call processing, the CAC in the outgoing signaling message is the same as the CAC used for routing. This field sends a different CAC in the signaling message than the switch uses to route the call, see “Outgoing Signaling Customization” on page 345..

attribute value

Page 413: 1012 Command Line Interface

Prefixes

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 405990-1012-001

replacementMode Sets the replacement mode for the prefix:

• NO_REPLACEMENT (default) — Sends the original destination prefix or digits

• REPLACE_PREFIX — Replaces the prefix digits regardless of the number of digits. For example, 3 digits could replace a 6-digit prefix.

• OVERLAY_ORIG_DEST — Replaces the exact number of digits of the original destination number.

• REPLACE_ORIG_DEST — Replaces the original destination digits with a different digit set. For examples, see “Destination Digit Replacement” on page 346.

replacementAniDigits The Pseudo ANI (PANI) to replace the ANI (calling number) of a call that uses this prefix,. see “Outgoing Signaling Customization” on page 345.

replacementInfoDigits The PANI II Information digits to replace the digits sent in outgoing call setup messages. Use this field to send different ANI II digits (the Pseudo ANI II digits) in the signaling message in place of the ANI II digits associated with a facility, see “Outgoing Signaling Customization” on page 345.

replacementCSI The Carrier Selection Information (CSI) type that defines if a subscriber is presubscribed to a carrier or not. CSI replacement applies only to calls originating on the switch. The CSI is an optional parameter in the SS7 IAM and for CAS the CSI is the KP digit in the ANI sequence. The CSI value overrides the ANI KP type in the CAS protocol. See “Outgoing Signaling Customization” on page 345.

• CSI_UNKNOWN — Outpulses the CSI value that the switch determines.

• CARRIER_NOIND — Outpulses 0 in the CSI parameter in SS7 or the default KP type in CAS.

• CARRIER_PRESUB — Selected Carrier Access Code (CAC) presubscribed and not input by calling party. See “CSI Replacement” on page 348.

• CARRIER_PRESUB_INPUT — Selected CAC presubscribed and input by calling party. See “CSI Replacement” on page 348.

• CARRIER_PRESUB_NOINDINPUT — Selected CAC presubscribed, no indication of whether input by calling party. See “CSI Replacement” on page 348..

• CARRIER_NOTPRESUB_INPUT — Selected CAC not presubscribed and input by calling party. See “CSI Replacement” on page 348.

attribute value

Page 414: 1012 Command Line Interface

Prefixes

406 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all Prefix commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• nature

• rateCenter

• ported

• internationalCode

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• nature

• rateCenter

• ported

• allowedDialing

• locallyAmbiguous

• internationalCode

• Npa

• replacementDigits

• PCAC

• replacementMode

• replacementAniDigits

• replacementInfoDigits

• replacementCSI

Prerequisites

Rate center, see “Adding a RateCenter” on page 412

Dependent Commands

By adding a prefix, you are making this prefix available to associate with a:

• NANP route list, see “NANP Route List” on page 519

• LNP route list, see “LNP Route List” on page 517

• Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

create Prefix 214777 INTRALATA rc1create Prefix 808 WORLDZONE1modify Prefix 214777 allowedDialing SEVEN_DIGIT_LD 1

Page 415: 1012 Command Line Interface

Prefixes

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 407990-1012-001

Tip

query Prefix query Prefix <prefix>

Use this command without a key to see which prefixes are provisioned on the switch.

This Generic CLI command shows information about a 3-, 6-, or 7-digit NANP prefix.

query Prefix 817

<2bee040> Prefixkey....................."817"nature..................INTRALATArateCenter..............<>ported..................NOallowedDialing..........(BITFIELD) -> 0locallyAmbiguous........NOinternationalCode.......b (11)Npa.....................<>replacementDigits.......<>PCAC....................<>replacementMode.........NO_REPLACEMENTreplacementAniDigits....<>replacementInfoDigits...<>replacementCSI..........CSI_UNKNOWN

Syntax Description

<prefix> A 3-, 6-, or 7-digit prefix of subscribers that connect to the switch.

Page 416: 1012 Command Line Interface

Prefixes

408 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

7-Digit Dialing Across NPA Boundaries

7-digit dialing across NPA boundaries allows subscribers in adjacent offices with adjacent area codes to dial each other using 7-digit dialing. This feature allows for extended area and local service across NPA boundaries using 7-digit dialing. Use the following process to provision 7-digit dialing across NPA boundaries:

Step Action

1 Provision an IntraLATA 6-digit prefix (NPA-NXX) for each office. For example, provision 214480 and 972455. See “Prefixes” on page 403.

2 Set the prefixes to allow 7-digit local dialing. See “allowedDialing” on page 404.

3 Provision a separate prefix for each 6-digit prefix using the three digits of the NXX. For example, provision a 480 and 455 prefix. See “Prefixes” on page 403.

NOTE: 7-digit dialing across NPA boundaries does not support provisioning identical NXXs. For example, the switch does not support local 7-digit dialing between 214480 and 972480.

4 Set the NPA value as the NPA of each NXX provisioned in step 1 on page 408. For example, provision 214 for the NPA of the 480 prefix and 972 for the NPA field of the 455 prefix. See “Npa” on page 404.

5 Set the rate center relationships between the 6-digit prefixes as either local or extended area. See “Adding a RateCenter” on page 412.

Page 417: 1012 Command Line Interface

Prefixes

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 409990-1012-001

7 Digit Tandem Call Outpulsing

When tandeming a call from an SS7, CAS, PRI, or SIP Trunk Group, the switch can outpulse 7 digits to the outbound Trunk Group for subscribers who are not ported (the switch will still outpulse 10 digits for subscribers who are ported).

Use the following process to provision 7-digit tandem call outpulsing.

Step Action

1 Set the inbound tandem Trunk Group tandemRoutingType to NO_ROUTING.

2 Set the outbound tandem Trunk Group tandemCustomReplacement to YES.

3 Set the outbound tandem Trunk Group replaceDestination to REPLACE_IfNotPorted

4 Provision a 6-digit Prefix in the form of NPA-NXX for each 7 digit pattern. For example, to outpulse 7 digits for calls to 972-480-XXXX provision a 972480 prefix.

5 Set the 6-digit Prefix replacementDigits to NXX. For example, in the 972480 prefix, set the replacementDigits to 480.

6 Set the 6-digit Prefix replacementMode to REPLACE_PREFIX.

Page 418: 1012 Command Line Interface

Rate Centers

410 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Rate Centers

A rate center is a designated geographic area within a Local Access and Transport Area (LATA). A switch must have at least one rate center. All calls made within the rate center are considered local (or non-toll). All calls made to another rate center may be local, extended area, or intraLATA toll.

NOTE: An intraLATA call for which both an original and remote rate center cannot be determined is considered local.

A rate center has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all rate center commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• LRN

• restrictions

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• LRN

• restrictions

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• relationships

attribute value

key name of rate center

LRN local routing number’s area code and prefix

restrictions a bitfield of rate center restrictions. These options are individually turned on or off by name.

• NO_HOME_NPA — the caller does not have to dial his/her home NPA for calls to the home NPA.

• RESTRICTIVE_ONE_PLUS — 1+ dialing is required for toll calls and not allowed for local and extended area calls. Otherwise, 1+ is ignored for all call types.

relationships a collection of dictionaries that hold intra lata and extended rate centers.

Page 419: 1012 Command Line Interface

Rate Centers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 411990-1012-001

See “Adding a RateCenter” on page 412, and See “Removing a RateCenter” on page 414.

NOTE: Deleting a rate center may negatively affect operations.

Dependent Commands

After creating a rate center, create a relationship between it and:

• An extended area rate center, see “Adding a RateCenter” on page 412

• An intratoll rate center, see “Adding a RateCenter” on page 412

After creating a rate center assign it to:

• A carrier, see “Carriers” on page 196

• A prefix, see “Prefixes” on page 403

• The Office Parameter, if it is the local rate center, see “OfficeParams” on page 382

• A subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

Prerequisites

Rate center, see “Adding a RateCenter” on page 412

To delete a rate center, you must remove or modify the following items that relate to the rate center:

• Carriers, see “Carriers” on page 196

• The rate center attribute in Office Parameters, see “OfficeParams” on page 382

• Prefixes, see “Prefixes” on page 403

• Subscribers, see “Subscribers” on page 530

Page 420: 1012 Command Line Interface

Rate Centers

412 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding a RateCenterinsertInto RateCenter <key> relationships <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to establish a relationship between two rate centers. The new rate center may be either an extended rate center, or an IntraToll area rate center.

An extended area is a geographic area beyond the local service area to which traffic is classified as local for selected customers. Calls originating in one rate center and terminating in another rate center may be considered extended area, depending on the customer’s rate plan. A rate center can have more than one extended rate center associated with it.

An IntraToll area rate center to another rate center. IntraLATA toll is when the distance between the caller and called party is determined as a different rate center, but still within the LATA (usually beyond 12 miles). If the subscriber has selected an IntraLATA carrier, the switch routes the call to the selected IntraLATA carrier for termination. A rate center can have more than one IntraToll area rate center associated with it.

NOTE: An intraLATA call for which both an original and remote rate center cannot be determined is considered local.

See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Syntax Description

<key> Rate center name.

<subkey> The name of the rate center you are adding.

<subvalue> The type of relationship between the two rate centers. Values are:

• EXTENDED — for extended rate centers

• INTRATOLL — for intra lata rate centers

Page 421: 1012 Command Line Interface

Rate Centers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 413990-1012-001

This example creates a 2nd and a 3rd ratecenter. The 2nd rate center has an extended relationship with the 1st rate center, and the 3rd rate center has an intra toll relationship with the 1st rate center.

create RateCenter rc2 972530create RateCenter rc3 214289

insertInto RateCenter rc1 relationships rc2 EXTENDEDinsertInto RateCenter rc1 relationships rc3 INTRATOLL

query RateCenter rc1<1a01720> RateCenterkey............."rc1"LRN............."972480"restrictions....(BITFIELD) -> 0relationships...<2bfc758>

<2bfc758> RelationshipDict keyType......Unknown valType......Integer collection...Dictionary (2 items) -> StringKey: rc2 IntegerValue: 1 (1) StringKey: rc3 IntegerValue: 2 (2)

Page 422: 1012 Command Line Interface

Rate Centers

414 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Removing a RateCenterdeleteFrom RateCenter <key> relationships <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a rate center from a rate center’s relationships. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

deleteFrom RateCenter rc1 relationships rc3

query RateCenter rc1<1a01720> RateCenterkey............."rc1"LRN............."972480"restrictions....(BITFIELD) -> 0relationships...<2bfc758>

<2bfc758> RelationshipDict keyType......Unknown valType......Integer collection...Dictionary (1 items) -> StringKey: rc2 IntegerValue: 1 (1)

Querying a RateCenterquery RateCenter <name>

This Generic CLI command shows the attributes of a rate center.

query RateCenter rc1

Rate Center rc1Restrictions: 0

Extended Area Rate Centers rc2IntraLata Toll Rate Centers rc3

Syntax Description

<key> Rate center name

<subkey> The name of the rate center you are removing.

Syntax Description

<name> name of the rate center

Page 423: 1012 Command Line Interface

Screen Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 415990-1012-001

Screen Lists

Screen lists are lists of prefixes or DNs for call screening. A screen list can apply to the entire Central Office or to a Trunk Group. See:

• Central Office “denyAniList” on page 384

• CAS Trunk Groups “denyAniList” on page 239

• Clear Channel Trunk Groups “denyAniList” on page 254

• Hunt Groups “denyAniList” on page 275

• Interface Groups “denyAniList” on page 260

• IP Trunk Groups “denyAniList” on page 310

• MGCP Trunk Groups “denyAniList” on page 359

• PRI Trunk Groups “denyAniList” on page 289

• SS7 Trunk Groups “denyAniList” on page 327

Every subscriber has two screen lists, which may be provisioned:

• Allowed list — a subscriber can complete calls only to the prefixes in the screening list. See “allowedList” on page 537.

• Denied list — a subscriber can complete calls to all prefixes except those in the screening list. See “deniedList” on page 537.

A screen list is also used for the following subscriber calling services:

• Selective Call Acceptance — a subscriber only receives calls from a list of DNs

• Selective Call Rejection — a subscriber rejects calls from a list of DNs

• Selective Call Forwarding — a subscriber forwards calls from a list of DNs

• Priority Call — a subscriber receives calls with a distinctive ringing tone from callers on a list of DNs

A calling service screen list is automatically created when the service is provisioned, and automatically destroyed when the service is de-provisioned. See “setSubCOS” on page 576.

NOTE: A screen list supports up to 10 numbers for each associated service

Page 424: 1012 Command Line Interface

Screen Lists

416 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

A Screen List has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for Screen List commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• name

There are no optional parameters for the create command.

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• facilities

See “Adding a Prefix or DN to a Screen List” on page 417, and “Removing a Prefix or DN from a Screen List” on page 417

create ScreenList 9724801234SCAcreate ScreenList 9724801234SCFcreate ScreenList 9724801234SCRcreate ScreenList 9724801234PRIcreate ScreenList Deny800

attribute value

name Name assigned to the screen list.

Note: for the following calling services, the name of the screen list must be the subscriber’s 10 digit DN followed by the service name, for a total of 13 characters.

• SCA — selective call acceptance

• SCR — selective call rejection

• SCF — selective call forwarding

• PRI — priority call

Each calling service requires a separate screen list.

listType This attribute is currently unused. Values are:

• GENERAL_LIST

• SUBSCRIBER_LIST

Page 425: 1012 Command Line Interface

Screen Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 417990-1012-001

Adding a Prefix or DN to a Screen ListinsertInto ScreenList <key> prefixes <subkey> [subvalue]

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a prefix or a DN to a screen list’s prefixes list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Either of the following commands adds the DN 9724801234 to the Priority Call Screen List for the subscriber at DN 9724800000:

insertInto ScreenList 9724800000PRI prefixes 9724801234insertInto ScreenList 9724800000PRI prefixes 9724801234 9724801234

Either of the following command adds the prefix 408 to the badANI Screen List:

insertInto ScreenList badANI prefixes 408insertInto ScreenList badANI prefixes 408 408

Removing a Prefix or DN from a Screen ListdeleteFrom ScreenList <key> facilities <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a prefix or a DN from a screen list’s prefixes list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following example removes the 408 prefix from the badANI screen list:

deleteFrom ScreenList badANI prefixes 408

Syntax Description

<key> Screen list name. See “name” on page 416 for important information about subscriber screen list naming conventions

<subkey> The prefixes list in a screen list is a sorted list. The key to this list is the DN you want to add to the screen list.

[subvalue] The DN you want to add to this screen list. In the case of a ScreenList, the subvalue can be omitted, since it is the same as the subkey.

Syntax Description

<key> Screen list name. See “name” on page 416 for important information about subscriber screen list naming conventions

<subkey> The prefixes list in a screen list is a sorted list. The key to this list is the DN that you want to remove.

Page 426: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

418 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SIP

See

• “Setting up an IP Network Interface” on page 419• “Setting up a Subscriber Access SIP Endpoint” on page 420• “Setting up a Network Gateway SIP Endpoint” on page 421

Page 427: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 419990-1012-001

Setting up an IP Network Interface

Step Action

1 Provision an IP network interface:

• Remove the Fast Ethernet Interface (FEI) from service, see “remove” on page 628.

• Set the FEI attributes, see “setFeifIPAddr” on page 422.

• Set the FEI options, see “setFeifOptions” on page 424. (optional)

• Set the range of Real Time Protocol (RTP) port addresses to FEI, see “setRtpPortBase” on page 423. (optional)

• Restore the FEI to service, see “restore” on page 628.

2 Create codec lists:

• Create a Codec Profile List, see “CodecProfileList” on page 425.

• Create Codec Profiles, see “CodecProfile” on page 427.

• Modify Codec Profile attributes, see “CodecProfile” on page 427.

• Insert Codec Profiles into Codec Profile List, see “Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList” on page 426.

3 Create a host name and IP address table entry, see “Host IP Addr Pair” on page 429. (optional)

4 Create media stream parameters, see “MediaParam” on page 431.

Page 428: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

420 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Setting up a Subscriber Access SIP Endpoint

SubscriberAccess SIP endpoints are IP phones, ATAs, or other CPE devices directly controlled by the T7000 and using its SIP registrar functionality

NOTE: When T7000 IP subscribers get their services from a SIP Application Server instead of the T7000, they are provisioned as SubscriberAccess endpoints, and are called Hosted SIP Gateway (HSGW) Subscribers.When T7000 analog subscribers get their services from a SIP Application Server instead of the T7000, they are provisioned as SubscriberAccess endpoints, and are called Enhanced Voice Services (EVS) Subscribers.In either case, enter the name of the IP Trunk Group connecting the switch to the SIP Application Server in the subscriber’s appServerTG field.See the Provisioning Guide for details.

Step Action

1 If necessary, configure a BearerGroup of Fast Ethernet Interfaces, see “BearerGroup” on page 163.

2 Create a SIP endpoint profile:

• Create a SubscriberAccess SIP endpoint profile, see “SIP Access Gateway Profile” on page 436.

• Use the modify command to change the SIP endpoint profile’s options, see “SIP Access Gateway Options” on page 437 and “SIP Timers” on page 434.

3 Create a SubscriberAccess SIP endpoint, see “Subscriber Access Gateway Endpoint” on page 441.

4 Add the IP trunk group that associates the FEI on the T7000 to the SIP endpoint, see “IP Trunk Groups” on page 307.

5 Add a SIP subscriber whose 10-digit DN is the same the SIP endpoint’s, see “Subscribers” on page 530. Add the subscriber key (DN) and password.

Page 429: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 421990-1012-001

Setting up a Network Gateway SIP Endpoint

Network Gateway SIP endpoints are stand-alone IP gateways or distributed soft switch systems (such as Application Servers connecting IP Centrex business groups) to an IP access network and the PSTN.

Step Action

1 If necessary, configure a BearerGroup of Fast Ethernet Interfaces, see “BearerGroup” on page 163.

2 Create a SIP endpoint profile:

• Create a Network Gateway SIP endpoint profile, see “SIP Network Gateway Profile” on page 454.

• Use the modify command to change the SIP endpoint profile’s options, see “SIP Network Gateway Options” on page 455 and “SIP Timers” on page 434.

3 Create a Network Gateway SIP endpoint:

• Create a Network Gateway SIP endpoint, see “SIP Network Gateway Endpoint” on page 459. Add the primary IP address and port.

• (optional) Assign an alternate IP address and port, see “Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint” on page 462..

4 Add the IP trunk group that associates the FEI on the T7000 to the SIP endpoint, see “Trunk Groups” on page 233.

5 Add a pseudo-SIP subscriber whose 10-digit DN is the same the SIP endpoint’s, see “Subscribers” on page 530.

6 Add an NANP Route List with the range of DNs on the Network Gateway (SIP AP), see “NANP Route List” on page 519

7 Add the IP trunk group to the route list, see “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527.

Page 430: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

422 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

setFeifIPAddr

Use “modifyFacility” on page 217 to set the primary and secondary DNS for an FE.

setFeifIPAddr <feifoid> <sigIPaddr> <rtpIPaddr> <netmask> <defaultgateway>

This command configures the IP addresses of a Fast Ethernet Interface (FEI).

Prerequisites

Remove the FEI oid from service, see “remove” on page 628.

IP host, see “Host IP Addr Pair” on page 429.

NOTE: The sigIPaddr and the rtpIPaddr must be in a separate IP network than the OM Server and the PIC’s management port.

NOTE: The sigIPaddr, rtpIPaddr, netmask, and defaultgateway parameters must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

setFeifIPAddr fe-0-5 192.168.200.40 192.168.200.40 255.255.255.0 192.168.200.1

Dependent Commands

Restore the FEI oid to service, see “restore” on page 628.

Set the FEI options, see “setFeifOptions” on page 424.

Syntax Description

<feifoid> Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF). See “OID” on page 30.

<sigIPaddr> IP address of the FE used to receive signaling packets.

<rtpIPaddr> IP address of the FEI used to receive RTP packets.

PIC: same value as sigIPaddr.

PIC2: different IP address than the sigIPaddr. The sigIPaddr and the rtpIPaddr must be on the same subnet.

<netmask> IP network mask.

<defaultgateway> IP address of the default gateway or router to the network.

Page 431: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 423990-1012-001

setRtpPortBasesetRtpPortBase <feifoid> <RtpPortBase> <RtpPortNum>

This command assigns the lowest RTP port and number of available RTP port address(es) on an FEI I/O rear card for receiving Real Time Protocol (RTP) media streams.

Prerequisites

FEI connection, see “setFeifIPAddr” on page 422.

In the following example the lowest RTP port value is 49152. The total number of ports available is 2070. This means the RTP port selected at run-time will be between 49152 and 51222 (49152+2070).

setRtpPortBase fe-0-1 49152 2070

Syntax Description

<feifoid> Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface facility. See “OID” on page 30.

<RtpPortBase> The lowest UDP port number used to receive RTP (2-65534, even numbers only). Ports are assigned dynamically at run-time. 49152 is the default.

<RtpPortNum> The total number of UDP ports available on the FEI to receive RTP (49152-65535, even numbers only).

Page 432: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

424 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

setFeifOptions

Use “modifyFacility” on page 217 to set the primary and secondary DNS for an FE.

setFeifOptions <feifoid> <sipPort> <mgcpPort> <vlantag> <vlanid> <sig8021pri> <sigDSCP>

This command assigns options to a Fast Ethernet Interface (FEI) on an FEI I/O rear card.

Prerequisites

FEI connection, see “setFeifIPAddr” on page 422.

setFeifOptions fe-0-1 5060 2727 0 1 3 184

Syntax Description

<feifoid> Object Identifier of the Fast Ethernet Interface Facility (FEIF). See “OID” on page 30.

<sipPort> SIP receive port number from 1-7000. 5060 is the default and this value is almost always used.

<mgcpPort> Media Gateway Control Protocol receiving port number, 2727 is the default

<vlantag> A virtual LAN allows hosts in the same physical switched infrastructure but in separate virtual broadcast domains to be addressed from the same subnet and share a common default gateway address.

• 0=DISABLED — (default) If vlantagging is disabled, you cannot set the priority of packets sent from the PIC.

• 1=ENABLED — If vlantagging is enabled, you can set the priority of packets sent from the PIC by adding an 802.1Q tag header to each packet.

<vlanid> If vlantag is DISABLED, enter 0.

If vlantag isENABLED, enter a virtual LAN ID from 1-4095. 1 is the default.

<sig8021pri> If vlantagis ENABLED, an 802.1Q tag header is added to each packet the PIC transmits. This header shows the priority of the packets sent by the PIC.

range — 0 is the lowest priority, 7 is the highest priority (3=signaling default)

<sigDSCP> sigDSCP (signaling DSCP) controls the priority at which signaling packets are sent through the network.

Background: Diffserv Codepoint (DSCP) controls the priority at which signaling packets are sent through the network. It is a coarse-grained, class-based mechanism for traffic management, defined in RFC 2474.

DSCP aware routers implement Per-Hop Behaviors (PHBs), based on DSCP. These PHBs define the packet forwarding properties associated with a given class of traffic.

The Expedited Forwarding PHB, defined in RFC 2598, provides a low-loss, low-latency, assured bandwidth service for VoIP applications. The value of this PHB is 184 (hex 0xB8), and is the default value for this attribute.

• 0-252 (default 184)

Page 433: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 425990-1012-001

CodecProfileList

A CodecProfileList is:

• a container for Codec Profiles. For more information, see “CodecProfile” on page 427.

• associated with one or more IP trunk groups, setting the Codec Profiles used on those groups. For more information, see “IP Trunk Groups” on page 307.

To properly configure Codec Profiles and the Codec Profile Lists, know the following capabilities of the SIP endpoint with which the T7000 will communicate:

• the codec types it supports

• the different configurations of each codec it supports

NOTE: If the T7000 and SIP endpoint do not agree on a Codec Profile, the T7000 refuses the call during call setup.

A CodecProfileList has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for All CodecProfileList commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

NOTE: As a safety precaution, a CodecProfileList must be removed from all IP Trunk Groups that are using it before it can be deleted. The switch will issue a warning message, specifying the name of the IP Trunk Group that is using the codec list.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The modify command does not apply to CodecProfileLists.

The insertInto and the deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• codecProfiles

See “Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList” on page 426 and “Removing CodecProfiles from a CodecProfileList” on page 426

create CodecProfileList prflist1destroy CodecProfileList prflist1

Attribute Description

key name of the CodecProfileList

codecProfiles The list used to contain the CodecProfiles for this CodecProfileList

Page 434: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

426 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList

The same Codec Profile may be added to different Codec Profile Lists.

insertInto CodecProfileList <key> codecProfiles <subkey> <CodecProfile>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a CodecProfile to a CodecProfileList’s codecProfile list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds CodecProfile CP1 to CodecProfileList prflist1:

insertInto CodecProfileList prflist1 codecProfiles 1 CP1

Removing CodecProfiles from a CodecProfileListdeleteFrom CodecProfileList <key> codecProfiles <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a CodecProfile from a CodecProfileList’s codecProfile list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following example removes the 1st CodecProfile from CodecProfileList prflist1

deleteFrom CodecProfileList prflist1 codecProfiles 1

Syntax Description

<key> CodeProfileList name

<subkey> This is the index in the codecProfile list where you want to enter the CodecProfile.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a codecProfile the start of the codecProfile list. Use a index of -1 to insert a codecProfile at the end of the codecProfile list.

<CodecProfile> This attribute specifies which CodecProfile you want to add to the CodecProfileList.

Syntax Description

<key> CodeProfileList name

<subkey> This is the index in the codecProfile list where you want to remove the CodecProfile.

Page 435: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 427990-1012-001

CodecProfile

Use CodecProfiles to create variations of standard codecs. Insert Codec Profiles into a CodecProfileList in the order you want the T7000 to attempt to use them.

A CodecProfile has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key name of the CodecProfile

codecTypeAndSize Codec type and sample size. See the T7000 Provisioning Guide for a chart detailing sample size and required bandwidth. Values are:

• G711_5MS — G.711 codec, 5 ms sample size.

• G711_10MS —G.711 codec, 10 ms sample size.

• G711_20MS (default) — G.711 codec, 20 ms sample size.

• G726_5MS — G.726 codec, 5 ms sample size.

• G726_10MS —G.726 codec, 10 ms sample size.

• G726_20MS — G.726 codec, 20ms sample size.

• G729_10MS — G.7296 codec, 10 ms sample size.

• G729_20MS — G.7296 codec, 20ms sample size.

• G729_30MS — G.7296 codec, 30ms sample size.

vadFlag Voice Activity Detection (VAD) silence suppression flag. Values are:

OFF — turns Voice Activity Detection silence suppression off. If your SIP phone or ATA does not support VAD, set this parameter to OFF

ON — turns Voice Activity Detection silence suppression. This allows the switch to send one silence packet (representing multiple packets), which decreases messaging between the endpoints.

dtmfToneMode How Dual Tone Multi Frequency Tones (DTMF) are transmitted during a call.

• INBAND — tones are sent as regular packetized voice; tones are sent in the same packets as the voice

• OUTBAND — tones are sent in the same RTP stream, but in separate packets from the voice (see RFC 2833)

Page 436: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

428 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for All CodecProfile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

NOTE: As a safety precaution, a CodecProfile that is in use can not be deleted! The switch will issue a warning message, specifying the name of the CodecProfileList that is using the Codec Profile. The CodecProfile must be removed from all CodecProfileLists that are using it before it can be deleted.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The modify command applies only to the following parameters:

• codecTypeAndSize

• vadFlag

• dtmfToneMode

To properly configure CodecProfiles and the CodecProfileLists, know the following capabilities of the SIP endpoint with which the T7000 will communicate:

• the codec types supported

• the different configurations of each codec supported

NOTE: If the T7000 and SIP endpoint cannot agree on a Codec Profile, the T7000 refuses the call during call setup.

create CodecProfile cp1modify CodecProfile cp1 vadFlag ONmodify CodecProfile cp1 codecTypeAndSize G711_20msmodify CodecProfile cp1 codecTypeAndSize G711_20MSquery CodecProfile cp1

<2bfc720> CodecProfilekey................"cp1"codecTypeAndSize...G711_20MSvadFlag............ONdtmfToneMode.......OUTBAND

Dependent Commands

Add this CodecProfile to a CodeProfileList, see “CodecProfileList” on page 425.

Page 437: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 429990-1012-001

Host IP Addr Pair

A Host IP Addr Pair associates a host name with one or two IP Addresses and port Numbers. It is stored in the Host Name table, and is used to resolve a Fully Qualified Domain Name into an IP Address and Port. For more information, see “Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names” on page 465.

A Host IP Addr has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all Host IP Addr Pair commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• sIPAddr

• Port

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• sIPAddr

• Port

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• priIPAddrPair

• secIPAddrPair

Attributes Description

key host name and domain of the Host IP Addr

priIPAddrPair Primary IP address and Port number of the host

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

secIPAddrPair Optional Secondary IP address and Port number of the IP host

Page 438: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

430 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

create HostIPAddrPair [email protected] 10.1.134.243 6030

modify HostIPAddrPair [email protected] secIPAddrPair 10.1.134.244 6031

query HostIPAddrPair [email protected]

<2bfc1f0> HostIPAddrPairkey............."[email protected]"priIPAddrPair...<2bfcce0>

<2bfcce0> IPAddrPair sIPAddr..."10.1.134.243" Port......178e (6030)

secIPAddrPair...<2bfc308>

<2bfc308> IPAddrPair sIPAddr..."10.1.134.244" Port......178f (6031)

Page 439: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 431990-1012-001

MediaParam

A MediaParam is a media stream parameter. Media stream parameters are configurable parameters for the bearer or RTP portion of a VoIP call. Media stream parameters apply to an entire trunk group.

A MediaParam has the following attributes:

Attributes Description

key name of the media stream parameter

adaptiveVadFlag Adaptive Voice Activity Detection (VAD) silence suppres-sion• MANUAL — Manual Silence Threshold

• DYNAMIC (default) — Dynamic Threshold Detection

vadThreshold The decibel threshold where adaptiveVadFlag detection occurs from -20 to -50. -30 is the default.

NOTE: set this only if Manual Silence Threshold is enabled

modemFaxHandlingCodec Modem and fax data transport is encoded using G711 upspeed

• G711 upspeed off

• G711 upspeed ON (default)

jitterBufferMode The jitter buffer conceals variations in RTP packet arrival times

• FIXED — buffer size is fixed

• ADAPTIVE (default) — buffer size changes to deal with varying levels of jitter

jitterBufferMaxSize The maximum time data is held in the buffer to conceal jitter.

Range 10-100. 100 is the default.

NOTE: This value can be set for either FIXED or ADAPTIVE jitterBufferMode

jitterBufferInitialSize The initial size of the jitter buffer from 0-100. 20 is the default.

NOTE: This value is only meaningful for ADAPTIVE jitterBufferMode.

Page 440: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

432 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

echoCancelFlag Controls the Echo Cancellers. Echo cancellation is often required because the process of packetizing voice samples can introduce delay and generate echo.

• ECHO_CANCEL_OFF — disables the echo canceller

• ECHO_CANCEL_ON (Default) — enables the echo canceller

echoTailSize Sets the maximum amount of echo tail (in milliseconds) that the echo canceller works on.

• 32

• 64 (default)

• 128

rtpDSCPtos RTP DSCP, controls the priority at which RTP packets are sent through the network.

Difserv Codepoint (DSCP) is a coarse-grained, class-based mechanism for traffic management. Diffserv selects the per-hop behavior (PHB) for each signaling

packet forwarded through the network.a

Expedited Forwarding PHB provides a low-loss, low-latency, assured bandwidth service for VoIP applications. The DSCP value for this PHB (which is recommend) is 184 (hex 0xB8).

signaling802_1_priority To set this parameter, ensure vlantag is ENABLED, see “setFeifOptions” on page 424.

When vlantagging is ENABLED, the 802.1Q tag header is added to each bearer packet the PIC transmits. The information set in this parameter controls the priority of packets.

• range (0 is the lowest priority, 7 is the highest priority)

• bearer default: 5

payloadType2833 used by the MGCP or SIP protocol to identify the RFC 2833 SDP Payload Type. Default is 101. The range is 96 - 999

enableGainControl used by the MGCP and SIP protocols. If the value is set to ON, the switch will use the values in rxGainControl and txGainControl when it sets up an RTP stream.

gainControlDb used by MGCP to set the amount of gain in a remote device (MTA) stream. The same amount of gain is set for both the transmit and receive direction. This happens regardless of the value of enableGainControl.

Default is 0 (i.e., no gain). The range is -14 dB to +14 dB

rxGainControl the amount of transmit gain to set in the MGCP or SIP media stream.

Default is 0 (i.e., no gain). The range is -14 dB to +14 dB

Attributes Description

Page 441: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 433990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all MediaParam commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• adaptiveVadFlag

• vadThreshold

• modemFaxHandlingCodec

• jitterBufferMode

• jitterBufferMaxSize

• jitterBufferInitialSize

• echoTailSize

• rtpDSCPtos

• signaling802_1_priority

• payloadType2833

• enableGainControl

• gainControlDb

• rxGainControl

• txGainControl

create MediaParam mdp1modify MediaParam mdp1 adaptiveVadFlag DYNAMIC

Dependent Commands

Apply a media stream parameter to a trunk group, see “Trunk Groups” on page 233.

txGainControl the amount of receive gain to set in the MGCP or SIP media stream.

Default is 0 (i.e., no gain). The range is -14 dB to +14 dB

a. DSCP is defined in RFC 2474. Expedited Forwarding PHB is defined in RFC-2598.

Attributes Description

Page 442: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

434 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SIP Timers

Each Sip Endpoint Profile contains a SIP timer object. The timers in the SIP timer object control how the endpoint behaves in a SIP network.

A SIP Endpoint has the following attributes.

Attribute Description

Timer1 The timers A, E, and G; INVITE request retransmit interval (UDP only), non-INVITE request retransmit interval (UDP only), and INVITE response retransmit interval.

Range: 100 - 1,000 ms

Default: 500 ms

Timer2 The maximum retransmit interval for non-INVITE requests and INVITE responses.

Range: 800 - 8,000 ms

Default: 4,000 ms

TimerB The INVITE transaction timeout. Far-end failover occurs when this timer expires.

Range: 2,000 - 64,000 ms

Default: (64 * timer1)

TimerD The wait time for response 0s for TCP/SCTP retransmits.

Range: 32,000 - 64,000 ms

Default: 32,000 ms

TimerF The non-INVITE transaction timeout.

Range: 6,400 - 64,000 ms

Default: (64 * timer1)

TimerH The wait time for ACK receipt.

Range: 6,400 - 64,000 ms

Default: (64 * timer1)

TimerI The wait time for 0s for TCP/SCTP ACK retransmits.

Default: 1,000 - 10,000 ms

Range: 5,000 ms

TimerJ The wait time for 0s for TCP/SCTP non-INVITE request retransmits.

Range: 6,400 - 64,000 ms

Default: (64 * timer1)

TimerK The wait time for 0s for TCP/SCTP response retransmits.

Range: 1,000 - 10,000 ms

Default: 5,000 ms

Page 443: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 435990-1012-001

create SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1modify SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 timers TimerFO 3200

TimerFO Failover timer: the wait time for a response to an INVITE before sending the INVITE to the secondary IP address

Range: 800 - 8,000 ms

Default: 4,000 ms

Attribute Description

Page 444: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

436 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SIP Access Gateway Profile

A SIP Access Gateway Profile defines the messaging and expected behavior of a SIP Access Gateway endpoint. The types of endpoints associated with this profile are IP phones, ATAs, or other CPE devices directly controlled by the T7000 and using its SIP registrar functionality

Multiple SIP Access Gateway endpoints share a profile; when you modify the profile it updates all SIP Access Gateway endpoints with that profile

A SIP Access Gateway Profile has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Access Gateway Profile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

There are no optional parameters for the create command.

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• options

• timers

create SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1modify SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 timers TimerFO 3200

Attribute Description

key name of the SIP Access Gateway endpoint profile

options The options for this profile. See “SIP Access Gateway Options” on page 437.

timers The timers for this profile. See “SIP Timers” on page 434.

Page 445: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 437990-1012-001

SIP Access Gateway Options

A SIP Access Gateway Options object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

compliantToRFC the specification that the far end is compliant to

• RFC3261 (default) — newer set of SIP standards

• RFC2543 — older set of SIP standards

maxForwards The initial value in the maxForwards header. This value is decremented by one each time it passes through a proxy as a means of loop detection. The SIP message is discarded when the value in the maxForwards header reaches zero.

Range 1-255. 6 is the default.

NOTE: The T7000 is not a proxy.

allowHeaderValue This is a bitfield of the types of headers sent in the ALLOW method. By default, all values are set.

Values are:

• INVITE (set by default)— Allow INVITE requests

• REGISTER (set by default) — Allow REGISTER requests

• BYE (set by default) — Allow BYE requests

• CANCEL (set by default) — Allow CANCEL requests

• ACK (set by default) — Allow ACK requests

• NOTIFY — Allow NOTIFY requests

• SUBSCRIBE — Allow SUBSCRIBE requests

• OPTIONS — Allow OPTIONS requests

• UPDATE — Allow UPDATE requests

• INFO (set by default) — Allow INFO requests

preferredPrivacyMethod • NO_PRIVACY_METHOD — send calling party name and number in the FROM header. If the calling party presentation is restricted or unavailable, the switch will send From: "Anonymous" <sip:Anonymous@IP_ADDRESS:Port>

• REMOTE_PARTY_ID (default) — send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Remote Party ID header of the SIP message

• PRIVACY_HEADER — send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Privacy header of the SIP message

Page 446: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

438 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

expiresHeaderValue contents of the EXPIRES header, how long the current message should be honored from

Range: 1,000 to 360,000 milliseconds. 180,000 is the default.

NOTE: If the timer expires before the call is set up, the call is cancelled.

dnsLookup Specifies how the switch resolves a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) into an IP Address and Port number when a lookup in the Host Names table fails. Note that the switch always first checks the Host Names table to resolve an FQDN, regardless of the setting of the dnsLookup attribute.

The choices are:

• DNS_LOOKUP_DISABLED — the switch makes no further attempts to resolve the FQDN.

• DNS_LOOKUP_ENABLED — the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address (for details, consult RFC 1034).

• DNS_SRV_LOOKUP_ENABLED — the switch issues a DNS SRV query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and a Port number (for details, consult RFC 2782). If the DNS SRV query fails, the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address.

For details, see “Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names” on page 465.

dnsRespTimerValue How long the switch will wait for a DNS query before giving up.

Range: 500 - 10,000 ms

Default: 3,000 ms

responseToOPTIONS This attribute controls how the switch responds to an OPTIONs request. Since the switch does not support the OPTIONS method, the normal response should be “405, Method not allowed”.

However, some endpoints (such as the Audio Codes Session Border Controller), cannot process this response. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can send 200 OK instead.

The choices are:

• Response200ToOptions — Send a 200 OK response.

• Response405ToOptions (default) — Send a 405 Method not allowed response.

Attribute Description

Page 447: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 439990-1012-001

sipCallRefMapOption This attribute controls how the switch identifies messages in a SIP dialog. RFC 3261 defines a dialog as the combination of the To tag, the From tag, and the Call-ID.

However, some endpoints change the To tag or the From tag after an INVITE message is sent or received. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can identify messages in a dialog by Call-ID only.

The choices are:

• CALLID_FROM_TO_HDR (default) — Use Call-ID, To tag, and From tag to identify messages in a dialog, per RFC 3261.

• CALLID_ONLY — Use only Call-ID to identify messages in a dialog.

secondaryDNReqURI For SIP subscribers with a secondary DN whose alertInfoHdr attribute is INCLUDE_WITH_SPACES or INCLUDE_WITHOUT_SPACES

• PRIMARY — always set the Req URI address of the INVITE Request to the primary DN, regardless of which DN was dialed (default)

• SECONDARY — always set the Req URI address of the INVITE Request to the secondary DN, regardless of which DN was dialed

alertInfoHdr • NOT_INCLUDE — do not include an Alert Info Header in the INVITE Request (default)

• INCLUDE_WITH_SPACES — an Alert-Info header is included in the INVITE Request, consisting of the alertInfoStringPrefix assigned to the Subscriber Access Gatewayendpoint profile, followed by the numeric value received in the Alert-Info Header Alert-String received from the home Application Server, with one space before and one space after the string text

• INCLUDE_WITHOUT_SPACES — an Alert-Info header is included in INVITE Request, consisting of the alertInfoStringPrefix assigned to the Subscriber Access Gateway endpoint profile, followed by the numeric value received in the Alert-Info Header received from the home Application Server.

alertInfoStringPrefix This is a string used by the SIP phone or ATA to deliver a distinctive ring tone. If the value of the alertInfoHdr attribute is INCLUDE_WITH_SPACES or INCLUDE_WITHOUT_SPACES, this string will be delivered, along with the numeric value received in the Alert-Info Header from the home Application Server.

Attribute Description

Page 448: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

440 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 options maxForwards 4modify SipAgwEndpointProfile agwProfile1 options responseToOPTIONS 200

Dependent Commands

Associate a SIP Access Gateway endpoint with a SIP Access Gateway Endpoint profile, see “Subscriber Access Gateway Endpoint” on page 441.

regsWithoutChallenge Determines if the Subscriber Access Endpoint can Register without being issued a Challenge.

Values are:

• NO (default) — the endpoint cannot Register without answering a Challenge.

• YES — the endpoint can Register without answering a Challenge.

NOTE: This attribute was added in Release 6.0.1 to allow interworking with some wireless phones. In most cases however, the default value should be used.

RealmString

TipIf you are upgrading from Release 5.0, and SIP Registration is failing, try changing this attribute to “Tekelec7000”.

This is the realm parameter issued in a challenge during the SIP Registration process. You may have to change this value from the default if an Access Gateway requires a custom realm string. Or, you may need to change the realm from the default for security purposes. Otherwise, accept the default value.

Default: Taqua-T7000

Attribute Description

Page 449: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 441990-1012-001

Subscriber Access Gateway Endpoint

Subscriber Access Gateway endpoints are IP phones, ATAs, or other CPE devices directly controlled by the T7000 and using its SIP registrar functionality. This type of SIP subscriber receives the same services from the T7000 as other types of subscribers (TDM, MGCP, etc.).

A Subscriber Access Gateway endpoint has the following attributes:.

Attribute Description

key 10-digit directory number that acts as a key for the SIP endpoint. The key must match the DN of the subscriber record. see “Subscribers” on page 530

EndpointName Optional name of IP End Point used to label the IP End Point.

Length: 1 - 48 characters.

profileName The SIP Access Gateway Endpoint Profile associated with this endpoint.

bearerGrpKey The BearerGroup associated with this endpoint. See “BearerGroup” on page 163.

PriHostIPAddrPair The Primary IP address and Port number of the SIP endpoint. Normally this information is supplied by the SIP phone as part of the SIP Register process.

AltHostIPAddrPairs A list of alternate IP addresses and Port numbers of the SIP endpoint. This attribute is normally 0 for a Subscriber Access Gateway.

actHostIndex • HOST_NOT_USED

• OUTBOUND_PROXY_ACTIVE

• PRIMARY_ACTIVE

• SECONDARY_ACTIVE

bearerFEs The Fast Ethernet Interface(s) that handle (RTP). Each PIC card has two FEs. Use multiple FEs for load sharing.

transportType This field is read-only.

UDP — SIP messages are conveyed to this endpoint using User Datagram Protocol

signalingType This field is read-only.

SIP — This endpoint is served by the SIP protocol.

cmtsName cmtsName - Used to implement the optional DQoS Dynamic Quality of Service) feature.

When a CMTS is assigned to an endpoint, a connection is established with the CMTS using the COPS (Common Open Policy Service) protocol. Every call that is made from/to that endpoint will trigger the DQoS feature to allocate gate's with the CMTS before sending any call processing messages.

Page 450: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

442 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Access Gateway Endpoint commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• profileName

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• sIPAddr

• Port

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• endpointName

• profileName

• bearerGrpKey

• priHostIPAddrPair

• cmtsName

• FQDN

• outboundProxyIPAddrPair.

create SipAgwEndpointProfile agwp1create SipAgwEndpoint 6924800000 agwp1 bg_agwmodify SipAgwEndpoint 6924800000 priHostIPAddrPair 202.158.201.38 5060destroy SipAgwEndpoint 6924800000

FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). Normally, a Subscriber Access endpoint does not have an FQDN. If used, a Domain Name System (DNS) will be required to translate the FQDN to an IP address.

outboundProxyIPAddrPair The outbound proxy IP Address Pair is the address of a firewall. When provisioned, this attribute is used for sending outbound SIP messages to the Subscriber Access Gateway endpoint.

If there is a firewall between the switch and the Subscriber Access Gateway endpoint, enter the IP address and port of the firewall.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

Attribute Description

Page 451: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 443990-1012-001

Prerequisites

SIP endpoint profile, see “SIP Access Gateway Profile” on page 436.

Codec Profile List, see “CodecProfileList” on page 425, and Codec Profile, see “CodecProfile” on page 427, and “Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList” on page 426.

Media stream parameter, see “MediaParam” on page 431

Dependent Commands

Create an IP trunk group and modify its attributes, see see “IP Trunk Groups” on page 307.

Add prefixes, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

Create a route list, see with a route over the IP trunk group, see “NANP Route List” on page 519.

Page 452: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

444 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SIP Emergency Services Gateway Profile

A SIP Emergency Services Gateway Profile defines the messaging and expected behavior of a SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoint. This type of endpoint provides 911 service to nomadic IP subscribers.

Multiple SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoints share a profile; when you modify the profile it updates all SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoints with that profile

A SIP Emergency Services Profile has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Emergency Services Gateway Profile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

There are no optional parameters for the create command.

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• options

• timers

create SipEsgwEndpointProfile esgwProfile1modify SipEsgwEndpointProfile esgwProfile1 timers TimerD 34000

Attribute Description

key name of the SIP Emergency Services endpoint profile

options The options for this profile. See “SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options” on page 445.

timers The timers for this profile. See “SIP Timers” on page 434.

Page 453: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 445990-1012-001

SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options

A SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

compliantToRFC the specification that the far end is compliant to

• RFC3261 (default) — newer set of SIP standards

• RFC2543 — older set of SIP standards

maxForwards The initial value in the maxForwards header. This value is decremented by one each time it passes through a proxy as a means of loop detection. The SIP message is discarded when the value in the maxForwards header reaches zero.

Range 1-255. 6 is the default.

NOTE: The T7000 is not a proxy.

allowHeaderValue This is a bitfield of the types of headers sent in the ALLOW method. By default, all values are set.

Values are:

• INVITE (set by default)— Allow INVITE requests

• REGISTER — Allow REGISTER requests

• BYE (set by default) — Allow BYE requests

• CANCEL (set by default)— Allow CANCEL requests

• ACK (set by default)— Allow ACK requests

• NOTIFY — Allow NOTIFY requests

• SUBSCRIBE — Allow SUBSCRIBE requests

• OPTIONS — Allow OPTIONS requests

• UPDATE — Allow UPDATE requests

• INFO — Allow INFO requests

preferredPrivacyMethod • NO_PRIVACY_METHOD — send calling party name and number in the FROM header. If the calling party presentation is restricted or unavailable, the switch will send From: "Anonymous" <sip:Anonymous@IP_ADDRESS:Port>

• REMOTE_PARTY_ID (default) — send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Remote Party ID header of the SIP message

• PRIVACY_HEADER — send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Privacy header of the SIP message

Page 454: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

446 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

expiresHeaderValue contents of the EXPIRES header, how long the current message should be honored from

Range: 1,000 to 360,000 milliseconds. 180,000 is the default.

NOTE: If the timer expires before the call is set up, the call is cancelled.

dnsLookup Specifies how the switch resolves a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) into an IP Address and Port number when a lookup in the Host Names table fails. Note that the switch always first checks the Host Names table to resolve an FQDN, regardless of the setting of the dnsLookup attribute.

The choices are:

• DNS_LOOKUP_DISABLED — the switch makes no further attempts to resolve the FQDN.

• DNS_LOOKUP_ENABLED — the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address (for details, consult RFC 1034).

• DNS_SRV_LOOKUP_ENABLED — the switch issues a DNS SRV query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and a Port number (for details, consult RFC 2782). If the DNS SRV query fails, the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address.

• For details, see “Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names” on page 465.

dnsRespTimerValue How long the switch will wait for a DNS query before giving up.

Range: 500 - 10,000 ms

Default: 3,000 ms

responseToOPTIONS This attribute controls how the switch responds to an OPTIONS request. Since the switch does not support the OPTIONS method, the normal response should be “405, Method not allowed”. However, some endpoints (such as the Audio Codes Session Border Controller), cannot process this response. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can send 200 OK instead.

• Response200 — Send a 200 OK response.

• Response405 (default— Send a 405 Method not allowed response.

Attribute Description

Page 455: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 447990-1012-001

sipCallRefMapOption This attribute controls how the switch identifies messages in a SIP dialog. RFC 3261 defines a dialog as the combination of the To tag, the From tag, and the Call-ID.

However, some endpoints change the To tag or the From tag after an INVITE message is sent or received. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can identify messages in a dialog by Call-ID only.

The choices are:

• CALLID_FROM_TO_HDR (default) — Use Call-ID, To tag, and From tag to identify messages in a dialog, per RFC 3261.

• CALLID_ONLY — Use only Call-ID to identify messages in a dialog.

diversionRequired • YES — populates the redirectingNumber field in the diversion header of a SIP call

• NO (default)— no redirectingNumber is added

ESAOption See “ESAOption” on page 464.

incomingRoute Specifies how the switch determines the incoming route.

• CALLING_THEN_BOTTOM_VIA (default)— when the switch receives an INVITE request, it first determines the originating Endpoint by inspecting the FROM header. It uses NANP routing to determine the incoming IP trunk group. If it can not find an IP trunk group from the FROM header, it then inspects the bottom VIA, as described in the BOTTOM_VIA_HEADER only option.

• BOTTOM_VIA_ONLY — when the switch receives an INVITE request, it determines the incoming route by looking up the Network Endpoint associated with the IP address in the bottom VIA. It uses the default IP Trunk Group of the SIP Ngw End Point for the incoming IP Trunk Group.

NOTE: The required option for Emergency Services Gateways is BOTTOM_VIA_ONLY.

pingRespTimerValue Used with ESAOption ESAforPingRespTimeOut.

Specifies how long the switch will wait for a response to a ping. When the timer expires, the switch sends another ping to the unreachable endpoint

Range: 500 — 3,000 milliseconds (default = 1,000)

Attribute Description

Page 456: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

448 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify SipEsgwEndpointProfile esgwProfile1 options maxForwards 10

Dependent Commands

Associate a SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoint with a SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint profile, see “SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint” on page 449

farEndFailoverControl For use with, but not limited to, TaquaWorks.

Values are:

• PreferActiveHost (default) — Always sends the 1st INVITE for a call to the active IP address(see “actNearEndNiOid” on page 312).

• PreferPrimary — Always send the1st INVITE for a call to the primary IP address. If no response is returned, continue sending INVITE requests for the call to the primary IP address, until either a response is received or the failover timer fires (see “TimerFO” on page 435). After the failover timer expires, send all subsequent INVITE requests to the secondary IP address until either a response is received or timer B fires (see “TimerB” on page 434). Repeat this process for the next call, regardless of what happened to the current call.

NOTE: Set farEndFailoverControl to PreferPrimary for BroadWorks Applications Servers.

send3xxForINVITE For use with TaquaWorks systems without a Network Server.

This attribute controls how the switch responds to an INVITE from a member of one business group on BroadWorks Application Server to a member of a different business group, also on the BroadWorks Application Server.

NOTE: If you are not using TaquaWorks, or if your TaquaWorks system has a Network Server, leave this attribute’s value at the default.

Values are:

• OFF (default) — the switch sends an INVITE to the BroadWorks Application Server.

• 302 — the switch sends a 302 Redirect to the BroadWorks Application Server. This 302 allows BroadWorks to properly handle the call without a Network Server.

Attribute Description

Page 457: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 449990-1012-001

SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint

An Emergency Services gateway provides 911 service to nomadic IP subscribers.

A SIP Emergency Services Gateway endpoint has the following attributes:.

Attribute Description

key 10-digit directory number that acts as a key for the SIP endpoint. For an Emergency Services Gateway endpoint, this is also the defaultDN for the IP trunk group connecting to it from the switch. This DN should be part of your NPA-NXX and reserved for this configuration.

endpointName Optional name of IP End Point used to label the IP End Point.

Length: 1 - 48 characters.

profileName The SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint Profile associated with this endpoint.

bearerGrpKey The BearerGroup associated with this endpoint. See “BearerGroup” on page 163.

PriHostIPAddrPair The Primary IP address and Port number of the SIP endpoint.

altHostIPAddrPairs A list of back-up IP addresses and ports of the connecting softswitch, to be used when a connection cannot be made to the PriHostIPAddrPair.

actHostIndex • HOST_NOT_USED

• OUTBOUND_PROXY_ACTIVE

• PRIMARY_ACTIVE

• SECONDARY_ACTIVE

transportType This field is read-only.

UDP — SIP messages are conveyed to this endpoint using User Datagram Protocol

signalingType This field is read-only.

SIP — This endpoint is served by the SIP protocol.

FQDN Optional Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) for outbound INVITE requests. The ESGW endpoint may use a FQDN to implement a DNS-based redundancy scheme.

Page 458: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

450 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Emergency Services Gateway commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• profileName

• bearerGrpKey

• sIPAddr

• Port

There are no optional parameters for the create command.

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• endpointName

• profileName

• priHostIPAddrPair

• FQDN

• outboundProxyIPAddrPair

The insertInto and the deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• altHostIPAddrPairs

See:

• “Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint” on page 452

• “Removing IP Addr Pairs from a SIP Emergency Services Gateway” on page 453

outboundProxyIPAddrPair The outboundProxyIPAddrPair is the IP address of a Session Border Controller (SBC). When provisioned, this attribute is used for sending outbound SIP messages to the Emergency Services Gateway endpoint.

If there is a SBC or proxy firewall between the switch and the Emergency Services Gateway endpoint, enter the IP address and port of the firewall.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

Attribute Description

Page 459: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 451990-1012-001

create SipEsgwEndpoint 9724809911 esgwProfile1 bg_esgw 202.158.201.38 5060query SipEsgwEndpoint 6924801000destroy SipEsgwEndpoint 6924801000

Prerequisites

SIP endpoint profile, see “SIP Emergency Services Gateway Profile” on page 444.

Codec Profile, see “CodecProfile” on page 427, and Codec Profile List, see “CodecProfileList” on page 425.

Media stream parameter, see “MediaParam” on page 431

Dependent Commands

Create an IP trunk group and modify its attributes, see “IP Trunk Groups” on page 307.

Add prefixes, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

Create a route list with a route over the IP trunk group, see “LNP Route List” on page 517.

Page 460: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

452 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Emergency Services Gateway EndpointinsertInto SipEsgwEndpoint <key> altHostIPAddrPairs <subkey> <IPAddrPair>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add an IP Address to a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint’s altHostIPAddrPairs list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds IP Address 202.158.201.39, Port 506 to SIP Emergency Services Gateway 6924001000’s altHostIPAddrPairs list:

insertInto SipEsgwEndpoint 6924801000 altHostIPAddrPairs 1 IPAddrPair 202.158.201.39 5060

Syntax Description

<key> SIP Network Gateway DN

<subkey> This is the index in the altHostIPAddrPair list where you want to enter the alternate IP Address Pair.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert an alternate IP Address Pair at the start of the altHostIPAddrPair list. Use a index of -1 to insert an alternate IP Address Pair at the end of the altHostIPAddrPair list.

<IPAddPair> This attribute specifies which Fast Ethernet you want to add to the SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

Page 461: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 453990-1012-001

Removing IP Addr Pairs from a SIP Emergency Services GatewaydeleteFrom SipEsgwEndpoint <key> altHostIPAddrPairs <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove an IP Address from a SIP Emergency Services Gateway Endpoint’s altHostIPAddrPairs list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following example removes the 1st IP Address from SIP Emergency Services Gateway 6924801000’s altHostIPAddrPairs list:

deleteFrom SipEsgwEndpoint 6924801000 altHostIPAddrPairs 1

Syntax Description

<key> SIP Network Gateway DN

<subkey> This is the index in the bearerFE list where you want to remove the Fast Ethernet.

Page 462: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

454 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SIP Network Gateway Profile

A SIP Network Gateway Profile defines the messaging and expected behavior of a SIP Network Gateway endpoint. The types of SIP endpoints are stand-alone IP gateways to an IP access network, or distributed soft switch systems (such as Application Servers connecting IP CENTREX business groups).

Multiple SIP Network Gateway endpoints share a profile; when you modify the profile it updates all SIP Network Gateway endpoints with that profile

A SIP Network Gateway Profile has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Network Gateway Profile commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

There are no optional parameters for the create command.

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• options

• timers

create SipNgwEndpointProfile ngwProfile1modify SipNgwEndpointProfile ngwProfile1 timers TimerD 33800

Attribute Description

key name of the SIP Network Gateway endpoint profile

options The options for this profile. See “SIP Network Gateway Options” on page 455.

timers The timers for this profile. See “SIP Timers” on page 434.

Page 463: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 455990-1012-001

SIP Network Gateway Options

A SIP Access Gateway Options object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

compliantToRFC the specification that the far end is compliant to

• RFC3261 (default) — newer set of SIP standards

• RFC2543 — older set of SIP standards

maxForwards The initial value in the maxForwards header. This value is decremented by one each time it passes through a proxy as a means of loop detection. The SIP message is discarded when the value in the maxForwards header reaches zero.

Range 1-255. 6 is the default.

NOTE: The T7000 is not a proxy.

allowHeaderValue This is a bitfield of the types of headers sent in the ALLOW method. By default, all values are set.

Values are:

• INVITE (set by default)— Allow INVITE requests

• REGISTER — Allow REGISTER requests

• BYE (set by default) — Allow BYE requests

• CANCEL (set by default)— Allow CANCEL requests

• ACK (set by default)— Allow ACK requests

• NOTIFY — Allow NOTIFY requests

• SUBSCRIBE — Allow SUBSCRIBE requests

• OPTIONS — Allow OPTIONS requests

• UPDATE — Allow UPDATE requests

• INFO — Allow INFO requests

preferredPrivacyMethod • NO_PRIVACY_METHOD — send calling party name and number in the FROM header. If the calling party presentation is restricted or unavailable, the switch will send From: "Anonymous" <sip:Anonymous@IP_ADDRESS:Port>

• REMOTE_PARTY_ID (default) — send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Remote Party ID header of the SIP message

• PRIVACY_HEADER — send or do not send calling party name and number, depending on what is set in the Privacy header of the SIP message

Page 464: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

456 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

expiresHeaderValue contents of the EXPIRES header, how long the current message should be honored from

Range: 1,000 to 360,000 milliseconds. 180,000 is the default.

NOTE: If the timer expires before the call is set up, the call is cancelled.

dnsLookup Specifies how the switch resolves a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) into an IP Address and Port number when a lookup in the Host Names table fails. Note that the switch always first checks the Host Names table to resolve an FQDN, regardless of the setting of the dnsLookup attribute.

The choices are:

• DNS_LOOKUP_DISABLED — the switch makes no further attempts to resolve the FQDN.

• DNS_LOOKUP_ENABLED — the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address (for details, consult RFC 1034).

• DNS_SRV_LOOKUP_ENABLED — the switch issues a DNS SRV query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and a Port number (for details, consult RFC 2782). If the DNS SRV query fails, the switch issues a DNS A query to resolve the FQDN into an IP Address.

• For details, see “Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names” on page 465.

dnsRespTimerValue How long the switch will wait for a DNS query before giving up.

Range: 500 - 10,000 ms

Default: 3,000 ms

responseToOPTIONS This attribute controls how the switch responds to an OPTIONs request. Since the switch does not support the OPTIONS method, the normal response should be “405, Method not allowed”. However, some endpoints (such as the Audio Codes Session Border Controller), cannot process this response. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can send 200 OK instead.

• Response200ToOptions — Send a 200 OK response.

• Response405ToOptions (default— Send a 405 Method not allowed response.

Attribute Description

Page 465: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 457990-1012-001

sipCallRefMapOption This attribute controls how the switch identifies messages in a SIP dialog. RFC 3261 defines a dialog as the combination of the To tag, the From tag, and the Call-ID.

However, some endpoints change the To tag or the From tag after an INVITE message is sent or received. To accommodate such endpoints, the switch can identify messages in a dialog by Call-ID only.

The choices are:

• CALLID_FROM_TO_HDR (default) — Use Call-ID, To tag, and From tag to identify messages in a dialog, per RFC 3261.

• CALLID_ONLY — Use only Call-ID to identify messages in a dialog.

diversionRequired • YES — populates the redirectingNumber field in the diversion header of a SIP call

• NO (default)— no redirectingNumber is added

ESAOption See “ESAOption” on page 464.

incomingRoute Specifies how the switch determines the incoming route.

• BOTTOM_VIA_THEN_CALLING (default)— when the switch receives an INVITE request, it first determines the originating Endpoint by inspecting the FROM header. It uses NANP routing to determine the incoming IP trunk group. If it can not find an IP trunk group from the FROM header, it then inspects the bottom VIA, as described in the BOTTOM_VIA_HEADER only option.

• BOTTOM_VIA_ONLY — when the switch receives an INVITE request, it determines the incoming route by looking up the Network Endpoint associated with the IP address in the bottom VIA. It uses the default IP Trunk Group of the SIP Ngw End Point for the incoming IP Trunk Group.

pingRespTimerValue Used with ESAOption ESAforPingRespTimeOut.

Specifies how long the switch will wait for a response to a ping. When the timer expires, the switch sends another ping to the unreachable endpoint

Range: 500 — 3,000 milliseconds (default = 1,000)

Attribute Description

Page 466: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

458 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

modify SipNgwEndpointProfile ngwProfile1 options maxForwards 2

Dependent Commands

Associate a SIP Network Gateway endpoint with a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint profile, see “SIP Network Gateway Endpoint” on page 459

farEndFailoverControl For use with, but not limited to, TaquaWorks.

Values are:

• PreferActiveHost (default) — Always sends the 1st INVITE for a call to the active IP address(see “actNearEndNiOid” on page 312).

• PreferPrimary — Always send the1st INVITE for a call to the primary IP address. If no response is returned, continue sending INVITE requests for the call to the primary IP address, until either a response is received or the failover timer files (see “TimerFO” on page 435). After the failover timer expires, send all subsequent INVITE requests to the secondary IP address until either a response is received or timer B fires (see “TimerB” on page 434). Repeat this process for the next call, regardless of what happened to the current call

Attribute Description

Page 467: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 459990-1012-001

SIP Network Gateway Endpoint

SIP Network Gateway endpoints are stand-alone IP gateways.

A SIP Network Gateway endpoint has the following attributes:.

Attribute Description

key 10-digit directory number that acts as a key for the SIP endpoint. For a Network Gateway endpoint, this is also the defaultDN for the IP trunk group connecting to it from the switch. This DN should be part of your NPA-NXX and reserved for this configuration.

endpointName Optional name of IP End Point used to label the IP End Point.

Length: 1 - 48 characters.

profileName The SIP Network Gateway Endpoint Profile associated with this endpoint.

bearerGrpKey The BearerGroup associated with this endpoint. See “BearerGroup” on page 163.

priHostIPAddrPair The Primary IP address and Port number of the SIP endpoint.

altHostIPAddrPairs A list of back-up IP addresses and ports of the connecting softswitch, to be used when a connection cannot be made to the PriHostIPAddrPair.

actHostIndex • HOST_NOT_USED

• OUTBOUND_PROXY_ACTIVE

• PRIMARY_ACTIVE

• SECONDARY_ACTIVE

transportType This field is read-only.

UDP — SIP messages are conveyed to this endpoint using User Datagram Protocol

signalingType This field is read-only.

SIP — This endpoint is served by the SIP protocol.

FQDN Optional Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). The T7000 usually forms SIP messages using the IP address of the Network Gateway endpoint. If the Network Gateway requires a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) instead of an IP address in outbound requests, double-click FQDN and enter the FQDN of the Network Gateway.

NOTE: FQDN may be used to implement a DNS based NGW redundancy scheme.

Page 468: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

460 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all SIP Network Gateway commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• profileName

• BearerGrpKey

• sIPAddr

• Port

There are no optional parameters for the create command.

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• endpointName

• profileName

• priHostIPAddrPair

• FQDN

• outboundProxyIPAddrPair

The insertInto and the deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• altHostIPAddrPairs

• bearerFEs

See “Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint” on page 462, and “Removing Bearer FEs from a SIP Network Gateway” on page 463.

create SipNgwEndpoint 6924801000 ngw_p1 bg_ngw1 202.158.201.38 5060query SipNgwEndpoint 6924801000destroy SipAgwEndpoint 6924801000

outboundProxyIPAddrPair The outboundProxyIPAddrPair is the IP address of a Session Border Controller (SBC). When provisioned, this attribute is used for sending outbound SIP messages to the Network Gateway endpoint.

If there is a SBC or proxy firewall between the switch and the Network Gateway endpoint, enter the IP address and port of the firewall.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

Attribute Description

Page 469: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 461990-1012-001

Prerequisites

SIP endpoint profile, see “SIP Network Gateway Profile” on page 454.

Codec Profile List, see “CodecProfileList” on page 425, and Codec Profile, see “CodecProfile” on page 427, and “Adding CodecProfiles to a CodecProfileList” on page 426.

Media stream parameter, see “MediaParam” on page 431

Dependent Commands

Create an IP trunk group and modify its attributes, see “IP Trunk Groups” on page 307.

Add prefixes, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

Create a route list, see with a route over the IP trunk group, see “Tandem ANI Route List” on page 521.

Page 470: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

462 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding IP Addr Pairs to a SIP Network Gateway EndpointinsertInto SipNgwEndpoint <key> altHostIPAddrPairs <subkey> <IPAddrPair>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add an IP Address to a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint’s altHostIPAddrPairs list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds IP Address 202.158.201.39, Port 506 to SIP Network Gateway 6924001000’s altHostIPAddrPairs list:

insertInto SipNgwEndpoint 6924801000 altHostIPAddrPairs 1 IPAddrPair 202.158.201.39 5060

Syntax Description

<key> SIP Network Gateway DN

<subkey> This is the index in the altHostIPAddrPair list where you want to enter the alternate IP Address Pair.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert an alternate IP Address Pair at the start of the altHostIPAddrPair list. Use a index of -1 to insert an alternate IP Address Pair at the end of the altHostIPAddrPair list.

<IPAddPair> This attribute specifies which Fast Ethernet you want to add to the SIP Network Gateway Endpoint.

NOTE: The IP address must be entered in the dotted decimal format of four octets in decimal (0-255) separated by periods; for example: 10.2.86.195

Page 471: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 463990-1012-001

Removing Bearer FEs from a SIP Network GatewaydeleteFrom SipNgwEndpoint <key> altHostIPAddrPairs <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove an IP Address from a SIP Network Gateway Endpoint’s altHostIPAddrPairs list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following example removes the 1st IP Address from SIP Network Gateway 6924801000’s altHostIPAddrPairs list:

deleteFrom SipNgwEndpoint 6924801000 bearerFEs 1

Syntax Description

<key> SIP Network Gateway DN

<subkey> This is the index in the bearerFE list where you want to remove the Fast Ethernet.

Page 472: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

464 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

ESAOption

Both the SIP Emergency Services Gateway Options and the SIP Network Gateway Options use the ESAOption. If the switch does not receive a response to an INVITE request from the Network Gateway, Timer B expires, and the feature is invoked.

See The T7000 Provisioning Guide for a discussion of Emergency Stand Alone and Enhanced Voice Services subscribers.

The feature performs the following functions:

• Emergency Stand Alone (ESA) protection for Enhanced Voice Services (EVS) Subscribers

• automatic IP trunk group management for all types of SIP calls

The following table shows how different values of the ESAOption affect its behavior.

NOTE: The Ping time-out is determined by the pingRespTimerValue. The Ping interval is determined by the pingPeriod.

ValueEffect on IP trunk group

managementEffect on Enhanced Voice

Subscribers

DISABLED (default) None. None.

ESAonBFired None. ESA for the EVS subscriber making the call.

ESAonBFiredAndPingSep The IP trunk group is automatically taken out of service by marking it unreachable.

The IP trunk group is not used for any type of SIP call (not just EVS calls, but regular SIP traffic as well).

The switch starts pinging the Network Gateway. When the Network Gateway responds to the switch’s ping, the IP trunk group is automatically put back into service by marking it reachable, and the switch reverts to normal routing.

ESA for the EVS subscriber making the call.

Subsequent calls by EVS subscribers using the same IP Trunk group automatically invoke ESA, until the IP trunk group is back in service.

Page 473: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 465990-1012-001

Resolving Fully Qualified Domain Names

Sometimes endpoints are addressed via a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN), instead of an IP Address and Port Number. Before the switch can send a message to such an endpoint, the switch must resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and a Port Number. For example, an FQDN of www.taqua.com might translate to an IP Address of 65.99.210.231 and a Port Number of 5060.

One place where FQDNs are encountered is when the switch receives Anonymous SIP calls from a Network Gateway. In this case, the switch resolves the FQDN when processing the SIP message's bottom Via header.

Also, endpoints may be provisioned with an FQDN. For details, see:

• “FQDN” on page 442 (Access Gateways)

• “FQDN” on page 449 (Emergency Services Gateways)

• “FQDN” on page 459 (Network Gateways.

In such cases:

• The switch constructs outgoing INVITE requests to the endpoint using the provisioned FQDN in the Request URI and the To header. However, before sending the INVITE, the switch must resolve the FQDN into an IP Address and Port Number.

• When the switch receives incoming INVITE requests from the endpoint, it must resolve the FQDN in the Contact header so it knows where to send responses.

Prior to release 6.0, the switch resolved FQDNs via the Host Names table. The Host Names table is a static lookup table indexed by FQDN.

New in Release 6.0, the switch can resolve an FQDN by sending a query to a Domain Name System (DNS) Server. A DNS Server is a computer in the network which handles FQDN queries from multiple clients. When the IP Address or Port Number associated with an FQDN changes, there is minimal provisioning impact on the network, because only one computer (the DNS Server) needs to be updated with the new information.

When the switch has to resolve an FQDN, it always checks the Host Names table first. If the lookup succeeds, the switch uses the IP Address and Port Number from the Host Names table.

However, if the FQDN is not found in the Host Names table, the switch checks the value of the endpoint’s dnsLookup attribute. The value of this attribute determines how the switch resolves the endpoint’s FQDN. For details, see:

• “dnsLookup” on page 438 (Access Gateways)

• “dnsLookup” on page 446 (Emergency Services Gateways)

• “dnsLookup” on page 456 (Network Gateways.

Page 474: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP

466 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

If no DNS query is made, or if the DNS query fails, the switch uses the last used IPaddr pair for the endpoint. This is the active IPaddr pair for the endpoint, either:

• the last address used by the host

• the last result returned by the DNS server

• the provisioned the primary / secondary IP Address)

NOTE: To speed processing, the switch caches DNS Server responses. These responses are not kept forever, but are discarded when they have exceeded their Time To Live. This behavior is controlled by the minimumDnsTTL attribute in the Fast Ethernet Interface that made the DNS query.

For more information, see “Host IP Addr Pair” on page 429 and “Provisioning a DNS Server” in the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

Page 475: 1012 Command Line Interface

Shelf

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 467990-1012-001

Shelf

A Shelf object contains information about the switch. It has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key Note: this field is read-only.

The number of the shelf.

Range: 1 - 31

netref1OID Network Reference 1 Object ID. Defines the first of two network references from which the shelf may take clock reference. If used, the value is a T1 span OID.

See “OID” on page 30, and “tdmConfig (iii)” on page 730.

netref2OID Network Reference 2Ojbect ID. Defines the second of two network references from which the shelf m may take clock reference. If used, the value is a T1 span OID.

See “OID” on page 30, and “tdmConfig (iii)” on page 730.

tdmSpeed Note: this field is read-only.

The speed of the TDM bus. This number varies, depending on the types of card in the shelf.

Values are:

• 8Mhz

• 10Mhz

• 12Mhz

• 14Mhz

• 16Mhz

auditsEnabled Displays the status of the replicated database manager audit function.

Values are:

• ENABLED — audits are enabled. This is the normal value for this attribute. All cards will be periodically audited by the Database Manager, which ensures that all cards’ data is equivalent across the shelf. Any inconsistencies will automatically re-synchronize with the Database Master’s copy of the data.

• DISABLED — audits are manually disabled.

C A U T I O N

Database audits should not be disabled during normal operations!

• AUTO_DISABLED— Internal value.

• PAUSED_FOR_SWACT — Internal value.

Page 476: 1012 Command Line Interface

Shelf

468 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all Shelf commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

NOTE: A Shelf object is automatically created by the system. There is no create command.

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands applies to the following attributes:

• auditExclusions

• keyring

Contact Taqua TAC before using these commands on a Shelf object.

auditPeriod This timer controls how often the Database Manager conducts a database audit.

Minimum audit period: 900,000 milliseconds (every15 minutes)

Default audit period: 1,800,000 milliseconds (every 30 minutes)

auxAuditsEnabled This field lets you tune the replicated database audits. If enabled, a regular replicated database audit will be followed with an audit of auxiliary data.

For example, when an auxAudit is initiated, extra audits are run on the Substitution and Trunk Group databases.

Values are:

• NO — Disable auxiliary audits

• YES (default)— Enable auxiliary audits

auditExclusions A dictionary containing a set of databases to be excluded from the next database audit.

primaryDNS The IP address of the primary Domain Name Server for Taqua Mail.

secondaryDNS The IP address of the secondary Domain Name Server for Taqua Mail.

keyring A set of software license keys that allow you to run features such as Telemarketer Screening on your switch. Software license keys are only valid on the switch for which they were issued. For software licensing information, e-mail Taqua Marketing at [email protected].

Attribute Description

Page 477: 1012 Command Line Interface

Shelf

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 469990-1012-001

query Shelf 27

<5368290> Shelfkey...................1b (27)netref1OID............0netref2OID............0tdmSpeed..............8MhzauditsEnabled.........ENABLEDauditPeriod...........1b7740 (1800000)auxAuditsEnabled......YESauditExclusions.......<5368b98>

<5368b98> RepDbMgrDict (0 items) ->primaryDns............0secondaryDns..........0minimumDnsTTL.........5a0 (1440)keyring...............0 (0)

Page 478: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

470 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SS7

SS7 is a protocol suite that communicates and controls network elements for call setup, tear down, and database lookup. In the PSTN, SS7 uses out-of band signaling on a separate signaling network, to find a path for each call and to set up and manage calls. The switch connects to the SS7 network using signaling links.

Point Codes

All nodes in the SS7 network are identified by a Point Code. A Point Code is a unique number are assigned by Telcordia

Point codes are in the following format: ###.###.### (where ### is a number between 1-254).

• The first set of digits (network) represent the carrier, for example 244 is WorldComm, 254 is AT&T.

• The second set of digits (cluster) represent the subsystem/region.

• The third set of digits (member) represent the node in its CO.

ISDN User Part (ISUP)

ISUP defines the messages and protocol for establishing and tearing down of voice and data calls over the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). It also manages the trunk network used for the calls.

ISUP is used for both ISDN and non-ISDN calls. ISUP messages rely on MTP to transport messages between nodes.

SCCP

The Signaling Connection Control Part (SCCP) provides two functions that MTP does not.

SCCP can address applications within a signaling point. MTP can only receive and deliver messages from a node; it does not deal with software applications within a node. SCCP allows the use of other messages using separate applications (referred to as subsystems) within a node.

Examples of subsystems are 800 call processing, Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN), and Custom Local-Area Signaling Service (CLASS) services (for example, call back, call return, and calling name).SCCP allows the addressing of applications (referred to as subsystems) within a node to receive messages. SCCP provides support for TCAP.

Page 479: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 471990-1012-001

SCCP performs two types of routing to subsystems:

• When the originating signaling point knows the location of the node providing the service, it uses a direct routing capability based on point code plus subsystem number (PC + SSN).

• When the originating signaling point does not know the location of the node providing the service, it uses an incremental routing capability called Global Title Translation (GTT). GTT frees an originating signaling point from needing to know every potential point code to which it might have to route a message.

SCCP Subsystems

An SCCP subsystem is an application within a Service Switching Point (SSP) switch that recognizes Intelligent Network (IN) calls and can route and connect those calls. Examples are:

• 800 number translation.

• Local Number Portability (LNP)

• Call Back and Call Return.

Transaction Capabilities Application Part (TCAP)

TCAP defines the messages and protocol that communicate between applications (subsystems) in nodes. These subsystems implement database services, such as 800 and AIN, and CLASS services, such as call back, call return, and calling name.

TCAP messages use the SCCP for transport to deliver to applications within the nodes they address.

AIN

The AIN (Advanced Intelligent Network) is a network architecture developed by Telcordia. AIN triggers in the switch software work in conjunction with service logic in an AIN SCP. This design allows the switch to support new services with existing switch software.

The Application Peripheral (AP) system from Innovative Systems is an example of an AIN SCP. The “AP box” (as it is known), can augment the existing T7000 feature set with AIN services as such as Telemarketer Call Screening, Budget Toll, Account Code Plus, and Calling Card/Prepay.

Page 480: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

472 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SS7 Services

SS7 provides many services, including:• Setting up the connection for a call (ISUP)

• Managing the connection for a call (ISUP)

• Tearing down the connection when a call completes (ISUP)

• Querying calling party name (TCAP/SCCP)

• Directing 8XX toll-free and 900 toll calls (TCAP/SCCP)

• Performing Local Number Portability (LNP) queries (TCAP/SCCP)

Multiple Originating Point Code

Multiple Origination Point Code (MOPC) is a link set attribute which is a special feature of the T7000. MOPC is used in two ways:

• When the switch is connected to multiple networks, it enables the switch to have a unique point code in each network.

• It is used in cap and grow applications.

When the switch is connected to multiple networks, different networks may know the switch by different point codes. The MOPC feature allows the switch to have a unique point code in each network.

NOTE: Do not provision MOPC if the second network recognizes the switch by the same point code.

When the switch is used in a cap and grow application, MOPC can be used to minimize the total amount of reprovisioning needed in the network. Provision MOPC on the link sets connected to the STPs with the Point Code of the legacy switch.

Level 3 Multiple Originating Point Code

When the T7000 is provisioned with a Level 3 Multiple Originating Point Code (L3MOPC), all MTP Level 3 management messages sent by the switch will set the Origination Point Code (OPC) in the SS7 message header to the L3MOPC.

This feature is used in a cap and grow application, when the switch is 'capping' an SSP that uses one point code for SCCP and ISUP messages, but another point code for MTP Level 3 management messages. For example, when capping a DMS10® with SRP, the L3MOPC is the SRP point code.

Page 481: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 473990-1012-001

Tip

General SS7 Order of Provisioning and Removing

See Appendix D of the T7000 Provisioning Guide for detailed SS7 deployment examples.

Start SS7 provisioning by creating the local network where the switch resides, and the remote network where the STPs, SSPs, and SCPs reside. (see “createSS7Network” on page 475).

• Create the local node that represents the switch in the local network. Create the STPs, SCPs, and SSPs in the remote network. Create an STP Alias for SCCP Global Title Translation routing (see “createNode” on page 476).

• Create a link set for each adjacent node (see “createLinkSet” on page 478).

• Add one or more links to each link set (see “createLink” on page 480).

• For each node with transfer capability, create a route over the link set to that node (see “createSS7Route” on page 482).

• Create an SCCP node to the local node, and an SCCP node for each SCP addressed by PC + SSN routing (see “SCCPNode” on page 484.).

• Create an SCCP subsystem in the local node, and an SCCP subsystem for each SCP addressed by PC + SSN routing (see “Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode” on page 485).

• Create a TCAP for each service provided by an SCP (see “TCAPServiceGTT” on page 488 and “TCAPServicePCSSN” on page 492).

Reverse this process to remove an SS7 object.

Page 482: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

474 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SS7 Order of Provisioning for an Adjacent Node

To add an adjacent node in the local network:

• Create a node that represents the adjacent switch in the local network (see “createNode” on page 476).

• Create a link set to the adjacent node (see “createLinkSet” on page 478).

• Add one or more links to the link set to the adjacent node (see “createLink” on page 480).

• Create a route over the link set to the adjacent node. If the node is connected to the STP pair, create additional routes over the link sets to the STP pair (see “createSS7Route” on page 482).

• If the adjacent node is an SCP (such as the Innovative Systems AP) addressed by PC + SSN routing):

• create an SCCP node in the adjacent node (see “SCCPNode” on page 484.)

• create an SCCP subsystem in the adjacent node for each SCP addressed by PC + SSN routing (see “Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode” on page 485

• create a TCAP for each service provided by an SCP (see TCAP Service, see “TCAPServiceGTT” on page 488 and “TCAPServicePCSSN” on page 492).

Reverse this process to remove an SS7 object.

Page 483: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 475990-1012-001

createSS7NetworkcreateSS7Network <networkName> <localFlag> <BCCNetworkFlag>

This command creates an SS7 network. The SS7 network is a container for SS7 nodes and their associated SS7 elements.

createSS7Network LocalNetwork Y Y

Dependent Commands

By creating an SS7 network, you are creating a container for one or more SS7 nodes, and their associated SS7 elements.

deleteSS7NetworkdeleteSS7Network name

This command deletes an SS7 network.

Prerequisites

SS7 network, see “createSS7Network” on page 475

Delete SS7 node, see “deleteNode” on page 477

Dependent Commands

Before deleting an SS7 network you must first delete its associated SS7 elements which include:

• all of the nodes contained by the network.

Syntax Description

<networkName> name of the SS7 network

<localFlag> • Y — if the is a local network

• N — if the network is remote

<BCCNetworkFlag> • Y — if this is a Bell Core (Telcordia) Client company network

• N — if the network is not BCC compliant

Syntax Description

<networkName> name of the SS7 network

Page 484: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

476 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

createNodecreateNode <nodeName> <DPC> <networkName> <adjacentFlag> <nodeType> <xferFlag>

This command creates an SS7 node in an SS7 network.

Prerequisites

SS7 network, see “createSS7Network” on page 475

createNode Local 229-100-000 Local_net N Local N

createNode STP1 229-100-101 Remote_net Y Remote Y

Syntax Description

<nodeName> name of the SS7 node

<DPC> Destination Point Code of the SS7 node. See “Point Codes” on page 470.

<networkName> Name of the SS7 network created via “createSS7Network”.

<adjacentFlag> • Y — if the node is adjacent to the local node

• N — if the node is not adjacent to the local node

<nodeType> Local — the local T7000

Remote — a node in the SS7 network with a known point code.

Alias — a node in the SS7 network with a hidden, private point code. See “setPCMap” on page 500.

<xferFlag> • .Y — if the node has transfer capability. This includes STPs, T7000’s and Legacy Switches that can route messages to other nodes in the SS7 network.

• N — if the node does not have transfer capability.

Page 485: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 477990-1012-001

deleteNodedeleteNode <nodeName>

This command deletes an SS7 node from an SS7 network.

Prerequisites

SS7 node, see “createNode” on page 476.

deleteNode STP1

Dependent Commands

Before deleting an SS7 node you must first delete its associated SS7 elements which include:

• the SCCP node,

• SS7 Trunk groups using that node,

• all routes to the node.

• link sets to the node (and the links within the link set)

Syntax Description

<nodeName> name of the SS7 node

Page 486: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

478 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

createLinkSetcreateLinkSet <name> <pointCode> <type> <kind>

This command creates a link set. A link set is a group of links from a switch to an adjacent node. Each link set can contain up to 16 links. The links in a link set share signaling traffic. If a link in the link set fails, the traffic is routed over the remaining links in the link set.

Prerequisites

SS7 node, see “createNode” on page 476

createLinkSet LS1 229-100-101 A T

Syntax Description

<name> name of the SS7 link set

<pointCode> point code of the SS7 node that terminates the link set. See “Point Codes” on page 470.

<type>

TipSee Appendix D of the T7000 Provisioning Guide for examples using Alias link sets.

type of link set:

• A — (A-link sets) connects to STPs and provides signaling to the SS7 network

• F — (F-link sets) connect to another SSP and provides signaling between the switches but not with the SS7 network

• L — (Alias link sets) The link set connects the local switch to a subtending switch that shares a common connection to the SS7 network through the local switch’s A-links. Alias link sets are primarily used for cap-and-grow deployments.

<kind> kind of link set error correction:

• T — basic error correction used for link sets not using satellite (default)

• S — Preventive cyclic retransmission (PCR) is the error correction method used for link sets using satellite.

W A R N I N G

The Preventive cyclic retransmission feature not currently implemented. Do not specify this parameter!

NOTE: All links in a link set must have the same error correction method. Even if only one link is configured via satellite, assign PCR to the entire link set.

Page 487: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 479990-1012-001

Dependent Commands

Add links to the link set, see “createLink” on page 480

Activate the link set, see “activateLinkSet” on page 639.

deleteLinkSetdeleteLinkSet <name>

This command deletes an SS7 link set from an adjacent SS7 node.

Prerequisites

SS7 link set, “createLinkSet” on page 478

Delete SS7 links, see “deleteLink” on page 481

deleteLinkSet Linkset1

Dependent Commands

Before deleting an SS7 link set you must first delete its associated SS7 elements which include:

• all links in the link set

Syntax Description

name name of link set to delete

Page 488: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

480 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

createLinkcreateLink <linkName> <trunkOID> <linkSetName> <SLC> <type>

This command creates an SS7 link and associates it with an existing SS7 link set. Each link set can hold up to 16 links. A switch supports a total of 40 links.

Prerequisites

SS7 link set, see “createLinkSet” on page 478

createLink Link_1_1 Trunk-23-1-2 Linkset1 5 a

Dependent Commands

Before the link can carry traffic, it must unblocked, see “unblockLink” on page 640.

Syntax Description

<linkName> name of link to create

<trunkOID> Trunk Object Identifier — unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

<linkSetName> name of a link set previously created.

<SLC> Signaling Link Code — a unique number within a link set that identifies the link.

Range: 0-15.

TipCoordinate SLC assignments with the adjacent node. SLC assignments typically start with 0 for the first link in a link set

<Type> Type of link:

a — A link. Can be placed only in A link sets

f — F link. Can be placed only in F-link sets and Alias-link sets.

Page 489: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 481990-1012-001

deleteLinkdeleteLink <linkName>

This command deletes an SS7 link from an SS7 link set.

Prerequisites

SS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

Block the SS7 link, see “blockLink” on page 640

deleteLink Link_1_1

Dependent CommandsBefore the link can be deleted, it must blocked, see “blockLink” on page 640

Syntax Description

<linkName> name of link to delete

Page 490: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

482 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

createSS7RoutecreateSS7Route <name> <PointCode> <LinkSet> <Priority>

This command creates an SS7 route to a node over an existing SS7 link set.

Prerequisites

SS7 link set, see “createLinkSet” on page 478.

SS7 node, see “createNode” on page 476.

createSS7Route route_stp 254-80-70 LinkSet1 1

Syntax Description

<name> SS7 route name

<PointCode> the Point Code of the node receiving the route. See “Point Codes” on page 470.

<LinkSet> link set with which to associate the route

<Priority> The order in which to use this route.

1 —primary route

2 —secondary route. Use if primary route is unavailable.

3 —tertiary route. Use if both primary and secondary routes are unavailable.

TipA route to an adjacent node over a link set that terminates at that node should always be provisioned as a primary route. Any other routes to that node should be provisioned as secondary routes.All routes to non-adjacent nodes should always be provisioned as primary routes

TipTo specify a combined link set, set the same priority for both routes to a node.

Page 491: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 483990-1012-001

deleteSS7RoutedeleteSS7Route <name>

This command deletes an SS7 route.

Prerequisites

SS7 route, see “createSS7Route” on page 482

deleteSS7Route route_stp

C A U T I O N

Deleting an SS7 route may negatively affect operations!

Syntax Description

<name> SS7 route name

Page 492: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

484 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SCCPNode

A Signaling Connection Control Part (SCCP) node has the following attributes:

The Generic CLI is used for all SCCPNode commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

NOTE: The modify command does not apply to SCCPNodes.

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands applies to the following attributes:

• subsystems

See:

• “Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode” on page 485

• “Removing SCCP Subsystems from an SCCPNode” on page 485

Prerequisites

SS7 node, see “createNode” on page 476

SCCP subsystem(s), see “Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode” on page 485

createNode remote001 229-101-000 net Y n ncreate SCCPNode 229-101-0

Attribute Description

key Point code of the new SCCP node. See “Point Codes” on page 470.

subsystems A dictionary containing the SCCP Subsystems within this SCCP Node.

accessible Note: this field is read-only.

The Accessibility state of SCCP Node. Values are:

• NOT_ACCESSIBLE

• ACCESSIBLE

Page 493: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 485990-1012-001

Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNodeinsertInto SCCPNode <key> subsystems <subkey> SCCPSubsys <ssn>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add an SCCP Subsystem to a SCCPNode’s subsystems dictionary. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following command adds an entry for SCCP subsystem 253 to the SCCPNode with a point code of 229-101-0.

insertInto SCCPNode 229-101-0 subsystems 253 SCCPSubsys 253

Removing SCCP Subsystems from an SCCPNodedeleteFrom SCCPNode <key> subsystems <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a SCCP Subsystem from a SCCPNode’s subsystems dictionary. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following example removes the subsystem 253 from the SCCPNode with a point code of 229-101-0.

deleteFrom SCCPNode 229-101-0 subsystems 253

Dependent Commands

Delete the TCAP Service using the SCCP subsystems.

Syntax Description

<key> SCCPNode point code.

<subkey> This is the subsystem number of the SCCP application on the remote switch. It is used as the key to the SCCPNode’s subsystems dictionary.

Range: 2 - 254.

<ssn> This is the subsystem number of the SCCP application on the remote switch. It must be the same as the subkey.

Range: 2 - 254.

Syntax Description

<key> SCCPNode point code.

<subkey> This is the subsystem number of the SCCP application on the remote switch.

Page 494: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

486 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

query SCCPNodequery SCCPNode network-cluster-member

This Generic CLI command shows the status for an SCCP node and its subsystems.

query SCCPNode 229-101-0

<5b1c030> SCCPNodekey..........229-101-0subsystems...<5b1c4b8>

<5b1c4b8> SCCPSubsystemDict (3661851 items) -> f0 (240): <5b41500> SCCPSubsys pc................229-101-0 ssn...............f0 (240) accessible........NOT_ACCESSIBLE

fc (252): <5b2efa8> SCCPSubsys pc................229-101-0 ssn...............fc (252) accessible........NOT_ACCESSIBLE

fe (254): <5b34380> SCCPSubsys pc................229-101-0 ssn...............fe (254) accessible........NOT_ACCESSIBLE

accessible...ACCESSIBLE

Syntax Description

network-cluster-member point code of the SCCP node

Page 495: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 487990-1012-001

delete SCCPNodedelete SCCPNode <pointCode>

This command deletes an SCCPNode.

Prerequisites

SCCPNode, see “SCCPNode” on page 484.

Dependent Commands

Remove all SCCP Subsystems from to the SCCP node, see “Removing SCCP Subsystems from an SCCPNode” on page 485

delete SCCPNode 254-80-70

Syntax Description

<pointCode> Point code of the SCCPNode. See “Point Codes” on page 470.

Page 496: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

488 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

TCAPServiceGTT

There are two types of TCAP Service objects: one for Global Title Translation routing, the other for Point Code + Subsystem Number routing.

Use the TCAPServiceGTT object for Global Title Translation routing.

A TCAPServiceGTT object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key the unique name of the TCAP service

svcType Type of TCAP service:

• CNAMESVC — calling party name service

• SACAINSVC — Service Access Code (SAC) Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) based service

• SACIN800SVC — Service Access Code (SAC) Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) based 800 service

• LNPAINSVC — Local Number Portability AIN service

• AINSVC services allows the switch to communicate with an SCP for AIN information. See “AIN” on page 471.

• CBACKSVC — call back service, a/k/a CLASS feature Automatic Callback

• CRETURNSVC — call return service

• TCAPMWISVC — TCAP Message Waiting Indicator service

routeType The type of routing that the SCCP will use for this TCAP service.

• GTT (default) — Global Title Translation: directs TCAP queries to the STP for GTT.

localSSN local SCCP subsystem number for this TCAP service

Range: 2 - 254

remotePC point code of the remote node for GTT routing

transType GTT routing — Global Title Translation Type

NOTE: Translation Types are supplied by the provider of the TCAP service.

t1Timer Time value to wait for response to TCAP query (msec)

Range: 1000-3000

Default: 3000

Page 497: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 489990-1012-001

t2Timer Resume Scanning Timer. The time in milliseconds that the originating switch waits to resume scanning after the calling party does not answer special ringing. This timer begins when the application of special ringing has timed out. This timer stops if the Call Back/Call Return attempt is deactivated.

Range:180000 - 720000

Default: 3000

t5Timer Initial Query Response Timer. The time in milliseconds that the originating switch waits for a response to the initial query.

Range:1000 - 5000

Default: 3000

t6Timer Monitoring Timer. The time in milliseconds that the called party of a Call Back/Call Return request is monitored for an idle notification.

Range:150000 - 2100000

Default: 1800000

t7Timer Terminating Scanning Monitoring Timer. The time in milliseconds the originating switch will wait for a response from the terminating switch to any query other than the initial query.

Range: 0 - 1800000

Default: 0

t8Timer Outstanding Notification Timer. The time the terminating switch should wait after sending an Idle status to the originating switch, before rechecking the called line’s busy/idle status.

Range: 0 - 2100000

Default: 0

t9Timer Subsequent Query Response Timer. The time in milliseconds the originating switch will wait for a response from the terminating switch to any other query other than the initial query.

Range: 1000 5000

Default: 3000

t10Timer Originating/Terminating Switch Overall Monitoring Timer. The maximum continuous time in milliseconds the particular request can be in effect for a given customer. This limits the number of times a customer may reactivate a Call Back/Call Return request.

Range: 7200000 - 14400000

Default: 10800000

Attribute Description

Page 498: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

490 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

t11Timer Inter - Busy/Idle Query Duration Timer. The time in milliseconds for the Inter-Busy/Idle Query Duration Timer. The terminating switch uses this timer to control the status of a queued entry with originating scanning. If the amount of time between queries exceeds this timer, the corresponding queue entry is flagged inactive. T11 is the terminating switch maximum allowed value for the originating scan rate, plus 5 seconds. This timer is initialized when a busy/idle query for a queued Call Return/Call Back request, which does not have outstanding notification, is received by the terminating switch. This timer stops when the Automatic Callback request is marked as having outstanding notification, the Automatic Callback request is completed or the Automatic Callback request is deactivated.

Range: 0 - 5700000

Default: 0

origScanRate Originating Scan Rate. The time in milliseconds to control the active/inactive status of a queued entry with orig scanning.

Range: 30000 -600000

Default: 60000

Attribute Description

Page 499: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 491990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all TCAPServiceGTT commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• svcType

• localSSN

• remotePC

• transType

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• t1Timer

• t2Timer

• t5Timer

• t6Timer

• t7Timer

• t8Timer

• t9Timer

• t10Timer

• t11Timer

• origScanRate

Prerequisites

SCCP Nodes, see “SCCPNode” on page 484.

SCCP SSNs on the local node, the STP Alias (GTT routing) or SCP (PCSSN routing), see “Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode” on page 485

create TCAPServiceGTT sacin800 SACIN800SVC PCSSN 252 229-101-000 4

Page 500: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

492 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

TCAPServicePCSSN

There are two types of TCAP Service objects: one for Global Title Translation routing, the other for Point Code + Subsystem Number routing.

Use the TCAPServicePCSSN object for Point Code + Subsystem Number routing.

A TCAPServicePCSSN object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key the unique name of the TCAP service

svcType Type of TCAP service:

• CNAMESVC — calling party name service

• SACAINSVC — Service Access Code (SAC) Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) based service

• SACIN800SVC — Service Access Code (SAC) Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) based 800 service

• LNPAINSVC — Local Number Portability AIN service

• AINSVC services allows the switch to communicate with an SCP for AIN information. See “AIN” on page 471.

• CBACKSVC — call back service, a/k/a CLASS feature Automatic Callback

• CRETURNSVC — call return service

• TCAPMWISVC — TCAP Message Waiting Indicator service

routeType The type of routing that the SCCP will use for this TCAP service.

• PCSSN (default) — Point Code/Subsystem Number: directs TCAP queries directly to the Service Logic Host on a specific SCP or applications server.

localSSN local SCCP subsystem number for this TCAP service

Range: 2 - 254

remotePC point code of the remote node for PCSSN or GTT routing

remoteSSN PCSSN routing — remote subsystem number

NOTE: Remote Subsystem Numbers are supplied by the provider of the TCAP service.

t1Timer Time value to wait for response to TCAP query (msec)

Range: 1000-3000

Default: 3000

Page 501: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 493990-1012-001

t2Timer Resume Scanning Timer. The time in milliseconds that the originating switch waits to resume scanning after the calling party does not answer special ringing. This timer begins when the application of special ringing has timed out. This timer stops if the Call Back/Call Return attempt is deactivated.

Range:180000 - 720000

Default: 3000

t5Timer Initial Query Response Timer. The time in milliseconds that the originating switch waits for a response to the initial query.

Range:1000 - 5000

Default: 3000

t6Timer Monitoring Timer. The time in milliseconds that the called party of a Call Back/Call Return request is monitored for an idle notification.

Range:150000 - 2100000

Default: 1800000

t7Timer Terminating Scanning Monitoring Timer. The time in milliseconds the originating switch will wait for a response from the terminating switch to any query other than the initial query.

Range: 0 - 1800000

Default: 0

t8Timer Outstanding Notification Timer. The time the terminating switch should wait after sending an Idle status to the originating switch, before rechecking the called line’s busy/idle status.

Range: 0 - 2100000

Default: 0

t9Timer Subsequent Query Response Timer. The time in milliseconds the originating switch will wait for a response from the terminating switch to any other query other than the initial query.

Range: 1000 5000

Default: 3000

t10Timer Originating/Terminating Switch Overall Monitoring Timer. The maximum continuous time in milliseconds the particular request can be in effect for a given customer. This limits the number of times a customer may reactivate a Call Back/Call Return request.

Range: 7200000 - 14400000

Default: 10800000

Attribute Description

Page 502: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

494 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

t11Timer Inter - Busy/Idle Query Duration Timer. The time in milliseconds for the Inter-Busy/Idle Query Duration Timer. The terminating switch uses this timer to control the status of a queued entry with originating scanning. If the amount of time between queries exceeds this timer, the corresponding queue entry is flagged inactive. T11 is the terminating switch maximum allowed value for the originating scan rate, plus 5 seconds. This timer is initialized when a busy/idle query for a queued Call Return/Call Back request, which does not have outstanding notification, is received by the terminating switch. This timer stops when the Automatic Callback request is marked as having outstanding notification, the Automatic Callback request is completed or the Automatic Callback request is deactivated.

Range: 0 - 5700000

Default: 0

origScanRate Originating Scan Rate. The time in milliseconds to control the active/inactive status of a queued entry with orig scanning.

Range: 30000 -600000

Default: 60000

Attribute Description

Page 503: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 495990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all TCAPServicePCSSN commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• svcType

• localSSN

• remotePC

• remoteSSN

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• t1Timer

• t2Timer

• t5Timer

• t6Timer

• t7Timer

• t8Timer

• t9Timer

• t10Timer

• t11Timer

• origScanRate

Prerequisites

SCCP Nodes, see “SCCPNode” on page 484.

SCCP SSNs on the local node, the STP Alias (GTT routing) or SCP (PCSSN routing), see “Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode” on page 485

create TCAPServicePCSSN sacin800 SACIN800SVC 252 229-101-000 252

Page 504: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

496 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

destroy TCAPServicedestroy TCAPService <keyey>

This command deletes a Transaction Capabilities Application Part (TCAP) service

Prerequisites

SCCP Node, see “SCCPNode” on page 484.

SCCP SSN on the local node, the STP Alias (GTT routing) or SCP (PCSSN routing), see “Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode” on page 485

TCAP Service, see “TCAPServiceGTT” on page 488 and “TCAPServicePCSSN” on page 492

destroy TCAPService sacin800

Syntax Description

<key> the unique name of the TCAP service

Page 505: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 497990-1012-001

TcapMwiParms

TcapMwiParms enable the switch and an SS7 voice mail system (VMS) to communicate MWI status to one another. The switch connects to a VMS using an SS7 F-link. The subscriber, either directly connected to the switch or connected to a subtending node of the switch, receives a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) notification when there are one or more new voice mail messages at the VMS.

A TcapMwiParms object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key voice mail subscriber’s DN

mSRID TCAP Message Storage and Retrieval Identifier (MSRID). Uniquely identifies each VMS providing TCAP MWI.

Must be 10 digits long.

Range: 0000000001-9999999999.

callingDN This field is read only.

DN of Voice Mail System.

mwiType This read only field is for internal use.

Values are:

• ACTIVE1

• ACTIVE2

• ACTIVE3

callingPartyNumber This field is read only.

DN of the voice mail originator

callType This field is read only.

Bearer capability. Values are:

• ISDN — ISDN PRI

• ANLG — Analog

timeStamp This field is read only.

Timestamp sent by the Message Storage and Retrieval system

numberOfMessages This field is read only.

Number of voice message in the voice mail box

Page 506: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

498 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all TcapMwiParms commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• mSRID

create TcapMwiParms 2149049000 1234560001

The modify command applies only to the following attributes:

• mSRID

query TcapMwiParmsquery TcapMwiParms <destinationDN>

This command shows the TCAP Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) information for a subscriber.

query TcapMwiParms 8174801022<33c1be0> TcapMwiParmskey.................."8174801022"mSRID................"1234560001"callingDN............<>mwiType..............0callingPartyNumber...<>callType.............ISDNtimestamp............<>displayText..........<>numberOfMessages.....0 (0)

Prerequisites

VMS, see “Voice Mail” on page 586

F-link connecting to the VMS, see “SS7” on page 470

Syntax Description

<destinationDN> directory number

Page 507: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 499990-1012-001

setMOPCsetMOPC <LinkSetName> <pointCode>

This command assigns an Multiple Originating Point Code to an SS7 link set. See “Multiple Originating Point Code” on page 472..

Prerequisites

At least two SS7 Networks. See “createSS7Network” on page 475

Or, an Alias node. See “createNode” on page 476

NOTE: Only use multiple point codes to connect to two different SS7 networks that have each assigned a different point code to the switch. Do not use this feature if both SS7 networks recognize the same point code

setMOPC LinkSet1 150-120-89

setL3MOPCsetL3MOPC <LinkSetName> <pointCode>

Prerequisites

A link set.

setMOPC LinkSet1 151-120-89 setMOPC LinkSet2 151-120-89

Syntax Description

LinkSetName the link set name

<pointCode> the alternate originating point code to be used for messages sent over this link set.

Syntax Description

LinkSetName the link set name

<pointCode> L3 Multiple Originating Point Code — is the point code that identifies the local node with an alternate point code for MTP Level 3 messages. See “Level 3 Multiple Originating Point Code” on page 472

Page 508: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

500 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setPCMapsetPCMap <aliasNodeName> <destPointCode> <CIC> <range>

This command configures ISDN routes to a subtending node. An alias Point Code (PC) map directs ISUP messages from a remote switch through the local switch to an alias switch. This mapping allows an alias switch to connect to a distant node using voice trunks.t.

Prerequisites

An subtending switch is provisioned for an alias point (see “createNode” on page 476).

An Alias-link set subtending switch (see “createLinkSet” on page 478

NOTE: The destination node must identify the exact range of CICs to which it wants to connect.

setPCMap vswitch 229-123-045 101 500

Syntax Description

<aliasNodeName> name of subtending node

<destPointCode> Distant end node's point code. The point code that the switch provides signaling to, for example, an Access Tandem's point code. See “Point Codes” on page 470.

<CIC> The circuit identification code of the first SS7 trunk connecting to the subtending node.

<range> The number of CICs mapped by the switch to the subtending node.

Page 509: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 501990-1012-001

deletePCMapdeletePCMap <aliasNodeName> <destPointCode> <lowCIC>

This command deletes the Point Code Map routing for a subtending node.

C A U T I O N

Deleting routing may negatively affect operations.

Prerequisites

A Point Code Map, see “setPCMap” on page 500

deletePCMap vswitch 229-123-045 24

Syntax Description

<aliasNodeName> subtending node name

<destPointCode> Distant end node's point code. This is the point code that the switch will provide signaling to: an Access Tandem's point code, for example

<lowCIC> The lowest numbered circuit identification code in the SS7 trunk group that connects the alias and destination nodes.

Page 510: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

502 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SLTCT1_periodSLTCT1_period <new_period> [linkName]

This command sets the link timer value for the SLTCT1_period; this is the time-out period for receiving a Signaling Link Test Message Acknowledgment (SLTA) of a Signaling Link Test Message (SLTM).

Prerequisites

SS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

SLTCT1_period 4500 link_1

SLTCT2_periodSLTCT2_period <new_period> [linkName]

This command sets the link timer value for the SLTCT2_period. The frequency that the switch sends the Signaling Link Test Message (SLTM) message.

Prerequisites

SS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

SLTCT2_period 11000 link_1

Syntax Description

<new_period> new timer value in milliseconds

Range: 4,000 - 12000

[linkName] link name

skip this parameter to apply this the value to all SS7 links

Syntax Description

<new_period> new timer value in milliseconds

Range: 10,000 to 30,000

0 — to disable sending SLTM messages

linkName link name

skip this parameter to apply this the value to all SS7 links

Page 511: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 503990-1012-001

SS7 Timer Commands

C A U T I O N

Use caution when setting SS7 link timers.

The following commands set the values for MTP Level 2 and MTP Level 3 SS7 timers

The following table contains the names of all of the commands and their limits.

Syntax Description

new_period new timer value — see the limits in the table below for specific values

linkNameall_pcr all_basic

Link name — set the timer value for a specific link

all_basic — basic error correction used for link sets not using satellite (default)

all_pcr — Preventive cyclic retransmission (PCR) is the error correction method used for link sets using satellite. This feature not currently implemented.

Command Description Limits

L2Tie_period MTP Level 2 timer value for emergency alignment error rate monitor threshold

1 - 10 ms

L2Tin_period MTP Level 2 timer value for normal alignment error rate monitor threshold

1 - 10 ms

L2T1_period MTP Level 2 timer value for aligned/ready 12,900 - 16,000 ms

L2T2_period MTP Level 2 timer value for not aligned 5,000 - 14,000 ms

L2T3_period MTP Level 2 timer value for aligned 5,000 - 14,000 ms

L2T4e_period MTP Level 2 timer 4 emergency value, for the emergency proving period when the link set only contains 1 link

593 ms

L2T4n_period MTP Level 2 timer 4 normal value for when the link set contains more than one link

2,300 ms

L2T5_period MTP Level 2 timer value for sending Status Indication Busy (SIB)

80 - 120 ms

L2T6_period MTP Level 2 timer value for remote congestion 1,000 - 6,000 ms

L2T7_period MTP Level 2 timer value for excessive delay of acknowledgement

500 - 2,000 ms

L3T1_period MTP Level 3 timer value delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on changeover

500 - 1,200 ms

L3T2_period MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for changeover acknowledgment

700 - 2,000 ms

Page 512: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

504 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

L3T3_period MTP Level 3 timer value — delay to avoid mis-sequencing on changeback

500 - 1,200 ms

L3T4_period MTP Level 3 timer value — waiting for changeback acknowledgment (first attempt)

500 - 1,200 ms

L3T5_period MTP Level 3 timer value — waiting for changeback acknowledgment (second attempt)

500 - 1,200 ms

L3T6_period MTP Level 3 timer value delay to avoid message mis-sequencing on controlled rerouting

500 - 1,200 ms

L3T7_period MTP Level 3 timer value — waiting for signaling data link connection acknowledgment

1,000 - 2,000 ms

L3T8_period MTP Level 3 timer value transfer-prohibited inhibited timer (transient solution)

800 - 1,200 ms

L3T10_period MTP Level 3 timer value waiting to repeat signaling route set test message

30,000 - 60,000 ms

L3T12_period MTP Level 3 timer value — waiting for uninhibit acknowledgment

800 - 1,500 ms

L3T13_period MTP Level 3 timer value — waiting for force uninhibit 800 - 1,500 ms

L3T14_period MTP Level 3 timer value — waiting for inhibition acknowledgment

2,000 - 3,000 ms

L3T15_period MTP Level 3 timer value waiting to repeat signaling route set congestion test

2,000 - 3,000 ms

L3T16_period MTP Level 3 timer value waiting for route set congestion status update

1,400 - 2,000 ms

L3T17_period MTP Level 3 timer value — delay to avoid oscillation of initial alignment failure and link restart

800 - 1,500 ms

L3T19_period MTP Level 3 failed link craft referral timer value 480,000 - 600,000 ms

L3T20_period MTP Level 3 timer value — waiting to repeat local inhibit test 90,000 - 120,000 ms

L3T21_period MTP Level 3 timer value — waiting to repeat remote inhibit test 90,000 - 120,000 ms

L3T22_period MTP Level 3 value timer at restarting SP waiting for signaling links to become available

0 - 60,000 ms

L3T23_period MTP Level 3 timer value at restarting SP, started after T22, waiting to receive all Traffic Restart Allowed (TRA) messages (network-dependent)

0 - 60,000 ms

L3T24_period MTP Level 3 timer value at restarting SP with transfer function, started after T23, waiting to broadcast all TRA messages (network-dependent)

15,000 ms

L3T25_period MTP Level 3 timer value at the SP adjacent to the restarting SP, waiting for Traffic Restart Allowed (TRA) message

30,000 - 35,000 ms

L3T26_period MTP Level 3 timer value at restarting SP waiting to repeat Traffic Restart Waiting (TRW)

12,000 - 15,000 ms

L3T27_period MTP Level 3 timer value of the minimum duration of unavailability for full restart

2,000 - 5,000 ms

Command Description Limits

Page 513: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 505990-1012-001

PrerequisitesSS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

L2Tie_period 9 link_1L3T1_period 1000 link_1

L3T28_period MTP Level 3 timer value at SP adjacent to restarting SP, waiting for Traffic Restart Waiting (TRW) message

3,000 - 35,000 ms

L3T29_period MTP Level 3 timer value started when TRA message is sent in response to unexpected TRA or TRW message

60,000 - 65,000 ms

L3T31_period MTP Level 3 false link congestion detection timer value 10,000 - 120,000 ms

L3T33_period MTP Level 3 probation timer value for link oscillation - Procedure B

60,000 - 600,000 ms

L3T34_period MTP Level 3 suspension timer value for link oscillation - Procedure B

5,000 - 120,000 ms

Command Description Limits

Page 514: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

506 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

L2TX_onsetL2TX_onset <level> <new_threshold> [linkName]

This command sets the transmission congestion onset limit for levels 1 to 3.

C A U T I O N

Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

Prerequisites

SS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

L2TX_onset 1 38 Link_1

Syntax Description

<level> 1 - 3, onset is the second threshold for detecting the start of congestion (levels 1, 2, and 3)

<new_threshold> The number of messages before the onset of congestion:

• 31-49 — Level 1

• 61-79 — Level 2

• 91-109 — Level 3

[linkName] Link name

skip this parameter to set this value for all SS7 links

Page 515: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 507990-1012-001

L2TX_abatementL2TX_abatement <level> <new_threshold> [linkName]

This command sets the transmission congestions abatement limit for levels 1 to 3.

C A U T I O N

Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

NOTE: Each congestion abatement must be lower than the corresponding congestion onset level. See “L2TX_onset” on page 506.

Prerequisites

SS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

L2TX_abatement 2 45 Link_1

Syntax Description

<level> 1 - 3, the threshold for monitoring the reduction of congestion (levels 1, 2, and 3)

<new_threshold> The number of messages before abatement starts:

• 0-39 — Level 1

• 41-59 — Level 2

• 71-89 — Level 3

[linkName] Link name, or skip this parameter to make this the value for all SS7 links

Page 516: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

508 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

L2TX_discardL2TX_discard <level> <new_threshold> [linkName]

This command sets the transmission congestion discard limit for levels 1 to 3.

C A U T I O N

Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

NOTE: Each congestion discard must be lower than the corresponding congestion onset level. See “L2TX_onset” on page 506.

Prerequisites

SS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

L2TX_discard 1 58 Link_1

Syntax Description

<level> 1-3, the threshold for monitoring the reduction of congestion (levels 1, 2, and 3)

<new_threshold> The number of messages before discard starts:

• 51-69 — Level 1

• 81-99 — Level 2

• 101-119 — Level 3

[linkName] Link name, or skip this parameter to make this the value for all SS7 links

Page 517: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 509990-1012-001

L2RX_congestionL2RX_congestion <new_level>

This command sets the receive congestion limit of messages.

C A U T I O N

Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

Prerequisites

SS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

L2RX_congestion 80

L2RX_abatementL2RX_abatement <new_level>

This command sets the receive abatement limit of messages.

C A U T I O N

Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

Prerequisites

SS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

L2RX_abatement 45

Syntax Description

<new_level> The level of messages to reach congestion of received messages, from 60-99 messages.

Syntax Description

<new_level> The level of messages to reach abatement of received messages, from 1-60 messages.

Page 518: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7

510 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

L2RX_discardL2RX_discard <new_level>

This command sets the receive discard limit of messages.

C A U T I O N

Use caution when setting SS7 congestion levels.

Prerequisites

SS7 link, see “createLink” on page 480

L2RX_discard 101

Syntax Description

<new_level> The threshold for monitoring the reduction of congestion, from 61 messages and above.

Page 519: 1012 Command Line Interface

Tandem ANI Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 511990-1012-001

Tandem ANI Subscribers

The Tandem Ani Subscribers database contains the ANIs of subscribers who do not directly terminate on the switch. This database determines how the switch tandems calls based on the ANI of an incoming call. The switch supports these subscribers when provisioned as a local tandem.

The switch uses tandem Ani subscriber database to determine treatment of calls for subscribers in the database. After the switch checks the Tandem Ani Subscribers’ database, it checks for the ANI in the Tandem ANI RouteList. If the ANI exists, it routes the call to the applicable trunk group, if not then the call is send to treatment.

An Ani Subscriber has the following attributes:

attribute value

key the ANI of the incoming call

lastName the last name of the subscriber

firstName the first name of the subscriber

restrict Optional set of restrictions on the types of calls that the subscriber can complete. Restrictions are set or cleared by name using the modify command, see the examples at the end of this section.

• NO_INTRALATA: No intraLATA calls (PIC2) allowed — 1

• NO_INTERLATA: No interLATA calls (PIC1) allowed — 2

• NO_WORLDZONE1: No calls to Canada and select Caribbean countries allowed — 4

• NO_INTERNATIONAL: No international calls allowed — 8

• NO_OA_INTERNATIONAL: No Operator Assisted (OA) international calls allowed — 10

• NO_OA_INTRALATA: No Operator Assisted (OA) intraLATA calls allowed— 20

• NO_OA_INTERLATA: No Operator Assisted (OA) interLATA calls allowed— 40

• NO_OA_WORLDZONE1: No Operator Assisted (OA) calls to Canada and select Caribbean countries — 80

• NO_ZEROMINUS: No calls to the operator (0) — 100

• NO_DA: No Directory Assisted (DA) calls allowed — 200

allowedList key from screen list: Allowed dialing screening prefixes.

deniedList key from screen list: Denied dialing screening prefixes.

suspension Temporary suspension of the subscriber’s service, calls are sent to treatment:

• 1 — suspends the subscribers service, except 911 calls

• 0 — turns off subscriber service suspension

Page 520: 1012 Command Line Interface

Tandem ANI Subscribers

512 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

All ANI Subscriber provisioning is carried out with the Generic CLI, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• lastName

• firstName

The optional parameter for the create command is:

• restrictions

Prerequisites

SS7 trunk groups incoming to the switch that tandem to the PSTN. see “Route Lists” on page 514

Tandem Route Lists, “Tandem ANI Route List” on page 521

create AniSubscriber 9724812222 Liao David modify AniSubscriber 9724812222 deniedList denymodify AniSubscriber 9724812222 restrict NO_INTRALATA 1modify AniSubscriber 9724812222 restrict NO_INTERLATA 1query AniSubscriber 9724812222

<4909030> AniSubscriberkey.............."9724812222"lastName........."Liao"firstName........"David"restrict.........(BITFIELD) -> 3 .NO_INTRALATA .NO_INTERLATAallowedList......<>deniedList......."deny"suspension.......OFFfraudIndicator...OFF

destroy AniSubscriber 9724812222

fraudIndicator • 0 — does not trace calls from the subscriber

• 1 — creates a secondary CDR for each call from the subscriber

attribute value

Page 521: 1012 Command Line Interface

Tandem ANI Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 513990-1012-001

query AniSubscriberquery AniSubscriber <key>

This Generic CLI command shows the setting of an ANI subscriber.

query AniSubscriber 9724901234

<4909830> AniSubscriberkey.............."9724901234"lastName........."Black"firstName........"Andrew"restrict.........(BITFIELD) -> 10 .NO_OA_INTERNATIONALallowedList......<>deniedList.......<>suspension.......OFFfraudIndicator...OFF

Syntax Description

<key> DN of an ANI subscriber

Page 522: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

514 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Route Lists

A route list defines the circuit path for specific numbers. Use a route list to add and remove routes from specific paths. You can create the following types of route lists:

• Carrier, see “Carrier Route List” on page 515

• LNP, see “LNP Route List” on page 517

• NANP, see “NANP Route List” on page 519

• Tandem ANI, see “Tandem ANI Route List” on page 521

• Tandem Carrier, see “Tandem Carrier RouteList” on page 523

• Tandem Trunk Group, see “Tandem TG Route List” on page 525

Page 523: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 515990-1012-001

Carrier Route List

A carrier route list routes on the four-digit Carrier Access Code used to identify a company that provides circuit communications. For example, MCI’s Carrier Access Code is 1234 and AT&T’s Carrier Access Code is 4321.

NOTE: The carrier access code is determined two ways: the subscriber chooses a carrier (with a specific carrier access code) or the subscriber dials 101+xxxx+NPA+Nxx+xxxx.

A Carrier Route List has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key unique name of Carrie route list

min Carrier Access Code Length: 4 digits

routes a list of routes to the carrier

active this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are:

NO — do not use this route list.

Yes (default) — use this route list. This is normal state for a route list.

TipUse this attribute to implement time-of-day alternate routing. To do this, provision two routes. At any time, mark one route active, and mark the other route inactive.

TipUse this attribute when pre-provisioning a new set of routes. Mark the new set of routes inactive. You can then effect an immediate cutover to the new route list by deactivating the in-use route list and activating the pre-provisioned route list.

An immediate cutover eliminates any downtime for call attempts while the operator is dragging and dropping trunk groups over to the route list. Also, the new routelist can be pre-provisioned during the day, and cutover can take place during off-hours.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) — always select the first available route

• ROUND_ROBIN — use the available routes sequentially

Page 524: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

516 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The the Generic CLI is used for all carrier route list commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• active

• selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

• routes

See “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527, and “Removing a Route from a Route List” on page 529.

Prerequisites

Carrier, see “Carriers” on page 196

create CarrierRouteList SWB 0555

Page 525: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 517990-1012-001

Tip

LNP Route List

The switch uses LNP routing to route calls to non local subscribers whose telephone numbers have been ported. The switch detects that a telephone number might be ported when the non local subscriber’s prefix is flagged as ported.

Flag prefixes as ported. See “ported” on page 404.

If a called DN is not a local subscriber and the called prefix is flagged as ported, the switch queries an LNP database to determine the LRN (Local Routing Number) of the ported DN. When the LNP database responds to the query from the switch, it returns either the original dialed number or the LRN. If the database returns the original dialed number, the call routes normally. If, however, the database returns an LRN, the switch uses the LRN and the LNP Route Lists to route the call to the ported subscriber’s switch.

NOTE: The LNP route list should contain routes for all LRNs in the switch’s LATA.

For example, a call is made to 806-689-1234. The switch determines that the prefix 806689 is ported. The switch queries the LNP database, which returns the LRN 806-689-9999. The switch routes the call using the 806-689-9999 LNP route list.

An LNP Route List has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key unique name of LNP route list

min the lowest LRN in the remote switch

Length: 6 - 10 digits

max the highest LRN in the remote switch

Length: 6 - 10 digits

routes a list of routes to the remote switch

active this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are:

NO — do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list).

Yes (default) — use this route list. This is normal state for a route list.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) — always select the first available route

• ROUND_ROBIN — use the available routes sequentially

Page 526: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

518 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The the Generic CLI is used for all LNP route list commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• max

• active

• selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

• routes

See “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527, and “Removing a Route from a Route List” on page 529.

Prerequisites

Ported prefix, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

LRN, see “Rate Centers” on page 410.

create LNPRouteList LNP1 214972999 214972999

Page 527: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 519990-1012-001

NANP Route List

An NANP route list determines which calls the switch routes itself. The switch uses NANP routing when the destination is in the same carrier's network as the switch, such as an LEC.

An NAMP Route List has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key unique name of NANP route list

min specified phone number start of range

Length: 1 - 19 digits

max specified phone number end of range

Length: 1 - 19 digits

routes a list of routes to the remote switch

active this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are:

NO — do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list).

Yes (default) — use this route list. This is normal state for a route list.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) — always select the first available route

• ROUND_ROBIN — use the available routes sequentially

Page 528: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

520 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The the Generic CLI is used for all NANP route list commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• max

• active

• selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

• routes

See “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527, and “Removing a Route from a Route List” on page 529.

PrerequisitesPrefix, see “Prefixes” on page 403.

create NANPRouteList Plano 9724800000 9724809999

Page 529: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 521990-1012-001

Tandem ANI Route List

A tandem ANI route list is used route calls based on an incoming call’s Automatic Number Identification (ANI). Use tandem ANI routes from a subtending switch or another switch to an Access Tandem (AT) or Interexchange Carrier (IXC) provide a way to route a set of calling numbers to a specific IXC.

An Tandem ANI Route List has the following attributes:

The the Generic CLI is used for all tandem ANI route list commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• max

• active

• selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

• routes

Attribute Description

key unique name of Tandem ANI route list

min specified phone number start of range

Length: 1 - 19 digits

max specified phone number end of range

Length: 1 - 19 digits

routes a list of routes to the AT or IXC

active this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are:

NO — do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list).

Yes (default) — use this route list. This is normal state for a route list.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) — always select the first available route

• ROUND_ROBIN — use the available routes sequentially

Page 530: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

522 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

See “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527, and “Removing a Route from a Route List” on page 529.

Prerequisites

Trunk groups with matching protocols on the End Office (EO) and the AT, see “Route Lists” on page 514 and the following table:

Dependent Commands

Add outgoing trunk groups for the connecting IXCs, see “Route Lists” on page 514.

Add the outgoing trunk groups to the tandem ANI route list, see “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527.

Add Tandem ANI Subscribers to screen calls based on the ANI, see “query AniSubscriber” on page 513

create TandemAniRouteList TandemANI 9724800000 9724809999

Trunk ProtocolSpecial Routing Information

to the AT

Feature Group D (FGD) Feature Group C (FGC)

None

SS7 Carrier Identification code

FGD-Access Tandem (FGDAT) Carrier Identification code/route code

Page 531: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 523990-1012-001

Tandem Carrier RouteList

A tandem carrier route list is based on tandem carriers, and enables the switch to act as an Access Tandem (AT). An AT routes calls from a subtending switch to another AT or an IXC:

An Tandem Carrier Route List has the following attributes:

The the Generic CLI is used for all tandem carrier route list commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• min

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• active

• selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

• routes

See “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527, and “Removing a Route from a Route List” on page 529.

Attribute Description

key unique name of Tandem Carrier route list

min carrier access code, 4-digit code identifying carrier used to route or the 4-digit code plus the routing code for specific call types (e.g. 0333 or 033388)

Len: 4 - 6

routes a list of routes to the AT or IXC

active this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are:

NO — do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list).

Yes (default) — use this route list. This is normal state for a route list.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) — always select the first available route

• ROUND_ROBIN — use the available routes sequentially

Page 532: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

524 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Prerequisites

Carrier, see “Carriers” on page 196.

Trunk groups with matching protocols on the End Office (EO) and the AT, see “Route Lists” on page 514 and the following table:

Dependent Commands

Add outgoing trunk groups for the connecting ICs, see “Route Lists” on page 514.

Add the outgoing trunk groups to the tandem carrier route list, see “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527.

create TandemCarrierRouteList SWBT 4321

Trunk Protocol Allowed Routing by the AT

FGD • Incoming ANI

• Incoming trunk group

FGC • Incoming trunk group

SS7 • Incoming ANI

• Incoming trunk group

• Incoming Carrier Identification code

FGDAT • Incoming ANI

• Incoming trunk group

• Incoming Carrier Identification code and route code

Page 533: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 525990-1012-001

Tandem TG Route List

A tandem trunk group routes from a subtending switch to an Access Tandem (AT) or Interexchange Carrier (IXC) using the specific trunk group.

An Tandem TG Route List has the following attributes:

The the Generic CLI is used for all tandem trunk group route list commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• active

• selectionMethod

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

• routes

See “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527, and “Removing a Route from a Route List” on page 529.

Attribute Description

key unique name of Tandem TG route list

routes a list of routes to the AT or IXC

active this flag controls if the route list is usable. Values are:

NO — do not use this route list (useful when adding or removing routes to the route list).

Yes (default) — use this route list. This is normal state for a route list.

selectionMethod • FIRST_AVAILABLE (default) — always select the first available route

• ROUND_ROBIN — use the available routes sequentially

Page 534: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

526 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Prerequisites

Trunk groups with matching protocols on the End Office (EO) and the AT, see “Route Lists” on page 514 and the following table:

Dependent Commands

Add outgoing trunk groups for the connecting ICs, see “Route Lists” on page 514.

Add the outgoing trunk groups to the tandem carrier route list, see “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527.

create TandemTGRouteList incmSWB

Trunk Protocol Allowed Routing by the AT

FGD • Incoming ANI

• Incoming trunk group

FGC • Incoming trunk group

SS7 • Incoming ANI

• Incoming trunk group

• Incoming Carrier Identification code

FGDAT • Incoming ANI

• Incoming trunk group

• Incoming Carrier Identification code and route code

Page 535: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 527990-1012-001

Tip

Adding a Route to a Route List

When entering ranges for route lists, use “X” as a wild card. For example, instead of entering two parameters for a new route list (972480000 9724809999), enter 972480XXXX for the same results.

insertInto <routeListType> <key> routes <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a route to a Route List. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Syntax Description

<key> Route List name

<routeListType> Type of Route List:

• CarrierRouteList

• LNPRouteList

• NANPRouteList

• TandemANIRouteList

• TandemCarrierRouteList

• TandemTGRouteList

<subkey> This is the index in the routes list where you want to enter the route.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a route at the start of a Route List. Use a index of -1 to insert a facility at the end of a Route List.

<subvalue> This attribute specifies the route that you are adding to the routes list. You may add:

• A line OID

• A trunk OID

• A span OID

• A trunk group key

• Digits

• a service, such as

– TestTone100, or TestTone102 (see “Test Tone Maintenance” on page 663.)

– Changed Number Announcement ("CNASvc", see “Change Number Announcement” on page 211.)

– Automatic Number Announcement ("ANASvc", see “Automatic Number Announcement” on page 665.

Page 536: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

528 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

insertInto CarrierRouteList IXC routes 1 SSP1insertInto LNPRouteList LNP1 routes 1 trunk-0insertInto NANPRouteList Test1 routes 1 9724800031insertInto NANPRouteList TestTone102 routes 1 Test102

Page 537: 1012 Command Line Interface

Route Lists

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 529990-1012-001

Removing a Route from a Route ListdeleteFrom <routeListType> <key> routes <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to add a route from a Route List. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

deleteFrom CarrierRouteList IXC routes 1 deleteFrom LNPRouteList LNP1 routes 1 deleteFrom NANPRouteList Test1 routes 1

Syntax Description

<key> Route List name

<routeListType> Type of Route List:

• CarrierRouteList

• LNPRouteList

• NANPRouteList

• TandemANIRouteList

• TandemCarrierRouteList

• TandemTGRouteList

<subkey> This is the index in the route list of the route you want to remove.

Page 538: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

530 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Subscribers

A subscriber is a person or a company receiving service from the switch. A subscriber is distinguished by it’s connecting facility, so we often speak of POTS subscribers, GR-303 subscribers, IP subscribers, and so on.

A Subscriber has the following attributes:

attribute value

key subscriber’s DN, a 10-digit DN even if the subscriber has 7-digit dialing

NOTE: To provision a voice mail system (VMS), use the provisioned routing number or the pilotLDN in this field.

pin 4-digit personal identification number.

Internal value, not available in current release

lastName subscriber’s last name

firstName subscriber’s first name

restrict This attribute defines the restrictions on a subscriber. For a single restriction, enter its hexadecimal value (listed below). For multiple restrictions, add the hexadecimal values together and enter the total. See “Using Hexadecimal” on page 741.

• Extended Area — The subscriber can place calls to nearby exchanges, but these calls are routed using PIC2 (the intraLATA carrier) and billed as intraLATA, hexadecimal value — 2

• IntraLATA Toll — The subscriber cannot place calls to intraLATA exchanges that require a toll, hexadecimal value — 4

• InterLATA Toll — The subscriber cannot place calls to interLATA exchanges that require a toll, hexadecimal value — 8

• International — The subscriber cannot place calls to international exchanges, hexadecimal value — 10

Page 539: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 531990-1012-001

attribute value

restrict(continued)

• NPA 900 — The subscriber cannot place 1-900 “pay-per-call” calls, hexadecimal value — 20

• NXX 976 — The subscriber cannot place 1-976 “pay-per-call” calls, hexadecimal value — 40

• NPA 500 — The subscriber cannot place 1-500 “pay-per-call” calls, hexadecimal value — 80

• NPA 700 — The subscriber cannot place 1-700 “pay-per-call” calls, hexadecimal value — 100

• NO PIC2 — The subscriber must dial the CAC (101XXXX) to place calls to intraLATA exchanges that require a toll, hexadecimal value — 200

• NO SCREEN — The originator screening is bypassed and the call is processed on dialed digits and CAC, hexadecimal value — 400

• Soft DialTone — The subscriber can only dial 911 and 611 calls, hexadecimal value — 800

• DA TO PIC2 — The subscriber’s DA calls (411 only) go to PIC2, the intraLATA carrier, hexadecimal value. — 1000

• Collect or Third Party Calls — The subscriber cannot make collect or third party calls, hexadecimal value — 2000

NOTE: Only one of NO Qos, QoS If COPS Up, or Qos Must can be set for a given subscriber.

• QoS Must — For IP subscribers (SIP and MGCP) provisioned as Access Subscriber: the subscriber needs successful gate negotiation for their call to proceed, which implies that COPS needs to be up. hexadecimal value — 4000

• No QoS — For IP subscribers (SIP and MGCP) provisioned as Access Subscriber: the subscriber does not need gate negotiation for their call processing. hexadecimal value —10000

• QoS If COPS Up — For IP subscribers (SIP and MGCP) provisioned as Access Subscriber: gate negotiation will only occur if COPS is up (if gate negotiation fails, the call will not proceed). The call will proceed if COPS is down. hexadecimal value — 8000

Page 540: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

532 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

subscribedServices This attribute defines the services for a subscriber. For a single service, enter its hexadecimal value (listed below). For multiple services, add the hexadecimal values together and enter the total. See “Using Hexadecimal” on page 741.

NOTE: The following services are inherited by OPX Subscribers from the Primary Subscriber:

• Call Forwarding

• Call Forwarding Busy

• Call Forwarding Do Not Answer

• Call Forwarding Fixed

• Caller ID Blocking

• Caller ID Delivery

• Caller ID Unblocking

• Calling Name Delivery

• Enhanced Call Forwarding Do No Answer

• MWI Options

• Remote Call Forwarding Activation

• Revertive call

• Selective Call Forwarding

NOTE: The following services can not be assigned to a Primary Subscriber with an OPX facility:

• Call Back

• Call Block

• Call Reject

• Call Return

• Call Transfer

• Call Waiting

• Call Waiting Caller ID

• Priority Call

• Secondary DN

• Selective Call Acceptance

• Speed Dial

• Three-Way

• Warm Line

attribute value

Page 541: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 533990-1012-001

Service NameHex

ValueDefinition

CALLER_ID 4 Displays the telephone number of an incoming call and posts the date and time of the call.

CALLER_ID_BLOCK 2 Blocks the subscriber’s number (Caller ID) delivery on outgoing calls. Also allows the subscriber to use Caller ID Unblock.

NOTE: A similar feature can be used on a per-call-basis.

CALLER_ID_UNBLOCK 100 Allows the subscriber to remove the restriction of CALLER_ID_BLOCK for one call.

CALLING_NAME 200 Displays the name of an incoming caller.

CALL_BACK Call Back is an outgoing call management feature that allows the subscriber to make a call to the last DN called. To activate Call Back, the subscriber, after reaching a DN, hangs up, and enters feature access code *66. Once Call Back activates, the busy/idle status of the called and calling lines is checked periodically until call setup is attempted or a timeout occurs. When both lines are idle, the calling party hears a special ring. When the caller picks up the set, the called party’s line rings.

If the called DN is busy, the subscriber does not hear a busy signal, but is notified by a tone, after which automatic processing of the call continues for up to 30 minutes or until the DN is idle.

CALL_BLOCK 20000 Call Block allows the subscriber to create a reject list of directory numbers (DNs). Calls from these DNs receive a fast busy signal and the subscriber’s telephone does not ring. Subscribers are billed for Call Block on a subscription basis; a flat, monthly rate.

CALL_FORWARDING 40 Allows the subscriber to forward all incoming calls to another number. This feature is also known as CLASS feature Call Forwarding Variable.

CALL_FORWARD_BUSY 400 Allows the subscriber to forward incoming calls when their number is busy.

Page 542: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

534 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

CALL_FORWARD_FIXED 100000 Provisions a fixed call forwarding number for a subscriber. A fixed call forwarding number allows the subscriber to activate and deactivate call forwarding, but does not allow changing number without calling the service provider.

NOTE: Call Forwarding Fixed can not be provisioned with Call Forwarding.

CALL_FORWARD_LOCAL 4000 For subscribers provisioned as Subscriber Access endpoints:

Allows subscribers to forward calls on a per-call basis, depending on the access device’s settings. The T7000 does not store a call forwarding number.

CALL_FORWARD_NOANS 800 Allows subscribers to forward incoming calls when they are not available to answer. To set the number of rings before forwarding, see “numberOfCFDRings” on page 542

CALL_REJECT 80 Allows subscribers to reject calls from people who have Caller ID Blocking on their telephone.

CALL_RETURN 8000 This service is an incoming call management feature that allows the subscriber to place a call to the number of the last call that was received. To turn on Call Return the subscriber presses *69 and the switch plays back the last incoming call’s DN. The subscriber presses 1 to complete the call. This feature includes Recall Block to Private, it does not return calls on calling numbers with blocked Caller ID.

If the called DN is busy, the subscriber does not hear a busy signal, but is notified by an announcement, after which automatic processing of the call continues for up to 30 minutes or until the DN is idle.

CALL_TRANSFER 20 Allows the subscriber to transfer a call to another number.

CALL_WAITING 1 Alerts the subscriber to a second incoming call and allows the subscriber to switch between the calls. Also, allows the subscriber to use cancel call waiting.

CALL_WAITING_CALLER_ID 1000 Displays the name and number of a second incoming call.

Service NameHex

ValueDefinition

Page 543: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 535990-1012-001

ENHANCED_CF_NOANS 2000 Allows the subscriber to set following:

• the number of rings (2-9) before call forwarding activates

• the forward-to destination number

Enhanced Call Forwarding No Answer and Call Forwarding No Answer are exclusive, only assign one of these services. For instance, if the Enhanced Call Forwarding No Answer Service is enabled, then disable Call Forwarding No Answer.

PRIORITY_CALL 200000 This service allows the subscriber to create and edit a screening list and assign a distinctive ring to the DNs in the list. Incoming calls from calling parties in the screening list are identified to the subscriber by the distinctive ring. Or, if a subscriber is engaged in conversation and a call from one of the designated DNs arrives, a distinctive tone accompanies the incoming call. Calls from all other DNs ring normally.

REMOTE_CALL_FWD_ACTIVATION 40000 Subscribers who subscribe to any or all of the call forwarding services may add Remote Activation. This feature provides a dedicated DN on the switch that can be used for remote activation. Subscriber directly call to this remote activation DN from any location.

Calls to this number are answered with a tone. The subscriber then dials the home DN and a security code from the remActCFSecurityCode field. If the security code matches the provisioned code in the Subscriber window, a confirmation tone is returned. The subscriber proceeds through the call forwarding activation/deactivation procedure as if dialing from home.

REVERTIVE_CALL 4000000

This feature allows the subscriber to set up a talk path with other telephones on a single line. The subscriber dials their own DN, listens for a confirmation tone and hangs up to allow all telephones on the line to ring. Multiple telephones can go off hook and talk until all telephones hang up. This feature is also called Barn Service or Home Intercom.

SELECTIVE_CALL_ACCEPTANCE 80000 This service allows the subscriber to receive incoming calls only from a specified list of up to 10 numbers. An incoming call from a DN that is not on the Selective Call Acceptance (SCA) list routes to an announcement stating that the called party will not receive the call. For example, subscribers who do not want to be interrupted by unwanted calls but want to receive important calls. The SCA subscriber does not receive notification when a call is rejected.

Service NameHex

ValueDefinition

Page 544: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

536 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SELECTIVE_CALL_FORWARDING 10000 This service allows subscribers to forward calls from telephone numbers identified on their Selective Call Forwarding list (up to 10 DNs) to another DN. When the Selective Call Forwarding feature has been activated, only incoming calls that appear on the Selective Call Forwarding List are forwarded to the remote location.

SPEED_DIAL30 800000 Allows the subscriber to dial frequently-called DNs using a two-digit code (speed dial number). The subscriber has a list of 30 speed dial numbers.

The subscriber can have both SPEED_DIAL8 and SPEED_DIAL30 for a total of 38 speed dial numbers.

SPEED_DIAL8 400000 Allows the subscriber to dial frequently-called DNs using a one-digit code (speed dial number). The subscriber has a list of 8 speed dial numbers.

TELEMARKETER_SCREENING

TipThe Telemarketer Screening feature requires a software license from Taqua. For software licensing information, e-mail Taqua Marketing at [email protected].

10 Routes all calls to the subscriber with a presentation of Unavailable, Unknown or Out of Area to an announcement prior to termination. The Central Office TRIGGER_ON_RESTRICTED option allows the service to be triggered for calls with a presentation of restricted, private or anonymous (see “tmsOptions” on page 385).

After the announcement is played, the caller must dial the digit mentioned in the announcement in order for the call to proceed. Otherwise, the call is terminated after a timer expires. See “tmsDigit” on page 385 and “tmsOptions” on page 385.

THREE_WAY 8 Allows a third person to join in a two-party call.

WARM_LINE 1000000

The switch dials a pre-determined DN from a subscribers line automatically if the receiver is left off-hook for 0 to 30 seconds. The automatically dialed number can be any telephone number or digits routed by the switch, (911 is allowed, but not recommended). Warm Line becomes Hot Line service when you set the Warm Line timer to 0. You can use Hot Line with a Customer Service DN to have a new resident call your company for telephone service. See “warmLineDigitTimeout” on page 541 and “warmLineForwardDN” on page 541.

Service NameHex

ValueDefinition

timezoneOffset An optional attribute used when the subscriber resides in a different time zone than the switch. The switch applies the value in the timezoneOffset to calculate the local time at the subscriber’s phone when displaying Caller ID and time.

interLATACarrier The carrier that handles the subscriber’s interLATA calls (PIC1) if no interLATA carrier is desired, enter NOPIC.

Page 545: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 537990-1012-001

intraLATACarrier The carrier that handles the subscriber’s intraLATA calls (PIC2), if no intraLATA carrier is desired, enter NOPIC.

homeNPA Home Numbering Plan Area. The subscriber’s area code.

allowedList key from screen list: Allowed dialing screening prefixes.

deniedList key from screen list: Denied dialing screening prefixes.

serviceInUse Note: this field is read only.

A dynamic bitfield detailing which services are currently being used by the subscriber. If the value of the corresponding bit is set, the service is in use.

C A U T I O N

Do not modify this attribute unless directed to by Taqua TAC!

• CALL_WAITING

• CALLER_ID_BLOCK

• CALLER_ID

• THREE_WAY

• TELEMARKETER_SCREEN

• CALL_TRANSFER

• CALL_FORWARDING

• CALL_REJECT

• CALLER_ID_UNBLOCK

• CALLING_NAME

• CALL_FORWARD_BUSY

• CALL_FORWARD_NOANS

• CALL_WAITING_CALLER_ID

• ENHANCED_CF_NOANS

• CALL_RETURN

• SELECTIVE_CALL_FORWARDINGCALL_BLOCK

• REMOTE_CALL_FWD_ACTIVATION

• SELECTIVE_CALL_ACCEPTANCE

• CALL_FORWARD_FIXED

• PRIORITY_CALL

• SPEED_DIAL8

• SPEED_DIAL30

• WARM_LINE

• CALL_BACK

• REVERTIVE_CALL

• OPX_FIRST_OFFHK_DIAL

• OPX_FIRST_OFFHK_ANS

• OPX_FIRST_SEC_OFFHK

Page 546: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

538 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

rateCenter name of the rate center this subscriber belongs to, this shows up as the originating rate center for all subscriber calls in the CDRs. Enter NONE for no rate center.

beingPorted

TipVerify that the LNP database has been updated before deleting subscribers from the switch. See “testLnpQuery” on page 642.

Subscriber’s porting status. Values are:

In the beingPorted field, select the appropriate porting status for this subscriber. For details as to how the switch routes ported subscribers, see “Routing to a Ported Subscriber” on page 715.

• NOT_BEING_PORTED – for all subscribers that are not being ported to another switch and for all subscribers that not being ported from other switches to the switch. The call is terminated to subscriber’s facility.

• BEING_PORTED_IN — For all subscribers that are being ported into the T7000 from other switches. Flags the switch that it may have to do an LNP dip to find the new number for the subscriber. Calls to the subscriber continue to terminate on the subscriber’s old switch until the LRN database is updated with the LRN of the local switch. Use this when adding a ported subscriber to the switch or before removing a ported subscriber off of the old switch.

• BEING_PORTED_OUT — For all subscribers that are being ported to another switch. Flags the switch that it may have to do an LNP dip to find the new Location Routing Number for the subscriber. Calls to the subscriber continue to terminate on the local switch until the LRN database is updated with the LRN of the subscriber’s new switch. If the new switch’s LRN is returned, LRN routing is used to forward the call to the subscriber’s new switch. Prevents Outgoing Signal Customization, and later changes to the facility OID, RDT Name, CRV, or IPTrunkGroup.

voiceMailIndicator Subscriber’s voice mail status. Values are:

• NO_MAIL

• YOU_HAVE_MAIL

serviceProfile This is the name of the Service Profile for Subscribed AIN Services and/or Account Codes. See “Service Profile” on page 152, and “AcctCodePatternProfile” on page 157.

billingNumber If populated, used as the billing number field in CDRs.

Page 547: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 539990-1012-001

secondaryDNs List of Distinctive Ringing numbers and associated alerting profiles.

Distinctive Ringing service, also called teen service, allows up to six DNs to be assigned to the same customer’s line. The subscriber has one outgoing line and the party identification of six incoming lines. The switch creates a route list for each secondary DN with the same route as the primary DN

NOTE: A secondaryDN can not be a Hunt Group Pilot DN or a Start Hunt number

The alerting tone is the tone the switch sends when the secondaryDN is dialed:

• ALERTING_DEFAULT — The default ringing tone on the switch, this tone is always applied to the primary DN. The tone is 2 seconds on and 4 seconds off. (also the default if the parameter is omitted)

• ALERTING_1 — 1second on, 1 second off, 1 second on

• ALERTING_2 — 0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on

• ALERTING_3 — 0.25 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 2.25 seconds on

• ALERTING_4 — 0.25 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 1.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on

• ALERTING_5 — 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on

• ALERTING_3GR506 — 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.8 seconds on, 4.0 seconds off

remActCFSecurityCode Security Code to remotely activate Call Forward service.

Length: 4 - 9 digits

originatingLineType Flex ANI - originatingLineType. See “Flex ANI Out-Pulsed Information Digits” on page 394.

Page 548: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

540 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

lineLoadClass Line Load Class of Subscriber. Line load control divides subscribers into three separate groups:

• A — the highest priority

• B — secondary priority

• C — tertiary priority

The highest priority A group requires communications in emergencies. Subscribers in this group include law enforcement, fire, and rescue personnel.

The B and C groups contain the remaining subscribers (businesses and individuals).

Typically, group A contains 10% of the subscribers with B and C containing the remaining 90%.

During an emergency, use line load control on the C class, or on B and C classes to reduce congestion and allow group A to communicate. See “LLControl” on page 383,.

Page 549: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 541990-1012-001

mwiOptionsvoiceMailSystemID

Message Waiting Indicator. Controls how the subscriber is alerted to new voice mail messages. Values are"

• Stutter — Provides a stutter tone on the subscriber’s telephone when the subscriber has new voice mail messages.

• Stutter_VMWI — Provides a stutter tone and Visual Message Waiting Indicator (VMWI) when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. VMWI is a flashing LED or message on a CPE that has VMWI capability.

• Stutter_VMWI_Ring — Provides a stutter tone, VMWI, and an abbreviated ring on the subscriber’s telephone when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. An abbreviated ring applies if a subscriber is off-hook and receives a message, after the subscriber goes on-hook, then the switch partially rings the telephone before sending stutter and VMWI.

• VMWI — Provides VMWI when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. VMWI is a flashing LED or message on a CPE that has VMWI capability.

NOTE: VMWI is the only valid MWI option for SIP AGW Subscribers.

• VMWI_Ring — Provides VMWI and an abbreviated ring on the subscriber’s telephone when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. An abbreviated ring applies if a subscriber is off-hook and receives a message, after the subscriber goes on-hook, then the switch partially rings the telephone before sending stutter and VMWI.

• Permanent_Stutter — Provides a stutter tone on the subscriber’s telephone when the subscriber has new voice mail messages. It is different from regular stutter because the dial tone stutters until the subscriber enters a digit, goes on-hook, or does not enter a digit and the First Digit Timer expires.

• Permanent_Stutter_VMWI — Permanent Stutter and Stutter and VMWI

• Permanent_Stutter_VMWI_Ring — Permanent Stutter and Stutter and VMWI and Abbreviated Ring

warmLineDigitTimeout Range: 0 — 30000 (0 for Hot Line, 1000 to 30000 for Warm Line).

warmLineForwardDN The DN called if the receiver is left off-hook for the length of time specified in the warmLineDigitTimeout field.

TipYou can use Hot Line with a Customer Service DN to have a new resident automatically call your company for telephone service.

Page 550: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

542 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

ftrsProfile The FTRS profile associated with this subscriber. The switch applies FTRS if the pattern associated with the profile matches the dialed digits. See “FTRS” on page 223.

NOTE: A subscriber profile takes precedence over an incoming trunk group profile. For example, if a subscriber has a profile assigned and is in a hunt group, the switch uses the subscriber profile. For more information, consult the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

maximumCFVCalls The maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously active for the Call Forwarding Variable service.

Default: 1

maximumCFDCalls The maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously active for the Call Forwarding No Answer service.

Default: 1

maximumCFBCalls The maximum number of calls that can be simultaneously active for the Call Forwarding Busy service.

Default: 1

numberOfCFDRings The number of rings (2-9) to allow before the Call Forwarding No Answer service or Voice Mail service forwards the call.

Range: 2 — 9

Default: 3

appServerTG For Enhanced Voice Services or Hosted SIP Gateway Subscribers, this is the name of the SIP Application Server trunk group

voiceMailSystemID The 3- or 10-digit ID of SIP Voice Mail System serving the subscriber.

Page 551: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 543990-1012-001

TaquaMailProvisioned Note: this field is read only.

Status of Voice Mail System provisioning for the subscriber. Values are:

NOT_APPLICABLE (default)— subscriber is not a member of TaquaMail SIP VMS.

NO — subscriber is a member of TaquaMail SIP VMS, but the server has not yet confirmed the provisioning.

YES— subscriber is a member of TaquaMail SIP VMS, and the server has confirmed the provisioning.

NOTE: When a subscriber is a member of TaquaMail SIP VMS, provisioning is automatically handled by the T7000. The switch sends a request to the TaquaMail VMS to provision a subscriber. When the TaquaMail server succeeds in fulfilling that request, it updates the subscriber record to reflect that provisioning was successful. If the TaquaMailProvisioned field is still 'NO' when a database audit triggers, the switch resends the request to the TaquaMail VMS to provision the subscriber.

opxDN The DN associated with an OPX facility.

opxPrimaryDN The phone number a caller dials that rings both the primary and the Off-Premises Extension (OPX) phone

options Type is Bitfield. These options are individually turned on or off by name. See example.

• FORCE_CALLWAIT_CALLERID — set this option if the subscriber has the Call Waiting Caller ID service, and his CPE device does not respond properly with an acknowledgement.

• USE_DIAL_PULSE — set this option for subscribers with dial pulse telephones (also called rotary telephones). The default is to use DTMF dialing

facility The facility object holds subscriber facility data. See:

• “TDM Facility” on page 547

• “GR303Facility” on page 548

• “MGCP Facility” on page 549

• “SIP Facility” on page 550

Page 552: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

544 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The Generic CLI is used for all Subscriber commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• lastName

• firstName

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• restrict

• subscribedServices

• interLATACarrier

• intraLATACarrier

• rateCenter

• facility

facility is one of:

• TDMFacility

• facilityOID

• GR303Facility

• RDTName

• crv

• MGCPFacility

• MGTermination

• SIPFacility

• IPTrunkGroup

• username

• password

The modify command applies to the following attributes:

• pin

• lastName

• firstName

• restrict

• subscribedServices

• timeZoneOffset

• interLATACarrier

• intraLATACarrier

Page 553: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 545990-1012-001

Tip

• allowedList

• deniedList

• rateCenter

• beingPorted

• voiceMailIndicator

• serviceProfile

• billingNumber

• remActCFSecurityCode

• originatingLineType

• lineLoadClass

• mwiOptions

• warmLineDigitTimeout

• warmLineForwardDN

• ftrsProfile

• maximumCFVCalls

• maximumCFDCalls

• maximumCFBCalls

• numberOfCFDRings

• appServerTG

• voiceMailSystemID

• TaquaMailProvisioned

• opxPrimaryDN

• options

See “TDM Facility” on page 547, “GR303Facility” on page 548, “MGCP Facility” on page 549, and “SIP Facility” on page 550for modify facility examples.

• facility

Page 554: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

546 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameters:

• secondaryDNs

See “Adding Secondary DNs to Subscribers” on page 557 and “Removing Secondary DNs from Subscribers” on page 559.

Also, see“query Subscriber” on page 552, “query CFVInfo” on page 553, “query SCFInfo” on page 553, “query CFBInfo” on page 554, “query CFBInfo” on page 554, “query CFDInfo” on page 554, and “query CFFInfo” on page 555.

create Subscriber 9724800001 Miller Craig 0 201204 WorldComm LuckyDog rc1 TDMFacility Line-01

create Subscriber 9724800037 James Stephen 0 204 WorldComm LuckyDog rc1 GR303Facility AFCUMC1 4

create Subscriber 8174801011 Anderson Paul 0 0 . . . SIPFacility ipgrp1 8174801011 Pa55W0rd

modify Subscriber 9724800001 restrict NXX_976 1

destroy Subscriber 9724800001

Prerequisites

Carrier, see “Carriers” on page 196.

Rate center, see “Adding a RateCenter” on page 412

For GR-303 subscribers, RDT, see “createRDT” on page 351

For pseudo IP subscribers, see “IP Trunk Groups” on page 307

For MGCP subscribers, MGCP termination, see “MGTermination” on page 376.

Page 555: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 547990-1012-001

TDM Facility

The TDMfacility object holds subscriber data for TDM facilities.

The following example creates a subscriber with a TDM facility on the current (LTC) card.

create Subscriber 9724800001 Miller Craig 0 201204 WorldComm LuckyDog rc1 TDMFacility Line-01

The following example modifies a subscriber’s TDM facility on the current (LTC) card.

query Subscriber 9724800000 facility<5c5b33c>facility...............<5c68fd8>

<5c68fd8> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-0-2-2

modify Subscriber 9724800000 facility TDMFacility Line-0-2-21

query Subscriber 9724800000 facility<5c5b33c>facility...............<6034f88>

<6034f88> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-0-2-21

attribute value

facilityOID Object Identifier of the Line for this TDM facility. Only applies to LTC.

Range: 1 - 32

Example: Line-01

Page 556: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

548 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

GR303Facility

The GR303facility object holds subscriber data for GR-303 facilities.

The following example creates a subscriber with a GR303 facility. The ACFUMC1 RDT was previously defined.

create Subscriber 9724800037 James Stephen 0 204 WorldComm LuckyDog rc1 GR303Facility AFCUMC1 4

The following example modifies a subscriber’s GR303 facility.

query Subscriber 9724800009 facility<5f8513c>facility...............<5f8a750>

<5f8a750> GR303Facility RDTName..."AFCUMC1" crv.......6 (6)

modify Subscriber 9724800009 facility GR303Facility AFCUMC1 101

query Subscriber 9724800009 facility<5f8513c>facility...............<5fa3170>

<5fa3170> GR303Facility RDTName..."AFCUMC1" crv.......65 (101)

attribute value

RDTName Name of a previously defined Remote Data Terminal.See “GR-303” on page 351.

crv The number of the physical analog line hanging off of the RDT.

Range: 0- 2048.

Page 557: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 549990-1012-001

MGCP Facility

The MGCPFacility object holds subscriber data for MGCP facilities.

The following example creates a subscriber with a MGCP facility. The term-1-2 MGTermination was previously defined.

create Subscriber 8174801012 Leaking Rufus . ffd . . . MGCPFacility term-1-2

The following example modifies a subscriber’s MGCPFacility.

query Subscriber 8174801012 facility<6a69a74>facility...............<6a6ef78>

<6a6ef78> MGCPFacility MGTermination..."term-1-2"

modify Subscriber 8174801012 facility MGCPFacility term-2-2

query Subscriber 8174801012 facility<6a69a74>facility...............<6ac8948>

<6ac8948> MGCPFacility MGTermination..."term-2-2"

attribute value

MGTermination Name of a previously defined MG Termination.See “MGTermination” on page 376.

Page 558: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

550 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SIP Facility

The SIPFacility object holds subscriber data for SIP facilities.

The following example creates a subscriber with a SIP facility. The IP trunk group and SIP Access Gateway were previously defined.

create Subscriber 9726921839 Paradise Sal . . . . . SIPFacility gw1_ipgrp 9726921839 OnTheRoad

attribute value

IPTrkGrpName For IP subscribers, the name of the IP trunk group

username For IP subscribers configured as SubscriberAccess SIP endpoints, the username is the subscriber’s DN

password For IP subscribers configured as SubscriberAccess SIP endpoints, the password is — 0-16-character password

The username and password are combined, encrypted, and shared between the switch and the CPE device; and used in the Registration process between the CPE device and the switch. The only time the password visible is when you enter it in the command line!

Page 559: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 551990-1012-001

The following example modifies a SIPFacility. Note that switch encrypts the password.

query Subscriber 8174802345 facility<609d234>facility...............<60a2638>

<60a2638> SIPFacility IPTrunkGroup..."ipgrp1" username......."8174802345" password......."53036b2aafe896a1f8a59654e0f3094e"

modify Subscriber 8174802345 facility SIPFacilityUsage: modify Subscriber 8174802345 facility SIPFacility <IPTrunkGroup> [username] [password]

<IPTrunkGroup> : Available keys in tIPTrunkGroupDbMgr: ipgrp1 ipgrp10 ipgrp11

modify Subscriber 8174802345 facility SIPFacility ipgrp11 8174802345 Pa55W0rd

query Subscriber 8174802345 facility<609d234>facility...............<60f5010>

<60f5010> SIPFacility IPTrunkGroup..."ipgrp11" username......."8174802345" password......."2d63fc8b1d3cd85d272e58ef90ec80d3"

Page 560: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

552 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

query Subscriberquery Subscriber <key>

This Generic CLI command displays the data for a specific subscriber.

query Subscriber 9724800002

<5f51560> Subscriberkey...................."9724800002"pin....................0lastName..............."Pennington"firstName.............."Bill"restrict...............(BITFIELD) -> 0

subscribedServices.....(BITFIELD) -> 204 .CALLER_ID .CALLING_NAME

timezoneOffset.........0 (0)interLATACarrier......."WorldComm"intraLATACarrier......."WorldComm"homeNPA................"972"allowedList............0deniedList.............0serviceInUse...........(BITFIELD) -> 0

rateCenter............."rc1"beingPorted............NOT_BEING_PORTEDvoiceMailIndicator.....NO_MAILserviceProfile.........0billingNumber..........0secondaryDNs...........0 (0)remActCFSecurityCode...0originatingLineType....0 (0)lineLoadClass..........CmwiOptions.............StutterwarmLineDigitTimeout...2710 (10000)warmLineForwardDN......0ftrsProfile............0maximumCFVCalls........1 (1)maximumCFDCalls........1 (1)maximumCFBCalls........1 (1)numberOfCFDRings.......3appServerTG............0voiceMailSystemID......0TaquaMailProvisioned...NOT_APPLICABLEopxDN..................0

Syntax Description

<key> subscriber’s directory number

Page 561: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 553990-1012-001

opxPrimaryDN...........0options................(BITFIELD) -> 0

facility...............<5f56bb8><5f56bb8> TDMFacility facilityOID...Line-2-1-27

query CFVInfoquery CFVInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows call forward variable information for a subscriber.

query CFVInfo 9724800002

<6d933c0> CFVInfokey.............."9724800002"remoteDN........."9724800010"maxActiveCalls...2 (2)serviceActive....TRUEfwdToVoiceMail...0 (0)

query SCFInfoquery SCFInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows selective call forwarding information for a subscriber.

query SCFInfo 9724800002

<6ef4280> SCFInfokey.............."9724800002"remoteDN........."9724800008"maxActiveCalls...1 (1)serviceActive....FALSEfwdToVoiceMail...0 (0)

Syntax Description

<baseDN> directory number

Syntax Description

<baseDN> directory number

Page 562: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

554 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

query CFBInfoquery CFBInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows call forward busy information for a subscriber.

query CFBInfo 9724800002

<6dc2f50> CFBInfokey.............."9724800002"remoteDN........."9724800011"maxActiveCalls...2 (2)serviceActive....TRUEfwdToVoiceMail...0 (0)

query CFDInfoquery CFDInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows call forwarding do not answer or enhanced call forwarding do not answer information, depending on which service the subscriber has.

query CFDInfo 9724800002

<6ec3cc0> CFDInfokey.............."9724800002"remoteDN........."8724800014"maxActiveCalls...2 (2)serviceActive....TRUEfwdToVoiceMail...0 (0)numberOfRings....4

Syntax Description

<baseDN> directory number

Syntax Description

baseDN directory number

Page 563: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 555990-1012-001

query CFFInfoquery CFFInfo <baseDN>

This Generic CLI command shows call forward fixed information for a subscriber.

query CFFInfo 9724800002

<6df0eb0> CFFInfokey.............."9724800002"remoteDN........."9724800012"maxActiveCalls...2 (2)serviceActive....TRUE

fwdToVoiceMail...0 (0)

Syntax Description

<baseDN> directory number

Page 564: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

556 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

query SdInfoquery SdInfo <key>

Use this command to see which subscribers have speed dial lists provisioned on the switch: queryDbKeys tSpeedDialDbMgr

This command displays the information for an object in the speed dial database.

query SdInfo 9724800007

<5f374c0> SdInfokey.................."9724800007"sharingAllowedFlag...(BITFIELD) -> 0

entryList8...........0 (0)sd8Owner............."9724800003"entryList30..........0 (0)sd30Owner............0

query SdInfo 9724800003

<5b53850> SdInfokey.................."9724800003"sharingAllowedFlag...(BITFIELD) -> 1 .SpeedDial8SharingAllowed

entryList8...........<5f0e818>

<5f0e818> Sd8Array entry_2..."9724800020" entry_3...0 entry_4..."9724800022" entry_5...0 entry_6...0 entry_7...0 entry_8...0 entry_9...0

sd8Owner.............0entryList30..........0 (0)sd30Owner............0

Syntax Description

<key> subscriber’s directory number

Page 565: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 557990-1012-001

Adding Secondary DNs to Subscribers

insertInto Subscriber <key> secondaryDNs <subKey> DirectoryNumberEntry <secondaryDN> [alertingPattern]

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a secondary DN to a Subscriber’s secondaryDn list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Syntax Description

<key> subscriber’s DN, a 10-digit DN even if the subscriber has 7-digit dialing

<subkey> The secondaryDNs list in a subscriber a sorted list. The key to this list is the secondary DN.

<secondaryDN> This attribute specifies the secondary DN.

[alertingPattern] Optional Alerting Pattern.

Values are:

• ALERTING_DEFAULT (default) — The default ringing tone on the switch, this tone is always applied to the primary DN. The tone is 2 seconds on and 4 seconds off.

• ALERTING_1 — 1second on, 1 second off, 1 second on.

• ALERTING_2 — 0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on.

• ALERTING_3 — 0.25 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 2.25 seconds on.

• ALERTING_4 — 0.25 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 1.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on

• ALERTING_5 — 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.25 seconds on, 0.25 seconds off, 0.5 seconds on

• ALERTING_3GR506 — 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.4 seconds on, 0.2 seconds off, 0.8 seconds on, 4.0 seconds off

Page 566: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

558 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The following example adds two secondary DNs to the same subscriber. Note that the 1st command does not specify an alerting pattern. After the two secondaryDNs have been added, the subscriber is queried to confirm the changes.

insertInto Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs 9724801010 DirectoryNumberEntry 9724801010<done>

insertInto Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs 9724801011 DirectoryNumberEntry 9724801011 ALERTING_3<done>

query Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs<5bf19e8>secondaryDNs...........<5ec4810>

<5ec4810> SecondDNList (2 items) ->

<5ec35a0> DirectoryNumberEntry numberString....."9724801010" cadenceProfile...ALERTING_DEFAULT

<5ee23f8> DirectoryNumberEntry numberString....."9724801011" cadenceProfile...ALERTING_3

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

Page 567: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 559990-1012-001

Removing Secondary DNs from Subscribers

deleteFrom Subscriber <key> secondaryDNs <subKey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to remove a secondary DN from a Subscriber’s secondaryDn list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following example builds on the example in Adding Secondary DNs to Subscribers, and removes the second entry from the secondaryDNs list.

After the secondaryDN has been removed, the subscriber is queried to confirm the changes.

deleteFrom Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs 9724801011<done>

query Subscriber 9724800010 secondaryDNs<5bf19e8>secondaryDNs...........<5ec4810>

<5ec4810> SecondDNList (1 items) ->

<5ec35a0> DirectoryNumberEntry numberString....."9724801010" cadenceProfile...ALERTING_DEFAULT

See “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6

Syntax Description

<key> subscriber’s DN, a 10-digit DN even if the subscriber has 7-digit dialing

<subkey> The secondaryDNs list in a subscriber is a sorted list. The key to this list is the secondary DN that you want to remove.

Page 568: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

560 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

assignSubVMassignSubVM <key> <remoteDN>

This command assigns voice mail to a subscriber.

Prerequisites for a Standard Voice Mail Subscriber

CAS trunk group (see “CAS Trunk Groups” on page 235) or Hunt Group (see “Hunt Groups” on page 273) to connect to the voice mail system (VMS). Ensure that the trunk group is:

• FXO protocol

• Bi-directional

• Loopstart signaling type

• Assigned a pilotLDN (for Hunt Groups only).

The service code (for example *83) that subscribers use to access voice mail from their telephone (see “serviceCodes” on page 382).

Route list to the VMS and add the trunk group to the route list (see “Route Lists” on page 514).

Add a subscriber, identifying the subscriber as the VMS, and use a provisioned routing number or the pilotLDN in the subscriber phone number field (see “Subscribers” on page 530).

Provision the voice mail interface (see “SMDIParms” on page 587).

assignSubVM 9724800000 9723455555

Syntax Description

<key> subscriber’s DN

<remoteDN> The DN of the trunk group that connects to the voice mail system (VMS). Assign the trunk group to a route list with the numbers that subscribers use to remotely access voice mail.

Page 569: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 561990-1012-001

deactivateSubVMdeactivateSubVM <key>

This command deactivates a subscriber’s voice mail service.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with voice mail, see “Subscribers” on page 530

deactivateSubVM 9724800000

Syntax Description

key subscriber’s DN

Page 570: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

562 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

activateCfvactivateCfv <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>

This command activates call forwarding variable. Call forwarding variable re-directs calls intended for the subscriber’s number to another number allows the subscriber to change the number.

NOTE: Call forward variable can not be activated when call forward fixed is active

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding, see “Subscribers” on page 530

activateCfv 9726785397 9726920983 5

deactivateCfvdeactivateCfv <baseDN>

This command deactivates call forwarding variable from a subscriber.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding variable, see “activateCfv” on page 562

deactivateCfv 9726785397

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

NOTE: Call forward variable can not be activated on Network Gateway or Access Gateway subscribers.

<remoteDN> directory number where call will forward.

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding variable to OPX subscribers

<maxActiveCalls> maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time

Range: 1 - 99

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

Page 571: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 563990-1012-001

activateCfbactivateCfb <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>

This command activates call forwarding busy. Call forwarding busy allows the subscriber to forward calls to another number when the subscriber is using the telephone.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding busy, see “Subscribers” on page 530

activateCfb 9726785397 9726920983 5

deactivateCfbdeactivateCfb <baseDN>

This command deactivates call forwarding busy on a subscriber.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding busy, see “activateCfb” on page 563

deactivateCfb 9726785397

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

NOTE: Call forward busy can not be activated on Network Gateway or Access Gateway subscribers.

<remoteDN> directory number where call will forward

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding busy to OPX subscribers

<maxActiveCalls> maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time

Range: 1 - 99

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

Page 572: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

564 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

activateCfdactivateCfd <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls> [numberOfRings]

This command activates call forwarding don’t answer. Call forward don’t answer redirects calls intended for the subscriber’s number to another number when the telephone rings and is not answered.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding don’t answer, see “Subscribers” on page 530

activateCfd 9726785397 9726920983 5 7

deactivateCfddeactivateCfd <baseDN>

This command deactivates call forwarding don’t answer on a subscriber.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding don’t answer, see “activateCfd” on page 564

deactivateCfd 9726785397

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

NOTE: Call forward don’t answer can not be activated on Network Gateway or Access Gateway subscribers.

<remoteDN> directory number where call will forward

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding to OPX subscribers

<maxActiveCalls> maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time

Range: 1 - 99

[<numberOfRings] Optional maximum number of rings before call is not answered

Range: 2 - 9

Default: 3

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

Page 573: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 565990-1012-001

activateCffactivateCff <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>

This command activates call forwarding fixed on a subscriber. Call forwarding fixed allows the subscriber to activate and deactivate call forwarding, but does not allow changing number without calling the service provider.

NOTE: Call forward fixed can not be activated when call forward variable is active

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding, see “Subscribers” on page 530

activateCff 9726785000 9726920900 4

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

NOTE: Call forward fixed can not be activated on Network Gateway or Access Gateway subscribers.

<remoteDN> directory DN where call will forward

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding to OPX subscribers/

<maxActiveCalls> maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time

Range: 1 - 99

Page 574: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

566 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

deactivateCffdeactivateCff <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>

This command deactivates call forwarding fixed on a subscriber.and updates the remoteDN and maxActiveCalls if they are different

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding, see “Subscribers” on page 530

deactivateCff 9726785000 "" 1

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

<remoteDN> directory number where call will forward, Use an empty string (““) to clear the remoteDN

<maxActiveCalls> maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time. A value of 1 resets the attribute to its initial state.

Page 575: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 567990-1012-001

assignCffassignCff <baseDN> <remoteDN> <maxActiveCalls>

This command modifies the remote DN and/or maxActuveCalls to a subscriber with call forwarding fixed.

NOTE: This command does not active call forward fixed on a subscriber. See “activateCff” on page 565.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding fixed, see “Subscribers” on page 530

assignCff 9726785000 9726920900 4

removeCffremoveCff <baseDN>

This command removes call forwarding fixed from a subscriber. If call forward fixed was active, it deactivates the service, and removes the call forward fixed information from the call forward fixed database.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with call forwarding, see “Subscribers” on page 530

removeCff 9726785000

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

<remoteDN> new directory number where call will forward

NOTE: the switch does not support call forwarding to OPX subscribers/

<maxActiveCalls> new maximum number of active calls that can be forwarded at the same time

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

Page 576: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

568 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

activateSCFactivateSCF <baseDN> <remoteDN>

This command activates selective call forwarding on a subscriber and sets the state to ON if there is at least one screen list entry; otherwise the state is set to OFF. See “Screen Lists” on page 415.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with selective call forwarding, see “Subscribers” on page 530, or “setSubCOS” on page 576

Subscriber with an SCFscreen list, see “assignSCF” on page 569.

activateSCF 9723201000 9727871310

deactivateSCFdeactivateSCF <baseDN>

This command deactivates selective call forwarding on a subscriber.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with selective call forwarding, see “activateSCF” on page 568

Subscriber with a screen list, See “Screen Lists” on page 415.

deactivateSCF 9723201000

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

NOTE: OPX subscribers can not activate selective call forwarding.

<remoteDN> directory number where call will forward

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

Page 577: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 569990-1012-001

assignSCFassignSCF <baseDN> <remoteDN>

This command assigns selective call forwarding on a subscriber and sets the state to OFF.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with selective call forwarding, see “Subscribers” on page 530, or “setSubCOS” on page 576

assignSCF 9723201000 9727871310

removeSCFremoveSCF <baseDN

This command removes selective call forwarding from a subscriber.

Prerequisites

Subscriber with selective call forwarding, see “Subscribers” on page 530, or “setSubCOS” on page 576

removeSCF 9723201000

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s DN

<remoteDN> directory number where call will forward

Syntax Description

<baseDN> subscriber’s number

Page 578: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

570 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

RcfInfo

RcfInfo objects are used to provision Remote Call Forwarding. Remote Call Forwarding allows all calls to a subscriber’s number to be permanently forwarded, through the Direct Distance Dialing network, to a remote number. Remote Call Forwarding is similar to call forwarding variable, but differs in the following ways:

• The forwarding is always activated.

• No physical telephone is associated with the remote call forwarding base DN.

• The subscriber Base DN provides billing information and routes the forwarded call over the correct carrier.

• CLASS and custom calling services are not assigned to the subscriber.

• Simultaneous calls may be active between the base switching office and the remote call forwarding remote DN. The remote DN should be associated with a type of hunting arrangement, if more than one simultaneous call is allowed.

• The forwarded-to number cannot be changed by the subscriber.

An RcfInfo object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key subscriber’s DN.

NOTE: Subscriber must be a pseudo-subscriber (i.e., the subscriber can not have a facility associated with it)

remoteDN directory number where call will forward

numActiveCalls Note: this field is read only.

The number of currently active calls to this DN

numAllowedCalls number of calls simultaneously active (1-N) in decimal format

Range: 1 - 99

Default: 1

rcfActivated Values are:

True (default) — Remote Call Forwarding Service is active.

False — Remote Call Forwarding Service is not active.

Page 579: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 571990-1012-001

The the Generic CLI is used for all RcfInfo commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• remoteDN

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• numAllowedCalls

The modify command applies to the following parameter:

• remoteDN

• numAllowedCalls

• rcfActivated

NOTE: An RcfInfo object cannot be deleted while calls are still active.

Prerequisites

Carrier, see “Carriers” on page 196.

Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

create RcfInfo 8174801011 4089731000 2

Page 580: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

572 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setSdEntrysetSdEntry <DN> <entry> [digits]

This command allows adding, replacing, and clearing single entries in a subscriber’s speed list database.

To clear an entry, omit the digits parameter.

Prerequisites

Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see “setSubCOS” on page 576.

setSdEntry 9724800000 7 9725552000setSdEntry 9724800000 7

deleteSdInfodeleteSdInfo DN

This command deletes all information in the speed dial database for the specified DN. This includes both Speed Dial 8 and Speed Dial 30 lists.

Prerequisites

Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see “setSubCOS” on page 576.

Speed Dial entry, see “setSdEntry” on page 572.

deleteSdInfo 9724800000

Syntax Description

<DN> subscriber’s DN

<entry> speed dial code

Range: 2 - 9, or 20 - 49

[digits] the directory number assigned to the speed dial code.

Syntax Description

DN DN associated with speed dial code

Page 581: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 573990-1012-001

clearSdListclearSdList DN Type

This command deletes all entries from a speed dial list, but not the list itself.

Prerequisites

Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see “setSubCOS” on page 576.

Speed Dial entry, see “setSdEntry” on page 572.

clearSdList 9724800001 30

setSdSharingAllowedFlagsetSdSharingAllowedFlag DN Type Status

This command allows or disallows speed dial list sharing between subscribers.

Prerequisites

Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see “setSubCOS” on page 576.

Speed Dial entry, see “setSdEntry” on page 572.and see “setSdSharingAllowedFlag” on page 573.

setSDSharingAllowedFlag 9724800001 8 ON

Syntax Description

DN subscriber’s DN

Type 8 or 30, depending on whether the speed dial code is a one- (8) or two-digit code (30)

Syntax Description

DN subscriber’s DN

Type 8 or 30, depending on whether the speed dial code is a one- (8) or two-digit code (30)

status • ON — sharing

• OFF — no sharing

Page 582: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

574 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

shareSdListshareSdList ownerDN readerDN Type

This command enables speed dial list sharing within a subscriber’s list.

NOTE: A subscriber may only share a speed dial list with one subscriber at a time. If a subscriber is already sharing a list with one person and begins sharing with another, the first sharing partner will be automatically removed from the subscriber’s sharing list.

Prerequisites

Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see “setSubCOS” on page 576.

Speed Dial entry, see “setSdEntry” on page 572.and see “setSdSharingAllowedFlag” on page 573.

shareSdList 9724800002 9724800004 8

Syntax Description

ownerDN owner of the speed dial list

readerDN sharer of the speed dial list who is not the owner

Type 8 or 30, depending on whether the speed dial code is a one- (8) or two-digit code (30)

Page 583: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 575990-1012-001

removeSdListShareremoveSdListShare readerDN Type

This command removes speed dial list sharing from a subscriber.

Prerequisites

Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

Speed dial 8 or speed dial 30 service, see “setSubCOS” on page 576.

Speed dial entry, see “setSdEntry” on page 572.

Shared speed dial list, see “setSdSharingAllowedFlag” on page 573.

removeSdListShare 9724800004 8

Syntax Description

readerDN sharer of the speed dial list who is not the owner

Type 8 or 30, depending on whether the speed dial code is a one- (8) or two-digit code (30)

Page 584: 1012 Command Line Interface

Subscribers

576 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

Tip

setSubCOSsetSubCOS <key> <services>

To view a subscriber’s current services, use the Generic CLI query command on the Subscriber object. See “Subscribers” on page 530.

This command changes a subscriber’s services. For a single service, enter its hexadecimal value. For multiple services, add the hexadecimal values together and enter the total. See “Using Hexadecimal” on page 741.

Prerequisites

Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

setSubCOS 9724408800 800

setSubRestrict

To view a subscriber’s current restrictions, use the Generic CLI query command on the Subscriber object. See “Subscribers” on page 530.

setSubRestrict <key> <restrictions>

This command changes a subscriber’s restrictions.

Prerequisites

Subscriber, see “Subscribers” on page 530

setSubRestrict 9724800000 80

Syntax Service

<key> subscriber’s DN (number)

<service> see “subscribedServices” on page 532 for a list of services

Syntax Description

<key> subscriber’s DN

<restrictions> see “subscribedServices” on page 532 for a list of services.

Page 585: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 577990-1012-001

Substitution

A substitution group is a set of the same type of front cards with one substitution manager. A PIC or PIC2 card does not require any special hardware to be a substitution manager. Other types of cards require a rear substitution card:

The LTS is a specialized rear card that can only function as a substitution card.

The TIIS, TIIS2, TIIS2-Test and DIIS rear cards are dual purpose cards that can function either as input/output cards, or as substitution cards. Configure these cards by inserting a jumper card into the Dual In-line Memory Module slot on the card.

The substitution manager provides redundancy for the substitution group. If a card in a substitution group fails, then the substitution manager substitutes for the failed card. See the T7000 Provisioning Guide for rules regarding substitution.

Front Card Rear Card

LTC LTS

TIC TIIS

TIC TIIS2

TIC TIIS2-Test

TIC2 TIIS2

TIC2 TIIS2-Test

BIC DIIS

PIC FEI, FEI2a

a. A PIC can only use two of a FEI2’s three Fast Ethernet Interfaces.

PIC2 FEIb, FEI2

b. Taqua recommends only pairing the PIC2-400 with an FEI. Also, the substitution manager in a PIC2 substi-tution group cannot have fewer FE Interfaces than any service card in that group.

Page 586: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

578 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

A substitution group has the following attributes:

All substitution provisioning is carried out with the Generic CLI, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

attribute value

key the card number of the substitution manager card

serviceCards a list of the service cards in the substitution group

sparedCard the card number of the card currently being substituted for. 0 if substitution is not taking place.

Page 587: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 579990-1012-001

Creating a Substitution Group

In order for a card to be designated as a substitution card, it must be booted, running, and have the proper type of rear card.

The required parameter for the create command is:

• key

NOTE: Unlike many other objects, in a substitution group, the key is not a name, but the card number of the substituting manager card.

create SubstitutionGroup 5

Modifying a Substitution Group

The modify command does not apply to substitution groups.

Destroying a Substitution Group

The destroy command will not succeed until all service cards have been removed from the substitution group. See “Removing a Card From a Substitution Group” on page 582.

The following example creates a substitution group with card 2 as the substitution manager, queries the group, and destroys it. See “Adding a Card To a Substitution Group” on page 580.

create SubstitutionGroup 2

query SubstitutionGroup 2<52d2b40> SubstitutionGroupkey............2 (2)serviceCards...<52d2ae0><52d2ae0> ServiceCardList valType......Unknown collection...List (0 items) ->sparedCard.....0 (0)

destroy SubstitutionGroup 2

query SubstitutionGroup 2Database item not found Existing keys:

Page 588: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

580 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding a Card To a Substitution GroupinsertInto SubstitutionGroup <key> serviceCards <subkey> ServiceCardItem <serviceCard>

The Generic CLI insertInto command adds a card to a SubstitutionGroup’s serviceCards list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

Prerequisites

Substitution group, see “Creating a Substitution Group” on page 579.

Syntax Description

<key> The name of the substitution group.

Remember, unlike other objects, the name of the substitution group is the card number of the substitution manager.

<subkey> This is the index in the service card list where you want to enter the new card.

TipUse a index of 1 to insert a service card at the start of a serviceCards List. Use a index of -1 to insert a service card at the end of the serviceCards List.

<serviceCard> The slot number of the card being added to substitution group

Range: 1-20

Page 589: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 581990-1012-001

The following example:

• creates a Substitution Group with card 1 as the substitution manager,

• adds card 2 as the 1st service card in the Substituting Group,

• checks the status of the substitution group.

create SubstitutionGroup 1

insertInto SubstitutionGroup 1 serviceCards 1 ServiceCardItem 2

query SubstitutionGroup 1

<50c9e40> SubstitutionGroupkey............1 (1)serviceCards...<50c9b30>

<50c9b30> ServiceCardList valType......Unknown collection...List (1 items) -> (1) <50c9c40> ServiceCardItem card.....................2 (2) maxSwitchbackCount.......0 (0) currentSwitchbackCount...0 (0)

sparedCard.....0 (0)

Page 590: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

582 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Removing a Card From a Substitution GroupdeleteFrom SubstitutionGroup <key> serviceCards <SubKey>

The Generic CLI deleteFrom command removes a card from a SubstitutionGroup’s serviceCards list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

The following example:

• checks the status of the substitution group. There are two service cards in this substitution group: card 2 (the 1st entry in the Service Card List) and card 6 (the 2nd entry in the Service Card List).

• removes card 2 from the substitution group. Note that the card to be removed is specified by its position in the Service Card List, not by it’s card number!

• checks the status of the substitution group to confirm that only card 6 remains in the substitution group. Note that after removing card 2, card 6 has moved up to position 1 in the Service Card List.

Syntax Description

<key> The name of the substation group.

Range: 1-20

<subKey> The index in the Service Card List oft the card being removed from the substitution group

Range: 1-20

Page 591: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 583990-1012-001

query SubstitutionGroup 1

<32b1fc0> SubstitutionGroupkey............1 (1)serviceCards...<32b1f60>

<32b1f60> ServiceCardList valType......Unknown collection...List (2 items) -> (1) <51c85a0> ServiceCardItem card.....................2 (2) maxSwitchbackCount.......0 (0) currentSwitchbackCount...0 (0)

(2) <51ccc30> ServiceCardItem card.....................6 (6) maxSwitchbackCount.......0 (0) currentSwitchbackCount...0 (0)

sparedCard.....0 (0)

deleteFrom SubstitutionGroup 1 serviceCards 1

query SubstitutionGroup 1

<32b1fc0> SubstitutionGroupkey............1 (1)serviceCards...<32b1f60>

<32b1f60> ServiceCardList valType......Unknown collection...List (1 items) -> (1) <51ccc30> ServiceCardItem card.....................6 (6) maxSwitchbackCount.......0 (0) currentSwitchbackCount...0 (0)

sparedCard.....0 (0)

Prerequisites

Substitution card in a group, see “Adding a Card To a Substitution Group” on page 580.

Page 592: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

584 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

enableRevertiveSwactenableRevertiveSwact <cardNumber>

Many users prefer to manually switch back cards during

the maintenance window. See “swact” on page 626.

This command enables one revertive switchback of a service card. Revertive switchback occurs when the formerly-failed service card reboots: the substitution manager automatically switches its activity back to the service card

NOTE: Once a card has switched back you must manually reset the switchback count. See “disableRevertiveSwact” on page 584, or “resetSwitchbackCount” on page 585

enableRevertiveSwact 3

disableRevertiveSwactdisableRevertiveSwact <cardNumber>

This command disables revertive switchback for a service card and resets the switchback count.

NOTE: Revertive switchback is disabled by default.

disableRevertiveSwact 3

Syntax Description

<cardNumber> card being enabled

Range: 1-20

Syntax Description

<cardNumber> card being disabled

Range: 1-20

Page 593: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 585990-1012-001

resetSwitchbackCountresetSwitchbackCount <cardNumber>

This command resets the switchback count for a service card without having to disable and enable the card.

resetSwitchbackCount 3

Syntax Description

<cardNumber> card being disabled

Range: 1-20

Page 594: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

586 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Voice Mail

The switch communicates with one or more Voice Mail Systems (VMSs) using:

• TCAP over an SS7 F-link. Subscribers and callers connect to the VMS over an F-link from the switch to the call answering points on the VMS, “TcapMwiParms” on page 497

• the Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) over an RS-232 serial port. Subscribers and callers connect to the VMS over voice trunks from the switch to the call answering points on the VMS, “SMDIParms” on page 587

• a SIP interface. Subscribers and callers connect to the SIP VMS over a SIP interface from the switch to the SIP VMS, “sipVMS” on page 593

NOTE: The switch does not support Generic Data Message Transport (GDMT).

Page 595: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 587990-1012-001

SMDIParms

SMDIParms objects are used to connect to a Voice Mail System (VMS) using the Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) protocol over RS-232. Subscribers and callers connect to the VMS over voice trunks from the switch to the call answering points on the VMS.

An SMDIParms object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key Name of the Message Storage and Retrieval (MRS) system

forwardNumberChoice • FIRST_FORWARDING_NUMBER — the original called number is sent over the SMDI link in the call history data

• LAST_FORWARDING_NUMBER (default)— the last forwarding number is sent over the SMDI link in the call history data

MessageWaitingIndicatorControl

• Yes (default) — the SMDI link controls the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) to identify that a message is awaiting the subscriber

• No — the SMDI link does not control the MWI and an error message is returned to the VMS

tcapMSRID TCAP Message Storage and Retrieval Identifier (MSRID) uniquely identifies each VMS providing TCAP MWI

Must be 10 digits long

Range: 0000000001-9999999999.

callHistoryDelayLimit number of seconds the switch waits before deleting/not sending a call history record

Range: 2-6

Default: 4

servingGroups name of the CAS trunk group or hunt group interfacing with the VMS

cardNumberOfRS232Port rear card number to which the SMDI connects using the RS232 port

Range: 1 - 20

Page 596: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

588 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

baudRate The speed of the connection between the voice mail system and the switch. This must match the baud rate set on the VMS itself.

NOTE: The switch uses 1 start bit, 7data bits, an even parity bit, and 1 stop bit.

C A U T I O N

Software flow control tends to cause problems above 9600 baud, so limit communications speed to 9600 baud.

• 1200

• 2400

• 4800

• 9600 (default)

• 14400

• 19200

• 28800

• 38400

• 56000

softwareFlowControl • Yes (default)— to control the rate of message transmission between the switch and the VMS using XON/XOFF control characters

• No — no software flow control

modemDialNumber Optional DN of the VMS. Used to contact the VMS via modem.

Length: 7 - 11 digits

standard • GR283_ISSUE_1 (Default)— for a VMS that meets General Requirements (GR)-283, Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI), Issue 1

• TR283_ISSUE_2 — for a VMS that meets Technical Requirements (TR)-283, Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI), Generic Performance Requirements, Issue 2

MWIT1Timer The number of seconds that the switch maintains a copy of information in the original request and associate it with the transaction until the MWI control attempt is completed or the mwiT1Timer expires.

Range: 2-6

Default: 4

Attribute Description

Page 597: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 589990-1012-001

The the Generic CLI is used for all SMDIParms commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• tcapMSRID

• cardNumberOfRS232Port

The optional parameters for the create command are:

• forwardNumberChoice

• MessageWaitingIndicatorControl

• callHistoryDelayLimit

• baudRate

• softwareFlowControl

• modemDialNumber

• MWIT1Timer

• standard

The insertInto and deleteFrom commands apply to the following parameter:

• servingGroups

See “Adding a Trunk Group to servingGroups” on page 592, and “Removing a Trunk Group from servingGroups” on page 592.

create SMDIParms VMS01 0000000001 19create SMDIParms VMS02 0000012345 1 LAST_FORWARDING_NUMBER YES

defaultMailboxNPA Optional NPA added to 7-digit calls or that replaces the existing NPA in 10-digit calls.

Length: 3 digits

numMailboxDigits The number of digits used by the switch to complete the call to the VMS.

Value: 7 - 10 digits

Default: 7

Attribute Description

Page 598: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

590 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

query SMDIParmsquery SMDIParms <MSRName>

This Generic CLI command shows the parameters of a Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) between the switch and a Message Storage and Retrieval (MRS).

query SMDIParms Zeus******* SMDI Parms *******MSR Name: ZeusforwardingNumberChoice: 1messageWaitingIndicatorControl: 1MSRID: 001tcapMSRID: 1234567001callHistoryDelayLimit: 4servingGroup: 0cardNumberOfRS232Port: 1baudRate: 9600softwareFlowControl: 1modemDialNumber: (null)mwiT1Timer: 4standard is GR283_ISSUE_1

Syntax Description

<MSRName> Message Storage and Retrieval name (the name of the voice mail system)

Page 599: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 591990-1012-001

Prerequisites if connecting to VMS using SMDI

CAS trunk group or Hunt Group to connect to the VMS, see “Route Lists” on page 514

Trunks for the trunk/ hunt group, see “Adding Facilities to a CAS Trunk Group” on page 251.

Set the trunk group’s attributes: FXO protocol, bi-directional, loopstart signaling type, assigned a pilotLDN (for Hunt Groups only), see “Route Lists” on page 514.

Service code that subscribers use to access voice mail from their telephone, see “serviceCodes” on page 382

Route list to the VMS, see “Route Lists” on page 514

Trunk group to the route list, see “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527

Subscriber, identifying the subscriber as the VMS, and use a provisioned routing number or the pilotLDN in the subscriber phone number field, see “Subscribers” on page 530

Prerequisites if connecting to VMS using an SS7 F-link

To provision voice mail for a subscriber use the following process:

Dependent Commands

By adding VMS, you are making voice mail available to be associated with subscribers, see “Subscribers” on page 530.

Step Action

1 Provision an SS7 trunk group to connect to the VMS and add trunks to the trunk group, see “Route Lists” on page 514

2 Provision the service code, for example *83, that subscribers use to access voice mail from their telephone, see “serviceCodes” on page 382

3 Provision a route list to the VMS and add the trunk group to the route list, see “Route Lists” on page 514

4 Add the subsystem number to the SCCP on the local node, see “Adding SCCP Subsystems to an SCCPNode” on page 485

5 Add a TCAP service with MWI, see “TCAPServiceGTT” on page 488 and “TCAPServicePCSSN” on page 492.

6 Assign subscribers voice mail service, see “assignSubVM” on page 560.

Page 600: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

592 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Adding a Trunk Group to servingGroupsinsertInto SMDIParms <key> servingGroups <subkey> <subvalue>

Use the Generic CLI insertInto command to add a Trunk Group to the servingGroups list. See the “insertInto Example” on page 18 for a detailed explanation of this command.

insertInto SMDIParms VMS001 servingGroups SWB1 1234

Removing a Trunk Group from servingGroupsdeleteFrom SMDIParms <key> servingGroups <subkey>

Use the Generic CLI deleteFrom command to add a Trunk Group from the servingGroups list. See the “deleteFrom example” on page 21 for a detailed explanation of this command.

deleteFrom SMDIParms VMS001 servingGroups 1234

Syntax Description

<key> SMDIParms name

<subkey> This attribute specifies the Trunk Group that you are adding to the servingGroups list.

<subvalue> The MSRID for the trunk group in the servingGroups list.

Syntax Description

<key> SMDIParms name

<subkey> This is the MSRID of the trunk group in the servingGroups list of the Trunk Group you want to remove.

Page 601: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 593990-1012-001

sipVMS

A sipVMS object connects to the T7000 using IP trunk groups.

An sipVMS object has the following attributes:

Attribute Description

key 10-digit DN used to access the SIP VMS

vmsName name of the SIP voice mail system connected to the switch

voiceMailDNOption Choice for RemoteDN or "leave-to number" for calls forwarded to Voice Mail. Values are:

• SubscriberDN —

• remoteDN —

servingIpTrkGrp Name of the serving IP trunk group.

accessDN DN for retrieving voice messages.

Length: 3 - 10 digits.

subscriptionOption Option to turn on/off sending SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail.

Values:

• No (default)

• Yes

subscriptionInterval Refresh interval for sending SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail.

Range: 30 minutes - 4320 minutes (3 days)

Default: 60 minutes.

subscriptionAudit Run the MWI Subscription Audit on this Voice Mail System. Values are:

• Disabled — Do not run an audit on this subscriber.

• Enabled — Run an audit on this subscriber. Send SUBSCRIB or UNSUBSCRIBE messages as needed.

pendingSubscriptionCount

The number of subscribers checked each audit period.

Range: 10 - 1000

Default: 100

tcapMSRID MSRID for sending TCAP VM-related messages to subtending nodes.

TaquaMailAddress The IP address or name of the TaquaMail server.

TaquaMailPilotProvisioned

Note: this field is read only.

Status of provisioning for the voicemail system.

Page 602: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

594 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

The the Generic CLI is used for all sipVMS commands, see “Using Generic CLI Commands” on page 6.

The required parameters for the create command are:

• key

• vmsName

• servingIPTrkGrp

Adding SIP Voice Mail Process

To provision voice mail for a subscriber, use the process detailed in the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

create sipVMS 9726809999 sipVM1 ngw_iptg10

Dependent Commands

By creating a Voice Mail System, you are making voice mail service available to subscribers.

query sipVMSquery sipVMS <key>

This is the generic CLI command, showing the attributes configured on the VMS that connects to the switch using IP trunk groups.

query sipVMS 9726921910<2d3c068> sipVMSkey........................"9726921910"vmsName...................."sipVMS1"voiceMailDNOption..........SubscriberDNservingIpTrkGrp............"ipgrpVM"accessDN..................."*09"subscriptionOption.........NosubscriptionInterval.......3c (60)subscriptionAudit..........EnabledpendingSubscriptionCount...64 (100)tcapMSRID.................."1234567001"TaquaMailAddress...........0

Syntax Description

<key> 10-digit DN used to access the VMS

Page 603: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual 595990-1012-001

Tip

setSubVMI

The Generic CLU query command shows the status of a subscriber’s voiceMailIndicator as 0-no mail or 1-new mail. See “query Subscriber” on page 552.

setSubVMI <key> <value>

This command changes a subscriber's Message Waiting Indicator manually. You can clear the VMWI and stutter tone or set VMWI, stutter tone, and abbreviated ring.

C A U T I O N

This command overrides the connecting voice mail system’s messaging.

Prerequisites

VMS attached to the switch, see “SMDIParms” on page 587

Subscriber with voice mail, see “Subscribers” on page 530

setSubVMI 9724800001 ON

Syntax Description

<key> the subscriber’s telephone number

<value> • ON — sets the subscriber’s CPE to indicate there is new voice mail, including: stutter dial tone, VMWI, and an abbreviated ring.

• OFF — resets the subscriber’s CPE by removing stutter dial tone and the Voice Mail Waiting Indicator (VMWI).

Page 604: 1012 Command Line Interface

Voice Mail

596 T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

sendVMWIsendVMWI <key> <value> [updateFlag]

This command sends a VMWI on or VMWI off message to a subscriber CPE. This command only controls the VMWI and abbreviated ring, and does not affect stutter tone. You can also use it to send a refresh message or immediately send the VMWI message.

Prerequisites

VMS attached to the switch, see “SMDIParms” on page 587

Subscriber with voice mail, see “Subscribers” on page 530

sendVMWI 9724800001 ON R

Syntax Description

<key> the subscriber’s telephone number

<value> • ON — sends the VMWI on message to the subscriber’s CPE.

• OFF — sends the VMWI off message to the subscriber’s CPE.

This command does not affect the status of the voiceMailIndicator attribute in the “Subscribers” object.

[updateFlag] • R — the refresh message updates the subscribers’ CPEs with the VMWI. This ensures the correct status of a CPE, if the VMWI is lost for any reason.

• I — sends the immediate VMWI on message to the CPE.(default)

Page 605: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 597990-1012-001

6Maintenance

Tip

Maintenance commands make changes to the T7000 database, its components, or functions of the T7000.

General Maintenance

The following commands are general utility commands:

addTask

To view all the tasks currently scheduled on the switch, see “querySchedule” on page 81

addTask <task name> <mo:dd:hh:mm> <"command param_1...param_n"> <card number> [period]

This command adds a task to the schedule. The maximum tasks you can add is 32.

Syntax Description

task name uniquely identifies a task, may be any string

mo:dd:hh:mm Specify the time a task should start. The start time can be:

• mo:dd:hh:mm — month, day, hour, and minute all specified

• hh:mm — month and day assumed current system month and day, hour and minute are specified.

• now — start time is immediate

<"command param_1...param_n">

Specify the action executed by the scheduler at the start time. This is a CLI command in double quotes. Entered the command as on the command line. Operating system commands, CLI commands, and scripts are valid values.

NOTE: No validation is done for commands.

<card number> number of the card on which to perform the task or ALL to perform the task on all cards

Page 606: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

598 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

addTask noFlags 03:28:10:00 “allFlags” 4 once

[period] Select period, or default to one time.

• once — The default if no period is entered, task will run once.

• xxxx — User-specified where xxxx is some decimal number of minutes

• hourly — Task runs hourly from the start time.

• daily — Task runs daily from the start time.

• weekly — Task runs weekly from the start time.

• monthly — Task runs monthly from the start time.

• yearly — Task runs yearly from the start time.

Syntax Description

Page 607: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 599990-1012-001

Tip

removeTask

To view all of the tasks currently scheduled on the switch, see “querySchedule” on page 81

removeTask <taskName>

This command removes a task from the scheduler.

.

Prerequisites

Task, see “addTask” on page 597

removeTask dbflash

dbFlashdbFlash [<cardNumber> | <ALL>]

This command saves the provisioned database to flash memory.

dbFlash 1dbFlash ALL

Syntax Description

<taskName> . The task name of one of the tasks in the scheduler.

Syntax Description

[<cardNumber> | <ALL>]

without an additional parameter, the command saves the database of the current card to flash memory.

• cardNumber(1 - 20) — Saves the databases of the specified card to flash memory.

• ALL — Saves the databases of all cards to flash memory.

Page 608: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

600 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

dbFlashSizedbFlashSize

This command details the flash memory size for each database.

NOTE: The output from the following example has been edited to fit on a single page.

dbFlashSizeFlashname: TCAPServices PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160Flashname: SCCPDb PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160Flashname: FTRSPrfileDb PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160Flashname: FTRSPTransDb PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160Flashname: AlarmDefs PackedSize: 2f35 TravSize: 99f0 NoTravSize: 99f0Flashname: MemoryAuditDb PackedSize: 144 TravSize: 2c0 NoTravSize: 2c0Total appDb:PackedSize = 7a91RealSize(references traversed) = 12460RealSize(references not traversed) = 12460Flashname: CFVINFO PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160Flashname: CFFINFO PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160Flashname: SPDLINFO PackedSize: e0 TravSize: 160 NoTravSize: 160Total servDb:PackedSize = 540RealSize(references traversed) = 840RealSize(references not traversed) = 840

setDbFlashPadSizesetDbFlashPadSize <padInBytes>

This command configures the availableMemoryPad variable. By default, the availableMemoryPad is 1000000 bytes.

Before a DB flash is attempted, this variable is used to compute the amount of available free memory, to ensure that the switch has enough free memory to complete the DB flash, as well as any other requests for memory during the DB flash. If sufficient memory is not available, the DB flash operation is aborted.

setDbFlashPadSize 1002000

Syntax Description

<padInBytes> The new value of the availableMemoryPad variable

Range: 1000 - 5000000

Page 609: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 601990-1012-001

setServiceSaveIntervalsetServiceSaveInterval <periodInMilliseconds>

This command sets the db Flash interval.

setServiceSaveInterval 180000000 Service Database flash interval changed

rmFlashrmFlash [cardNumber | ALL]

This command removes the appDatabase and srvDatabase from flash memory.

rmFlash 1rmFlash ALL

Syntax Description

periodInMilliseconds The number of milliseconds that the archiver waits before checking for changes in the database. The default is 10 minutes.

NOTE: Databases are not flashed unless a change is detected.

Syntax Description

[cardNumber | ALL] without an additional parameter, the command removes the database of the current card from flash memory.

• cardNumber(1 - 20) — Removes the databases of a specific card from flash memory.

• ALL — Removes the databases of all cards from flash memory.

Page 610: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

602 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

Tip

utime

Enter the utime command twice in succession: once to clear the current counts, and again to show the most recent CPU usage.

utime

This command displays a snapshot of the amount of CPU time each process has used since the last time the utime command was executed.

72547873ms (sysclicks=1193) 811819957 [isr] 0 251240871 [maddog] 1 0 initd 2 628062 rpcd 5 0 testd 6 1022369332 memd 7 0 smregd 8 0 xsh 9 0 getty a 12422110 net_datalink b 0 eigwd c 2032648 net_status d 43460 bootp_client e 0 ttyMon f 3340576 telnetd10 437 environd11 0 traced12 0 cat13 41223 smSubd14 9008449 Mgmt_Daemon

loadAudio

Audio files are not replicated databases: be sure to load the audio file on all of the cards in the shelf.

loadAudio <name> <fileName>

This command adds an announcement file to a card on the switch.

loadAudio allCircuitsBusy 6/allCktsBusy

Syntax Description

<name> name of audio file

<filename> file name of audio file

Page 611: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 603990-1012-001

Tip

Tip

unloadAudio

Audio files are not replicated databases: be sure to remove the audio file from all of the cards in the shelf.

unloadAudio <name>

This command removes an announcement file from a card on the switch.

C A U T I O N

Removing announcements may negatively affect operations!

unloadAudio allCircuitsBusy

ls

Valid devices are 6 (RAM), E (Execute), and F (flash)

ls <dev>

This command lists the contents of the specified device.

ls f 4420000 16a 1 1 f/platform 2/28/2007 16:53:44 4440000 7 1 1 f/noboot 2/15/2007 12:33:41 4460000 0 1 1 f/isu.a 4/25/2006 12:25:17 4480000 7 1 1 f/crash 2/15/2007 12:35:11 4500000 1ea 1 1 f/srvDatabase 3/26/2007 18:51:10

Syntax Description

<dev> device name, for example:

• e — device e (code versions)

• f — flash

• 6 — device 6

Page 612: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

604 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

pingping <host> [interface]

This command verifies the IP connection to a card or to a computer using the card’s or the computer’s IP address. It sends one ICMP ECHO request packet and waits for a reply.

ping 10.1.140.127Host 10.1.140.127 is alive, roundtrip delay = 4ms

Syntax Description

<host> The IP address of the card or the computer to be verified, in dotted quad form.

[interface] Optional interface parameter, one of

• eth0

• voip0

• voip1

eth0 is valid for all card types, voip0 and voip1 are only valid for a PIC card. Default is eth0.

Page 613: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 605990-1012-001

ipconfigipconfig

This command shows the IP connections of the switch to other devices and to the OM Server.

IP Configuration Device eth0 BOOTP reply received: True Vendor options = 1 My IP = 10.1.135.250 Host IP = 10.1.135.50 Default Gateway IP = 10.1.135.1 DNS IP = 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 Root Path = Lubbock\tic3

ps

This command lists the processes currently running. For each process, the command displays the Process ID (PID), the parent process PID, the process priority, state (numeric), state (symbolic), stack base, stack length, stack margin, timestamp (last time the Pid became RDY), utime (number of ticks the Pid has consumed), and Pid Name).

ps77:59:57.952 (280797952) <10bca300> 3/70/25% hi(<=3)/lo/sISR (2 hISR) state sbase slen mrgn timstmp utime name 0 0 f 1 Rdy d25ce0 e2c af0 0 39cd05ea [maddog] 1 0 1 d3e818 Rcv d3e7e0 de4 790 184a3a7 1cbed78 initd 2 0 1 d3fc28 Rcv d3fbf0 dcc c04 10bc9215 2242b4 rpcd 5 0 2 da4138 Rcv da4100 d50 c90 a46 19c testd 6 0 e 1 Rdy d509f0 d84 a48 174 58152b4f memd 7 20 0 e69e9c Syn ea4670 b30 ad0 183840b f9 smregd 8 9 3 d27670 Syn 26e97b0 c48 848 b2538dc 7b42 xsh 9 0 2 d6c2c4 Sus d6c290 bb8 7d8 18e4a7b 6f0a getty a 0 0 d8e8f8 Rcv d8e8c0 3de8 39e0 10bca2ff 1d205a4 net_datalink

Page 614: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

606 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

forceDbMasterforceDbMaster <cardNumber | "best">

This command forces a card to become the dbMaster card.

C A U T I O N

The forceDbMaster command will briefly disrupt SS7 traffic.

forceDbMaster 2

restoreDb

Use “queryDb” on page 83 to list the names of the databases.

restoreDb <all |dbmgr>

This command forces the dbMaster to restore a single database or the appDatabase and srvDatabase files (the configuration) to all cards on the switch. Use this command when restoring a database.

restoreDb allrestoreDb tSubscriberDbMgr

Syntax Description

cardNumber | "best"

• cardNumber — the number of the card you want to be the dbMaster

• “best” — uses system criteria to select the best DB Master (non-substitution, fastest, first, lowest card number)

Syntax Description

<all | dbmgr> • all — restores the appDatabase configuration from the dbMaster

• dbmgr — the name of the database to be restored.

Page 615: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 607990-1012-001

resetHostdProxyDbresetHostdProxyDb <type>

This command resets the switch connections in the HostD Proxy table. The HOSTD process will re-establish the connection(s) automatically. See “queryHostdProxyDb” on page 81.

resetHostdProxyDb localhostd proxy db reset for local card only

resetHostdProxyDb allhostd proxy db reset for all cards

Syntax Description

<type> the type of reset to perform

• local — resets the switch connections only on the card where the command was entered.

all — resets the switch connections on all cards

Page 616: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

608 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

computeSipPasswordcomputeSipPassword <UserName> <Password>

This command computes the SIP password from a given User Name and Password. The switch does not store passwords in clear text. Instead, the switch stores the result of an MD5 encryption algorithm in the subscriber record. This command re-computes the MD5 encryption and prints the result. If a SIP subscriber is having difficulty completing the Registration process, this command can be used to verify that the password provisioned in the subscriber’s SIP phone is the same as the password provisioned in the switch.

computeSipPassword 9726921864 "Pa55W0rd"User = 9726921864, Password = Pa55W0rd,A1 = ea47349d11c03158db17682cb3f8b049

displaySubscriberPwdisplaySubscriberPw <DN>

This command displays a encrypted password of a SIP subscriber. Use this command in conjunction with “computeSipPassword” on page 608 to debug SIP Registration problems.

displaySubscriberPw 9725552001Password for 9725552001 is [ 65bca0dd95368f046365c4851888ee54 ]

Syntax Description

<UserName> User Name — the 10 digit Directory Number of the subscriber.

<Password> Password — the same string the subscriber entered into his SIP phone. Enclose a multi-word string within quotes.

Syntax Description

<DN> Directory Number — the 10 digit Directory Number of the IP subscriber.

Page 617: 1012 Command Line Interface

General Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 609990-1012-001

Tip

bannerbanner <word> [word...]

Use banner to denote different phases of a script. See “Using Scripts” on page 31.

This commands prints messages to the console in large block letters. The command supports word wrap, and it converts alphabetic characters to lower case before printing them. Any character not understood is replaced by a blank

NOTE: The command shell intercept various characters before executing any command. See “Command Syntax” on page 26.

banner start mtp3 config

X X X XXXXX X X X X XXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXX XXXXX X X X X X XX X XX XX X XXXX XXX XXX X XXXX XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XXXX XXX XXXX X XXX X X XXX XXXX XXXXX X X

XXX X XXX XXXX X X XXXXX X XXX X XXXX X X X XX X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X XXX XXXXX X X X XXX XXXX X XXX

Syntax Description

<word> A word to be printed. [a-z] | [0-9] | [!#*-_+=,.?";]

Page 618: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

610 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Call Processing Maintenance

traceCpStatestraceCpStates [<startChannel | oid> [idle | exception]] |[<startChannel | oid > <endChannel | oid> [idle | exception]]

This command without parameters shows all devices on a card not idle. Use this command to see how many calls are active on a card or facility.

traceCpStates

-Chnl-Type-------Sig State---CallModel State--CpState (Cnts)--OtherLegOid 048 lpStartADa offHook O_ACTIVE ACTIVE Line-2-1-27 050 lpStartADa offHook T_ACTIVE ACTIVE Line-0-1-27

Syntax Description

<startChannel | oid>

Optional start channel of span/DS3/FE IF OID. See “OID” on page 30.

<endchannel | oid>

Optional end channel of trunk/span/FE IF OID. See “OID” on page 30.

Default is last channel of the span/DS3/FE IF. If present, must be higher than the start channel

[state] Optional state. Can be one of:

• idle — only display idle channels

• exception — only display channels in the exception state

Page 619: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 611990-1012-001

traceCalledPty traceCalledPty <CalledParty | off>

This command enables message tracing for ISUP on a called party’s number. Because tracing uses processor cycles, enabling it could affect run-time performance.

NOTE: This command enables ISUP tracing only on the card where the command is entered

traceCalledPtyInvalid Number of arguments (0) supplied.Usage: traceCalledPty <CalledParty | off> off Reset the CalledPartyCurrent CalledParty Being traced : NonetraceCalledPty 9724804001

traceCallingPtytraceCallingPty <CallingParty | off>

This command enables message tracing for ISUP on a calling party’s number. Because tracing uses processor cycles, enabling it could affect run-time performance.

NOTE: This command enables ISUP tracing only on the card where the command is entered.

traceCallingPty 2147658891

Syntax Description

<CalledParty | off> • called party number

• off — disables the trace

Syntax Description

<CallingParty | off>

• calling party number

• off — disables the trace

Page 620: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

612 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

roverrover <OriginatingSubscriber> <DialedDigits> [NODIP]

This command implements Taqua’s Routing Translations Verification (RoVer) feature. RoVer allows a crafts person to place a virtual call between a calling party and a called party and to observe the switch translations used to place the call.

Syntax Description

<OriginatingSubscriber> DN of the calling party. RoVer supports any Subscriber DNs assigned to a Line, an FXO trunk group, a SIP Access Gateway trunk group, a G303 RDT and CRV, or an MGCP Termination in the subscriber record. Note that the subscriber DN may or may not be assigned an Application Server trunk group.

You can also trace the routing from an incoming Trunk Group. Rover supports subscriber Trunk Groups that use the PRI, DID or FXO protocol. Use the Trunk Group key in place of the Originating Subscriber (see “Incoming Trunk Group Call” on page 615).

<DialedDigits> The digits dialed to place the call.

Use a comma to separate a service code from the destination digits, or to separate the destination digits from the account code (see “Account Code” on page 624).

RoVer supports seven and ten digit dialing, international dialing, and most services, such as speed dialing (see “Speed Dial” on page 617), and Account Codes (see “Account Code” on page 624, “Missing Account Code” on page 625, and “Wrong Account Code” on page 625).

NOTE, however, Rover is primarily a route verification tool. It does not work with the following originating services:

• CALEA

• CID Block

• Revertive Call

[NODIP] Optional parameter to handle database dips for 800 calls or Local Number Portability enquiries. Values are:

• nodip— the appropriate database will not be accessed

• dip (default) — the appropriate database will be accessed.

Page 621: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 613990-1012-001

RoVer reports the results of the virtual call using the following categories:

• Preliminary Information

• Collected Digits

• interDigitTimeout (if applicable)

• FTRS Translation results (if applicable) See “Office Pattern FTRS Translation” on page 619 and “FTRS Translation, Multiple Routing Attempts” on page 620

• type of digits collected (if applicable)

• INFORMATION COLLECTED

• Origination Address

• Carrier

• Destination Address

• OLI — ISUP Originating Line Information Parameter (if applicable)

• CSI— Carrier Selection Information

• Nature of Address (if applicable)

• SCREENING

• call Type

• screening results for originator

• screening results for destination

• Originating Rate Center (if applicable)

• ROUTING

• routing result (line and trunk or the reason for failure to route)

NOTE: Rover can not make a virtual call if the subscriber’s facility is out of service. This applies to physical facilities as well as virtual facilities, such as GR-303, MGCP, or SIP.

NOTE: Rover runs until a facility is selected that would normally complete the call. No terminating services (such as Telemarketer Screening, Selective Call Reject or Anonymous Call Reject) are ever triggered by rover.

Page 622: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

614 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Example RoVer Output

The following examples are meant to be illustrative, not exhaustive

Successful Line to Line Callrover 9724800000 9724800001 nodip

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 9724800001 - without dip ) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 9724800001, type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800001 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724800001) Originating Rate Center: rc1 Terminating Rate Center: rc1 Skipping LNP dip Screening passed: call type: local (0)ROUTING 9724800001 ... Routing on digits: (9724800001) Routing on subscriber 9724800001 Routing result = Line-1-1-27 (0x5b18001), trunk group/media/subscriber = 9724800001 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Line-0-1-27

Page 623: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 615990-1012-001

Incoming Trunk Group Callrover SWB 9724800000

Route Verification (SWB dialing 9724800000) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Clear Channel Translation for Trunk-14-1-2: switchProfile is '(null)', subscriber/trunkGrp profileKey is '(null)'INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724805000 Destination Address: 9724800000 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724805000) Screening on destination: (9724800000) Terminating Rate Center: rc1 Screening passed: call type: local (0)ROUTING 9724800000 ... Routing on digits: (9724800000) Routing on subscriber 9724800000 Routing result = Line-0-1-2 (0x4218000), trunk group/media/subscriber = 9724800000 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Trunk-14-1-2

Page 624: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

616 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Line to Line Call, Not Enough Destination Digits

In this example, only 9 destination digits are input.

rover 9724800000 972480001 nodip

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 972480001 - without dip ) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Inter-digit timeout : collected digits-> 972480001INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 972480001 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0xfe ()SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (972480001) Originating Rate Center: rc1 Screening passed: call type: Unknown (15)ROUTING 972480001 ... Routing on digits: (972480001) CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 972480001 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Line-0-1-27

Page 625: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 617990-1012-001

Speed DialsetSubCOS 9724800010 400000<done>

setSdEntry 9724800010 2 9724800003<done>

querySdInfo 9724800010

key......................9724800010sharingAllowedFlag.......0 speedDial8Sharing....OFF speedDial30Sharing...OFFentryList8...............0x80cd5c22 2....9724800003 3.... 4.... 5.... 6.... 7.... 8.... 9....entryList30..............0x0

rover 9724800010 2

Route Verification (9724800010 dialing 2) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Inter-digit timeout : collected digits-> 2INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800010 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800003 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800010) Screening on destination: (9724800003) Originating Rate Center: rc1 Terminating Rate Center: rc1 Screening passed: call type: local (0)ROUTING 9724800003 ... Routing on digits: (9724800003) Routing on subscriber 9724800003 Routing result = Line-3-1-27 (0x5b18003), trunk group/media/subscriber = 9724800003 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Line-10-1-27

Page 626: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

618 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Line to Line Call, No Route to Destination

In this example, the switch does not have a route to the destination digits.

rover 9724800000 4089731234 nodip

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 4089731234 - without dip ) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 4089731234, type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 4089731234 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (4089731234) Originating Rate Center: rc1 Screening passed: call type: interLata (2), Carrier: 0333, Screening PCAC from carrier = (null)ROUTING 4089731234 ... Routing on carrier: (0333) CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 4089731234 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Line-0-1-27

Successful SIP to SIP Callrover 8174802345 8174802346

Route Verification Begins:INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 8174802345 Destination Address: 8174802346 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (8174802345) Screening on destination: (8174802346) Screening passed: call type: localROUTING 8174802346 ... Routing result = IPTrunk-26-1-20 (0x544801a), trunk group/media/subscriber = ipgrp4 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for IPTrunk-25-1-20

Page 627: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 619990-1012-001

Inter LATA Call With No Carrier Assignmentrover 8174802346 2145551212

Route Verification Begins:INFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 8174802346 Destination Address: 2145551212 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (8174802346) Screening on destination: (2145551212)

Screening Failed, Carrier required for Inter LATA Calls. Error during screening. Abandoned. Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for IPTrunk-26-1-20

Office Pattern FTRS Translationrover 8174801000 8174802346

Route Verification Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Start Pattern Match Trunk-0-3-20 -> Office FTRS profile '(null)', subscriber/trunk group FTRS profile 'IAD_Basic_Res' Dialed digits -> 8174802346 -> matched digits pattern -> NXXNXXXXXX Digits collected -> 8174802346 - type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 8174801000 Destination Address: 8174802346 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x91 (IAD call)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (8174801000) Screening on destination: (8174802346)ROUTING 8174802346 ... Routing result = IPTrunk-2-1-20 (0x5448002), trunk group/media/subscriber = ipgrp4 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for Trunk-0-3-20

Page 628: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

620 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

FTRS Translation, Multiple Routing Attemptsrover 9724800000 8174800000

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 8174800000) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Start Pattern Match, originating on Line-0-1-10 Office FTRS profile '(null)', Subscriber/Trunk group FTRS profile 'testClgdb' Dialed digits (8174800000) matched this pattern: 817480XXXX /CLGDB pre1 /REM 1, 10 /INS 1,9724809999 = R817480 /ANI XXXXXXX Destination digits (9724809999) after FTRS Digits collected 9724809999, type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724809999 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724809999) Screening passed: call type: local (0)ROUTING 9724809999 ... Routing on route list ipR972 ... Routing on FTRS route list R817480 Routing on Tandem Carrier/TrkGrp/Ani (FTRS) R817480 Routing on NANP/LNP/CARRIER (FTRS) R817480 Routing on digits: (9724809999) Using route list ipR972 CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 9724809999 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Line-0-1-10

Page 629: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 621990-1012-001

800 Call With No Carrier Assignmentrover 9724800000 18006921864

Route Verification Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected -> 18006921864 - type longDistanceINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 8006921864 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x103 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (8006921864) Screening passed: call type: SAC, Carrier: 0110, Carrier Identification Code is not in Carrier database.ROUTING 8006921864 ... CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 8006921864 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for Line-0-2-5

Carrier Routing Restrictionsmodify PRITrunkGroup SWB restrictions OS_ONLY 1<done>

rover 9724800000 2144800000

Route Verification Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected -> 2144800000 - type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Destination Address: 2144800000 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (2144800000) Screening passed: call type: localROUTING 2144800000 ... Routing on route list Test1 ... Trunk Group 'SWB' restricted from use (0x80). Continuing... CM Route Failed, reason: UNABLE_TO_ROUTE (-1), digits: 2144800000 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for Line-0-1-2

Page 630: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

622 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Multiple Routing Attempts - 1rover 9724800000 2144800000

Route Verification Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected -> 2144800000 - type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Destination Address: 2144800000 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (2144800000) Screening passed: call type: localROUTING 2144800000 ... Routing on route list Test1 ... Routing result = NETWORK_CONGESTION, trunk group/media/subscriber = SWB Route Selection returned : 0, route result = -2, for (2144800000) Routing result = Trunk-40-1-2 (0x4214028), trunk group/media/subscriber = SWB2 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for Line-0-1-2

Page 631: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 623990-1012-001

Multiple Routing Attempts - 2rover 9724800000 2144800005

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 2144800005) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 2144800005, type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Destination Address: 2144800005 OLI: 0 CSI: 0 (no indication) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (2144800005) Screening passed: call type: local (0)ROUTING 2144800005 ... Routing on route list Test1 ... Routing on digits: (2144800005) Trunk Group 'SWB' restricted from use (0x80). Continuing... Routing result = Trunk-2-1-2 (0x4214002), trunk group/media/subscriber = SWB2 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Line-0-1-2

Page 632: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

624 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Account Coderover 9724800000 9724800007,123

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 9724800007,123) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 9724800007, type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800007 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724800007) Screening passed: call type: local (0)DIGIT COLLECTION... Account code found for Collected Digits : '123'ROUTING 9724800007 ... Routing on route list StephenJames ... Routing on digits: (9724800007) Routing on subscriber 9724800007 Routing result = Trunk-0-2-5 (0x8514000), trunk group/media/subscriber = AFCUMC1 Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Line-0-2-5

Page 633: 1012 Command Line Interface

Call Processing Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 625990-1012-001

Missing Account Coderover 9724800000 9724800007

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 9724800007) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 9724800007, type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800007 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724800007) Screening passed: call type: local (0)DIGIT COLLECTION... Error (ACCT_CODE_FAILURE) during screening. Call abandoned. Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Line-0-2-5

Wrong Account Coderover 9724800000 9724800007,234

Route Verification (9724800000 dialing 9724800007,234) Begins:DIGIT COLLECTION... Digits collected 9724800007, type tenDigitDialINFORMATION COLLECTED... Origination Address: 9724800000 Carrier: 0333 (WorldComm) Destination Address: 9724800007 OLI: 0 CSI: 1 (presubscribed but not input) Nature of Address: 0x3 (National number)SCREENING... Screening for subscriber: (9724800000) Screening on destination: (9724800007) Screening passed: call type: local (0)DIGIT COLLECTION... Account code not found for Collected Digits : '234' Error (ACCT_CODE_FAILURE) during screening. Call abandoned. Route Verification CompleteRoute Verification complete for originating facility Line-0-2-5

Page 634: 1012 Command Line Interface

Substitution Maintenance

626 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Substitution Maintenance

swactswact <fromCard> <toCard>

Swact stands for Switch Activity. This command switches call processing:

• from a service card to the substitution manager

• from the substitution manager back to the service card.

NOTE: Only switch back to the service card after all issues are resolved and the card is restored.

Assume that cards 1 - 3 are in a substitution group and that card 1 is the substitution manager.

To manually switch to the substitution manager from card 3 (switchover):

swact 3 1

To manually switch from the substitution manager to 3 (switchback):

swact 1 3

Syntax Description

<fromCard> the card from which you want to switch

<toCard> the card to which you want to switch

Page 635: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Group Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 627990-1012-001

Trunk Group Maintenance

The following commands perform maintenance on trunk groups.

restartPRIrestartPRI <TrunkGroupName> <restartClass> [ChannelID]

This command sends a restart command to the trunk(s) in a PRI trunk group.

restartPRI NRAS_1 all

Syntax Description

<TrunkGroupName> name of PRI trunk group

<restartClass> • "trunk" — individual trunk

• "span" — span

• "all" — all trunks in the trunk group

[ChannelID] optional trunk/span Object Identifier — used when restartClass is either "trunk" or "span". See “OID” on page 30.

Page 636: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

628 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Device Maintenance

The following commands perform maintenance on cards, spans, trunks, or lines.

removeremove <oid>

This command causes the facility to be operationally disabled and administratively locked See “lock” on page 7, and also see “disable” on page 630.

remove Trunk-23-1-3

restorerestore <oid>

This command causes the facility to be operationally able and administratively unlocked. See “unlock” on page 7, and also see “enable” on page 630.

restore Trunk-23-1-3

Syntax Description

<oid> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<oid> Object Identifier — unique identifier that the switch uses to address each object or circuit. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 637: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 629990-1012-001

busybusy <oid>

This command causes the facility to be available but not accept additional service requests. Busy is an operational state

C A U T I O N

This command should only be used by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances for testing or debugging.

Prerequisites

Facility in service.

busy Trunk-23-1-3

unbusyunbusy oid

This command causes the facility to be available and accept additional service requests. Unbusy is an operational state.

C A U T I O N

This command should only be used by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances for testing or debugging.

Prerequisites

Facility in busy state, see “busy” on page 629

unbusy Trunk-23-1-3

Syntax Description

<oid> The object Identifier of a line, span, or DS-3. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<oid> The object Identifier of a line, span, or DS-3. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 638: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

630 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

disabledisable oid

This command causes the facility to be unavailable for processing service requests. Disabled is an operational state.

C A U T I O N

This command should only be used by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances for testing or debugging.

Prerequisites

Facility in service.

disable Trunk-23-1-3

enableenable <oid>

This command causes the facility to be operational and available, but unavailable to process service requests. Enabled is an operational state.

C A U T I O N

This command should only be used by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances for testing or debugging.

Prerequisites

Facility in service.

enable Trunk-23-1-3

Syntax Description

<oid> The object Identifier of a line, span, or DS-3. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<oid> The object Identifier of a line, span, or DS-3. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 639: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 631990-1012-001

regMaintConsoleregMaintConsole

This command sets the local card as the destination for ISUP circuit maintenance message output. When an ISUP alert is received, the maintenance console prints it.

***** T7000 ISUP Maintenace Alert ***** CIC 1020 -> T18 Expired

deregMaintConsoleregMaintConsole

This command disables the local card as the destination for ISUP circuit maintenance command output.

resetLineTimersresetLineTimers <oid>

This command resets line timers for the selected line to their default values

C A U T I O N

Use caution when resetting line timers.

resetLineTimers Line-1-1-1

Syntax Description

<oid> Line Object Identifier. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 640: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

632 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setAutoModesetAutoMode [cardNumber]

This command sets a card’s Fault Manager to automatic. In this mode, the Fault Manager automatically disables a span when it detects one of the following alarms:

• Loss of Signal (LOS) — An LOS alarm indicates a loss of T1 signal and transmits what is commonly called a red alarm.

• Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) — An AIS alarm indicates that the near-end T1 framing is lost. This is usually generated by multiplexers or equipment at intermediate cross-connect points on the circuit. An AIS transmits what is commonly called a blue alarm.

• Remote Alarm Indication (RAI) — An RAI is sent by far-end equipment to report that it is not receiving a T1 signal. An RAI transmits what is commonly called a yellow alarm.

The Fault Manager restores the service on the span once the fault condition is remedied.

setManualModesetManualMode [cardNumber]

This command sets the switch’s Fault Manager to manual. In this mode, the Fault Manager does not automatically disable a span if it detects an alarm on it.

C A U T I O N

Disabling Fault Manager’s automatic response to span alarms can negatively affect operations.

Syntax Description

[cardNumber] Optional card number. If no card number is supplied, the command defaults to the local card.

Syntax Description

[cardNumber] Optional card number. If no card number is supplied, the command defaults to the local card.

Page 641: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 633990-1012-001

test

test <oid>

This command tests an individual span or line. These tests are called DS3 diagnostics, T1 diagnostics or Subscriber Line Interface Card (SLIC) diagnostics, depending on the type of span or line under test.

Prerequisites

Remove the facility (span or line) from service before running a test, see “remove” on page 628.

test span-23-1-3

Test Description

DS3 Diagnostic

Results

Run the test on a DS-3 span OID. Provides active diagnostic capabilities for the DS3 framerthat determines if the framer chip and associated firmware work properly.

• Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: DS3 Comm Path Test [PASSED/FAILED] for span X — indicates if the communication paths to/from the DS3 framer are open.

T1 Diagnostic

Results

Run the test on a T-1 span OID. Provides active diagnostic capabilities for the T1 framer that determines if the framer chip and associated firmware work properly.

• Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: T1 Comm Path Test [PASSED/FAILED] for span X — indicates if the communication paths to/from the T1 framer are open.

• Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: T1 Data Path Test [PASSED/FAILED] for span X (New I/O=False) — indicates whether the T1 data path is open. If the external loopback fails, the internal loopback runs to isolate any data path problem.

SLIC Diagnostics

Results

Run the test on a line OID. The SLIC diagnostic test verifies the proper operation of each of the 32 SLICs by testing each SLIC operating state.

• Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: SLIC Off-Hook Test [PASSED/FAILED] for Line X — indicates if the SLIC off-hook test passed or failed for the line.

• Result: [PASSED/FAILED] Report: SLIC Ring and Ring Trip Tests [PASSED/FAILED] for Line X — indicates if the SLIC Ring and Ring Trip Tests passed or failed for the line.

Syntax Description

<oid> Line or Span OID. See “OID” on page 30.

Page 642: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

634 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

txSpanSignaltxSpanSignal <spanNumber> <timeslot> <signalType> [digit]

This command transmits a specified signal across a trunk.

See “Using Hexadecimal” on page 741 to convert decimal to hexadecimal

NOTE: The explanation of this command appears on the next several pages.

Syntax Description

<spanNumber> The zero-based number in hexadecimal of the span to send the signal. The number of spans on a card depends on the card type:

<timeslot> The one-based timeslot (trunk) in hexadecimal on the span to send the signal. The number of timeslots on a card depends on the card type:

Nr. of Spans

Card Type1 - based decimal

0 - based hexadecimal

LTC 2 2

TIC 16 f

ETIC2 20 13

BIC 28 1b

PIC 0 0

Nr. of Timeslots

Card Type1 - based decimal

1 - based hexadecimal

LTC 48 30

TIC 384 180

ETIC2 480 1E0

BIC 672 2A0

PIC 0 0

Page 643: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 635990-1012-001

<signalType> The signaling type of the trunk group determines what type of signal to send. The following categorizes the signals within each signaling type.

NOTE: The 403 after EANDMS, LST and GST represent the T1-403 specification.

E & M signaling (EANDMS)

• ONHOOK or EANDMS_ONHOOK — on-hook signal

• OFFHOOK or EANDMS_OFFHOOK — off-hook signal

• DIGIT or EANDMS_DIGIT — internal value, do not use

• WINK or EANDMS_WINK — wink signal

• FLASH or EANDMS_FLASH — flash signal

• DS0AIS or EANDMS_DS0AIS — DS0 blue alarm, Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

• DS0RAI or EANDMS_DS0RAI — DSO yellow alarm, remote alarm indicator

Loopstart (LST403)

• LST403_LO — loop open signal (on-hook)

• LST403_LC — loop closed signal (off-hook)

• LST403_DIGIT — internal value, do not use

• LST403_WINK — wink signal

• LST403_FLASH — flash signal

• LST403_LCF — loop current feed signal

• LST403_LCFO — loop current feed open signal (forward disconnect)

• LST403_RING — ring signal

• LST403_DS0AIS — DS0 blue alarm, Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

• LST403_DS0RAI — DSO yellow alarm, remote alarm indicator

Groundstart (GST403)

• GST403_LO — loop open signal (on-hook)

• GST403_LC — loop closed signal (off-hook)

• GST403_DIGIT — internal value, do not use

• GST403_WINK — wink signal

• GST403_FLASH — flash signal

• GST403_LCF — loop current feed signal

• GST403_LCFO — loop current feed open signal (forward disconnect)

• GST403_RING — ring signal

• GST403_RNGND — ring ground signal

• GST403_DS0AIS — DS0 blue alarm, Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

• GST403_DS0RAI — DSO yellow alarm, remote alarm indicator

Syntax Description

Page 644: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

636 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Ring ground signal on a groundstart trunk.

txSpanSignal f 10 WINK108> EANDMS_WINK sent on span (15) timeslot (16)

PrerequisitesTrunk group, see “Trunk Groups” on page 233

[digit] • Optional parameter when type is DIGIT, EANDMS_DIGIT, LST403_DIGIT, or GST403_DIGIT. Range: 0 - 9

Syntax Description

Page 645: 1012 Command Line Interface

Device Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 637990-1012-001

queryGainqueryGain <oid>

This command displays the transmit and receive gain on a trunk.

NOTE: queryGain does not work on the trunks of an LTC card.

queryGain Trunk-28Gain settings for Trunk-28Tx Gain -0 dbRx Gain -0 db

setGainsetGain <oid> <txGain> <rxGain>

This command changes the transmit and receive gain on a trunk.

NOTE: setGain does not work on the trunks of an LTC card.

queryGain Trunk-28Gain settings for Trunk-28Tx Gain -0 dbRx Gain -0 db

setGain Trunk-28 2 7

queryGain Trunk-28Gain settings for Trunk-28Tx Gain -2 dbRx Gain -7 db

Syntax Description

<oid> Trunk Object Identifier. See “OID” on page 30.

Syntax Description

<oid> Trunk Object Identifier. See “OID” on page 30.

<txGain> Amount of transmit gain in dB. 0 is the initial value.

Range: 0 - 7

<rxGain> Amount of receive gain in dB. 0 is the initial value.

Range: 0 - 7

Page 646: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7 Maintenance

638 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SS7 Maintenance

The following commands are SS7 operations commands.

SS7RestartSS7Restart [networkName]

This command restarts an SS7 network. This could become necessary when you need to synchronize routing information with the STPs. Since restart is a disruptive procedure, you would typically not use this command.

The network is unavailable for the duration of the restart. The restart time depends on the L3T27 timer, see “L3T27_period” on page 504.

C A U T I O N

Restarting an SS7 network briefly disrupts SS7 messaging.

SS7Restart MCI

Syntax Description

[networkName] Network name. Omit this parameter to force an SS7 restart for all networks

Page 647: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7 Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 639990-1012-001

Tip

activateLinkSet

Use “linkSetStatus” on page 107 to find the status of a link set.

activateLinkset <linkSetName>

This command activates an inactive link set. When a link set is provisioned, it defaults to an inactive state. Activate a link set after you add the links and are ready for the link set to send and receive signaling messages.

activateLinkset Linkset1

deactivateLinkSetdeactivateLinkset <linkSetName>

This command deactivates an active link set

deactivateLinkSet Linkset1

Syntax Description

<linkSetName> name of the link set to activate

Syntax Description

<linkSetName> name of link set to deactivate

Page 648: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7 Maintenance

640 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

blockLinkblockLink <linkName>

This command takes an SS7 signaling link out of service. The link is marked “management blocked”

blockLink Link_1_1

unblockLink

Before unblocking a link, be sure that the link set is active. See “activateLinkSet” on page 639.

unblockLink <linkName>

This command allows a formerly blocked link to start carrying signaling information.

unblockLink Link_1_1

Syntax Description

<linkName> name of the link to block

Syntax Description

<linkName> name of the link to unblock

Page 649: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7 Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 641990-1012-001

Tip

Tip

inhibitLink

The last link in a link set can not be inhibited. The switch automatically un-inhibits previously inhibited links when the last non-inhibited link in a link set fails.

inhibitLink <linkName>

This command inhibits an SS7 signaling link. Inhibiting a signaling link restricts it from send signaling traffic, allowing only test and maintenance traffic. Inhibiting a link does not cause any link status changes at MTP Level 2. The switch on either or both sides of the signaling link can request link inhibition, and either switch can refuse inhibiting if it would impact routing.

inhibitLink SWBT

uninhibitLink

Use “linkStatus” on page 107 to find the status of a link.

uninhibitLink <linkName>

This command uninhibits a locally inhibited SS7 signaling link.Since the switch on either side of the signaling link can request link inhibition, locally uninhibiting the link may not return it to a traffic bearing state.

uninhibitLink SWBT

Syntax Description

<linkName> name of link to inhibit

Syntax Description

<linkName> name of link to inhibit

Page 650: 1012 Command Line Interface

SS7 Maintenance

642 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

testLnpQuery

Use this command to validate SS7 routing from the switch to the SCP.

testLnpQuery <callingNumber> <calledNumber>

This command tests the ported status of a subscriber by making an LNP query. If the LNP query is successful, and the DN has been ported, the LNP SCP will return an LRN. If the DN has not been ported, the LCP SCP will return the dialed number.

testLnpQuery 3042962645 2145290269Raw TCAP Component dump: 0xe9 0x13 0xcf 0x02 0x14 0x00 0xd1 0x02 0x65 0x01 0x30 0x09 0x8f 0x07 0x03 0x10 0x49 0x20 0x13 0x99 0x99Analyze Route response:Calling party address: 9402319999

Syntax Description

<callingNumber> 10 digit DN of the calling number. This required parameter can be any subscriber on any switch.

<calledNumber> 10 digit DN of the called number to be queried. An LRN database dip is preformed on this number, and the returned results are printed to the console.

Page 651: 1012 Command Line Interface

ISUP Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 643990-1012-001

ISUP Maintenance

Integrated Services User Part (ISUP) defines the protocol for setting-up, managing, and releasing trunk circuits (terminating line exchanges) that carry voice and data between a calling party and a called party.

circuitCCRcircuitCCR <PC> <CIC>

This command performs a continuity check. The circuitCCR command generates a COT (continuity check test) tone and sends it over the voice path to ensure total signaling and voice connectivity with SS7. This test is necessary because SS7 does use the actual voice circuit for messaging.

circuitCCR 229-123-045 101

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

Page 652: 1012 Command Line Interface

ISUP Maintenance

644 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

circuitGResetcircuitGReset <PC> <CIC> <Range>

This command sends a reset message for a group of circuits. See “circuitReset” on page 646.

circuitGReset 229-123-045 101 10

circuitGBlockcircuitGBlock <PC> <CIC> <Range> [StatusBitMask] <Release>

This command permits the switch to remove traffic from the distant terminals of a group of circuits because of a fault, or to perform testing.

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

<Range> designate range of CICs to reset

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

<Range> designate range of CICs to block. A range of 0 indicates the absence of a Status Bit Mask

[StatusBitMask] optional decimal representation of 24 circuit identification codes which the command pertains to those bits set high (1). If this parameter is omitted, all CICs in the range will be blocked.

Refer to the “circuitGBlock Example” on page 645 to understand how this parameter is calculate.

<Release> • 0 — do not release the call prior to performing command

• 1 — release the call

Page 653: 1012 Command Line Interface

ISUP Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 645990-1012-001

circuitGBlock Example

This command features a parameter that only a programmer could love. Suppose we want to reset CICs 101, 102, 110, 113, 115 and 122 for a particular point code. Here is how we would go about calculating the StatusBitMask:

Once the binary representation is converted to hex (1), it must be manipulated to account for Intel Little Endan memory addressing.

1. In hex representation (2), the upper and lower 2 byte blocks are swapped.

2. In hex representation (3), the upper and lower bytes of each 2 byte block are swapped.

3. In hex representation (4),the least significant byte (which used to be the most significant byte in hex representation (1)) is dropped, since this parameter expects only 24 significant bits.

The final result from hex representation (4) is converted to decimal and entered in the command:

circuitGBlock 229-123-045 101 21 217632 1

CIC in msg: 101

CICs affected by msg: 101, 102, 110, 113, 115, 122

Range: 21

StatusBits set: 0,1,9,12,14,21

32 bit Binary representation 0000 0000 0010 0000 0101 0010 0000 0011

Hex representation (1) 0020 5203

Hex representation (2) 5203 0020

Hex representation (3) 03 52 20 00

Hex representation (4) 03 52 20

Decimal representation: 217632

Page 654: 1012 Command Line Interface

ISUP Maintenance

646 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

circuitGUnblock

See “circuitGBlock Example” on page 645 to see how to calculate the StatusBitMask value.

circuitGUnblock <PC> <CIC> <Range> [StatusBitMask] <Release>

This command makes the distant terminals of a group of circuits available to carry traffic.

circuitUnblock 229-123-045 101 21 217632 1

circuitResetcircuitReset <PC> <CIC>

This command sends a reset message.

NOTE: In systems that maintain circuit status in memory, there may be occasions when the memory is damaged. In such a case, reset the circuits to the idle condition in both exchanges to make them available for new traffic. Since the exchange with the damaged memory does not know whether the circuits are idle, busy outgoing, busy incoming, blocked, etc., the Reset Circuit messages and Group Reset Circuit (for a group of circuits) messages are applicable for the affected circuit(s).

circuitReset 229-123-045 101

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

<Range> range

[StatusBitMask] optional decimal representation of 24 circuit identification codes where the command pertains to those bits set high (1)

<Release> • 0 — do not release the call prior to performing command

• 1 — release the call

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

Page 655: 1012 Command Line Interface

ISUP Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 647990-1012-001

Tip

circuitQuery

Use this command when coordinating a circuit turn-up procedure.

circuitQuery <PC> <CIC> <Range>

This command sends a message on a routine or demand basis to request the switch at the other end of a group of circuits to give the state of circuits in a particular range. See “regMaintConsole” on page 631.

NOTE: This command ensures that the circuits are not incorrectly put into maintenance states thereby denying them from service.

circuitQuery 229-123-045 101 10

circuitQueryLcircuitQueryL <PC> <CIC> <Range>

This command requests the local switch to give the state of circuits in a particular range.

circuitQueryL 229-123-045 101 10

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

<Range> designate range

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

<Range> designate range

Page 656: 1012 Command Line Interface

ISUP Maintenance

648 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

circuitTestcircuitTest <PC> <CIC>

This command functions in systems that maintain circuit status in memory. The command sends a message on a routine or demand basis to request circuit translation information from the exchange at the other end of a circuit.

circuitTest 229-123-045 101

circuitBlockcircuitBlock <PC> <CIC>

This command permits the switch to remove traffic from the distant terminal of a circuit due to a fault, or to perform testing.

circuitBlock 229-123-045 101

circuitUnblockcircuitUnblock <PC> <CIC>

This command permits the switch to return to traffic from the distant terminal of a circuit after blocking this traffic because of a fault, or to perform testing.

circuitUnblock 229-123-045 101

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

Syntax Description

<PC> designates the point code of a circuit

<CIC> designates the circuit identification code of a circuit

Page 657: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303 Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 649990-1012-001

GR-303 Maintenance

These commands are GR-303 operations commands.

inhibitPathinhibitPath <name> <pathType> <pathPriority>

This command inhibits a GR-303 path.

inhibitPath Ridell EOC PRIM

uninhibitPathuninhibitPath <name> <pathType> <pathPriority>

This command uninhibits a GR-303 path.

uninhibitPath Ridell EOC PRIM

Syntax Description

<name> RDT name

<pathType> a GR-303 path, either • EOC — Embedded Operations Channel

• TMC — Timeslot Management Channel

<pathPriority> Path priority, either

• PRIM — primary

• SEC — secondary

Syntax Description

<name> RDT name

<pathType> a GR-303 path, either • EOC — Embedded Operations Channel

• TMC — Timeslot Management Channel

<pathPriority> Path priority, either

• PRIM — primary

• SEC — secondary

Page 658: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303 Maintenance

650 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

cancelRDTCmdcancelRDTCmd <name> [all]

This command stops a currently executing a command, or all commands, on an RDT.

cancelRDTCmd RDT1

protectionSwitchprotectionSwitch <name> <pathType> [FORCED]

This command executes a path protection switchover from the span containing the primary EOC and TMC to the span containing the secondary EOC and TMC. It takes 500 ms to switch from the primary EOC or TMC to the secondary EOC or TMC.

protectionSwitch RDT1 EOC FORCED

Dependent Commands

To switch back to the primary spans, repeat the protectionSwitch command.

Syntax Description

<name> RDT name

[all] optional parameter to stop executing the current command and all queued commands on the RDT.

Syntax Description

<name> RDT name

<pathType> • EOC — Embedded Operations Channel

• TMC — Timeslot Management Channel

[FORCED] optional paramert to force a protection switch.

NOTE: Although active calls are normally maintained during path protection switch-over, if you specify the FORCED parameter, active calls are dropped.

Page 659: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303 Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 651990-1012-001

resync921resync921 inst

This command reconnects the GR-303 EOC or TMC link connections on links that use Link Access Protocol-D (LAPD).

resync921 1

Syntax Description

inst he instance of the link.

Range: 1 - maximum number.

The maximum number varies by card type:

• BIC 338

• ETIC 32

• LTC 32

• TIC 32

• PIC 0

Page 660: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303 Maintenance

652 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setInhibitStatesetInhibitState <name> <state>

This command inhibits user commands by preventing provisioning commands from being sent to the RDT. Commands reside in an outstanding request queue until the inhibit state clears.

setInhibitState AFC_NW_TARRANT inhibited

setLoopbackModesetLoopbackMode <name> <ds1TermId> <setInLoopback]>

This command either sets a DS1 in loopback mode or releases a DS1 already set in loopback. DS1 loopback tests a DS1 circuit between the switch and a RDT. Place a DS1 in loopback mode to test the following:

• The DS1 is working properly.

• The DS1 is provisioned correctly (settings on the switch and RDT match).

setLoopbackMode RDT1 15 1

C A U T I O N

When a DS1 is in loopback mode, it cannot carry information between the switch and the RDT.

Syntax Description

<name> RDT name

<state> • notInhibited — to allow user commands to be sent to the RDT

• inhibited — to queue user commands to the RDT

Syntax Description

<name> RDT name

<ds1TermId> terminal ID number of the span on the RDT you want to place in loopback

<setInLoopback> • 0 — release

• 1 — set

Page 661: 1012 Command Line Interface

GR-303 Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 653990-1012-001

resetCRVs (i)resetCRVs <name> <CRV> [CRV...]

This command resets a hung CRV by resetting one or more CRVs in the Call Reference Map.

resetCRVs RDT1 101resetCRVs RDT1 0x65

resetCRVs (ii)resetCRVs <name> <flag>

This command resets a hung CRV by resetting the reserved map, allocation map, or PERMANENT_SIGNAL state in the Call Reference Map.

resetCRVs RDT1 P

Syntax Description

<name> RDT name

<CRV> the crv value 1 - 2,048, either in decimal or hexadec-imal form.

NOTE: Specify Hexadecimal form by prefixing “0x” in front of the CRV

[CRV...] optional additional crv

Syntax Description

<name> RDT name

<flag> • R — reset Reserve Map

• A — reset Allocation Map

• P — reset permanent signal

• ALL — reset all maps

Page 662: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN Maintenance

654 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

AIN Maintenance

These commands are AIN operations commands.

testCNameQuerytestCNameQuery <callingNumber>

This command sends a test Calling Name TCAP query from the switch to the provisioned SCP. Use this command to validate SS7 routing from the switch to the SCP.

The Calling Name query is a request to an SCP. The request contains a directory number (10-digit telephone number). The response, if successful, contains the name associated with the number. This name then appears on the caller ID device attached to the subscriber’s telephone.

testCNameQuery 8174032222

testSacAinQuerytestSacAinQuery <callingNumber> <calledNumber> [Carrier]

This command sends a test Special Access Code (SAC) query from the switch to the provisioned SCP. Use this command to validate SS7 routing from the switch to the SCP.

The SAC query is a request to a database for call routing information for a special set of numbers. The set of supported numbers are the various 800 toll free numbers including: 800, 888, and 877. The response to the SAC query is typically a:

• Telephone number where the call can be routed

• Carrier name that handles calls for that toll free number

testSacAinQuery 8174032222 9724800000 1234

Syntax Description

<calling-Number>

10-digit telephone number of the originator

Syntax Description

callingNumber 10-digit telephone number of the originator

calledNumber 10-digit telephone number dialed

[Carrier] 4 digit carrier code

Page 663: 1012 Command Line Interface

AIN Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 655990-1012-001

testSacInQuerytestSacInQuery ani calledNumber lata [noHexDump]

This command sends a test Special Access Code (SAC) query from the switch to the provisioned SCP. Use this command to validate SS7 routing from the switch to the SCP.

The SAC query is a request to a database for call routing information for a special set of numbers. The set of supported numbers are the various 800 toll free numbers including: 800, 888, and 877. The response to the SAC query is typically a:

• Telephone number where the call can be routed

• Carrier name that handles calls for that toll free number

testSacInQuery 8174032222 9724800000 123

Syntax Description

ani The 10 digit Automatic Number Identification (ANI) of the telephone number of the calling party

calledNumber 10-digit telephone number dialed

lata 3 digit Local Access and Transport Area

noHexDump disables the hexadecimal dump

Page 664: 1012 Command Line Interface

Test Panel Maintenance

656 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Test Panel Maintenance

The switch test panel, called the TAP10, provides access within and outside the switch for testing and monitoring circuits. The test panel connects to the test bus on the switch and allows communication between the switch and test gear. Connections for up to three switches are available on the rear of the test panel. The rear also has connections for DS1 test equipment and a Transmission Impairment Measuring Set (TIMS). The front of the test panel has additional Bantam jack connections for accessing DS1 test equipment or a TIMS.

Although you can open the DS1 or POTS circuits using the OpenManager, you cannot view which hardware is in test mode using the OpenManager. Select the DS1 and/or POTS circuits using the test panel commands.

splitFacilitysplitFacility <OID | DN> [time]

This command splits the span or the subscriber’s facility and allows it to be accessed from the test panel.

NOTE: Entering the splitFacility without parameters shows if a facility is currently split. You can only split one facility at a time.

splitFacility Span-0 600splitFacility 9724800001 600

Syntax Description

<oid | DN> • Object Identifier — of subscriber’s facility, see “OID” on page 30.

• DN is the number of the subscriber.

[time] The time (in seconds) to split the facility. Use decimal for this command.

Default is 600 seconds = 10 minutes.

Page 665: 1012 Command Line Interface

Test Panel Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 657990-1012-001

unsplitFacilityunsplitFacility <OID | DN>

This command unsplits the span or subscriber’s facility and disconnects test panel access

NOTE: If the facility specified in the command in not currently split, the facility currently split displays and no action is taken.

Prerequisites

Split the span or subscriber, see “splitFacility” on page 656

unsplitFacility Span-0unsplitFacility 9724800001

Syntax Description

<OID | DN> • Object Identifier — of subscriber’s facility, see “OID” on page 30.

• DN is the number of the subscriber.

Page 666: 1012 Command Line Interface

In Service Upgrades

658 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

In Service Upgrades

Each card in the switch has a 7/patchLog file. To troubleshoot, dump this file with 'cat < 7/patchLog' and save the results.

To modify T7000 software while it is carrying call traffic, TAC uses in-service upgrades (ISUs). ISUs can either be applied to a single card or to all of the cards on a T7000.

Once an ISU is applied, it installs and re-applies itself automatically on every successive reboot of the cards. If you unapply the ISU, but do not also unload it, it returns on successive reboots.

ISUs should be applied on a T7000-wide basis unless directed by Taqua TAC. ISUs applied to a single-card should only be performed by qualified personnel under appropriate circumstances. If misused, they can cause the T7000 state to get out of sync and negatively affect call processing.

ISU process for a single card

To apply an ISU to one of the cards on a switch:

ISU process for all cards on a T700

To apply an ISU to all of the cards on the switch:

Step Action

1 Connect to a card on the T7000.

2 Copy the ISU archive file into the directory from which the card is booting or tftping.

3 Load the ISU archive file from the directory to the specified card.

4 Apply the ISU to the card.

5 Verify that the ISU has been applied to the card.

Step Action

1 Connect to the system manager card on the T7000.

2 Copy the ISU archive file into the directory from which the system manager card is booting or tftping.

3 Load the ISU archive file from the directory to the system manager card. The ISU tftps over and is distributed to all of the cards on the switch.

4 Apply the ISU to all cards on the switch.

5 Verify that the ISU has applied to each card on the T7000.

Page 667: 1012 Command Line Interface

In Service Upgrades

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 659990-1012-001

sysLoadPatchArchiveEach card in the switch has a 7/patchLog file. To troubleshoot, dump this file with 'cat < 7/patchLog' and save the results.sysLoadPatchArchive <filename>

This command is executed on the active system manager card. The system manager distributes and loads the ISU archive on all cards in a switch.

NOTE: If the file specified does not exist locally, the card attempts to find it in its TFTP home directory on ISEhouse. If it is there, the card TFTPs it over into the local file system (as specified in the filename itself). If the file is not found on the local file system or in the TFTP home directory, the operation fails.

This command does not apply the ISU to the software. To apply the ISU to all the cards on the switch, see “sysApplyPatch” on page 660. To apply the ISU to a single card, see “applyPatch” on page 660.

sysLoadPatchArchive 7/OCX4.0.0-0002.a

loadPatchArchiveloadPatchArchive <filename>

This command is executed from any card and loads an ISU archive into that card only.

NOTE: If the file specified does not exist locally, the card attempts to find it in its TFTP home directory on ISEhouse. If it is there, the card TFTPs it over into the local file system (as specified in the filename itself). If the file is not found on the local file system or in the TFTP home directory, the operation fails.

This command does not apply the ISU to the software. To apply the ISU to a single card, see “applyPatch” on page 660.

loadPatchArchive 7/OCX4.0.0-0002.a

Syntax Description

<filename> name of ISU archive file. Only file devices 7 and f maybe specified.

Syntax Description

<filename> name of file on ISU archive. Only file devices 7 and fmay be specified.

Page 668: 1012 Command Line Interface

In Service Upgrades

660 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

sysApplyPatchsysApplyPatch <patchID>

This command is executed only on the active system manager card. The system manager instructs all of the cards in the switch to apply a patch. The system manager card collects the application results from all of the cards and reports them back.

Prerequisites

Load the patch on all of the cards, see “sysLoadPatchArchive” on page 659.

sysApplyPatch OCX4.0.0-0002

applyPatchapplyPatch <patchID>

This command instructs the card on which it is executed to apply the patch.

Prerequisites

Load the patch on one of the cards, see “loadPatchArchive” on page 659

applyPatch OCX4.0.0-0002

Syntax Description

<patchID> name of file

Syntax Description

<patchID> name of file

Page 669: 1012 Command Line Interface

In Service Upgrades

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 661990-1012-001

sysUnapplyPatchsysUnapplyPatch <patchID>

This command is executed from the system manager card. The system manager unapplies the specified patch from all cards on the switch. The system manager card collects the application results from all of the cards and reports them back.

Prerequisites

Apply the patch on all of the cards, see “sysApplyPatch” on page 660

sysUnApplyPatch OCX4.0.0-0002

unapplyPatchunapplyPatch <patchID>

This command instructs the card on which it is executed to unapply the patch.

Prerequisites

Apply the patch on one of the cards, see “applyPatch” on page 660

unapplyPatch OCX4.0.0-0002

Syntax Description

<patchID> name of file

Syntax Description

<patchID> name of file

Page 670: 1012 Command Line Interface

In Service Upgrades

662 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

sysUnloadPatchsysUnloadPatch <patchID>

This command is executed from the active system manager card. The system manager unloads the patch from all of the cards on the switch. The system manager card collects the application results from all of the cards and reports them back.

NOTE: All patches in an archive are loaded, but patches are unloaded individually.

sysUnloadPatch OCX1.4.2-0002

unloadPatchunloadPatch <patchID>

This command instructs the card on which it is executed to unload the patch.

NOTE: Patches are loaded in entire archives. Patches are unloaded individually.

unloadPatch OCX1.4.2-0002

Syntax Description

<patchID> name of file

Syntax Description

<patchID> name of file

Page 671: 1012 Command Line Interface

Test Tone Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 663990-1012-001

Test Tone Maintenance

Use test lines for basic line maintenance and testing. The switch provides test line types 100 and 102. These test lines can be accessed from manual test positions by dialing a 7 or 10-digit subscriber number provisioned as the test line. The switch uses the received digits to connect to the correct type of test line.

Calls to the carrier to report a service problem can be a result of one or all of the following issues:

• Subscriber hears noise on the line during a conversation

• Subscriber is unable to clearly hear the called party

• Subscriber's data connection is not working properly

The carrier technician can connect a test box close to the subscriber's location, usually at the point where the line enters the subscriber's home or office, to test the line. The test box (usually a SAGE) is capable of dialing up the switch test line, measuring the returned tone, and detecting noise on the line.

100 - Type Test Lines

The 100-type line provides the following items:

• Returns off-hook (answer) supervision upon seizure of the test line.

• Provides a quiet interval of 300 ms ±10%

• Provides 1004 Hz at 0dBm0 for 5.5 ±0.5 seconds.

• Applies a quiet termination to the caller for 60 minutes or until the caller hangs up. This allows the user to confirm the test line has been connected and measure the level of the circuit. The level can be used to determine signal-to-noise ratio measurements.

• If the caller does not hang up within 60 minutes, the line produces howler tone.

102-Type Test Lines

The 102-type line provides the following items:

• Returns off-hook (answer) supervision upon seizure of the test line.

• Provides a quiet interval of 300-ms -±10%.

• Provides a 1004 Hz at 0 dBm0 tone for 9 seconds ±10% followed by 1 second of quiet termination (silence).

• Continues the 10-second sequence is repeated continuously for 60 minutes or until the caller hangs up.

• If the caller does not hang up within 60 minutes, the line produces howler tone.

Page 672: 1012 Command Line Interface

Test Tone Maintenance

664 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

To provision test tones:

Step Action

1 Add a prefix for the test tone numbers (see “Prefixes” on page 403 for more information about adding a prefix.)

For example, to use prefix 972555 for Test Tone calls

create Prefix 972555

Note that the choice of the prefix is completly arbitrary, and will probably be different for your office.

2 Create a route list that will contain the number to dial for each test (see “NANP Route List” on page 519 for more information about route lists).

The following two examples create a route list for Test Tone 100 and Test Tone 102 calls.

We will call the Test Tone 100 route list TestTone100. We have decided it can be accessed by calling 0100 in the 972555 prefix that was set up in step 1.

create NANPRouteList TestTone100 9725550100

In a similar fashion, we have decided to call the Test Tone 102 route list TestTone102, and access it by calling 0102 in the 972555 prefix.

create NANPRouteList TestTone102 9725550102

Note that once again, the choice of the route list names and the DN were completely arbitrary. However, services such as Test Tone must use NANP routing, so there was no choice about the type of route list to create.

3 Add the services to the route list (see “Route Lists” on page 514, and “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527 for more information).

insertInto NANPRouteList TestTone100 routes 1 Test100

insertInto NANPRouteList TestTone102 routes 1 Test102

For these steps, there is no choice: The type of route list and the name of the route list were determined in step 2. Futhermore, “routes” is a keyword that must be used when inserting route into a route list. Finally, “Test100” and “Test102” are keywords that identify the Test Tone 100 and Test Tone 102 services, respectively.

Page 673: 1012 Command Line Interface

Automatic Number Announcement

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 665990-1012-001

Tip

Automatic Number Announcement

“ANA_announcementPause” on page 384 determines the length of the pause between ANA announcements.

Automatic Number Announcement (ANA) helps a carrier technician identify the phone number of a particular line. One or more special ANA numbers can be provisioned on the switch. When the special ANA number is dialed, the switch “speaks” the calling number in a customized announcement. After a brief pause, the switch repeats the calling number announcement. If the carrier technician does not hang up after the second announcement, the switch presents howler tone.

To provision Automatic Number Announcement:

Step Action

1 (Optional) add a prefix for the ANA numbers (see “Prefixes” on page 403 for more information about adding a prefix.). Standard industry practice in North America is to use the 958 or 959 exchanges for local and long distance test numbers, but you are free to choose any exchnage for Automatic Number Announcements.

For example, to use prefix 972958 for ANA calls

create Prefix 972958

2 Create a route list that will contain the number to dial for the Automatic Number Announcement (see “NANP Route List” on page 519 for more information about route lists).

The following example creates a route list for ANA calls.

We will call the Automatic Number Announcement route list ANA_1. We have decided it can be accessed by calling 1234 in the 972958 prefix that was set up in step 1.

create NANPRouteList ANA_1 9729581234

Note that once again, the choice of the route list name and the DN were completely arbitrary. However, services such as ANA must use NANP routing, so there was no choice about the type of route list to create.

3 Add the service to the route list (see “Route Lists” on page 514, and “Adding a Route to a Route List” on page 527 for more information).

insertInto NANPRouteList ANA_1 routes 1 ANASvc

For these steps, there is no choice: The type of route list and the name of the route list were determined in step 2. Futhermore, “routes” is a keyword that must be used when inserting route into a route list. Finally, “ANASvc” is a keyword that identifies the Anutomatic Number Announcement service.

Page 674: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance

666 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance

pingVoippingVoip <device_num> <ip_addr>

Issue this command on a PIC card to test the communications path to a given IP address over the specified Ethernet port. The switch issues an ICMP “ping” (sometimes referred to a a Packet Internet Groper command, as per RFC 1739), to determine if the remote host is active and to determine the round-trip communicating delay between the switch and the host.

Syntax Description

<device_num> Number of the device to issue the ping command from.• 0 — Fast Ethernet Port 0

• 1 — Fast Ethernet Port 1

• 2 — Fast Ethernet Port 2 (PIC 2 only)

<ip_addr> Internet Protocol address to ping, in dotted decimalform.

Page 675: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Maintenance 667990-1012-001

nslookupnslookup <FQDN> <Interface> [dnsSRV(0|1)]

Issue this command on a PIC card to debug queries and responses from a DNS (Domain Name System).

Prerequisites

DNS server configured on the Fast Ethernet Interface. See “modifyFacility” on page 217.

Syntax Description

<FQDN> Fully Qualified Domain Name for the query.

<Interface> The number of the device which will issue the DNSlookup.• 0 — Fast Ethernet Port 0

• 1 — Fast Ethernet Port 1

• 2 — Fast Ethernet Port 2 (PIC 2 only)

[dnsSRV(0|1)] Optional parameter which specifies the type of DNSlookup. Values are:• 0 — DNS_A lookup. Returns an IP Address.

• 1 — DNS_SRV lookup. Returns an IP Address and Port Number.

Page 676: 1012 Command Line Interface

SIP/MGCP/VoIP Maintenance

668 Maintenance T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

nslookup as.taqua.local 1Header information: ID: 777Operation Code: QUERYQuery/Response Flag: ResponseAuthoritative Answer Flag: trueTruncation Flag: falseRecursion Desired: trueRecursion Available: trueResponse Code: NO_ERRORQuestion Count: 1Answer Record Count: 2Authority Record Count: 0Additional Record Count: 0 Question section: Name: as.taqua.local Type: A Class: INTERNET Answer section: 2 Name: as.taqua.local Type: A Class: INTERNET TTL: 0 seconds IP Addr: 172.19.160.193 Name: as.taqua.local Type: A Class: INTERNET TTL: 0 seconds IP Addr: 172.19.160.191 Authority section: 0 Additional section: 0

Page 677: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 669990-1012-001

7Performance Monitoring

The commands in this chapter relate to T7000 Performance Monitoring. Performance Monitoring on the T7000 measures the following:

• Active Call Measurements (ACMs)

• DS1 Monitoring

• DS3 Performance Monitoring

• Peg Counts

• Usage Intervals

Active Call Measurements

Active Call Measurements (ACMs) determine call traffic patterns on the T7000. An ACM is a snapshot of facility usage at a specific interval. Facility activity that occurs between ACM intervals are not included in ACM results. This statistical data supports configuration decisions involving facility assignment. The ACMs:

• View a snapshot of active facilities on a T7000 at a point in time.

• Accumulate snapshots of facility activity.

• View and reset the accumulated data.

You determine the interval in seconds to take snap shots of activity on the T7000. You can view activity or a log of accumulated data on the following:

• A card

• A trunk group

• A span

• All of the cards in a T7000

• All of the spans in a T7000

• All of the trunk groups on a T7000

NOTE: Using ACMs from the command line is independent from ACMs on the OM. They are separate processes and they do not affect each other.

Page 678: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

670 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

logActiveCallslogActiveCalls [interval]

This command logs active facility snap shots on the T7000 in a log. This log is an indicator of call activity, not a log of all calls on the T7000.

logActiveCalls 30

Dependent Commands

The following ACM commands are dependant on logActiveCalls:

• “resetCallHist” on page 670

• “queryActiveCalls” on page 66

• “queryCallHist” on page 67

stopActiveCallLogstopActiveCallLog

This command stops the active facility snap shots.

NOTE: Use “resetCallHist” on page 670 to reset the call log statictics.

stopActiveCallLog

resetCallHistresetCallHist

This command resets the active facility snap shot log and stops the “logActiveCalls” command. All of the ACM counters are set to zero.

Prerequisites

Log the active calls, see “logActiveCalls” on page 670

Syntax Description

[interval] The interval in seconds on which the active call snapshot is recorded. The minimum interval is 10 seconds. Use an interval that matches your average call time, for example, three minutes.

Page 679: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 671990-1012-001

DS1 Monitoring

DS1 monitoring tracks the status of spans by collecting data from the spans’ drivers per ANSI T1.231. The T7000 gathers, reports, and thresholds performance data from the spans. A line is a DS1 that connects the T7000 to another network element. A path is a DS1 that passes through at least one other network element and connects the T7000 to another switch.

The following types of performance date are collected

Table 1: DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters

fc Failure Count, the number of the occurrences of near- and far-end path failure events

cvl Code Violation - Line, the number of both bipolar violations (BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) occurring over the period. An EXZ increments the CVL by one regardless of the length of the zero string. For a B8ZS signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded from the count. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Inhibiting is when there is an overriding condition that prevents events from being counted.

esl Errored Second-Line, the number of one-second intervals with one or more BPVs, EXZs, or LOS defects. For a B8ZS-coded signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded.

sesl Severely Errored Second Line, the number of one-second intervals with 1544 or more BPVs plus EXZs, or one or more LOS defects. For a B8ZS-coded signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded

lossl Loss Second Line: The number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects.

sasp Severely Errored Frame/Alarm Indication Signal (SEF/AIS) Second-Path, the number of one-second intervals containing one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

aissp Alarm Indicator Signals Second-Path, the number of one-second intervals containing one or more AIS defects. An AIS defect is a signal that indicates serious impairments, such as upstream failure events. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

sefsp or sefs

Severely Errored Framing Seconds, the number of one-second performance report message (PRM) intervals containing an severely errored frame (SE) = 1. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

cvp Code Violation: The number of frame synchronization bit errors in the SF format or the count of cyclic redundancy check (CRC-6) errors in the ESF format occurring during the accumulation period. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

esbp Errored Second Type B: this counter only applies to DS1 ESF paths. It is a count of one-second intervals between 2 and 319 CRC-6 errors, no SEF defects, and no AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting

cssp Controlled Slip Second-Path: The number of one-second intervals containing one or more controlled slips. Counts of controlled slips are accurately made in the path terminating network element of the DS1 signal, where the controlled slip takes place. A controlled slip indicates a synchronization problem in DS1 paths. A controlled slip does not cause an out-of-frame event. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

uasp Unavailable Second: The number of one-second intervals for which the DS1 path is unavailable. The DS1 path becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous severely errored seconds (SESs). The 10 SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS1 path becomes available at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SESs. The 10 seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time. Some counts are inhibited during unavailability

all All of the above counters

Page 680: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

672 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

To provision DS1 performance monitoring use the following process:

NOTE: The Threshold15Min and Threshold24Hour alarms create a current alarm when a threshold is passed.

Performance Monitoring Maintenance

Use the following commands for DS1 performance monitoring maintenance:

• To turn off the TCA use “stopTCA15” on page 677 and “stopTCA24” on page 678.

• To turn off the DS1 performance monitoring use “stopPM” on page 680 and “setPMDisplayOff” on page 679

• To restart DS1 performance monitoring use:

• “resetPMCurrent” on page 687

• “resetPMSummary” on page 688

• “resetPMIntervals” on page 687

Step Action

1 Set up the DS1 performance monitoring using the following:

• “setPMTime” on page 673 to set the DS1 monitoring time

• “suppressTCA15” on page 674 or “unsuppressTCA15” on page 674 to configure the frequency of Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs)

• “setTCA15” on page 675 and “setTCA24” on page 676 to configure the 15-minute and 24-hour threshold levels.

2 Enable TCA reporting for a span using “startTCA15” on page 677 and “startTCA24” on page 678.

3 Turn on the DS1 monitoring display using “setPMDisplayOn” on page 679.

4 Start DS1 performance monitoring on an oid using “startPM” on page 680.

5 Wait for TCA alarms/events or refer to the status of an oid.

• “getPMStatus” on page 681 to view general status

• “getPMCurrent” on page 682 to view all intervals

• “getPMInterval” on page 683 to view a specific interval

Page 681: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 673990-1012-001

setPMTimesetPMTime <oid> <timeval>

This command sets the DS1 performance monitoring line time for a span. Use this command to set the performance monitoring time on a span to a value that matches the T7000’s time.

To set the line time on Span-1 to 3:00 AM enter:

setPMTime Span-1 (10800)

NOTE: If the PM time is not set, the T7000 collects the data as normal, but the 15-minute interval does not match the T7000 time.

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<timeval> The line time in seconds, from 0 to 86,399 (zero-based). This value is the timestamp on the DS1 monitoring output. There are 3,600 seconds for each hour period. For example, 2:00 am is 7200 and 11:00 pm is 82000.

Note: Enter the value in parenthesis to use a decimal value.

Page 682: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

674 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

suppressTCA15suppressTCA15 <oid> [nefe]

This command suppresses multiple 15-minute Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) by span. This restricts the T7000 to delivering only one TCA when the threshold is passed per 15-minute period. The default setting is unsuppressed.

NOTE: There is no command to suppress TCAs for a 24-hour period.

suppressTCA15 Span-1

unsuppressTCA15unsuppressTCA15 <oid> [nefe]

This command allows multiple 15-minute TCAs by span. This allows the T7000 to deliver a TCA when the threshold is passed and for each count above the threshold, per 15-minute period. The default setting is unsuppressed.

unsuppressTCA15 Span-1

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

[nefe] Enter one of the following:

• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

NOTE: If omitted, the default is ne.

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

NOTE: If omitted, the default is ne.

Page 683: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 675990-1012-001

setTCA15setTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> <value> [nefe]

This command sets 15-minute threshold values for a span and DS1 monitoring counter.

setTCA15 Span-1 cvl 13000

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<pmtype> See “DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 671.

<value> Decimal value of the threshold:

• fc — 1

• cvl — 13340

• esl — 65

• sesl — 10

• lossl — 1

• sasp — 2

• aissp — 1

• sefsp or sefs — 1

• cvp — 72

• esp — 65

• esap — 13296

• esbp — 1

• sesp — 10

• cssp — 1

• usap — 10

[nefe] Enter one of the following:

• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 684: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

676 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setTCA24setTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> <value> [nefe]

This command sets 24-hour threshold values for a span and DS1 monitoring counter.

setTCA24 Span-1 cvl 130000

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<pmtype> See “DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 671.

<value> Decimal value of the threshold:

• fc — 1

• cvl — 133400

• esl — 648

• sesl — 100

• lossl — 1

• sasp — 17

• aissp — 1

• sefsp or sefs — 1

• cvp — 691

• esp — 648

• esap — 132960

• esbp — 1

• sesp — 100

• cssp — 4

• usap — 10

[nefe] Enter one of the following:

• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 685: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 677990-1012-001

startTCA15startTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]

This command enables the T7000 to send the 15-minute TCAs for a specific span and DS1 monitoring counter.

startTCA15 Span-1 cvl

stopTCA15stopTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]

This command disables 15-minute TCAs for a specific span and DS1 monitoring counter.

stopTCA15 Span-1 cvl

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<pmtype> See “DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 671.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<pmtype> See “DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 671.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 686: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

678 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

startTCA24startTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]

This command enables the T7000 to send the 24-hour TCAs for a specific span and DS1 monitoring counter.

startTCA24 Span-1 all

stopTCA24stopTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]

This command disables 24-hour TCAs for a specific span and DS1 monitoring counter.

stopTCA24 Span-1 all

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<pmtype> See “DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 671.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<pmtype> See “DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 671.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 687: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 679990-1012-001

setPMDisplayOnsetPMDisplayOn

This command enables event display for DS1 (and DS3) performance monitoring. Use this command to view DS1 performance monitoring events for all spans. The events include:

• Indication that a 15-minute interval completes on an span.

• A 15-minute TCA is issued.

• A 24-hour TCA was issued.

setPMDisplayOffsetPMDisplayOff

This command disables event display for DS1 (and DS3) performance monitoring.

Page 688: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

680 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

startPMstartPM <oid | “allspans”>

This command starts DS1 performance monitoring for a span, or for all spans on the card.

startPM Span-0

stopPMstopPM <oid | “allspans”>

This command stops DS1 performance monitoring for a span, or for all spans on the card.

stopPM Span-0

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

“allspans” This parameter is used to start Performance Monitoring on all DS1s on all spans on the card.

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

“allspans” This parameter is used to start Performance Monitoring on all DS1s on all spans on the card.

Page 689: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 681990-1012-001

getPMStatusgetPMStatus <oid> [nefe>]

This command shows the DS1 performance monitoring status for a span.

This command displays the following:

• LINE — the span number on the card

• INIT — the DS1 performance monitoring availability, 1=available 0=not available

• ENAB — the state of performance monitoring, 1=enabled 0=disabled

• INTVLS — the number of 15-minute intervals collected, from 0 to 196 or 48 hours of intervals

• PMTIME — the current line time in seconds

• SUP15 — the status of for TCA suppression, 0=not surpressed, 1=surpressed

getPMStatusgetPMStatus:T1.231 Performance Monitor Status: LINE INIT ENAB INTVLS PMTIME SUP15 0 1 0 0 8452 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 0

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

[<nefe>] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 690: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

682 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

getPMCurrentgetPMCurrent [<oid> [<nefe>]]

This command shows the current DS1 monitoring statistics. If no parameters are entered, all DS1 span status is displayed

Prerequisites• Set the DS1 monitoring time, see “setPMTime” on page 673

• Enable TCA reporting for a span using “startTCA15” on page 677 and “startTCA24” on page 678.

• Start DS1 performance monitoring on an oid using “startPM” on page 680.

getPMCurrent Span-1

The following defines the output for this command. Values that are not available show -----:

• cur15 — current 15-minute interval results

• lastInt — last 15-minute interval results

• Sum24 — summary of the most recent 24-hour period

• last24 — summary of the previous 24-hour period before sum24

• Today — counts since the 00 time or midnight

• Yesterday — counts from the last period of 24-hours

• timeSt — the time stamp of line time in seconds

• vsecs — valid seconds

• invData — the invalid data flag that identifies any >10 second gap in data, 1 = invaild data and 0 = valid data

• dsecs — same as valid seconds

NOTE: The time for determining today and yesterday is based on line time, not the system time. Line time ranges from 0 to 86,399. To synchronize the line time with the T7000’s time see “setPMTime” on page 673.

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 691: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 683990-1012-001

getPMIntervalgetPMInterval <oid> <intervalN> [nefe]

This command shows the current interval, the previous interval, the requested interval, and the next interval after the requested interval. Use this command to view a specific interval in the past.

Prerequisites• Set the DS1 monitoring time, see “setPMTime” on page 673

• Enable TCA reporting for a span using “startTCA15” on page 677 and “startTCA24” on page 678.

• Turn on the DS1 monitoring display using “setPMDisplayOn” on page 679.

• Start DS1 performance monitoring on an oid using “startPM” on page 680.

The following defines the output for this command. Values that are not available show -----.

• cur15 — current 15-minute interval results

• Prev # — the previous interval and number of the interval before the requested interval

• Int # — the requested interval and its number

• Next # — the next interval after the requested interval

• timeSt — the time stamp of line time in seconds

• vsecs — valid seconds

• invData — the invalid data flag that identifies any >10 second gap in data, 1 = invaild data and 0 = valid data

• dsecs — same as valid seconds

getPMInterval Span-0 1

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<intervalN> The number of the interval that you want to view. There are192 intervals in 48 hours, one for every 15-minutes. Interval 0is the current interval and interval 1 is the last completed inter-val.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 692: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

684 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

T1.231 DS1 Performance Monitor Interval Data Near End: Line 0 Valid Intervals 1 currentLineTime 52721

cur15 Prev 0 Int 1 Next 2 sum24 last24timeSt 52200 52200 52132 ----- 52132 0vsecs 521 521 68 ----- 68 0invDat 0 0 1 ----- 3 0dsec 521 521 68 ----- 68 0fc 0 0 0 ----- 0 0esl 0 0 0 ----- 0 0sesl 0 0 0 ----- 0 0lossl 0 0 0 ----- 0 0sasp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0aissp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0sefsp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0cvp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0esp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0esap 0 0 0 ----- 0 0esbp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0sesp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0cssp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0uasp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0

Counters

Page 693: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 685990-1012-001

getPMTCAgetPMTCA <oid> [<nefe]

This command shows the current intervals, thresholds, and TCAs.

The following results show the current TCA count (cur15), the threshold level for 15-minutes (thresh15), the count of TCAs sent (notify15), and the corresponding information for 24-hours.

getPMTCA Span-1

T1.231 DS1 Performance Monitor Interval DataNear End: Line 1 Valid Intervals 0 currentLineTime 0 TCA15 not suppressed cur15 thresh15 notify15 sum24 thresh24 notify24 timeSt ----- 0 0 ----- 0 0vsecs ----- 0 0 ----- 0 0 invDat ----- 0 0 ----- 0 0 dsec ----- 0 0 ----- 0 0 fc ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 cvl ----- -13340 0 ----- -133400 0 esl ----- -65 0 ----- -648 0 sesl ----- -10 0 ----- -100 0 lossl ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 sasp ----- -2 0 ----- -17 0 aissp ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 sefsp ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 cvp ----- -72 0 ----- -691 0 esp ----- -65 0 ----- -648 0 esap ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 esbp ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 sesp ----- -10 0 ----- -100 0 cssp ----- -1 0 ----- -4 0 uasp ----- -10 0 ----- -10 0

NOTE: Threshold values appear as negative values, if TCA is not enable for a counter.

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Counters

Page 694: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

686 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setTCADefaultssetTCADefaults <oid> [nefe]

This command sets all the thresholds to their default values by span. The default threshold levels are industry standards.

setTCADefaults Span-1

Counter Name15-minute Threshold

24-hour Threshold

ffc Failure Count 1 1

cvl Code Violation-Line 13,340 133,400

esl Errored Second-Line 65 648

sesl Severely Errored Second Line 10 100

lossl Loss Second 1 1

sasp SEF/AIS Second-Path 2 17

aissp AIS Second-Path 1 1

sefsp Severely Errored Framing Seconds 1 1

cvp Code Violation SF=72ESF=13,296

SF=691ESF132,960

esp Errored Second 65 648

esap Errored Second Type A 13,296 132,960

esbp Errored Second Type B 1 1

sesp Severely Errored Second 10 100

cssp Controlled Slip Second-Path 1 4

usap Unavailable Second 10 10

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 695: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 687990-1012-001

resetPMIntervalsresetPMIntervals <oid> [nefe]

This command resets all intervals for an oid, including the following intervals:

• cur15 — current 15-minute interval results

• lastInt — last 15-minute interval results

• Sum24 — summary of the most recent 24-hour period

• last24 — summary of the previous 24-hour period before sum24

resetPMIntervals Span-1

resetPMCurrentresetPMCurrent <oid> [<pmtype> [nefe]]

This command resets the current 15-minute interval to zero. If pmtype and nefe are not entered, pmtype defaults to all and nefe defaults to ne.

resetPMCurrent Span-1 all

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<pmtype> See “DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 671.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 696: 1012 Command Line Interface

Active Call Measurements

688 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

resetPMSummaryresetPMSummary <oid> [<pmtype>] [nefe]]

This command resets the Sum24 interval of the DS1 performance monitoring display. If pmtype and nefe are not entered, pmtype defaults to all and nefe defaults to ne.

resetPMSummary Span-1 allresetPMSummary Span-1 cvl

Syntax Description

<oid> Span Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use capital S when entering oid for Span.

<pmtype> See “DS1 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 671.

[<nefe>] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS1 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS1 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 697: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 689990-1012-001

DS3 Monitoring

DS3 monitoring consists of counters that monitor the condition of in-service DS3s processing call traffic, per ANSI T1.231. DS3 counters determine the local status of DS3 lines and paths by collecting data from the spans’ driver. A line is a DS3 that connects the T7000 to another network element. A path is a DS3 that passes through at least one other network element and connects the T7000 to another switch. The following types of performance date are collected:

Table 2: DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters

fc Failure Count, the number of the occurrences of near- and far-end path failure events.

cvl Code Violation-Line, the number of both bipolar violations (BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) occurring over the period. An EXZ increments the CVL by one regardless of the length of the zero string. For a B8ZS signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded from the count. This counter is subject to inhibiting. Inhibiting is when there is an overriding condition that prevents events from being counted.

esl Errored Second-Line, the number of one-second intervals with one or more BPVs, EXZs, or LOS defects. For a B8ZS-coded signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded.

sesl Severely Errored Second Line, the number of one-second intervals with 1544 or more BPVs plus EXZs, or one or more LOS defects. For a B8ZS-coded signal, BPVs that are part of the zero substitution code are excluded

lossl Loss Second Line — The number of one-second intervals containing one or more LOS defects.

sasp Severely Errored Frame/Alarm Indication Signal (SEF/AIS) Second-Path, the number of one-second intervals containing one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

aissp Alarm Indicator Signals Second-Path, the number of one-second intervals containing one or more AIS defects. An AIS defect is a signal that indicates serious impairments, such as upstream failure events. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

sefsp Severely Errored Framing Seconds, the number of one-second performance report message (PRM) intervals containing an severely errored frame (SE) = 1. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

cvp Code Violation — The number of frame synchronization bit errors in the SF format or the count of cyclic redundancy check (CRC-6) errors in the ESF format occurring during the accumulation period. This counter is subject to inhibiting.

all All of the above counters

Page 698: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

690 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

esp Errored Second — The number of one-second intervals, for DS3 ESF, containing any of the following:

• CRC-6 errors

• CS events

• SEF defects

• AIS defects

The number of one-second intervals, DS3 SF, containing any of the following:

• FE errors

• CS events

• SEF defects

• AIS defects

This counter is subject to inhibiting

esap Errored Second Type A: this counter only applies to DS3 ESF paths. The number of one-second intervals with exactly one Cycle Redundancy Check (CRC)-6 error, and no severely errored frame (SEF) or AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting

esbp Errored Second Type B: this counter only applies to DS3 ESF paths. It is a count of one-second intervals between 2 and 319 CRC-6 errors, no SEF defects, and no AIS defects. This counter is subject to inhibiting

sesp Severely Errored Second: this counter applies to both SF and ESF frame formats of DS3.

• ESF — the number of one-second intervals with 320 or more CRC-6 errors, or one or more SEF or AIS defects.

• SF — the number of one-second intervals with eight or more FE events, an SEF defect, or AIS defect.

This counter is subject to inhibiting

cssp Controlled Slip Second-Path: The number of one-second intervals containing one or more controlled slips. Counts of controlled slips are accurately made in the path terminating network element of the DS3 signal, where the controlled slip takes place. A controlled slip indicates a synchronization problem in DS3 paths. A controlled slip does not cause an out-of-frame event. This counter is subject to inhibiting

uasp Unavailable Second: The number of one-second intervals for which the DS3 path is unavailable. The DS3 path becomes unavailable at the onset of 10 contiguous severely errored seconds (SESs). The 10 SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS3 path becomes available at the onset of 10 contiguous seconds with no SESs. The 10 seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time. Some counts are inhibited during unavailability

Table 2: DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters

Page 699: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 691990-1012-001

To provision DS3 performance monitoring use the following process:

NOTE: NOTE: The Threshold15MinDS3 and Threshold24HourDS3 alarms create a alarm when a threshold is passed.

Performance Monitoring Maintenance

Use the following commands for DS3 performance monitoring maintenance:

• To turn off the “stopTCA15” on page 696 and “stopTCA24” on page 697.

• To turn off the DS3 performance monitoring use “stopPM” on page 698 and “setPMDisplayOff” on page 679

• To restart DS3 performance monitoring use:

• “resetPMCurrent” on page 687

• “resetPMSummary” on page 688

• “resetPMIntervals” on page 705

Step Action

1 Set up the DS3 performance monitoring using the following:

• “setPMTime” on page 692 to set the DS3 monitoring time

• “suppressTCA15” on page 693” or “unsuppressTCA15” on page 693” to configure the frequency of Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs)

• “setTCA15” on page 694 and “setTCA24” on page 695 to configure the 15-minute and 24-hour threshold levels.

2 Enable TCA reporting for a span using “startTCA15” on page 695 and “startTCA24” on page 696.

3 Turn on the DS3 monitoring display using “setPMDisplayOn” on page 697.

4 Start DS3 performance monitoring on an oid using “startPM” on page 698.

5 Wait for TCA alarms/events or refer to the status of an oid.

• “getPMStatus” on page 699 to view general status

• “getPMCurrent” on page 700 to view all intervals

• “getPMInterval” on page 701 to view a specific interval

Page 700: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

692 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setPMTimesetPMTime <oid> <timeval>

This command sets the DS3 performance monitoring line time for a DS3. Use this command to set the performance monitoring time on a DS3 to a value that matches the T7000’s time.

To set the line time on DS3 line 1 to 3:00 AM enter:

setPMTime DS3-1 (10800)

NOTE: If the PM time is not set, the T7000 collects the data as normal, but the 15-minute interval does not match the T7000 time.

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<timeval> The line time in seconds, from 0 to 86,399 (zero-based). This value is the timestamp on the DS3 monitoring output. There are 3,600 seconds for each hour period. For example, 2:00 am is 7200 and 11:00 pm is 82000.

Note: Enter the value in parenthesis to use a decimal value.

Page 701: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 693990-1012-001

suppressTCA15suppressTCA15 <oid> [nefe]

This command suppresses multiple 15-minute Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCAs) by DS3. This restricts the T7000 to delivering only one TCA when the threshold is passed per 15-minute period. The default setting is unsuppressed.

NOTE: There is not a command to suppress TCAs for a 24-hour period.

suppressTCA15 DS3-1

unsuppressTCA15unsuppressTCA15 <oid> [nefe]

This command allows multiple 15-minute TCAs by DS3. This allows the T7000 to deliver a TCA when the threshold is passed and for each count above the threshold, per 15-minute period. The default setting is unsuppressed.

unsuppressTCA15 DS3Line-1

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 702: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

694 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

setTCA15setTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> <value> [<nefe>]

This command sets 15-minute threshold values for a DS3 monitoring counter.

setTCA15 DS3-1 cvl 13000

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<pmtype> See “DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 689.

<value> Decimal value of the threshold:

fc — 1

cvl — 13340

esl — 65

sesl — 10

lossl — 1

sasp — 2

aissp — 1

sefs — 1

cvp — 72

esp — 65

esap — 13296

esbp — 1

sesp — 10

cssp — 1

usap — 10

[<nefe>] Enter either of the following:

ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 703: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 695990-1012-001

setTCA24setTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> <value> [nefe]

This command sets 24-hour threshold values for a DS3 monitoring counter.

setTCA24 DS3-1 cvl 130000

startTCA15startTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]

This command enables the T7000 to send the 15-minute TCAs for a DS3 monitoring counter.

startTCA15 DS3-1 cvl

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<pmtype> See “DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 689.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<pmtype> See “DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 689.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 704: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

696 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

stopTCA15stopTCA15 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]

This command disables 15-minute TCAs for a DS3 monitoring counter.

stopTCA15 DS3-1 cvl

startTCA24startTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]

This command enables the T7000 to send the 24-hour TCAs for a DS3 monitoring counter.

startTCA24 DS3-1 all

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<pmtype> See “DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 689.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<pmtype> See “DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 689.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 705: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 697990-1012-001

stopTCA24stopTCA24 <oid> <pmtype> [nefe]

This command disables 24-hour TCAs for a DS3 monitoring counter.

stopTCA24 DS3-1 all

setPMDisplayOnsetPMDisplayOn

This command enables event display for DS3 (and DS1) performance monitoring. Use this command to view DS3 performance monitoring events for all DS3s. The events include:

• Indication that a 15-minute interval completes on a DS3.

• A 15-minute TCA is issued.

• A 24-hour TCA was issued.

setPMDisplayOffsetPMDisplayOff

This command disables event display for DS3 (and DS1) performance monitoring.

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<pmtype> See “DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 689.

[<nefe>] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 706: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

698 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

startPMstartPM <oid>

This command starts DS3 performance monitoring.

startPM DS3-0

stopPMstopPM <oid>

This command stops DS3 performance monitoring.

stopPM DS3-0

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

Page 707: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 699990-1012-001

getPMStatusgetPMStatus <oid> [nefe]

This command shows the DS3 performance monitoring status.

This command displays the following:

• LINE — the DS3 number on the card

• INIT — the DS3 performance monitoring availability, 1=available 0=not available

• ENAB — the state of performance monitoring, 1=enabled 0=disabled

• INTVLS — the number of 15-minute intervals collected, from 0 to 196 or 48 hours of intervals

• PMTIME — the current line time in seconds

• SUP15 — the status of for TCA suppression, 0=not surpressed, 1=surpressed

getPMStatusgetPMStatus:T1.231 Performance Monitor Status: LINE INIT ENAB INTVLS PMTIME SUP15 0 1 0 0 8452 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 4 1 0 0 0 0

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 708: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

700 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

getPMCurrentgetPMCurrent <oid> [nefe]

This command shows the current DS3 monitoring statistics. The time for determining today and yesterday is based on line time, not the system time. Line time ranges from 0 to 86,399. To synchronize the line time with the T7000’s time see “setPMTime” on page 673.

Prerequisites• Set the DS3 monitoring time, see “setPMTime” on page 673

• Enable TCA reporting for a DS3 using “startTCA15” on page 677 and “startTCA24” on page 678.

• Start DS3 performance monitoring on an oid using “startPM” on page 680.

getPMCurrent DS3-1

The following defines the output for this command. Values that are not available show -----:

• cur15 — current 15-minute interval results

• lastInt — last 15-minute interval results

• Sum24 — summary of the most recent 24-hour period

• last24 — summary of the previous 24-hour period before sum24

• Today — counts since the 00 time or midnight

• Yesterday — counts from the last period of 24-hours

• timeSt — the time stamp of line time in seconds

• vsecs — valid seconds

• invData — the invalid data flag that identifies any >10 second gap in data, 1 = invaild data and 0 = valid data

• dsecs — same as valid seconds

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 709: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 701990-1012-001

getPMIntervalgetPMInterval <oid> <intervalN> [nefe]

This command shows the current interval, the previous interval, the requested interval, and the next interval after the requested interval. Use this command to view a specific interval in the past.

Prerequisites• Set the DS3 monitoring time, see “setPMTime” on page 673

• Enable TCA reporting for a DS3 using “startTCA15” on page 677 and “startTCA24” on page 678.

• Turn on the DS3 monitoring display using “setPMDisplayOn” on page 679.

• Start DS3 performance monitoring on an oid using “startPM” on page 680.

The following defines the output for this command. Values that are not available show -----.

• cur15 — current 15-minute interval results

• Prev # — the previous interval and number of the interval before the requested interval

• Int # — the requested interval and its number

• Next # — the next interval after the requested interval

• timeSt — the time stamp of line time in seconds

• vsecs — valid seconds

• invData — the invalid data flag that identifies any >10 second gap in data, 1 = invaild data and 0 = valid data

• dsecs — same as valid seconds

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<intervalN> The number of the interval that you want to view. There are192 intervals in 48 hours, one for every 15-minutes. Interval 0is the current interval and interval 1 is the last completed inter-val.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 710: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

702 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

getPMInterval DS3-0 1

T1.231 DS3 Performance Monitor Interval Data Near End: Line 0 Valid Intervals 1 currentLineTime 52721

cur15 Prev 0 Int 1 Next 2 sum24 last24timeSt 52200 52200 52132 ----- 52132 0vsecs 521 521 68 ----- 68 0invDat 0 0 1 ----- 3 0dsec 521 521 68 ----- 68 0fc 0 0 0 ----- 0 0esl 0 0 0 ----- 0 0sesl 0 0 0 ----- 0 0lossl 0 0 0 ----- 0 0sasp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0aissp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0sefsp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0cvp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0esp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0esap 0 0 0 ----- 0 0esbp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0sesp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0cssp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0uasp 0 0 0 ----- 0 0

Counters

Page 711: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 703990-1012-001

getPMTCAgetPMTCA <oid> [nefe]

This command shows the current intervals, thresholds, and TCAs.

The following results show the current TCA count (cur15), the threshold level for 15-minutes (thresh15), the count of TCAs sent (notify15), and the corresponding information for 24-hours.

getPMTCA DS3-1T1.231 DS3 Performance Monitor Interval DataNear End: Line 1 Valid Intervals 0 currentLineTime 0 TCA15 not suppressed

cur15 thresh15 notify15 sum24 thresh24 notify24 timeSt ----- 0 0 ----- 0 0 vsecs ----- 0 0 ----- 0 0 invDat ----- 0 0 ----- 0 0 dsec ----- 0 0 ----- 0 0 fc ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 cvl ----- -13340 0 ----- -133400 0 esl ----- -65 0 ----- -648 0 sesl ----- -10 0 ----- -100 0 lossl ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 sasp ----- -2 0 ----- -17 0 aissp ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 sefsp ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 cvp ----- -72 0 ----- -691 0 esp ----- -65 0 ----- -648 0 esap ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 esbp ----- -1 0 ----- -1 0 sesp ----- -10 0 ----- -100 0 cssp ----- -1 0 ----- -4 0 uasp ----- -10 0 ----- -10 0

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported). Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Counters

Page 712: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

704 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

NOTE: Threshold values appear as negative values, if TCA is not enable for a counter.

setTCADefaultssetTCADefaults <oid> [nefe]

This command sets all the thresholds to their default values by DS3. The default threshold levels are industry standards.

setTCADefaults DS3-1

Counter Name15-minute Threshold

24-hour Threshold

fc Failure Count 1 1

cvl Code Violation-Line 13,340 133,400

esl Errored Second-Line 65 648

sesl Severely Errored Second Line 10 100

lossl Loss Second 1 1

sasp SEF/AIS Second-Path 2 17

aissp AIS Second-Path 1 1

sefsp Severely Errored Framing Seconds 1 1

cvp Code Violation SF=72ESF=13,296

SF=691ESF132,960

esp Errored Second 65 648

esap Errored Second Type A 13,296 132,960

esbp Errored Second Type B 1 1

sesp Severely Errored Second 10 100

cssp Controlled Slip Second-Path 1 4

usap Unavailable Second 10 10

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 713: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 705990-1012-001

resetPMIntervalsresetPMIntervals <oid> [nefe]

This command resets all intervals for an oid, including the following intervals:

• cur15 — current 15-minute interval results

• lastInt — last 15-minute interval results

• Sum24 — summary of the most recent 24-hour period

• last24 — summary of the previous 24-hour period before sum24

resetPMIntervals DS3-1

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 714: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

706 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

resetPMCurrentresetPMCurrent <oid> [<pmtype>] [nefe>]

This command resets the current 15-minute interval to zero. If pmtype and nefe are not entered, pmtype defaults to all and nefe defaults to ne

resetPMCurrent DS3-1 allresetPMCurrent DS3-1 cvp

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<pmtype> See “DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 689.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 715: 1012 Command Line Interface

DS3 Monitoring

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 707990-1012-001

resetPMSummaryresetPMSummary <oid> [<pmtype>] [nefe]]

This command resets the Sum24 interval of the DS3 performance monitoring display.

resetPMSummary DS3-1 allresetPMSummary DS3-1 cvl

Syntax Description

<oid> DS3 Object Identifier — see “OID” on page 30.

NOTE: Use DS3-x, where x is 0, 1, or 2 depending on the DS3 line.

<pmtype> See “DS3 Performance Monitoring Counters” on page 689.

[nefe] Enter either of the following:• ne — near-end to show DS3 status for the T7000

• fe — far-end to show DS3 status for the switch to which the T7000 connects (not currently supported).

Note: If you do not enter a value for nefe, the T7000 defaults to ne.

Page 716: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

708 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

Description

Peg counts and usage intervals use the same set of commands for provisioning.

Peg Counts

Peg counts count facility events relative to the following:

• T7000 Call Model

• Usage of SS7 links or link sets by MTP levels 1 - 3, per SS7 route, per SCCP, or per PC and SSN combination.

• Message Signal Units (MSUs) received/transmitted

These measurements are a subset of the measurements defined in Section 4 of Telcordia’s GR-478 that are applicable to an SSP.

Usage Intervals

Usage Intervals track usage of SS7 links or link sets by MTP level 2, level 3, and SCCP TCAP. These measurements are a subset of the SS7 Measurements defined in Section 4 of Telcordia’s GR-478 that are applicable to an SSP.

Using Counters

Counters manage peg counts or usage intervals.

• Identify the counter you want to provision using “queryCounterDefs” on page 714.

• Enable and disable the counter using “enableCounter” on page 715 and “disableCounter” on page 716

• View the output of the counter using “queryCounters” on page 718 or “queryCounter” on page 719.

Page 717: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 709990-1012-001

Tip

Well Known Peg and Usage Counter Process IDs

The following table lists the well known Process IDs (PIDs) on the T7000 that use peg and usage counters.

MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters

Always enter a Peg or Usage counter’s name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 3: Peg and Usage Counter PIDs

Process ID Process Name

38 MTP Level 1

3a MTP Level 2

3b MTP Level 3

3e SCCP TCAP

3f Call Processing

Table 4: MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters

Name SNMP Description Counter Type

“Data Transmitted on a link” total MSUs MSUOctets LSSUs transmitted on an outgoing link

Peg

Page 718: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

710 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters

Always enter a Peg or Usage counter’s name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 5: MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters

Name SNMP Description Counter Type

“Congestion Discard Events by Discard Level”

Total Congestion Discard Events by Discard Level

Peg

“Congestion MSUs Discarded by priority”

Total Congestion MSUs Discarded by priority

Peg

“Data Received on a link” Total MSUs MSUOctets or LSSUs received on an incoming link

Peg

“Data Retransmitted on a link” Total MSUs MSUOctets retransmitted on an outgoing link

Peg

“Duration of Receipt of SIB” Duration of the Receipt of Busy Link Status Unit

Usage

“Duration of Signaling Link Congestion by congestion level”

Duration of Signaling Link Congestion by congestion level

Usage

“Duration of Transmitting of SIB”

Duration of the Transmitting of Busy Link Status Unit

Usage

“Signaling Link Congestion Events by congestion level”

Total Signaling Link Congestion Events by congestion level

Peg

“Signaling Link RX Congestion Events”

Total Signaling Link RX Congestion Events Peg

RX Congestion Discard “Events”

Total RX Congestion Discard Events Peg

Page 719: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 711990-1012-001

Tip

MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters

Always enter a Peg or Usage counter’s name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 6: MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters

Name SNMP Description Counter Type

“MSUs Discarded of invalid DPC”

total MSUs Discarded of invalid DPC Peg

“MSUs Discarded of invalid SIO”

total MSUs Discarded of invalid SIO Peg

“MSUs Discarded due to congestion by priority”

total MSUs Discard due to congestion by priority 0,1,2 and 3

Peg

“Duration of Linkset Active” Duration of Link set Active (at least on link is in operation)

Usage

“Duration of Link unAvailable” Duration of Link unAvailable Usage

“Duration of Link in Service” Duration of Link Service in L2 Usage

“Duration of Remote Processor Outage”

Duration of Remote Processor Outage Usage

“SRCT MSUs Transmitted per route”

total Signalling Route Set Congestion Test MSUs Transmitted per route

Peg

“RSR MSUs Transmitted per route”

total Restricted Signalling Route Set test MSUs Transmitted per route

Peg

“RSP MSUs Transmitted per route”

total Prohibited Signalling Route Set test MSUs Transmitted per route

Peg

“TFA MSUs Received per route”

total Transfer Allowed MSUs Received per route

Peg

“TFC MSUs Received per route”

total Transfer Controlled MSUs Received per route

Peg

“”TFP MSUs Received per route”

total Transfer Prohibited MSUs Received per route

Peg

“TFR MSUs Received per route'

total Transfer Restricted MSUs Received per route

Peg

“SLTM Received on a link” total SLTM Received on an incoming link Peg

“SLTA Received on a link” total SLTA Received on an incoming link Peg

“UPU MSUs Received” total User Part Unavailable MSUs Received

Peg

Page 720: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

712 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters

Always enter a Peg or Usage counter’s name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the SCCP and TCAP Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 7: SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters

Name SNMP Description Counter Type

“SSA MSUs Received” total Subsystem Allowed MSUs Received Peg

“SSP MSUs Received” total Subsystem Prohibited MSUs Received

Peg

“ST MSUs Received” total Subsystem Test MSUs Received Peg

“SSA MSUs Transmitted” total Subsystem Allowed MSUs Transmitted

Peg

“SSP MSUs Transmitted” total Subsystem Prohibited MSUs Transmitted

Peg

“MSUs Rejected with invalid APC/SSN”

total invalid affected PC/SSN received Peg

“SST MSUs Transmitted” total Subsystem Test MSUs Transmitted Peg

Page 721: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 713990-1012-001

Tip

Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters

Always enter a Peg or Usage counter’s name enclosed in quotes.

The following table lists the Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters.

Table 8: Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters

Name SNMP Description Counter Type

“Call Attempts” Call Attempts Peg

“Collect Digits Attempts” Collect Digits Attempts Peg

“Call Completion Attempts” Call Completion Attempts Peg

“Terminating Calls Answered” Total Terminating Calls Answered Peg

“Routing Failures” Routing Failures Peg

“Line Busy” Line Busy Peg

“Originating Calls Abandoned” Total Originating Calls Abandoned Peg

“Terminating Calls Ring No Answer”

Terminating Calls Ring No Answer Peg

“Protocol errors not associated with a call”

Protocol errors not associated with a call Peg

Page 722: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

714 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

queryCounterDefs

To view the PIDs currently running on the T7000, see “ps” on page 605.

queryCounterDefs <pid>

This command shows the counter definitions for a given PID.

queryCounterDefs 38

NOTE: Output trimmed to conserve space

**** Counter Definition Named (Data Transmitted on a link) *****Type: (PEG COUNTER)Message: (Mtp1Transmit)Category: (0x1)Default State: (ENABLED)Current State: (ENABLED)Dimension: (3)Threshold (Low): (0)Threshold EventID (Low): (0x0)Threshold (Med): (0)Threshold EventID (Med): (0x0)Threshold (High): (0)Threshold EventID (High): (0x0)Dimensioned Counter Names: (MSUs) (MSUOctets) (LSSUs)

Internal Peg Index: (0)Counter ID: (0)Peg Function: (_Mtp1Sm+0x74)FSM definition: (_Mtp1SmDef+0x0)Instance Type: (0x4)

Syntax Description

<pid> Process ID. See “Peg and Usage Counter PIDs” on page 709.

Page 723: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 715990-1012-001

enableCounterenableCounter <name> <pid> [card]

This command enables an individual counter. If card is omitted, the counter is enabled on all cards in the shelf

enableCounter “SSP MSUs Transmitted” 3e 12

Syntax Description

<name> name of counter

For Call Processing counter names, see “Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters” on page 713.

For MTP Level 1 counter names, see “MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 709.

For MTP Level 2 counter names, see “MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 710.

For MTP Level 3 counter names, see “MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 711.

For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see “SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters” on page 712.

<pid> Process ID. See “Peg and Usage Counter PIDs” on page 709.

<card> card number. Range: 1 — 20

Page 724: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

716 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

disableCounterdisableCounter <name> <pid> [card]

This command disables an individual counter. If card is omitted, the counter is disabled on all cards in the shelf

disableCounter “SSP MSUs Transmitted” 3e 12

Syntax Description

<name> name of counter

For Call Processing counter names, see “Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters” on page 713.

For MTP Level 1 counter names, see “MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 709.

For MTP Level 2 counter names, see “MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 710.

For MTP Level 3 counter names, see “MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 711.

For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see “SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters” on page 712.

<pid> Process ID. See “Peg and Usage Counter PIDs” on page 709.

<card> card number. Range: 1 — 20

Page 725: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 717990-1012-001

queryCounterDefqueryCounterDef <name> <pid> [usageState]

This command shows the definition of a single counter in a pid.

queryCounterDef "SSP MSUs Transmitted" 3e**Counter Definition Named (SSP MSUs Transmitted**Type: (PEG COUNTER)Message: (Subsystem_Prohibited_Transmitted)Category: (0x6)Default State: (ENABLED)Current State: (ENABLED)Dimension: (1)Threshold (Low): (0)Threshold EventID (Low): (0x0)Threshold (Med): (0)Threshold EventID (Med): (0x0)Threshold (High): (0)Threshold EventID (High): (0x0)Internal Peg Index: (4)Counter ID: (4)Peg Function: (_defaultPeg+0x0)FSM definition: (_SCMGSmDef+0x0)Instance Type: (0x2)

Syntax Description

<name> name of counter

For Call Processing counter names, see “Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters” on page 713.

For MTP Level 1 counter names, see “MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 709.

For MTP Level 2 counter names, see “MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 710.

For MTP Level 3 counter names, see “MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 711.

For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see “SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters” on page 712.

<pid> Process ID. See “Peg and Usage Counter PIDs” on page 709.

[usageState] Optional. For usage counters, the type of counter.• START

• STOP

Default is STOP.

Page 726: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

718 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryCountersqueryCounters <pid> [card] [NONZERO]

This command shows the current values of all the counters in the pid.

queryCounters 3f 1 NONZEROPeg: (Originating Calls Abandoned) SM Instance (48). 1Peg: (Total Registered Categories) SM Instance (0). 44Peg: (Call Completion Attempts) SM Instance (48). 1Peg: (Call Completion Attempts) SM Instance (77). 1Peg: (Call Attempts) SM Instance (48). 1Peg: (Call Attempts) SM Instance (58). 1Peg: (Terminating Calls Ring No Answer) SM Instance (77). 1Peg: (Collect Digits Attempts) SM Instance (48). 1Peg: (Collect Digits Attempts) SM Instance (58). 1Peg: (Total SM Instances In PID) SM Instance (0). 2259Peg: (Terminating Calls Answered) SM Instance (48). 1

Syntax Description

<pid> Process ID. See “Peg and Usage Counter PIDs” on page 709.

[card] optional card number. Range: 1 — 20

Default is the slot number of the card where the command is input

[NONZERO] optional, only shows counters that have a count that is not zero

Page 727: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Performance Monitoring 719990-1012-001

queryCounterqueryCounter <name> <pid> [card] [instance]

This command shows the current values of a specific counter in the pid.

queryCounter "SSA MSUs Received" 3eNo counts for (SSA MSUs Received).Counter disabled or counts = 0.

Syntax Description

<name> name of counter

For Call Processing counter names, see “Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters” on page 713.

For MTP Level 1 counter names, see “MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 709.

For MTP Level 2 counter names, see “MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 710.

For MTP Level 3 counter names, see “MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 711.

For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see “SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters” on page 712.

<pid> Process ID. See “Peg and Usage Counter PIDs” on page 709.

[card] optional card number. Range: 1 — 20

Default is the slot number of the card where the command is input

[instance] optional, the number of the facility or device associated withthe counter

Page 728: 1012 Command Line Interface

Peg Counts and Usage Intervals

720 Performance Monitoring T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

resetCounterresetCounter <name> <pid> [card] [instance]

This command resets a counter to zero.

NOTE: For usage counters all of the instances are reset.

resetCounter "SSA MSUs Received" 3e

Syntax Description

<name> name of counter

For Call Processing counter names, see “Call Processing Peg and Usage Counters” on page 713.

For MTP Level 1 counter names, see “MTP Level 1 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 709.

For MTP Level 2 counter names, see “MTP Level 2 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 710.

For MTP Level 3 counter names, see “MTP Level 3 Peg and Usage Counters” on page 711.

For SCCP/TCAP counter names, see “SCCP/TCAP Peg and Usage Counters” on page 712.

<pid> • Process ID. See “Peg and Usage Counter PIDs” on page 709.

[card] optional card number. Range: 1 — 20

Default is the slot number of the card where the command is input

[instance] optional, the number of the facility or device associated withthe counter

Page 729: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Clock Cards 721990-1012-001

8Clock Cards

The commands in this chapter relate to T7000 timing.

CC2

Use the commands in this section when directly connected to a CC2.

Most CC2 commands follow a common syntax pattern;

• Entering the command without any parameters defaults to a query.For example, the commands timeConfig and timeConfig query are equivalent

• Entering the command with a parameter of “help” displays the help string for the command

• For required parameters, enter the name of the parameter, “=”, and the value. For example, the date parameter requires a value, enter date=10/10/2007.

NOTE: Options may be entered in any order.

• If an optional parameter is omitted from a command, CC2 maintains the value currently associated with the parameter. For example, you may change the time without changing the date using the timeConfig command.

Page 730: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

722 Clock Cards T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

mbusConfig (i)mbusConfig <help>

This command controls the functions of the CC2 and message bus.

mbusConfig helpUsage: mbusConfig [help] [query] [active=<a|b|ab>] [master=<a|b>] [autoadd = <a|b|ab|none>]

mbusConfig (ii)mbusConfig [query]

This command controls the functions of the CC2 and message bus.

mbusConfig Card/Msgbus InSv Auto-add ----------- ---- --------<*> [A] Y Y B Y Y

Syntax Description

<help> Shows the usage string for the command.

Syntax Description

[query] Shows the current status of each CC2 with its corresponding message bus. The query option is the default.

NOTE: In the query <*> identifies the master card and [] indicate to which you are connected.

Page 731: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Clock Cards 723990-1012-001

mbusConfig (iii)mbusConfig [active=<a | b | ab>] [master=<a | b>] [autoadd = <a | b | ab | none>]

This command controls the functions of the CC2 and message bus.

mbusConfig active=a master=a autoadd=ab[Removing clock card B]--> shutting down message bus B[Removal complete]Settings updated.

mbusConfig active=ab master=a autoadd=ab[Adding clock card B]--> starting up message bus B[Clock card addition complete]Settings updated.

Syntax Description

[active = <a | b | ab>]

Controls which CC2s and message buses are in service. The purpose of this command is to prepare to remove or reboot a CC2. Both CC2s can not be out of service at the same time.

• a — activates CC2 A

• b — activates CC2 B

• ab — activates both CC2s

[master = <a | b>]

Controls which CC2 is the master. Both cards can not be the master at the same time.

• a — makes CC2 A the master.

• b — makes CC2 B the master.

[autoadd = <a | b | ab | none>]

Configures auto-add state of a message bus. At least one message bus will be in service at all times, even if both are configured not to auto-add.

• Y — the message bus is automatically activated when its CC2 is booted.

• N — the message bus stays out of service when the associated CC2 boots.

Page 732: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

724 Clock Cards T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

timeConfig (i)timeConfig <help>

This command is used to set the time and time zone on the master CC2 on the T7000.

timeConfig helpUsage: timeConfig [help] [query] [time=<hh:mm:ss>] [date=<mm/dd/yyyy>] [tz=<minutes vs. GMT>] [isdst=<y|n>]

timeConfig (ii)timeConfig [query]

This command is used to set the time and time zone on the master CC2 on the T7000.

timeConfigCurrent GMT time is 12:59:21 Tuesday, October 09, 2007.Current LOCAL time is 13:59:21 Tuesday, October 09, 2007.Local timezone is 0 minutes relative to GMT.DST is in effect.DST is enabled for the southern hemisphere using an absolute algorithm.Local time is moved back 1 hour at 21:00 on 1 February.Local time is moved ahead 1 hour at 05:00 on 1 July.

Syntax Description

<help> Shows the usage string for the command.

Syntax Description

[query] Shows the current time, date, and DST parameters provisioned on the T7000. The query option is assumed if no other option is specified.

Page 733: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Clock Cards 725990-1012-001

timeConfig (iii)timeConfig [time=<hh:mm:ss>] [date=<mm/dd/yyyy>] [tz=<minutes vs. GMT>] [isdst=<y | n>]

This command sets the time and time zone on the master CC2 on the T7000. Use local time in the 24-hour format, show whether DST is in effect.

timeConfig time=17:37:00 date=6/19/2001 tz=-300 isdst=y

Time set to 21:37:00 06/19/2001 GMTSettings updated.Current GMT time is 21:37:00 Tuesday, June 19, 2001.Current LOCAL time is 17:37:00 Tuesday, June 19, 2001.Local timezone is -300 minutes relative to GMT.DST is in effect.DST is enabled for the northern hemisphere using a relative algorithm.Local time is moved ahead 1 hour at 02:00 on the first Sunday in April. Local time is moved back 1 hour at 02:00 on the last Sunday in October.

Syntax Description

[time=<hh:mm:ss>] Enter the time is in a 24 hour clock format with colons between entries:

• 00-24 — hours

• 00-60 — minutes

• 00-60 — seconds

[date=<mm/dd/yyyy>]

Enter the date value separated by forward slashes and in North American date format:

• 01-12 — month (mm)

• 01-31 — day (dd)

• #### — year (yyyy)

[tz=<minutes vs. GMT>]

the difference (-720) to (840) between Greenwich Mean Time and the time zone of the T7000’s location, for example

• -300 — Eastern U.S. timezone

• -360 — Central U.S. timezone

• -420 — Mountain U.S. timezone

• -480 — Pacific U.S. timezone

NOTE: Use values based on the difference of local standard time versus GMT, do not adjust for DST.

[isdst=<y | n>] Use one of the following:

• n — Daylight saving time is not in effect

• y — Daylight saving time is in effect

Page 734: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

726 Clock Cards T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

dstConfig (i)dstConfig <help>

This command is used to set the rules for and enable daylight saving time (DST).

dstConfig helpUsage: dstConfig [help] [query] [enable|disable] [hemisphere=<n|s>] [h1hr=<hour>] [h2hr=<hour>] [h1date=<mm/dd>|<mm,weekno,weekday>] [h2date=<mm/dd>|<mm,weekno,weekday>]

dstConfig (ii)dstConfig [query]

This command is used to set the rules for and enable daylight saving time (DST).

dstConfigCurrent GMT time is 13:15:09 Tuesday, October 09, 2007.Current LOCAL time is 14:15:09 Tuesday, October 09, 2007.Local timezone is 0 minutes relative to GMT.DST is in effect.DST is enabled for the southern hemisphere using an absolute algorithm.Local time is moved back 1 hour at 21:00 on 1 February.Local time is moved ahead 1 hour at 05:00 on 1 July.

Syntax Description

<help> Shows the usage string for the command.

Syntax Description

[query] Shows the current time, date, and DST parameters provisioned on the T7000. The query option is assumed if no other option is specified.

Page 735: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Clock Cards 727990-1012-001

dstConfig (iii)dstConfig [enable | disable] [hemisphere=<n | s>] [h1hr=<hour>] [h2hr=<hour>] [h1date=<mm/dd> | <mm,weekno,weekday>] [h2date=<mm/dd> | <mm,weekno,weekday>]

This command sets the rules for and enable daylight saving time (DST). You can enabled or disabled DST apart from provisioning the rules or you can do it at once. There are two types of DST:

• Absolute DST means you set the specific days and times at which the one-hour jumps forward and backward occur.

• Relative DST means you set the nth occurrences of weekdays in a month to be the days at which the one-hour forward and backward jumps occur.Absolute DST and relative DST are mutually exclusive and provisioning one will overwrite the other.

Syntax Description

[enable | disable] • enable — activates the DST rules

• disable — deactivates the DST rules

DST rules are disabled by default until provisioned and enabled. You can use the enable option in the same dstConfig command as the rules.

[hemisphere=<n | s>] • n — Northern

• s — Southern

When northern hemisphere is specified, the first half date (h1date) is the spring forward date, and the second half date (h2date) as a fall back. For the southern hemisphere, these are reversed.

[h1hr=<hour>] • h1hr — 0 - 23, the hour that the DST change occurs in first half of the year (January-June).

NOTE: For U.S. DST rules this value should be 2, because the changeover occurs at 2:00 AM in the Spring.

[h2hr=<hour>] • h2hr — 0 - 23, the hour that the DST change occurs in second half of the year (July-December).

NOTE: For U.S. DST rules this value should be 2, because the changeover occurs at 2:00 AM in the Fall.

Page 736: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

728 Clock Cards T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

dstConfig enable hemisphere=s h1hr=3 h2hr=3 h1date=4/10 h2date=10/10

Relative for the first Sunday in April and last Sunday in October:

dstConfig enable hemisphere=n h1hr=2 h2hr=2 h1date=4,1,0 h2date=10,0,0Settings updated.

Current GMT time is 13:19:41 Tuesday, October 09, 2007.Current LOCAL time is 13:19:41 Tuesday, October 09, 2007.Local timezone is 0 minutes relative to GMT.DST is not in effect.DST is enabled for the northern hemisphere using a relative algorithm.Local time is moved ahead 1 hour at 02:00 on the first Sunday in April.Local time is moved back 1 hour at 02:00 on the last Sunday in October.

[h1date=<mm/dd> | <mm,weekno,weekday>] [h2date=<mm/dd> | <mm,weekno,weekday>]

The dates have two options absolute and relative formats, for the first half of the year h1date and the second h2date. The formats for h1date and h2date must be the same.

The absolute format is the absolute date:

• mm — 1-6 for h1date and 7-12 for h2date

• dd — 1-31

The relative format has three comma-separated entries:

• First entry — the number of the month in which the change takes place.

• Second entry — the week number of the month in which the change occurs (1 – 4 or 0 for the last week).

• Third entry — the day of the week 0 — Sunday1 — Monday2 — Tuesday3 — Wednesday4 — Thursday5 — Friday6 — Saturday

Syntax Description

Page 737: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Clock Cards 729990-1012-001

tdmConfig (i)tdmConfig <help>

This command is used to set the CC2 to generate timing from which the other cards on the T7000 synchronize.

tdmConfig helpUsage: tdmConfig [help] [query] [mode=<sonet|sdh>] [revertive=<y|n>] [src1=<null|net1|net2|bits1|bits2|sync1|sync2|comp1|comp2|10mhz>] [src2=<null|net1|net2|bits1|bits2|sync1|sync2|comp1|comp2|10mhz>] [src3=<null|net1|net2|bits1|bits2|sync1|sync2|comp1|comp2|10mhz>] [src4=<null|net1|net2|bits1|bits2|sync1|sync2|comp1|comp2|10mhz>] [output1=<off|regen|net1|net2>] [output2=<off|regen|net1|net2>] [net1freq=<t1e1|8khz>] [net2freq=<t1e1|8khz>] [freerun=<y|n>]

tdmConfig (ii)tdmConfig [query]

This command is used to set the CC2 to generate timing from which the other cards on the T7000 synchronize.

tdmConfig queryState = LOCKED Mode = SONET Src Selection = REVERTIVE<*> Primary Source Ref = NETREF 1 [GOOD] Secondary Source Ref = COMPOSITE 1 [GOOD] Tertiary Source Ref = BITS 2 [BAD]Network Ref 1 Freq = 1.544/2.048 MHzNetwork Ref 2 Freq = 1.544/2.048 MHzClock Output 1: OFFClock Output 2: OFFForced Freerun (master only) = NClkGood Enable = reflects clocks

Syntax Description

<help> Shows the usage string for the command.

Syntax Description

[query] Shows the current TDM status and configuration. The query option is assumed if no other option is specified.

NOTE: In the query <*> represents the reference currently selected and T identifies that an input is terminating.

Page 738: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

730 Clock Cards T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Tip

tdmConfig (iii)tdmConfig [mode=<sonet | sdh>] [revertive=<y | n>][src1=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>][src2=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>][src3=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>][src4=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>][output1=<off | regen | net1 | net2>] [output2=<off | regen | net1 | net2>][bits1term=<none | a | b | ab>] [bits2term=<none | a | b | ab>] [sync1term=<none | a | b | ab>] [sync2term=<none | a | b | ab>][comp1term=<none | a | b | ab>] [comp2term=<none | a | b | ab>][net1freq=<t1e1 | 8khz>] [net2freq=<t1e1 | 8khz>][freerun=<y | n>]

This command sets the CC2 to generate timing from which the other cards on the T7000 synchronize. This timing drives the cards’ Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) output on T1, DS3, and OC3 (future) trunks and across the midplane voice bus.

Put network timing references on two separate cards. If one card goes down, timing is derived from the reference on the alternate card.

This command allows for up to four source references for T7000 alignment and the two clock outputs. The source references are the following:

• Primary

• Secondary

• Tertiary

• Quaternary

Set the clock reference after the OpenManager is installed and configured.

Syntax Description

[mode=<sonet | sdh>] Specifies the timing mode of the T7000:

• sonet — Synchronous Optical Network for North American networks

• sdh — Synchronous Digital Hierarchy for European/international networks

The T7000 cannot have a timing mode that is incompatible with any of the selected source references.

Page 739: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Clock Cards 731990-1012-001

[revertive=<y | n> • 1 — yes, causes the CC2 to always prefer the highest priority available timing reference, even if it has to switch away from another valid reference.

• 2 — no or non-revertive mode makes the CC2 stay on a valid reference until it fails, regardless of priority.

[src1=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>]

[src2=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>]

[src3=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>]

[src4=<null | net1 | net2 | bits1 | bits2 | sync1 | sync2 | comp1 | comp2 | 10mhz>]

These are the four timing references (src1 - 4) of the T7000. Provision references in order from primary to quaternary. Provision the sources out of sequence is not allowed, for example if the primary (src1) source is null, the remaining sources can not be provisioned.

• null — disables the source

• net1 — a derived network reference provided to the CC2 by front cards in T7000 (1.544 MHz SONET/ 2.048 MHz SDH / 8 KHz)

• net2 — another derived network reference, see net1

• bits1 — Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) clocks are 1.544 MHz signals and use the timing from North America on T1s. A BITS clock connects to the mini DB9 connector.

• bits2 — another BITs reference, see bits1

• sync1 — in SDH mode, BITS inputs are disallowed, and E1 sync pulse inputs are available. An E1 sync pulse clock is a 2.048 MHz signal on an E1 trunk. An E1 sync pulse clock connects to the mini DB9 connector.

• sync2 — another E1 sync pulse clock, see sync1

• comp1 — a composite clock signal that is a bipolar clock signal that runs at 64 KHz. Embedded within the signal is a bipolar violation every 8 clocks or 64+8 KHz. Composite clocks connect to the CC2 though the mini DB9 connector, typically from a Global Positioning System (GPS) unit.

• comp2 — another composite clock signal, see comp1

• 10mhz — the 10 MHz sine wave that connects through the BNC connector

Syntax Description

Page 740: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

732 Clock Cards T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

[output1 = <off | regen | net1 | net2>]

[output2 = <off | regen | net1 | net2>]

Configures clock outputs on CLK I/O ports 1 and 2.

• off — disables clock output, this is currently the only supported configuration

• regen — uses DS1 BITS or E1 sync pulse clock when netref1 and netref2 are not available, this configuration is not supported

• net1 — routes network reference 1 to the specified CLK I/O output (clock card 1 or clock card 2), this configuration is not supported

• net2 — routes network reference 2 to the specified CLK I/O output (clock card 1 or clock card 2), this configuration is not supported

[bits1term = <none | a | b | ab>]

[bits2term = <none | a | b | ab>]

Configures termination of the bits input on the CLK I/O port 1 (bits1term) or 2 (bits2term).

• none — neither CC2 should terminate the bits input

• a — terminate the bits input on CC2 A

• b — terminate the bits input on CC2 B

• ab — terminate the bits1 on both CC2s

[sync1term = <none | a | b | ab>]

[sync2term = <none | a | b | ab>]

Configures termination of the sync input on the CLK I/O port 1 (sync1term) or 2 (sync2term).

• none — neither CC2 should terminate the bits input

• a — terminate the bits input on CC2 A

• b — terminate the bits input on CC2 B

• ab — terminate the bits1 on both CC2s

[comp1term = <none | a | b | ab>]

[comp2term = <none | a | b | ab>]

Configures termination of the comp input on the CLK I/O port 1 (comp1term) or 2 (comp2term).

• none — neither CC2 should terminate the bits input

• a — terminate the bits input on CC2 A

• b — terminate the bits input on CC2 B

• ab — terminate the bits1 on both CC2s

[net1freq = <t1e1 | 8khz>]

[net2freq = <t1e1 | 8khz>]

Configures the frequencies of network references 1 (net1freq) and 2 (net2freq).

• t1e1 — translates to 1.544 MHz in SONET mode and 2.048 MHz in SDH mode.

• 8khz — tells the CC2 to expect network reference timing at a frequency of 8 KHz. Assumes that the front card is converting the rate before providing the reference to the CC2s.

Syntax Description

Page 741: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Clock Cards 733990-1012-001

tdmConfig freerun=y

[freerun = <y | n>] Forces the master CC2 into freerun mode, this puts the T7000 into local timing mode.

• y — puts the T7000 into freerun mode

• n — the T7000 returns to timing from valid source references

Syntax Description

Page 742: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

734 Clock Cards T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

bitsConfig (i)bitsConfig [help]

This command configures the BITS of the T1 framers that physically connect to the CC2 BITS1 and BITS2 connectors. Provision the BITS configuration when using a bits1 or bits2 as a TDM reference.

bitsConfig helpUsage: bitsConfig [help] [query] [bits1frame=<esf|d4>] [bits1line=<b8zs|ami>] [bits1lbo=<0|133|266|399|533|-7.5|-15|-22.5>] [bits2frame=<esf|d4>] [bits2line=<b8zs|ami>] [bits2lbo=<0|133|266|399|533|-7.5|-15|-22.5>]

bitsConfig (ii)bitsConfig [query]

This command configures the BITS of the T1 framers that physically connect to the CC2 BITS1 and BITS2 connectors. Provision the BITS configuration when using a bits1 or bits2 as a TDM reference.

bitsConfig query

BITS 1 BITS 2Frame format ESF ESFLine coding B8ZS B8ZSLine build out 0-133 0-133

Alarm StatusLOS 1 1LOF 1 1AIS 0 0

Syntax Description

<help> Shows the usage string for the command.

Syntax Description

[query] Shows the BITS configuration and alarm status.

Page 743: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Clock Cards 735990-1012-001

bitsConfig (iii)bitsConfig [bits1frame=<esf | d4>] [bits1line=<b8zs | ami>][bits1lbo=<0 | 133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | -7.5 | -15 | -22.5>] [bits2frame=<esf | d4>] [bits2line=<b8zs | ami>] [bits2lbo=<0 | 133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | -7.5 | -15 | -22.5>]

This command configures the BITS of the T1 framers that physically connect to the CC2 BITS1 and BITS2 connectors. Provision the BITS configuration when using a bits1 or bits2 as a TDM reference.

NOTE: The BITS configuration applies to the master and slave CC2.

bitsConfig bits1frame=esf bits1line=b8zs bits1lbo=0 bits2frame=esf bits2line=b8zs bits2lbo=0

Syntax Description

[bits1frame=<esf | d4>]

[bits2frame=<esf | d4>]

Configures the frame format for BITS 1 (bits1frame) or BITS 2 (bits2frame).

• esf — Extended-Superframe format, default setting

• d4 — Superframe format

[bits1line=<b8zs | ami>]

[bits2line=<b8zs | ami>]

Configures the line coding format for BITS 1 (bits1line) or BITS 2 (bits2line).

• b8zs — Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution, default setting

• ami — Alternate Mark Inversion

[bits1lbo=<0 | 133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | -7.5 | -15 | -22.5>]

[bits2lbo=<0 | 133 | 266 | 399 | 533 | -7.5 | -15 | -22.5>]

Configures the line build out for BITS 1 (bits1lbo) or BITS 2 (bits2lbo).

• 0 — 0-133 ft. or 0 dB

• 133 — 133-266 ft.

• 266 — 266-399 ft.

• 399 — 399-533 ft.

• 533 — 533-655 ft.

• -7.5 — -7.5 dB

• -15 — -15 dB

• -22.5 — -22.5 dB

Page 744: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

736 Clock Cards T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

sysStatussysStatus

The command shows the state of all devices monitored by system audits. This command does not have parameters

sysStatusOCX Chassis Data -- P/N: 893-0002-001 Rev: B00 S/N: S200150

Fuse status: OKPower board A status: OKPower board B status: OK

Local Clock Good: YPartner Clock Good: Y

Current battery voltages:Va = 53.632v Vb = 0.000v

Current board temperatures:Ta = 31.5 deg. C. Tb = 23.5 deg. C.

Current fan speeds, temps, and states:Fan Speed(RPM) Fault? 1 2533 N 2 2607 N 3 2333 N 4 2440 NOverride state: normalInlet temp : 23.50 deg. C.Outlet temp 1: 27.02 deg. C.Outlet temp 2: 15.21 deg. C.status bit 1: 0 status bit 0: 0overtemp?: Ntray failure?: N

Page 745: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Clock Cards 737990-1012-001

testLEDstestLEDs <1 | 0>

This command tests all LEDs and relays in the T7000. The LED test only tests the LEDs on the CC2 running the test and on the T7000 chassis.

testLEDs 1

Syntax Description

<1 | 0> • 1 — to begin the LED test

• 0 — to end the LED test

Page 746: 1012 Command Line Interface

CC2

738 Clock Cards T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Page 747: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering 739990-1012-001

AAppendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering

Span and Trunk Numbering (Decimal)

The following table lists which trunks (timeslots) belong to which spans. This tablepresents the information in decimal format.

sp

0/1

sp

1/2

sp

2/3

sp

3/4

sp

4/5

sp

5/6

sp

6/7

sp

7/8

sp

8/9

sp

9/10

sp

10/11

sp

11/12

sp

12/13

sp

13/14

sp

14/15

sp

15/16

sp

16/17

sp

17/18

sp

18/19

sp

19/20

trunk 0 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240 264 288 312 336 360 384 408 432 456

trunk 1 1 25 49 73 97 121 145 169 193 217 241 265 289 313 337 361 385 409 433 457

trunk 2 2 26 50 74 98 122 146 170 194 218 242 266 290 314 338 362 386 410 434 458

trunk 3 3 27 51 75 99 123 147 171 195 219 243 267 291 315 339 363 387 411 435 459

trunk 4 4 28 52 76 100 124 148 172 196 220 244 268 292 316 340 364 388 412 436 460

trunk 5 5 29 53 77 101 125 149 173 197 221 245 269 293 317 341 365 389 413 437 461

trunk 6 6 30 54 78 102 126 150 174 198 222 246 270 294 318 342 366 390 414 438 462

trunk 7 7 31 55 79 103 127 151 175 199 223 247 271 295 319 343 367 391 415 439 463

trunk 8 8 32 56 80 104 128 152 176 200 224 248 272 296 320 344 369 392 416 440 464

trunk 9 9 33 57 81 105 129 153 177 201 225 249 273 297 321 345 369 393 417 441 465

trunk 10 10 34 58 82 106 130 154 178 202 226 250 274 298 322 346 370 394 418 442 466

trunk 11 11 35 59 83 107 131 155 179 203 227 251 275 299 323 347 371 395 419 443 467

trunk 12 12 36 60 84 108 132 156 180 204 228 252 276 300 324 348 372 396 420 444 468

trunk 13 13 37 61 85 109 133 157 181 205 229 253 277 301 325 349 373 397 421 445 469

trunk 14 14 38 62 86 110 134 158 182 206 230 254 278 302 326 350 374 398 422 446 470

trunk 15 15 39 63 87 111 135 159 183 207 231 255 279 303 327 351 375 399 423 447 471

trunk 16 16 40 64 88 112 136 160 184 208 232 256 280 304 328 352 376 400 424 448 472

trunk 17 17 41 65 89 113 137 161 185 209 233 257 281 305 329 353 377 401 425 449 473

trunk 18 18 42 66 90 114 138 162 186 210 234 258 282 306 330 354 378 402 426 450 474

trunk 19 19 43 67 91 115 139 163 187 211 235 259 283 307 331 355 379 403 427 451 475

trunk 20 20 44 68 92 116 140 164 188 212 236 260 284 308 332 356 380 404 428 452 476

trunk 21 21 45 69 93 117 141 165 189 213 237 261 285 309 333 357 381 405 429 453 477

trunk 22 22 46 70 94 118 142 166 190 214 238 262 286 310 334 358 382 406 430 454 478

trunk 23 23 47 71 95 119 143 167 191 215 239 263 287 311 335 359 383 407 431 455 479

Page 748: 1012 Command Line Interface

Span and Trunk Numbering (Hexadecimal)

740 Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Span and Trunk Numbering (Hexadecimal)

The following table lists which trunks (timeslots) belong to which spans. This tablepresents the information in hexadecimal format.

sp0/1

sp1/2

sp2/3

sp3/4

sp4/5

sp5/6

sp6/7

sp7/8

sp8/9

sp9/10

sp10/11

sp11/12

sp12/13

sp13/14

sp14/15

sp15/16

sp16/17

sp17/18

sp18/19

sp19/20

trunk 0 0 18 30 48 60 78 90 A8 C0 D8 F0 108 120 138 150 168 180 198 1B0 1C8

trunk 1 1 19 31 49 61 79 91 A9 C1 D9 F1 109 121 139 151 169 181 199 1B1 1C9

trunk 2 2 1A 32 4A 62 7A 92 AA C2 DA F2 10A 122 13A 152 16A 182 19A 1B2 1CA

trunk 3 3 1B 33 4B 63 7B 93 AB C3 DB F3 10B 123 13B 153 16B 183 19B 1B3 1CB

trunk 4 4 1C 34 4C 64 7C 94 AC C4 DC F4 10C 124 13C 154 16C 184 19C 1B4 1CC

trunk 5 5 1D 35 4D 65 7D 95 AD C5 DD F5 10D 125 13D 155 16D 185 19D 1B5 1CD

trunk 6 6 1E 36 4E 66 7E 96 AE C6 DE F6 10E 126 13E 156 16E 186 19E 1B6 1CE

trunk 7 7 1F 37 4F 67 7F 97 AF C7 DF F7 10F 127 13F 157 16F 187 19F 1B7 1CF

trunk 8 8 20 38 50 68 80 98 B0 C8 E0 F8 110 128 140 158 170 188 1A0 1B8 1D0

trunk 9 9 21 39 51 69 81 99 B1 C9 E1 F9 111 129 141 159 171 189 1A1 1B9 1D1

trunk 10 A 22 3A 52 6A 82 9A B2 CA E2 FA 112 12A 142 15A 172 18A 1A2 1BA 1D2

trunk 11 B 23 3B 53 6B 83 9B B3 CB E3 FB 113 12B 143 15B 173 18B 1A3 1BB 1D3

trunk 12 C 24 3C 54 6C 84 9C B4 CC E4 FC 114 12C 144 15C 174 18C 1A4 1BC 1D4

trunk 13 D 25 3D 55 6D 85 9D B5 CD E5 FD 115 12D 145 15D 175 18D 1A5 1BD 1D5

trunk 14 E 26 3E 56 6E 86 9E B6 CE E6 FE 116 12E 146 15E 176 18E 1A6 1BE 1D6

trunk 15 F 27 3F 57 6F 87 9F B7 CF E7 FF 117 12F 147 15F 177 18F 1A7 1BF 1D7

trunk 16 10 28 40 58 70 88 A0 B8 D0 E8 100 118 130 148 160 178 190 1A8 1C0 1D8

trunk 17 11 29 41 59 71 89 A1 B9 D1 E9 101 119 131 149 161 179 191 1A9 1C1 1D9

trunk 18 12 2A 42 5A 72 8A A2 BA D2 EA 102 11A 132 14A 162 17A 192 1AA 1C2 1DA

trunk 19 13 2B 43 5B 73 8B A3 BB D3 EB 103 11B 133 14B 163 17B 193 1AB 1C3 1DB

trunk 20 14 2C 44 5C 74 8C A4 BC D4 EC 104 11C 134 14C 164 17C 194 1AC 1C4 1DC

trunk 21 15 2D 45 5D 75 8D A5 BD D5 ED 105 11D 135 14D 165 17D 195 1AD 1C5 1DD

trunk 22 16 2E 46 5E 76 8E A6 BE D6 EE 106 11E 136 14E 166 17E 196 1AE 1C6 1DE

trunk 23 17 2F 47 5F 77 8F A7 BF D7 EF 107 11F 137 14F 167 17F 197 1AF 1C7 1DF

Page 749: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Hexadecimal

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering 741990-1012-001

Using Hexadecimal

Certain CLI parameters are entered in hexadecimal format. Use the hexadecimal charts or “Hexadecimal Calculator” on page 744 to convert decimal values to hexadecimal values and vice versa.

Hexadecimal Conversion Chart

Hexadecimal or hex is a number representation using the following:

• Digits 0-9 with their usual meaning

• Letters A-F (or a-f) represent hexadecimal digits with values of (decimal) 10 to 15

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

0 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015

1 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031

2 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047

3 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063

4 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079

5 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095

6 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111

7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127

8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159

A 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175

B 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191

C 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207

D 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223

E 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239

F 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255

Page 750: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Hexadecimal

742 Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Hexadecimal ASCII Conversion Chart

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ' p

1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q

2 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r

3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s

4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t

5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u

6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v

7 BEL v 7 G W g w

8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x

9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y

A LF SUB * : J Z j z

B VT ESC + ; K [ k {

C FF FS , < L \ l |

D CR GS _ = M ] m }

E SO RS . > N ^ n ~

F SI US / ? O - o DEL

Page 751: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Hexadecimal

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering 743990-1012-001

Hexadecimal Line Numbering (for an LTC)

Line Hexadecimal Number

Line-0 30

Line-1 31

Line-2 32

Line-3 33

Line-4 34

Line-5 35

Line-6 36

Line-7 37

Line-8 38

Line-9 39

Line-10 3A

Line-11 3B

Line-12 3C

Line-13 3D

Line-14 3F

Line-15 40

Line-16 41

Line-17 42

Line-18 43

Line-19 44

Line-20 45

Line-21 46

Line-22 47

Line-23 48

Line-24 49

Line-25 4A

Line-26 4B

Line-27 4C

Line-28 4D

Line-29 4E

Line-30 4F

Line-31 50

Page 752: 1012 Command Line Interface

Using Hexadecimal

744 Appendix A: Span and Trunk Numbering T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Hexadecimal Calculator

Most Windows operating systems come with a calculator application. To use the calculator to determine hexadecimal values:

Step Action

1 From the Start button, select Programs > Accessories > Calculator.

The calculator appears.

2 Select View>Scientific.

3 Select Dec.

4 Enter the decimal value to convert. For example, 154.

5 Select Hex.

The hexadecimal value appears. For example, 9A.

Page 753: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Appendix B: Protocols 745990-1012-001

BAppendix B: Protocols

This appendix gives a brief overview of various protocols supported by the switch.

Trunk Protocols

For complete details, see Appendix A of the T7000 Provisioning Guide.

FGC

The Feature Group C (FGC) Bell I protocol supports direct-dialed traffic, uses 1 digit for ANI information, 3/10 digits for called party, and 2-stage outpulsing; for example: 911/NPA-Nxx-XXXX and 7 digit ANI.

FGCB2

The Feature Group C Bell II (FGCB2) protocol supports direct-dialed traffic, 2 digits for ANI information and 3/10 digit called number

FGCOS

The Feature Group C Operator Services (FGCOS) protocol supports intraLATA OS calls. This protocol is used for intraLATA toll and assistance calls to a BCC. FGCOS uses the same signaling sequence as FGC.

FGCOF

The Feature Group C Operator Flexible (FGCOF) protocol is based on FGCOS, but has the ability to customize the Stage 1 and Stage 2 outpulsing for any call type.

FGCVZOS

The Feature Group C Verizon Operator Services (FGCVZOS) supports Verizon operator group customization for FGC on top of FGCOS.

FGD

The Feature Group D (FGD) protocol supports 1+ long distance dialing (equal access) and 10 digit ANI.

Page 754: 1012 Command Line Interface

746 Appendix B: Protocols T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

FGDAT

The Feature Group D Access Tandem (FGDAT) protocol supports the switch connecting to an AT with 1+ long distance dialing (equal access) and 10 digit ANI on CAS trunks.

FGDATOS

Feature Group D Access Tandem Operator Services (FGDATOS) supports interLATA OS calls. This protocol is used for interLATA operator services and/or directory assistance call types for domestic Interexchange Carriers. FGCOS uses the same singling sequence as FGDAT.

FGDATEO

The Feature Group D Access Tandem to End Office (FGDATEO) protocol supports the switch in the role of an AT and the far end in the role of an EO using FGD.

FGDEOAT

The Feature Group D End Office to Access Tandem (FGDEOAT) protocol supports the switch in the role of an EO and the far end in the role of an AT using FGD.

FGDEOIC

The Feature Group D End Office to Interexchange Carrier (FGDEOIC) protocol supports the switch in the role of an EO and the far end in the role of an IC using FGD.

FGDICEO

The Feature Group D Interexchange Carrier to End Office (FGDICEO) protocol supports the switch in the role of an IC and the far end in the role of an EO using FGD. The FGDICEO protocol is not symmetrical, rather the terminating sequence is FGD.

FGDINC

Feature Group D for International and Carrier—supports connecting to a legacy/tandem switch. This protocol expects: two stage on international (wink-outpulse-wink-outpulse), single stage domestic (wink-outpulse-wink).

FXO

Foreign Exchange Office—for trunks that connect to an FXO and provide dial tone to a subscriber or trunks in a multi-line hunt group.

Page 755: 1012 Command Line Interface

Trunk Protocols

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Appendix B: Protocols 747990-1012-001

WSMF2WAY

The Wink Start Multi-Frequency Two Way (WSMF2WAY) protocol supports the following calls on inter-exchange trunks: 1+10D, 101XXX+10D, 0+10D, 0, 011+Country Code (CC)+international number, 01+CC+international number operator assisted.

DS

The Digital Signal (DS) protocol supports PRI connections on the network and user side.

SS7

The SS7 protocol supports signaling for SS7 trunk groups.

FXO

The Foreign Exchange Office (FXO) protocol supports trunks that connect to an FXO and provide dial tone to a subscriber or trunks in a multi-line hunt group.

DIDMF

The Direct Inward Dialing, Multi-Frequency (DIDMF) protocol supports CAS trunks that connect to a PBX.

DIDDTMF

The Direct Inward Dialing, Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DIDDTMF) protocol supports CAS trunks that connect to a PBX.

Page 756: 1012 Command Line Interface

748 Appendix B: Protocols T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Other Protocols

IDT

The Integrated Digital Terminal (IDT) protocol supports Interface Groups that connect the switch to an RDT and use GR-303 protocol.

MGCP

Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) supports multimedia conferences over IP (Internet Protocol). MGCP is an ASCII-based, application-layer control protocol that establishes, maintains, and ends calls between two or more terminations.

SIP

The Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) supports calls using Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP).

Page 757: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 749990-1036-001

CAppendix C: Accessing the Switch

You can execute CLI commands locally from your switch room, or you can log on to the switch remotely.

Local access requires a PC running a terminal emulation program and a physical connection to the craft port on a T700 card.

Remote access requires an Internet connection, and a PC running either a terminal emulation program with a telnet client, or the Open Manager Client.

In this chapter:

• Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch

• Terra Term Professional

• Procomm Plus

• Open Manager Telnet

• HyperTerminal

Page 758: 1012 Command Line Interface

Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch

750 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch

In order to establish a remote connection to a card, you will need that card’s IP address. The following sections illustrate several ways to discover a card’s IP address.

ISEHouse BOOTP Table

If you have access to the PC that is running ISEHouse, you can find the IP address of every card on the switch from the BOOTP table.

The BOOTP table shows the IP address of every card that boots from ISEHouse. The cards are listed under the “DeviceName” column” and the IP address of that card is listed under the “IP Address” column.

For example, the first line of the above figure shows that Baltimore CCB (Clock Card B) has an IP address of 179.19.164.25.

Page 759: 1012 Command Line Interface

OM Client Switch Properties

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 751990-1036-001

OM Client Switch Properties

If you have an OM Client running on your PC, you can discover the IP address of the card that connects to the OM Client.

Step Action

1 From the Network View of the OM click Network View.

2 Right-click the switch graphic to which you want to connect.

A pop-up menu appears.

3 Select Properties.

The primaryIP attribute contains the IP address of the card that connects to the OM.

Page 760: 1012 Command Line Interface

Terra Term Professional

752 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

Tip

Terra Term Professional

The Terra Term Professional FAQ can be found at: http://ttssh2.sourceforge.jp/manual/en/about/qanda.html

Terra Term Professional is an open source Windows terminal emulator and telnet client that can be used for local or remote switch access.

Taqua distributes Terra Term Professional with new software releases.

Local Access

To use Terra Term Professional for local access, connect a serial cable from the COM port of a PC to the craft port of a BIC, LTC, PIC, PIC II, TIC,TICII or clock card. Next, connect to that card using the Terra Term Professional software.

Terra Term Professional Local Access Prerequisites • Either a DB-9 male to DB-9 female serial cable, or a DB-25 male to DB-

9 female serial cable, depending on the COM port connection on the PC.

• A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with:

• at least one serial port

• an installed copy of Terra Term Professional

Local Connection to the Switch

To make a local connection to the Switch using Terra Term Professional:

Step Action

1 Connect the male end of the serial cable to an unused COM port on the PC.

2 Connect the female end of the serial cable to a craft port on the card with which you want to communicate.

Page 761: 1012 Command Line Interface

Local Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 753990-1036-001

3 In Windows: Start > Programs > Accessories > Terra Term Pro

The New Connection dialog appears.

4 Click the Serial radio button and select the same COM port you chose in step 1.

Click OK.

Step Action

Page 762: 1012 Command Line Interface

Terra Term Professional

754 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

5 Next, configure the serial port settings. Select Setup > Serial port...

The Serial Port Setup dialog appears.

6 From the Port drop-list, select the same COM port you chose in step 1.

7 From the Baud rate drop-list select 38,400.

8 From the Data drop-list select 8.

9 From the Parity drop-list select None.

10 From the Stop drop-list select 1.

11 From the Flow control drop-list select None.

12 Leave the Transmit delay msec/char and msec/line at 0.

Step Action

Page 763: 1012 Command Line Interface

Local Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 755990-1036-001

13 Click OK.

A blank Terra Term Pro window appears.

Note that the Com port and the baud rate are now part of the window title.

14 Select Setup > Terminal.

The Terminal setup dialog appears.

Step Action

Page 764: 1012 Command Line Interface

Terra Term Professional

756 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

15 From Terminal ID, select VT100.

Click OK

16 A blank Terra Term Pro window appears.

Note that the COM port, baud rate, and terminal type are part of the window title.

17 Press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt.

Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

Step Action

Page 765: 1012 Command Line Interface

Remote Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 757990-1036-001

Remote Access

To use Terra Term Professional for remote access, connect the PC to the Internet. Next, connect to a card on the switch using the Terra Term Professional software.

Terra Term Professional Remote Access Prerequisites • A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with:

• a connection to the Internet

• an installed copy of Terra Term Professional

Remote Connection to the Switch

To make a remote connection to the Switch using Terra Term Professional:

Step Action

1 In Windows: Start > Programs > Accessories > Terra Term Pro

The New Connection dialog appears.

The TCP/IP radio button is selected by default.

In the Host field, enter the IP address of the card you want to connect to. To determine this address, see “Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch” on page 750.

In the Service field, select Telnet.

Leave the other fields to their default values.

Click OK.

Page 766: 1012 Command Line Interface

Terra Term Professional

758 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

2 A Terra Term Pro connects to the switch.

Note that the IP Address is now part of the window title. Before logging on, make sure the terminal type is configured properly

3 Select Setup > Terminal.

The Terminal setup dialog appears.

Step Action

Page 767: 1012 Command Line Interface

Remote Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 759990-1036-001

4 From Terminal ID, select VT100.

Click OK

5 Terra Term is still connected to the switch.

You may need to press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt.

Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

Step Action

Page 768: 1012 Command Line Interface

Procomm Plus

760 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

Procomm Plus

Procomm Plus is a Windows terminal emulator and telnet client that can be used for local or remote switch access.

Taqua distributed this program with earlier versions of the switch software.

Local Access

To use Procomm Plus for local access, connect a serial cable from the COM port of a PC to the craft port of a BIC, LTC, PIC, PIC II, TIC, TICII or clock card. Next, connect to that card using the Procomm Plus software

Procomm Plus Local Access Prerequisites • Either a DB-9 male to DB-9 female serial cable, or a DB-25 male to DB-

9 female serial cable, depending on the COM port connection on the PC.

• A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with:

• at least one serial port

• an installed copy of Procomm Plus

Local Connection to the Switch

To make a local connection to the Switch using Procomm Plus:

Step Action

1 Connect the male end of the serial cable to an unused COM port on the PC.

2 Connect the female end of the serial cable to a craft port on the card with which you want to communicate.

3 In Windows: Start > Programs > Procomm Plus > Data Terminal.

Page 769: 1012 Command Line Interface

Local Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 761990-1036-001

4 The Procomm Plus Data Terminal window appears.

Ensure the quick status line has the following settings:

• Terminal type = VT100

• port selection = “direct connect-ComX” (where X corresponds to the COM port you chose in step 1.)

• speed = 38400

• port settings = N81

If not, click on the appropriate part of the quick status line and change.

5 Follow steps 6 through 9 on page 762 to set up a capture file, otherwise skip to step 10 on page 762 to log in.

Step Action

Page 770: 1012 Command Line Interface

Procomm Plus

762 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

6 Select >Options>Data Options>Setup Files.

The Setup dialog appears

Click the Setup... button

7 The Capture Options dialog appears.

Check the box “Query for the file name” when capture is started.

After the change is made the screen Capture File appears.

8 To open the capture file go to Data > Capture File.

9 Type a name to specify the Capture file

Click OK

10 You may need to press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt.

Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user. The login screen appears.

Step Action

Page 771: 1012 Command Line Interface

Remote Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 763990-1036-001

Remote Access

To use Procomm Plus for remote access, connect the PC to the Internet. Next, connect to a card on the switch using the Procomm Plus software.

Procomm Plus Remote Access Prerequisites • A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with:

• a connection to the Internet

• an installed copy of Procomm Plus

Remote Connection to the Switch

To make a remote connection to the Switch using Procomm Plus:

Step Action

1 In Windows: Start > Programs > Procomm Plus > Telnet.

2 The Procomm Plus telnet window appears.

Ensure the quick status line has the following settings:

• Terminal type = VT100

• port selection = “direct connect-Telnet”

If not, click on the appropriate part of the quick status line and change.

Page 772: 1012 Command Line Interface

Procomm Plus

764 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

3 Select >Options>Data Options>Setup Files> Setup button for capture.

Check the box “Query for the file name” when capture is started.

After the change is made the screen Capture File appears.

4 Type a name to specify the Capture file

Click OK

5 Follow steps 6 through 9 on page 765 to set up a capture file, otherwise skip to step 10 on page 765 to log in.

6 Select >Options>Data Options>Setup Files.

The Setup dialog appears

Click the Setup... button

Step Action

Page 773: 1012 Command Line Interface

Remote Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 765990-1036-001

7 The Capture Options dialog appears.

Check the box “Query for the file name” when capture is started.

After the change is made the screen Capture File appears.

8 To open the capture file go to Data > Capture File.

9 Type a name to specify the Capture file

Click OK

10 To Telnet to a T7000 card use the Direct Connect Option.

11 Go to Data > Manual Connect. The manual connect dialog appears.

Enter the IP address of the switch you want to connect to. To determine this address, see “Determining the IP Address of a Card on the Switch” on page 750.

Step Action

Page 774: 1012 Command Line Interface

Procomm Plus

766 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

12 Click OK

The login screen appears.

You may need to press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt.

Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

Step Action

Page 775: 1012 Command Line Interface

Remote Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 767990-1036-001

Open Manager Telnet

Open Manger Telnet is a Windows telnet client available within Open Manager. It can be used for remote switch access.

The Open Manager Telnet program is available from every Open Manager Client.

The Open Manager Telnet sends commands directly to the Primary Management Interface (PMI) card of the switch you select.

Remote Access

Open Manager Telnet Remote Access Prerequisites • A PC running Windows 9x/NT/2000/XP with

• a connection to the Internet

• an installed copy of the Open Manager Client

Remote Connection to the Switch

To make a remote connection to the Switch using Open Manger Telnet:

Step Action

1 From the Network View of the OM click Network View.

2 Right-click a switch graphic to which you want to connect.

A pop-up menu appears.

3 Select Telnet.

The Telnet program appears.

NOTE: The method always connects to the same card the OM connects to.

4 After the login prompt appears, enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

Page 776: 1012 Command Line Interface

HyperTerminal

768 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

HyperTerminal

HyperTerminal is a Windows terminal emulator that can be used for local switch access.

Microsoft bundled HyperTerminal with all versions of Windows from Windows 95 through WIndows XP.

Local Access

To use Hyper-Terminal for local access, connect a serial cable from the COM port of a PC to the craft port of a BIC, LTC, PIC, PIC II, TIC,TICII or clock card. Next, connect to that card using the Hyper-Terminal software.

Hyper-Terminal Local Access Prerequisites• Either a DB-9 male to DB-9 female serial cable, or a DB-25 male to DB-

9 female serial cable, depending on the COM port connection on the PC.

• A PC Windows 9x/NT/2000 with:

• at least one COM port

• an installed copy of HyperTerminal

Local Connection to the Switch

To make a local connection to the switch using HyperTerminal:

Step Action

1 Connect the male end of the serial cable to an unused COM port on the PC.

2 Connect the female end of the serial cable to a craft port on the card with which you want to communicate.

Page 777: 1012 Command Line Interface

Local Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 769990-1036-001

3 In Windows: Start > Programs > Accessories > HyperTerminal > HyperTerminal (ensure it is the Hyper-Terminal entry without the .ht extension).

The Connection Description dialog appears.

4 In the Name field enter OCXdirect or the desired name.

5 Click OK.

The Connect To dialog appears.

6 From the Connect using drop-list, select the same COM port you chose in step 1.

Step Action

Page 778: 1012 Command Line Interface

HyperTerminal

770 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

7 Click OK.

A Properties dialog appears.

8 From the Bits per second drop-list select 38,400.

9 From the Data bits drop-list select 8.

10 From the Parity drop-list select None.

11 From the Stop bits drop-list select 1.

12 Set flow control to None.

13 Click OK.

A blank Hyper-Terminal window appears.

Step Action

Page 779: 1012 Command Line Interface

Local Access

T7000 Getting Started Guide Appendix C: Accessing the Switch 771990-1036-001

14 Select File > Properties.

The Properties dialog appears.

15 Click the Settings tab.

16 From the Emulation drop-list, select VT100.

17 Click OK.

A blank Hyper-Terminal window appears.

18 Press the <Enter> key several times to get the login prompt.

Enter the login name and password of a previously provisioned user.

Step Action

Page 780: 1012 Command Line Interface

HyperTerminal

772 Appendix C: Accessing the Switch T7000 Getting Started Guide990-1036-001

Page 781: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Index 773990-1012-001

Index

Numerics

7-Digit Dialing Across NPA Boundaries 408911

over CAS 136

A

Access Tandem 525Account Codes 154activateCfb 563activateCfd 564activateCff 565activateCfv 562activateLinkSet 639activating

call forwarding busy 563call forwarding don’t answer 564call forwarding fixed 565call forwarding variable 562EOC 357link set 639

addingcodec lists 425hosts 429RDTs 351SCCP node 484SS7 link set 478SS7 links 480SS7 networks 475SS7 routes 482tasks 597

Adding Escape Code Pattern Profiles 144, 157addLea 181addLeaCase 187addLeaSpan 183addPretranslation 224Address 35addTask 597adduser 48addVoiceChnl 189

Advanced Intelligent Network 138AIN 138, 144, 157

Adding Service Patterns 142Creating AIN Service Pattern Profiles 140Creating AIN Trigger Profiles 147Deleting AIN Trigger Profiles 151Deleting Service Profiles 153Provisioning AIN 139, 155

aissp 686, 704alarm history

querying 54alarmHistory 54alarms

editing 53provisioning 53querying 54, 56querying definitions 55

Allowed list 415allowNX64 297alternate routing schedules

querying 81ANI Replacement 347announcements

querying 94Application Domain Object 29applying

patch 660applying patch 660applyPatch 660assign

call forwarding fixed 567assignCff 567assignSubVM 560AT 525attributes

querying 86querying all 85

audioloading on the switch 602unloading from the switch 603

auditTimers 35

Page 782: 1012 Command Line Interface

774 Index T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

autoRestartOnBoot 297autoRestartOnLinkBounce 297available facility

quereying 68

B

backwardProgressIndication 301bChannelAvailabilityProcedure 298BearerGroup 163Bearergroup

bearerGrpKey 371, 441, 449beingPorted

BEING_PORTED 538BEING_PORTED_OUT 538NOT_BEING_PORTED 538

bitsConfig 734, 735BLI 339blockCPN 300blocking 640

circuits 648links 640

blockLink 640BLV 339busy 629

C

CAC_FROM_CARRIER 389CALEA

addLea 181addLeaCase 187addLeaSpan 183addVoiceChnl 189changePenPW 179createPenGrp 176deletePenGrp 177order of provisioning 175purgePenLog 195queryLea 131queryLeaCase 132queryPenCommands 127queryPenData 130queryPenGrp 128queryPenLog 133queryPenTarget 129removeLea 182removeLeaCase 188removeLeaSpan 184removeVoiceChnl 190resizePenLog 195

setCaseAttr 194setLeaAttr 186setPenAttr 178setPenGroupTimer 180startCaseMonitor 192startLeaMonitor 185startPenMonitor 191stopCaseMonitor 193stopLeaMonitor 185stopPenMonitor 191

CALL 36Call Content (CC) Surveillance 174Call Data (CD) Surveillance 174call forwarding 553call forwarding block

querying 554call forwarding busy

activating 563deactivating 563

call forwarding don’t answeractivating 564deactivating 564

call forwarding fixedactivating 565assigning 567deactivating 566querying 555removing 567

call forwarding variableactivating 562deactivating 562querying 553

CALL_BACK 533CALL_FORWARD_BUSY 533CALL_FORWARD_FIXED 534CALL_FORWARD_LOCAL 534CALL_FORWARD_NOANS 534CALL_FORWARDING 533CALL_REJECT 534CALL_RETURN 534CALL_TRANSFER 534CALL_WAITING 534CALL_WAITING_CALLER_ID 534CALLER_ID 533CALLER_ID_BLOCK 533CALLER_ID_UNBLOCK 533calling name TCAP

querying 654CALLING_NAME 533CALLING_NAME_QUERY_REQUIRED 389callingNameDisplay 296calls

Page 783: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Index 775990-1012-001

logging active 670querying active 66querying history 67resetting

simulated calls on a line 38resetting history 670simulating 739, 740starting simulated 39stopping simulated 40stopping simulated calls on a line 38

cancelRDTCmd 650card

description 29card number 41card type 41CardConfiguration 163, 165cards

checking connections 604querying status 77

carrier access codesquerying 94

Carriers 196carriers

querying 208CAS

911 136E911 136

CAS OptionsnetworkServices 248numOfDIDDigits 247

CAS trunk groups 235CAS trunks

modifying protocols 222Case Monitoring 175CDRs

querying status 89viewing amount in buffer 91

changeAlarmDefAttr 53changePenPW 179Channel Associated Signaling trunk groups 235ChargeDelay 244, 332chargingOffice 336checking

card connections 604circuit continuity check

generating 643circuitBlock 648circuitCCR 643circuitGBlock 644circuitGReset 644circuitGUnblock 646circuitQuery 647

circuitReset 646circuits

blocking 648querying 647resetting 646resetting (group) 644testing 648unblocking 648unblocking (group) 646

circuitTest 648circuitUnblock 648Clear Channel trunk groups 252clearSdList 573cmdfileEchoOff 36cmdfileEchoOn 36, 37codec lists

adding 425creating 425querying 99

CodecProfile 427CodecProfileList 425configuring

simulated lines 37connecting

simulated cards 42simulated spans 42

connectionschecking card 604querying 76

contiguousNX6 297continuityProcedure

SS7 OptionscontinuityProcedure 338

continuityTestFrequency 336Controlled Slip Second 671, 686, 690, 704COT

generating 643country codes

deleting 396removing 396

craft connectionsquerying 78

create sipVMS 593createHostIPAddr 429createLink 480createLinkSet 478createPenGrp 176createPretranslation 223createProfile 231createRDT 351createSS7Network 475createSS7Route 482

Page 784: 1012 Command Line Interface

776 Index T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

creatingcodec lists 425hosts 429RDTs 351SCCP node 484SS7 link set 478SS7 links 480SS7 networks 475SS7 routes 482

Creating Escape Code Pattern Profiles 144, 157CriticalDigitTimeout 391cs_config 37cs_dispstats 38cs_finish 38cs_reset 38cs_settimer 39cs_start 39cs_stop 40CSSP 671, 686, 690, 704cssp 686, 704Ctrl + D 46current processes

querying 605CUSTOM_REPLACE_AIN 389cvl 686, 704cvp 686, 704

D

DA_ONLY 271, 305, 322, 343database

querying by manager 83saving 599

database masterquerying 83

databasesremoving 599

dbFlash 599dbFlashSize 600d-channels

querying 113, 114deactivateCfd 564deactivateCff 566deactivateLinkSet 639deactivateSCF 568deactivateSubVM 561deactivating

call forwarding busy 563call forwarding don’t answer 564call forwarding fixed 566call forwarding variable 562

deactiveCfb 563deactiveCfv 562decommission 52defaultDN 318delCountryCodes 396deleteLink 481deleteLinkset 479deleteNode 477deletePCMap 501deletePenGrp 177deletePretranslation 230deleteSdInfo 572deleteSS7Network 475, 476deleteSS7Route 483deleting

country codes 396international codes 395, 396point code mapping 501SCCPNode 487SS7 link set 479SS7 links 481SS7 networks 475, 476SS7 node 477SS7 routes 483tasks 599

Deleting Escape Code Pattern Profiles 144Denied list 415deprovisioning

RDT lines 354deprovisionRD 354devices

contents 603dial 40Digital Signal Processor

description 29disable 630displaySubBusGrps 93dispLocTS 40

queryinglocked lines 631

dispMidTS 41DS1

setting loopback 652DS1 lines

syncing 356DS3 29DSP

description 29dstConfig 726, 727dumpTDM 41

Page 785: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Index 777990-1012-001

E

E911 over SS7 136Process 136

EAS 408echoing

starting script 36, 37stopping script 36

editingalarms 53

enable 630ENABLE_822_SAC 389ENABLE_833_SAC 389ENABLE_844_SAC 389ENABLE_855_SAC 389ENABLE_866_SAC 389ENABLE_877_SAC 389enableEvent 57enabling

events 57ENHANCED_CF_NOANS 535env 41environment 41EOC

activating 357EOC and TMC 650

inhibiting 649querying 113reconnecting 651releasing 45resyncing 651uninhibiting 649

Equipment 213esap 686, 704esbp 686, 704esl 686, 704esp 686, 704event log

purging 58querying 60setting size 58stopping 59

eventLogSize 58events

enabling 57managing 57posting 58purging event log 58querying event log 60setting log size 58

ExceptionRecoveryTime 391Extended Area Service 408

F

facilityquerying 69

FAIL_UNKNOWN_DIGIT_PATTERN 389fault manager

querying 76setting to automatic 632setting to manual 632

fc 686, 704FEI

setting IP address 422FEI options

setting 424fgc911MakeFirstSecond 248FirstDigitTimeout 391flash memory size

setting 600FlashDuration 245FlashInterval 244forceDbMaster 606ForwardDisconnectTime 244FTRS

addPretranslation 224createPretranslation 223createProfile 231deletePretranslation 230queryPretransByDigitPtn 121queryPretranslation 120removePretranslation 229

G

generatingcircuit continuity check 643COT 643

getMaxEventTransmit 57getPMCurrent 700getPMInterval 701getPMStatus 699getPMTCA 703getSLSMap 106glareControl 247, 336GR-303 649GR-303 Interfaces trunk groups 258GuardTime 244, 332

H

HDLCdescription 29

Page 786: 1012 Command Line Interface

778 Index T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

Hexadecimallines 743

hexadecimal 741High-level Data Link Control

description 29hosts

adding 429creating 429

hu 42Hunt Groups

Circular Hunting 273Regular hunting 273Uniform Call Distribution 273

Hunt groups 273hunt groups

querying 73HyperTerminal 768

I

implicitChannelId 299INBOUND_ANI_REQUIRED 389inhibiting

EOC and TMC 649links 641

inhibitlink 641inhibitPath 649InterDigitTimeout 391Interexchange Carrier 525Interface trunk groups 258INTERLATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC

389international codes

deleting 395, 396removing 396

INTERNATIONAL_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC 389

INTRALATA_RESTRICTIONS_APPLY_TO_CAC389

IP trunk groups 307ipConfig 605IXC 525

K

keepIncoming7dNOA 340

L

L2T1_period 503L2T2_period 503

L2T3_period 503L2T4e_period 503L2T4n_period 503L2T5_period 503L2T6_period 503L2T7_period 503L2Tie_period 503L2Tin_period 503L2TX_abatement 507L2TX_discard 508L2TX_onset 506L3T1_period 503L3T10_period 504L3T12_period 504L3T13_period 504L3T14_period 504L3T15_period 504L3T16_period 504L3T17_period 504L3T19_period 504L3T2_period 503L3T20_period 504L3T21_period 504L3T22_period 504L3T23_period 504L3T24_period 504L3T25_period 504L3T26_period 504L3T27_period 504L3T28_period 505L3T29_period 505L3T3_period 504L3T31_period 505L3T33_period 505L3T34_period 505L3T4_period 504L3T5_period 504L3T6_period 504L3T7_period 504L3T8_period 504LCFO_Duration 246LEA Monitoring 175LEDs

querying 78line

description 29Line Numbering

hexadecimal 743lines

modifying protocols 222removing from service 628restoring to service 628

Page 787: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Index 779990-1012-001

link setsactivating 639

links 640inhibiting 641

linkSetStatus 107linkSpan 42linkStatus

queryingSS7 links 107

LNP Route List 517loadAudio 602loading

scripts 31loading, patch 659loadPatchArchive 659Local Access

HyperTerminal 768Procomm Plus 760Terra Term Professional 752

locked linesquerying 631

locked trunks 631logActiveCalls 670logging

active calls 670login 46LongDurationCdrTimeout 391loopback

setting DS1s 652lossl 686, 704ls 603

M

managingevents 57

manualClear 52MaxWinkDuration 245mbusConfig 722media stream parameters 431MediaParam 431memberOrigination 276MGCP 358MGCP trunk groups 359MinFlashHookTime 244MinWinkDuration 245modifying

CAS trunk protocols 222line protocols 222

modifyPretranslation 229modifyProtocol 222

MOPCsetting 499

mplicitInterfaceIdi 301multiple point codes

setting 499

N

NANP Route List 519Network Gateway Endpoint 459networkServices 248, 339

PRI OptionsnetworkServices 297

SS7 OptionssendACTNS 340TNS 339Transit Network Selection 339

NO_DA 271, 305, 322, 343NO_DA_INTERLATA 271, 305, 322, 343NO_DA_INTRALATA 271, 305, 322, 343NO_INBOUND_PAYSTATION 343NO_INBOUND_WITHOUT_ANI 305, 322, 343NO_INTERLATA 322, 343NO_INTERNATIONAL 271, 322, 343NO_INTRALATA 271, 305, 322, 343NO_OS_INTERLATA 271, 305, 322, 343NO_OS_INTERNATIONAL 271, 305, 322, 343NO_OS_INTRALATA 271, 305, 322, 343NO_OSDIALED 271, 305, 322, 343NO_OSSTATION 271, 305, 322, 343nodeStatus 108numOfDIDDigits 247, 299

O

Object Identifierdescription 30

off-hook 43OffHookDigMax 245OffHookDigMin 245office parameters

querying 388Office Parms

country codes 396OSS Information Digits 393, 395

oh 43OID 30OIDs

description 30OLIRequired 338on-hook 42

Page 788: 1012 Command Line Interface

780 Index T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

OnHookDigMax 245OnHookDigMin 245Open Manger Telnet 767originalNumberOption 301OS_ONLY 271, 305, 322, 343Outgoing Signal Customization Provisioning

Process 348Outgoing Signaling Customization 530outPulseAsDialed 298outpulseAsDialed 247

P

PartialCdrTimeout 391passwd 47password 47patch

applying 660querying 125, 126unapply 661unloading 662

patch, loading 659PCAC_FROM_CARRIER 389pcall 43, 739, 740PEED_DIAL8 536Peg Counts 708Pen Monitoring 175PIC2_REQUIRED_FOR_INTRALATA 389ping 604pingT1 44point code mapping

deleting 501removing 501setting 500

Point Codes 470postEvent 58posting

events 58PREFIX_RATE_CENTER_OVERRIDES_SUBSCRI

BER_RATE_CENTER 389prefixes

querying 407PreTransKey 224, 230PRI 297PRI Options

allowNX64 297autoRestartOnBoot 297backwardProgressIndication 301bChannelAvailabilityProcedure 298blockCPN 300callingNameDisplay 296

contiguousNX6 297implicitChannelId 299mplicitInterfaceIdi 301numOfDIDDigits 299originalNumberOption 301outPulseAsDialed 298redirectingNumberOption 299rejectOption 296releaseCompleteAtSetup 300releaseOption 296releaseTreatment 301responseToStatusEnquiry 296screenDN 300sendCalledNumberAsPBX 298sendCarrierId 297sendChargeNumber 300sendCPN 300sendLocalCallasSubscriber 301statusEnqOption 269, 296toneOption 296transferSubadressAllowOption 296useImplicitChannelIdForPPS 299

PRI trunk groups 286Primary Rate Interface trunk groups 286Priority Call 415PRIORITY_CALL 535Process

911 over CAS 136E911 over SS7 136

Procomm Plus 760protectionSwitch 650provisioning

RDT lines 353provisioning alarms 53provisionRDTLine 353ps 605Pseudo ANI 345Pseudo Carrier Access Code 345Pseudo Carrier Selection Information 345purgeEventLog 58purgePenLog 195

Q

query available facility 68query Carrier 208query CfvInfo 553query facility 69query OfficeParms 388query Prefix 407query ScfInfo 553

Page 789: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Index 781990-1012-001

query sipVMS 594query SMDIParms 590query921Status 113queryActiveCalls 66queryAlarmDef 55queryAlarms 56queryAttrDefClass 86queryAttrDefs 85queryAudio 94queryCAC 94queryCallHist 67queryCard 167queryCardStatus 77queryCdrStatus 89queryCfbInfo 554queryCfdInfo 554, 555queryCIC 109queryConnections 76queryCounter 719queryCounterDef 717queryCounterDefs 714queryCounters 718queryDb 83queryDbKeys 84queryDbMaster 83queryDchStatus 114queryDS1s 113queryEventLog 60queryEventRegs 61queryFaultStatus 76queryGrp 73queryIG 87querying 553, 631

active calls 66active simulated timers 35alarm definitions 55alarm history 54alarms 54, 56all attributes 85alternate routing schedules 81announcements 94attributes 86available facility 68call forwarding block 554call forwarding do not answer

querying 554call forwarding fixed 555call forwarding variable 553call history 67calling name TCAP 654card status 77carrier access codes 94

carriers 208CDR status 89circuits 647codec lists 99connections 76craft connections 78current processes 605database by manager 83database master 83d-channels 113, 114EOC and TMC 113event log 60facility 69fault manager 76hunt groups 73LEDs 78office parameters 388patch 125, 126prefixes 407Rate Centers 414RDT classes 115RDT commands 119RDT DS1s 113RDT interface group 87RDT lines 116RDT objects 117SAC AIN 654SAC IN 655SCCP nodes 486SCCP subsystem 486selective call forwarding 553setting wait time 76simulated line statistics 38SIP endpoints 100, 101, 102SM 75spans 43SS7 counters 714, 717, 718, 719SS7 link sets 107SS7 link timers 110SS7 network timers 111SS7 networks 108SS7 node 108SS7 node timers 111SS7 point code’s CICs 109SS7 route timers 112SS7 Routes 105SS7 signaling links 106status 98substitution 92system manager 75Trunk Groups 73voice mail connections 590

Page 790: 1012 Command Line Interface

782 Index T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

queryIPTrunkReservation 99queryLea 131queryLeaCase 132queryLinkTimers 110queryListByCodecProfile 99queryModifiedAttrs 87queryNodeTimers 111queryNWTimers 111queryPatch 125queryPenCommands 127queryPenData 130queryPenGrp 128queryPenLog 133queryPenTarget 129queryPretransByDigitPtn 121queryPretranslation 120queryRDTClasses 115queryRDTLines 116queryRDTObject 117queryRouteTimers 112queryRouting 122querySchedule 81queryShelfLEDs 78querySipEndpoint 101querySipEndpointByAddr 102querySipEndpointByName 100querySpans 43querySubBus 92querySubCRVs 118querySubstitution 92querySysMgr 75

R

Rate Center 414Rate Centers 410RDT classes

querying 115RDT commands

querying 119RDT DS1s

querying 113RDT interface group

querying 87RDT lines

deprovisioning 354provisioning 353querying 116removing 355restoring 355syncing 356

RDT objectsquerying 117

RDTsadding 351creating 351reprovisioning 352setting line and trunk timers 221

reconnectingEOC and TMC 651

redirectingNumberOption 299regMaintConsole 631rejectOption 296release921 45releaseCompleteAtSetup 300releaseOption 296, 340releaseTreatment 301releasing

EOC and TMC 45remActCFSecurityCode 535Remote Access

Open Manger Telnet 767Procomm Plus 763Terra Term Professional 757

Remote Call ForwardingActivation 535

REMOTE_CALL_FWD_ACTIVATION 535remove 628Remove user 49removeCff 567removeLea 182removeLeaCase 188removeLeaSpan 184removePretranslation 229removeRDTLine 355removeSCF 569removeSdListShare 575removeTask 599removeVoiceChnl 190removing

call forwarding fixed 567country codes 396databases 599international codes 396line from service 628point code mapping 501RDT lines 355span from service 628SS7 link set 479SS7 links 481SS7 networks 475, 476SS7 node 477SS7 routes 483

Page 791: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Index 783990-1012-001

tasks 599trunk from service 628

reprovisioningRDTs 352

reprovisionRDT 352resetCallHist 670resetCRVs 653resetPMCurrent 706resetPMIntervals 705resetPMSummary 707resetting

circuits 646circuits (group) 644simulated calls on a line 38

resizePenLog 195responseToStatusEnquiry 296restarting SS7 network 638restartPRI 627restore 628restoreDb 606restoreRTDLine 355restoring

line to service 628RDT lines 355span to service 628trunk to service 628

resync921 651resyncing

EOC and TMC 651Revertive switchback 584REVERTIVE_CALL 535rmFlash 599, 601rmuser 49ROHToneDuration 391Route Lists

LNP 517NANP 519Tandem ANI 521Tandem Carrier 523tandem TG 525

ROUTE_ZERO_MINUS_TO_PIC2 389routeAdvance 340routeOnRcvdCarrier 249Routing Translations Verification (RoVer) 612rover 612rrun 44RTP port base

setting 423run 44running

scripts 44scripts remotely 44

S

SAC AINquerying 654

SAC INquerying 655

sasp 686, 704saving

database 599SCCP node

creating 484SCCP nodes

querying 486SCCP subsystem

querying 486SCCPNode 484, 486, 487SCCPSubsys 486scheduling

tasks 597, 599Screen Lists

allowed list 415denied list 415Priority Call 415Selective Call Acceptance 415Selective Call Forwarding 415Selective Call Rejection 415

screenDN 300scripts 31

loading 31running 44running remotely 44starting echoing 36, 37stopping echoing 36

Securityadduser 48login 46passwd 47rmuser 49users 49whoami 48

Security CodeRemote Call Forwarding

Activation 535sefs 686, 704Selective Call Acceptance 415Selective Call Forwarding 415Selective Call Rejection 415SELECTIVE_CALL_ACCEPTANCE 535SELECTIVE_CALL_FORWARDING 536send00asOLI 340sendACTNS

NEVER 340

Page 792: 1012 Command Line Interface

784 Index T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

SAC_CARRIER_0110 340STANDARD 340

sendCalledNumberAsPBX 298sendCallingName 337sendCallingNumber 337sendCallProgress 338sendCarrierId 297

SS7 OptionssendCarrierId 337

sendChargeNumber 300, 337sendCPN 300sendGenericDigits 338sendHopCounter 338sendImmediateVMWI 596sendJurisdictionInformation 337sendLocalCallasSubscriber 301sendTNS

ALWAYS 339CARRIER_0110 339CARRIER_NOT_0110 339NEVER 339STANDARD 339

Service Profile 152sesl 686, 704sesp 686, 704setAutoMode 632setCaseAttr 194setEOCTasks 357setFeifIPAddr 422setFeifOptions 424setL3MOPC 499setLeaAttr 186setLineTimer 221setLoopbackMode 652setManualMode 632setMOPC 499setPCMap 500setPenAttr 178setPenGroupTimer 180setPMDisplayOff 697setPMDisplayOn 697setPMTime 692setQueryWait 76setRtpPortBase 423setSubCOS 576setSubRestrict 576setSubVoiceMailIndicator 595setTCA15 694setTCA24 695setTCADefaults 704setting

event log size 58

fault manager to automatic 632fault manager to manual 632FEI IP address 422FEI options 424flash memory size 600link timers for SLTCT1 502MOPC 499multiple point codes 499point code mapping 500RTP port base 423subscriber restrictions 576subscriber services 576timers on a RDT trunks 221timers on RDT lines 221

setting loopbackDS1 652

shareSdList 574shelf number 41shelf_inv 78showCDR 91Signaling System 7 trunk groups 324simulated cards

connecting 42simulated line statistics

querying 38simulated spans

connecting 42simulating 42, 43SIP Endpoints

Netwowrk Gateway 459Subscriber Access Gateway 441

SIP endpointsquerying 100, 101, 102

sipAllowToUseTopVia 385sipVMS 594skipMinDigitsRestriction 248sleep 45SLIC driver 45slicd 45SLTCT1

setting link timers 502SLTCT1_period 502SLTCT2_period 502SM

querying 75span

description 29transmit signal

signaltransmit on span 634

spans

Page 793: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Index 785990-1012-001

querying 43removing from service 628

spanStatus 81SPEED_DIAL30 536SpeedDialTimeout 391SS7

911 136E911 136

SS7 countersquerying 714, 717, 718, 719

SS7 link setadding 478creating 478deleting 479removing 479

SS7 link setsquerying 107

SS7 link timersquerying 110

SS7 linksadding 480creating 480deleting 481querying 107removing 481

SS7 network timersquerying 111

SS7 networksadding 475creating 475deleting 475, 476querying 108removing 475, 476

SS7 node 477deleting 477querying 108removing 477

SS7 node timersquerying 111

SS7 OptionschargingOffice 336continuityTestFrequency 336glareControl 336OLIRequired 338sendCallingName 337sendCallingNumber 337sendCallProgress 338sendChargeNumber 337sendGenericDigits 338sendJurisdictionInformation 337terminationType 338

SS7 point code’s CICs

querying 109SS7 route timers

querying 112SS7 routes

adding 482creating 482deleting 483removing 483

SS7 signaling linksquerying 106

SS7 Trunk Groups 324SS7NetworkStatus 108SS7Restart

SS7 networkrestarting 638

SS7RouteStatus 105startCaseMonitor 192starting

script echoing 36, 37simulated calls 39simulated SLIC driver 45simulated TDM controller 45

starting simulated 45startLeaMonitor 185startPenMonitor 191startPM 698startTCA15 695startTCA24 696status 80, 98statusEnqOption 269, 296statusFacility 80stopCaseMonitor 193stopEventLog 59stopLeaMonitor 185stopPenMonitor 191stopping

event log 59script echoing 36simulated calls 40simulated calls on a line 38

stopPM 698stopTCA15 696stopTCA24 697Subscriber Access Gateway Endpoint 441Subscribers 530subscribers

assigning voice mail 560deactivating voice mail 561setting restrictions 576setting services 576

substitutionquerying 92

Page 794: 1012 Command Line Interface

786 Index T7000 Command Line Interface Manual990-1012-001

suppressTCA15 693Surveillance

call content 174call data 174

swact 626switchback 626Switchback, revertive 584switching

EOC and TMC 650switching between 650switchover 626syncDS1Line 356syncing

DS1 lines 356RDT lines 356

syncRDTLine 356sysApplyPatch 660sysLoadPatchArchive 659sysQueryPatch 126sysStatus 736system manager

querying 75sysUnapplyPatch 661sysUnloadPatch 662

T

T1 332T12 333T13 333T14 333T15 333T16 333T17 333T18 333T19 333T20 334T21 334T22 334T23 334T24 334T25 334T26 334T27 334T28 334T34 335T5 332T6 332T7 332T8 332TACC 335

Tandem ANI Route List 521Tandem Carrier 523Tandem Carrier Route List 523Tandem TG Route List 525tasks

adding 597deleting 599removing 599scheduling 597, 599

TCAP ServiceGlobal Title Translation routing 488Point Code + Subsystem routing 492

TCAP service 496destroying 496

TCAPServiceGTT 488TCAPServicePCSSN 492TCCR 335TCGB 335TCRA/SS7 Timers 335TCVT 335TDM

description 29TDM connections

viewing simulated 41TDM controller

starting simulated 45tdmd 45TELEMARKETER_SCREENING 536terminationType 338TerminatorDisconnectDelay 245TermScanningDuration 391Terra Term Professiona 752test 633testCNameQuery 654testing

circuits 648testLEDs 737testSacAinQuery 654testSacInQuery 655TGRS 335THGA 335THREE_WAY 536Threshold15Min 672Threshold24Hour 672Time Division Multiplex

description 29timers

querying active simulated 35toneOption 296traceCalledPty 611traceCallingPty 611traceCPStates 610

Page 795: 1012 Command Line Interface

T7000 Command Line Interface Manual Index 787990-1012-001

transferSubadressAllowOption 296Trunk

description 29Trunk Groups

querying 73restartPRI 627

Trunk groupsChannel Associated Signaling (CAS) 235Clear Channel 252GR-303 258IP 307MGCP 359Primary Rate Interface (PRI) 286Signaling System 7 (SS7) 324SS7 324

trunksremoving from service 628restoring to service 628

txSpanSignaltransmit

signal on span 634

U

unapplypatch 661

unapplyPatch 661unblocking 640

circuits 648circuits (group) 646links 640

unblockLink 640unbusy 629uninhibiting

EOC and TMC 649uninhibitPath 649unloadAudio 603unloading

patch 662unloadPatch 662unsuppressTCA15 693Usage Intervals 708usap 686, 704USE_AIN_CALLING_NAME 390useANIDNIS 248useImplicitChannelIdForPPS 299User

adding 48User list 49User name 48users 49using 31, 741Using dryISE 33Using Hexadecimal 741utime 602

V

viewingCDRs in buffer 91current simulated TDM connections 41viewing 31

viewRDTCmds 119VMWIOSITimeout 391voice mail

assigning to subscribers 560querying connections 590removing from subscribers 561

W

WARM_LINE 536whoami 48WinkDuration 245